The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB14-0042 B14-0043 B14-0044 B14-0045 Homes Specifications_2 LION ' S RIDGE APARTMENT HOMES 1280 North Frontage Road Vail, Colorado S ecifications p Gorman & Company, Inc. March 14, 2014 �� 0 �, � � v CNAISFiqN �O ?�` A�lARSHALL * r,�� :AaC.004p3184 U� c��s� �� D qRG Y�t�µ �y<zaj�/ Gorman&Company,Inc.200 North Main Street Oregon,Wisconsin 53575 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 0102- PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Project Name: Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes, located at 1280 North Frontage Road,Vail,C0. B. Gorman &Company, Inc. Project Number: 14LION-00-01. C. The Owner, hereinafter referred to as Owner: Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes, LLC D. Project Manager: Rob Padley Address: 200 N. Main Street City,State,Zip: Oregon,WI 53575 Phone/Fax: 608-320-5330 E-mail: rpadley@gormanusa.com E. Owner's Project Architect: Patrick Patrello,Architect Address: 200 N. Main Street. City,State,Zip: Oregon,WI 53575. Phone/Fax: 608-835-5534/608-835-3344. E-mail: ppatrello@gormanusa.com. 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Summary Project Description: The project is a re-development of 5.24 acres of the existing Timber Ridge Apartments(East Side). 1.03 PROJECT CONSULTANTS Design Architect: Berglund Architects LLC P.O. Box 2378 Edwards, CO 81632 Civil: Alpine Engineering, Inc. P.O. Box 97 Edwards, CO 81632 Landscape: Dennis Anderson Assoc., Inc. P.O. Box 1387 Edwards, CO 81632 Structural: Martin/Martin, Inc.Consulting Engineers 225 Main Steet, Unit C101 Edwards, CO 81632 MEP: Beaudin Ganze Consulting Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT INFORMATION 00 0102-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 222 Chapel Place,Suite AC-201 P.O. Box 9650 Avon, CO 81620 SURVEYOR: Gore Range Surveying LLC P.O. Box 15 Avon, CO 81620 CONSTRUCTION CONSULTANT: RA Nelson 51 Eagle Road#2 Avon, CO 81620 1.04 PROCUREMENT TIMETABLE A. Approximate Construction scheduled to begin May 1, 2014 and ending August 2015. END OF SECTION 00 01 02 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT INFORMATION 00 0102-2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00-PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 02 PROJECT INFORMATION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 3100 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION • Soils Analysis(Geotechnical) Report • Bolder Retaining Wall Design • Property Management Waste and Recycling Plan • Roof Snow Guard Plan • Structural Calculations • Life Safety Report 00 4100 BID FORM 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION Ol-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014216 DEFINITIONS 0142 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 61 16 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND(VOC)CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 00 WARRANTY PROCEDURES DIVISION 02-EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4100 DEMOLITION 02 41 13 SITE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 35 11 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 54 00 CAST UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 04-MASONRY 04 20 10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 DIVISION 05-METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 72 10 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS DIVISION 06-WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 06 05 73 WOOD TREATMENT 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 15 10 WOOD-POLYMER COMPOSITE DECKING 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 17 53 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 19 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 26 BLOWN INSULATION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 46 46 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 23 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING DIVISION 08-OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 16 13 FIBERGLASS DOORS 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 54 00 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 83 00 MIRRORS DIVISION 09-FINISHES 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 65 19 RESILIENTTILE FLOORING 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10 14 24 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 56 10 STORAGE SHELVING DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT 113100 RESIDENTIALAPPLIANCES DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS 12 93 13 BICYCLE RACKS DIVISION 22-PLUMBING 22 11 13 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 13 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 34 00 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 4100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23-HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC) 23 00 10 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 23 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 18 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 21 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 OS 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPIN6 AND EQUIPMENT 23 OS 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 11 MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 23 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 54 00 FURNACES 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 26 00 10 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 OS 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 13 ELECTRICITY METERING 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 80 10 ELECTRIC SNOWMELT AND GUTTER MELT SYSTEMS DIVISION 27-COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 10 COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING DIVISION 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK 3100 00 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 311413.23 TOPSOIL 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL DIVISION 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 01 30 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 11 23 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 32 12 16.13 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.34 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 32 13 13.35 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 32 13 13.36 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 84 23 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 90 00 PLANTING 32 92 00 HYDROSEEDING DIVISION 33-UTILITIES 33 00 00 ELECTRIC,COMMUNICATION/CONDUITD/GAS SYSTEM 33 11 16 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 31 13 SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 01 15 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS GENERAL G101 PROJECT COVER G102 PROJECT INFORMATION G103 BUILDING SYSTEMS SURVEY/ MAPPING 1 OF 5 ALTA SURVEY 2 OF 5 ALTA SURVEY 3 OF 5 ALTA SURVEY 4 OF 5 ALTA SURVEY 5 OF 5 ALTA SURVEY SITE AS101 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN AS102 MAINT. BLDG & DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE AS103 EXTERIOR STAIR& MONUMENT SIGNAGE CIVIL C1.00 CIVIL COVER SHEET C1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN C1.02 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN C1.03 SITE PLAN C1.04 GEOMETRIC LAYOUT AND SIGNAGE PLAN C1.05 GEOMETRIC LAYOUT AND SIGNAGE PLAN C2.01 GRADING PLAN C2.02 GRADING PLAN C2.03 SOIL NAIL WALL GEOMETRIC PLAN & PROFILE C2.04 BUILDING SECTIONS C2.05 BUILDING SECTIONS C3.01 STORM SEWER PLAN C3.02 STORM SEWER PLAN C3.03 STORM SEWER PROFILES Job No. 14LION-00-01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C3.04 STORM SEWER PROFILES C4.01 UTILITY PLAN C4.02 UTILITY PLAN C4.03 UTILITY PROFILES C5.01 EROSION CONTROL PLAN C6.01 DETAILS C6.02 DETAILS C6.03 DETAILS C6.04 DETAILS C6.05 DETAILS LANDSCAPE L-1 LANDSCAPE COVER SHEET L-2 BLDG. 1 LANDSCAPE PLAN L-3 BLDG. 2 LANDSCAPE PLAN L-4 BLDG. 3 LANDSCAPE PLAN L-5 BLDG.4 LANDSCAPE PLAN L-6 SITE LIGHTING PLAN STRUCTURAL 5-001 GENRAL NOTES 5-002 GENRAL NOTES 5-003 QUALITY ASSURANCE NOTES 5-110 BLDG 1 FOUNDATION PLAN 5-111 BLDG 1 F2 PLAN 5-112 BLDG 1 F3 PLAN 5-113 BLDG 1 ROOF PLAN 5-120 BLDG 2 FOUNDATION PLAN 5-121 BLDG 2 F2 PLANS 5-122 BLDG 2 F3 PLANS 5-123 BLDG 2 ROOF PLAN 5-130 BLDG 3 FOUNDATION PLAN 5-131 BLDG 3 F2 PLAN 5-132 BLDG 3 F3 PLAN Job No. 14LION-00-01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 5-133 BLDG 3 ROOF PLAN 5-140 BLDG 4 FOUNDATION PLAN 5-141 BLDG 4 F2 PLAN 5-142 BLDG 4 F3 PLAN 5-143 BLDG 4 ROOF PLAN 5-150 ENTRY PARTIAL PLANS 5-151 ENTRY ELEVATION 5-152 DECK PARTIAL PLANS 5-161 MAINT BLDG & DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE 5-162 EXTERIOR STAIR& MONUMENT SIGNAGE 5-300 CONCRETE DETAILS 5-301 CONCRETE DETAILS 5-302 FOUNDATION DETAILS 5-303 FOUNDATION DETAILS 5-400 TYP MASONRY DETAILS 5-600 TYPICAL WOOD FRAMING DETAILS 5-601 TYPICAL WOOD FRAMING DETAILS 5-602 TYPICAL WOOD FRAMING DETAILS 5-610 TYPICAL FLOOR DETAILS 5-611 TYPICAL FLOOR DETAILS 5-620 TYPICAL ROOF DETAILS 5-621 ROOF DETAILS 5-622 ROOF DETAILS 5-623 ROOF DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL A111 BLDG 1 F1 & F2 PLANS A112 BLDG 1 F3 & ROOF PLANS A113 BLDG 1 ELEVATIONS A114 BUILDING SECTIONS A121 BLDG 2 F1 & F2 PLANS A122 BLDG 2 F3 & ROOF PLANS A123 BLDG 2 ELEVATIONS A124 BLDG 2 BUILDING SECTIONS Job No. 14LION-00-01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 A131 BLDG 3 F1 & F2 PLANS A132 BLDG 3 F3 & ROOF PLANS A133 BLDG 3 ELEVATIONS A134 BLDG 3 BUILDING SECTIONS A141 BLDG 4 F1 & F2 PLANS A142 BLDG 4 F3 & ROOF PLANS A143 BLDG 4 ELEVATIONS A144 BLDG 4 BUILDING SECTIONS A201 WINDOW ELEVATIONS&SCHEDULE A301 WALL SECTIONS A401 ENLARGED SCALE UNIT PLANS A402 ENLARGED SCALE UNIT PLANS A403 ENLARGED SCALE STAIR PLANS A501 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A502 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A503 ACCESSIBILITY NOTES& DETAILS A504 ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS A601 SCHEDULES-COMMON AREA DOORS A602 SCHEDULES-ROOM FINISHES MECHANICAL M000 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET M001 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M100 SITE MECHANICAL PLAN M111 BLDG 1- F1 & F2 MECHANICAL PLANS M112 BLDG 1 F3& ROOF MECHANICAL PLANS M121 BLDG 2 F1 & F2 MECHANICAL PLANS M122 BLDG 2 F3& ROOF MECHANICAL PLANS M131 BLDG 3 F1 & F2 MECHANICAL PLANS M132 BLDG 3 F3& ROOF MECHANICAL PLANS M141 BLDG 4 F1 & F2 MECHANICAL PLANS M142 BLDG 4 F3& ROOF MECHANICAL PLANS M401 UNIT MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLAN M402 UNIT MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLAN Job No. 14LION-00-01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 M501 MECHANICAL DIAGRAMS M502 MECHANICAL DIAGRAMS M601 W&V ISOMETRICS M602 W&V ISOMETRICS ELECTRICAL E000 ELECTRICAL COVER SHEET E001 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E100 SITE ELECTRICAL PLAN E111 BLDG A F1 & F2 ELECTRICAL PLANS E112 BLDG A F3 & ROOF ELECTRICAL PLANS E121 BLDG B F1 & F2 ELECTRICAL PLANS E122 BLDG B F3& ROOF ELECTRICAL PLANS E131 BLDG C F1 & F2 ELECTRICAL PLANS E132 BLDG C F3 & ROOF ELECTRICAL PLANS E141 BLDG D F1 & F2 ELECTRICAL PLANS E142 BLDG D F3 & ROOF ELECTRICAL PLANS E401 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM E402 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM E501 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E502 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS E503 ELECTRICAL LOAD CALCS/SCHEDULES E504 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES E601 FIRE ALARM &COMM. DIAGRAMS END OF SECTION 00 01 15 Job No. 14LION-00-01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 11 13 -ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS FROM: 1.01 The Owner(hereinafter referred to as Owner): Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes, LLC 200 North Main Street Oregon,WI 53575 1.02 DATE: March 17,2014 1.03 TO: POTENTIAL BIDDERS A. Your firm is invited to submit an offer under seal to Owner for construction of a building located at 1280 North Frontage Road,Vail, CO 81657 before 3 pm central time on the April 14, 2014,for the following project: Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes END OF SECTION 00 11 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1:GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Subcontract Agreement B. Drawings,dated: March 14,2014 C. Architect's Specification Manual,dated: March 14, 2014 1.02 CONDITIONS OF BID A. Sub-Contractor(s) must be prepared to start work within 10 calendar days after signing contract. B. Bids will be due by 3:00 p.m., Monday,April 14, 2014,at the office of the General Contractor. C. Bids may be mailed,emailed or faxed to the General Contractor. Mailing Address: Gorman &Company, Inc. Attn:Stacy Evert 200 N. Main Street Oregon,WI 53575 Email address: severt@gormanusa.com Phone: 608-835-7099 Fax number:608-835-3344 D. Bid may not be withdrawn for 60 days from the bid due date. 1.03 INTERPRETATIONS OF BID DOCUMENTS: A. Requests for interpretations of the Drawings and Specifications must be made in writing and addressed to the Architect. Verbal interpretations will not be given. Any conflicts between the drawings and specifications shall be interpreted by the Architect. The Architect will issue an addendum (or addenda)to address all questions. These addenda will be sent to all known Bidders. 1.04 GENERAL SCOPE OF THE PROJECT: A. The project is a re-development of 5.24 acres of the existing Timber Ridge Apartments. END OF SECTION 00 21 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 3100-AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 1. Soils Analysis(Geotechnical) Report dated January 7,2014 2. Bolder Retaining Wall Design dated January 13,2014 3. Property Management Waste and Recyling Plan 4. Roof Snow Guard Plan 5. Structural Calculations 6. Life Safety Report END OF SECTION 00 31 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 00 3100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 00 3100-2 - � � � � �� " �� i i ,� l I �bo��i � S� �w �, 1,�� i i��,��SIhUI � �n nr:�110 ){� y�dRB HEPWORTH-PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL F,� y��i.y��.��+ . tm�,iil: h�,�,e,�r,6�,_,corrd,.c�,m GEOTECHNICAL ENGIN�ERING STUDY PROPOSED TIMBER RIDGE REDEVELOPMENT 1250 NORTH FRONTFiuE ROAD WEST VAIL, COLORADO JOS NO. 109 310D JANUARY 7, 2014 PREPARED FOR: WRIGHT AND COMPANY, INC. ATTN: JEN WRIGHT P.O. BOX 7170 AVON, COLORADO 81620 �r ��riqi�f�a �� ri�=Ittar�l��n� F.ESav.co»� _.i -�_—_.._. �----}-------- Parkcr 303-5�}I-711) • Col��r.�do Springs 719-633-5562 • Silverthoroe 970-46S-19S) TABLE OF CONTENTS PURPOSE AlVD SCOPE OF STUDY..........................................................................- 1 - PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION..................................................................................- 1 - SITECONDITIONS....................................................................................................- 2 - FIELDEXPLORATION..............................................................................................- 2 - SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS....................................................................................- 3 - FOUNDATION BEARING CONDITIONS.................................................................- 4 - DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS..............................................................................: 4 - FOLJNDATIONS......................................................................................................- 4 - FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS..........................................................- 6 - FLOORSLABS ......................................................................................................: 7 - UNDERDRAINSYSTEM.........................:..............................................................- 8 - SITEGRADING......................................................................................................- 8 - PAVEMENTSECTION ...........................................................................................- 9 - SURFACEDRAINAGE.........................................................................................- 11 - LIMITATIONS ...........................................:..............................................................- 11 - FIGLTRE 1 - LOCATION OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS AND PITS FIGURES 2 AND 3 - LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS FIGURE 4 - LEGEND AND NOTES FIGURES 5 THROUGH 8 - GRADATION TEST RESULTS TABLE 1- SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS APPENDIX A-ZONGE GEOSCIENCES REPORT PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY This report presents the results of a geotechnical engineering study for the proposed redevelopment of Timber Ridge.located at 1280 North Frontage Road West, Vail, Colorado. The project site is shown on Figure 1. The purpose of the study was to develop recommendations for the foundation and grading designs. The study was originally conducted for Vail Timber Ridge, LLC, report dated October 27, 2009, Job No. 109 310A. The current study, which is an update of our previous 2009 study, was performed in general accordance with our proposal for geotechnical engineering services to Wright and Company, Inc dated August 6, 2013. Evaluation of potenrial geologic hazard impacts to the proposed development is beyond the scope of our study. A field exploration program consisting of exploratory borings was conducted to obtain inforxnation on the subsurface conditions. Samples of the subsoils and bedrock obtained during the field exploration were tested in the laboratory to determine their classification and other engineering chazacteristics. The current update of our previous study included observing exploratory pits excavated by others to assess existing fill depths. The results of the field exploration and laboratory testing were analyzed to develop recommendations for building foundation design including types, depths and allowable pressures, and for excavation grading. This report summarizes the data obtained during this study and presents our conclusions, recommendations and other geotechnical engineering considerations based on the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered. The report of a geophysical investigation using seismic analysis by Zonge Geosciences to assess depth to bedrock is attached as Appendix A. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION The proposed development includes four 3-story apartment buildings with slab-on-g•ade constructed in place of the existing buildings shown on Figure 1. The ground floor of the buildings will be close to the existing grade. Surface parking proposed in the cenh-al development area will be to the north (uphill) of the new buildings and require cut into Job No. 109 310D GeCPt@Ch -z - the existing steep slope. The cut is proposed to be retained with a permanent soil nail wall with heights up to about 15 to 20 feet. A stacked boulder wall up to 6 feet high is proposed between the parking lot and building area for grade change. A future transit center is proposed at the west end for bus service of the development. Grading for the facilities will be fairly extensive in places due to the existing development and steep uphill slope. The ground floor elevation of the apartment buildings will vary across each building with steps of 2 feet between units. The north, deeper cut areas of the parking lot excavations aze expected to encounter formation rock. We assume relatively light to moderate foundation loadings for the aparhnent buildings. If building locations, grading or loading information changes significantly, we should be notified to re-evaluate the recommendations presented in this report and conduct additional exploration and analysis as needed. SITE CONDITIONS The site is currently developed with several3-story aparhnent buildings on a relatively long, narrow property between North Frontage Road West on the downhill, south side and Lions Ridge Loop on the uphill, north side. Elevation difference between the existing building area and Lions Ridge Loop is roughly 30 feet at the east end and 60 feet at the west end. The existing building area has been terraced in two levels about 10 feet apart in elevation and serviced with asphalt paved drives and surface pazking. The northern part between the buildings and Lions Ridge Loop appears to be cut into the natural hillside and is partly retained with gabion wire basket walls. Vegetation consists mainly of landscape grass, bushes and trees. FIELD EXPLORATION The field exploration for the original project was conducted between September 23 and 28, 2009. Eight exploratory borings were drilled at the locations shown on Figure 1 to evaluate the subsurface conditions. The borings were drilled with 4 inch diameter Job No. ]09 3(OD C�CPt�Ch - 3 - continuous flight augers powered by a truck-mounted CME-45B drill rig. Four exploratory pits were dug for the current study updated with a trackhoe on October 23 and 24, 2013. The borings and pits were logged by a representative of Hepworth-Pawlak Geotechnical, Inc. Samples of the subsoils in the borings were taken with 1'/8 inch and 2 inch I.D. spoon samplers. The samplers were driven into the subsurface materials at various depths with blows from a 140 pound hamuier falling 30 inches. This test is similar to the standard penetration test described by ASTM Method D-1586. The penetration resistance values are an indication of the relative density or consistency of the subsoils and hazdness of the bedrock. Depths at which the samples were taken and the penetration resistance values are shown on the Logs of Exploratory Borings, Figures 2 and 3. The samples were returned to our laboratory for review by the project engineer and testing. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Graphic logs of the subsurface conditions encountered in the borings at the site are shown on Figures 2 and 3. The subsoils encountered,below a variable depth of fill materials, mainly consist of dense, silty sandy gavel, cobbles and boulders (glacial moraine deposits). About 1'/z and 3 feet of mainly sandy silt and clay was encountered in Borings 5 and 7 between the fill and the coarse granular soils. Below depths of about 7 to 29 feet in Borings 1, 3 and 5, hard to very hard siltstone/sandstone bedrock was encountered. Drilling in the dense granular soils and very hard bedrock was difficult due to the cobbles and boulders and possible cemented rock and drilling refusal was encountered in the deposits. The fill consists of a mixture of sandy clay and gravel and should be expected to vary in type, depth and condition across the site. The four exploratory pits dug in the western part of the site, located as shown on Figure 1, encountered between 7%z and 11 feet of fill consisting of mainly silty to clayey sand and gravel with cobbles, and scattered organics and construction debris. Job No. 109 310D Ge Pt2Ch - 4 - Laboratory testing performed on samples obtained from the borings included natural moisture content and density, gradation analyses and liquid and plastic limits. Results of gradation analyses performed on small diameter drive samples (minus 1% inch fraction) of the subsoils are shown on Figures 5 through 8. The laboratory testing is summarized in Table 1. No free water was encountered in the pits when dug or borings when drilling or checked one or more days later. The upper soils were typically moist. FOUNDATION BEARING CONDITIONS The relatively dense, natural coarse granular soils and bedrock are suitable for support of the aparhnent buildings and retaining structures. Spread footings placed on these materials should have moderate to high bearing capacity with relatively low settlement potential. Fill material and debris from the existing development should be completely removed from beneath the proposed building areas. Structural fill can be used to reestablish design bearing levels. The structural fill can consist of the on-site granular soils provided they aze processed to a relatively well graded material and devoid of organics, construction debris and rock larger than about 5 inches. Excauation of the uphill cut slope should be carefully planned to maintain stability, tie into the existing gabion walls where required, and for difficult excavation of the underlying bedrock. DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOUNDATIONS Considering the subsurface conditions encountered in the exploratory borings and the nature of the proposed construction; we recommend the buildings be founded with spread footings bearing on the natural coarse granular soils, bedrock or select structural fill. Job No. 109 310D C�UPtECh - 5 - The design and construction criteria presented below should be observed for a spread footing foundation system. 1) Footings placed on the coarse granular soils, bedrock or structural fill should be designed for an allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 ps£ Based on experience, we expect total and differential settlement of footings designed and conshucted as discussed in this section will be up to about 1 inch. Footings placed entirely on bedrock can be designed for an allowable bearing pressure of 5,000 psf. 2) The footings should have a minimum width of 18 inches for continuous walls and 2 feet for isolated pads. 3) Exterior footings and footings beneath unheated azeas should be provided with adequate soil cover above their bearing elevation for frost protection. Placement of foundations at least 42 inches below exterior grade is typically used in this area. 4) Continuous foundation walls should be reinforced top and bottom to span local anomalies such as by assuming an unsupported length of at least 10 feet. Foundation walls acting as retaining structures should also be designed to resist lateral earth pressures as discussed in the "Foundation and Retaining Walls" section of this report. 5) The existing fill, topsoil, debris, clay soils and any loose or disturbed soils and rock should be removed to expose the relatively dense natural granular soils or bedrock. The exposed soils should then be moistened and compacted. Voids created by boulder removal should be backfilled with structural fill or with concrete. If water seepage is encountered, we should be contacted for additional evaluation. Structural fill can be used to support footings. The structural fill should consist of a relatively well graded granular material limited to a depth of about 6 feet below footing bearing level and compacted to at least 100% of standard Proctor density (ASTM—D 698) at near optimum moisture content. The areas stripped of the existing fill soils should be observed prior to placing structural fill and Job No. ]09 310D � C�(Pt@Ch - 6 - the structural fill evaluated for compaction by a representative of the geotechnical engineer. 6) A Site Class C can be assumed for the building seismic design based on Table 1613.5.2 of the 2009 IBC and the findings presented on Figure 5 of the Zonge Geosciences report(Appendix A). 7) A representative of the geotechnical engineer should observe all footing excavations prior to concrete placement to evaluate bearing conditions. FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS Foundation wa11s and retaining structures up to about 15 feet high which are laterally supported and can be expected to undergo only a slight amount of deflection should be designed for a lateral earth pressure computed on the basis of an equivalent fluid unit weight of at least 50 pcf for backfill consisting of the on-site granular soils. Walls that are taller than 15 feet should be designed for a uniform earth pressure of 25H in psf where H is the wall height in feet. Cantilevered retaining structures which are separate from the buildings and can be expected to deflect sufficiently to mobilize the full active earth pressure condition should be designed for a lateral earth pressure computed on the basis of an equivalent fluid unit weight of at least 40 pcf for backfill consisting of the on-site granulaz soils. All foundation and retaining structures should be designed for appropriate hydrostatic and surcharge pressures such as adjacent footings, traffic, construction materials and equipment. The pressures recommended above assume drained conditions behind the wa11s and a horizontal backfill surface. The buildup of water behind a wall or an upward sloping backfill surface will increase the lateral pressure imposed on a foundation wall or retaining structure. An underdrain should be provided to prevent hydrostatic pressure buildup behind walls. Backfill should be placed in uniform lifts and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum standard Proctor(ASTM-D698) density at a moisture content near optimum. Care should Job No. 109 310D C�c�teCh - � - be taken not to overcompact the backfill or use large equipment near the wall, since this could cause excessive lateral pressure on the wall. Some settlement of deep foundation wall backfill should be expected, even if the material is placed correctly, and could result in distress to facilities constructed on the backfill. Use of a select granular wall backfill compacted to at least 98% of standard Proctor density will help reduce the settlement potential. The lateral resistance of foundation or retaining wall footings will be a combination of the sliding resistance of the footing on the foundation materials and passive earth pressure against the side of the footing. Resistance to sliding at the bottoms of the footings can be calculated based on a coefficient of friction of 0.50 for the coarse granular soils and bedrock. Passive pressure of compacted backfill against the sides of the footings can be calculated using an equivalent fluid unit weight of 400 pcf for granular material. The coefficient of friction and passive pressure values recommended above assume ultimate soil strength. Suitable factors of safety should be included in the design to limit the strain which will occur at the ultimate strength, particularly in the case of passive resistance. FLOORSLABS The natural coarse granular soils,bedrock and properly constructed structural fill are suitable to support lightly loaded slab-on-grade construction. To reduce the effects of some differential movement, non-structural floor slabs should be sepazated from all bearing walls and columns with expansion joints which allow unrestrained vertical movement. Floor slab control joints should be used to reduce damage due to shrinkage cracking. The requirements for joint spacing and slab reinforcement should be established by the designer based on experience and the intended slab use. A minimum 4 inch layer of free-draining gravel should be placed beneath below grade slabs to facilitate drainage. This material should consist of minus 2 inch aggregate with at least 50% retained on the No. 4 sieve and less than 2%passing the No. 200 sieve. The under slab gravel should be connected with the perimeter nnderdrain system by interior lateral subdrains. Job No. 109 310D C�GCPt2Ch - 8 - Fill materials placed far support of floor slabs above footing bearing level should be compacted to at least 95% of maximum standard Proctor(ASTM-D 698) density at a moisture content near optimum. Required fill can consist of the on-site granular soils devoid of vegetation, topsoil and oversized rock. UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM Although groundwater was not encountered during our exploration, it has been our experience in mountainous areas and where bedrock is shallow that local perched groundwater can develop during times of heavy precipitation ar seasonal runoff. Frozen ground during spring runoff can create a perched condifion. We recommend below-grade construction, such as retaining walls, crawlspace and basement areas,be protected from wetting and hydrostatic pressure buildup by an underdrain system. Building floor slabs constructed at to above finish exterior grade should not rieed a perimeter subdrain. The drains should consist of drainpipe placed in the bottom of the wall backfill surrounded above the invert level with free-draining granular material. The drain should be placed at each level of excavation and at least 1 foot below lowest adjacent finish grade and sloped at a minimum %% to a suitable gravity outlet. Free-draining granular material used in the underdrain system should contain less than 2%passing the No. 200 sieve, less than 50%passing the No. 4 sieve and have a maYimum size of 2 inches. We should review the underdrain design prior to construction for compliance with our recommendations. SITE GRADING Excavation for the north parking area will be relatively extensive and there is a risk of construction-induced slope instability. The uphill cut slope is proposed to be retained with a permanent soil nail wall and covered with segmental block. The Zonge Geosciences results (Appendix A) indicate that much of the north wall excavation will encounter bedrock and could be very difficult to excavate. The soil nails will extend into Job No. 109 310D C�PteCh - 9 - the natural glacial soils and can be designed for a soil friction angle 36 degrees and moist unit weight of 135 pc£ A cohesion of 50 psf can be used for global stability calculation. Stacked boulder walls will have a batter of%z horizontal to 1 vertical or flatter and shouid be feasible up to 6 feet high using a minimum base width of 4 feet and bearing on natural soils or compacted structural fill. Recommended wall sections and design calculations will be provided under separate cover as an addendum to this study. We assume that structural fills will be liinited to about 10 feet deep and not be placed on the steep, uphill slope. Embankment fill slopes should be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum standazd Proctor(ASTM-D698) density near optimum moisture content. Prior to fill placement, the subgrade should be carefixlly prepared by removing all vegetation, topsoil and debris, and compacting to at least 95% of the maximum standard Proctor density. The fill should be benched into slopes that exceed 20% grade. The on- site soils should be selecrively excavated and processed, including crushing as needed, to achieve a relatively well graded material with less than 25% passing the No. 200 sieve and 5-inch maximum size. If existing fill is left in-place, such as within pavement areas, it should be evaluated for suitability of material type and compaction at the time of construction. Crushed concrete should have a maximum size of 3 inches and combined on a one to one ratio with CDOT Class 6 aggegate base course if used as structural backfill. Permanent unretained cut and fill slopes should be graded at 2 horizontal to 1 vertical or flatter and protected against erosion by revegetation or other means. The risk of slope instability will be increased if seepage is encountered in cuts and flatter slopes may be necessary. If seepage is encountered in permanent cuts, an investigation should be conducted to determine if the seepage will adversely affect the cut siability. This office should review site grading plans for the project prior to construction. PAVEMENT SECTION We understand that asphalt pavement is proposed for the driveways and parking areas. Traffic loadings have not been provided. The subgrade soils encountered at the site are Job No. 109 3 40D C�ECPtECh - 10 - generally low plasticity, silty to clayey sand and gravel which are considered a fair to good support for pavement sections. Structural fiil needed for the pavement construction should consist of coarse granular soil. The granular soils encountered on-site are estimated to have a minimum Hveem stabilometer `R' value of 30. Based on our experience, an 18 kip EDLA of 20 for driveways and 5 for pazking areas, a Regional Factor of 2.5 and a serviceability index of 2.0, we recommend the minimum pavement section thickness consist of 4 inches of asphalt on 8 inches of base course for driveways and 4 inches of asphalt on 6 inches of base course in parking areas. As an alternative to asphalt pavement in areas of concentrated truck loading or turning movements, the pavement section should consist of at least 6 inches of Portland cement concrete on 4 inches of aggregate base course. The future transit center will likely be paued with Portland cement concrete. A minimum concrete section thickness of 8 inches on 4 inches of aggregate base course can be assumed for preliminary design. Once traffic loadings are better known, we should review our pavement section recommendations. The asphalt should be a batched hot mix, approved by the engineer and placed and compacted to the project specifications. The base course should meet CDOT Class 6 specifications. All base course and required subgrade fill should be compacted to at least 95% of the maxiinum standard Proctor density at a moisture content within 2% of optimum. The section thicknesses assume structural coefficients of 0.12 for aggregate base course, 0.44 for asphalt surface and design compressive strength of 4,500 psi for Portland cement concrete. The material properties and compaction should be in accordance with the project specifications. The existing asphalt pauement is proposed to be pulverized and reused on-site where suitable. We expect that asphalt pavement pulverized to a maYimum size of'/<-inch can be substituted for Class 6 aggregate base course on a one to one basis provided the pulverized material meets Hveein `R' value of 78. � Required fill to establish design subgrade level should consist of suitable granular soils approved by the geotechnical engineer. Prior to fill placement the subgrade should be stripped of unsuitable soils down to coarse granular soils, scarified to a depth of 8 inches, adjusted to near optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 95% of standard 7ob No. 109 310D C�C�t2Ch - 11 - Proctor density. The subgrade should be proofrolled. Areas that deflect excessively should be conected before placing pavement materials. The subgrade improvements and placement and compaction of base and asphalt materials should be monitored on a regular basis by a representative of the geotechnical engineer. SURFACE DRAINAGE The following drainage precautions should be observed during construction and maintained at all times after the buildings have been completed: 1) Inundation of the foundation excavations and underslab azeas should be avoided during construction. 2) Exterior backfill should be adjusted to near optimum moisture and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum standard Proctor(ASTM-D 698) density in pavement and slab areas and to at least 90% of the maximum standard Proctor density in landscape areas. 3) The ground surface surrounding the exterior of the building should be sloped to drain away from the foundation in all direcrions. We recommend a minimuxn slope of 6 inches in the first 10 feet in unpaved areas and a minimum slope of 2.5 inches in the first 10 feet in paved areas. Free-draining wall backfill should be capped with at least 2 feet of the on- site finer graded soils to reduce surface water infiltrarion. 4) Roof downspouts and drains should discharge well beyond the limits of all backfill. Surface runoff should not be concentrated and directed onto steep slopes without adequate erosion protection. LIMITATIONS This study has been conducted in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices in this area at this time. We make no warranty either express or implied. The conclusions and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the exploratory borings and pits located as indicated on Figure 1, the proposed type of construction and our experience in the area. Our services do not include detei7nining the presence, prevention or possibility of mold or Iob No. 109 310D � GECPt@Ch - 12 - other biological contaminants (MOBC) developing in the future. If the client is �QRC�:;;°C� 8ti`Oi::�✓IQ�� il�l^. 2 Yiv1i;SSiGiiai iii tiliS S�cC1ai li2iu Oi(�iaC`LiCE S'f1VU�G�GC consulted. Our findings include interpolation and extrapolation of the subsurface conditions identified at the exploratoiy borings and pits and variations in the subsurface conditions may not become evident until excavation is performed. If conditions encountered during construction appear different from those described in this report, we should be notified so that re-evaluation of the rewmmendations may be made. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use by our client for design purposes. We are not responsible far technical interpretations by others of our information. As the project evolves, we should conduct additional subsiu-face exploration and provide continued consultation and field seivices during constnzction to review and monitor the im�lementation of our recommendations, and to verify that the recom�nendations have been appropriately interpreted. Significant design changes may require additional analysis or modifications to the recommendations presented herein. We recommend on- site observation of excavations and foundation bearing strata and testing of structural fill by a representative of the geotechnical engineer. Respectfully Submitted, HEPWORTH - PAWLAIC GEOTECHNICAL, INC. _ ,��`•�y� _"9 �' t Steven L. Pawlak, P.E. '�� 62Z3 , � ' ! Reviewed by: �•�^,��y/�� ; J}�•. �NAt�.�p� , �lE OF C0�-9�P .\\ �I(' ��.�_ . Daniel E. Hardin, P.E. SLP/ksw cc: Alpine Engineering—Garry Brooks ( ;,�, ," i� i L;uni) RA Nelson —Tim Carpenter (t_: �;:,t�, �; � ;,�..,,;�,;,,n_,) Martin-Martin—Sean Molloy(s;t��t;ca�:aE��,c.a�ia3c��arti��-mtn_��ni) Gorn�an & Company—Patrick Patrello (;��,,.;�e;;�^i: �`��a_iil�tnu�,�.aii.i) Job No. I09 310D GECPtGCh ■ PIT 1 (11') 81 4018 1 50� � 1 � g10�^ I I ��60 11 ■PIT 3 \� O � I � �i 1 (71/2') 1 � � APPROXIMATE SCALE � �BORING 1 � 1" = 100' � � I � I I � EXISTING LEGEND � � O , � � 3�� RETAINING • BORING DRILLED FOR � �I ■PIT 2 � � � � � � WALLS (SHADED) JOB NO. 109310A REPORT � 10' BORING 2 1 I TYPICAL OCTOBER 27, 2009 II �� ( ) PIT�(8') 8rr 1 &12��I � 1\ ■ PIT DUG FOR CURRENT � STUDY �I i �I I \ � 8150 (11') INDICATES DEPTH OF � EXISTING FILL � 1 � � �� E ° � I 0 8roo �I i °o � j 8�r0 � �� I � � � � BORING 4 �BORING 31 � � � I � / o � f�� // � I� �� I� o 8r � � I I ,8140 �� ` � I � � � — � � I \ � 1 � � I � � I 11 BORING 5� �` 11 � 1 I � BORING 6 � I � I � � � � I � � I i �� I �� a � ; J � � �I 1 � BORING: � ' • �� I BORING 8 � � � � � 0 � 0 H LOCATION OF EXPLORATORY 109 310D @C�'1 BORINGS AND TEST PITS Figure 1 HEPWORTH�PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL BORINGI BORING 2 BORING 3 BORING 4 ELEV.= 8099.5' ELEV.= 8100' ELEV.= 8109' ELEV.= 8098' 8110 8110 14/12 8105 8105 15/6,20/2 80/8 8100 LOWEST PROPOSED FLOOR LEVEL wC=s.i Do=i2s 8100 50/3 25/12 8/12 WC=5.7 WC=6.0 +4= 37 DD=106 -200=17 '..'"` 7/6,20/4 8195 -200=29 .• � 32/12 0�' 40/11 .0. 8195 ti a� C 'q� 6S/9 � ° �� WC=1.8 c > +4 =43 � w 8190 '•. -200=14 > 30/t ,5. 8190 � 40/72 W o; :4� 8185 •q� �°� 90/12 8185 °: WC=5.1 �'� +4= 38 -200=23 8180 •�' 30/6,30/3 8180 .� 0•, 0•° 8175 •4� �o, 8175 o': o�' 8170 8170 35/6,60/3 Note: F�cplanation of symbols is shown on Figure 4. 109 310A ��~p� � He wonn-VHC'7��,@t�;I°�i LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS Figure 2 BORING 5 BORING 6 BORING 7 BORING 8 ELEV.= 8108' ELEV.= 8101.5' ELEV.= 8107' ELEV.= 8104' 8110 8110 18/12 14/12 8105 WC=13.7 8105 DD=117 -200=57 ��12 LL=30 WC=11.3 PI=14 oa, DD=116 3�/i2 LOWEST PROPOSED 8100 �L�o25 2 0:. FLOOR LEVE8100 o� PI=7 67/12 26/12 80/9 .4' p'': WC=5.1 :� WC=5.5 d'• ... ea. +4=25 0�' 30/12 °�' 50/5 '•. +4=32 8095 -200=23 '0:. WC=5.3 •q' -200=27 � •1 0� +4=42 �°' 8095 � ;� -200=15 50/5 � � or�' 50/1 .4° p'�r �; � /� 0' 30/1,10/0 •� ••• o W 8090 �: 60/9 .A� � •�� o:: 'o^ 8090 w :4� •.+ 50/2 �°' 0•. 0� 0" 44/12 • 8085 +4=39 .q' � -200=16 �o• 8085 :4� 'o? •pe 39/12 WC=6.4 +4=10 o" 30/5,10/0 � -200=12 8080 8080 8075 8075 Note: Explanation of symbols is shown on Figure 4. H 109 310A �;� LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS Figure 3 He worth—Pawlak Geotechnfcal LEGEND: � Fili; mixed silty sandy clay and gravel,firm,moist, mixed brown. � Clay and Silt (CL-ML); sandy, scattered gravel, stiff, moist, brown,lowplasticity. � Gravel, Cobbies and Boulders (GM); silty, sandy with scatterd sand and gravel layers, dense, moist, �°'• brown. Subangular to subrounded rock. Siltstone/Sandstone; hard to very hard and possibly cemented,moist,red-brown. Minturn Formation. � Relatively undisturbed drive sample; 2-inch I.D. California liner sample. ■ Drive sample; standard penetration test (SP�, 1 3/8 inch I.D.split spoon sample,ASTM D-1586. r 25�12 Drive sample blow count; indicates that 25 blows of a 140 pound hammer talling 30 inches were required to drive the California or SPT sampler 12 inches. � Practical drilling refusal. NOTES: 1. Exploratory borings were drilled on September 23, 24 and 2S, 2009 with 4-inch diameter continuous flight power auger. 2. Locations of exploratory borings were measured approximatefy by pacing from features shown on the site plan provided. 3. Elevations of exploratory borings were obtained by interpolation between contours shown on the site plan provided and checked by instrument level. 4. The exploratory boring locations and elevations should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used. 5. The lines between materials shown on the exploratory boring logs represent the approximate boundaries between materiai types and transitions may be gradual. 6. No free water was encountered in the borings at the time of drilling or when checked 1 or more days later. Fluctuation in water level may occur with time. 7. Laboratory Testing Results: WC = Water Content(%) DD = Dry Density(pc� +4 = Percent retained on the No.4 sieve -200 = Percent passing No.200 sieve LL = Liquid Limit(%) PI = Plasticity Index (%) 109 310A � He worth—Pawiak Geotech�i LEGEND AND NOTES Figure 4 _ _ _ _ _ _ __ .•. „ �„� � .� - � .� • �� ,� , , ' - ------ ; . : . . : ��-----==----------- .��=�===='_'============ � .�._.---- '�---------- =-================== ' ��w�� 1 �� '�� ' �� I�� 1 ___ __-_____ ��_�� 1 �� ' . ��1��-�� I �� I _ _ ____ == _ _ �� •I �� 1�� • I �� • �� i� �� :1 �� I �� I � I � � I � � � 1 � • � • � �� ■�� ,• . � �• �I • '� ♦1 11 1 1 ��1�� 11 �� - �� 'I �� r�� :I �� i�� 1�:�� , � � � - �� , I _-_____ � �� I �� • •� �� I � � �� • 1 =�� i�� :1 � _____ _____ �� - �� I ��1�� __�� II � ___ �� I 11 11 11 11• 1 • I 1 � I 11 .11 . � 1 � � � � �� ♦ , � ■ . i � � � � I ♦ • . • r-. _ • �� i� • � � : . ' __ -___-_- I � ,• ,� I V ��-� � i �L .� • � i �: • • � . � • � ' • �"_.-_-_____ --- __.__._______________.__ �. I 0 M � � � � o w w w � � ^ v v � � p a a� v a�i � 3 a�i .� r. d O y i�-� 1-�i i.�i �„�,i � N t�C .3 � � � -° o o C7 �V �U �U b � C7 �, � �j C7 " m � � � � � 3 � u � � � � � � b � � � � p � � vi v� v? o � U �y m �a ro cu �' �, �'' � � �o > `n vz v� v� u� v. :� :� � � ;� � � � � � � �n vz v� a�i � vs C7 v� � � vz � v� w W 7= Z N H N 2 ¢ Z w paW a z � V � Z J V � � � ~y G > y� `e a Z ' l� .�-� � � Z � W V � W o � YJ �' Q Q� � � O 0 � J N � W � � Q � F g W O W Z H W 3 m � w � p N N N � .-�r � N � [� Vl l� N aaZ � ^' N �r a ~ O� � z oQ oz � ° `�`\' � � v�-� � "' '" °o � v �r t� a � a W � � � = h � W � � � M y�- N m N N O �r m .� J a � } � Z � W a O � � .-~-i C �--� �--� w a � z FN Z p o ,-� � .-, oo �'? ,-. r c,., v, = o V �D �l vl �O ti .-�i v1 v'1 � � � ti � Z Y � �4+" O � O � � N �:7 .D N \ � �'1 � � O � � � � � � � � N � � o � � � � � a � ¢ � w � � � m � � � � � APPENDIX A . Zonge Geosciences r�`i\ I�:�� F. � Q�' ^� � . r.� ';:�,�:`:. d990�m�ePdr�a��eisa�n Srree£�r�ite 2 :� � Zalre�r�eeJ,��26227 �-� �: . . . l�hoeee:(720)�62-�^¢¢4 � .i `:: _ .. . . . f 2x:(�26j$6�'�CZ9! � r�eet�.goraes@�oeage.eoere �cto��y 15, �d09 ��cvcsa�.. �'awlaPc, P� ��sident �ieg�wor[h-1'awlal:Geoiechnicad ��'20 C�isiaty f�o�d 15�?. �lenwood Springs, CO 81601 ,�abject: Geophysical I�ivestigations Igeport—Tirnber Ridge, 5�ai1, Colorado This letter represencs the final t�eport foa� the geophysical survey conducted on October 6, 2009. The purpose of this investigaeio%� was to deeermine depth to bedrock at Timber Ridge nea� several existing condominiums in an area scheduled for future consteuction(see�igures 1 and 2). The geophysical method used during this investigation was seismic refraction. A total of four refraction spreads were collecfed. Seismic refi•action data was used to calculate compressional (P-wave) velocities, which were then used along with borehole data to estimate a depth to hedrock. In addition to the refraccion spreads one spread of Refraction Microtremor(ReMi) data was collected as site class and shea�-wave information. This repart includes btief sections on Siee Conditions, Seismic Methods Overviewy Field PYOC�CIUTOS� Limitations of Method, Data Reduction and Modeling, and Discussion of Rest�lts. .�P$2 COIl(d1tIbIIS Tfie sites invesfigated are located on the Timber Ridge condominiums (Figure 1). Sorehole logs from the site indicate overburden consisting of fill and clay over gravel and cobbles. T'he horizonEal distance on the cY•oss secYions fot• the four lines along the back side of the properey is an approxiinate distance along line frotn the beginning of Line 1 (Figure 2). Handheld �P5 latitude longitude readings from the field for the stare and end of each line are also posfed ofi ihe cross secCions. Forehoies 3 a 5 are �iotteci on ct•oss sections (rigure�j and were used io modei deptL� to bedrock. t�ll boreholes are ploCted on Che line location maps (Fagure 7). This OVerhiir�l�n m�i-��ial ic ni7 fpn a�f�glags�er� / ��n�l�f��P hp�„��y:. -- � � r�ss�.�s�2��° PJ 10G°Z4'Ob„f . .. i � �� g',: . i : (U� �:rl� I I _ ' � � I. � , i".' .�. ... ,. -:Ipt::i � � � . .� _.. �. I f'� i L � e. . I ,. ��i:l^tqI!- i � �� _ . . . ... . . .. �.�iC::Ot.�.iF:Y.� v I � Q 1 6 �N 40RIZ0��i AL SCALE jfvii!esl HOTES: � sar-e-rv FiRSr ifT�^b Yi3Ep'!11i�y1!'5EQ0:':IVGZd'etlil6ll�'OJ2�E A�Ep6. kf C O:ECII � � __{ Clei;oa/SA ��s C I�<Nu G�CEG�I JLdIE41f�2+'�2[C �dbplW_IpECe\ ' j ��F, ��: � .. � pa p ( C�ela./C�eq/a�./u„oq� q�/,ry; ulj�4 6�4+f°I II�iV /YIPYI' 0.� �e � s—�—�-- l� sp�n�e fla �cz.^�eao�?�s`g��ysa�� r�vey are��a Vai�, C�lo��d� � -- - � �� ° c �:. a � �C n Ll ° O ` � .. .—.. n .�U O G 5 . � n G`.'�a J - . � �� .G.0 G C y,;..✓'�'•° O ig�a S co . 'i ` ��O�v�� - 0 To�� o ; � i � e�Ni�oe � t v m � ! g � m � : :.o I i �`JA'i�'09 -- �� ! 3 !� � � � I � � I � I �I � �-o � � �i � -"'a �"°`� � °'° i � L...._.1 If � >. z� � .� � � �NfHOA � � p � � ��9JN16'Q�a � � eo � � � � J 1 O M I � � I � w o 3 1 � ov�.e" I � � ¢ �a It I ``�� O N U � . � ' � � �� { �� F� � � J � / �. � a z°? e3 o � � i � £9NtEG8� +F7Niy08 , n � � �� @ � I I \• ! P .0 � � � I � � pf� ; 6 O UP � 6L- u I � j ��8 n iji � C� � � �$�g� ��i � m � (� � i � 'i k _ fd � � i �totdL I I f�y� I _�`� F t _` (�3Gt`FIS1Sllbhl I f � y�`�:�'lNC9 -� fl � -_ `�NiMltllg'� I � � • � � I - �n�ItSl X 3,_�1 I i GP��''�a I r I(3� �I � _-- � � ` ( � . r•.,�( (�� {" �r.'7tv�t:;C}�� i f -`� �`� ! ��Cap i _-- � ' � f I�` � t `� � � v ,ot.� , i I � ,�_ _��i t � �t�j.<<y�@., � _. ��J_.— k f I � ' Ji� , _ � � I� — ` s �� l _ -- _ _— __—_ _ --__ II — P Seismic Methods Overview During seismic refraction surveys, acoustic energy is input to the subsurface by an energy source such as a sledgehasnmer impacting a metallic plate, weight drop, or explosive charge. The acoustic waves propagate in the subsurface at a velocity dependant on the elastic properties of the material through which they travel. When the waves reach an interface where the density or acoustic velocity changes significantly, a portion of the energy is reflected back to the surface, and the remainder is transmitted into the lower layer. Where the velocity of the lower layer is higher than that of the upper layer, a portion of the energy is also critically refracted along the interface. Critically refracted waves travel along the interface at the velociry of the lower layer and continually refract energy back to surface. Receivers (geophones) laid out in a linear array on the surface record the incoming refracted waves. The seismic refracrion method involves analysis of the travel times of the first energy (first arrivals) to arrive at the geophones. These first arrivals are from either the direct wave (at geophones close to the source), or critically refracted waves (at geophones further from the source). Analysis of first arrival data is typically conducted in flme vs. distance plane and converted to depth sections based on forward and inverse modeling algorithms(Lankston, 1990). The refraction microtremor(ReMi)method uses the same inshumentation and field layout as P- wave refraction surveys. The ReMi method uses ambient noise, or vibrational energy, that exists at a site,rather than a triggered source. For this project, ambient noise was largely the result of tr�c on I-70, slightly southeast of the project site. This surface wave energy is recorded for analysis by the ReMi method. Additional sources of noise, such as hammer blows were not required for any soundings. At least ten, unfiltered, 30-second ambient vibrational energy records (i.e., `noise'records)were recorded for each line using a 2 msec sample rate. Field Procedures Seismic refracrion equipment used during this investigation consisted of a DAQ-link 24-channel seismograph, 4.5 Hz vertical geophones, cable with 10-foot takeouts and a 16-1b sledge hammer k'ith an aluminum plate. Seismic refraction spreads consisted of 24 geophones spaced 10 ft apart for a total line length of 230 ft. Elevations of each geophone location were calculated using boring elevations and field measurements made with a hand level. Nine interior shot point locations were occupied for each seismic refraction profile(spread). Up to four off e:.d shots �+ere employed, depending on physical constraints. The sledgehammer was used as the energy source for all shot locations. The final seismic record at each shot point was the result of stacking 5-10 hits to increase the signal to noise ratio. All seismic records were stored on the seismograph and then transferred to a laptop computer for processing. ReMi data were acquired on October 6 2009 at the Tnnber Ridge project site using a DAQ-link seismograph.Twenty-four receivers (geophones) were placed on the ground and coupled using 4 geophone spikes. The receivers were Mark Products,4.5-Hz vertical component geophones. Data for the line was collected with an 8-foot receiver sepazation resulting in a 184-foot long line.An attempt to collect ReMi data was made on the first of the four refraction spreads. Unfortunately the high energy surface waves arriving from I-70 dominated the dispersion curves even with the addition of sledgehammer blows from off the end of the line. An addition spread was added for ReMi only in order to obtain site class and shear wave information. Line 5 was aligned perpendiculaz to I-70 to take advantage the direction of surface waves traveling across the site. Limitations of Method One restrictive limitation of seismic refraction is that each of the successively deeper refractors (soiUrock layers)must have a higher velocity than the one above, for an accurate solution. This limitation is not generally restrictive when attempting to characterize bedrock depths (deeper rock units almost always have higher velocities);however, situations do arise where overlying soil or rock units have higher velociries than the lower units (e.g., saturated clays over loose sands, or volcanic over sedimentazy rock). For this reason, seismic refraction surveys should always be correlated to subsurface borings to determine applicability of the results. Another potential problem in interpretation involves imaging in saturated soils—seismic energy is transmitted through the saturated soil mass at the velocity of water—5,000 ft/s,not the velocity of the unsaturated soil. ff saturated soils overlie weak rock units, or weathered or fractured units with p-wave velocities near 5000 ft/s, the boundary may become indistinguishable. In such case a secondazy method such as seismic shear wave or electrical methods in combination with refraction may be appropriate. Background seismic noise, propagating through both the ground and air(e.g., commuter traffic, conshvction equipment, neazby blasting operations, moving water, wind, etc.),may interfere with data collection, obscuring refraction survey arrival times and making analysis and interpretation difficult to unpossible. Oftentnnes, this problem can be overcome by empioying vazious filtering techniques, "stacking" the source signals, or by using larger impact sources. In general, "noisy" data leads to greater uncertainty in data interpretation. Seismic refraction results represent refractions from the nearest refractor. Tlus is not always in a venical plane directly beneath the survey line, although it is an assumpfion made in the presentation of 2- dimensional models. While for most cases this may be true, source-to-receiver ray paths may actually be traveling out of this vertical plane, through nearby higher-velocity materials (e.g., in the case of steeply dipping strata, or neaz the footer of a building). Seismic lines should be offset from building footers (preferably a horizontal offset greater than the expected depth to refractor). In disconrinuous ground, or settings with highly variable composition, 2-D seismic surveys could result in misleading subsurface profiles. In order to define complex dipping layers it may be necessary to perform 3-D refraction. Tomographic models ue excellent tools for developing a subsurface unage. A bedrock surface can be mapped across a site using as little as a single borehole for ground Iruth. Unfortunately if ihere is a large velocity difference at an interface the mathematics of the tomographic model tends to average this velocity change over a few calculation cells (pixels). Due to this affect the 5 velocity of the model at the interface if often lower than the true velocity. In order to overcome this, a layer based model can be used that will deternune the velocity of the lower refractor with much greater accuracy. With this technique results from one modeling program can be also used to tune the conshaints of the other model and increase the accuracy of the final combined model. Data Reduction and Modeling For this project, both tomography and the generalized reciprocal method(GRNn were utilized to process and interpret the data from the four refraction spreads on Tunber Ridge. First-arrival times were selected on all of the shot records acquired along each line using FirstPix V 4.24(OO Interpex Limited., 2000), a commercially available refraction analysis package produced by Interpex L'united of Golden, Colorado. Travel times, along with source and receiver positions and elevations were formatted and exported to files for input to both Gremix-15 V2.60 (OO Interpex Limited., 1999) and the SeisOpt@2DTM V 5.0 (�O Optim, Inc.,2006)tomography software. GRM analysis was performed using the Gremix software, and tomographic inversions were performed using SeisOpt@2DTM, a program that utilizes a simulated annealing algorithm. Two-dimensional cross-sections with velociry information at each subsurface pixel were produced by the tomography calculations. Depths to the interface of a two layer model from the GRM solution aze superimposed on the tomography cross section. GeneraliZed Reciprocal Method.• The generalized reciprocal method(GR1Vn calculates the depth to high velociry refractors (e.g., soil-bedrock interface) with the use of overlapping refraction travel times from forwazd and reverse shots. The method is also capable of calculating the depth to sharp vertical g�adients within the velociry field below a receiver spread were seisxnic velocities rapidly increase within a relatively short depth interval (e.g., the transition zone of a slightly weathered or decomposed rock to more competent rock). However, GRM analysis is generally more accurate in cases where refraction data has been collected over relatively simple layered or genfly undulating geology that exhibits increasing velociry with depth and dip angles<20 degrees. Calculated depths to the target refractor(s) aze assigned below each receiver, and the analysis approach assumes continuity of the interface across the entire model. GRM analysis is heavily based on an optimized XI'value, defined as the lateral distance on the ground surface between two sensors or geophones where refracted energy arrives from the same emanation point on the refractor interface. This concept is quite similar to the process of migration. Starting with an initial user-input layer model, velocity analysis is performed and average velocities are assigned to the model layers that can vazy laterally based on travel-time curve segments. An extension of Snell's I,aw is then used to solve for refractor depth at specific points on the refractor interfaces using the assigned layer velocities and travel-tune differences observed between forward and reverse shots. The final model consists of a layered-earth model with detailed interfaces. The layer velocities can vary laterally, and this can help identify sections of non-compacted materials or rock that is more competent than adjacent sections. For this project two layer models were developed for each spread. 6 Refraction Tomography: For this project the tomographic inversions were performed using a simulated annealing algorithm. First break picks were made on all of the shot records acquired along each line. Travel times, along with source and receiver positions (X,Y, and Z-elevation)were formatted into master files for input into the tomography software. Tomographic analysis was carried out using SeisOpt@2DTM(OO Optim, Inc., 2006), a commercially available refraction tomography package produced by Optim,LLC (Version 5.0), and it is used to process and produce 2D velocity sections. SeisOpt@2D works by first discretizing the model space into grids. The geophone spacing determines the grid dimensions. The travel time picks and array geomeh�y (shot and geophone locarions, including elevation) are then read in and the algorithm samples thousands of models before set8ing on the one that best fits the travel-time picks from all the shots, and the velocity consirains selected by the user. In this process, velocity values for each grid point are detern�ined thus allowing for lateral and verfical velocity varia6ons. The ReMi method calculates the shear-wave velocity (Vs) of layers and the respective depths to interfaces beneath the seisxnic line as described by Louie (2001). The ReMi method is primarily used to deternune building code class as detailed in Table 1613.5.2 of the 2006 International Building Code(IBC), with regard to eazthquake design and wind loading. The analysis computes the average shear-wave velocity to a depth of 100-feet(30 m); that is the"Usl DO". In addiflon to providing an auerage velocity for the entire section the method also calculates a shear wave velocity versus depth profile for a point at the center of the seismic line. This information can be used to estimate geological parameters such as depth to bedrock. ReMi Surface Wave Analysis: The `noise' records collected at this site were processed using the SeisOptOO ReMiTM softwaze (OO Optim LLC, 2005)that uses the ReMi method(I,ouie, 2001).The ReMiTM method calculates a shear wave velocity profile using the different velocities (dispersion) of low and high frequency surface waves.The longer the period(lower frequency) of a surface wave the deeper it travels in the earth, allowing the method to relate velocities of different frequencies of surface waves to specific depths.A two-dimensional slowness-frequency(p-fl transform of a microtremor record can separate Rayleigh surface waves from other seismic arrivals, and a11ow recognition of hue phase velocity against apparent velocities. The ReMiTM requires no higgered source of energy; and, it will work best in seismically noisy urban settings.Traffic, construction, and wind responses of trees, buildings, and utility standazds can provide the surface wave energy for this analysis. There are three main processing steps to derive the Vs profiles: Sten i: Create a velocity vs. frequency spectrum(p-f image)from the seismic record. 1 he p-f spectral power image will show where surface waves have significant energy. Sten 2:Rayleigh-wave dispersion picking-Picking is done along a lowest p-f envelope bounding the energy appeazing in the p-f unage. These lower velocity picks are representative of hue velocities rather than apparent velocities, because noise may come from all directions. Picking a surface-wave dispersion curve along an envelope of the lowest phase velocities effectively avoids or minimizes the effects of surface wave sources that are not located in an off- 7 end direction from the geophone array. These obliquely located sources result in fast apparent velocities, and these apparent velocities can result in misleading Vs models. Sten 3: Shear wave velocity modeling- The ReMi method interacfively forward-models the normal-mode dispersion data picked from the p-f images with a code adapted from Saito(1979, 1988)in 1992 by Yuehua Zeng. This code produces results identical to those of the forward- modeling codes used by Iwata et al. (1998), and by Xia et al. (1999)within their inversion procedure. The modeling iterates on phase velocity at each period(or frequency)and reports when a solution has been found within the iteration parameters. This analysis approach and the propagation properties of surface waves allows velocity reversals (low Vs layers at depth)to be modeled successfully. Discussion of Results The subsurface GRM models show what appeaz to be two lithologic units at the sites investigated. The shallow layer is low velocity material with P-wave velocity<2500 ft/sec which is deterxnined to be fill and or unconsolidated material. The second layer has P-wave velocities averaging 10,000 ftlsec and appears to be sandstone bedrock. The solution points for this interface are plotted on the cross secrions. Two boreholes were used for conirol to determine the modeled velocity which corresponds to the top of the sandstone for this site. The modeled velociry in the tomograpluc model (5500 ft/s) is piotted as a black line on all of the cross sections. This velocity best matches both the GRM solution and the borehole information. No groundwater was expected or encountered during this investigation. ReMi Vs 100' shear-wave velocity results aze presented on Figures 5 and Table 1. The Vs profile represent a one-d'unensional (1D) seismic sounding centered at the middle of the ReMi array. Vs results from ReMi surveys have been shown in to be within 10-15% of Vs data obtained via crosshole or downhole testing, and can typically determine the depth to competent layers or bedrock also to witlun 10 to 15 percent. ReMi data obtained at this site indicate: Line 5 Vs100' =2310 fUs Vs100'. The Vs100' value listed here, shown on Figure 5, and presented in Table 1, were computed in order to be used with Table 1613.5.2 of IBC 2006. Vs as shown in the models show a sharp rise in Vs at approximately 30 feet bgs. Based on the ReMi seismic results, bedrock is interpreted to be �30 feet beneath the center of Line 5. This result is consistent with borehole 8 which reached a depth of 24 feet without encountering bedrock. The interpreted depth to bedrock is based on Vs values greater than 2,000 fUs. Based on the field conditions (sources and their locations relative to the geophone arrays), the data and the resultant model, it is believed that the overall Vs100' value far this project site is well above 1200 fUs. The individual Vs100' value equates to an IBC site classification of class C, however, we do not assign a site classifacation based on Us measurements, because we are aware that other site factors may influence the classification. Site classification is an engineering judgment and decision; Zonge is presenting a Vs profile and the resultant average shear-wave velocities in graphical and tabular format (computed according to 1BC 8 specificarions) beneath the ReMi array. Due caution and a conservative approach should be employed when evaluating site conditions and structural and foundation designs at any project site. Rippability: Graphical modeled seismic results are presented as Figures 4 and 5; In general, bedrock velocities can be used as a means of estimating rippability (Caterpillaz Performance Handbook, 35�'Edition,2005). However, rippability is also a function of the lithology,degree of weathering and/or fracturing. The seismic cross sections show low velocities<2500 fUsec P- wave that aze attributed to zones of low velocity fill and unconsolidated material in shallow sections of the areas investigated. At depth lies a high velocity>9,000 ft/sec P-wave material interpreted as competent sandstone bedrock. The Caterpillar Company has produced charts providing the rippability of earth materials versus seismic velocities. Several caveats aze in order before one makes an absolute judgment about the selection of equipment for an excavation project. Favorable conditions for rippability include: frequent planes of weakness such as fractures or laminations, weathering,moisture content, stratificaflon, brittleness, and 'low' shear strength. Unfavorable conditions for rippability include: massive rocks, no planes of wealmess, crystalline rocks, non-brittle energy-absorbing rock matrix, and `lugh' shear strength. Variable conditions for rippabiliry include: the size of the equipment used, the skill of the operator, inclusions or'hazd spots'in the rock, the condition of the equipment used, and the orientation of any planes of weakness such as fractures or layer bedding. The following charts aze reproduced from Caterpiliar 35�'edition performance handbook(2004). 9 . }� � • � ._ _ `_- ' .�� _ ' - . - -_ " - _ _ _ —_ - �' �� \\?1\\\�\1'�\\1\\\\ �_�_ al?'�\\1\\\\\\\\\\1V ��\1\?1\\\\\?\\\yt) �. r � ----_---- _�_ �\\1\\\\\\\1\\\\\1 ____ �\\\\\\\\\\\\\\V ____ ��\\\\\\\\\\\\\�.\V �� \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\V �� —\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ �� \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\V � —\�\\�\\\�\\\\\�\\\\\ �\\\\\\\�\\\\�\\\\\\ • • --------- ��v�w�� _ ��1»��v '_ ----- -- --��o�� \��\�\ �• � � - � . . . .. _. .. . .._._ .. . . .... .... _ . . _ ._... �,� _ ---�� __ . ,,,___�\\\\\\\\\\1\\\\\\\\\\il --------- ��\\\\\\\\11\\1\\\\l �� 1�1�1�\\1\\\\\\\\\\\\ �l\\\\\1\\1\\\\\\\\ ------------ ____ �Al\\\\\\\1\ _____ __�\\\\\\\\\\\ _______ �\\\1\\\\\\� �1\\1\\\\\V _______ ��\\\O\\\\\1 ______ ��\l\\i\1\\\\ ____ �'.\\1\Y\\\�\C\1\1' �A\1\\\\\\\\4 I ------------ �' ______ �A\\?.\\lUp\C ��\\\1\\\\\ily,� i ' ------�-�- ' _,�_ . _ ��+1?1V�V.1`+.1F I ' �___...__.___-..-___ -.��\\U13.\\41'� i � ____� !???32!'a�L` :�' 7'h�se charCS cara also be found on the�'edexal I3ighways l�tdmin'ssYxaYiogi web site (I�L(p://a�w�t�:�!Iltd.�.��,/a�i.�)). Using the D3 &D9 chart above�s m b�ffir�li€afl¢x�,��de, for sandstone materials presen¢at this site, a rock is `rippable' wif�h velociYies less Yhan about 6,200 fUsec with a D8, and marginally rippable to a velocity of 9,500 fP/sec with a 139. The maCerials coasidered to be�11(above Yhe velociCy boundary from the GRM model on Lhe G�ocs sections)on Timberline Airlge can be considered rippable. The high velocity matexial(below the velocity boundaiy from the GRIVI model on the cross secYions) is considerred non-rippable, as any equipment fchat reaches even marginal rippabiliCy f�x>10,000 fPJsec sandscone is probably too large to be used on this site. 'There may be a weathered siu�face to the bedrocic that may or may not be rippable in the upper portion of the bedrock. The following quotes, taken irom Caterpillar publications, must be kept in mind when dealing with rock rippabiliry: "Low seismic velocities of sedimentary rocics can indicate probable rippability. However, if the fractures and bedding jaints do not allow tooth penetration, the material may not be ripped effectively." "Ripping is still more art than science and much will depend on the skill and experience of the tractor operator." "Field seismic information shown in the following charts is the best single indication of rippability." Data quality was good for this investigation. If addirional data becomes available at a later date, the seismic models may be reviewed and new data can be used to constrain the processing parameters. If you have any questions regazding the field procedures, seismic analysis techniques, the 1D ReMi analysis, the 2D refraction tomography, and GRM results and interpretations presented herein,please do uoY hesitate to contact us. We appreciate working with you and look forwud to providing you with geophysical services in the future. Respectfully submitted by, �u�� Greg A. 3ones I'roject Geophysicist Zonge Geosciences, Inc. � 'd'his geophysical uavesYigation was conducted under Zonge Geosciences prococots and procedures using inc�usEry sfandard me�Iaods and equipmen�. Piighly proa`essional�n-house qu�liCy coni�•ol sYandards�✓eie�b�e�v�d duxin�eac1�p�tZase of Yhis pxajecY, "rtom t�elc� �cfiviCies thsough c?ata�xocessing a�ac reporr�ng. 21 - - -�------ -�� _�_- N _ � � �_,_ �� - � '�.�; . �� _� ; $y9 � I .. , I ' N° � ��y"� d E V C I ♦ y �� ' Mo F '� I I I M� LL I � a y I I ; I I�' Z� `� ; �� k � _ � i i � i i �� 3 � V � d. � � � � w � m� � ' a > � J I � � I I � y W a I � o 0 + � Lcf'� � i I � h ° a _ 15000 0 � � � � � � � 1.3000 > � �i -n c 13000 � c � 3 m �.:. I o ` izaoo Q I { I I � � — �-iiooa E . � ;t c ioaao E $ h �—p� �a. T �C � � � � _ a ° 9000 0. �� E > � o aouo o �� i. " � r � o : v � : �000 o a I I I ° a �� ti0W o �� b "�' N a N > N 0 t . 5000 � �y. . � i I 1 �� V OO * �. aaoo ° �°o o ao � iy�,-3000 n � I Q 'o � � � � �iO 2000 v a d N j � 1�00 1° �N I p� I I W wN M �3� ' � N i I �I�,,.= ' i� C � � � '��' � J + I a I I ♦ m I i � I c x 0 i I+T I I 9 a o m �g � `o 4 c v o �p ;��p m m o � F i � d,O� m o `o" c¢ p � EJ r m �a i N� Zv y❑ v ,,��} . V rnG o ol � - _.1. _ m�M(D O i 00 p p�a ma i--m F _ - m M� _� .� _. m 'Z� � � � W C � � � D � J m ��BA2�E2S UBBW BAJq�j33})UOi;CAO�� .`J�nir�•�LI'ir��n i%�Inrit��, f'r/c (.} 50O 10(i0 lj0(1 _'OQO 251)0 i0O0 31OO �4(1l](1 4J0(i iQQQ O ��...,:: ��..,�L i___i.....�...� i_.�.t.�_.i.J�__u_i�_.l....6,-.�yJ�—uyLl._�t=.J 'l�) � �� °��Vs100' = 2310 ft�s � ., . �x� -�o � f �� _.__a�_- .., z�, '-��) `� -��) � ,,,.,�. � � � _�p � -?0 -SCl � _90 �I _ � ' 11.)0 Tn�rber Rirl;e Lirre 5: I�:s Prafrlc= Figure S. 14 Table 1 - Line 1 ReMi Data De th, ft Vs, ff/s 0.0 545 4.1 545 4.1 978 12.9 978 12.9 1861 37.3 1861 31.3 3584 61.8 3584 61.8 4582 100.0 4582 Line 5 Vs100' = 2310 ft/sec 15 REFERENCES BSSC, 1994,NEHRP Recommended provisions for the development of seismic regulations for new buildings,part I.•Provisions, Building Seismic Safety Council,Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington D.C. Interna6onal Committee of Building Officiais, 2000 International Building Code, ICC, Hauppauge, NY, Section 1615.1.1 Lankston, R.W., 1990, "High-resolution refraction seisnuc data acyuisilion and interpretation", Wazd, S.H.,ed., Geotechnical and Envn•onmental Geophysics, Volume I: Review and �torial: Society of Exploration Geophysicists,l�lsa, Oklahoma,p.45-74. Louie, J.N.,2001, "Faster,Better: Shear-Wave Velocity to 100 Meters Depth from Refraction Microtremor Arrays", Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, vol. 91, no. 2, p. 347-364. Martin,A.J., Shawver,J.B. and Diehl, J.D, 2005, "Combined Use of Active and Passive Surface Waves far Cost Effective UBC/IBC Site Classifications",Proceedings of the 2005 Annual Meeting on the Association of Environmental and Engineering Geologists. Palmer, D., 1980,The generalized reciprocal method of seismic refraction interpretation: Society of Exploration Geophysics, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 104 p. Palmer, D., 1981,An introduction to the field of seismic refrac6on interpretation: Geophysics, v. 46,p. 1508-1518. Park, C.B., Miller,R.D. and Xia,J., 1999a, "Multimodal analysis of high frequency surface waves",Proceedings of the Symposium on the Application of Geophysics to Engineering and Environmental Problems '99, 115-121. Park, C.B., Miller,R.D. and Xia,J., 1999b, "Multichannel analysis of surface waves", Geophysics, Vol 64,No. 3, 800-808. Pullammanappallil, S.K., and I.ouie, J.N., 1993,"Inversion of seismic reflection traveltimes using a nonlinear optimization scheme", Geophysics, v. 58, p. 1607-1620. Pullammanappallil, S.K., and Louie, J.N., 1994, "A generalized simulated-annealing optimization for inversion of first arrival times", BSSA, v. 84,p. 1397-1409. Redpath, B. B., 1973, Seismic refraction exploration for engineering site investigations: US Army Engineer Waterway Experiment Station Explosive Excavation Research Laboratory,Livermore, California, Technical Report E-73-4, 51 p. Xia, J., Miller, R.D, and Park, C.B., 1999, "Es6mation of near-surface shear-wave velocity by inversion of Rayleigh wave," Geophysics, 64(3), 691-700. Caterpiller, 2004, Caterpiller Performance Handbook edition 35,p.1-59— 1-63. 16 �� ' �_� uni i I I f �.� . ', �,.�':: .. � i I nv�� iin ?,C � ii ��i,Yl(il�� .�. . � I I �__��1� ��-1� i�1F�9 �-i'=.-I �i'IORT4�1-2�V�lI_Fli< �i-� ) �i�GfNICi�AL _ , 9�5.:.}S{ ' .I�. . . I� �.. January 13, 2014 Wright & Company, Inc. Attn: Jen Wright P.O. Box 7170 Avon, Colarado 81620 ��_j�m�ii �ht�t��ugh(ancl��n��,iiiviu��a,i,� Job No. 109 310D Subject: Stacked Boulder Retaining Wall Design Section, Proposed Timber Ridge Development, 1280 North Frontage Road West, Vail, Colorado Gentlemen: As requested by Alpine Engineering, we have conducted analysis and design of a typical stacked boulder retaining wall section proposed for grade change at the subject site. We previously conducted a subsoil study for design of foundations at the site and presented our findings in a report dated January 7, 2014, Job No. 109 310D. Proposed Walls: The stacked boulder walls are proposed along the uphill side of Buildings C and D adjacent to new parking lot, and for modification of the existing gabion bin walls uphill of Building B. The boulder wall behind Buildings C and D will have a maximum retained height of 6 feet, face batter of'L> horizontal to 1 vertical and masimum back slope of 4 horizontal to 1 vertical. The boulder wall uphill of Building B wi11 have a inaximum retained height of 4 feet, face batter of'/Z horizontal to 1 vertical or flatter and maximum back slope of 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. Soil Parameters: The boulder walls will bear on undisturbed natural granular soils or compacted structural fill as recommended in our previous report. The retained soils are estimated to have an internal friction angle of 36 degrees and moist unit weight of 135 pc£ The earth pressure loading was taken as "active" soil condition and maximuin back slope of 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. The groundwater level is relatively deep and an underdrain is assumed to control temporary seasonal seepage conditions. The embankment behind Buildings C and D (6 feet high) and the hillside behind Building B (currently retained by gabion basket walls) were estimated to have adequate stability under the design conditions, and construction of the new walls will not adversely affect rl �. i.f.'�� i � �� i �iil,�� .��`lillo'_ / �'� l�i �-�l( - v�` �ir�lUl�lli� J �il �h��_��)�;�7 _ Wright& Company, Inc. January 13, 2014 Page 2 that slope stability. The effective unit weight of the overall boulder wall section was estimated as 130 pcf. Design Analysis: The design criteria for grauity walls presented by NAVFAC DM-7 for overiurning, sliding and bearing capacity were used in our analysis. The typical stacked boulder wall section, shown on Figure BW-1.0, was used in our analysis. The boulder wall was modeled as 6 feet high, 4 feet wide with a 2 horizontal to 1 vertical back slope and no toe embedment for purposes of analysis. A minimum factor of safety of 1.5 was taken as having adequate stability as given by NAVFAC DM-7. Overiurning safety factor is given as: FS =Boulder Weight x 'h Base Width/Horizontal Earth Loading x 1/3 Wall Height =3.12kx2'/0.81kx2' =3.85—OK Sliding Resistance safety factor is given as: FS =Boulder Weight x tangent(Wall Friction)/Horizontal Earth Loading =3.12k x tangent 24 degrees/0.81k= 1.72— OK MaYimum (toe)bearing pressure is given as: Qmax=Horizontal Earth Loading x 1/3 Wall Height—Boulder Weight x (%a Base Width—Eccentricity)/Eccentricity Qmax—0.81 k x 2' —3.12k x 0.71' / 1.29' = 1868 psf—OK(3000 psf allowable bearing pressure) Based on our analysis and experience with stacked boulder walls in this area, the design wall section presented on Figure BW-1.0 is adequate for both 4 feet high and 6 feet high proposed stacked walls when constructed according to the typical detail. The analysis and recommendations submitted in this letter are based on our site observations, the previous subsurface exploration at the site and the contractor constnxcting the walls according to the detail. Variations in the subsurface conditions or wall construction deviations could change our findings and recommendations. We should Job No. 109 310D �-�Pt2Ch Wright & Company, Inc. January 13, 2014 Page 3 observe the wall excavations for possible variations and conduct additional analysis as needed. Tf you have any qt�estions or need further assistance, please call eur office. Sincerely, HEPWORTH-PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. - ��N�'•�s•p°�GL . j\ ..��,�5`7��q •�4, . f'� - ' • Steven L. Pawlak, P.E. �;. � `�� . �� a;��,s�� :� J'l�•�Y�N&!�',�m� Rev. by: DEH 9l£pF UOL.�� SLP/ksw Attachment: Figure BW-1.0-Typical Stacked Boulder Wall Detail cc: Alpine Engineering - Garry Brooks (bruc�l.�n�al�inecivil.coui) RA Nelson - Tim Carpenter («,,rF,;rnter��ranelsrni.cou�) Martin-Martin - Sean Molloy (��uuli� �_ nuu�tinmartin mtn.a�ni) Gorman & Company - Patrick Patrello (,��r,,u, I'o�c�,,i�i ni,uiu��.i.cuni) .lob No. 109 310D GeUPteCh BOULDER (TYP) � REF: NOTE 1 Z �Ma�1,.-' i� ;:i � ) � � '_ I BACKRLL � t � REF: NOTE 4 � 1 � � H=6'(inax) �- � � i � 1 z� DRAIN GRAVEL J � � REF NOTE 3 , � PROPOSEDFINISHEDGRADE �� `� �� . (ELEVATION VARIES) � � � �, s F..a ..<�.�°-> •, �+---� DRAIN PIPE �;bt� b� a��,�� ; �- REF: NOTE2 J�Nl,• Pq� 9"(min) ,�q� ,��se b:>" e,,.� > .'b o, e;'� i;,r.....,�. E�, �,+'G�STf�y�.a?".�- � GRAVEL .Q•Q' � , l C:�' - 2/3 H - FOUNDATION �'` f . *. 1622� �* 4' MINIMUM REF: NOTE5 '��1 J�.�'- - '�� ' �� TYPICAL STACKED BOULDER WALL DETAIL �JqT�'p`'O�POO n NOT TO SCALE NOTES: 1. Boulders with minimum size of 2 -3'. Embed first course a minimum of 9" below adjacent final graded ground surface. Arrange in a manner to maximum interlocking action, 2. 4" diameter perforated pipe sloped to a suitable gravity outlet. 3. 4 inch screened rock. Minimum depth of 1 2 feet Cover top side with filter fabric such as Mirafi 140N. Place between boulders as needed to fill voids. 4. Granular soils placed in lifts and compacted to at least 95% of maximum standard Proctor density within 2% of optimum moisture content. Maximum 4" size and 25% passing No. 200 Sieve. 5. Minimum 6-inch depth of base course compacted to at least 95% maximum standard Proctor density within 2% of optimum moisture content. H TYPICAL STACKED BOULDER 109 310B �'teCh FIG BW-1.0 H _P W WALL DETAIL WASTE REMOVAL MANAGEMENTAND OPERATIONS PLAN Facilities for trash and recycling collection, storage and removal shall be housed in fully enclosed areas located in three buildings along the perimeter of the parking lot with removal occurring at the entrances of the buildings in designated loading zones.Trash and recycle removal shall be provided by a third party contract managed by the Community Management Company. Recycling collection facilities shall be provided and shall be as convenient to residents as trash collection facilities provided. KRM CONSULTANTS, fNC. REC4RD � P.O. Box 4572 • VaiE,Colorado 87 658 • 970-949-9391 � s � 's a � � TO: �tocicy Mauntair� Snowguards, Inc. 2055 S. Raritan St. � Denver, CO 80223 � f ; � � DATE.• 3113/14 JOB NUMBER: 1403-d9 � PROJECT.• Lion's Ridge Snow Guards s s. s � ❑ RFI ❑ MEETING NOTES � RESPONSE ❑ CLARIFICATION/CHANGE � � d Per your request, I have reviewed the proposed layouts #or all 4 buildings and speci'Fications for the � various propased snow guard types or� the roof of the above referenced project. 7here are three types of �snow guards proposed for the 4 buildings. Tf�ey are as follows: �ortions of �he roof are 9/12 pitch wifh an 80psf snow load per Town of Vaif code. The roofing material is � asphalt shingles over OSB sheathing. The first type of snow guarcEs proposed for this portion is 3-bar bolt � down fence. The brackets for this fence are to be spaced no greater than '72" O.C. and attached �o the � sheathing with 7/16" diameter by 3" lag screws. The second type of guard for th9s portion of the roofi are � to be SnowTra�per ST9 snow guards. These snow guards are to be attached with {3}-#8 wood screws ' per guards with a minimum of 112" penetration into #he wood raaf sheathing. � � The other areas of the roof are a 3/12 pitch with a 100psfi snow load per Town of Vaif code. The roofing � ma�erial is a standing seam metal roof. The proposed snow guard for this area consists of a 2-bar system utRlizing AceClamp ML's clamped to the searr�s of the metal roof. These clamps are to E�e spaced no rrtore � tE�an 16" apart (every metal pane[ seam}. The proposed layout and recommended faster�ing are approved based on the assumptions above. I# any ` assumptions made are incorrect, contact KRM Consul#ants for alternate solutions. � DiscEaimer: KRM Cansu�tar�ts is only verifying the cannection of the snowguards to ti�e roof and is not responsible for the layout of the snowguards or fior the roof structure itself to support the retained snow. � i i SIGNED: C�PY TO: � i r � Joe M. 'M ley, PE � �;�., � � .�, ��p,p0 fir�Cjs�, I p�oaea REVIEW . �0�;�\�,�.a. Hci��G F�t� s o � • m o • J o � �II't'1 �. H2�"11"IUI"Fl, P� �°Q a�,�� , O�� 4c:% `�s��ONAt��'�� ' .;.�:._ � i ��i� 1 3 20�4 � i 2 bar Z2 Clamp to seam snow fence 3 bar bolt down snow fence i� � � � u � 2 � � 2 1 4 3 � �.� A113 1. ROOF PITCHES TO BE AS INDICATED ST9 Snow guard 3 row pattern (24"o/c x 12"vertically) A114 A114 A114 A114 2. ALL VENT CAPS SHALL BE PREFINISHED METAL AND LOCATED TO REAR „ „ , iz�-6 i/z�� I zi�-s i/z�� is�-6�� zi�-s i/z° 11�-�i/z�� -�i/z° zi�-s i/z�� i4�-4 i/z° zi�-s i/z° iz�-s° SIDES OF RIDGE. NO VISIBLE PVC VENT STACKS WILL BE PERMITTED - ST9 supplemental snow guards (36 o/c x 24 r � � - - � COORDINATE WITH HVAC AND PLUMBING CONTRACTORS FOR ALL ROOF REAL ESTATE vertically) 1'-0° 19'-s 1/2° 1�-0° PENETRATIONS oH oH DEVELOPMENT & , , , , �, � 3. PAINT ALL ROOF MOUNTED ITEMS THAT ARE NOT PREFINISHED TO MANAGEMENT ° o MATCH ROOF COLORS, INCLUDING PVC VENTS, ETC. R2 R2 R2 RZ 4. CONTINUOUS SHINGLE OVER RIDGE VENTTHROUGHOUT. VENTTO 1'-0" � - � ° � SHORT OF ROOF RIDGE END - 18 SQ. IN. FREE AREA PER LINEAL FT. 2OO N. MAIN STREET N � m 5. TYPICAL VALLEY- PREFINISHED METAL W-FLASHING OVER ICE & WATER WI 53575 o m R1 R1 �n 3�-0�� OREGON� � � 4'-0" � 4'-0" oH SHIELD. CONTOUR AT VALLEY r_ 6. TYPICAL EAVE -ASPHALT SHINGLES OVER ICE & WATER SHIELD OVER � - � - PREFINISHED METAL GUTTER APRON �1� � ° o 0 1Z9-��$� 12�-��8 � ° 7. SEE ELEVATIONS FOR J-BOX LOCATIONS FOR HEAT TAPE FOR GUTTER AND , , \ II - _� I M �',� _ �J I- M � T_ z, I R1 FUTURE HEAT TAPE. PROVIDE HEAT TAPE FOR ALL DOWNSPOUTS, � � � ,�`-�-- GUTTERS, UNDERGROUND HARDPIPE TO DAYLIGHT, AND FUTURE 3' HIGH �_ � � ' � �- ' SECTION OF HEAT TAPE AT ROOF EAVE ABOVE GUTTER. o i i I i i i � � � ' � � � ' _ � T', : - 8. DOWNSPOUT LOCATIONS TO BE VERIFIED BY INSTALLER, ARCHITECT& _ _ _ 0 0 - --- -__ _ -• -- -- -- NoN coMausTaB�E sHEaTHiN� ;; � „ � � � ' �� ;; ; � �„ �: � , ; � SITE UTILITY CONTRACTOR-SEE SITE UTILITY PLAN FOR DOWNSPOUT � � u �_ � u i . ^,_�. u i _ i i � . r. � i i . - ._-- - - �- --- - � : �, I ; � � \ ° � ° � rvo PENErRaTiorvs @ RooF o = � o � � � `� UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE PLAN � � � �� , , � - � a � ' _ � , � , , � _ � � o � _ , , � _ ' � ' °� � ��'_- ' ' -_ �` -'_�°--_� .- ' .`� � � �_� r r 9. PROVIDE ENGINEERED SNOW GUARD FENCE SYSTEM PER ROOF SLOPE \ o i � � i � � � � u � i i � � . . '. , . . .. I i.._-...il'I - c-I = - ' °° �_'.` . - -�� __ `_ - �� -_`_ '° � � '� � .° _ �� - .�� _- �� °' °' TYPE AND SNOW LOAD. SUBMIT FOR APPROVAL. PROVIDE DESIGN BUILD , - . _ _ _ � � ENGINEERED SNOW FENCE AND SNOW GUARD SYSTEMS @ ALL ROOF N 0 o q o I AREAS. SEE SPEC FOR MORE INFORMATION. ��5�� 5 \ � r' � r' � _� I r' i . \ � � �� A114 � � � � � � ,i � ^ s��r� ; � _:�i '� i u -i ,_ i -u _-i _ ii i-, � _ ,- i -�i� _ i -, � �r��-°-�!�r�- i � i i ii , i i . --- � R1 \/ � � . . L , i i ,� �r_- _ _ � _ - - -- - -q �- ---� -- - ---� - � � i A113 3 � o � J : _ � _ ° � � o __. . _�,i i � ' ' L o x 4 A113 4� RA - HING - - 13� 1�� TED ZONE NON COMBUSTABLE SHEAT � � � � � d � - - � � ° NO PENETRATIONS OF SHEATHING - ROOF & T a �" � � � -- '- � �� , . NON COMBUSTABLE SHEATHING � ` ' ' � - _ _ � � `r ' � `-' � u ° t : - � i- � -z - -s ' � NO PENETRATIONS @ ROOf � �i_ �_; _ . _ _ � � � � BUILDING FACES � ,� r n � � � -- � "-- -- � T � _ -r� r � L � i � �� L 3��1'-0" R2 \ � _ _ _ L - L � o� � � � i � i , i JI _ .�-_ � I �I _. -�.---q-- � IJ-I - � �. il _ .. . � � . � � , . , . .. , : .. . N `7�' - I .._ . . _ .. 1 J� .._ _ N � J� -1 � �_o o_ � � � i_ �i R1 � I ' �i _ � u � -r � - i 2�_�,� � N N _ __ I � � - .. n1 � .1_. � _T�. _ i I L_I, , . `� � . '.. �I _ � �H � I__ i -i� I I" -- -`- -T�, li _ Lf -- ��-- i - -��---q-- � IJ-I - � i - � .. - . � � — � ` � I �—�--� li - - � O _� O O . .. __� � `�' ll �i�I - I I � �, � C � p r M / \ � f , _ � , �� _ , , � M W ° x -o x M / 128'-10 27 32" m ° _ M p M p 130'-10 27/32" / m O �..� �A' N o� I 2'-0" � 3"/1'-0" _ W ^ n' � 3��1 � I R3 R1 R1 I �- ► R3 � � � ,�/� � m � ^ O �i�/ L _ _ � � - - - � � _ � � �--� o OVERHANG @ R2 � O M `-' 10' 6" � CENTERLINE OF FIREWALL - u Q W I O R2 R2 R2 10'-6" 1'-0" 17'-6" 1'-0" � � � � �� OH OH � V 11'-31/2" 19'-6" 19'-61/2" 19'-6" 11'-3" 7'-3" 19'-6" 19'-9" 19'-6" 1I'-0" � � � — — �- ,� ,� � � •� _ � � c/� W � > BLDG 1 - ROOF PLAN .� Z o � � A113 2 L O SCALE: 1/8..=�._o., o �- � � 155'-1" � � - Z 3 10'-6 1/2" 5'-11" __,� 13'-8 1/2" 9'-4 1/4" � 8'-2 3/4" I. 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11" � 10'-8" I- 10'-8" 5'-11" 13'-8 1/2" � 8'-2 3/4" 8'-2 3/4" I- 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11° 10'-8" OVERALL PLAN NOTES � � O O +� �r �r 1. SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR DIMENSIONS OF FOUNDATION WALLS & SLAB. M 5'-61/2" 5'-0" 4'-0" 6'-8 1/2" 3'-0" 4'-6" 9'-6" 3'-7' 2'-8 1/2" 7'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 13'-4" 4'-0" 4'-0" 7'-0" 2'-8 1/2" 3'-7" 9'-3 1/2" 3'-7" 2'-8 1/2" 7'-0" 4'-0" 5'-4" 5'_4" W � .� -- s ,� _ .t '� 2. SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Q N � � � � r'1 3. SEE EXTERIOR BUILDING ELEVATIONS FOR EXTERIOR WALL TYPES AND FINISHES. a 13osc 1306C 1304C 1302C 4. STUD DEMISING (PARTY) WALLS ON THIS PLAN ARE DIMENSIONED TO CENTERLINE OF WALL U.N.O. � E1 ' - - - E1 � � E1 E1 � 5. ALL INTERIOR STUD DIMENSIONING IS FROM STUD FACE TO STUD FACE U.N.O. a � E4 , E4 � � E4 ' - - � 6. SEE ENLARGED SCALE PLANS FOR 1/4" SCALE PLANS FOR UNITS & COMMON AREAS Ei 1 i 1 Oi E4 7. ALL INTERIOR UNIT DOOR NUMBERS ARE LOCATED ON UNIT PLANS. _ _ E1 _ , � _ _ _ _ E1 _ - _ 8. DOOR LOCATIONS ARE DOOR WITDH PLUS 8 INCHES (4 INCHES EACH SIDE) TO ACCOUNT FOR TRIM U.N.O. ° O �sosB ° 9 � �so6a � ° 1 E1 0 13046 � 1 Oi ° 13ozB y � 9. SEE SHEET A601 FOR COMMON AREA DOOR SCHEDULE "� 2 BEDROOM "� - - "� a 2 BEDROOM ' !`� "� ° 2 BEDROOM N "� 2 BEDROOM "� B 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH 10. SEEE SHEET A602 FOR UNIT DOOR SCHEDULE & ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES c� � 1308 1 1306 1304 - 1 1302 I � Project No. 14LION-00-01 � � Plot Date. 2/20/2014132:51PM � W 2 io � W5 MODEL D MODEL D � MODEL D � MODEL E � W5 5 5 Drawn by: crd/dmk � 34'-8" $° 3'-2 3/4°-3'-2 3/4" =8" 33'-8" 11" 33'-8" 8° 3'-2 3/4"-3'-2 3/4° -8" 33'-8" � � 1'-0" 1�-�� ^ N 1308 1306A . . _ 1304A 1302A _ _. 1 ' p N Date Issue Descri tion � � � DN � J: i I i �N � I � O i � , - �� `� � , � 6 2014.02.07 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT � � -�i s , ;� i � �� 0 i i � � A714 �- �, �� _ _ - _ �� i - - � l��l __ .._ � � � _.� _. _�-. �-� _ � � I � � �)� - o ° ) � � � � � �� 1 I-� -' � � � �� `� �� - � � � � � �_° � � � t� °� ��_ � � � � E1 � � - -- � e, � r/�, �1'_ (�� _ �� r /� � �—� �, - � � � d' � � _� � � ; � A113 3 E1 \U� �,J l� 9—I � — �� I � _ � I—P � \_J� l'°`J' � � � �i I� —'� tl� � — - I �"`� — � I�^ '```_ 4 113 � 1 � � � � Jl A � J�J '� OC�I_ � � O � � �� N � � _ — � � O - - ` ' '' O p L -- - � � ii C, � ; J , � � _ a � � 0 N � STAI RS � = - �1 RS � I`� I 1307A 1311 1305A 1303A 310 rv 1301A ^' 33'-8" 7'-5 1/2" 33'-8" 11" 33'-8" 7'-5 1/2" 23�-�� 1 BEDROOM ' ' 8�� - 8�� 1 BATH 8' - - ---- - 8' 2 BEDROOM 2 BEDROOM 2 BEDROOM 1301 � � 48"WALL TYP. 48"WALL TYP. 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH � � I 1307 1° 1305 1303 � MODEL A i' � � MODEL C MODEL C MODEL C 13016 A � i_ I 1 I � I 1307B I � I 10 �I L I 13056 1 � ��'�� 13036 O 10 2 2 N �� \/ �� ,.. E1 E4 ,� 4 E1 I � E1 Z � Ev Sheet Title � E4 E1 00 N E4 E4 I � 1301C � E1 -� E1 E1 ' BLDG 1 F3 & ROOF � 1307C 1305C 1303C ° o � PLANS � N 5'-3 1/2" 5'-0" 3'-4" 5'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/2"3'-0" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 3/4" 3'-0"2'-7 1/2" 5'-6 1/2" 3'-4" 4'-0" 12'-7" 4'-0" 3'-4" I 5'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/2"3'-0" 7'-913/4" 7'-9 3/4" 6'-4" 5'-4 1/2" 3'_0" - � - - - ' - 1'-0" 10'-31/2" 5'-11" ' 11'-6� 6'-9" 8'-11/2" 6'-9" �11'-6" 5'-11° 10'-31/� 10'-31/2" 5'-11" � 11'-6" � 6'-9" 8'-11/2" 6'-111/2" 11'-6" 16'-0" � � I 155'-1" 2 Sheet No. z � 4 3 BLDG 1 - 3RD FLOOR A112 A114 A114 A113 A114 A114 � f C � � ° Z � SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" < � 2 bar Z2 clamp to seam snow fence ,� 3 � 4 � � A123 u 1 r 2 � � � A124 A124 A124 A124 1. ROOF PITCHES TO BE AS INDICATED � �� 3 bar bolt down snow fence 1 2. ALL VENT CAPS SHALL BE PREFINISHED METAL AND LOCATED TO REAR �6�-i�� s5'-i" SIDES OF RIDGE. NO VISIBLE PVC VENT STACKS WILL BE PERMITTED - �' '�'- COORDINATE WITH HVAC AND PLUMBING CONTRACTORS FOR ALL ROOF ST9 snow guard 3 row pattern (24" o/c x 12"vertically) 12'-s° zi'-s i/2° i4'-n i/2" Zi'-s i/2° i9'-3" � � Zi'-s i/2° i5'-6° Zi'-s i/2" 9'-6 1/2" 3'-0" REAL ESTATE - PENETRATIONS 3. PAINT ALL ROOF MOUNTED ITEMS THAT ARE NOT PREFINISHED TO DEVELOPMENT & ST9 supplemental snow guards (36" o/c x 24"verticall ) I I I I � I I � MATCH ROOF COLORS, INCLUDING PVC VENTS, ETC. MANAGEMENT N 4. CONTINUOUS SHINGLE OVER RIDGE VENT THROUGHOUT. VENT TO 1'-0" � M LOWER UPPER SHORT OF ROOF RIDGE END - 18 SQ. IN. FREE AREA PER LINEAL FT. ° N RZ 5. TYPICAL VALLEY- PREFINISHED METAL W-FLASHING OVER ICE & WATER 2OO N. MAIN STREET � R2 � 12��_��8�� 129,_��8„ R2 � RZ SHIELD. CONTOUR AT VALLEY OREGON, WI 53575 m "' ' � ` 6. TYPICAL EAVE -ASPHALT SHINGLES OVER ICE & WATER SHIELD OVER u-r_..., � m �_,_ ,_, p � m PREFINISHED METAL GUTTER APRON ,:; � - ' - -_r`-- �T 7. SEE ELEVATIONS FOR J-BOX LOCATIONS FOR HEAT TAPE FOR GUTTER AND � ' , ° �� I � � FUTURE HEAT TAPE. PROVIDE HEAT TAPE FOR ALL DOWNSPOUTS, � � " �i — � � �. GUTTERS, UNDERGROUND HARDPIPE TO DAYLIGHT, AND FUTURE 3 HIGH SECTION OF HEAT TAPE AT ROOF EAVE ABOVE GUTTER. R1 � R1 8. DOWNSPOUT LOCATIONS TO BE VERIFIED BY INSTALLER, ARCHITECT& : � 3 � _ _�_�-� � � � , _ ' _ �- , � -� _ � � SITE UTILITY CONTRACTOR- SEE SITE UTILITY PLAN FOR DOWNSPOUT Ji, \ ° � � � � . I N t � . . '_ _ N N ' UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE PLAN J � - � �� -, � �, `� , � ' - �, �, � ,� - � � � ,� � � , � � � _ I� �_ _',_.__,_._,- ' °' �� _�-`.- -��----. , , , °' ' , , , , ,, , ,, , , �� , , - ' °' �� : . , , „- 9. PROVIDE ENGINEERED SNOW GUARD FENCE SYSTEM PER ROOF SLOPE - - , � � �,_�_� -- --T. - --�-�----- _ - TYPE AND SNOW LOAD. SUBMIT FOR APPROVAL. PROVIDE DESIGN BUILD 5 ENGINEERED SNOW FENCE AND SNOW GUARD SYSTEMS @ ALL ROOF A124 � � � � � � � AREAS. SEE SPEC FOR MORE INFORMATION. � � � � ��O��la ��G�� m m R1 R1 � � ,, ii � ii � n � � n � � � � � � ii n n a � i � �� ; � i � �� ; , i ` i � ; i �� i � �i �; � i ; i �� u � � a �� r � I ��, i i I �;;� � �° ,, �i � � ii u � i � � � - J n , i , i � i i u \/ o � �. s ��i� � .i s -i :- ul u d o � -- � � .JL� . - . -..-.— . . . . . . . , . , _, � � � ; J , � �� i L ii � a 4 RATED ZONE - NON COMBUSTABLE SHEATHING - � � � � � � - ` �`_' ° NO PENETRATIONS OF SHEATHING - ROOF & 3'-0 i. � i. i n ri i i i �. u. . o � n ..ri. i i , � N i� ri. i i i i � 'i J - -- - �� ' � � � ...,. i _ i 4� �� r, i - \ � ' _ i \ / N . � � r I , r r _ _ . N _ . __ __ _ . _� _ ,� = BUILDING FACES � � . . '-r' _ '-r' � . . N _2 \ � J! �I i � 1 � 1 . - - - - �_�. - _ � \ I �L�I I �L�I � -�' I�I � � o � - � � � - ,� -- -- - 13' 1" ��r�'� �. s r RJ-riT�-,T �s� � . �� - � - -_ �� ' T J . . . . . � I , I�I 1� .. . . . — - ---- , � , . _ .. _ _ _ _ o � � 1 '' II II R1 R1 z� �� '- '�i �. _ _ _ _ �. _ ..u. . _o_� � �n ..-ri u - u r u ' o � � i i � �' lu ii 0 r�n�.o u I�t�_�� _ I�� I' '' �- ___ ��'f � ' � -` i �_ —�� N ,:�. � `1 _ —- . . c-I - \ -_—_—._.-—_,-_. \ � M C _ � ' _ � ' T T - m m � � r T T F� _ _ o T _ - _ _ _ _ _ T T r _ _ _ T T T W m mT T - - - - - - - - . T - N — \ I � i—i I I � , � — - ,n N R2 3��12" � \ 3"/12" A' o � �� i , � � � � i W � � �, , `� ^ R3 �„ � R3 , ! � � R2 O 10'-6'�. I R2 � - � - � - - - � - R2 � - _ � � ' BLDG 2 - ROOF PLAN = o � 2 � cc � SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" � O 1'-0" 19'-6" 19'-9" 19'-6" 5'-3" 13'-3" 19'-6" 19'-6 1/2" 19'-6" 11'-3' � � � 65'-0" � 2 s3'-o i/z" ,r OVERALL PLAN NOTES C� � � � 1. SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR DIMENSIONS OF FOUNDATION WALLS & SLAB. N W ` 2. SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION � / A123 3. SEE EXTERIOR BUILDING ELEVATIONS FOR EXTERIOR WALL TYPES AND FINISHES. � Z O � LL � 4. STUD DEMISING (PARTY) WALLS ON THIS PLAN ARE DIMENSIONED TO CENTERLINE OF WALL U.N.O. O � � � 5. ALL INTERIOR STUD DIMENSIONING IS FROM STUD FACE TO STUD FACE U.N.O. Z � � Zss-i 6. SEE ENLARGED SCALE PLANS FOR 1/4" SCALE PLANS FOR UNITS & COMMON AREAS ^/ O O io'-$° 5�-11�� 13�-s i/z�� s'-2 3/4�� * s'-2 3/4° L i3�-s 1/2° s�-11�� R Zo�-s� Zo�-s° 5�-Zi�� , 13�-s i/z" � a'-2 3/4° � 9'-41/4�� i3�-s i/2�� 5�-Zi�� Zo�-61/z�� 7. ALL INTERIOR UNIT DOOR NUMBERS ARE LOCATED ON UNIT PLANS. � V� 5'-4° 5'-4° 4'-0" ��-o° 2�-a i/2�� 3'-6" 9'-5 1/2° 3'-6° 2�-s i/2" �'-o" n�-o" 4'-0° i3'-4" 4�-0° 4�-0" ��-o" 2�-a i/z° 3'-�'� ; 9�-6" n�-6" 3'-0° 6'-8 i/2° 4�-0" 5�-0° 5'-6 1/2" 8. DOOR LOCATIONS ARE DOOR WITDH PLUS 8 INCHES (4 INCHES EACH SIDE) TO ACCOUNT FOR TRIM U.N.O. � � ~ - � f - . � - N 9. SEE SHEET A601 FOR COMMON AREA DOOR SCHEDULE � � 10. SEEE SHEET A602 FOR UNIT DOOR SCHEDULE & ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES 2302C I 2304C - - 2306C 2308C � � E1 - I E1 � � E1 - E1 � �n J �n �n �n 0o I ao 00 — ao E1 � 1 E1 � E1 1 E1 1 O E1 _ _ � 1 i; 2302B ° 1 1 � 23046 ;, ° O O ° ll 23068 ° O O ° 2308B O1 0 N : I� 2 BEDROOM N _ N 2 BEDROOM �� N N- � , g 2 BEDROOM - �_ _ c� 2 BEDROOM - N ��, N 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH 2302 1 2304 WZ 2306 1 2308 Project No. 14LION-00-01 � - Plot Date: � ip � � 2/20/2014 1:32:59 PM MODEL D � �/U5 MODEL D MODEL D � W5 MODEL E 0 Drawn by: crd/dmk 0 _ �, � � � � �' � 33'-8" 3'-2 3/4" 3'-2 3/4" 33'-8" 11" 33'-8" 3'-2 3/4" 3'-2 3/4" 34'-8" N N z3ozA 8�� 1�-�� $ 2304A 2306A 8" 1'-0" $ 2308A Date Issue Description � ` - I ° ° = 2014.02.07 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT S 6 I i _ CY�v -_: � � J I i I DiV --- � r' _, a , C �I ' � - - o -- - � - � � � - � v A124 . ,� o �'� . 1 � —i�- � � � � %' � 1 � � � � , , � - - - — � � � � � � —. .__ ��. a � a � . _ � /--- � � �l � �� f�— . _.� .. � �� _ — � � � � � EZ � — � ` � � C�❑� � l -- — — —� — , � ■ t_ � ( �, � , o ❑� — � � — A123 4 `" li K' �' 3 Al2 , �, — _ � � �' �C � '� — `�� — - , , � _ � � � _ � — � — ` � �� — _ � ; -- — _� _ � � � � — � � � E1 _ - � n 0 � O � � O � _ � � -�0 � 1 � U �; - � �� i � � � i i � � � � ° �J �. c�j �� -- - s r a i R S `°', -� 8 � STAIRS �, I � � 2310� — � � � 2311� N � � ____ N 2303A 2305A 2307A � 23'-7" z3osA 7'-51/2" 33'-8" 11" 33'-8" 8" 7'-51/2" 8' 33'-8' E1 1 BEDROOM 8"� 8" � �, O 1 BATH 48"WALL TYP. I � 2301 48"WALL TYP. 2 BEOROOM 2 BEDROOM 2 BEDROOM `i � � 2 BATH 2 BATH W5 � W5 2 BATH io MODEL A W5 1O W5 2303 Wz 2305 �0 2307 � 23016 MODEL C MODEL C MODEL C _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _, _ - - V = � - - - A � c � O2 10 0 23036� o O1 � 1 l�' 2305B � O2 10 O2 � 2307Bi 4 O . � "` _ \! N N ��N N E 1 N N ��4 N .... .., - . .. .� ._ .. .._.. \ _ , _ _ . _.. . � � E1 � S eet Tit e �n E1 R3 E1 O2 I�2 � OZ ��/ � Z3�1C . N N , N � � � BLDG 2 F3 & ROOF E1 � N E1 E1 � o — 2303C � � 2305C 2307C °° P LA N S �, _ N BLDG 2 - 3RD FLOOR 3'-0" 5'-4 1/2" 6'-4" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 3/4" 3'-0"2'-7 1/2" 5'-6 1/2" 3'-4" 4'-0" 12'-7" 4'-0" 3'-4" 5'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/2"3'-0" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 3/4" 3'-0"2'-7 1/2" 5'-6 1/2" 3'-4" 5'-0" 5'-3 1/2" 1 � 10'-1" 5'-11" ' 11'-6" 6'-111/2" 8'-11/2" 6'-9" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-31/2" 10'-31 2" 5'-11" 11'-6" 6'-9" 8'-11/2" 6'-9" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-31/2" 1'- " SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" Sheet No. � � 155'-1° 3 4 2 1 z A122 f,F A124 � A124 C � A123 F A124 � A124 M1P � < 2 bar Z2 clamp to seam snow fence � � � � � � � � � 3 bar bolt down snow fence - 1 A133 4 z 3 � �� ___ A134 A134 A134 A134 ST9 snow guard 3 row pattern (24�� O�C X I2��vertically) � ' ROOF AT GROUND LEVEL ENTRY 10'-9 1/2" 19'-6" 19'-6 1/2' 19'-6" 23'-5" 19'-6" 1'-0" REAL ESTATE 1�-O�� 19�-6�� 19�-111�2�� 19�-6�� ROOFATGROUNDLEVELENTRY DEVELOPMENT & ST9 supplemental snow guards (36" o/c x � Z4��vertically) 10�-6�� ROOFATGROUNDLEVELENTRY 10�-6�� 10�-6�� MANAGEMENT � I � � � � Rz - 200 N. MAIN STREET \ R3 _ � `„ �' 3" 12" - 3" 12" R3 N 3' 12" � `� OREGON, WI 53575 ,ri R2 � R2 R1 c� � ,-i m � I I R2 ,n �, _ R1 - � R2 _ � rn ^ � � `� 130'-10 27/32" \ ° �n ,� R3 0 '� u�r-,: - Ol � m Ol Ol N „-,,_..,_,. p _ — M m � � q I fn q �m � ; � � "� , � : ; �� i� I I I ' I ' � � I � I I I �r � �� r�'' '�L ='- _'_-`. ��-- --- � � _�_ � _u�u�-��, I I I I I I �;I �� _ � i I �� i � ROOF AT GROUND LEVEL ROOF AT GROUND LEVEL �— � _ _ �� _ �� , a 1-II i i _ ._i_. � _ _._ _ i �I !f � s � � � I � � ll. _ � _ � V_ _ � � .. � � � � � I V � li � 4'-0" � �. _ � �. � � 1 �� RZ _ u - � �i i� i �� r"_�' I �I � �� i i -w I� I _ ° I - 14�-0�� l.�f� _ � . . _ . _ . . .�. _ . _ _ �. . . _ _ �u � I ru lu , 1 Ti,�C .�Ci R3 2�_p�� _ . � � � u. i � i I� �� ll � - � --u. � � u�i � i_ _�.� _u �.�.u_ �_ _i � ul � � -„-��I _i -. �_.r -i. _ - - �r _,_ I _ . _ _ � _ � 2'_0„ N ll � � � � N �L_ I _ �i ��i_ . II._. _..L. ._ _ �. _ . _�. . .__ ._ . .. .�.. . _ L I _ . .�:. �II � � ,f . .�r III. _ .l _ _ r . ` ci - r II � r r_ t � t il �O I`l S U�t�r`l t � � � �u i I lu = u�� ,-� i� s s i u ' �� I � u �_ °� _ °° � � � _ii _ _ ii � _ o _ _ _u ,� �_� _ . - - - - � � � � i �li i� a � � r � _ � _ � �� u �i i � ,�-, � �,i i u- � i 1i � �. �� i� � - - _ . . . _ . _ _ _ - _ - _ , i � ; I __ �u � o \ , I � � � � �� , a � i � i i i � , , A133 4 � ��. �� i � �� '�� L i \ , �I� � �` , , � I'� � � N 3 A133 � �� N . . . � � �. , . . � . II II I I II I I I II I � I _ _ _ _ W c-I � _i�ti-i c-I % C ' ' _ R 1 �-i � �--I ♦ �--I T c-I T �--I 5 � � I � I � I � R1 I A134 _,__, �,_.�- ' -- - ' - _��_r--,�� -!---, __ _ i i � ; � r � �i _: i r' � u_ �i i i s i �i i i i i i i i i — - � _ � , �i�'—'� = i � - o � li Y I � -- I I� � � � ` , _ G T � � �. �. RZ - , N , 7. .� .II I � G N � � . , _ � �, � � � R 1 e1 � rl � � \1�_1�` , .T� r � . I Q1 _ _ _�i� __ _ 1 � _ _ _ i � u ir� �r � � \ -p \ � r r . I . �� : .� r,. . .. : , .Ii .i II, . - .. . . i... ,� - ii I ::� ` _� I� � II � � 0- � � �� . . . .. . . . . .� . . �.: i� .. . � . . , . � .._ : . . , i i � II- . , , , . . . _ . _ . . . . . . . . _ l J !! I� ��u II. li __ , S . , .. _ 1 p - _ . . T _r . 17f. 2_� - � � O ..7C . . �-..� � , - .� � i, . V . . ..LII op � � - � 0 � I'�. � .�L o0 cy II_ i _ _ __ _ !_Il cy -� � . _ �� _ _ .�I.i = . _ - ,;.. _'' _ " ..i�, - : i�. . � ". . . _. Y.. .I.. il �. . �_ i' =I J y z ' I ' I � II � II ��- , �c IIII n _ �- , , IIIIII _ � -- - II - � �. -- _ - � z�-o° �� ' � o� o 0 0 � - N �// 2�_�� N �i _ _ A' � \ N N ' N ' W � � N � `� `'{ N .-i N � � \ \ \ � \ � O M � _ � � R2 R1 � R2 � �' R2 � R1 m M R1 m m M ^ M �-M-I �-M-I � � � � � � I I I I R� I I I R2 � � � I � � SEE PROCEEDING FLOOR PLAN SHEETS FOR OVERALI ROOF PLAN NOTES � � O ii�-s�� z1�-s i/z�� i4�-ii i/z�� Zi�-s i/z° ^/ � 11'-2" 21'-81/2" 14'-41/2" 21'-81/2" 23'-7" 19'-6" 11'-31/2" Y� � � � .� _ 2 N W � > A133 BLDG 3 - ROOF PLAN � Z o � --- 2 ,� o � S�A�E: �,8��-��_o�� O �, . � 186'-81/2" — Z � 10'-1" 5'-11" 11'-6" I 6'-11 1/2" 8'-1 1/2" 6'-11 1/2" 11'-6" 5'-11" , 10'-3 1/2" 5'-11" 11'-6" 6'-9" 8'-1 1/2" 6'-9" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-3 1/2" 8'-3" 6'-11 1/2" 11'-6" , 5'-11" 10'-1" � O Q � 3'-0" 5'-4 1/2' 6'-4" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 3/4" 6'-4" 5'-4 1/2" 3'_0" I 5'-3 1/2" 5'-0" 3'-4" 5'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/2"3'-0" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 3/4" 3'-0"2'-7 1/2" 5'-6 1/2" � 3'-4" 5'-0" i 9'-5 3/4" 7'-5 3/4" 6'-8" 5'-4 1/2" 3'_0" N � � � SEE PROCEEDING FLOOR PLAN SHEETS FOR OVERALL FLOOR PLAN NOTES a � i � � 3303C E1 � E1 3305C i I-- rv E1 3309C 3307C E1 _ ' 3301C E1 c� � � �n � E 1 0 �n � ! E1 � E1 - - - E1 � � 2 - i 2 2 2 1 3305B 2 2 3303B ' 1 2 2 - ; 2 BEDROOM 2 BEDROOM ; 10 B � � � 33076 2 BATH ._ 2 BATH ` - ` G3 33098 33018 1 BEDROOM 1 BEDROOM 3305 3303 1 BEDROOM - PrO�eCt NO. 14LION-00-01 � 1 BATH ry W5 � W5 ry 1 BATH W5 � W2 � W5 1 BATH � 3309 II 1D II 3307 MODEL C � MODEL C � � 3301 Plot Date. 2/20/20141:33:07PM 23'-7" 8"- 7'-51/2" -8" 23'-7" 11" 33'-8" 8" 7'-51/2" 8" 33'-8" 11" 7'-51/2" -8" 23'-7" 4 MODEL A MODEL A MODEI A 4 Drawn by: crd/dmk W2 3309 3307A 3305A 3301A � N — — 3303A `� � N N o � , , ^ r , ;.; - , r ; ; ; } , ; � N Date Issue Description � � - (� --- - -- - �';� 2014.02.07 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT � � i�' --- �' � --- --- � � O � O I O � � i --- 1 � 1 ---- --- ° E� � � --- ' O O -- � --- ' � E� _ � _ _ j�= -�, � � � � � ; _- _ - , _ � � ❑Cf �� -, �� ❑ � _ ,� � -___ � _ � �� (� ;�, _-- - � � � O n - � � �� - - - - -- ---- A133 4 � � . ; �� — — - � e — — -- -- — -- � --- -- � 3 A133 o �, _ - , i .--. � � � � ,� � � �� _ �� ❑Q � _ -o-- -- __ _ ��- _ � � �,� �� C� � � - �� - -- ' �_ - � � -- -� - �l � O � - - � � — �� N � - -- — ---- --- � �-�-I lD °° ;� � � � -__ � � O � -_= O � �. 5 � ��—__ � � � I � �_ _ _ ST� II�I�II�illl `� � � � � i l.I � � � � A134 �j STAIRS � � � 3313� 6 6 3310A 3314 3308A 3306A M 3304A � � � 1'-0" a STAIRS � � N a, 33'-8" 8"- 3'-2 3/4" 3'-2 3/4" —8" 23'-7° -11" 33'-8° 8��^ .3'-2 3/4" 3'-2 3/4" �8�� 33'-8" 11" 37'-5 1/2" 302A 33'-8" o, N I� I� N 1 BEDROOM 1'-0" '8�� 7 1 BATH 2 BEDROOMi W5 ;D 3308 2 BEDROOM iD W5 2 BEDROOM — - 2 BEDROOM 5 � 2 BATH 00 2 BATH °� 2 BATH 2 BATH � � 3310 1 MODEL B W2 3306 1 3304 E1 3302 io 33086 _ � MODEL D = � � = I MODEL D - MODEL D MODEL C f - � . _. A � . 1 3310B � 1 1 — O O � i 3306B 1 O 3304B 1 O 3302B 1 � ;s - - _. E1 _ N � E1 ' , E1 � ' � Sheet Title O � � E1 O O O � � i — 3308C E1 � � � �, �, - � BLDG 3 F3 & ROOF op E1 3310C 00 E1 3306C 3304C E 3302C E1 i �p 5�-4�� 5'-4�� P LAN S � 5'-4" 5'-4" 4'-0" �'-0" 2'-81/2" 3'-8" 9'-81/2" 6'-2 1/2" 8'-2" 3'-0" 3'-10" 7'-2" 2'-8 1/2" 3'-8" 9'-11/2" 3'-8" 2'-8 1/2" 7'-2" 3'-10" 5'-4" 5'-4" 3'-10 1/2" 3'-0"2'-7 1/2" 5'-101/2" 3'-0" 5'-13/4" 5'-1 3/4" 10'-8" 5'-11" � 13'-8 1/2" 8'-2 3/4" 8'-9 3/4" 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11" 10'-8" 5'-11" 13'-8 1/2" 8'-2 3/4" 8'-2 3/4" 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11" 10'-8" 8'-1 1/2" 6'-10 1/2" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-3 1/2" 186'-8 1/2" — — Sheet No. 2 BLDG 3 - 3RD FLOOR _ 1 4 2 3 1 A132 5 F A134 q � A133 A134 A134 � A134 Vr �9 SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" �� Z2 2 bar clamp to seam snow fence 3 bar bolt down snow fence 2� � `� � ` I' � � i 1 4 2 3 � � ST9 snow guard 3 row pattern (24�� OC X I2��VeYtlCally� A144 79-�1�2 A�4 A143 A144 A144 69'-0" 82'-1" 11'-31/2" 19'-6" � 19'-9" 19'-6" 8'-21/2" � 19'-6" 19'-61/2" � 19'-6" 18'-6" 19'-6" i 19'-61/2" L 19'-6" � 12'-315/32" ST9 su lemental snow RZ � � T � REAL ESTATE PP i�-o�� i��-6�� 1�o�� i�-o�� i��-6�� 1�-0�� guards (36�� O�C X 24�� OH OH R3 1'-0" R2 17'-6" 1'-0" OH OH Rz DEVELOPMENT & vertically) _ ' ' R3 ' ' ° ° � O 10'-6" OH OH R2 10' 6" R2 R2 R3 10'-6" y RZ � O MANAGEMENT N �� _ �` - �' - � i � _ ��I N � = N � N � . ._ .. . .. . .—.,, N � i . . . . — — � — _ _ _ —.. —. — — — —, . _ N _ ' c\i o � ° � 3��-o�� o \ - � � 3„�1�-0�� ° o � 3„�1, � i � m 3„� 0 200 N. MAI N STREET 2�_0�� I � � � � � I ► ; � � I ° � , � OREGON, WI 53575 o � � � m o m m o � � OH "'' � � �n fn o � � 127'-7 7/8" 129'-7 7/8" I � � ,-.. � .._, D - - � - - � o x o , o x o x m O m M O m O , - , _ . , . , R1 I� II Vi J �, \/ `.x - ' II � II 3�_Q�� u� O H � ii �� iu i i � �i i _ � " � - 'a � - - Y R1 - � �i _ i i _ x u - � °�° ° � = u _ �c _ � . o - � . . Q ii . i � o ° Cn � � . o u i�- - ' r' u - i.. - _ �� u . i o \ - � '^ � � � . � u o ,� ,� � � � � ' � � � � � I � � i � � �� , � m _ � �� i � � i � �� _ ai I --�,-- ,�-- �-�, - -- --,�- � � ----- ,- '----"- --,- -- -�-- - - - - , u. _ i ^ � _ � �� _ --� �-„ �-, . o� - _ - 5 � � ° - A144 R1 - -- � - -- - - �� \� \� \ i - ��0'��I.,��G�� _ Ql p� p� � N O � I� N � � ci \ S �' R 1 r+ = �� II i i . ., � I� �l . J L l. I �l . l. � , �� I �. . . �i d � il. .i ii -. .. _. .. �i d i. i, — — — d � i —ii . �i i —i i.. - � -— _ O� 2 . . __� � � � I �. �: . . . u I i . . �1 I fi �_ � fi T„ � — ' . �� i_. . . . .. — _ . .. ' � �_. . I O I— . 6 . .... —. . _ . — . _ _ _ � . . . I l .I' . O ' . I _ f I, _ A143 4 � O � �� i � i � � � � � �- - � � �i _ , � � °� � 3 A143 I _, � , ' _ ' I �--�� T r r� �� o = �L, _.� � -- ° °� �--�--- � �_ ,� r r � � I�.' P �I �I o ' T r � �� - _ I . _ r. I . �-—�� ii - �r � - � i.. .�r �- - � . . _ � / .. J , . _ I!- --_� L.-- I. I JI_._4. __. I. _L. . ._0_ ... .__ .l. _ I .II...'.� �.. i � � � O . l I .. � �. , ,. 6 I - . i .. ..i �I - � � O H O `--' �I 7._ _ If p � , . \ -I�. � � I i . .J � o - � .. � � � � .L� � I J . I _. .l. _L._ 11 IL. I L.. J I 1. �. � �..�� -7C !�I i .-°... � _1 . 6_.. . � .II�_ .. 6.. � . � I I L �.... �. �.__ - _. _ _ j R1 I, i � i i � ' � _ ._ _, � _ q_T. � . _.� . � _ _ _�__ , � i s' R1 � � � 7I i1� ` -"-ri- r � i __ i _ � _ � _ .� r_ _ ,_ � _ � _ � � � -- i __' u i - — � I. ...0. ... I .� � p —. ..__ _. __I � I . � :. ... ._... .. _. . ....__� � - . -i � � ' _ . 3�_0�� 2'-0'� _ 0H i a_ i i . - i `-' O H i u i�_ � � ' � - !i2'-0" � ` - o ' r, - - � � o ��' li 7C i - �- r I�i i .9� �. _ii_T_ii_ .0 �.�i OH� � �� ti �i i IIII � Ii �, � � � �� _ m �; ° ,I C -; , . �� - / _ , ' � / � �-�-�._� _ r, Q = 126'-10 27/32" �� o x , � � -. o x W p _ 128'-1 27/32' � p i 128'-10 27/32' 130'-10 27/32' - o m o o m i in / in � N _ rl � `~ � N _ � vA,' �n ,-�i rri m � _ 2 0 �n .1 W � " W � ,/� � � m � OH � � O Y 1 n,l m `ti 00 I � � ° � R2 R1 R2 - R2 R1 R2 RZ � O R2 � � M �� O w o x N O 1'-0" 19'-81/2" 1'-0" � O X-.�- - �r � OH OH r ' I � \�/ '-o" 21'-8 1/2" 15'-7" 21'-s" s'-7' 21'-8 1/2" 14'-4 1/2" 21'-s 1/2" 7'-7 1/2" 11'-7 1/2" z1'-&1/2" 14'-11 1/2" z1'-8 1/2" �2'-0" � � = / - - - 72'-0" y � � •� �9�-01/2�� SEE PROCEEDING FLOOR PLAN SHEETS BLDG 4 - ROOF PLAN � � � � 58'-11" � O 4_ A143 FOR OVERALL ROOF PLAN NOTES 2, � O sca�E: i/s"=i'-o" LL � 221�_�1,2�� Q • � 10'-3 1/2" 5'-11" 11'-6" 6'-9" 8'-1 1/2" 6'-11 1/2" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-3 1/2" 5'-11" 11'-6" 10'-9 3/4" 10'-9 3/4" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-3 1/2" 10'-3 1/2" 5'-11" 11'-6" 6'-9" 8'-1 1/2" 6'-9" 11'-6" 5'-11" 10'-3 1/2" � � � � � J �C o 0 � ' ' I ' ' ' ' ' /4" 3'-0"2'-71/2" 5'-61/2" 3'-4" 5'-0" 5'-3 1/2" M ` 5'-3 1/2" 5'-0' 3'-4' S'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/ "3'-0' 7'-9 3/4' 7'-9 /4" 6' 4' S'-4 1/2" 3'-0" 5'-3 1/2" 5'-0' 3'-4' S'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/ "3'-0" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 3/4" 3'-0'2'-7 1/2" 5'-6 1/2" i 3'-4" 5'-0' 10'-7' S'-0' 3'-4' S'-6 1/2" 2'-7 1/ "3'-0" 7'-9 3/4" 7'-9 v`� r J Q N � , � a � 4311C - 4307C 4305C - - 4303C 4301C - I� - - - - — � E1 ,N-�i E1 _ E1 � � E1 E1 � N � � � � � 00 E4 O - 4309 E1 N 00 E4 O O E4 O0 °° E4 O � E4 m 2 � 2 � 2 2 Z � � - - - - E4 00 _ - - E1 - - - � _ E1 _ - - _ I E1 _ - E1 I _ �_ 4311B 0 1 2 BEDROOM o z 10 O O O1 � I� 43076 O 10 O 43058 � O 1 � ' 43038 � O 10 O2 � 43016 I' 1 N � � _ _ N 2 BEDROOM 2 BEDROOM N N � 2 BEDROOM N N 2 BEDROOM o - 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH 2 BATH B E1 4311 4309B � 1 BEDROOM 4307 4305 4303 W5 W5 4301 �� io 1 BATH W5 W5 I � � MODEL C W5 � W5 4309 MODEL C MODEL C W2 MODEL C `° MODEL C E1 Pro�ect No. 14LION-00-01 71 � Plot Date. 2/20/2014133:17PM __- -_—.-- - � 33'-8" 8" 7'-5 1/2° g° 23�_�,� MODEL A 11" 33'-8" g'� 7'-5 1/2° 8" 33'-8" 11" 33'-8" 8" 7'-5 1/2" 8" 33'-8" � Drawn by: crd/dmk arn 4309A `� ^ 4311A 4307A 4305A I 4303A 4301A `� N `_ - N N __ � \� N � o �� _ � — .— o o .,.. --. _ `/ � � �� ° � I � � ' Date Issue Description i..J. i.. -_ i..]. . o 5 O � � 1 I O U � � I � �� I O O � � I � O 2014.02.07 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT � _ �.- _ _ . i _ - I 1 - - - i l'� -- - 1 . - - - 1 -/� �l l 1 - I 1 � � - A144 �J I O � �I � _ — I — I — I — — I I — o — —�< — — � — — o � � � �❑ � � �--�� - � � C�� _ l�� u �>> � � - - � _ �� _ � �. - ;� ,� � � � � �❑ � - ��: __ � � - � C� O � = 0 �' o STAIRS � _ _ � � `�° 0 io 4316 I i _ I � E1 � � � � - a =-� � - � � � � �j �I � C � C� � - �-� _ =- -_ - � 9�1 �� I '� C�/ o � C� � - - -- I, __ - � � � EZ 3 �� oo � (�j� o0 0o a a �3 4 =� � � _ n E1 _� I � lU � I 5�IRS I �� /'I `-/ STAIRS � ° � _ - = � � ; :._ � � �_�-.-- ,� � �� (� � � 4314 0� � � � i.i. O ° _ �--,� _-_ � -- �_ pN �i � -- 8" 1'-0" �8" v, DN " � � � �J �� 4312 1 0 8 � � � �� 4308A �8 1 0 � \ � � � � \ ,� N 23'-7 3'-2 3/4" 3'-2 3/4" 4310A 23'-7" 11" 33'-8 3'-2 3/4"�i 3'��4" 4306A 33'-8" 11" 33'-8" 43o4A 3'-2 3/4"�_3'-2 3/4" 4302A 23'-7" N cV 8u : : . i i N N N 1 BEDROOM 1 BEDROOM 1 BEDROOM 1 BATH 1 BATH 1 BATH O4 4312 W5 4310 W2 _ W5 W5 _ 4302 O4 — 2 BEDROOM I� 2 BEDROOM 2 BEDROOM � a MODEL B 1 MODEL B 2 BATH o0 1 2 BATH 2 BATH 1 00 - � 4308 4306 4304 MODEL B � � 43028 43126 _ 43108 _ _ MODEL D _ _ __. - - - o — o � i MODEL D 4308B O1 J O1 4306B MODEL D O O 43046 O O O 2 � 1 �1 2 �1 � � �� A � E4 E1 - � E1 N - - I E1 _ . I E1 _ _ _ E1 - E4 � ,s ,n E1 - - �' E4 O O E4 E4 � Sheet Tlt�e E1 E1 � 00 4312C ; 4310C � � 4302C °� i � `^ E1 1 E1 0 — � 4308C 4306C 4304� B L D G 4 F 3 & R O O F � N I � J PLANS 3'-0" 8'-2" 6'-11 1/2" 8'-9 1/2" 6'-11 1/2" 8'-2" 3'-0" 5'-4" 5'-4" 4'-0" 7'-0" 2'-8 1/2" 3'-6" 9'-5 1/2" 3'-6" 2'-8 1/2" 7'-0" 4'-0" 5'-0" 11'-4" 5'-0" 4'-0" 7'-0" 2'-8 1/2"3'-10" 9'-5 1/2" 6'-3 1/2" 8'_2" 3'_0" I 10'-1" 5'-11" 13'-8 1/2" 8'-9 3/4" 8'-9 3/4" 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11" 10'-8" 5'-11" 13'-8 1/2" 8'-2 3/4" 8'-2 3/4" 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11" 10'-8" 10'-8" 5'-11" 13'-8 1/2" 8'-2 3/4" 8'-9 3/4" 13'-8 1/2" 5'-11" 10'-1" 221'-0 1/2" 2 Sheet No. 1 4 A144 SEE PROCEEDING FLOOR PLAN SHEETS BLDG 4 - 3RD FLOOR A 44 A142 A144 A144 A143 � F O R O V E R A L L F L O O R P L A N N O T E S 1 k; � ; :� sca�E: i/s��=i'-o,� � ��ir��ir� C�45ULTINia E4FIIYEfRS LION'S RIDGE APARATMENT HOMES 1280 North Frontage Road West Vail, Colorado 81657 Martin/Martin Project No.: 13.0870.5.01 Structural Calculations March 14, 2014 ��„��,�,,,,,,,, ,��°��OQ��REG�STF'''-, ,� p�.�°�� Dp°°o� � ; c�o QF 9iT°oF�; ° 24585 � _ �°0 3/14/20140°c�� o �\ 0 �%''F`S'5�� ° �'''��n��`�� IV1ARTlN{M►�RTIM, II+JC. 2��m�,iN�rixrr r,�ir�ir��n� ED14''a�RDS,Cs�L6Rr�aO�1G�2 MAIN 970.�26.6�1Q7 hAAftTIMhA�FTI!N-!MTN.C��h� Index of Structural Calculations 1 Design Criteria 1 — 22 2 Floor and Roof Framing 23 — 49 3 Walls, Foundations, Headers 50 — 64 4 Lateral Force Resisting System 65 — 74 5 Trash Enclosure, Monument Sign 75 — 133 �og TiT�e Timber Ridge M/�RTI N / MARTI N � CON5LJLTING ENGINEER5 JOBNO. 13.0870.5.01 SHEETNO. _ / CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/3l/13 CHECKED BY xxx DATE xx/xx/xx CS12 Ver 2012.05.17 www.struware.com STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR Timber Ridge 1280 North Frontage Road,Vail, CO 13.0870.S.Ol PROJECT INFORMATION Project Manager: SJM Principal in charge: PD Design Engineer(s): ENG Client: Gorman&Co Client Contact: Parick Patrello Project Description: 114 unit multi-family Governing Jurisdiction: Town of Vail vailgov.com Martin Haeberle Martin/Martin, Inc. 1 of 137 Martin/Martin, IIIC. �oeTir�E Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �oa rvo. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) cHECKE�sv xxx DATE XX/XX/XX FOUNDATION DESIGN CRITERIA: The Geotechnical report prepared by HP Geotech Number 109 310A Date 10/29/2009 SPREAD FOOTINGS Maximum Total Load bearing pressure 5000 psf Minimum Dead Load bearing pressure XX psf Minimum continuous footing width 1.5 ft Minimum spread footing width 3 ft Ultimate coefficient of friction to resist Iateral loads 0.5 Frost depth to bottom of foundation 48 in FOUNDATION WALLS "Active"condition 40 pcf "At ResY'condition 50 pcf "Passive"condition 300 pcf Lateral pressure due to surcharge from ground snow 66 psf Ultimate coefficient of friction to resist Iaterai loads 0.5 Wall design based on on-site granular backfill SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA: DEFLECTION Interior Roof and Floor Members Total Load L/ 240 Live Load(supporting ceilings) L/ 360 Camber if required Exterior Walls/Girts(Out-of-plane deflectionsl: Wind Load-IBC 2012-0.42W"Component and cladding"per Table L/ 240 1604.3 Note f., includes adjustment from factored to service loads Exterior Walls/Girts Supportinq Stucco: Wind Load-IBC 2012-0.42W"Component and cladding"per Table L/ 360 1604.3 Note f., includes adjustment from factored to service loads Wood roof and Floor framinq Live Load plus 50%dead load(where moisture content< 16%) L/ 240 Live Load plus 100%dead load(where moisture L/ 240 content> 16%) Diaphraqms Shall not exceed permissible deflection of the attached elements. Fiexible Diaphragms with a length to width ratio greater than 2 shall be evaluated further. VIBRATION-Wood ATC Design Guide 1 Minimum Natural Frequency 8 Hz DRIFT(Coordinate with Expansion Joint Width) Wind: Story Height/ 400 IBC 2009-0.7W per ASCE 7-05 Commentary to adjust from 50 year to 10 year wind Building Height/ 500 IBC 2012-0.42W per ASCE 7-10 Commentary to adjust from 50 year to 10 year wind Building Height/ 500 Seismic: See EQ Tab of this document story= 0.025 hsX DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS: ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN(2012 IBC) D=Dead Load D+F H=Lateral Earth Pressure Load D+H+F+L F=FIuidLoad D+H+F+(L�or S or R) Martin/Martin, Inc.2 of 137L-Live Load D+H+F+0.75L+0.75(L�or S or R) Lr=Roof live load D+H+F+(0.6W or 0.7E) R=Rain Load D+H+F+0.75(0.6W or 0.7E)+0.75L+0.75(Lr or S or R) S=Snow Load D+H+F+0.75(0.7E)+0.75L+0.75S T=Temperature Load 0.6D+H+0.6W W=Wind Load 0.6(D+F)+0.7(E)+H E=Earthquake,combined effect of horizontal and vertical load as defined in Section 12.4.2.of ASCE 7 STRENGTH DESIGN(2012 IBC) 1.4(D+F) f1 =1 for live loads in excess of 100 PSF and parking garages 1.2(D+F)+ 1.6(L+H)+0.5(Lr or S or R) =0.5 for other live loads 12(D+F)+ 1.6(Lr or S or R)+ 1.6H +(f��L or 0.5W) f2=0.7 for roof configuration that do not shed snow off structure 1.2(D+F)+ 1.OW+f�'L+ 1.6H+0.5(Lr or S or R) =0.2 for other roof configurations 1.2(D+F)+ 1.0 E+f�"L+f2"S+ 1.6H 0.9D+1.OW+ 1.6H 0.9(D+F)+ 1.0E+ 1.6H SPECIAL ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN SEISMIC LOAD COMBINATIONS(IBC 2009/2012) (1.0+0.14Sps)D+H+F+0.7pQE Em=Earthquake,maximum combined effect of horizontal and (1.0+0.10Sps)D+H+F+0.525pQE+0.75L+0.75(Lr or S or R) vertical load as defined in Section 12.4.3.of ASCE 7 (0.6-0.14Sps)D+H+0.7pQE SPECIAL STRENGTH DESIGN SEISMIC LOAD COMBINATIONS(IBC 2009/2012) (1.2+0.2Sps)D+pQE+L+0.2S Em=Earthquake,maximum combined effect of horizontal and (0.9-0.2Sps)D+pQE+1.6H vertical load as defined in Section 12.4.3.of ASCE 7 MATERIALS STEEL Structural Steel: F ksi Fu ksi W and WT Shapes: A992 50 65 Plates,Channels,Angles,and Misc. Framing: A36 36 58 Round Pipe: A53 35 60 Square and Rectangular HSS: A500,GradE 46 58 High Strength Plates: A572 50 65 Tvpical Framinq Bolts: ASTM A325-3/4"diameter Welds: E70XX,70 KSI Headed Shear Studs F ksi Fu ksi AWD D1.1 Type B, 3/4"diameter 51 65 Anchor Rods: F ksi Fu ksi ASTM F1554 Gr 55 weldabie,3/4"f, Heavy Hex Headed 55 75 CONCRETE Weiqht: Normal weight 150 pcf Desiqn Strenqth: fc si Foundations 4000 NW Siab-on-grade 3500 NW All other CIP 4000 NW Reinforcinq: F ksi Beams,Columns,etc.: 60 A615,Grade 60 Smooth Welded Wire Reinforcement(WWR): 65 A-185 Welded and/or Field Bent: 60 A706 MASONRY Weiqht: Block Weight Light Weight 103 pcf Grout Weight Normal weight 140 pcf Reinforcing A615,Grade 60 Desiqn Parameters: Design Strength: fm= 1500 psi WOOD Martin/Martin, Inc.3 of 137 Martin/Martin, Inc. �og riT�E Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 JOB NO. 13.0870.S.0] SHEET NO. (303)431-6I00(pbone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY xxx DATE xx/xx/xx LOADING CRITERIA: 1 SLOPING ROOF Dead Loads Self Weight Superimposed Additional Seismic Dead Loads Mass(DL) (psf) (ps� (psf) Plywood 3 Trusses 5 C/L/M/E/P 5 Shingle Roofing 3 insulation 2 1/2 Partitions 2.5 Snow 20 Totals 8 10 22.5 Total Dead Load(psfl: 18 Total Seismic Mass(psfl: 40.5 Live Loads Snow Superimposed Live Load(psfl: 100 See snow loads for drifting&unbalanced Loads Construction Live Load(psfl: 20 (This is not additive to Superimposed Live Load) Concentrated Live Load(Ibs): Attic Live Load 0 Ice Dams 200 2 Typical Floor Dead Loads Self Weight Superimposed Additional Seismic (Construction DL) Dead Loads Mass (psf) (ps� (psf) Carpet or linolium 2 2"Gyperete 16 Plywood 3 Floor Joists 4 C/L/M/EIP 5 Insulation 2 Partitions 5 Totals 25 12 0 Total Dead Load(psfl: 37 Total Seismic Mass(psfl: 37 Live Loads Residential Superimposed Live Load(psfl: 40 Construction Live Load(psfl: 20 (This is not additive to Superimposed Live Load) Concentrated Live Load(Ibs): Live Load Reduction per IBC 1607.9 N/A Martin/Martin, Inc.4 of 137 3 Decks Dead Loads Self Weight Superimposed Additional Seismic (Construction DL) Dead Loads Mass (psf� (psfl (psf� 2x decking 4 Floor Joists 4 Totals 8 0 0 Total Dead Load(psf�: 8 Total Seismic Mass(psfi�: 8 Live Loads Decks-Snow Superimposed Live Load(psf�: 100 Construction Live Load(psfl: 20 (This is not additive to Superimposed Live Load) Concentrated Live Load(Ibs): EXTERIOR WALL SELF WEIGHTS(INCLUDE IN SEISMIC MASS) These are vertical loads that should be converted to horizontal line loads on the structure 4"Brick Veneer 40 psf Wood stud wall wl wood siding 10 psf Exterior antl Interior Sheathing 6 psf OTHER LOADING TO CONSIDER Stair-Deatl Loads and Live Loads(100 PSF NR) (This need to be input into RAM as line load or point loatl) Martin/Martin, Inc.5 of 137 Martin/Martin, Inc. �og TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �oe No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX �are xx/xx/xx www.struware.com Code Search COC�@: International Building Code 201�. Occupancy: Occupancy Group= R Residential Risk Category 8� Importance Factors; Risk Category= II Wind factor= 1.00 Snow factor= 1.00 Seismic factor= 1.00 Type of Construction: Fire Rating: Roof= 1.0 hr Floor= 1.0 hr Building Geometry: Roof angle (6) 6.00/12 26.6 deg Building length (L) 10.0 ft Least width (B) 6.0 ft Mean Roof Ht (h) 9.0 ft Parapet ht above grd 9.0 ft Minimum parapet ht 0.0 ft Live Loads: Roof 0 to 200 sf: 18 psf use 30.0 psf 200 to 600 sf: 30 psf over 600 sf: 30 psf Floor: Typical Floor 40 psf N/A Partitions N/A Partitions N/A Partitions N/A Decks-snow 100 psf Partitions 5 psf Martin/Martin, Inc.6 of 137 Martin/Martin, InC. �oaTiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100 (phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Wind Loads : Ultimate Wind Speed 115 mph Directionality (Kd) 0.85 Exposure Category C Enclosure Classif. Enclosed Building Internal pressure +/-0.18 Kh case 1 0.849 Kh case 2 0.849 I Type of roof Gable �� L� �-,�Speed•up Topoqraphic Factor (Kzt) 1l�� j x(upwind� �- k(d�t+�nwindj Topography Flat .- Hill Height (H) 540.0 ft '� } '��HJ2 H Half Hill Length (Lh) 1100.0 ft �-� Lh H�� Actual H/Lh = 0.49 , „ , ,. , Use H/Lh = 0.49 � Modified Lh = 1100.0 ft ESGARPMENT From top of crest: x= 1100.0 ft Bldg up/down wind? upwind ��Z� Z Speed-up H/Lh= 0.49 K� = 0.000 v�� x/Lh = 1.00 KZ = 0.333 x(upwind) x(downwind) -�, z/Lh = 0.01 K3 = 1.000 : , L�, ;' H�� H At Mean Roof Ht: _ - .� Kzt= (1+K,KZK3)^2 = 1.00 2p�RIDGE or 3D AXISYM[�u�E�RICAL HILL Gust Effect Factor Flexible structure if natural frequency<1 Hz(T>1 second). h = 9.0 ft However,if building h/B<4 then probably rigid structure(rule of thumb). B = 6.0 ft h/B = 1.50 Therefore, probably rigid structure /z(0.6h) = 15.0 ft G = 0.85 Using rigid structure default Riaid Structure Flexible or Dvnamicallv Sensitive Structure e = 0.20 Natural Frequency (n,) = 0.0 Hz � = 500 ft Damping ratio ((3) = 0 Zmin - 15 ft /b = 0.65 c= 0.20 /a = 0.15 gQ, g�= 3.4 Vz= 97.1 �z - 427.1 ft N� = 0.00 Q = 0.96 R� = 0.000 IZ = 0.23 Rh = 2g.2g2 n = 0.000 h = 9.0 ft G = 0.91 use G =0.85 RB = 2g.2g2 n = 0.000 R� = 28.282 n = 0.000 gR = 0.000 R = 0.000 G = 0.000 Martin/Martin, Inc.7 of 137 Martin/Martin, InC. �oaTiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100 (phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Enclosure Classification Test for Enclosed Buildinq: A building that does not qualify as open or partially enclosed. Test for Open Buildinq: All walls are at least 80% open. Ao? 0.8Ag Test for Partiallv Enclosed Buildinq: I n put Test Ao 0.0 sf Ao ? 1.1Aoi YES Ag 0.0 sf Ao >4'or 0.01Ag NO Aoi 0.0 sf Aoi /Agi <_ 0.20 NO Building is NOT Agi 0.0 sf Partially Enclosed Conditions to qualify as Partially Enclosed Building. Must satisfy all of the following: Ao? 1.1Aoi Ao > smaller of 4'or 0.01 Ag Aoi/Agi <_ 0.20 W here: Ao =the total area of openings in a wall that receives positive external pressure. Ag =the gross area of that wall in which Ao is identified. Aoi =the sum of the areas of openings in the building envelope(walls and roof) not including Ao. Agi =the sum of the gross surface areas of the building envelope(walls and roof) not including Ag. Reduction Factor for larqe volume partiallv enclosed buildincts (Ri) : If the partially enclosed building contains a single room that is unpartitioned , the internal pressure coefficient may be multiplied by the reduction factor Ri. Total area of all wall &roof openings (Aog): 0 sf Unpartitioned internal volume (Vi) : 0 cf Ri = 1.00 Altitude adjustment to constant 0.00256 (caution - see code) : Altitude= 8000 feet Average Air Density= 0.0602 Ibm/ft3 Constant= 0.00201 Martin/Martin, Inc.8 of 137 Martin/Martin, InC. �oe riT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 .los No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM o,4re 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX oare xx/x�xx Wind Loads - MWFRS all h (Enclosed/partiallv enclosed onlv) Kh(case 2)= 0.85 h= 9.0 ft GCpi= +/-0.18 Base pressure(qh)= 19.2 psf ridge ht= 9.8 ft G= 0.85 Roof Angle(6)= 26.6 deg L= 10.0 ft qi=qh Roof tributary area-(h/2)*L: 45 sf B= 6.0 ft (h/2)*B: 27 sf Ultimate Wind Surface Pressures(psfl Wind Normal to Ridge Wind Parallel to Ridge B/L= 0.60 h/L= 1.50 L/B= 1.67 h/L= 0.90 Surface Cp qnGCP w/+q;GCP; w/-9nG�P� Dist.* Cp qnGCP w/+q;GCP; w/-qnGCP; Windward Wall(WW) 0.80 13.1 see table below 0.80 13.1 see table below Leeward Wall(LW) -0.50 -8.2 -11.6 -4.7 -0.37 -6.0 -9.5 -2.5 Side Wall(SW) -0.70 -11.4 -14.9 -8.0 -0.70 -11.4 -14.9 -8.0 Leeward Roof(�R) -0.60 -9.8 -13.3 -6.3 Included in windward roof Windward Roof neg press. -0.44 -7.1 -10.6 -3.7 0 to h/2' -1.22 -19.9 -23.4 -16.5 Windward Roof pos press. 0.06 1.0 -2.4 4.5 h/2 to h* -0.74 -12.1 -15.6 -8.6 h to 2h' -0.66 -10.8 -14.2 -7.3 *Horizontal distance from windward edge Windward Wall Pressures at"z"(psf) Combined WW+LW Windward Wall Normal Parallel L.��,/ .' z Kz Kzt qzGCP w/+q;GCP; w/-qhGCP; ta Ridge ta Ridge �t �/'V�tR h= 0 to 15' 0.85 1.00 13.1 9.6 16.5 21.2 19.1 g� ,Lt�� `'� f' �'\�' sw z � � ��cnoN WQiD NORLdN.30 RII7GE �v� WR � f� LWj a'� / _SW WW ` � � tvmrn �n�cnorr lsJRiU PARIILLQ.TO RmGE LUJ NOTE: _ SW See figure in ASCE7 for the application of full and partial loading � �� of the above wind pressures.There are 4 different loading cases. Parapet � z Kz Kzt qP(psf) �A,i � � sw 9.0 ft 0.85 1.00 19.2 `'�,`�,nz� i � Windward parapet: 28.8 psf (GCpn=+1.5) Leeward parapet: -19.2 psf (GCpn=-1.0) � �z�tr�3 _t. Lff.E�'f I!Q�rl��' ' Windward roof overhangs(add to windward roof pressure): 13.1 psf(upward) ''�``z1`A'I'u'�� Martin/Martin, Inc.9 of 137 Martin/Martin, Inc. �oaTiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �oa No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100 (phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Wind Loads - MWFRS h�60' (Low-rise Buildinqs) Enclosed/partially enclosed onlv Kz= Kh (case 1) = 0.85 Edge Strip (a) = 3.0 ft Base pressure(qh) = 0.0 psf h>B-can't use low-rise method End Zone (2a) = 6.0 ft GCpi = +/-0.18 Zone 2 length = 3.0 ft Wind Pressure Coefficients CASE A CASE B 6=26.6 deg Surface GCpf w/-GCpi w/+GCpi GCpf w/-GCpi w/+GCpi 1 0.55 0.73 0.37 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 2 -0.10 0.08 -0.28 -0.69 -0.51 -0.87 3 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 -0.37 -0.19 -0.55 4 -0.39 -0.21 -0.57 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 5 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 0.40 0.58 0.22 6 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 -0.29 -0.11 -0.47 1 E 0.73 0.91 0.55 -0.48 -0.30 -0.66 2E -0.19 -0.01 -0.37 -1.07 -0.89 -1.25 3E -0.58 -0.40 -0.76 -0.53 -0.35 -0.71 4E -0.53 -0.35 -0.71 -0.48 -0.30 -0.66 5E 0.61 0.79 0.43 6E -0.43 -0.25 -0.61 Ultimate Wind Surface Pressures (psfl 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 E 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2E 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3E 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4E 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5E 0.0 0.0 6E 0.0 0.0 Parapet Windward parapet= 0.0 psf (GCpn = +1.5) Windward roof Leeward parapet= 0.0 psf (GCpn =-1.0) overhangs= 0.0 psf (upward)add to windward roof pressure Horizontal MWFRS Simple Diaphraqm Pressures (psf) v�rti�,=.r.�r tjcE.�.i�rca � w[rrr��nz�n�oaF Transverse direction (normal to L) � �E,�4r�RO�,F Interior Zone: Wall 0.0 psf � � � 1 i � i � ! 1 Roof 0.0 psf VERTICAL End Zone: Wall 0.0 psf g z Roof 0.0 psf � � Q arz o�w�ae 2 x Longitudinal direction (parallel to L) - Interior Zone: Wall 0.0 psf Tx.a�svEr�sE EzEVA�rzor� End Zone: Wall 0.0 psf ��RQOF P FFWARD ROOF � � � � � � � � � � V ER"I-ICAL � ,� F' LF1 or Z(?NE 2 The code requires the MWFRS be designed for a min ultimate �' � force of 16 psf multiplied by the wall area plus an 8 psf force ° applied to the vertical projection of the roof. �-�� r LC�NGTTUDINAL ELEVATION Martin/Martin, Inc. 10 of 137 Martin/Martin, Inc. �oaTiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �oa No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100 (phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Location of MWFRS Wind Pressure Zones � � ; zo��E �: tzssor Qt � ; � •- � 0.5Bor2.Sh _ J.� If 2 is negati�•e ., � �E 3E `�` <sE 3E �` __ �� __ �:. rE =E -_- -f 9 � 1 � 1 ��ri .�-t/ . _� lE �� . � lE .`'�, _ ��r� CASE A ��-�-�D�c�no� CASE B RA\GE �`��R�.CTI01 Ra1 GE NOTE: Torsional loads are 25°/o of zones 1 -6. See code for loading diagram. ASCE 7 -99 and ASCE 7-10 (& IaterZ 4 � � ZO'r�� '?: leaso�of 4_� � or 2_5 h 3 �'��2 If ? is negaci�•e l-.-.} �FE 3� fr �'.� 3 : ? ,�! �.: _� / �'f � a:, ,� �, . , �, 'E 4� �, -= -��:_��.�� -__ ..;;��.E _�`�� , ' 1 '-��_`�. ; �.�` ,� 9 lE � / r �-� 1 � � .�.r ' �ti"I`r'D DIRE�CIID\ � �`��DIRECTIO� � lE � 'Transti�e�e Direction Lonaitudirial Direction NOTE: Torsional loads are 25% of zones 1 -4. See code for loading diagram. ASCE 7 -02 and ASCE 7-05 Martin/Martin, Inc. 11 of 137 Martin/Martin, MC. �og TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �oe No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Wind Loads - Components & Claddinq : h <= 60' Ultimate Wind Pressures Kh(case 1)= 0.85 h= 9.0 ft Base pressure(qh)= 19.2 psf a= 3.0 ft Minimum parapet ht= 0.0 ft GCpi= +/-0.18 Roof Angle(0)= 26.6 deg Type of roof= Gable Roof GCp+/-GCpi Surface Pressure(psf) User input Area 10 sf 50 sf 100 sf 10 sf 50 sf 100 sf 75 sf 500 sf Negative Zone 1 -1.08 -1.01 -0.98 -20.8 -19.4 -18.8 -19.1 -18.8 Negative Zone 2 -1.88 -1.53 -1.38 -36.1 -29.4 -26.5 -27.7 -26.5 Negative Zone 3 -2.78 -2.36 -2.18 -53.4 -45.4 -41.9 -43.3 -41.9 Positive All Zones 0.68 0.54 0.48 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 Overhang Zone 2 -2.20 -2.20 -2.20 -42.3 -42.3 -42.3 -42.3 -42.3 Overhang Zone 3 -3.70 -2.86 -2.50 -71.1 -55.0 -48.1 -50.9 -48.1 Overhang pressures in the table above assume an internal pressure coefficient(Gcpi)of 0.0 Overhang soffit pressure equals adjacent wall pressure reduced by internal pressure of 3.5 psf Parapet qp= 19.2 psf Surface Pressure(psf) user inPut Solid Parapet Pressure 10 sf 100 sf 500 sf 40 sf CASE A=pressure towards building(pos) CASE A: Interior zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 CASE B=pressure away from bldg(neg) Corner zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 CASE B : Interior zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Corner zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Walls GCp+/-GCpi Surface Pressure(psf) User input Area 10 sf 100 sf 500 sf 10 sf 100 sf 500 sf 20 sf 200 sf Negative Zone 4 -1.28 -1.10 -0.98 -24.6 -21.2 -18.8 -23.6 -20.2 Negative Zone 5 -1.58 -1.23 -0.98 -30.4 -23.6 -18.8 -28.3 -21.5 Positive Zone 4&5 1.18 1.00 0.88 22.7 19.3 16.9 21.7 18.3 Martin/Martin, Inc. 12 of 137 Martin/Martin, MC. �og TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �oe No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Location of C&C Wind Pressure Zones , r.,.-a _� 9 Y��` il il �i1 �8 { 1 .c �� 3 _Z _ _� _L3 I � � � � � I I r 3� � 2' I 3 �, �`` .� � � .y. � �----J-r I � � � I l � I1 � � I I -� I� I ,�� Z � � � � � � � r;1 I � �.' � � �� I 5 � 5 I I I �"� �2 I � I a �"�' 4 1 j l J � a I I 5 5 I I I i � �q � Z4�ALL f�..v- I j_�� f rt �ri-//.��-.\--�-�'� ~�'�� i'✓' +..1'1�F^�,ll ryl .'"'J ti ti��J � �/ � 'Y l _ Roofs w/ 9<_ 10° Walls h<_60' Gable,Sawtooth and and all walls &alt design h<g0' Multispan Gable 9<- 7 degrees& Monoslope roofs h>60' Monoslope<_3 degrees 3°<6<_10° h<_60'&alt design h<90' h<_60'&alt design h<90' ��T '� � �� ---2 = 8 1� � � 3 3 2 �3 1 2 � r � i i � � �6 � ti\�: :� Ei C' U rt i i i i i �. � z z I � I I I I I �2 ,'I I � I I I I I � � I � I `.J I � 2I 12 I 12 I �j I �� IZ � � I � � � I I I I� 2 I J i, I _ I � I �I I� I I � � I 2 3 � I � I I I I ✓ � �. \�� 3 L--- ---� � � �3 I � I I I I r��1 � 2 � '1 � J �_ _� �---�-- �}��..j� w� "s: ��;' .�� Sa i i `'�i � i 2 Manoslope roofs Multispan Gable 8� Hip 7° < 6 <-27° I I 10° <9 s 30° Gable 7° <9<_ 45° I I I I h 5 60'8�aEt design h<90' � I ,��,;� I ,y;�----�--9r�: , �j Sawtooth 10°<9 <- 45° `� 3 � �' 3 i 2 Z f 3 h<_60'&alt design h<90' - -- -i - -- -- f- Z 1° ]� �" Z ��t]1 Q i Z r 3��Z 2 2 r 3 � 3�r�2__ 2--� 3_ - - �g �-' l �� 2 .� 1 2 2 � 3 2 2 li b L7 1��1 [�-'_ 1�`� t'L`'_ ��`3 1'�' �'L' Stepped roofs 0<-3° h<_60'&alt desiqn h<90' Ma�tin/Martin, Inc. 13 of 137 Martin/Martin, IIIC. �oa TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM �aTe 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Wind Loads - Open Buildinqs: 0.25 <_ h/L <_ 1.0 Ultimate Wind Pressures Procedure not allowed h/L is greater than 1.0 Type of roof= Monoslope Free Roofs G= 0.85 W ind Flow= Clear Roof Angle= 26.6 deg NOTE:The code requires the MWFRS be Main Wind Force Resistinq Svstem designed for a minimum pressure of 16 psf. Kz=Kh(case 2)= 0.85 Base pressure(qh)= 19.2 psf Roof pressures-Wind Normal to Ridge Wind Load W�nd Direction Wind Direction Flow Case =0 de y=180 de Cnw Cnl Cnw Cnl A •----Cn----- ------1-_66---- ------1.71---- -----1-_92----- -----1-_96----- Clear Wind p= -27.2 psf -27.9 psf 31.3 psf 32.1 psf Flow B .----Cn----- ------�=45---- ------0 41---- •-----2.42----- -----�=86----- p= -40.1 psf -6.7 psf 39.5 psf 14.1 psf NOTE: 1).Cnw and Cnl denote combined pressures from top and bottom roof surfaces. 2).Cnw is pressure on windward half of roof.Cnl is pressure on leeward half of roof. 3).Positive pressures act toward the roof.Negative pressures act away from the roof. Roof pressures-Wind Parallel to Ridge, Y=90 deg Wind Load Horizontal Distance from Windward Flow Case Ed e h= 9.0 ft <_h >h<_2h >2h 2h= 18.Oft A •----Cn----- ------�=80---- -----0 60---- -----�=30----- Clear Wind p= -13.1 psf -9.8 psf -4.9 psf Flow Cn= __0_80_____ _____0_50____ _____0_30_____ B •---------- p= 1 3.1 psf 8.2 psf 4.9 psf FasCia Panels-Horizontal pressures Fascia pressures not applicable-roof angle exceeds 5 degrees. qp= 0.0 psf W indward fascia: 0.0 psf (GCpn=+1.5) Leeward fascia: 0.0 psf (GCpn=-1.0) Components 8� Claddinq - roof pressures Kz=Kh(case 1)= 0.85 a= 3.0 ft a2= 9.0 sf Base pressure(qh)= 19.2 psf 4a2= 36.0 sf G= 0.85 Clear Wind Flow Effective Wind Area zone 3 zone 2 zone 1 positive negative positive negative positive negative <_9 sf 4.83 -4.73 3.63 -3.59 2.42 -2.36 ------------------------------ ---------------- -----------------•---------------- ---------------- --------------- ---------------- CN >9,<_36 sf 3.63 -3.59 3.63 -3.59 2.42 -2.36 ------------------------------ ---------------- ----------------- ---------------- ---------------- --------------- ---------------- >36 sf 2.42 -2.36 2.42 -2.36 2.42 -2.36 <_9 sf ------- ---79_0 psf-- ----77_2 psf---•---59.2 psf--- ---587 psf-- --39 5-psf-- ----38 6 psf-- Wind ----------------------- >9:<_36 sf 59.2 psf _58_7 psf 592 psf -58.7 psf 39.5 psf -38.6 psf pressure - --•---------------- ----------------•--------------- ---------------- >36 sf 39.5 psf -38.6 psf 39.5 psf -38.6 psf 39.5 psf -38.6 psf Martin/Martin, Inc. 14 of 137 Martin/Martin, IIIC. �oa TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM �aTe 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Location of Wind Pressure Zones L L -i 1.'NW �_'NL �-� ��NL e � � �' WI N6 WI1N A DSREClIDN .0 DIRECFfON .[ Y= 6`,k80° Y=0°,k80° � � PPI`Ci'IED 7RpUGH L L t_'x1y l_'rrt, �_�NL '�_�NW '.VI1�TD '�llAft) DSRECTION B' �' DIR�CTION V= 4° � � V= 180° � � MO�IC6 LOPE WIND DIRECTION v= D°. l80° L L L I I �----- �----- � � � � � , �.� �� , � �� & �� >u[N� DIRECTION j� D�CTI6N� pIItECTION� � MONOSLdFE PI'ICHED TROUGH Vu�il� DIRECTTON y= :�0° MAIN WIND FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM � `� � ; �i -� f- -, t- -, -, 1 1 1 1 1 -, -, -, , � � � � e< io° e? io° MaNOSLQPE PITCHED ORTROU�1-bED ROOF COMPONENTS AND CLADDING Martin/Martin, Inc. 15 of 137 Martin/Martin,Inc. �og riT�E Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 JOB NO. 13.0870.S.Ol SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE l2/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY xxx DATE xx/�/xx Wind Loads Vertical Distribution Parapet Height(ft)= 0 Normal to Ridge Parallel to Ridgc Floor Length Length Wind Wind Height of Floor of Floor Pressure Wind Pressure Wind Story hx from Parallel Perp. to Trib. ��MWFRS all on Floor Floor ��MWFRS all on Floor Height base to Ridge Ridge Height n��) Diap. Force Shear n��) Diap. Force Flr (fit) (ft) (ft) (ft) ft (psf) (plf) (kips) (kips) (psf) (plf) (kips) Grd 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 10 10 70 44 10.0 ###### ##### ##### ###### ##### 3 10 20 70 44 12.0 ###### ##### #� ###### ##### R 14 34 70 44 7.0 ###### ##### ##�### ###### ##### 0 34 0 0 0.0 ###### ##### ##I### ###### ##### 0 34 0 0 0.0 ###### ##### ##### ###### ##### 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 34 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Wind Base Shear Parallel to Ridge= ####�## (kips) Wind Base Shear Perp.to Ridge= ###### (kips) Martin/Martin, Inc. 16 of 137 Floor Shear (kips) N/A #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 12/3 l/2013 Martin/Martin, Inc. 17 of 137 Martin/Martin, InC. �oe Tir�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �oe No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Snow Loads : Roof slope = 26.6 deg Horiz.eave to ridge dist(W)= 3.0 ft Roof length parallel to ridge(L)= 10.0 ft Type of Roof Hip and gable w/trussed systems Ground Snow Load Pg = 143.0 psf Risk Category = II Importance Factor I = 1.0 Thermal Factor Ct = 1.00 Exposure Factor Ce = 1.0 Pf=0.7'Ce*Ct*I`Pg = 100.1 psf Unobstructed Slippery Surface(per Section 7.4) no Sloped-roof Factor Cs = 1.00 Balanced Snow Load Ps = 100.1 psf Rain on Snow Surcharge Angle 0.06 deg Code Maximum Rain Surcharge 5.0 psf Rain on Snow Surcharge = 0.0 psf Ps plus rain surcharge = 100.1 psf Minimum Snow Load Pm = 0.0 psf NOTE:Alternate spans of continuous beams Uniform Roof Design Snow Load = 100.1 psf use 100.0 and other areas shall be loaded with half the design roof snow load so as to produce the greatest possible effect-see code. Unbalanced Snow Loads-for Hip&Gable roofs onlv Required if slope is between 7 on 12= 30.26 deg and 2.38 deg= 2.38 deg Unbalanced snow loads must be applied Windward snow load= 30.0 psf =0.3Ps Leeward snow load from ridge to 11.02'= 162.1 psf =hdy/�S+Ps Leeward snow load from 11.02'to the eave= 100.1 psf =Ps Windward Snow Drifts 1 -Aqainst walls, parapets,etc more than 15'lonq Upwind fetch lu = 220.0 ft Projection height h = 20.0 ft Snow density g = 30.0 pcf �- Balanced snow height hb = 3.34 ft hc = 16.66 ft j/ hc/hb>0.2= 5.0 Therefore,design for drift � Surcharge Load Drift height hd = 5.72 ft ;Due ro Dniting Drift width w = 22.89 ft � � �,/� Surcharge load: pd=y*hd= 171.7 psf h �� hd pd•, � i Balanced Snow load: = 100.1 psf �'i. a; �Balanced Snow Lpad 271.8 psf Windward Snow Drifts 2-Aqainst walls,parapets,etc>15' h W Upwind fetch lu = 44.0 ft • � Projection height h = 20.0 ft LU Snow density g = 30.0 pcf Balanced snow height hb = 3.34 ft hc = 16.66 ft hc/hb>0.2= 5.0 Therefore,design for drift Drift height hd = 2.88 ft Drift width w = 11.52 ft Surcharge load: pd=y"hd= 86.4 psf Balanced Snow load: = 100.1 psf 186.5 psf Martin/Martin, Inc. 18 of 137 Martin/Martin, IIIC. �oa Tir�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 JOB NO. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Snow Loads -from adiacent buildinq or roof: Hiqher Roof Lower Roof Roof slope = 26.6 deg 3.00/12 =14.0 deg Horiz.eave to ridge dist(W)= 3.0 ft 0.0 ft Roof length parallel to ridge(L)= 10.0 ft 200.0 ft Projection height(roof step) h = 4.0 ft Building separation s = 0.0 ft Type of Roof Hip and gable w/trussed systems Monoslope Ground Snow Load Pg = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf Risk Category = II II Importance Factor I = 1.0 1.0 Thermal Factor Ct = 1.00 1.00 Exposure Factor Ce = 1.0 1.0 Pf=0.7'Ce'Ct'I"Pg = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf Unobstructed Slippery Surface(per Section 7.4) = no no Sloped-roof Factor Cs = 1.00 1.00 Balanced Snow Load Ps = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf Rain on Snow Surcharge Angle 0.06 deg 0.00 deg Code Maximum Rain Surcharge 5.0 psf 5.0 psf Rain on Snow Surcharge = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf NOTE:Alternate spans of continuous beams and Ps plus rain surcharge = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf other areas shall be loaded with half the design Minimum Snow Load Pm = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf roof snow load so as to produce the greatest possible effect-see code. Uniform Roof Design Snow Load = 0.0 psf 0.0 psf Building Official Minimum = Leeward Snow Drifts-from adiacent hiqher roof Upper roof length lu = 100.0 ft Snow density g = 14.0 pcf � Balanced snow height hb = 0.00 ft _ LU �j" hc = 4.00 ft FI - #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! Surcharge�oad t dae to Drifting Adjacent structure factor = 1.00 ;� Drift height hd = #DIV/0! h hc hd pd a1 � Y�, ije�;�;. � Drift width w = #DIV/0! ! ,F., � Baianced 5now�oad Surcharge load: pd=y*hd= #DIV/0! h , r Balanced Snow load: = 0.0 psf #DIV/0! w I Windward Snow Drifts-from low roof aqainst hiqh roof �ower roof length lu = 170.0 ft Adjacent structure factor = #DIV/0! �,y Drift height hd = #DIV/0! Drift width w = #DIV/0! Surcharge load: pd=y*hd= #DIV/0! Upper Roof Balanced Snow load: = 0.0 psf #DIV/0! ��, Sliding Snow-onto lower roof Sliding � Sliding snow=0.4 Pf W= 0.0 plf Snow Load Distributed over 15 feet= 0.0 psf Balanced hd+hb= 0.00 ft Snow Loacfi Lower Roof hd+hb<=h therefore sliding snow= 0.0 psf s Balanced snow load= 0.0 pSf Uniform snow load within 15'of higher roof= 0.0 psf Martin/Martin, Inc. 19 of 137 Martin/Martin, IIIC. �oBTiT�e TimberRidge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �og No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Seismic Loads: Risk Category: II Importance Factor(I): 1.00 Site Ciass: C Ss(0.2 sec)= 25.70%g S1 (1.0 sec)= 7.30%g Fa= 1.200 Sms= 0.308 Sos= 0.206 Design Category= B Fv= 1.700 Sm1 = 0.124 SD1 - O.OH3 Design Category= B Seismic Design Category= B Number of Stories: 3 Structure Type:Light Frame Horizontai Struct Irregularities:No plan Irregularity Vertical Structural Irregularities:No vertical Irregularity Flexible Diaphragms:Yes Building System: Bearing Wall Systems Seismic resisting system: Light frame(wood)walls with structural wood shear panels System Structural Height Limit: Height not limited Actual Structural Height(hn)=9.0 ft DESIGN COEFFICIENTS AND FACTOR� Response Modification Coefficient(R)= 6.5 Over-Strength Factor(S2o)= 2.5 Deflection Amplification Factor(Cd) 4 5os= 0.206 SD1 - �.�83 p=redundancy coefficien Seismic Load Effect(E)= p Qe+/-0•2Sos� = p Qe +�- 0.041 D QE=horizontal seismic forci Special Seismic Load Effect(Em)� i�o QE+/-0.2Sps D =2.5 Qe +/- 0.041 D D=dead loac PERMITTED ANALYTICAL PROCEDURE: Simplified Analysis -Use Equivalent Lateral Force Analysis Equivalent Lateral-Force Analysis - Permittec Building period coef. ((T)= 0.020 Cu= 1.70 Approx fundamental period(Ta) CThn�= 0.104 sec x=0.75 Tmax=CuTa= 0.177 User calculated fundamental period(T)= 0 sec Use T= 0.104 Long Period Transition Period(TL)= ascE�map= 4 Seismic response coef.(Cs)= Spsl/R= 0.032 need not exceed Cs= sdt i iRT= 0.122 but not less than Cs= 0.010 USE Cs= 0.032 Design Base Shear V= 0.032W Model&Seismic Response Analysis - Permitted(see code for procedure) ALLOWABLE STORY DRIFT Structure Type: Non-masonry,4 story or less designed to accommodate the story drift Allowable story drift= 0.025hsx where hsx is the story height below level x Martin/Martin, Inc.20 of 137 Martin/Martin, InC. �og TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100 (phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Seismic Loads - C011t. : Seismic Design Category(SDC)= B I = 1.00 CONNECTIONS Sds= 0.206 Force to connect smaller portions of structure to remainder of structure Fp= 0.133Sdswp= 0.027 wp or Fp=0.05wp= 0.05 wp Use Fp= 0.05 wp wp=weight of smaller portion Beam, airder or truss connection for resistina horizontal force parallel to member FP= no less than 0.05 times dead plus live load vertical reaction Anchoraqe of Structural Walls to elements providinq lateral suppor Fp= 0.20Ww = 0.20 Ww or Fp=0.41SdsWw= 0.082 Ww Fp= 0.200 Ww but Fp shall not be less than 5 psf MEMBER DESIGN Bearinq Walls and Shear Walls(out of plane force) Fp=0.4SdsIWw= 0.082 wW but not less than 0.10 wW Use Fp= 0.10 wW Diaphraqms Fp =0.21SdsWp+Vpx= 0.041 Wp+Vpx ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENTS SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS Seismic Design Category B&Ip=1.0,tneretore only required for parapets supported by bearing or shear walls Architectural Component: Interior Nonstructural Walls and Partitions: Plain (unreinforced)masonry walls Importance Factor(Ip) : 1.0 Component Amplification Factor(ap)= 1 h= 9.0 feet Comp Response Modification Factor(RP)= 1.5 z= 50.0 feet z/h = 1.00 Fp=0.4aPSdslpWp(1+2Z/h)/Rp= 0.164 Wp not greater than Fp= 1.6SdslpWp= 0.329 Wp but not less than Fp=0.3SdslpWp= 0.062 Wp use Fp= 0.164 Wp MECH AND ELEC COMPONENTS SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS Seismic Design Category 8,tneretore not required Mech or Electrical Component: Elevator and escalator components. Importance Factor(Ip) : 1.5 Component Amplification Factor(aP)= 1 h= 9.0 feet Comp Response Modification Factor(RP)= 2.5 z= 50.0 feet z/h = 1.00 Fp=0.4aPSdslpWp(1+2z/h)/Rp= 0.148 Wp not greater than Fp= 1.6SdslpWp= 0.493 Wp but not less than Fp=0.3SdslpWp= 0.093 Wp use Fp= 0.148 Wp Martin/Martin, Inc.21 of 137 Martin/Martin, Inc. �og TiT�E Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 JOB NO. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/3l/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY xxx DATE xx/xx/xx VI. Seismic Vertical Distribution: k= 1.0000 p= 1 Rcference ASCE 7-05 12.3.4 Floor Floor Foce Diaphragm Story Height hX Floor Floor Floor /Floor Weight Force (ASCE Height from base Weight Force Shear %WX 7-05 12.10-1) Floor (ft) (ft) wX (kips) wXhXK Cvx pFX (kips) VX (kips) (%� FPX (kips) Base 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 10 10 155 1550.0 0.175 2.4 13.7 1.5% 6.4 3 10 20 155 3100.0 0.350 4.8 11.3 3.1% 6.4 R 14 34 124 4216.0 0.476 6.5 6.5 5.3% 6.5 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0 34 0 0.0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0.0% 0.0 Building Weight= 434 (kips) Cs= 0.0316 E(Base Shear)= 13.7 (kips) Martin/Martin, Inc.22 of 137 � Wood Rafters.xls �raject: � r�rr�TSna rn�nRTir� Page 1 ai`1 Job�lurnber: �� ^��ry�ERS Date. 1211912013 By: Wood Joist Allowable Clear Span I�-�� `�� Input Dead Load, DL= 25 ps'f 4��= LI 360 Live Load, L�= 10� psf dTL- LI 24� CD" 1.� RspeTitive? Yes Dry? Yes SpecieslGrad�? DF#2 Allowable Clear S�an 5ummary S acin in) Size 24 16 12 2x4[�F#2 3.6 4.4 5.0 2x6 DF#2 5.2 6.4 7.4 2x8 dF#2 6.6 8.1 9.3 Zx1� DF#2 8.1 9.9 11.4 2x12 D�#2 9.3 11.4 13.2 2x14 DF#2 10.4 12.8 14.8 3x6 DF#2 B.7 8.2 9.5 3x8 DF#2 8.5 10.4 12.� 3x10 DF#2 10.4 12.7 14.7 3x'12 DF#2 12.1 14.8 1�'.1 4xfi DF#2 8.0 9.7 11.3 4x$ DF#2 10.5 12.8 14.8 4x10 �F#2 12.9 15.8 18.2 4x12 DF#2 i 5.a 18.3 21.2 11-718 TJI 110 1D.1 'f2.3 142 1'i-71$TJ 1 21� 11 A 13.5 15.6 11-71$TJI 36[l 12.Q 17.2 19.9 11-7/8 TJ V 560 13.8 20.7 24.7 14 TJI 1�0 10.J 13,4 15.5 14 TJI 210 11.7 14.7 17.0 14 TJ9 360 12.Q 18.'f 21.7 14 TJI 560 93.8 20.7 26.9 16 TJI 2i�J 11.7 15.7 `E$.1 16 TJ I 360 12.0 18.1 23.2 16 TJ I �80 13.8 2D.7 27.6 5-1/2 LVL $.2 14.1 '11.7 7-1J4 LVL 10.7 13.1 15.1 9-114 LVL 13.4 16.4 1$,9 9-1/2 LVL 13.7 16.8 19.4 11-7F8 LVL 16.9 2D.7 23.9 14 LVL 19.7 24.1 21.9 16 LVL 22.3 27,3 3�.6 Martin/Martin, Inc.23 of 137 Wood Rafters.xls Project: �� n,inRri N,ti�n�ri N P2ge 1 of 1 Job Number: �� _�� E��t�, Date: 1 211 912 0 1 3 By: Waod Joist Allowable Clear Span '��c p�' - ��(� f rtput Dead Load, DL= 25 psf ��= L! 360 Live Load, LL = 110 psf o7L= LI 24Q Co= 1.Q Repetitive? Yes Dry? Yes SpecieslGrade? DF#2 Allowable Clear Span Summary S acir�g(in) 5ize 24 1f 12 2x4 DF#2 3.4 �l.2 4.8 2xf DF#2 5.O 6.1 7.1 2x8 DF#2 6.3 7.8 9.0 2x10 DF#2 7.8 9,5 11.1} 2x12 DF#2 9.0 11.0 12.7 2x14 DF#2 10.0 12.3 14.2 3x6 D�#2 6.5 7.9 9.1 3x$ D F#2 8.2 1�.0 11.6 3x10 DF#2 30.� 12.3 14.2 3x12 �F#2 1'�.6 14.2 16.4 4x6 DF#2 7.7 9.4 10.8 4x8 DF#2 10.1 12.*# 14.3 4x�0 DF#2 12.4 15.2 'V7.5 ,4x12 DF#2 14.4 17.6 20.4 11-718 TJI 110 9.7 11.9 13.7 ��-718 TJI 210 10.6 13.0 1�.0 11-718 TJV 360 11.i 16.fi 19.1 11-718 TJ I 560 12.8 19.2 23.7 14 TJI 110 1Q.2 12.9 14.9 14 TJ1 210 10.8 14.'i 16.3 14 TJ I 36b 11.1 16.7 20.8 14 TJ I 560 12.8 19.2 25.6 16TJ1210 - 10.8 �5.1 17.5 16TJ136Q 1i.1 1�.7 22.3 16TJ1560 12.8 1J.2 25.6 5-1/2 LVL 7.9 9.7 11.2 7-114 LVL 10.3 12.6 14.5 9-114 LVL 12.9 15.$ 18.2 9-112 LVL 13.2 16.2 18.7 11-718 LVL 16.3 19.9 23.0 14 LVL 19.0 23.2 26.8 16 LVL 21.5 26.3 30.4 Martin/Martin, Inc.24 of 137 13.0870-Ti R-Waod Rafters-drifk.xis Project: �� i�nRr3r�in.�nRT�r� Page 1 of 1 Job hJumber: �-�� „�.�� E��EE�3 Date: 1l�12p14 By: Wood Joist Allowable Clear Span [�'�%'�r " "�!�+%'�� Input Qead Load, DL= 20 psf 4��= LI 36fl Live Load, LL� 270 psf dT�= LJ 240 �o= 1.0 Repetitive? Yes Dry? Na SpecEeslGrade? DF#2 Aliowable Clear Span Summary S acin (in) Size 24 16 12 2x4 DF#2 2.2 2.9 3.3 2x6 DF#2 3.4 4.2 4.$ 2x8 l�F#2 4.3 5.3 6.3 2x1Q DF#2 5.3 fi.� 7.5 2x12 DF#2 F.1 7.5 8.7 2x14 QF#2 6.9 8.4 9.7 3x6 DF#2 4.4 5.4 6.2 3x8 D'�#2 5.6 6.8 7.9 3x1 Q DF#2 S.8 8.4 9.7 3x12 DF#2 7.9 9.7 11.2 4x6 �F#k2 5.2 6.4 7.4 4x8 DF#2 6.9 $.4 9.7 4x10!DF#2 8.4 1�.3 tii.9 4x12 DF#2 9.8 12.0 13.9 11-718 TJI 110 4.7 7.1 9.3 11-7f8 TJI 21� 5.0 7.6 1�.1 13-718 TJ I 36Q 5.2 7.8 10.4 11-71$TJ I 560 5.9 $,'9 11.9 14 TJ I 110 �1.7 7.'[ 9.5 14 TJI 210 5.� 7.6 10.1 14 TJ! 360 5.2 7.8 1 D.4 14 TJI 560 5.9 8.9 11.$ 16TJ1210 5.0 7.6 1�.1 1 B Ti J I 360 5.2 7.8 1�.4 16`TJ I 5fiQ 5.9 8.9 11.9 5-1/2 LVL 5.4 6.6 7.7 7-114 LVL 7.0 8.6 9.9 9-914 LVL 8.8 10.8 12.4 9-11� LVL 9.0 11.D 127 11-7/8 LVL 11.1 i3.6 15.7 14 LVL 1�.9 15.8 18.3 16 LVL 14.6 17.9 20.7 Martin/Martin, Inc.25 of 137 13.�870-TR-Deck Joists.xls Project: n�nr�Tir�in�nR�iN P3ge 1 of 1 ,Dab hJum�er: �/�� =u��"�� ^��EE�� Date: 1I212014 By: Woad Joist Allowabie Clear Span �./,�G f c InPut Dead Load, DL= 1 C� psf 4��= U �60 Li�e Load, Ll�= 10Q psf L�ST�= LI Z4Q Co= 1.0 Repetitive? Yes Dry? No 5peeieslGrade? DF#2 Allowable GE�ar 5pan Summary S acing{in Size 24 16 12 2x4 DF#2 3.8 4.6 5.4 2x6 DF#2 5.6 6.8 7.9 2x$ QF#2 7.0 8.6 9.9 2x10 �F#2 8.6 10.5 12.1 2x12 �F#2 14.D 12.2 14.1 2x14 DF#2 11.1 13.6 15.7 3x6 DF#2 72 $.8 10.1 3x$ DF#2 9.1 11.1 12.$ 3x10 DF#2 11.1 13.6 i5.7 3x12 DF#2 12.9 15.8 18.2 4x6 DF#2 8.5 1fl.4 92.� 4x8 �F#2 112 13.7 16.8 4x1D DF#2 13.7 16.$ 19.4 4x12 DF#2 16.0 19.5 22.$ 11-7/8�JI 110 10.7 13.1 15.2 11-718 TJ p 210 11.7 14.4 16.6 11-718 TJI 360 13.7 18.4 21.2 11-718 TJI 560 15.7 22.8 26.3 14 TJ1 110 11.7 14.3 16.5 14�J121CJ 12.8 15.6 18.1 14 TJI 360 13.7 20.a 23.1 14 TJ I 560 '�5.7 23.5 28.6 18 T,�I 214 13.3 16.7 9J.3 '{6 T.lI 360 13.7 2CJ.5 24.7 16 TJI 560 15.7 23.5 3(}.7 5-112 LVL 8.$ 1 Q.8 12.4 7-114 LVL 11.4 13.9 16.9 9-114 LVL 14.3 17.5 2�.2 9-112 LVL 14.6 17.9 2Q.7 11-71$ LVL 18.0 22.1 25.5 14 LVL 21.�3 25.7 29.7 16 LVL 23.8 29.1 33.6 Martin/Martin, Inc.26 of 137 13.087�-TR-Wood Joists.xfs Project: �� LoryRT;N�M�RT,E, Page 1 of 1 Job Nurnber: Date: 112f2014 By: Waod Jaist Allowable Clear Span �� r3�� Input Deaci Load, DL= 42 psf dLL- �.I 3BO Live Load, LL= 40 psf dT�= LI 24� Go= 1.0 Repetitiv�? Yes Dry"? No SpecieslGrade? DF#2 Allowable Glear Span 5urnmary 5 acing in) SEZe 24 16 12 2x4 D�#2 4,4 5.2 5.ti 2x6 bF#2 8.4 7.9 8.8 �x$ C�F#2 8.1 10.0 11.5 2x1Q DF#2 9.9 12.2 14.1 2x12 DF#2 11.5 14.1 16.3 2x14 DF#2 12.9 15.8 18.2 3x6 DF#2 8.3 9,7 10.4 3x8 DF#Z 10.$ 12.7 13.7 3x10 DF#2 'i2.8 15.7 17.5 3x12 QF#2 14.9 18.2 21."I 4x6 DF#2 9.fi 10.8 '6'f.7 4x8 aF#2 12.7 14.2 15.4 4x10 DF#2 15.9 1$.2 19.6 4x12 DF#2 18.5 22.1 23.8 11-71$TJI 11� 1C.4 15.2 17.6 19-71$TJI 210 13.fi 16.7 18.6 11-718 TJI 36Q 16.9 18.9 20.4 11-718 TJ I 560 19.4 21.8 �3.5 14 TJI 110 13.5 '[6.5 19.1 14 TJI 210 14.8 18.1 20.9 14 TJI 360 18.4 2ti.5 23.2 14 TJ I 560 21.0 24.7 26.6 16 TJI 210 15.$ 19.4 22.4 1 B TJ I 360 18.4 23.$ 25.7 16 TJI 560 21.D 27.3 29.4 5-112 LVL 8.1 9.0 9.8 7-114 LVL 10.7 12.0 12.9 9-1/4 LVL 13.6 15.2 16.5 9-112 LV� 14.0 15.7 16.9 11-71$ LVL 17,5 19.6 21.1 �4 LVL 20.6 23.1 24.9 16 LVL 23.5 26.4 2$,5 Martin/Martin, Inc.27 of 137 13.0870-TR-Wood Joists.xls Project: r�rn�aTir� �nnnRTiN P2��2 1 Of 1 Job Number: �� t��r��-t�� Da#e: 1/2/2014 By: Wood Joist Allowable CEear Span L �c,?�,� /�� Input Dead Load, DL = 42 psf 0��= LI 4$0 Liue Load, LL = 40 psf �T�= LI �4O Go= 1.0 Repetiti�e? Yes D ry? N o SpecieslGrade? DF#2 Allowabfe Clear Span Summary S acin in 5ize 24 1fi 12 2x4 DF#2 4.4 5.2 5.6 2x6 DF#2 6.4 7.� 8.$ 2x8 DF#2 $.1 10.Q 11.5 2x10 DF#2 9.9 12.2 14.9 2x12 DF#2 11.5 14.1 16.3 2x14 DF#2 12.9 15.8 18.2 3xfi aF#2 8.3 9.7 10.4 3x8 DF#2 1a.5 12.7 13.7 3x10 QF#2 12.8 15.7 17.5 3x12 DF#2 14.9 18.2 21.1 4x6 DF#2 9.6 10.$ ti 1.7 4x8 DF#2 i2.7 14.2 15.4 4x10 DF#2 15.9 18.� 'i9.6 4x12 DF#2 18.5 22.1 23.$ 11-7/8 TJI 110 12.4 15.2 17.6 11-718 TJ I 210 1�.8 16.7 18.6 11-7f8 T,l I 360 16.9 18.9 20.4 �1-7f8 TJI 560 19.4 2�.$ 23.5 14 TJI 110 13.5 1�i.5 19.1 14 TJI 210 14.8 18.1 20.9 14 TJ I 360 1$.4 21.5 23.2 14 TJf 560 21.0 24.7 2fi.6 16 TJI 210 �5.8 19,4 22.4 16 TJI 36Q 18.4 23.8 25.7 16 TJ I 560 21.0 27.3 29.4 �-�12 LVL 8.1 9.� 9.8 7-11�1 LVL 10.7 'f2.0 12.9 9-114 L.VL 13.6 95.2 16.� 9-1 f2 LVL 14.0 15.7 16.9 '�1-718 LVL 17.5 19.fi 2�1.1 14 LVL 20.6 23.1 24.9 16 LVL 23.5 26.4 28.5 Martin/Martin, Inc.28 of 137 93.0870-TR-1Nood,�oists.xls Project: � Ml1RTI N /M/`,RTI N Page 1 Of 1 Job Number: f ��s�"�� E^�n,HEE��g Date: 112/2014 By: f�o� �/b�� Wood Joist Allowable Clear Span Input dead Load, DL= 42 psf dLL- U �� Live Load, LL= 40 psf 0��= U 240 Co= 1.0 Repetitive? Yes '�ry? No SpecieslGrade? �F#2 Allowalale Glear Span Summary S acing (in) Size 24 16 12 2x4 C1F#2 4.4 5.2 5.6 2xfi DF#2 6.4 7.9 8.8 2x$ DF#2 8.'i 10.Q 11.5 2x10 DF#2 9.9 12.2 14.1 2x12 DF#2 11.5 14.1 1fi.3 2x14 DF#2 12.9 15.8 9$2 3x6DF#2 $.3 9.7 1Q.4 3x8 DF#2 10.5 12.7 13.7 3x10 DF#2 12,8 15.7 17.5 3x12 DF#2 14.9 1$.2 2'1.1 4x6 DF#2 9.6 1�.$ 11.7 4x8 dF#2 12.7 14.2 15.4 4x10 DF#2 15.9 182 19.6 4x12 DF#2 18.5 22.1 23.8 11-7f$TJ I 110 12.4 15.2 17.6 11-718 TJ I 210 'f 3.6 16.7 18.6 11-7f8 TJ9 360 16.9 18.9 �0.4 11-718 TJ I 560 19.4 21.� 23.5 14 T,fl 110 13.5 16.5 19.1 14 TJI 21C1 14.8 18.'I 20.9 �4 TJI 360 18.4 21.5 23.2 14 TJI 560 21 A 24.7 26.6 16 TJI 210 15.8 19.4 22.4 16 TJI 360 18.4 23.8 25.7 16 TJI 560 21.0 27.3 29.4 5-1l2 LVL 8.1 9.0 9.8 7-114 LVL 10J 12.fl 12.9 9-114 LVL 13.6 152 16.5 9-112 LVL 14.0 15.7 16.9 11-71$ LVL �7.5 19.6 21.1 14 LVL 2fl.6 23.1 24.9 16 LVL 23.5 2f.4 28.5 Martin/Martin, Inc.29 of 137 13.0$7Q-TR-Wood Joists w vibration.xls Project: n�nRTir��n�n�TiN Page 1 af 1 Job Numbei: �� tr�N� Ery��Ek� Date: 112I2014 By: Wood Jaist Allowable Clear Span Input �CV�.-z �� 0- Dead Load, DL= 42 psf �L�= LI 360 Live Load, LL = 40 psf 4T�= V 240 Floor Weight(vibration}_ �8 psf f�;�= 14 Hz co= �.a Repetitive? Yes Dry? Yes SpecieslGrac4e? DF#2 Allowa'�le Clear Span Summary S acin in Size 24 16 12 2x4 DF#� 4.4 5.2 5.7 Zx6 DF#2 6.4 7.9 8.5 2x8 DF#2 8.1 9.7 10.4 2x1D DF#2 9.9 11.7 12.5 2x12 DF#2 11.5 13.5 14.5 2x14 DF#2 12.9 15.3 16.4 3x6 DF#2 8.1 9,0 9.6 3x8 DF#2 10.0 11.fl 11.9 3x1� D'F#2 12.a 13.3 14.2 3x12 DF#2 13.9 15.4 16.5 4x6 DF#2 8.$ 9.8 10.5 4x$ �F#2 1Q.9 12.0 �2.9 4x10 DF#2 13.0 14.4 95.5 4x12 �F#2 15.1 16.7 17.9 11-718 T.�I 110 12.0 13.3 14.3 11-718 TJI 210 12.5 'G3.9 14.9 1�-7/g TJI 360 13.5 14.9 16.0 11-71$ TJI 560 14.9 16.5 17.8 14 TJI �10 13.2 14.6 15.7 14 TJI 210 13.8 15.3 16.4 '14 TJ l 360 14.8 16.4 17.6 14 TJI 560 16.4 18.'V 19.5 16 TJI 210 14.9 16.5 17.7 16 TJ I 360 'I 6.0 17.7 '{9.0 16 TJ I 560 17.7 19.6 21.0 Sa112 LVL 7.7 8.5 9.2 7-�14 LVL 9.5 10.6 91.4 9-114 LVL 11.4 12.6 13.6 9-112 L1fL 11.7 12.9 13.9 1'6-7!$ L1/L 13.8 15.3 16.4 'I4 LVL 15.E 17.3 18.6 'i6'�VL 17.3 19.1 20.5 Martin/Martin, Inc.30 of 137 Wood Floor Joist Vibration — �4�6 L= 23.91 ft Cor�tinuous? f�o dP = 0.4}11548 in L side = 0 ft oa � Q.f}2$27$ in Jaist 1G TJI 5G0 OK SpecieslGrad� TJI Dry? Yes joist spacing 12 in 4� = 0.165266 in Concrete t�opping Yes f„ = 8.707855 Hz f� = 15�17 psi QK t� = 2 in panel 4S�1�1y thickness 0.75 ir� panel length 8 ft floor attach glue&nail flaor weight 25 E Ieff Neff C�d = 1 C�n = 1 �xrongbacks, straps, blocking� d = 1fiin �Im = 108�.8 x10`°Ib-in` �Ibi = 2p78321 EA,m = 27.$ X1{3"117 Ki = 47.09494 E� = 22076q0.507 psi Kb; = 201876.4 EI� = 1.5 x1 D°Ib-in` K�� p EAG = q..4 X 10n I b K� = O.00Q�33 �cw= 1 in Kz = p EA��= 4.5 x1�n�b-in` DFb = 0.102934 SFlr= 500(?0 DF„_ -O.fl1308 EAiop = 40�2428.933 NE�_ $.6193$1 EltoP = 1904330.333 htap = 9.375 y = 1.196829423 EI = 1 3951 7261 5 KS = 6400000 y = 0.1971136$1 E leff= 111�388999 Martin/Martin, Inc.31 of 137 Wood Floor Joist Vibration — �11�'�� L = 21.083 ft Continuous? f�o �p = 0.012813 �n L Side = 0 ft �a= 0.03111� in Joist �G TJI 210 �b� ,� OK 5peciesfGrade TJI�u5��,,,, 53�r� Dry? Yes joist spacing 16 in o� = 0.182442 ir� Goncrete topping Yes f� = 8.29fi934 Hz f�' = 150Q ps� OK t� = 2 in panel USBfPIy thickness Q.7� ir� panel I�ngth 8 ft floor attach glue&nail floor weighk 25 E leff �eff Cpa = 1 Cfn = 1 strongE�acks, straps, bfoc�Cing? d = 16 in Elm = 644.4 x10"Ib-in` Elbi = 2587679 EAm = 18.4 x14�Ib K� = 50.26651 EG = 2207600.�07 psi Ke, = 93501.?9 EI� = 2.0 x10°Ib-i�i` K,,; = 0 E,A� _ �,g x10°Ib K� = 0.000537 E��,= 1 i n �� = 0 EAn�= 5.9 x10°Ib-in` DFe = 0.121873 SFl�= 50000 DF,,_ -0.01553 EAtop = 5251475.E35 �9�ff= 7.277768 E ItoP = 24{�4972.634 I�xQp = 9.375 y = 2.082136362 EI = 1005$69�73 K$= 64000Q0 y= 0.1510189Q9 E leff= 813991121.7 Martin/Martin, Inc.32 of 137 � SOWTiIC7N5 REPORT Level,Floor:Joist-lang PASSED �� F � � T � Current So�ution: : 1 pieee(s) 16" T]Ip 560 @ 16" OC Overall Length:24'6" , _ _.�_., :, -, __ . , �. , . .. Ja Y' - !'— .1 . ' .. . .::q.., } .�' Q �� - ___ ' _—___ — �__a..�_��'.-.��gt�_-- - - .�..� J z3�,�• - a o All locations are measured from tF�e autside face of lett support(ar left cankilever end}.Alf dimensions are horizontaL;Drawing is Conceptua6 Design Results .�ctuai��oea�o� Allowed Resuit taF svstem:Fioo� Member Reaction(Ibs) 1328 @ 2 1�2° 1�9fi Passed(95/�) lA0 2.25" � Memher Type:Joist B�ilding Use:ResEdential Shear(Ihs) 13p7 @ 3 1/2" 2710 Passed(48%) lA0 Bui9ding Code:IBC Moment(Ft°Ibs) 7927 @ 12'3" 129�5 Passed(61%) 1.00 pesign Methudology:a5� L�ve Load Defl.(in) 0.332 @ 12"3" D.$03 Passed(L/871j -- Total Load Defl.(in) fl.680 @ 12'3" 1.204 Passed(U4Z5) -- T]-Prot"Rating 46 45 Passed -- All Product Solutiorrs Depth Series F[ies Sp�acing TJ-PraT'" Rating Wood Volume 11 7/8" T]I�210 1 i2" 24 x 11 7�8" TJID Z10 1 16° 15 x 14" TJI� 210 1 12" 34 x 14" T]IO 210 1 16" 27 x 16" T]IQ 210 1 12" 41 x 16" T]Ia 210 1 16" 34 x 11 7/$" T3IOO 35fl 1 12" 31 x 11 7�8" TJI�360 1 3.6" 23 x 14" TJI�360 1 12" 4p x 14" TJIQ 360 1 16" 3Z x 16" T]IO 36� 1 1Z" 45 1.45 16" f]IOO 360 Il 16" 39 x 11 7/8" T]IOO 560 1 12" 4p x 11 7/8�� TJIC�3 560 1 16" 32 x 34" TJI� 560 1 12'° 46 �.05 14° T]TO 5b0 1 16" 41 x 16" T]IQ 564 1 f2" 5Q �.1.0 16" T]IQ 560 1 1b" 45 1.�8 The purpose af this report is f4r produd comparison only,Load and support information necessary for professional design review is not dispfayed here.Please print an indi�idual Member Report for submittel purposes. Forte Sottware Operator .lab Natzs 1(2l2p14 11:53:24 AM sea�nn�oioy Foat�v�.1,Desigt�Engii�e:V5.7.0.245 Mart�n'M3rlin (970)426-6007 5molloya�martir+martin-mtn C4m Martin/Martin, Inc.33 of 137 Page 1 af 1 �' F 0 R T E S��TIONS R�PORT Level,Floor:Jar'st-long-min PASSED Current So[ution: : 1 pieee(s) 16" TJIQ 560 @ ifi" C1C QVE'r2��LEFI�I�"1.2�`�" � + � � 23'11" W 1_'J l:� All locations are measured from the outside face of left support(ar left cantilever end).AI9 dimensions are f�orizontal.;Drawi�g is Conceptual Design Results Acfual!§�Locatiom Allowed R�sult LDF System:F7oor Member Rea�tion(Ibs) 1325 @ 2 1�2" 1�9�' Passed(95%) 1.�0 htemberType:�oist 2.25" Shear(Ibs) 1307 @ 3 1/2" 2710 Passed(48%} 1.00 6u�Iding use:I�esidentia! 6uilding Cade:TBC Moment(Ft-Ibs) 7927 @ 12'3" 12925 Passed(61°Jo) 1.00 pesign Methodalo 9Y:ASD Liue Load Defi.(fn) D.33Z @ 12'3" 0.843 Passed(LJ871) -- Total Laad Defl.(in) 0.680 @ 12'3" 1.204 Passed(1J425) �- TJ-ProT"Rating 46 20 Passed -- A11 Product Solutions - Depth 5eries Plies Spacing T]-ProT"'Rating Woad Volume 117/8" TJIQQ 210 1 12"` 24 x 117�8" T3IQQ 21Q 1 15" 15 x 14" T�Ipp 210 1 12" 34 x L4" TJIQ 210 1 16" 27 x 1fi" TJIQ 210 1 12" 41 x 16" TJIQ 21Q 1 16" 34 x li 7/$" T]IO 360 1 12" 31 x 11 7�$" T7IQ 36D 1 16" 23 x 14" TJIQ 360 1 12" 40 1.41 14" TJIQQ 364 1 15" 32 x 16" T3IQ 35fl 1 12" 45 1,45 16" TJIQ 360 1 16" 39 x I17J8" �JIQQ 560 1 12" 40 2.fl4 1�.7/8" TJIQ 560 1 16° 32 x 14" T7IOp 560 1 12" 46 2D5 14" TJIQ 560 1 1fi" 41 1.54 16" T]IQQ 560 1 12° 50 2.10 16" T]I�560 1 16" 4b 1.58 The purpose of this report is for produd camparison only.Load and support information necessary for professional design review is not display�ed here, Please print an Individual Member Report fmr submittal purposes. �orte Software Operator Job Notes 1/2/2014 11:54:57 A�ul se�n nnoi�oy Farte v4.1,Design Engine:V5.7.0.24� Adarim'Ahartin (970j926-6067 5m�uoy;marc�nm�n�nfi,in.�c,m Martin/Martin, Inc.34 of 137 Page 1 of 1 :i F 0 R T E MEMBER REPdRT Level,Floor:Jaisf-long RASSED 1 piece(5) 16" T]IQ 560 @ i6" OC dverali E�ength:24'6" + } �� o ^ 23'i1" — 0 � All locations are measured from the outside face of left suppart(or left cantile�er end).All dimenskons are horizontal. Design Results Ac#ual�Location Allowed Resvlt LDF Load:Combination(Pattern) 5ystem:Floor Member Reaction(Ibs) 1328 @ 2 1/2" 1396(2.25") Passed(95%} 1.Q0 1.0 D+1.0�(AIG S�ans) r�ember Type:7oist �Shear(Ibs) 13Q7 @ 3 1/2" 2710 Pa55ed(4&%) 1.6fl i.p D+1.0 L(All Spans) euilding Use:Residen�ai �Moment{�t-Ibs) 7927 @ 12'3" 12425 Passed(61%) 1.00 i.p D+ 1.6 L(All Spans} 6uilding Code:iBC Live�oad Defl.(in) 0.332 Ca�12'3" 0.803 Passed(L/$71) -- 1.0 D+ 1.0 L(All Spans) Design r�ethodology:a�SD Total Load Qefl.(in) 0.680 @ 12'3" 1.204 Passed(y425) -- 1.0 D+ 1.4 L(A!I SR�ns} T]-Pro'"Rating 45 45 Passed -- -- • Deflectio�criteria:LL(L136o)and TL(1J24o}. • Braeing(Lu);All compression edges{top a�d hottom)must be hraced at 6'S 3�8"o�c unless de�iled otherwise.Proper attachment and positloning of lateral bracing'ss required to achieve member s�bility, •A structural analys�s of[he deck has not been perfarmed. • Deflectlon ana6ysis fs based on composite attion with a single layer of 23/32"'Panel(24"Span Rating}thak is glued and nailed dov+n. • Additianal considerations for the 7]-Pra'"'Ratlng indude:�1/2"Gypsum cei€€ng,�perpendicular partitions,pour flooring overlay. Bearing Length Laads to Supports(Ibs) 'Supports Tata1 Available Required nead FUve Total Accessories 1-Stud wal[-DF 3.50" L25" 1.99"' 686 653 1334 E 1/4"Rim Board 2-Stud waEl-�F 3.56" 2.25" 1.99" 686 653 i339 1 1/4'"Rim Board •Rim Boa�d is assumed to carry all loads applied directly above it,bypassing the member being designed. Dead Floor Live LO�ds Location Spacing (a.9o) (IAO} Comments 1-Uniform(PSF} 0 to 24'6" 16" 42.p 4'0.0 Residen6al-Living Areas Weyerhaeuser Notes �susrawnaee Fp�ESr�rr ir�irianve Weyerhaeuser warrants that the sizin9 of its products widl be in accordance wvith Weyerhaeuser product design criteria and published design values. 'Neyerhaeuser e�ressly disclaims any other warrae�ties re[ated ka the soRv+are.Refer to current Weyerhaeusee literature for installaUOn details. (www.woodbriuY-�om)Accessories(Rim Board,Blocking Panels and Squash Blocks)are nat designerl by tnis software.l7se af this software is not intended to circur�vent the need for a design professional as determined by the authoriry having jurisdictlon.The designer of record,builder ar framer is responsible to assure that this calculatian is cormpatibl�with the o�rall project.Products manuFactured at Weyerhaeuser facilifies are third-party certified�sustair�able fprestry standards. The product application,input design loads,dimenscons and suppt�rt informatipn have been provided by Forte Sokware Operator Farte SoFlware Operator Job Notes i 121201 4 1 1:53:33 AM sean M�oioy ForievA.1,Design Engine.V5.7.(}.245 � Martin��dart�n � (9TDJ926-6007 i smolloya�marUnm�7in-min-Gam Martin/Martin, Inc.35 of 137 f'a�e 1 ot 1 �I F O R T E ��TIOI�S REPORT Level,Floor;Joist-sT�ort PASSED �urrent Solution: ; 1 piece(s) 7.6" T�IO 360 @ 12" OC Overail�ength:21'8" �.��'?: � + C3 r) I1�.�e-�,.- �_..—��. -„-� ,.__ _., �r-- : s_ __ . � __ �._z ____. _ .__ _� _ — 21 1" — � � pll locatians are measur�d from the outside face af feft support(or lef�cantileuer end).Afl dimensions are horizontaf.;Drawing is Conceptual Design Resufts Actuai�wcarion Alfowed Resul# ��F sysrem:F�oor Member Reaction(Ihs) 88fl @ 2 1/2" 1202 pa$S2d(73°/a} I.QO Member Type:Joist 2'�5 Bui[ding Use:Residentia1 5hear(Ibs) 864 @ 3 1/2" 2190 Passed(39%) 1.00 BuiEding Cqde:16C Moment(�t-It,$) 4628 C�a 10'10" 8405 Passed(S5%) 1.00 Live LQad Defl.(in) 0.225 @ 10'ifl" 0.7(}8 Passed(LJ999+) -- Desiyn Methodology:ASD Total�oad�efl.(in) [}.461 @ 10�io° r.a�z Pass�d t�s�3) -- T]-Pro`"Rating Sfl 40 Passed -- C"��t�'. ��j ��rz�R�_ AI[Product Solutions Depth Series Plies 5pacing T]-Pro'"'Rating Wood Valume 14" TJIQQ 21Q 1 12" 42 x 14" T]IQ 21p 1 16" 36 x 16" T]I�210 1 12" 47 1.15 16" TJIQ 210 1 16" 42 x 14" TJIO 3b0 1 12" 46 1.41 14° TJIp 360 1 16" 4l. 1.05 16" TJIOO 36fl 1 12°' 50 1.45 16" TJI�36p 1 15" 46 1,09 14" TJIC�?56� 1 1Z° 5I 2.05 14" T]IOO 5f0 1 16" 47 1.54 16" T7IQ 560 1 12" 54 .�.10 16" T]I�560 1 16" 50 J..58 The purpose of thfs reporC is for produd comparison only.Load and support information necessary for professional design review is not displayed here. Please print an indlvidual Member Report for submittal purposes. Forte Safkware Operator JAb Notes 1i2l2D14 11:39;a6 AM sea�h�oiioy Fortev4.1,Design Engine:V5.7.D.245 Mar3in'Ma�lin (970)32C�-fyq07 5mr�11py``�a,mariinmart�n-mtn com Martin/Martin, Inc.36 of 137 Page 1 af 1 '`��/� F 0 � T E SC�LUTIQNS REPQEtT Level,Floor:Joistshort-min PASSED Current Salutian: : 1 pieee(s) 16" T]IC� 360 @ 16" QC Overall Length:21'8" ;,.,;__ , ,::,. . ;; _ , : , . - , ,., >,,.. . . ,� ,. ; , m;... , ....� _, ...,,,,.,. , . _ ,,, . . , .:� + t c� a — 2��1� — � � All locations are measured from the outside face of left support(or left cantilever end).All demensions are horizontal,;prawing is Conceptual ��sign ReSUlts Actual f�Location Allowed Result LD� System:Floor Member Reaction(Ibs} 1173 @ 2 iJ2" 1202 p�ssed{98°/o) I.O[} Member Type:�oist 2'25� Buifding Use:Residentlal �Shear(Ibs) 1153�3 1/2" 2190 Passed(53%) 1.D(! 6uElding Cpde:I8C Moment(Ft Ibs) 6171�a ip'ifl" 8405 Passed(73%) 1.00 pesign Methodology:ASo Liue Load Defl.(in) p.293 @ iD'10" OJflB Passed(L/872} -- Tokai Load Defl(in) 0.600 @ 10'iQ"' i.pb2 Passed(U`�Z5) -- T]-Pro'"Rating 45 20 Passed -- All Produtt Solutiuns 6epth Series Plies Spacing T]-PraT" Rating Waod Vdlume 11 7/8" TJ�Q 210 1 12" 34 x 11 7�8" TJI�210 1 16" 25 x 14" TJT�210 1 12" 42 x 14" TJI� 2I4 1 16" 36 x 16°` TJID 24d 1 42" &7 1.15 16" TJIOO z10 1 15" �2 x 11 7/8" TJIO 36Q 1 12" 39 1.36 3I 7/8" TJIOO 360 1 16° 32 x 14° T710 360 1 12" 46 1.41 14" T]I�360 1 16" 41 1,05 16" T]ID 360 1 12" 50 1.45 16" TJICR}360 1 16" 46 1.09 11 7/8�� TJIQQ 550 1 12" 45 2.OQ 11 7,�8" T]30 560 1 16" 41 1,50 14" T]ID 554 1 12" 51 2.45 14"' TITD 564 1 16" 47 1,54 16'" T3I�5b0 1 12" 5�+ 2.1p 16" TJID 560 1 16" SO 1.58 The purpcase of this repart is fQr produd comparison only. Load and support informatlon necessary for professional design re�iew is not displayed here.Please print an ind'iv'idual Member Report fpr submit#al purposes. Forre Software Operator dob Notes 1l2/2074 11:5T.03 Ah� sea�ti7oiioy Forte v4.1„�esign Engin�:V5.7.0.245 h1a�t�n'Marsin �976�826-6Q07 smnlloya:maninmartin-mtn com Martin/Martin, Inc.37 of 137 Page 1 of � 'I F 0 R T E SOL[DTIONS REPOFt7 Level,F1aor.�Joist-short PASSED Current Solution: : 1 piece{s) lfi" TJIp 360 @ 16" OC Oueral]Lersgth:21'8° + + a c? -_-I — 21 1^ — � � All locations are measured From the outside face o�left support 4or left cantilever end}.All dimensions are horizont�l.;Drawing is Conceptual De51c�I1 R@SLIIC5 � Actual�LocaGOn Allowed �Result LUF System:Floor Merraber Reaction(Ibs) 1173 @ 2 1/2" 1202 passed(98°fo) 1.00 nAember Type:�oist 2.25�� Shear(Ibs) 1153 @ 3 1�2" 2190 Passed(53°Ja} 1.00 euilding use:Residential Bui[ding Code:F6C Mament(Ft-Ibs) 6171 @ 10'10" 8405 Passed(73%} 1.00 , oesign Methodology:ASD Live Laad Defl.(in} 0.243 @ 10' 10" 0.708 Passed(L�"872) -- Total Lpad S�eFl.(in) O.fi00 @ 10' 10" 1.062 Passed(L,I425) -- T]-Prp'"Rating 46 45 Passefl -- �-Q�f'G, �ry;is,�'�uf1rr,-- Ail Product Sa[utions Depth S�ries Plues Spacing T]-ProT"Rating Wood Vo[ume 14" T]IQ 21p 1 12" 4Z x 14" TJI�210 1 16" 36 x 15" TJIQ 21p 1 12" 47 1.15 16" T3Ip 21[} 1 16" 42 x 14" TJIQ 36Q 1 12" 46 1.41 I4" TJIQ 3fiQ 1 16" 4I x 1b" �JIO 360 1 12" 5d 1.45 —� 15" T]I�36q 1 ib" 45 1.09 14" T]I�560 i 1�" 51 2.05 14" TJIOO 560 1 16" 47 1.54 16" TJI�560 1 12" 54 2.10 16" TJIOO 560 1 16" 50 1.5$ The purpose of this report is for product comparison anly.Load and support informakion necessary for professional design review is nnk dis la ed here. Please rint an P Y p individual Mem6er Report for submittal purposes. Forta Software Operator ,106 Notes 1/212014 1 1:34:b5 AM s�a�rnoiioy Forte v4.1,pesign�ngine:V5.7.0.245 P.�an�n'Man�n �976)926-6007 smplloya�maK�nmartin-mtn com Martin/Martin, Inc.38 of 137 Page 1 of 1 � MEMBER RERORT Leve7,Fl�or:Joist-short PASSED '�'�I F� 'R T E 1 piece(s) 16Tr TJIQ 360 @ 12�� oc Ovsrall Length:21'8" .. ... ..:.. .. . . .. ,.,,,, , ,...... r ..:; , , .-.: , ;. + + [� o — 21,�P — 0 � All locations are measured from the outside face of left support(or left cantilever end).AIV dimensions are horizontal. Design Ftesults Achral�Lacation Allowed Result LDF Lpad;Com6ination(Pattern) � System:Floor Memher Reaction(Ibs) 880 @ 2 l/z" i202(2.25"} Pass�d(73°ro} 1.00 l.n D�1.�L(All Spans) �tember Type:bist She�r Qbs) $64 @ 3 1/2" 2190 PassEd{34%} 1.00 1.0�+l.p L{All Spans) Building Use:Residential Mort�ent(Ft Ibs) 4628 @ 10'10" 84�5 Pas5ed(55°/o} 1.00 1.0 D�l.p L{All Spans} Buildi�g Code:Iec Live Load Defl(in) 0.��5 C�10'10" D.708 Passed(U994+) -- 1.0 D+1.0 L{All Spans) oesign Methodology:,45D Total Load Deff.(in) 0.461�la. 10'10" I 1.062 Passed(U553) -- I.0 D�1.0 L(All Spans) TJ-Pro'"Ratinq 50 45 �'�ssed -- -- • DeFlectian criteria:LL(U360)and TL(LJ24p). � Bradng(Lu}:All compression edges[top and boktom}must 6e IZraced at 4'S 15�15"olc unless detailed othenvise.Proper attachment and positioning of Iateral brating is required to achieve member stability. •A struc[ural analysis of the deck has not been performed. • DeFlection analysis is based on composite action with a single layer of 23/32"Panel(24"Span Ratlng)that is glued and naileci down. • AdciiYional consideradons for the T]-Pro'"Ra4ing int�ude:lr2"Gypsum ceifing,ppur flooring overlay. Bearing Length LoaSs to Supports(lbs} $Upp01't5 Tqtal Availahle Required bead F�b°r Total Accessaries 4ive 1-5had wall-OF 3.50" 2.25" 1J5" 455 433 $8& 1 1(4"R�m 8oard 2-Stud wall-�F 3S0" �.z5" SJS" 455 433 886 1 SJ4"Rim Board •Rim Board is assumed to carry all loads applied directly above it,bypassing the member being designed. Dead Floor Live LOddS lacation Spacing (0.90) (i.p0) Comments 1-Uniform{PSF) 0 to 21'8" I2" 4Z.� 4�.0 Residenfial-living Areas Weyerhaeu5er Notes (Z�JSl15TAINABLE FORESTRY INITIATIVE 1 Weyerhaeuser warrants that the slzing of its producks ovill be in accordance witfi Weyerhaeuser product design criteria and published design values. Weyerhaeuser e�ressly discEaims any ofher warranties related to the software.ReFer to wrrent Weyerhaeuser literature for insqllation details. (rnvw.woodbywy.com)Accessories(Rim Board,Blocking Panels arrd Squash Blocl¢}are not designed by this saftware.Use of this software is not inkended ta circumvent trre need for a des€gn professional as determined 6y the authority having jurisdiction.The designer of record,builder or framer is responsible to asw�e that Yhis calculetion is compatible with the overall project.Products manufaclured at Weyerhaeuser facillties are third-party cer5fied to sustainable forestry standards. The product application,inpuk design loads,d'+mQnsions and wpport informatlan havz been pravided by Forte SoRware Operakor Forte SoRware Operator dab Noros 112l2014 11:34:36 AM sea�r.��uoy Fortev4.1, Design Engine:V5.7.Q.245 Mar[m�M�rtin {970}926-�007 smoiioy�mart+nman�n-min com Martin/Martin, Inc.39 of 137 P�g�1 qf 1 MART�N / M,4RT!N � CONSLJLTING ENGINEERS Title ��r��7t- �"��G� Date Jo�a no. Subject F��- V�(�f�}g,,i By Sheet of 4 + e( � �.�. et'6 0� �O �Q,�/NC+ �`/'y4r L� g 15f - 'Zc� ��6 P�','� 3�� ,z !� .� . 5�� ($7 ` �� 3 , l�' T51- 2�� ( �:� �63 f 8;4� �6� Z��G �`� S�� - Z ca t�''_ ,� �� 2�.� �� Z�Y � « �$ ��- � �S 2 �� wt, 2�.� r 6 t.t�t- 2Z,� Z�t� l�f'�� fK.3 c�. 3 Z�c� tG�� 3 r� z W 7,��c, 1(�`�$ ��f-Zc.� �jbn �'(so ?lJ �' ( �i. 7 lY r 5� -L�' 36� �6a 22.�' �(.�f � �U T,� �2�� 2.� -3GII '�3,o ��° Z`�. 7 23_� Martin/Martin, Inc.40 of 137 I�? L�. 2'�( � 'i�.'�- MART�N / MARTI te! CQf�[SLiLTiNG ENGINEERS �" 1'itle Date Job no. Subject ��,f�' By 5heet of a �� . - 3�2�� t� ,� "- ��1� ts �• �� '1 �" 7�a 5" e�'� - ��)-`�, Us�' �Cyi'r- OF�r /'? = �,6�a �� €3 �,r� �4 . t��-t�,,�' �,.._ �.:.. �/�t-�6�`� ` p= 7_(2 3�t�� - �-t�g� ,. �_ .�,��f� � �� / �n �'Lrj.6 US,� �Y�.fj �d� �� jG�r�.�'PG�ri 5f�8 `��`' � �3�i 05; , 7,> �--� �:4'�Ga � � �S ��- �� 5 � C 1``)�� ` Lvl.' ��`'`� �. Martin/Martin, Inc.41 of 137 MARTIN / MARTIN C�NSiJLTING ENGINEERS °`� Title ��,,,ti�,�2 �c0�6 CJate Job no. �: _ - — -- - Subject By Sheet af dJ�G lt.� �L•, 1� �,�� LL- ! � ��„f �� sr � U�� '�� 1��- i�T � _«�. ' � �= ,z . s.� �.,/-< �.�i �-r�� . �� `'��#� i �. �� <��°". _ r� = �y�� 1 x 3�3 �e�� r� ��f� �,s�IZ ��'�— f3� �J iy �.w .��t z. /�� ' z ��c 1� �_Gq� � 1f-d�r� � L� � L�� -��. ` �� r� °�� tr.�= �.a �� r�� .� 2-� •-I,��' "�-�'�� ' �I�'/ 3 U � �J;�. �` � !��-��` � �� rz ��a6 �3� �� - 6�r � �._---� Martin/Martin, Inc.42 of 137 MARTIN I MARTIt�I .. .,.......:?-^`'_.. C�NSlJLT1iJCi ENG3NEER5 �' Title Date Job no. Subject By Sheet of �t4 ra n.- � �� (i ` `� � � 0�- - `�� ,�-� �� vsT �b' �T� . ��--- ��"��/ '��°`'_ �� (i"� 7. � (�L -° `��- Uc�� , U5r Z�� t°l� r�r. �'% �"�1 �i3-�e.� c?°"�`-G � r � r �L �� (��-�-t� � � ��-a��r�� - !6�° � , f � �� - S t�� 't E �� ` ��t��- ��J (��-�� i`��'� � �� Martin/Martin, Inc.43 of 137 MARTIN / MARTIN CONSlJLTIN6 ENG]NEERS �'�� Title Date Joh no. Subject By Sheet of �-,�,�-� ��'��a,�,�,.. �, j7�s� ,� �___.._...__.___,....�.�'�- c...= ��.�,� �. � ,.�� ' ��9 g' (/• 3zz-� , /�� Y�- C�J 7�y ��'; �`�—) �� C`�1��., � ��r2fJ/�`z , :_, r � �)r'� � Y��# T ��f(;3 �i'•: �� ' �� 1�� f 5�� `�°' = S`�,,'� Ci�� 2�-� C�J 7`'.�c�,; C2� �'�y �.�`' �3�`��r`� G,�2 f��. �' Martin/Martin, Inc.44 of 137 MARTI N / MARTI N CO3VSLJLT[NG ENGINEERS �' �� Title Date 1ob no. Subject ey 5heet of S��lr'(cL�<�i. �a� /i t�i= 6 �U� � (fL�= 2�'Z � r�i��,�r� �'� � � Z� � �-��`�� 1� � �r orz 3:�°�z �n�i�"�� /- 'r`J� ' � . . �' � ' ��. � �� ._ �,e� - � �� ps�- �� 7�� --��-`� 3�r� �?�� 2 �Z� �}x8 e `� V�� Gf�(2. �/ ,�.ra.�a s� a<� C,.�- -�,�� a� / ,,. �_ Martin/Martin, Inc.45 of 137 MARTIN / MARTIN CON S LJ LTI N G EN G I NEERS Title �� ,�� Date a�a�f l� Jobno. � � � (� �� Subject � / �– �j l' '�pDh � Ov�,PL HAN� By �M Sheet l of f r a� t�d�,E� �d�` at-o �N� �No W = l�I, 5�� D R„^r� � � -._ U�l�N tj : -85P�� or�zz t-�aN�� -6� a Ro�oF - � � �- � . I b�A� = �g ��.� , �. � �— -_ - --- �- � �s_e —�- �) � � � �f s �_ _ �� 0,6 � t W /� ._ ,� x i� �- � �-3 � � ---�—; —+-- c I ! B I i _.._a _�?�`►�l�1 c�N/�/ �' �'r 3 i �i � —--I- , , I r_ . r _I�� —1—' — � (�� - I aG l . � - a� l !� I__�1_ _ - � -�—�-_o—' � _ ___- =— � � '�3� �f = ��85 '-� � — � I �I I � '__ °c � i ' � �i I I _ �A� �I N4 P5�I�I �A�G� l��"1JNT �A AIC �1� . —A�__ _ f 1—� �lZ� _ �� -VL - - -- 3x�a �� a �p�,� = i � �� '��M,N� �s�o w= � � �o '� c,�+ti� o ,� �v�9'/a �1 � � ��J u�°T = �'15��,,,,�� 'No+�v` _ �66 S '� �,��N, � � �_ _ � �> �-1 Ul�!C�4/v c T1� � � i � Sin�py�N ��,J�� - l��'� uP�.►�T�64�� _ l aG�� a� I -- � � � � _ � -i � � -� , � � -� '----� � ; i �_ i-1— —.—_ Martin/Martin, Inc.46 of 137 .—_y. I- - ; --• � —i-- - MARTIN �' MARTIN CONSULTING ENGINEERS Title �'1/►/t,g� jz 'j2t��y� Date ala�ll�}- Job no. ��. 08�-� Subject �� 15-6)�j �dkl0 PoST � LuL CON/1� BY A/V` Sheet� of � � i ` ' % x � : _ _— -- ; - - - - - -- --- - 3J �v i� �i y�- - I 4 0 b � I � G O � - � - - !�'� 1� 77Mr��z ��i` '- - - � � � � - ' ,� - �, - - � � I i i A� T- �- - � 5►Z E Co Lv M. c�t n w/ s�M n�oA✓ ryn� c�n�CiG�, i � �f1�� = 5�4�1 w� _ �'/�.,� �PL - ��' ,} �, _ � � t- � I� �I%'►nP - � � ��, , � , Y� 3�y`� BOL I S `� C�/vl o c3 3 " o a ��l 3v � _.�a� .�t/ � Bo�TS m �oL - - sr �� Y�-- , .�--a-,�, y,,` �� s �^ — �, ;� t 1 �� -� — Wrora� � � �� _��, - '�`_� _ 6 �/a" I o - f J%, _ � --I � —> /!�.LL AIMS /Vl�:�-l� S[,v1 F?��+�! 7"3''I�: l��1 A1 - --� I � �l—,—i !� _ . ! . ; ! ! - --- � - -I 1.__ � � —i � a ' -- -+---- - � � — -- � i � � � � ; � i I i '— ,- —�—�—i— - I - - I_ —;� i � i � ; � � -- � -I- -�- - - � _ �� — . , - - ; - T � , �u I � : � � ; � ;---- _ —; - ; -' . , � - � - - � , I I 1- --- , V j I I ' � ! ' � � ! � I I I I ! -----�-- � —,—�— �--{---1— - ,—�— - - --�—;-- - -- - a - �-�- ; _i--,- --�---�-- -- — i i—fl Martin/Martin, Inc.47 of 137 �— - � -- I I Q MARTIN 1 MARTIN CON SULTIN G EN G INEERS Title TInnB�R }2t�?c-i� Date a/a�-l��- Jobno. [3. OS�� Subject �/5—(�1� -�'�t� $��"� �NlIJ BY A,,1/( Sheet � of / L[�At��M�T�/ ! �- _- �._ � � 4 t--- !- -�-- —r � _ � r,,, X � i � ;�K � � � ��o� � � �G �6:� ��1�-,�. �� o �r __t . �-�� .= �� t� _ � � �s.� , � ° \ , � �''��b = ' ��5��;.� �Qvc�?N��l� i � � � I _ e _-� � _ - � � . �� — ' � � � � � � T= �,�� _ ,`�. � � - a �Pa N �� a °�,� ' �� 18.� — . -- _ < _ � . _ _ _, � �= -�,,s° . _ � � —�— i � __ —-- , � i i � '�?�AC'IS�_7 0 — ;-�--�- -_ _,- ._ . ,-- _I� � I. 1. � .e':_��I��J i�in�T�7�.� To [.�bG��7� I � _ L`� , �� sn�c�ni� e �`,,e o � �= G4�'s� - a35 � � 3x)a -� 5►r�n�vo►.I U31d U = � G66<<��N � _ `1��1��-.�,� a : n J .� �' � ��C�R Con►ti TD �t�n�i Bai4rz� (Ty p�c�� - --- �3�}� l� �ct��.w�, Q 96 `` OG = �3�� _ (80 �� n.��n ° A,7' 3Rac�.�" Ca�� l�rr.��r,� Gx� � a cv�n �ti� � � _. -_ _ s��n P�o�► D� � T= �� a S'�' > �310 « �}� %a�Q�i THR.EAD�A F�lSD �— � � �LOG�[1 /UC-� `�Ja �p t A Pt-' ��;,�'? .�- .� f _ . 11�,, = a3C��.�,�` �/,�x � �r,� � mo �-(-� o� �/�,� ��:�.�; � �� - - - , } Martin/Martin, Inc.48 of 137 � ��—t i I � I I WoodWorksO Connections SOFTWARE FOR WOOD DESIGN bracket.con WoodWorksO Connections 8.2 Mar.13,2014 14:53:11 Two Wood Main Members Bolted in Splice Joint To a Steel Side Member Connection Data: Main (x2) : Timber-soft D.Fir-L No.2 dry seasoned 5.5 x 5.5" (6 x 6") Side Plate: ASTM A36 Grade A Steel 0.25 x 4" Length of inember overlap is 10'� . Temperature (T) : T <= 100 deg F Loads: Along main member: 3942 lbs two months duration in compression. Connector Design: Fasteners: Bolt diameter: 3/8" 1 rows of 4 Bolts = 4 Bolts Bolt spacing in row: 1.5" Design Results: Load: P = -3942 lbs Lateral capacity: Z' = 4902 lbs Note: Steel design checks NOT included in design. Suggested Design Only, Designer Must Ensure that the Design is Appropriate for Intended Use Additional Data: Adjustment factors: CD CM Ct Cg Cdelta Cd Cst Cft 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.96 1.00 - - 1.00 Yield Limit Values (lbs) : Im Is II IIIm IIIs IV 2039.06 5775.00 - - 2997.03 1104.21 Martin/Martin, Inc.49 of 137 ,.Mfi.F�TI N / MARTI iV CONSi1LTIN� EN��H��RS �` Title pate Job no. �. 5ubje[t By Sheet af S�o �,./��yzc� . �=�`� �o� �'�fr-� [.r � �� ?��1 ��i1.7:�� • ��l?a � �F°`� C�f �� `� �'� 1`��rt �'CK�fy]) -2�f � 2�6 P�� 2na ��,f ., ��7 � Zf�cf� �� ` �S� L -- 3��9 ��- �.� �� f << �,r � �, t°= � . � ��- �"z� �-)(��?�) �� z� -z� � Z.� � � J� � zo�, �f �� f�(Z��z�i'��-�)•"7%�� 2.�-G � j � 2 �or ;�� 5�� Z�� t� �: ��of y .: IC� k� - ��s � ,� {�.- u�g .� �(��,4) - �� Z�6�� j 2�`J H ('l 2:Jr Z�Y�.��(a)` I�``'1 � �, �� 7�'`� f Z�`='LA'l�}- `�,4`f LE � �N.� - ��,� �!{/��,�� t RT Zz.�� . t_. �Z:�!� �'�� Z-`�a `�`r�e�� 'Lw� L' � � � 2�� ' ��('L�(v��<��{�.'� 2�� `�°1 `��€Z°f �- �bO� c� "�2..��t� � �� (�. K� � 2:6�� Martin/Martin��.�C�of 137 2�(,P 4�; � <v�� f.`G! ��.(� �Y��'`�S M,4RTttrt / MARTih! ..., .... �a:- GaNSLJLT3tdG �NCaINEERS �=`�� Title Date Job na. � Subject By Sheet of �,�r"' �� 2 r�j� Z��/��) - �� 2 d�r �� 3 � t Z��-�'�`�� ` �'�`� 2 7,�or �2��', (� ��_. �. �� Martin/Martin, Inc.51 of 137 � � � � a� � �� .s ° � '� � � � M , � � U U U � � m � O O O O � N C4 � � m � ap � r CV � W � � V � � � T N �CV N N � � � � Q O O O � � x •� Z Z � Z °�� M1\ w J J J J �,.. � Q. � � � � � � C? Ef' d' � �' U7 � CV CV N N � � � � _ N I i I I N I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I i I I I I I ' I p I N I I i I i � I i I I � I A a� _ ! II li I I I � V ' I I I I I I R1 Q � I I I I� I li I � I I I I I U � I I I I I i I I I I I I I � i I I I I i I � � i I I I I ! I I I � N I I I I I i I I y I I I I I I I �`, � ' � � t � I II I I I � � i ° i i � � � � � � � ' , � � i � � i i � i i � � � � �� i i � � � i � i � i i i _ � i , , � I I I T I I I I I I I I li I li li II I I f I p � I� I I I i � I I � i I I I I � i I I I � I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I � Li I � ! � � � I � I I I I I = i , � N I i � �- i i I I I i `tJ � I i I I I I i i I � � I I y C �� i i � � i i i i o i i i (p � W O O � O O CS O O C� C7 O O O Q 4 O O O O � Q Q p Q Q � Q � O O O O C� p Q Q O p O � d d C7 O � O O O O O O O � Q d1 •- N � 00 C4 zt [V O N CO � N 0 0J (Q �t CV O o0 Cfl � (V b c0 CO � N I� � 0 lC) L[a S# �Y �Y '� � C7 C7 Ch S�'} C� 4`J N N N CV r r r r � O � .v � �.�d - peo� u��o}iu� a o0 � o �; � � —� .� cri Martin/Martin, Inc.52 of 137 � � � � � a�i '�' Q r � Q � � � `I � � U C1 U � � � r � S- � Q O O O � � � � m � ��, 1 � ��t N�1 � � CO ��J' � �J l�J � � � (V N N N Q � O O O O � x •� zzzZ � W J J J J � {�p L.L L.L LLD L,L l � d � � � � � O CO Cfl CO (O -� U� � CV N N N � � � � N � � I I If 1 II III il ' � N I I I i I illl l II I il � l IIII ' il I I ' I I Ifll ' � II � III I I II I IIIII I � IIII Ili lll . 11 II IIIV li I ' ! I i : l I I III I E' I I I 4 I I I I i I � I I i I N III I II '� lili I il I II I II Il � � ill � III III Illil Il � ii III i Ilil I ill III II i ilf ! III II I II � II I '� � ' � � � i � co � il I lil II I il Ili I � '�y I I I i I I _ I ' I I I i � �. I I ' I I I I I I � IIII ! � I II � I I � I I � � II I I I I Ili II U ! IIII ! I I I II IIII ! II II ' I � il II I � i lill ' I � � I II iI I I ii � � I I II ' I i � ! r w..� I I I I I I I I i I I I I i w G� III I I I I I II � ' Il I � k I I ' I I ' I i � I .0 � � I I I I I I i I � I "-' Q I i I I I I I I I I I I _ _ I I � � III � I III . i i I � I li i il ii � � ill II I I II � � I II II � I � I � I I � I I I I �i 4 I i il � f i I i I I I I ' � I I_ I � i III I ' i I � I il I C I I � li � lll il ill I � III I II illlll 1 � 1 II � i N I I I I I � � � I ' ' i ! I I I I I � I I i i il ' I II II � II I � I II li i ^ I I ! II ' I I � I i I I I ' I I I i I I I I I � i I i IIII II I I � Ilil I � I i I � il � II O I I II , I Il � li � il I I � lill ; I I I ' I � II II ! i I II I II II I il I I l lil I II I II I i I I li I � ill � III �I ' III ii II i k I �I IIII I � II I II Ilil � � I � N �j I , I I I ' IIi III ! I x � illll I � ! I III � I � II i I ' il ii ' i '� i l l I � � �/j I � I I I I I l i I ' I I l i � I � I I I_ _ I i I I � I I � � ! I i I I I ' I � � � ,� � � -°— � t/y . � , � � � � � � , � � , � � , � co '� � e �� w � �, .. � � p �`- o � � � �Id - p�o� �ao�iun o 0 �' o r; d' �7C � r c*� Martin/Martin, Inc.53 of 137 � � � r � T Q'r � Q � � � � � � � r � }� U tJ U T3 � m iL3 �? Q O d � 'r m � � N CD � N v p CO � � {V � � V V V V � � N (V N N O 'g � � . � � � � Z Z Z Z 1,� � � � J J J J d !1. LL.. LL LL N � ❑ 0 ❑ 0 ��} � � CO CL� C9 (f7 O � X X X X Cn .� N CV hJ C�E � � � � N II Ili I I ! N II II III II III ill ill I I I II I I i I III i III III illil �. I I I I I ' I I I � I I I I I I I ili Ililllll il i I II I II ' I II ' I hl I li II I III p II I ill ! II ii � il CV i I II ' I � iil ill i II , II II I I ' II II I � I I � I I I � IIII ' I il il I i � iil � i II II il I ill � � I IIII Ilil III . II I I I � II _ IIIIIIIII I ! III I ! � ,r.r I I I � I i r '� i ' Il i II ill II i � i i I ' I I i I_I ! I I I I Q � I I � II � li I I II III I II U ! I I I II I I ' Ill ' i ' ii III I II � III i � III II ' � � I I I ' I I I I I I I , r �+ i I I ' i I ' I I i I I I I ' I .k' N I I � I I I I � I � III i i II li I III ! t � � I I I I � I I +r O II I � I I ' I II � � ill il I i � I II I � I I II iI � � J I Ilil ' Il i III II � i I I I I i i I I � Ti I ' d1 I I ' I I i ' I i. I I � � (� IIIII I I ' li � I II I I L3 j il i I � � � I I � II I ill I II il I C � IIII �� II il I lii i � �i I � I I �� I � � � I I I � I �,.� � I I �. : I I i I �. i � I I . j I r � I � I I I I � ' ; I ' I I II II , I ! I I I I I. I � II i � I � I I I � I � I III I I , ' II ' � li � � i iI � I ! II I II II I i I � II II II p I I I I I : I I I I i I I I � �I � � fl ' Illll � I � I � i � ll � II �� I � II � I i I I , lill ' i II IIII I II � � II � II I ' II I � iiiil � I II I li ' i III I I i I I ! I I � ' i ' pp v� I I i 1 I I I ' I I I I ' I I I � I � i II ill II I x C ii II ! I i II I ! i � ll l � � � � i � I i � s/i I I � � � I I I l i I I I � I � ii i � i � � ii � ii � m ._ _�._ — - in � � i � i i � � i i . i i i i i i „ C�7 � W �' ay . I� � p r� O � � .a ��d - pea� w�a�iu� o c� a+ p T cy fi � � Martin/Martin, Inc.54 of 137 � o 0 0 � c� � o c � � � c o G o o p � O O O O O O O O O O O Q 4 O O O d O O � O d O O O O 6 O O O O O G C O O d N 6] r r lL7 �f7 I� V 7 I� L.n I�- V V :O lf� lf) l'> ll� 11? V 'v' 'C '7 Ln ti7 Gt �t' ?1� � N O I+ �d° ip tp iV Ge cp N � � r �— N +r 07 t0 N G1 u7 t0 uy � N N �D �) d r C V7 t� e- O C1 �C7 h O CA O1 O7 N t° r r +r N N M r- C C C C � �' O �A �f7 > 4 S4 (D i6 (D LO Q Q O O O O O N Q7 N Li? f`� R C1 — I� I` ti I` f� CO d0 00 �0 a0 � t0 SL1 N � N M o9 ch r(l [rl M M � O� 6� QY O'i N N f� W � N r N f`J N N N � r �-- �^ r U7 tn M C*7 � l� M N — SO � � I� V N O f1 V (fJ CD LV Q) UJ (V V V <- �J U d '-` � � O) 0!] N 6J � Cf� � CP � N N CD (9 O N 1� � O� O) k? t� O Q) 07 Gn SV O_ � r r r r [y N M N N � � 4'7 O <O r �!'i r �(] N � r (L? h C1 M � — � 1� r iV � O tlb h- h o cO [`] N O �- �' ~ r � r r r 'a 06 � 1`- OS �C1 N �'1 C� �-- r A-- N � '� � � C C C C f' ' ' ' ' � co o in �n > ca cfl co co cQ co �n �n rn m ry T � �1 h [� � — f4 f� f�- f� R N {V N N N M M N O V t*) O CO (O CO (4 La CV N [V N tV O7 � N C'r) � N N CV N N N N N N N �27 �� d' � �.l m - ro � � � u� a cc� r �n e� cv oo cp n r� o `` � � — V I� CV �' Q 00 h h d Cfl C3 M [O � �L �- ~ � � w � � � � r r N � V' � y� '� r �1 �11�1 z SS C] � li! 1� 6 Qi D? G7 f0 01 [G � h N `p � 4�1 � — r-- l� lPh OO V° �t O N �7 L71 �i1 h tC1 '' r--ti �. � Nr cL7 � M Q N 6D� i`7 Q N CO <77 {�y 4V N � N tV N r r tV 'q' S4 ci' � �.,� � C C C C CV O lt1 lf7 7 1] O O O O O ti 1�- ti t� ti V' c}� M N r in 1` I` � — o� 00 0� c0 � �D cD CD (D �Ll � V M �D � [�7 SD O C7 � O o �i7 �e7 4] u] �[] 00 06 07 � m m C+� M M N N N N N (D (D V V N — (S) � �� O T tt) h- � � CO �C3 tA Q� V3 uS u7 C{D U a ' (D (Q N V V C7 N V (3) CO �D CO � � { fLj V f`? Q � �4 M O N N Cn � �- N (V (V N N N 7 CO (D [O � � Z 4 C�C M C1 Lf> N �A G3 (f? t� Rn 1� O O O � � O1 0 � N o� cS� o cfi N � N � � � � oo �n o r- oo r- e� rn m r- ca � �ra � M M th N N M M� C� �- N M tD � h h � � � � T .l m ocn �.n > � a000000a000000 N � u� s�. r� � - � ao � a3 m o 0 0 0 0 0 o v �� co ri cv �a co cu co co aa as rn rn � v rr � in v v v v v c� c� �n m �a o o r- r� � r ,-� w � � U - m .n � � cv r� rn un c� u� c» �n r. u� � o o co R ri - rn o �r nt rn o7 o v c� rn e.i c�� w � �+J fS1 00 �d] O h c0 I� c�7 O] c0 i� CO N 4. M Ch N N ch c+'1 c+� N c�'j cD C� c� ..- � M � � � � � � 4 4 O C? O O O O O O O Q � O ��, � — �0 CO �0 oU o0 �S7 �i'> u7 0l'? 4] O d C�7 m '„� � O? O� � � 01 4C� CO CO �D � �i' � M c"J �J (� � > "y t7 Q O O O O O Q O 4 4 O N C� � lL O_ � �0 � � � r r r r r O O Q7 CF! �� V V N N p� � 3 d O O � � 'yj O O Q O O O O O C3 4 O C� CC) 4 r �� u,�'�, O O O r LL Q 00 N W 00 00 u� �CJ tL� u7 u� 4 O � 67 � N .- r � r � � �- � r r � r r ct V' N {�l ,_, l- � � d � � � �- .2 � � V � O r � xfi N N N �i �' � � I+ �' L,�' p U U U (] — V CD Ql N V N ('<'S M1 Q N '�P t''? M u? C F- N V ['� !� fO C7 M N C�1 C7 r7 M f� � �,,,, '- V V N M �Y � �1' (�J c'� �7° OJ � � � � � k Q m 'Uj O U) V ll7 O CO li� CD 13] Q O � jl Q � t`�5 O � ls5 N I� h- t�. N u] C� C57 [�7 � a r C3 CO 4) � � Q1 �1 8� � d� N CV M a -� � � m �NO � � o � �, a � � � oaoo �, � � r„1 O O N 4 4 � � C7 � �`- O O O O O mi �f7 I� C7 eT� CU u7 c9 Q7 � �D cD S7? Q N N N X J C C V� �� d N O O Q M 67 � � � �f] tf] 4{) •r 'O � � M I� � a � ifl Ca? C' @ � N c'"7 � � �r N C7 � 47 � � J J Q O C,7 Q Q O � p c] O O ? � (n f/7 � � 00 H Z Z Z �n U Z Z Z u7 U I- H � 4 � v '� � ¢ N tl�ir M � � � d O_ �J J J J J J J J J *k u7 � � � � � u.. �� u_ � U U CJ CJ C1 C] O � O � T T S 2 U3 C.� UJ (n Martin/Martin, Inc.55 of 137 � o c c c c o o c o O Q C� C7 O o o C :J Gy 4 '�-.�' 4 O G O� O b o � o C � 0 4 C C� J .'7 0 � O p O O C O G � O C O ^7 W r LL� L'7 f4 `7' T M1 4) I� �:` V �fl fCJ l'� �r5 l() lfJ �1' '7 '�' `�' l.n d' �4' �S Z � 1� W � e- A l(1 M D> Y7 t� lf! tf1 � — B0 � GO U9 00 � � M � fD G� �? 01 � � � � � � � � � r � N � et C C C � C �t O � t1? 7 � � V V V V 90 00 � [Y.)) [O T O? V N u� N N d — f� f� h ti ti N N N [�9 N 4 O f'�i V N � { CO N 00 OO fA N N N iV fV �A Cb N N c`') ('7 M M f'7 M M C? C'? M � 00 (D CJ � — N � �S3 I� 4U CO Y f� li� V C`� Q) lS7 I� LC) lIJ � U � — CO r CO 00 00 V M �' C•7 � (D 00 0� 67 N � r � � � �r r � r � N d' 7 7 2 t1 E� t0 � N f� N � O} f+ N O� ef1 �CJ r g— � VF 1� M r �A CV J fLi Ln O G G � N N � �r N N N r r N � cp Ep f� C C C C (D O 1n lCJ > � �p �O � �D CD � O � O O <D (.O r r u7 N N CL, — u] lC) ln lf3 lfJ W CO� P] 00 00 � V S�- Q � � � �D Cfl tO [O CD W � CO W 00 C'] {`7 C•l E!) V V V V V M� M (�l M c"J O O ti ti U} ' f0� � � � f� (O V N I� N u] 6) 1� N Q1 dC? �A C7 U p, ° � f� M u7 N O CD 47 V O O � rm 4� C7 C"7 Cp Cf7 lLJ {V. M f� �1 7 GQ CO �CS L�]- N N r r N CV {V r- r N 7 L4 (� h- Z � V {�� 001 Gr � � S�F 1� O � T� ti 4 � — r N CA M r N 1+ O '� N C1 G> F� � tD N u7 u7 tD u) O o? 7 � M t"'J �IA c`i c'J� [V M M M N M� tC Oti Ot Of G C C C N O iS7 �!? > _O O d t7 O O O O O d O O O �SS 4 � 47 N� N LL — V 'C cY V 'Et � � �? tL7 in O O Q 1� 4 � � C7D CA C31 CA 6] 67 O� C3� 6� CA i*S CJ 7 �[) rt'} ti') id? �1'S �S7 'd' 'V' �T' V 'tl' M M Ol m 97 — (4 � � S] V' C'7 OU O 7 �7 N f� O V V I� I� r U � — r LL'� G7 M r fV 1�- O V N V Q] O) a0 (4 iO N W � CC1 lfi � � � l!7 f'') M V Ci. c'7 c'] N M M M SV M cD Qi (� O m ,�-.. z S] � 1(1 ln f� Op C} M 4> r C7 4'1 G O f`J g — L"1 �fl �O OO M 4Ti tL1 r-� � G7 N t0 a0 t"7 � lfl lCl �"i 'e!' �'1 N � N M �7 O� �1 �[1 �D r w-- r° C C C C �3 O N N � � � � V � V O O O O O O O !"� N �7 N N d — "3` V V V V f�-- [� 4� f� f+ N N �f] C6 C� � � � � u�"� � LL�7 N t�V N N N � V V � r r r r r e- r r- e- [+� ch N CQ U ` (it 1] �S� 03 tn �f7 R aCJ c) f+� 07 crJ u7 O �� N p_, — M � 4i7 OJ M 6� (.4 'C}' m N � CO� C�J iA � EV O O C%J (D i33 m Ql 47 Cn r � 'd � U� M 7 dIi lt7 � N M ll7 Ql uJ � Ki7 � 13 O O O C] O �?� � �f7 � lC? C3 CJ M uJ — f� 1� 1� 1�- F- F� I� R I� f'- O O O � CA 6� � C57 dJ cf Et V d' � CS) Cff h h- CV N N N N N CV N N {V (O� Cfl �1' V 7 '�y O L� O O O O 6 O O O O O u7 O C LL Ci 90 CD CO o0 OD � � { `-�- .�) C7 O o0 tl� C ff 'cY N N � C7 O C7 Q li7 >'y O O � O O O O Q� O� O Q O lt� O � 0 0 0 � L� a ca ao co m m in �n �ri in �ri a o m aD N � r r � r r r r .r �-- r � �--� 'V V N N Q Q o � � w � cs7 v cb cn o0 0o m c� m P f c� �n O U U U (� � _ � °v ti rn r o�'i o u�'-� o°a rn o u°� s°n c`�p � � �- r- cn M v r� co cfl en v c� T as o0 0 � � � X a m'� o u-� � �n o r co in co �- u� o o �ri — ii Q u� c� o o �c� c,i ti ti r- ev +n rn w c-s � Q � a c� m � T cn �n ti � rn � N c`�'r Q � U � m 'N O O 47 d O cC3 Q O � 4n O O C? Q (/y �J,J LL Q O O N O O h �t7 O 1� 1+ C3 4 L� t� Q O) lt7 f� d 67 07 � fD W T �F �O CA Q N N (�l � J C C VC �C � d �^"i O �O 4a f5? N `�� `''� I"' 6C3 � I� "6 � � M I�- 0- ,.., uj � pD (4 r N M � vy 'r N c"� ,� tn� � � J J � � N � o 0 o y o 0 0 0 � o sn v� � crl H zzz � � zzz � �a � � � a o a`�i � � ¢ � a� c� �' y � �- Q J .� J J J J �.l �I J �t cn u- u- � e� �- � u� �t- t� � C� C� C) CJ ❑ 000a � xx � � cnrncncn Martin/Martin, Inc.56 of 137 o c c u c v � c o c r� .v .� ca O O O C� o o q o p C C} .; O C] O O O C C Q O C 4 O � O O 0 4 O O O G C -�^. O O C O O O O N a7 c- ll� 4: f� `7 7 I� U3 1�- V � (O � 47 Lf? l() lf: ., `-7 '7 7 ll7 '. . 'S z � C7f � r 'st Cr C'S C+E � OP M a�] 1� h- N � — � N 00 A d' O'1 Cy C1 N 'd' � N d N O r T N �-^ Q� � � r 00 9G W �!') (V N r iV N �^ a^ i-° N M 47 �F1 fD C C � S �f O 4? i1] � � I�- f� I+ #` I� V CY 'V 'S7 � I� � N � h I� d — lfJ ln u7 xC7 � f r I� i'� li'] r N (D � (O CO (s7 t� t0 M f� h R h �+7 tt') t� � �ra �n tc> [[a �n v v � �r V T t� a� rn � — f6 17 � � O5 7 �e- �d^ � [�7 N V a0 r� [^. E� I` N U [L — V N W 1� � Q) N � CJ � � N C3N. N � r f CV N � e- � N � � l!'] (D 2� p r M M O N fD 47 SO M N C`) �'! O g— CA � M 01 Cs �U � �[! O M P- t� N � M M r� � ��"! M N � N M � O�S T O � C C C C Cf.7 C�? � f� (1 � C�] O O O O � n !'�M1 I� R LC1 (�O CJ (`'1 � � C4 P f� � I� I'� I` (� (O [O (D Cfl CD (D r � N " f4 1] E � O � Cy Cr5 4 N <A � C9 LV CV M M O � 6.. "` 4D � M [Y Cn O �D Et � Q C�] h f� N (6 cY a6 V V d' C� f� C7 V CTi O O � 0. M C�') N M e'? N w CV C�7 lf7 U) Qa C] � r � S3 07 P- O i"S Qi 61 tD CS M Q7 N 4 4 �1 � — r M Cf 1+ U1 171 li7 T CS �`'7 M h d CO c7 uy M a0 cU O � N c� +i- 47 �[1 d1 V' �t N M � � � N M � 00 N t`V 4`J � r +r" C C C C N O � � � Q 90� [O N 90 O� O � Q O O p Q CP �Y .-- lf') 1+ P � — OQ [O [p a0 � V V �' �i" V V � �f3 'CO� O (O S"7 O 4 O C7 O N N SV N N �L} �D �CJ CO � C� 6? C35 45 O) V V { T � � r � N N fll — S9 �� 17 07 M1 O M QY W (.O O cr1 C� N G7 O lC7 U d i T' M M f� � � 6) � lf) Q) Q) C� M h f9 B] c�7 lf? M o0 CD O V N �D �l] U� C53 Q V V N M 'V' d' s'P N M V 0� N N S`7 ? n �# ;k *k ca o v o o �# � � � g � � � o o C C o � � � a oo ea o0 00 00 � #p iYl N iA N N � C C .0 .0 # ;k � 00 OU 00 G4 00 �t �# Xt � �Cl h- N El � . � � �$ � O d O O O � � (O� CD O � �k � � � � ��C7 � � ��(7 � � � � � a0 W� a0 W V � Rf � � � �7 {f! I� O7 u7 C7 t� N �i:1 O � O O �f1 � — n0 d CO� Ff 00 � Q? �f] C3) M V V f� � h O O V I� � CD 00 N �IJ N N N Lf1 N- E� M1 V ICi I� h- fLl c'] U"s E�- c'7 4 � N r N N N �j .O O O C7 Q p G7 p Q p O O O O O — CO CrJ C4 CP 4? O C7 O � CJ O O P 00 CA CA � 4? � M M (`'J C'� M 00 CO N M M C? C] M ('7 M M (*] S'!� M 00 CO (Q CO > 'y O O O O O O O d O O O O �(} O � L.L p.. CO 00 oP � aJ r � e�- r r O O OJ � V V N N d C'� � d O � > '�j d O O O O O O Q O O O O �� Q � O 47 O � L.L Q 00 CO W D� 00 U J !f7 4t7 ls 1 li 1 O Q �C7 t�3 N r ,� � ,� � r r i--� e-- r �- f r � � N N � Q_ � .� �- � � 47 Ch crJ O � V V O m Ctf W Et O U U CJ U � � �OV i�'n rn c�o ar c"'v o ti v c�.i � � � u� � � •- rn ao v cg rn a7 aa v � rn co � v r� � � f`J N N � U � 'N O 4'� Y' tfT O - 06 lf'Y (O If] O O �[] Q tL Q � CJ� O O lf} N h I+ I� N if] 07 C37 M (>4 r O CO Cp r r [5� lfj h. r � � fyy C7 7 � � � r N N M d �C7 U � m�N o o �n o cx �n o 0 1n 4n o a o o � W � Q o o cV a o ti �n p c�- � o o a o o w � ti ca rn oa �n cp rn � cn c� oa a cv c� cw x J � � �� m� ��'. a � o o a � � � � � en �n o c� 'a � � m r. � Q' � ti'7 f`� N f� � N �'} G7 � [V M tn, v_- � � M U` O O O b 0 O O O � O C.� C� � � O � Z Z Z �n V Z Z Z �n U H H ._1 4 � C3 � � � ¢ � a� c� tp U � Q � � Q. J J J J J J J J .J � c,) �- � � w � � � � � � U CJ U CJ O ❑ � (� d S � _ � T U? tn cn c� Martin/Martin, Inc.57 of 137 C r'-' ^ O G O O C G� C G C C G O o 0 o O O C Q 4 p O C O O 0 0 o C o O o C 0 4 4 C O Q O G C O Q O O O J O O G O Cr N � f � �f'7 �C7 f� `7 V f`- l,7 I� �7 V !:J �7 �n � � U7 d' ':* 7 -S L7 -7 7 � Z .il r O f0 iG0 +r r 61 lP �p r 41 Q1 47 N a — M A t0 s1' 00 �U � � 1� O O � SO �il 7 Ch 00 f� l`J �t 90 h f+ M M r N N � s^ N iV CV � � N � h h- CO ,C ,C C ,C N ll� N N CL 1� CD [D S� CO (O M M t"� C'S ('� � �l? 1� tl7 N CO V 43 CQ CO CO QU � �13 �7 �.t7 �S] M M f"7 � N ti h t�- f� !� CO (.O CO �9 fD � h N T v- � d — t0 � �1� � O (6 00 r r � C'J 07 � Q3 m U) N L� d °" f`] f� (O � G6 O O) V ti O CJ �17 (9 CO �fl V C� W f'� M� V � 1� I� (`'7 M r � N N �- r N N N r � N �t f�- f� 6J Z � tV �O O M N L^') LO � V M SO r r b �— ftl N O� I[� !Q !L� O 00 b' 11� � th d � a M p1 N O M N. 1� C7 iCV y' M c! � M N M � � M N N � f� r r [+i �-- r �- C C C C cD O i+') � � .e] V V � � V" C7 Q O O O O O c'J CV r u[S N N d — OJ W OJ � GO f�- f� f� h- �+ N (V CO O V � � V V V 7 tt I2� li1 lt7 4fl U) UJ t(9 en F' 'S'°` T Y r O) G) OZ Q) OZ lIi l.fJ GJ OD r r r r cy c� �r � � — � � � � c� co o c» c� m ao r � m cfl o � a' c�ri D�i N o :9 ni Q � rn N v m M c'nty �- 7 M N C? � V C] N N � 6� r r N N r r r �� r M t� 'V' C7 Ca N iD t+1 R N L�t T � O N � N O � ��-° C O � N f�D f�D 'H a �a �i m � � u� �n � � u� c u� u� r� � t r � c c � c cv o �n in > � o 0 0 0 0 0 o c� o a rn o'� cn h �� N fV A — O O O O O �7 �C7 �l'3 �CJ � C'') M h � O � N N N N N N C'') M tL� N i7 ¢�') M ('7 M m � d) 6� � CO I� N N N N N <-^ lfi l!7 M C"J +� — ID S] �Q � � c7 t� V M O N GO [+'7 4 �V CV C� U tL — N N [D N 1� N r ts� ti V cP cp c0 � O V � N O W � O O � N �D �D 'd' N ZA �7 f'J d' CO �1 4? C'7 7 4rl O � � f+ Z� fO 50 CO �O U] r r r r r R [� r r � M M M M M M M M C�'f M a�0 ap r � �" o? o] a0 W 00 � �(7 �i'a 4f1 4i O �F] 01 Ol C C C C , � � � r � r r +r � � N S4 m o u� tn � .o cp � co cn cn � r � � Y n r� r u, cv a-. a — v� o0 oa � co � c.� c" c� c� tin u� � cv Lfl CO r M rl c'l C1 c�? c'7 c7 [h c7 ('7 04 W �A W tl0 � OO CQ It] �S] � � � O C� 6� U� s i i i � � i i i i V �.Y N N N — @ .� � 1] �-- CO� t3� N r W � ti') 00 CO� N d d m U (L — M 47 O� � (7 CO h SO CD CO V O O r (6 f< h r OC7 h V N a0 t15 V lc7 [•7 i�7 N L]. � CO 127 CD � 6) N V SO Lp iQ � lfj [p � N N N � � O O C� 4 O �'1 �7 �7 4'7 u? O d 00 �i") — %n %L? ii7 �3 �7 N N N N M � d C''J h V i' � V V V V C �� V Q O � � > 'N O � O O O O d O O O O Q � 4 C L.L O_ QJ o0 00 � � �7 4t� LL� li7 �S'? O O N 67 C r c- �-- <- r r r � r � � N N � C� L!7 0 0 0 �ra ? 'N o 0 o a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 � o 0 0 0 .- � Q co � w ro oo u, �n �n u� �n o o m rn N � � � � � r r e- r � � � r � � N LV d Q o g � � � � m c� sD N 6) M O O � M � � V N O 'U U V U� C W C�O N ['�� lii O �T Q � � �0 �W M � } '- r O cD W T � o tf') OJ r o O d tl° U,y � r N C? ['� M X Q m 'jrj O � 7 � O � � W 41� CD L�J Q O li] j„�, d�� 7 O O lf] N 1` F- I� N li] 6"1 C37 ('h � a r C7 �C.g a0 � T � u7 ti � � N N C��"� Q � U � m'- O O ln O O tn O O Lf5 Uri O O O O � (iJ LL Q O C3 N 4 C7 t` �I] C? M1 I� O O O O O W �f] ti 4 Q� a0 � c�D Q) � cC� c➢ � � N N N X J C C C C � � tfJ � O Lli Q7 `� � � a � r:ri N CS ro � N � � { � � � ch f� r u� O -a i!1 � io � � J � C� 0 � � O o O 7 � D O O ,� p U7 UJ � (n OO H Z Z Z in c� Z Z � +n U H H -I 4 � � � � � � Q�i M � � � d Q J J J J J J J J �l � tn u u. u u u. [� � � � � U U U U Q Q C] ❑ i� .� � T T 2 Cn c+7 UJ�� tn Martin/Martin, Inc.58 of 137 N � r � r � � r � � � r r r � N �-- N N N C�3 M M � � CfJ LC} Itj N � r n LD uJ Lf] i— = = = }- 522 F- = = z ~ _ _ _ ~ _ _ _ co co co e4 cQ �r c� cA cfl u> cc3 cfl cu cfl cn x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x c N tV N � (V N N � N N N C [+S N N c N CJ N Y `L ^ Yc^yr r- Y Y f� � � T- I� I� Q T T Iti � � � I� [� - O ti ti - CQ � � - N � � � r� �` ~ - � � � � h I� M f� h- d!] f� I� 67 1� I� i'7 I�- h- (/� M V� V � �# a6 W �r/�j '�' ^�Y d` {n C7 'C' �F � � � 00 V M (J i� l[? U� 07 f� t� �' M C`'3 � I� �f3 ll� .� G� � �"J L .� 0� Q7 L G7 C4 6� L G7 � C� L ri"� Ci'J W N CO [fl (4 47 CD C,O C4 ff3 CD Cfl C.O @7 tD fD Cfl N Cii cS7 Cfl � x x x � x x x � x x x � x x x E K x x N N S'J i�l N N N N N tV N N N N N � :-. � r-� � .-.. � y--. � ,-. '� '- c, �r r � '� r �v '- � � V �+ �, ��..� � ._. .� � w� � L- � �. � � or- r- oc� � acor� oc� o � � � � � [f? S*7 � O O f� � Q M c 1 � 4� M 00 � p '� C9 y� ('') 00 C'� I� R CD CD 6� N C"'7 u� M , � r N N P'S � C'') � C43 (`'3 Ln f+ fD � � ��y � W CP cA � Q CO LD �, -� N � � aQ C� t0 � J fV N � U � N N N T•3 X � N 'O � X X � N C�Y N 21 � X X � � @. f6 N ip'' N N SI5� f6 r. fV N '.�-.. 2 `� �� = c*�� T ti M v Z � ��`? S h M v � �-- �..r `-� �.� t,4 � �I7 � fp N C�l � t�D O V�` `� l[? `� � � T O 0�0 � � f� Q O '�cY 67 C�7 O � � ff? O � 4 � O O O dJ � CD N �`- r O OJ �-- '� * O O � * �` * O � r # tf7 * O d' P7 �11 � c9 � LLI � � °Kt w iV r r� W CV � � W CV � V �C] N ti � 4 M CO c� N C�l � �'d 4fl O CA �t �,o r`�- � � o �°n � � Q � � � � � � � v c�c� � T M �.-j V r r I` N N N �p e- 6? Cfl C5:1 Q � � O N N �4 CA cA O c''? a0 C] CD Ci7 tfi O C7 O M � u"J N Q O � � M � � � N � '� � M f � � c''3 N N � C�F � � ovv 4vv ov � c7c�scti acv cv or� c� 3 �'4 � � � ° � v � � � O3 M c�7 �' [� (� (�"3 6oi M Cry'9 N � �� ,r cn uz u� tn � � a a � v= � o cu � o c� <ra c� a� ch eo N CJ N �t N � N "� C� CV (V � Ur N N � <.� N N � C� ��.`J C� � '� � r t�37 � i7] m Qs II � � � � . c C ,� � c II N `p Q +'� O o � O Q � o p � p � ,� � !I � [1 p O ("j N a O p M N '� O O c� N �- O O c`� CJ a O b <''7 N � O � Q � �q � II � � O II � � O II � � o II � � � II � � � � � � � M J Cp J CJ J (p J Martin/Martin,�nc�9 of 1 7 � N ❑ r � � � c� z �a 'o =o � =o =a 'p '� '� Y � � � � o 0 0 0 o O O O O � T � _ � � U' C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 'U U' U' T � !�q N f�q c�7 �Y � cf� O O O D O O O D O � Z Z Z Z Z � � � � � N � o o O o 0 0 0 0 0 � � � � � � � � � U`� C� C`n] t7 C7 C� C'�? C7 C7 � y � � N Ch �' �' O O O O O O O p p Z Z � Z � � Z Z Z N � � � � p O O O O O O O "Q � a 'L5 'O � ..�� ..�.� ..�-� .-�-� � � � � � � � � � N (A VJ U1 fh N C] M d' �I] O O O O O O O Q Z Z Z Z � � � Z N C/1 tIt N N N p p O � O 6 D � � "O -O D U ~ n t�» N N r"''/S N U` C�J U� C'� U� C'3 C�J N N M d' V' tA O O O O D O O Z Z Z Z Z � � =o �o v =d =d u a a "O � � � "�O p O Q O O O O � � N N N y N � � � � � � � N N <'7 C� � t� O O O O O O O zzz � zz � � =a -a =� a =o =� � u� � � � � � a � °o °o °o o a o N ,ri � � � w � w � C7C7C7C� i7t7 � NN NC"�Jd�' � tn O O O O O O � zzz � zz � � � VJ N ul N N fA Ul O O O O O p r � � � � � � � o 0 o a a o -� �`r' � _ � � � � � C7C7C� C� C� U f�A N N � N (�!J � �� Nc�INC7c') � t� O O O O O O � Z Z Z Z Z Z f° -� a =o =d i3 .n tn � � � � "O 'O "aU p O O O O � •C�: U] •�w •� '� •� •� � +_+ C.7 C.� �.7 C� {> � •� •�•� � � � r N N N CJ � tn tn Z Z Z Z Z '�E' O lD f0 O O � � '� '� 'O 'a � {V � I� O C7 N 00 `- d' O � � -p u1 N � fA (� UJ Crl O O O O O r O � "� "3 '� � '� � '� D O Q p O � � � (�11 N N � f�q ��ll � � � � � � � T Nt�tNc7C� �Y � O O O O O zzzzz � =a =� � o r� � � � � � � � o 0 0 0 in � � -v � -o -� -ova o 0 0 0 "� u u u c�i in in � .� .� .� .� .Y � t7 C� {7 CU � Il � p � fl II It � � NNNc'�� '� i �n O O O O � � � I.� C� t.t_ tiJ � .� Z � Z � � � � 'Q � � � � � � a p Q Q � � 7 � 7 � � � 3 7 U7 fn a-+ �+ w-� r-+ �-+ �--� �--� � � � N N � � NNN c7c'�Jd�' � � ZZZ � � N U "C7 `CS `O tll N 111 US CO tA Ul N O O � O � y .(6 t1� 7 � � 'O L7 U '6 � "O '6 'O O O Q� U) t!1 N N N U7 Vl "''U1 r"/S N y � N VJ VJ C� CJ � � N � � r r r N LV N th M � � t1� O O � � p � � Z C � � X � �(� � O �� N � � � 7 '�6 � "C "6 a � 'O � d '� .y N � N � -� "O � N fA (n VJ .-�-� ..�+ +��+ ..�+ ..�+ .-�-� �.�.r .�-� (} N d � CO � C� �G` V) r r c-- r^- N N N t�] C'1 V' ch 47 O � � � N � O � �, � � � 00 6l O �- N t*J �}' �i (fl I� 00 O) O O � � � r T r r T T T T T N � � � Y � � � � � Martin/Martin, Inc.60 of 137 � � � � � C� z U1 U1 N fA fA � � � � � � � � � � � � � � O O 4 O O O O O � r ..�.� .«�.. � .-�, r-�� J N N � � � N N M rt' u7 4 O O O O O O O zzzzzzzz a =d =a =a �-s -�i =o .� .a .o � ..N� .� o 0 0 0 0 0 0 °� � � � � � � C7 C� C� C� C7 C'} C7 N CV CN7 C7 dN' tf Q O O O O 4 O Z Z Z Z Z Z Z cn cn cn cn cn 'a � =C3 "t� "CS '�o '� � � q � '� � °o °o °o °o °o °o °o °p i � � � � � C7UC"� 'UU' 'CJ {.]' fJJ N U7 {Il N � N N t� d' � O O O 6 O O O Z Z Z Z Z Z Z fn S� U7 fA U1 N '� 'CS "�7 "CJ "C] 'C] � � '� "O � 't'7 "C3 `O � � � � � � O O O O O O v� y � N uy N � 'U U' U' U' U' C7 "� N N c'� C'7 d' [[3 O O b O O O Z Z Z Z Z Z -� � � � � N � N O O O O O � � � � � � � � O O O O O � � 7 :3 7 7 7 � N r� V1 In N f� U7 fn � � � � � � N N N M el' �# l[? O O tl O b Z Z Z Z Z N a 'L3 'O 'Q 'O � Ln � � � � � � � � O O 4 O O °' �n N n � � � � � � CJ C7 (� (� (� � `� � LV N (7t� dN' � O O O O O � Z Z Z Z Z Y � .� .� .� Vi Vi U7 u3 cn U7 N O O O O � � � � � � � � � � O O O O '�' �� r�-� � � 7 7 � � y � � N � N N N � � � � �� `� � NNMM �i' � t[� O O O O � Z Z Z Z � � -o -p N �' � �' �' �' �' o 0 0 0 -ov -ozs -a -o -a _o �n � � � � � � � � � o 0 0 0 �' d' Ul N "'' �' CJ U` C7 U� a Q. Qa.S .E � `- � c`�vc� c`.�ir`ic*i � � ZZZZ d' 6 O CQ O C3 t[7 Lt7 '� '� 'O N �1' b (L7 C? h� N C� � �-- C? � 'C3 'n 'P Vi Vi tA rn fq a7 vl O O O N C O r d, � � � � 7 .��. � 7 � � O O O � N N V1 Vi CI1 U] (n N U7 fl3 � � � � t"" `� `- N N M M �t d� ln O O O Z Z Z (J� 'D 'B '� N Vi fA U7 N VJ fn N O 6 � tf3 � � 7 '� 'a 'D "L3 "a 17 '�7 "C7 O 4 ...�� 7 � � � 3 7 N �� I I � I I ih in u? rh �7 C� � Q I1 II r � �- NC� Ni�'�lchdN' if� � ZZ � �.. � l� U 11. W � .G C v 'a 'P 'g '� Vi Vi tA cn tn t!7 vl t!] p "�" 7 7 3 7 7 � -3 � � � 7 � � M J � � � � min in win ininin � �J N N N c 7 c*J d� cn t[� O J m � Z � � {/� V "� "� "� "� (� fn (n f!1 N N fA in V7 v � U1 �Il CO tn � � � 7 'O '6 '� "O � b � 'O 'B �'� � N � a--� a--� +. �--� � � � .�.�.. .«�+ ..�+ � i � N UJ ir} t!1 N � � � � � +r- r- +r �e-- N [NV N N M M �S' �t 117 y C � fn � X N C � � � C? N "p "p '� "O "Q U7 N f� V7 tI1 U1 tn f� � QI U "'' � N � � � � � 'O TS 'C7 'C7 `i7 'O 'O 'D � N � t4 � 'D N w-+ w w--� +-� .-+ � � �,�. ..�+ +.�+ ..�.� � ..7+ N � � t C � � ❑ � � ❑ W � (13 �-N- e-�- � � � N (V NNMM `� 'V � � O "O � 7 F '� N � CO W � c- t�f M `cl' Cf3 cp 3� 00 � C7 p � m r r �-- r- i- r r- r°- r- t-• C�[ I� Q � = Y � M M . T M Martin/Martin, Inc.61 of 137 .MARTI R! / MR.RTI FJ ..< G�NSUf„TIN�a 6NG[NEERS "' Title Date Jab no. � 5ubject By 5heet of �D,.. - ��C C�'�,.:C, �'[��t/.3��r 2��a � �� . �� F .� �^' E�d��-- � l ° L[� ,�� f'� . !o7`�b� �lo"7v6 ty��.. �._,.___.� � � �._.. � +a7Y� S�6`1 � �� 2 t ��f�` �( �� q�� ?�;lb r�� -��( .[/ t`L ��ftf V ` � � ` (,f 70 �� i� ��. �Z3 2.�'� � I'`l,�n��. � 7` � I �� fi �.��';;r1� {9�� °S �. �. Martin/Martin, Inc.62 of 137 MARTI N / MA�TI N C�N5IJLTING EIVGtI�€EERS �`" 1�tfe Date !ob no. � Subject By 5heet of Cp o� ��t � ! , �� ,�-- ,�: -i--� � � r�i� �.=.�� st -�,�.y ! �� E� E�i ! � �� r�� F�� .._ � �� d E ; ° 3 ti�� v_T.uZ� ^ �, � � ' �b �y �b�� V �� = 7�� )�'��Z r��.a�� "�-� 7 � c, � z..�� r� � Martin/Martin, Inc.63 of 137 MARTIN / MAI�"T'IN ❑ONSLILTING ENGINEERS �T: Titie Date Jab no. �. Su6ject By Sheet of ��517 �� t� = ��- z(2��s� -� �� Sn�'� v.s� �m�� r��'� o�. �)�,�� n � ��) zY� �� rz��c�� , f r f 2�� Q� . �?�fa � , f�� - 2,� G c ' � (�� _ �;�.a F� ._ �s ��,�-2`� (z�� bY�� E✓S� t��.�'� � Z ��.�� e 3 � Martin/Martin, Inc.64 of 137 MARTIN I M.�RT1N G�NSlJLFING ENGIIVEER5 � Titi� Date Job na. � $ubject L. �_�� 8y 5heet of �-��5 ��a�� ""'ro FO/ZC� ��5 ��[;C uS� � � �G� �,�� ;c� p 7(2T�) ,. !��`'� D� � � 2 �•� `j.� � `'f o, �(2�� . rz�. z� �� G.� d �(tj5� F ; ,1 ��t� �� f�LL� l��-/)G�' _ l.�.�/1J �°�(f� S-�r!f f �il f� �r/JP 1-"o�Y,�- �� z 7� Z.� �.y d r !r�'�� I��a�v(� 3 ��7 `�.� b,�� a 7 ��:) � ' �� - ��y �.� � � �-��3��,�. �� yp,� . �� ; F: Martin/Martin, Inc.65 of 137 _N [L$� �.� � __�``�' �, � �� ,23pt�-- �� t jaJ _._� -- . -� _ _.�...-- ---- - - - . � , _ -- - --- - � ._ :` --. - - \ /, � _ - � �- - ��,$�- . . �� _� - � -- -===---- - '__-.-.� L�O -�„ ___. ..v r-- n_._. � �. —. . . __-_"._ '_—.._- �`d� . �..___ I__- T _- - E _ - _ � �'�__ _ -� _ --- °- - � _ � _� �.��'- _ ��'� � _ _ . � `�� >:�� _ �_ � � -- � �__ � � � �__�� _....�----��°---__ C3o---�- _ _-_ - - - - - - - � : - ._ , i! _- ___., . - -`b`�� .� _�� . __,_. - -. , , � ''__---_ __._ •_ ;: _ �, __. _-. ----- _._ —_ �_ -_-- _� _ _ , __----- _ '� `� --- I — - -- ( ' ' _ i � , —__ ---- � _�__._ ' , ' ___ _..._ _. , _ --- --_ ...._ - - - -— ' 2 , - ; � ; --- . . - . -.__ � : �_ -------- _ - _,...__ , _�_T _. -- - ------ ---„ ,:_ -�- __---_ �f --� � - --_ ____— _ s��— — - ---- l s �— _ �• -r — __ __ — __ ..__. _ __—____ � _ _ — _ � ___.. _ � l°_— ;� ,��tti - - � _ �__ � _ —__. � . _ - _ __ _� _ -- - , , ----a � � _� _. ,_. � � _ � .�__ � �- --- � _ _ _ t��p f _ �_ _ _� , _ _ �-- , � _; � : _,� �' -- '' ' �_ . _ _ ' _ _ ° • v � - , -.-__-' _ - - - -- - _ '' �' Up� '-�== �' \, "t-' � - W �; - _ � _.._ i ��r� -` � � _'_ __ _ ��7� � � _ ; --- � __� --- - �_--- _. .. � _ _-__ __—_ � ---- L� --- ' __ _� -�..� �_� � - --�-- �- �� .�. �� b � •� ._ _� ; _ �. �--j � -, -_ ._ _ � I � � _ �3 I � . � � � � - � g _. � ��....,.�. ,._ 3 _ .. �� j I` y - .. . � �� 1 . AI , . �_ . �� . � -, �—".,..�� : k � . ... . '_ -, ... - .,. � .i ..'.. .. _. � . -__ __ __� ,'. :; ;i � . :i... � . ��" 'K. ">a ,.. � ,. '�. ' . _-- - .___.. : �~� � �. ��1 �..�� E A- 1 � ! p rv_ � ` _ 7 ti-' # _. � :.._.,.��,_l,,.x ., � ^. —�,I I � . _ € • . , ' �...� ^ -� . _--_ - _- . � '—�� : . �v...�-��.. .._ �. ,. �. .W �. . � ..._ . ' .t.......__].._ - a...,.��i' ....___ '. � "��+1 " .. __ - -_ - —._.__� - . ,, e __._— ._.,.-_�..__. � - --- _.. _.._.._._ -._._ -�- — _ ---.� _ - - _.._. ._._.. — _.�_ �,._.._ 5 � _ .--. . ..__�_ _._._. _.__._. -. '�-----``--- . .�..s.„�.a�.�.,.� .i.,, �, , . .....� � .f-- _� . . .—.. — -- _— �-,-•- ,a _ v � r .. _. �-. ,. ._ _ .��__ . .... .__.... . '.: . - T__.....� '—_ � ` �3 . � . . . . ...-.:�v- ...�:�..�-x �- i, v ;:•� - T-L<.S._., '".____ -_-_ r } d „�,v �-7 ,rt � � � � �� ___ �_ _'m ..._. .� �� 3 -j � --- ^� '._.?�- F '--� � .'.� � ��__— � �_ _;'�I T � r�r's _. .,,"'3 - ..._ � �_� ��. V�. � � �. �. r.,'� t W .,. .: y : �� d � �I � .. .____ __ —__ ____ -,. .�_�_______ � .�a j A: � `�.. — r.......�_ _._. _ ., : , . . 4 _ � ..'; ��} ! j_,,.-= I�_.�._..__ � � , � ' -� f .` ��a� _ 1 er � � � � � ; , �: �f __. J \\ __ - :__�_�. � -1 I n.�.��_-- �.I � � _ — ��.�_ �`� � _ '�, !_� � _ i _ , � �. , ' W__..� .-., _ _ �.__ , �� ______ �'> ��i --_ _ _-, - . , _ _ __ -_ _ __ �" . _ --- - - � ` � �' � �� _. ,-, � ; � : �� , - - - � � � __ „ _ �- -- --- - -- '- _ _ _. �. , -- . .__ . �_ - - `. � ; ��____� _ �_ .� n_ f � \ .. . .�� . -._ -_.. --- -_ . __ ._ ____- -- — , . . , ,fr _ `f � _ �f 1 _ , ; . :. _ __ ___�-__ _ �------- ;t--/ ____ _ __ �, � �_ m ___ j�� ' g � � ___ � -___ ._�. _ ____ _---. _, , � -�-------�-- -- __. _ . _ � ; � _ _.�..—_ - -- _ ---- _ _ _. _ - - ---, .,_- — _ - _.-: --= ---- - __.___. . __� _ _ � �--� , _ . - — _ ' — _- ___ ._ ' _ - v � _ ' � ,__-f-r-.___ -- --- � � � - -- __- . _ _ -- -- -- _ _ -- _ _.._ - � � ---- -- - 3 � A�'�F�?� __ - -- = _ -'', , _ ._ __ _ - --- _, _ - � - � - - _:, � __-- - rt _ '. �_ � ' _ _ '- u_ �. �� , � , � : �� _ � � � _ �=.._ - _ __ -' - ; _=��_�� ._ _ . , W _ -. _ �, i � �---��-��_ - �--�=� . _ _. .. - _.� . _ .. � __: � L� _ _.. -.._" � _.. ._-,. . . . . - � �� .__, W, � -__ __ _ _ � a --°__ __ � . .t _,__ - - -_ _ -- " � � � E � -- - � i __ � ` \ � � � ; ;11�3�� - i _ . � . . , . , � ,. � , , � o _ _ o o l�� 4� Martin/Martin, Inc.66 of 137 �"� �� _•___�'_ _.... _e._.._. ..._.�,�.__ _....�.w... �_...... �_.�._��.__r._._. � � -_— - --- -- � �`� -- � _--- �;r 7 __:_ , ; r _ — _ ---- .__ \.:-,-. . /` � ' ; r ; :- - - __ . . � ___ _ - _ �___.__ --�-�� `�' a �: "�_��__- �_-- - „ , , , _ , ___- _. . �6 ...a .. . _ T... _.: . . _ _ 4 — -__ "� _ �__I�L .� __ — T_.� , � � � �� ' ' � =�_ �_— _--- - s __ ^__ 1 � -- �I �I � �� _ �� : .� � � - ___ __ _ -� . _�_ , _ - . , _ ___ __- � __ _ - _ . __ -- .______ . _ ___ � ._ __ _� _. . �� __ _ __�� __ _ . _ __ � __ ._ . - _ �� _ �_ - ; . T_- _ _._____ _�- W_ _____ __ _�::_ _ _.____ _ -3 � - __ _ _ ___ � ___ - -.- __ # � -__ � .� : _ . �_ ____ __ � --_ ___ _._� ._ ._____ - � ___ ___ - _ ; � � _ - _�� ______ ___ --_ _ -_�_ - _ .�, , ._ _ __� ___.. _ -_.. � _�::_- ____ _. _---- � `_� --_�_ ��, � _ --__ -_` �: �� _ - _ -- ---. �- �. _�: � ,_. -------._ — - � � ----_ �__ ' � -_ __.-_-- - - `'-- �� - - � _ _ ---_-___ �� ' _ ,: � r . _. — ___° -_ _ _ __. ` , . _ .,^ ._ — �. . � _ CF � t l7 �p ,�:' ` \ – _ __-- �- —� � =', -- _ ?,-- `b1� — _ - ' _ -- " _--- _-- - __ . , — : � - - - ==4�� a � � _ ._ _ - - - -- ._ __ --- -..- -- , ��'� __ _ � �' —' ;� UP �— '�' � � a '`�. .._=� j-� � __ --._�_ � � � -v � � ./.' L� ��. / --- - �; - - -- - � i� -_�. _ _.______ _ '\ �. - l`�J . . - __.._ .—__�_ — , �� i. _..__ __ _�._ � _ - . . �� m. _-. - . _ ---_._-___ ._ - .._.. - - . � a -- - - - � � ' �`� � � -� � � �� .._ r � � . -- - ___ _ �_- . ..�_. _, _ , f — - . _.. _ _ _ _ . _ _ - - a� , �. __ _� _ _ I �' _ __ ' �: � - _.. �! ._._�___._. -- -- ' - . _ ,a � ,--__.__ / - �_ .�_. — � a .I � .� � , - . ___ �li � _ - � c_ ._.s+- ;:�. ��,' -f 4� _ D._ [;s,;a "s _'. --- ' ,�� ; -- � � � - _� � `;_�—� __..- — --_-__ �� I __ —__ ` �.�.� �,:y � x.._�: � . ,, _ ;--- �,.._ _ -- --W- _ __ _. �_�� ._ -, .__ _ �_. �_ _ ---°_ _ " � �t� _, _=- — -- - -- - -- _ , �-�--. _.s--_x-�..�. , �. -i i _ s - _ — _�_� ___ t , �,e.,.� _ --�—a _� L� _- ?y I � 1 _ :� ,— - - r � — � ;� _ �_ _ - .� _�,.W...,..`. � �' € 1 ,�, �—= =C: ,'�` ,�, " ,._...._-- - � _., � �, � -- -- � ,.� � ..2 .�._.__... .� � -- � ,. _'-- s --... _ _ ---, f-� �� , " �, !_J �� ,,. �� _ 5—..�.� � �I � i .L.....] C�A ___L . . �_,� —- � — _._— .�_ `. �, ' ��.,.—.. __ ,___ p : ` �...._..... � � 5 _ _ °.: ��G� ` -�� -- �� _ �_�� . _ _, _ , ._ _ � __ . �.-- -- - - -- - ; , � � �. '_ 9 , ; ; _ � a,:�� , � �! _� �� — � --- . _— d � � , . � ._.�._ ......, � r _.__.� .. , . . - _ . -_._._.��.,�..:�� .�.,�-�. _.. _'— �_.. . — '. - _ _� - -------- � _�_ �� s.�� - � I� � � s � ___-_ __- � - s;`� a -- � /, �\• - _�� ./�� . �=_�= � - ._ � _ . � �� ,,. _ , .. � ., , �._ �.., V.__ __ CP �,� �;� ---- ,�--r - �`� __ ; __ _ _'-_ _-_—_�< <�..�-�-- __ __- _ - .� ._ � ' ' �_ _ � _� � — __ _ �= __ �_� __ _-- __- ._ __ _ _. - _ -- �� ;�. _ c 5 . . -_ __ .-- — — � ' . , _ — _ -��„ _ � � _ - ._ ._ - ' � �� #,_;. _ -- _--r��-�-_ � _ .__ � ; ---_ �__ _ _ _._ - — ___ __ �--_ - .-- -- _ _�_ _ - _... ----- _ _�._ — __ ___ _ _ _ f �� ; ' _____. _ ._ _ _ --- � - . _ , ---- -- _ -- -- �� -- T --- :. � � � W ; ---- _-- -� , __ �--. � -- , __ - --- , _ _- _ __ .._; �_ .__ ---- --_ � � __ _ _ _ �. __--. __ � -.. _. _ - _. _ _: _ - T `_:_ ----�- . _ _�_ ��'� � � � ' -: , _ ;� � -: _ � - _- _ _ __ � v� _ - - � _ __ _ . ��.-- _ - — --- _ _-_ =- , '�_ __- �: � � � _ _ _ _�� -- - - _ �-, }� r � i _ .._ _� ...�-r-^..—Y� �' �r v �. � . __. �"`e. . .._ _ .:._ _ _—' .:.-:. :. _ •_—' ' ' - .. .. _. �� _ _. _e �,]• - _ . - - - - - �� L� �"�L. �y,1 _�_ _ s 1__ � ... 2 �� --- -� � -- - E �� . _ �/�� , � `�, � � � ---� } � �� C.. �{.� \ . � __ ; , ' • : � . . �aa 4� - o � . � o Martin/Martin, Inc.67 of 137 �� --� -� . �L� , ... �•� .__ ' . . �'� \ - � � F • . _ - ':, % � f� � � �� . . ��v o _ _._ - -�� =___ --- -- o� $ -�� — _.__ ---- J � : - - ' � 4 �. . _....._ -'_'___"' " - .. � = _._..,__ _�..._. Y --.., ..__... .�.�.: -- . _ ... . _. . _____- ._. ...... . _.. .._ . ' r i "_ ' �__ ��+ . . . ... -.. ; .', ' ' O � - —'_ 7 . . � - ... � . ��. . —.' , ' . _ ., u.. '� : ...—. __'— . � ti z, � _ �._.'.... .. ._ . _ . . , -. �. .'� _ —___.. _'� ` . . _ .. �_ __ � --.. �- �. .......__ f , . _.� __- . W� '__—.' �� , -. .. _ � __ . _ ._..— . � '—_ ... . - ..._.._ ,__—_ � i '___ ? � �.� ., . . ..� . ; . . . : . . _._. pp _ - ._— �__-_. - � . —.__'_........___ _'-_ - .._ �. _ .'__ ___'..._.- _. , - � � ��-., _;.. �.�,� , . _-. "— � u _, - . - - �. ; � B-�.' ._._ . . _.. __ _ � �,....; '-� , _..�. .'. YM: � � '- .. ____._ .,-...,::: -_ � .� _^ _ . �.. . .,_. . — .. . . -___'-__--w=' _1�. . �. .- � �—..�..��....� ' _ -y .. . _-_ �_; .._ .' �^-'^..^-z.,_ .,.__>_:_..__"':: , / - . ..�. _ =u�� , - '-�� .___ __ ._ . � � � ': '�. . � 3 : . ' . ' —�.' '_ . ....—�. ..__ .-T_ - ..,__; _—_ ___—' . . . � . .. .......... .. ..... � � _....'"'_��...� �.� „_� ' ' , .. � -'.,. , �. , _. _ _ _' _ ��. — %-,v. �� k . /} `�� . ._ _ / .. _ �\ ,f .. .: __ � �-__._ _�' _-� � � ` �� '� �' ---�� uP �,� i:- ..�- �� --�� . _ � ,--- [�-4 — � _. — -- -- . , � � 4 � -, -- -- — �'�� ; — — — [�. s , . ;��- E� ° � � � �_ : �,�� r ., ` � � L� `� _ - �^.___ --- _.. '�- _ � ' � ;_ , ' �� -- •' �� - - - � � , , , ....... _ _ . ___ _ _._ . , �:. _ � � �.e �_ _ . � _ _ _— _ �----�----�---- g a �� " � 9. � _ t % a :�g : { r' � �- � `� � � � ��;� -- ° - �I -- �. � � a - __ __ _ _ -- y _ i _..� ; ,� � __- ; +s _ -_ _ .""_�� -- �LL �� } � --..� _ � � � -- _ �i : ; � _� : I � -� _- , � .. , .T_ _�_ ....�........_..__.��..� � s--=-� ._.,��,�--�:�� --- �� _ ' ; , .. _ --° -_-..- - -� �� I� - "-�� t: _ _ _ _ .� ; T- ___ __ _ _ _-- , ��._� �� ._ �_ � � � . �__�. _ _ � _ _ � _ .-_ _. _ ____ _ .�s ,-y..�,�.� 1 •< , ..._.J j _ o � �. __ � � � � _ a' � _ , - - _ ___ �°-- - � _ ___ _, ' �, � r� � t � __ - - , _ , � „ _ � ��- � . i '� � , � � - �,E �_�_ - '- -- , _- --- --- ,s.:�. , �:a..: .6 b .° -— i � 1 � _ _.. , � -- _ . --- , .-_t --- - �' �,i,' ] � _ '� —___r �___ f�__ �•-, ._—__.__ _ .� � d � ' i a M ;, Y� } . _. � .�. ' ...,. Y,e„r —. i e � -� ��7 �',�_._ ..:�� , � _ _�. � � . --- -- 3 _ "., ? � .�, _.. .__—_ _'_. __... — i . . � ""•:W � '. :�? � .' r^^ry' '� .. �_. �— �"�C�� —_ � 4 ` 3 � � _ �1�� — ———� _--_ ; i -�_ �_ ......�, '-� ' _--- _.°-_} t�( 3� 4---__ ,l �k 3 ____ _ ; ' ,. . _. .;> � _ � • _ - --- � �• �_ _ _ � : _. _ _ _ t`L`4�_ _. �� / .\ .�� _—_ . �:�• �, _--,m � � � � �� <.� �; _ _ � � � /�� - --., - ,: —, t , . - — — - _ �� • . . --__--. - -------._.. m.. __._.__ � �.�. __ . , — -- ��_. . � , � ��t9 � i��' ��.' �, � � ___ �. .... ___ _ ... �� , , . _..._ _. _ .. � - � � � � - -___ ��t3; , � � � - ��_ � . � ------_ _ � z _.: ----- : - -- , �--�, --. _ _ , � �_ - _ ' ---- , ' ' � �t s � _ � �__ . —— __ -- � � I_. � . _ . _. — ' — � � -- — f ._ � � _ . -- I ....__ .—._... � .� i ..� . .... . .: � � � � i ' � _. I ,� ". . ., . . . �'.: .' ' . . . .. . .. .. .... ._..__' _ .. ....- . " _._ - - _-- � ' ( ��......�..._-��-�-°r—.r.�� r-».m'__ . . � ... _' ""- - _ "'_"_.. -_ . . � p ._� .�, ,� � - . 1 : _ _ _ -- �.��d_[�--� '1�� _ � �I__ � _ _ _ Y _ ��'� � i � . '. �--- - � � -- ._..�--�.•�_-� m -- --- o -- - - ---- -' t � � � i �� -� __- , -- o � ! ; r ;� �'".�i•- - ._..,�.�.�� --_°_°___�� s y� �s_ � ��' � � °_--"--�--'�� __-_: � ��__. ��3L,s�/�L� f ` .. . -. � S � �f ./� � I ( _ p �� } , � ��1� � � � � � ��: _ . � -- �. i � � . . �� . o a s � � x .__ ._ . . . . .. . . p D Martin/Martin, Inc.68 of 137 � d' g � � t- o r � � � � � > >, r m a� a� °�; � <t � �C <L ¢ dQd4 <C �C a CEQ � Q �L �L � 4 � H � 000a000aea000 � 000000c� o ° '= a000000v0000 ° `= oc7r� 00000 � �. u� �n sn u� tn �n �n �n u� �n � u� � �- �n in u� in �n u� �n �n � CV N CV N N N CV N {`J CV N N � `� N N N CV C`V CV N N � ��i'l��T'}��t}V�+'��#r,��l,��'y��3'}��l��t1 d �V} � ��+,,��'}��'}V ��S'`r3' '�ct} ��1 •� VV�J�:JLJVV VV V�V — VVV�V�V V Z (D CD � Ci? C4 CO CQ C'J C4 CCJ 4fl C9 Z CD (9 (� Cfl C4 CD C4 CC1 rn u3 U7 cn U? rA tn vl u� u� v� c� cn sn cn c� U7 r!J ua V7 � 43 47 N Q) Q. � N v � N 0� (17 tL' Cl7 � Q) Q7 4? C7 -6 T7� T3 '� L 23 `� 'CJ � �6 � � '� � � -O -O Z7 'O "C3 ,.(!7 .UT .N .(f} .(� .U� .UJ .U1 .t� .C� .�11 .U7 .ff� ..fn �U1 �G� "ln ..in� V} G� � CV N C�l N N N CV N CV N N N � t'J N CV SV tV N N N i a i � i i � t � � i � i o I 1 I 1 � a'�r � �6 L � a �3 �3 -Q� � Z7 �Q � ��..r T7 '� �C7 '� �9 Z7 �3 � N m C� m CC] CT] Cd CQ (n CO m C9 LY! (� Cfl m C� m C� CQ a3 �C] � d Q � Ll � t�. Q S2 Q d [i Ci � Q Q Q Cl � � t]. c1 Uj �, �, a �, ], �, 3, 7, 7, �, �, �i, � �, i, �, �, 7, �, 7,. �, � � {� � � � � � {.� � � {�} � � LJ � � {� � � N N N N N C�f N N N tV CV CV fiJ CJ CV N N N N N �— r r r T T r � � � � � �— �— � �.— r r � � � � M k O O U "� N � Ct� CV � C3l O N O {V � � �S? i.f) lC) O C� CV Q d r (� N � C73 C+7 � CO r d G6 r o d C'') ti I� L!7 C'') d � D'J LL LL � II II L7 O � ? � ' O O O O O O Q C7 O 9 C7 C7 Q � � C+'S O f� f�- r �, U o0000000000o U o � 6s000tir- r� Z � , ,r r � r r � � c- � e-- � �--� � O O O r O � O � L � � � L 'A � a. m � '� � .,= CO CO � CD Cfl m � tU CD � cD CC7 � � � O O � � N T r <"7' (`J C') N CV ('� C7 N CV r N ,-�-i � V1 � � � � � C � '� �' f") �� C'") � '1 f� I�- QO trJ — � � y.� y Cfl CO �.,� crJ CD N 4,.� CO CO N CD (D 1] `� CV N N �— (V � � r :� � � � U) J N � k c (6 � � O o0 � O cx3 � C7 � O � � O i°- � 1� e�7' d�' R � O O �' >• n� � 4. .� r� T � r� r cn ,- cs� � u� ... a � � o 0 0 � � Q � v � � .� -� a � � c� � � � o co o c,� � � csa co c.d �, � -� O W N C� t0 N oC7 O o0 0 LL � Q C�D (�L? O O O °" � f� f�- S� <- CQ � r {V N � � � � V .D u� � � nl C � ti o > n � � .C] 0 �.�- � � G O O C� C7 L� Q O O O O O �+-. @ -Q O O Q O � � O O � � � C'1 a � � O UJ � � � � � r �{� U..O � z � � ~ � � � CL � R � � OQ N � �^,�,, '�S 0 (� (6 (0 � .� .L] � U C3 U TJ � � (4 p f� 44 V a � U U a "� o r5 F- Z .c �j � r cv � � cu � v �n cQ �r u� c� � :,., rt � � w Q o0 U O T T .a � � �+ � a � mc� � � 0 � Martin/Martin, Inc.69�1� � � � � � cp co c� co c�s c� � co cc� co ct� cfl o o a o o co cn o � �n � g � Q N N � � 1 � C N CV C�@ N N N N CV N N N N r m � Cf7 C�3 � CID U7 0 (n C17 (f) (f7 U? U) � � 0 � Q Cn Cn � o � O � dO � C] � � C7 � ❑ = � � 2Z � d2 � (� co u3 c� cn c� cn tI} clJ ua C� (� � N N Q (`t CV 0 N N N N N N � � � o � N N d p � � � � � z � � � � � � Z � Z Z � � � Z = Cl ❑ CJC� C] 0 � � 0 � � 0 � g- e- �- C� � � O r r � r .- c- O O o C`� O c- �c- d a F OfJ CO � CV N L N N � N N � � � � � ❑ N CV ❑ � c� c� � c� c� = c� c� � c3c� c.� z � � z = c.at1 = � � � � F- F- � rt- rr � r OO � oO � rO r� cn v� u� u7 u� u� � c�3 u� cn cn u� � � z � � z � � � � � � z z z � z � � z � � � � [O �ry �y � � �y � {v � � � lf� C`7 P) � lf7 Lf) 0 -4 c� orc� � aoo � chac7 � cnco �- � .._. � � � � � N � � c� `'? oo rn a� co 00 ° ° ao Q a i � �J I O T � N � � O C� �.�9 O O � O O i7 O � d C� O O O � d' CD t� C (Q I� � CQ �Y � N �' �!'3 Q O 4] tf') O d � � '"= � � �i' � �I N �I] �r �j �r cf? C3? 6) oC) cX7 CQ �� '-' � � �1' C3) � � d" d' � � .Q ? .i] O ~ m Q ~ � � p � p O C�O i�D O O Q I a � ti � 0�0 q` � � � � C,�a O � C�'� N �f d' � � O C] N � s— C*� C� r r � � o � � .T. 0 C7 O b C7 � O � O O O O O Q Q Q Q O O d � � `!- N � S� N r p] C? CV � N SD N CV (9 C�5 CO � �- f C� N r 6� C°') � 90 r � d0 r C'7 C4 CrJ C7 C'� � � C+') m X (S7 � F�- � CD C9 � C4 CO � V' � �y C*7 � � r C7 d c, i- N N � a. ,g �. � CV C7 N N C'� C'7 N N � r C�l � cu � a� � � N '' ^ � � CO O � O o C7 � O 4 O 9 O O C1 � � � �Y 07 � � C3') T O� � � � (O (D CO C�4 C�D � � s- � � � � CLl CO d' V � 7 E V N � 3 � � ,� o0000000c� 000 r� r- � � r_ r� titi � '� .,� � r s- � �t--� � r r � � � � r r � r r � r r � (� N � � � `c � ti � � c(? N � Q f� (6 (6 V � Q � U U C5 'p -O -O f6 U � � U U "� -C3 � cV � � � N � rc� � � �n � d- �nco dm � w � cflU � r { a � Martin/Martin, Inc.70 of 137 T � � � s o y o � � N J ti � r m � � 'o ��., � � d Q Q Q � � Q Q d � � � Q Q Q d d � Q M H � � [? O O a O O O O O O Q C] � O Q Q O � Q CJ O ° � C� O Q O O Q C3 C7 O O O O -° `~' O i:.7 O O Q O Q Q m �- � u? u? �C? u7 '47 �n � � tn �7 � �" �- �[? u� � s(� u? t!7 �S7 a17 � N CV N CV N N N 4V C`�i N N N � CW N N N CV N N N � �/�,(V�1 �i- d�'`� �fY1 � /f�Y}��t`'y z(�i'y/��t'l/s�1'� � ��} �k ��t1 d' �y�i'�/��3',��1 � V V�V�'�1��1V V V V — LJ��J�V V:�J� � Z3 B � Z3 -C7 L 'a "C3 �� -C3 � � `C� "O °CC� Z7 -C7 -C3 � a Z Ci� {O CCJ CL7 tf7 (L? (g 'CD CU CS� C4 C4'J Z Cq Cfl CO CO�� Cg CO C4 fg in rn U3 Ui [A y3 �f:A U1 cP7 in ul u� [n u� N u� U) (n u] V1 �J N Q} 2�J � Q? Q) Q7 Q? N tll � � QJ 4? �1D N � N Q) � 'D '� -C3 �6 -CJ -C3 -C7 T3 'C5 '�F 'O €3 -O �J �� '€3 '6 � 'd .� .� .� .� .� .� .� .N .� .� .� .� ,� ,� ,� ,� .� .� .� .� � N N N N N CV CV N N N N (V � N N N N CV {V N CV i i � i i i � � � i � i i � i � i i � � +�-� '�3 Z3 � -C3 �7 � Z3 "O 'C3 � � '6 � "O 'CJ {7 'C'S 'p TJ Z7� -C7 (� C� m Cd �0 �] [� m �1 Lil m C� m CCS tn m Cfl C� Od Ln CQ CQ � n. aQQQCaQasaQQQ ,� ca� �. s� s�. aQQS� T 3. T >+ 7, �, �+. �, 7, ?, T 7, 7-. �+ T T 3+ T a 3, � � �' � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � N N CV N N N CJ CV N N C�J N {V N CV N N N N N � � � � � � � � r [— r r � r � c- e� �t-� � r � � r � �— � � � � � S3 � � � �� w= O C3 6� 6� � �. � '�i' � � �t � C7 [V � Q N � � ¢ � O C? M � O C7 � g .r N C'�f N N o ... C'� CV � N l.L Lf_ tf� 11� i� C`7 O � 0000ac� 000000 0 � 000 �- �,� L U c� 000000ea0000 U o � rncoou-� �nr- z („) f � r c- � r r r r r r � O O O � O Q Q L � � pp J I L � � Q UJ U O r'� �' �' � CY} o �"` T 'Q Q r r N CV T � (� •� � v CQ CO � CS7 (CJ N �j Ci? CO � CfJ CD � d4-... N C`7 C7 N N � r N (= � tn � Q N f � � m �} � � a-^ � fr3 V C'') C � � �y +� CD C4 � CO C9 � � 'CO CO N C.O CO Sj '"= CV N N � N r � � - � f[S Z � � y � X C � � o � O I` p O I� 1� � I� � r d C� r � r .� .r CS3 O � (q O 0 Cf� r O � � F .�1 (fl t'') c'`) CD (S� C� (� � u b. O N d. O N f}� �. C77 b. � CD d � 00 CO � � OQ � Ql (�f tr7 N C7 r r " C�! f I'� N N tU m .0 Q C!J Qy as C Qj OC1 (73 00 O'� Q� �17 Ct7 t0 LI]' � lf) � x � ° r4 r� ° r� m r- a r. ° x co co ao ca oo ao °7 �- � � N Q3 � N 6'i N � CV � LL � h- c*7 c*'i I� I�- M a �- � r � a-- �- 'd' C1' r � r .' 7 � � � � t� `� C] O `� � � [� � � o � � o � � a� c� ao o � > .-. co � � cs� c4 c� � _ � � � � .i� om �° omC° coo aoo �- g � �'- vvr•- � ti � � � � � .� � f� N r- � C{) r C9 � � � `-' � CV N � Q O � � � � � I9J N Z � � 4 � � � � � � CO N � � a1i C C'A C _ O M � � 0 � O � r� ro � s� � � � c� c� -� -o °o � O r� Q co � W � mUC� � � � Z � �y � .- Rl � � N � �# U7 Up �f- u� Ct> t C? � LO U a. � a �, � � � � Martin/Martin, Inc.71�'h�7 � � ocfloocs� ocQC� occ7csao aca000cocflo � a � � � � `r� .� ° V3 � � U� � � C N N N N �fV CV N fV � tm p a � � � ❑ � ❑ ❑ � � � C] 0 ❑ � � D � Od z� d = Cn � � (n = (J? f!? Z (n (n2 2 � 2 � S � � S c%a � O � C? Oradc�rcv � c� cv0 (� OOdQNC;jO o Z � Z Z 3 Z � � Z � � Z Z Z Z Z z � � Z � 0 a � ❑ C] 0 � ❑ a� d' O N t� C� N O � c- O � N Q � O O Q O r r O � H a � °v [] C] � � c'��9N � N �1°- 0 � � 0 ❑ ❑ � � � � = ca = zc� = vc� s � � z = � s � � t� c� = �, o �, oa ; o ; ; o ; ; o 0000a ; �, o � � zz � z � � z � � z � zzzz � � z � � � e��, ,� c4 � c`'�r, cs� �n g oo cQ cn co u� ° � i �ia �n Q r� a� ticncQrno G' o 6'' �-- c� c� d- d- oo .�-F I `� r T � r T I� C.. r .r � T �' C_' C'� � r F- 1 I I F 1 I 1 � � � �/ � 0 _ � N o s) ct � � � ��f? � � d� � S1' �j o o � f � � � � �' N �i' CO � O 00 � Q r d' C7 � � C7 C7 (f3 Cfl � �9� V !� N � I` N � N f� � I~ � Or0 � �6 � f�37 � � S3 .-. O N C� N C'') (� CQ f�- f+- (D C.fl CO > S3 � �t C*J � e'P c� i� � O � � (fl fD O O C� II � � c� t�7 Q M C*� O � Q O � � c0 od o0 00 � O O CO ~ Gi- � C3? c� � 6? CO � Ca � (S� lf? 117 fp (L3 (fl � `-� � r C*7 M � ('7 � � �-° � CV Cfl CL7 N N N m � C*� f� V �1 � � N 00 aJ CO R ti � �' erl N pp �M �N 0�0 e7 � e�j c�? � � � � � O O ti � `� � � � � � � d' � �t � CD � � LfJ Cf) Ct� r r � C1 �F � C4 � � O O N � O N � � C�¢ � � � p O � N N N N r r a X N � +� CO C� � CO Cfl `� � CQ C4 � CD Cfl � C7 � N CV � � � .._. � S'7 N t7 (V CV c7 M N N e- r iV � rcf n_ w rn c .� � 00 N � c�0 t�l � C+S o0 �t o0 N � � N CV CV � a ,Q oo �n m �n u7 ao c5a oo c�J s.D tp c� � � N C�O � N C�fl � (f7 C��I (� C�`J � N N � ��.J � � � ci, �S' N � r r 3 E i) `� C � c � � 000000c� ac� oao 00000 o c� rt� f r � � r' r r r � � T � r � �"' l"° � L L � � � � � (�} O a � h � � O C] � 6 oI � cr, �`'- -c� s� _° U c7 U za -o -o c�s � -°- � U c� � � � � � � rc� � � cv � � �.nco � �n �p <Cm � u! <tmCad � Martin/Martin, Inc.72 of 137 � � � � � � � Q � Q �n � N � ti � � m � � N � dU <L � UQ �tfJd �LU �t �°-., QC.) C) [� �L4L �C4C � F- � 0000c� 0000000 � a4OOaoao ° '= ocioc7c� c7c� oo � oo ° "�' 000000c� ca � �- en c� �n �n ch u� �n r� u� u� r� sn m �- �n r� r� oo �n u� u� u� � N � N N d' N N V CV N V N � N d' ri' CV N C`J C�9 N � d' tt �!' � ct' ¢f' d' � d' � �t �Y � d' ¢i' � cS� � V � ��` � ��a�� '� ��V z C9 oU CD CO aQ cfl 4r? aCD c7 cfl o0 co Z CO oD tf� �G cP s9 tfl cL7 co cn v� u7 cn u� m cn to cn va v� c9 QS �y � 45 q� � cll � N � p� N� � cll v � N 45 47 � a -,� � "C5 -ty � �7 � � � 'O B �a -� -� "Q -C3 -C3 -O -CJ U� '� C!) (n '� (n CI� '� UJ U? 'UJ � � 'Uy 'iJ] 'fn U? �U7 U] In � N �--. N iV t— N N r N N � C�2 � N e- .r- �— N N N N � e i i i � i i � i i � � � � i i i � i � i T3 >+"6 � 7�� -6 �.'J -O �-C} .--� °O i� T ?,� 'C7 � 'L1 � �1 � � m � m m � m m � m � C� � � � (� m m m � Q- C1 f1 � C2 d_ t1 Q_ Q � 4-_ - - f1 Q Q Q ,� T N T T N T �+� �, �,CV �' (� � N N N T ?, 3, �, � C�7 � � C'_7 � � C'!� � � C'�') � � SY? C') Cw7 �J � 'E.� � N � C!`.1 N � N C�V � (V � � N N � � � N C�l N EV r � �r^ r r � � � t— r r � r � � � � k 1� U � � r � r+ r � T � T' � I! aH m � � � �. o Li I� M C� I� M 'cr O 0�6 � O R� � `-' �y ct C7 O CQ � d O � I'y I1 D 4/ � � � N T T L.L `r y.� /['y � �� v � � d � � � � Q Q Q � � Q Q � � � � � Q �� s U oaofl0000a000 U o � cs, r•� or� r� o � (y � r T T r r c- c- s= c- � �— � C7 O O x— Q O r � � J � � � � A L� � (IS � H V= (S7 C,LI � CO CC} C�7 � [O C'D � C� CO � � r � C3 r � CV N r � � �� .� Ch N M N ,� � N C7 L'� t�f N r � C\R C� � � � a "� � a � � � t.r) � � � Cfl (A C�-y ffl C� ,y � CL7 LO N C� C� S] � N N N � iV �' � N � O Z � J cn � X C � � � � LL � C�L) � � C�U d � � � C�O o � (� LL � � O O � � � � m T � C+7 d' c�3 ch c7 cF7 d' � � 'ci' �J' � � � � o� C .r cv .� c� � � m cD c4 c� c� c� �'� x � Qc*� cp � c� co oa � Q x ^ � mcov �r v Q � ,°. N O � � O tn [*? N ('7 N IJ_ � �t d' d' � '� � „_, r �— �e- r � � {''J ["� � � r 7 U � [� Q `� � � � � � L � > . Q � � O d � � � r+ Q J j. �' 0 � � � � � .L] � � �.Q � T„ � '� � � �.. � ..� � � � � � � {� � � o p �i " `racc� � ° � c� �1' a� � ❑ � " caouro- r°— °�° � a�o � � � � � f N w N Z � � � � o � �C ~ � � rn e � � a m � � p � � ta c� c� � � � � u � c. -� � -a �4 [# � � ct� � � QmU 0 � r � Z .� j � _- c�o � � cv � �r �.n css:+ d- �n co c U S CO U � � � � ' � � Martin/Martin, Inc.73�1•'�/ a� °- o � oor� acflr� caco � a ac� aoocflcoo � � `Y � H � cs� � o � O � U� � � C CV N N N N CV N N r�i � f� � � � � DCl7 � CAf� � C� {!} � ❑ � � ❑ � � � C] rs � = � 220 = � � � 0 � 2 � = = � 3 � � = c� -� o � oo � o � �- a �, �- o 00000N �, a o z � zz � � � � � � � z zzzzz � � z 2 0 o a ❑ ❑ � ❑ ❑ � °- oc� oac� orc� ofc� o 00000 � fp � � ,� � �i 0 � ri � c� � � � � � � � ❑ � C] � °c,�° C1 �, sc� r = c� sUU = c� c� � z = = szUC� = u� Q � o � n � nifl nu o ooaoa ; ; o � � zz � z � � z � � z z � zzz � � z � � � � r � r a o r �'• � � � � oo � o � QO � o oc� oou� eoQaa� ° " r � ° � � � M � � � vc� o � � � , , � r � r r T- fl 1 I I i I I 1 I � �� 4 2 LL N � � � .-. 00 CV l[� OD N � N IX] N o0 C�t Q O N N N o s] oD �s7 c� c4 u� � �n oo u� co O3 O a � 6a d> � :� � fS7 N d' � � O � � C7 d> �' h�- O � � ti � � � II � r C�+� N � � �" C7 c�- l� r � IX) �d C� C7 M CC � � N C`J � r � � .L] C+� ln i'7 9.C) CQ (,{') Op � � CO 00 0� ? .f� � � r- � 6> �- N � N � N �` �" N N N II � � p I� � p 1+. O N � O N � C� � � 6j 6} O O C7) Q � ~ C`�7 CO ~ C7 CQ � 3'�� ti � C•�] C'7 l� lN LN � c- r M ('7 CD Cfl d` N N �t � V p j] � CL� � � CO � CA � C3] � C� 1� f� O Q C] � '� 11� �ry � �!7 �.r� '� �1 � 'N O CO Cfl O O O '0 �+--� � � �- � d' r t� � C�7 � CO CO U: o0 c0 a0 � � N CO �y � CO M � N lf) � N � lC> N CV N � � �-- �- CV CO C� N N N ^ � c� � � �r LC7 r � � M L[} 1.� (+'S C4 J C�S � � R m C� 1'�- � � C7 CO � Ca � R � N N � d' O O � N x m � � (U Cfl � CL (9 � � KD CD � CC3 C� T O O r �- � N r � f*� N (*7 N h9 M C') N N r CV � m � a� aa C J � � ct � � V' N �' � � � � C7 C7 � ct V �va � � � i�i7 N � d�7 t'�V C3'i � O? � O �N � d O O a� � � � `� r I'�- � r � r � r ``� r � � r r � � � � N � � � � � C7 8 � C� O O C7 CJ C7 � � � O � � � O Q C7 Q SD � � � � r � r r r c- r � r �r r° t- r � � � � r � I�F �n � � � ~ � � ti � � � �J N � Q [L3 C6 (4 U � � � U CJ L� Z3 � Z3 �1. C..7 � � (..> CJ -f7 � o � ❑ � .- cv � �- cU � �r �n cfl cr �n c� � � � lil Ft m C� � � '�' Martin/Martin, Inc.74 of 137 2 �, a _ � MARTI N / MARTI N �°t ''�'�� - GO N S IJLTI N6 EN G I NEERS � � �F � Title ��'�� ,�� Date ��_1�-'� � � Job no. �� a�-c� �, Subject ��5� � ��"(' ,�n.� � � By �� Sheet of � �________�—, _ I ._.�__ ___ �__ �__ � _ __.__., ...�___�_ _._ _ .__�..___ � __ I �--- _- -_i__.- ' � - , � ` i � -- � - � - � --` t I � i � _ � i , ' ' J , � ' _ . � __ ' � i , �_ ,.\ ' ___ -_ �__Ii __ -- -- ---I'-- - I � � � � , � � I o '- -- � � �. � I i � ' �_ � i � i ie°' I � � � ' I '_�_w�u � �^-� � � ___L- - ��- � � ; , I�. ��"�� w__ �__w _._� _ �� _w .�_ __ _. �_�__ � _�_, �� <<��., ��. � _ ,�w _� ` � � �.�_ _ (� � _��i � � `�� i � i � � , i , i � �� I � � i- � � ' � ,2= � L ° I � i � � # � j , � � � — - __. I - � — -- ` i i' ' � � � i !� I � I'I j % , ' , , ' �---- ' ' — -- --- � � --- �---- ----- , — — — � — — -- _-- -- —-- , — � i I �� ! ; � � � jl j � I I ti � i 4 � _�_..______._._._.� :� _ _ _ _ _. _; _ i � � G � , 1 � � � � � � ' ' __�� I � �I i � I '� ! � _^.�_ __.____�__ '�__ _ ___ �___�.w_ ____�__..______,___.__. __ . .. . �_..__.___ _...__.___ ______ ..._ __.__: E— � � � � � � ; _ _ � —�--� � � I — — �— - — . _ � _r � x � ' , I � ; i � �I t � , , ; i_ > , � � i � I — -- __ — --- --� — — ——— -- _ '__ � � ; � � �i� � � � i � I I � � ; ' . � �, �—i -�- �---� --i-- �� - ---__ _._- -- � � � - ' _.. I -- _ ; i � l � � � � , � � � i __,___._� __. � �� _�_ i..�.__. �__i_ ___� _ _,_ __.._.__ _.�____�__,_..�__ __.__: � i I � �i � � I i �� I � I �_.__,____w__ �________i______ , i ____ � � �� , � � _ , --- , -- - - - - �-----� I' ' i V-- --I ; � � , ' 4 � � � i � I I �I'I i � �,,' I I , �I I -i � '_'_"_...._ .._ : _. I _....__ ...._....._ _'_"__ '_ "_—'_ __ _ _ ._.. __� � ___ , ...___'_""t _____ .- _____. __..__ . . . (_-- I : ' I r � � I � . � . ( I I i I . I , i .. - _ ._, .. � i ' -�'____"_. . ....II____ ,. .. .. '___ '_ Y �f .____. ,__ � �,� ..... ..__.. . ;._ "...., 3— 'i"— __"�. _ , , ___ p/ ` .._�� I �I � i II I � i � /�,N � � ��. �� j ' � i ._...._ '.....— _ I _— ..__._� . . � � ,�__ .._.. _...... . ..w � .___... ( � s � � __ .i_ ____ �._.__ � � _ � _�, i i f__ i_--. ' i � _ � � ;� '� - _ I E I I � � I _ � � �-- ; � ; � , � i I � i � , , � � i- �-- ; /�� _; ` ,- �-- -- __ _ _ � _ 7 � � � /'�� _ �C� �2 - -- -- - ti � � �-- � '_ I � t� � �-�.- , , i E --- ((l'.7 f r , ,- P^ i� —�l., , i , ; � — — --- � � �� 6G._ — - _ � �J�1�-- -- -- -- -�— -- - . . _. I ' ' , ; � � i i t � i ! � I � I I� E � ' � i , i � . i � ._.......__....,��. .II I . .__._.. � __...._..� �,..__._._. .._ ._....._. �._..,__ __ _...._._ ..:___._� . � � � � i _._ � _ .. . . .--—� � � . ,_.�a.. !� � � ( 1 � . .7_. � . _.....__.�.. .._ �� t � ; I € I i � �_ � — � — L-- s.. _._ .._...-- � �--� �--�— --. . � ._ ! _... I �__ I ( � ii I �I^ � � �_—,,,�-.��". � � �i.. . I � I �� T ( �,�A..�� . 'r�Cv UU�?t W i � � I � -- • — s ' — 3 � I � � _._ ...__ I i .._ ._ I _ �� I � � ,lA /j�q � � ; � �./!�c.6---�°� -- i ---- i--_ I — � __— -- �-- � — ' -- — i ' � -- � I , ; i i , � ! ___� I ; _ " �� ' � � �O , , I I_____.--� ; ._.....-r-.-- �_'_ ��i�__ � � � � � � ` ��___--�� , � �v 5 �� , ._ __ _ � __w __ �_ �,..__� � , i � � ; , � � � __I-- ; _� I _� , � � i bi � � � � ` ! �—�--�---�— ��---- ___.__ I �: � � � ' ; � ; � i , � 3 � � �--- - � _ ___ � i �_ -- ' - I i , ; i ; i ' I � ; i I � i-- ;_ __, � i , � � , f ' ' � ` _ _ ` � s � , ; � i �� i i �, ! J � , I �� '--- , � -- �— , i — ` --- i i___ I_ I 1 � � i � -I -_- -� I � ; I �� - �� t � � ��j }�� ' � `°�' i i � , _— , , ;p — ; ; --� � � p ,_ , _ - - � � � ' � , , ' , � I i ! � ; � i I � i i i , , ___._�._______________ .__ _ _ _ __�-- ---_ _ . _ � i �_ ;__ _� _ __. _ �� ; ,�_ —__ 1 �_ _ � � � �� C �' �� i ' �� ! � , , , �, � _._� —_ ' — . -- � _i � _ __ --- � �-- � — � ; [ � � i, ; , � � : _ � �, l�x 1�--- � --- -- , , . I j ( I + , . 3;�, ;_� � 5 � � ) > T � J� ; � i � , l � , �� — i — — _ _ _ � ,�._____— --f ' ' — ,— — — — : � ; �6 ;��c� 0��?� ;�9� � � � ; � � � �� , �__ _____ � ,_ _ �__ __ , _ .__ __ _ _ , � . __; ' � � � ! �_ � _ _ . � s i � : i ' I � ._ I � � � �_ � i . __.___G , i ..I. _.._.....— --- ----_ � ____ ___ i.._ ` ...__ ..._. I � E-- I r i I — I , L , , _ � � `� 1 G� i�,�- ; f' '__�?___� ._`r �� ' '� , i� r �� ! �✓ '�. �� i —. --_ -—.a.P � - -- ; � � � '�,�� , M�rtin/�lartin In� 75 bf 137 `-�'"" ' � ! � � � � ' --- � �- -�� --;---- ---, �1,� _ ___ _ �.. -__ _ , ; i ! ( i i , � � i ; I I � i = �.__C_____..__ ___._�_,_.___!_ - ---:� ;.____...�._. '._�_.. _...___�__._.__�..__ _ _, _ i._._ _� I ; ; MAF2T1 N / MARTI N �� ' CO NSU LTI N G ENGI N EERS �,. .,_ :,..,:,s�'.__; � � Title Date Job no. Subject By Sheet of ` -- I� ___. __ ._._ _ _ ..___ _ _.___ _ - - -- __ ; - � __. � � _� _ - � ' � _ � __ _ _ � � _.� I � � __ � � � _ _ _� . :__-- -- ' , __ � � i _ _ -- � ' = � �� -�` I' �' --� ° � � - - � --� � �/ � I � ; i � , i � _ , i i � € i i �� ' ' ' i ' � � � ' ; : . , � � � i , F � � ` ; ; i � ; I �_....__ I�I -- I � ' ,�/ar�� ',�Cd��' r"-� �� ; '�' �l9[D/l_ J�� , . - � �G� �C� T �._ ___._.._._��_; __w .� _ _. _e _ » _._ _. _ _�_ __.. I � � r � � � � � � � _ �� r . � _� � �___., i---�— ' C �— ;, -i --! �— �— ;— I,i — 'i — --� —`' i _ i ._ , i -- � — �----� ---i '--- � � _ _ _ __' ___ � _.i__ ! --- —� � i I � ; _ _ J -- — � -- � I � � i � ' ,� �3 r ��z�-----!✓��-� � � '' ' �'�' i _ ' !-- � � .. � - � !� � �� t - -- �, � - )t� �� li_ � � �- �, , ��.. i v.11.___._.I�.—i _��V ��/.�� y� � I i I � � 4 I.. ' —i ; ( � _�.�._.� . __,��_.�__.�_. l�y' � .._._I_ . .___.__ __........._ ......_._..._ .._._.:. .._....�._ . _. .__ .. __...-— �� . ' i � ,, I ./ J� i I � � i � � � � _ _ ' i : r , I i i � I ' � ___- li- - / -- — - '- I �, I �� i: 4 e�J$�� I I � - — -- — -- ',— � -� � } i � i i � , i s i � �— .�I � ��- � � � � — . _.. __ ,_ ( — _-- � --- — � — I � �� i E ( I �°�—�i � � � ; �--- — � , � � � ; ; � I ' , ; i I � -- -- --- -- _.___ __ _ --- _ I_ ; � � � ' I ; __ — � � ' 1 � � i I � � --� I � ______._____!_ _ � �__ J I ' ,_� I � I � � � I i ! _..______..___ �__"___' __..__.a. _ _'_.__ �-_ � �-.__� � �___ ,._____ I __ _ ( _.� E i i � [ I � I I__ _ � ---�__ _ � i - t - � € -- � �-- � - -'- �--._ _ � � — � � �-- � ' � � � i I � I I I I k I �--- I _� _ I_ -' _ .__.__ - '___ ` __ � i � , � � _ '� - -� - � E �_ � 3 I � , I i x , I � — -- � , — � F I � ' � � � ! , � 3 � � __._i I.__ i �— I I" I I � _ i _ _ —_ __ __ _ _..._ � _, � ! i � i �..___� � I I � � � _. _ � _.�_ ( � � -- -_ ___ � � _ �_ _._ i _ _ � � � i � , I I i ; ' ___..__, I : - �- - _ __ � � i i i � � � ' -- - i.. i _ i i � - I i � i , , ; � � � ; , I � � i � � --! ' I � � � _ � ^ � � ' _ i - _! _ _._. __ _ _ _ _ _ � � � � � i = — � � r � �-- z � � � , �� - - - I i � � i ° i � ; I i � I t i � � �_�_..� �_.__� ____ _____ , ____.,_ ' _ ._ __ � � _._ _ _ _. �.. I i � � i � I � I � I i_ �I � � � � ' �— ' ' — '_— � � � � I i I � � I �� — � — — — � — � � � � � � � � � � � � � , ( I �_ � ' � _! I i � � I i I a � � � --- I i i— ; -- —_ _— — , __. —. ._ —__ _ — � � 1 i , , � i i i c i � � � � � ! � - --- ---- --- _- _.__ _. _- -- �-- ---- _ - � � _ _ � � I I � I �1 � c _. I I } i E � I ' � � � I_ ___.,_� _____ �___ _ . __ _._._ .. _. ,_ _..__ i _ l I � l___ I i � , T____ I _-. '_ _ ___ ___ _. � II — � �-- I i_.. I I � � ` � I � ____ � i � r � � �__._ . � , _ _ !___ _i_ � i ; < i j � � , t � I - E.— _ t �_. — � � ; -- � �-- � � �� , � � ' �---_ ___ � _.; � E � — -- — � � � � '_ I _ I I � � � � � �_ __ !_-- I — I I_ I ;— — .____� -- � , i l � � � i , € I I � I I � � I � I C � i I � —- I _' , , , ��i ' _._,_ _. __,_. ,__ __ _._____. _..._ __ __ � , � �I � � _ _--_ __ _ �_ . _ _.___ , i � � � � __ � � � ' , � � � ' � i , , � i _ , _ _ _ _. — — —_ _. _ � � — � ,- � 1 � I � _ r r i -; � i , i ` __ ._ r i .... � ` i . . ..._. ,.... " ,, ' ..... _ ..... . .__ ....._.. ...._... i I . _ � si � ' �� , , .. . _._._ ..-- ---- -- -- ' — — — -- — — � E � I � . — _' _ _ � � � i II � I 5 � i I i�_......_.___r._.... ;_._,_...... .........d ,._..__ v. _.,. . � .... ._. _�._ . ,_ ..__.. ., _. . __.___ . ._. _.,.,__ I,__ . :,�. __... �_.___.. � �_. �� . . I '�I I I I ( i ` : � � _ , � , , i � 3 � i � I I I F___— .:__ .___.. _.._ ___ .._ ._____ . .. _ _.___ .. t I i � � _� __'"__ �___ _. ' . i . � I � i ; I I * I i � � i _. I � i ; _ i I _ � '�'__ . __� I ' _ � �.._..... � __.._._. ...._.. �. : ,._ ..._ _..... . . . _.. _.__ _.. .i . I ( � i Martin/Martin, Inq.76 bf 137 , € � � i I . _ �---- I-- -' ' � � - - i _�.. ' .,__ i � � _ , -_ ` _.Y.__.__ _.___._ __.. _.____.._..__.__. _._�.__ .__ ��._ _._ ___�..__ __ � I � � � ..___.__' �i � I ' �._.�.� _._ � � � . ��. MARTI N / MARTI N � _ �� CONSLJLTI NG ENGINEERS � �r Title �r�l'��.J��° :"�`��{C1"��_ Date ��t�'�� Job no. �� , O��p � ,., . , Subject ��,5� �jG°�ca�F,s,,r� �on �-ot»f�;�t _ . By �"?`."a Sheet of _.._ _ __ ___ i _ __._ _. ._._ __.._ .._ I j i ' I I I __ i '. i � i i I i i i i _. __ _ � i �t'l � -� � _ I , I I- -- � —.. I -- II ' i I i ��-"-° --- . ._ I_ . ..... . , , > , I I � k P ' � . , � , , i � I i � , , ; ' _. .__ % ` _ q - _ .. � .. � 'f.l�V�$r,� ��dm�`" '1'O[,.�,�, e�� ... ..... .. ... L3(�-� gF , ; y g ; �(,� � �o�� . . _ . � - - _ . ; _ - _ -r , . , , , , � � , ; , _ _ __ _ _ � f� '�,�.� � -F-� _s - �� ' ___ i __ _ _ _. i __ __� .._ .__� _ , _ _u ..._ - � �� l'�.. . � � , , � � , , _ __ _ --._ _ --- - , , , � , , , i ; i _ _ -- — - i_. .___, �___.._.._ _. ,_�...._ __. . ._._ . _.._ ._ ._ ____-. _ _ .,� i I, ; i i j , � ._ ___ ,-- ___ _ i ,; _� __ _ � ! _ _ ' , _._ _� -..._ _ ; , ; ; I ' i i _ _ _ .. ._.__._I. _, . , � , _ ' . � _ ' , j i , , �', , I _ _ ' ' _ i .. ' : � � . . _._. I il I � � � i � � i ___ _- -- _- , _=_- � _._ _.._--I , ' ' � i ii _� _�.__ i .. . i ___ '�_. � __ � _,_ . _._. __..__. ..._._ ..., _� _ , , '� ' i � ' I i ..__ ___ .. __ _... ___. __.__ __- -- , _ ',, , '� , __.._ --- - _._ ___ -- - � __._ _ _ � i �, � , � , � , � ___. ---- _._ ____ _ i ' _ , � _ ._ , � �� i I � � i _, . _I.. . I _._ __..,__ __ _... _ __. ' ' i , , ; ' � � __ _.. __- , : , , ' i i II _ .. __ , i �� _ '. � ___._ . _.__ �, __.._ _. i -_ . _ - i - - - i 1 i � � � , , i � i ; � I ; 1 ; — I�- , - - ___ _ _ � __ �___ _ _ ' ', , � � � , � , � Martin/Martin, IncJ 77 oi 137 . .. __ _ , ; � � 13.0870-TR-Wood Rafters-cold roof(trash encl and maint bid�nd�ct: ��'I�eGf''�%0' ,G� MARTiN/MARTIN Page 1 of 1 Job Number: �f3��'�'t7 °�a��T�"° E�°1NEER9 Date: 2/24/2014 By: 12� Wood Joist Allowable Clear Span Input Dead Load, DL= 20 psf ��= V 360 Live Load, LL= 120 psf �T�= U 240 Cp= 1.0 Repetitive? Yes Dry? No Species/Grade? DF#2 Allowable Clear Span Summary S acin in Size 24 16 12 2x4 DF#2 3.4 4.1 4.7 2x6 D F#2 4.9 6.0 7.0 2x8 DF#2 6.2 7.6 8.8 2x10 DF#2 7.6 9.3 10.8 2x12 DF#2 8.8 10.8 12.5 2x14 DF#2 9.9 12.1 14.0 3x6 DF#2 6.4 7.8 8.8 3x8 DF#2 8.0 9.9 11.4 3x10 DF#2 9.8 12.0 13.9 3x12 DF#2 11.4 14.0 16.1 4x6 DF#2 7.5 9.0 9.9 4x8 DF#2 9.9 11.8 13.0 4x10 DF#2 12.2 14.9 16.6 4x12 DF#2 14.1 17.3 20.0 11-7/8 TJ I 110 9.5 11.6 13.4 11-7/8 TJ I 210 10.4 12.8 14.7 11-7/8 TJ I 360 10.8 15.7 17.3 11-7/8 TJ I 560 12.3 18.1 19.9 14 TJI 110 9.8 12.7 14.6 14TJ1210 10.4 13.9 16.0 14 TJI 360 10.8 16.1 19.6 14 TJI 560 12.3 18.5 22.5 16 TJI 210 10.4 14.8 17.1 16 TJI 360 10.8 16.1 21.5 16 TJI 560 12.3 18.5 24.6 5-1/2 LVL 6.6 7.5 8.3 7-1/4 LVL 8.7 10.0 11.0 9-1/4 LVL 11.0 12.6 13.9 9-1/2 LVL 11.4 13.0 14.3 11-7/8 LV L 14.2 16.2 17.9 14 LVL 16.7 19.2 21.1 16 LVL 19.1 21.9 24.1 Martin/Martin, Inc.78 of 137 �MARTIN / MARTIN �'�� - �� CONSLJLTING ENGINEERS �� n:. � �, Title ��`i'�� . � Date ��1�" �'�0��-�' Job no./�,�,0 73�c7 u , Subject ��`�� f�j��; G�,'�� By � Sheet of �/ _. �_._ __�_----M__ _.--- �._.___.__..__ _.- - -_� . �_ __ __.. _ -- - -_.__ ___ _ � __. '- _ _ _ __.. � , � I �-- � I k � � ' � � ___ --._� __ _ I— --I I -- —— — ; , � , , � i _ _ _— _ __ ; � _ � � � / i � � � ' S. i ' i - --- - -_ _ � -- CY . � '---- !- -----� ,-- I � i � � - -= - - - � � � � � I ; � � � � I � , � � � � 3.— __ _ _____ :.... t ______- _.._� ' I i i I . — �� _._. .._ - -- —� / I � (( �7p � � � � � ��lV l �� i. / �t(n�l_._...� _...' ....�. _.__c t�f f _ -- �I �� ! . I _... _... .. � . _.. � ,...� ,.,.�..._. ..�._.,._ �._.__.�,. .._ _ _' � �''�. _ _ ._ ...._ _ ._ ._ � /I a�D� s � ��i v�� . , i €___. _'�_ __ �_ - .._ , 4 � I�'� '�. c ,_, �i � _� �� '� ��f��S// - .��J /� � � �� —I- -..__ --- _ _ �'`- - - - _._ - - , i � � i I i i . j / ` I_. / �'�� - i � ,_— I_ �____' i -- � ' � _ i i � � I � � � � � � , � . -� � -t - �� _�_ _-, _�____ �_ _ ,__ .. � !__- _�_.__ .�i�'°�_ � (°�� '�� __-- �� _,,,'"" _ , � � I , ; � - � -- ' ' i � _ ; — � _ } i— 1 - _ _ _,r ? � s � , � 'C, y , , �("' — 0�� — ,�C� T� � -- --.— -- — — � � ± I , � ! � � I � � - � � �� , t � �,��=; r t��'` �, ' - , � � E , ; � � �: � : ,� -- � ,_ ,--- -- -- --- - -- ^ , -- ' ;�--: , , , i , 1 � � ; f____ -t_.__/,2-�v . �° __ ___ i i I �i�s', � /G��t�/,� � �'�� ,��- j�' ��. ____.__� _�___,_..___� _. .____ _._ _ _ _ _,�_ . , _.. �_. _. � _ _ � i � � I I � I , � ; iw I I_ __ i� �----�' _ �� _ _ �—� -•--- �--_ !--- :_ �� I � _. � ; � ; ; , �.�.- _. __ � I � � - �� • � �--- � - -� i ( � --�— _._ ; _ ;, ; i I � , i � I � F _ I i , � � I � I � � -� I �-- . I ( — �._.....__ �_ � � � 4 I ' ,, p _ ...__ �_._ _-__I �_ _ _ ____ ' I _'___ _— € I �__ __ ' . I � � � � � i I t ' � '�_'_ I _ _ � . I , _ I � ` I / Y7' i 7 ; p f "� I '' � d"t°`� i � _ � �_ _— �i �I~ � �/ ! �fl'�'�� + I �'''� r°' ' ... �' i�, i I � _ 4 I � � ___ , � ____ __ =c9� I . . .� .. _ I .: 1 �._.,I i �— � ,.�, �—� --v--�r�� ,. _ ...�I I _ i__ . � ip'��,,,I�%C�•t,',('�j'� � � � i i-- 2? k"" _ � '. ____ __ —i _ _ i `�� __ -- �_ ��i_-__'_' 'j_—__ I ,r��_.._ , I �..�._ . � `�"____ �r � � . , _------. _�L ' = � � .��" � --__ /__ � � , -- ------ --.— — -- --_. � , , � � , � c ' ��I' ; � �-- I ~ � --I I' � 5�r.� i � �( � �, I`'?�i�l��/�-� j _� __ � � r � � � � � � � ; ; � E � i � � I �� _ � '��f��, ,__ i— --- ___. ---_ _._._ _ _ _ _ . : -'� 4 � � i .- � �� .� ��?r ��----..... ,--- '- --.-_' E i i i I �� I � � �, � i � � _,,__.__ �___ _..___ __ ��___ �.__.__.�^ � � �� I ' � , ' � J2�. .,� /�� r',fr I_._._ _ i_ _ � , ; � - °r -- --C� -- � _ ;--- —'--- I : __ ` � , _— — [—i , � � � � � � — — : � ( � i � i � E � i � � I � i i— _ -----! i._. I_ : _: --- - --- ' _ ---- -_ , � � i i ; I ' ; � I ( ', ; � ; ; i , I � i i i i , � �---- -- --__ ___ __ - — - --- € ( ( (��S? !�i �G✓t�p" � 'I i �1> alt / i . ._ �� f j� �- .... ._._ I I i _...��_��..,�� ;..__._ �...�.� _� � �{ � ' ---M � __.�_ ,�_ __ �..w...... .._ . � ._...__�_,._ ___;_ __._... ..,_._ . .___ � -- i/ i _ :...__._ �_' � � , r--. �,J��„p 1 , � l r�`"c��n` �� "SY�r�-- '� � � - _ s ' . .:� —�'_�� ,_ (��2.��5�� .-, � . €� � "� � , � �l�f� ( ` � � 7 , � , � � ,�— � � i -- � � �� — �� — � i � I � � �,� �' i.. ��` _ ��,��= �� _ __— -- _ _ � ; � � ; � � , � — , �-� , � �. , � � , , � � ; , �. ; ; i � , I , � �_'____. ___ ._ .� _.��_ _._�- __ _.__ I ? i � � ' ' I � ,r' _ _-_ __ ., � � __�_w � _ __. � � i i � � SL ��3 �"',r�,� �'��-'� �� __ I i_ � -- I__ I __ ' . -- — �__I_._ ��.3__. � I -- ,�r�� _ _ [ i U %`� , �. �-- — � —_ i _ ;-- ---� — — '�.-I._— —— -- '--_ ; — � I I I I � j ! � � � � ' � ` � � = I -- �. � I � I I i i _ . � i �� a �.,�- ` , . � � t. � � ( ' � � ,� �- � �`� ?`-�;� t�i�'�� "�`�' �� ;•^� ,.�.�' �' �` , °� ��.� �cj�° �a�F '' _�_�____�.__� _� � _ �._._�.�"�..��'"' ,�,i. , _: ._____ ,_ _ � ��---- �-�°�� _ �_ _. ._ �__ I � I , I i I � '� , �I � F- � � i r i� „�.� �.�,¢� P� r I � , � � �-- �- - .... . _. ---� � - �-- - � ' � i � �� . i -� --..-- - - -- � i � �i ii a P ,,. ( I I i � ! - .. � I I ..I. _.__ I __ .._._.._.. ......_.._ . i � � � . .._._- F_ ___.__. ..__.. __ � ' i i � � M�rtin/Martin In� 79�f 13� i � i � e I � _ __ . - -- - -- _- __ _ __ ___ �-- ( i i � � I ' � � � , i i ; � � � �.._._.�.._..____L..._.�._�-�—__...�...L_.__. .... ........_...1.. . __._._.._. .W..__.....__ ._�.._��....._..__._ ._�._..,_.._.r.�.__.,..w..I.__..__ - . _._.�__,w_��_.�._.M.._.__._.__ ... . . I..._. . ____._� � . �,MARTIN / MARTIN �� -��f �� CONS LJ LTI NG EN G I NEERS . . .af�_.- .. =.— . Title I��/�/1 I'J�j( r` f��ca Date�.��2�p4`� Job no. �? •��`a-c� ( '� ��' - Subject �'cc � � �� A� �� `� � B � Sheet of �5�r ��1�«c.�o��.��- o�� v I �� I��- � � �� __ _^ _ ___ �__ f I._ _. � � II- i-�- � i ' ,, t ' i __�__ � ' .I , � � � ; �� I 4�.5-� ; ' --'- �__ � l_ __! � , G �-- � � � � � r �� I ! �I!�,�_� 0 � i I- - -- _.. W°k.11N;Lil .i �.��!'.�%' (�� .:...-' � /� ��''��` -�,''�� ,� � i_.__._ I �_ ...i i i � E � i �� -. < E ft'� ( 2 � I il � �__�w�� ___ ___i_`�� _ . C w<<� _�., � -��,�-��) ; _ i r�' � � � � � ��', IS 6 'Liv` _,_ � �_ � _ __ !� I ��(� ' � � � I '. �, �,, ! ' �i� � . li._ ' � I �: c '�. i `. , . � : I __._ ._ ___.. � _._. __ ..- ��--- � .._. ._ . .. ._ ... � �.i �_ � 2 � �r � �� , ; � '( 4' ` d�/ � - � - -_ -- - � ! '�� I � I �� , � I�� I _' , I + � � i I ; � � � � i , r — [ i - i_—_ i_.. ____ _ ,. . _—. ----- - i � .__— --- - - - � � � � � � i I I i li � ��I � i ��. i I I �,, i ',i i . ( � i� %..� ._ ._.__.. � .._:, . _ ._ _ __.. ' _ .. _. ._...-- a c �_ __ __ _ _ _ __ _ ; , , , ; ; � i i � _. _ . _ W : �-�1 • I( V��' _ U GL�.S ' = i ' i � ' ,- � , -- __ _ - - __. i � - i , i � P �� I - � I � � � : ' . I i I 3 I i i � � � _'Ne �,{�r e: _ -��.� � - ��3; _S , � - __; ' � -- . _ � �, � , -- � � , , ° ' __ ; � ; —� ' ' � ; ; � , � , � � � � � � �=� � � ��-- ,- � � � - �- - f- �� -- �..._.,.�.i � ` I ' � t j i � i I li ! ._I ., ,'',,_ i . �_ ___._ _._ .,_ . � �._ ._. _ _ _ ._ . . ---._._ _.. __ � � _ P�<2C��\/� �{ _1 I -�� ; � �'',- I . � � , I _ i _ F ' �. _ i" __ � - , , __ �_ ; _ - .� - - - - ` �- � - �� i , �, , - �I � �, ; I � , i � 1 � _ I _; , -- i �_ I I � -�- � ---- - - - _ _ ----- � _ --- _ r- �-- � , � � ._ � �� _ � _ _ ' � �� ` � �- --- - � �_ � -_ � _ -- - _, �____ l__ _ � _ � � � � ' �. ',� u.( � �� I �� , '� , �� ; : ; ; j � �;�c�` � Gvvt ` � I � � ' -k. � __�_..__, __. �_�__ �_ ._�_ i_____. � �--- __�_ , � , _ i_. L L �._ - -.-- -- }== � _. __; . .4�. _�_ �� '_ i I ,,µ. .` _.___.i II i ', �f.. _il_ � __ I....._..,_ . ._�, , i . : I_ ._.__, � j � ( � I � i C , I '�� t I � I I � � � f �____ ___�___ _____. ! ' � ,•.__ . __�"" __I__.__' '___ �!— —� I_ � � �y - ----.-.—. � I I — - - [ I ��i— i�—} i�--._ ..�..— +� i ,`-- — ---i�— I-.._._.. �--- � II-- i ----- �-- -- ----j � I 1 i i :--- i ; �� ` � � � " � � � _ ___.. ,_. �__ _._______,v__._ �__.__ -___��_.__ -_____ _ _ _ _ ._ � _ __ _ _ _ __. _._ _.'___.... _... I , , _... _ _ . t__ , � ; � I I ; ; , � , � , � ; � , � __ � ,__ � _._ i__ ___� -- -_ _ __ _ _ _ . � ,_ � ____. -- -- --I � i , I i i ( � ` � � � ` i ; � i � i �__ ,- __ __._ ' ---i - --- _ -_ - - -:� -- -- - - � I i I i I -� - -- - �-- ,- i � = 1 � i ' F ; � i i i i i i � i ;� i ` i , ' ; ! �,��_. �. _...__._ ____.�-_- -____, ..�.__._.. ___ _ _ _- - - _ _ _ _ _ - --.- _. _,_ __ �_ � � t i � i I i � � �E _ 4 I , . II .....__ . I I __._ � ....... _ .. ...... _ _ . .. ._ . _.__._. . .__.__ _..._ ;.. ; I ,.. � , . : � I � I ; i i F i i � � .. € I ; � ; ' j' ' � ; I I I � � � . �`_.__..._ � _- -.—..- — ,�— � ,-�- --- — - i — -___ . .__ �_ � . - 1 I ��- II i i 6 ' ' : ... il : . e_ ..i . I _._._...._ - ; .. . .... _.. _ ... .._ _ � a_ - �_._,_, � _�__�_� �_____., � _� _.�___ � _ �.._ __.__ �.. . _��. .,_. __._ ...._ _ ..�._ ._� ' I � I� � ,,_ _.� �(� I � � � ' I I i � ! j � _ � � i j i � ' I I i � � � � � � ' : r —� -- — — — � � .._ f._ . �- j- -- — � i � � � � i i l i _ =__. - _._ ' _ �_- ' - �--- - ` i j , ' f i , � i ' ', � � i, i i � ' , i � � � • ' � p__ � __ ___ __ . - ; i � r �— i _ _. # i � ! � � t �.._.._....��_�i—_—j._. !.____ _i_. ._��.�_.�i. _._ ' _......_. i_—J_ __i_._.._. �i I.`._..._._. }_.�i .._� �_ �____ i._ _I._ _i..._.-i ( I I ( i i � � �. I I t I' i i � '� I i 'I ' ', i ' ___ _;._ .____.__ _..__... . ;_ ._...__..._ � —_" __— '� — — _ Martin/'_artirh Inci 80 f 137 .._ i . � ' � _ � I ; � I � � ; � , ___ - --- � I I , � € I ; ; j j � 1 , � � M , , R , ; li '• _ _ , � j ; E—_ I ....__.._ �.....____ ._____ .__ ,_...___"_.._ _._... _.. . I � � — `' � � ; � � i � f s` ; : I i ; I ; � i � , �_.__._____�N_,_.__.�, .__. _..:...._. _.___ ..___-_.____.,._ , .._._ __..._ , __,.__._ __:_.___.._ __._._. . ..._._. . . . -.. .w. _ ._, _ . . __. _,..:. Martin/Martin, Inc. �oB riT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �oa rvo. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Wind Loads - MWFRS h<_60' (Low-rise Buildinqs) Enclosed/partiallv enclosed onlv Kz= Kh (case 1)= 1.01 Edge Strip (a)= 4.4 ft Base pressure(qh) = 23.0 psf End Zone (2a)= 8.8 ft GCpi= +/-0.18 Zone 2(ength = 22.0 ft Wind Pressure Coefficients CASE A CASE B B=14deg Surface GCpf w/-GCpi w/+GCpi GCpf w/-GCpi w/+GCpi 1 0.48 0.66 0.30 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 2 -0.69 -0.51 -0.87 -0.69 -0.51 -0.87 3 -0.44 -0.26 -0.62 -0.37 -0.19 -0.55 4 -0.37 -0.19 -0.55 -0.45 -027 -0.63 5 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 0.40 0.58 0.22 6 -0.45 -0.27 -0.63 -0.29 -0.11 -0.47 1 E 0.72 0.90 0.54 -0.48 -0.30 -0.66 2E -1.07 -0.89 -1.25 -1.07 -0.89 -1.25 3E -0.63 -0.45 -0.81 -0.53 -0.35 -0.71 4E -0.56 -0.38 -0.74 -0.48 -0.30 -0.66 5E 0.61 0.79 0.43 6E -0.43 -0.25 -0.61 Ultimate Wind Surface Pressures (psf) 1 15.1 6.9 -6.2 -14.5 2 -11.7 -20.0 -11.7 -20.0 3 -5.9 -14.2 -4.4 -12.6 4 -4.5 -12.7 -6.2 -14.5 5 -62 -14.5 13.3 5.1 6 -6.2 -14.5 -2.5 -10.8 1 E 20.8 12.5 -6.9 -15.2 2E -20.5 -28.7 -20.5 -28.7 3E -10.3 -18.5 -8.0 -16.3 4E -8.7 -16.9 -6.9 -15.2 5E 18.2 9.9 6E -5.7 -14.0 Parapet Windward parapet= 34.5 psf (GCpn=+1.5) Windward roof Leeward parapet= -23.0 psf (GCpn=-1.0) overhangs= 16.1 psf (upward) add to windward roof pressure Horizontal MWFRS Simple Diaphraqm Pressures(psf) �W� Transverse direction (normal to L) °V�1"' �i� 'w�rm`�v�R°°F ��rAgDROOF Interior Zone: Wall 19.6 psf L 1 t � i a t � a t Roof -5.8 psf '`* vE�IC�" End Zone: Wall 29.4 psf g � ��' Roof -10.2 psf "* 6 � anor�o�2 � Longitudinal direction(parallel to L) - Interior Zone: Wall 15.9 psf 'j'R�s�RS��-EV.�.T=orT End Zone: Wall 23.9 psf wr�`Q�R°oF I.FEWARD FtOOF *'`NOTE:Total horiz force shall not be less than that determined � � � � l � � ! � � VERTICAL by neglecting roof forces(except for MWFRS moment frames). z . r t7 a The code requires the MWFRS be designed for a min ultimate � a force of 16 psf multiplied by the wall area plus an 8 psf force °x applied to the vertical projection of the roof. - L02TC,TTUDIh7AL ELEV�iTIC?N Martin/Martin, Inc.81 of 137 Martin/Martin, Inc. �os Tir�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood, CO 80215 �oB No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100 (phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303) 431-6866 (fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Location of MWFRS Wind Pressure Zones � 3 �UN��.lessor of �, � — � : ,.�-� {?_�B crr 2_�h ; -'•...,,r'� � If �is negativ� � � �E 3E � �,✓,�'�, �E 3E �. ' .,�' �: '� 2E 2E == 8 6` . � 5 � �'�, '',,� .� �� `�E �,�. n��' � CASE A ��m�c�za�=' C�.SE B FiANGE �t�}UIRECTI4?v R4�t� NOTE:Torsional loads are 25%of zones 1 -6. See code for loading diagram. ASCE 7 -99 and ASCE 7-10 (& later) � � ,,�''� �a��:��4�� ,,,_ o.�� .�� .�•. ,.• � If 2�s�ega�ive �E 3E ' q 2 t� �d� r, � �r T� E� .. �fr ��: . � � -' � 1 :� �� .� ''• t.. . � ^`+��+ �.� . .�1�. ��:. .. . ��:�� :. i� ��Y9.:'ISJtJ.tiiLV31V.'i ,t1�$ . �� . .. Tra�sverse I7ir�tia� Lan�itudinal Dire.ctic�n NOTE:Torsional loads are 25%of zones 1 -4. See code for loading diagram. ASCE 7 -02 and ASCE 7-05 Martin/Martin, Inc.82 of 137 Martin/Martin, InC. �oe Tir�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �oe No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) ca�CU�A'reo eY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Wind Loads - Components & Claddinq : h <- 60� Ultimate Wind Pressures Kh(case 1)= 1.01 h= 35.0 ft Base pressure(qh)= 23.0 psf a= 4.4 ft Minimum parapet ht= 0.0 ft GCpi= +/-0.18 Roof Angle(8)= 14.0 deg Type of roof= Gable Roof GCp+/-GCpi Surface Pressure(psf) User input Area 10 sf 50 sf 100 sf 10 sf 50 sf 100 sf 40 sf 500 sf Negative Zone 1 -1.08 -1.01 -0.98 -24.8 -23.2 -22.5 -23.4 -22.5 Negative Zone 2 -1.88 -1.53 -1.38 -43.2 -35.2 -31.7 -36.3 -31.7 Negative Zone 3 -2.78 -2.36 -2.18 -63.9 -54.2 -50.1 -55.6 -50.1 Positive All Zones 0.68 0.54 0.48 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 Overhang Zone 2 -2.20 -2.20 -2.20 -50.6 -50.6 -50.6 -50.6 -50.6 Overhang Zone 3 -3.70 -2.86 -2.50 -85.0 -65.7 -57.4 -68.4 -57.4 Overhang pressures in the table above assume an internal pressure coefficient(Gcpi)of 0.0 Overhang soffit pressure equals adjacent wall pressure reduced by internal pressure of 4.1 psf Parapet qp= 23.0 psf Surface Pressure(psf) User input Solid Parapet Pressure 10 sf 100 sf 500 sf 40 sf CASE A=pressure towards building(pos) CASE A: Interior zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 CASE B=pressure away from bldg(neg) Corner zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 CASE B: Interior zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Corner zone: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Walls GCp+/-GCpi Surface Pressure(psf) User input Area 10 sf 100 sf 500 sf 10 sf 100 sf 500 sf 50 sf 200 sf Negative Zone 4 -1.28 -1.10 -0.98 -29.4 -25.4 -22.5 -26.6 -24.1 Negative Zone 5 -1.58 -1.23 -0.98 -36.3 -28.2 -22.5 -30.6 -25.7 Positive Zone 4&5 1.18 1.00 0.88 27.1 23.1 20.2 24.3 21.8 Martin/Martin, Inc.83 of 137 Ma1'tln/Ma1'tln, ItIC. �oe riT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE XX/XX/XX Location of C&C Wind Pressure Zones �� y < � a 2a� 2a '' � '� �� 3 —2 — —2 --�- � 2' � � c`�v ,� � I I c� 3�' �----J— f � �� I I � I � � � I I —j 11 I �;, I ,,.,, i � q� I � 2 � 't!.� .1{� �2 2� � {l� �Z {4} � � 5 � I I _� � I I a � � i ( I � � � I 5 g 1 I I L I � wt�.L � I �, �� -----�— � a 3 —Z— —z —r3 �i 2� � �3} Roofs w/ 6<_10° Walls h<_60' Gable,Sawtooth and and all walls &alt design h<90' Multispan Gable 6<_7 degrees& Monoslope roofs h>60' Monoslope<_3 degrees 3°<9<_10° h<_60'&alt design h<90' h<_60'&alt design h<90' �� /f� � F---{,,,_� 1 1� � _ 3 _2 +3 8 2 ----� � 3 I � I I I 1 � �/ � �' � � � � � 2 I � 1 I I I 1�2 v2 ',1 I ��. tiJl � 2i i2 I � � ' �1 I 2rf�,1�12 1 1 1 I �2 t (�I I� I ( �� lt � 2 3 � I 1 1 I I I � 1 �= 3 L--- --- 1 � I 1 I I � ^ �� i I ,* ,{�3 1 � I 1 I I r��,}1 �� I F---2 i, 3� 2 3 3 2 3 L 2 -3 I I 21 � IZ Monoslope roofs Multispan Gable& Hip 7° < 8 <27° � � 10°<8<-30° Gable 7° <6<- 45° j I h 5 60'8�alt design h<90' -J I 3 � -- — --� 2 3 il Sawtooth 10°<8 <_ 45° � 3 r 2 3 r 2 _� ��3 h_<60'&ait design h<90' � 2 if .1{� = 2 fj� ,l� �r 2 3.�''` 2 — 2 _2�' 3 �y .� 3�'` 2 — 2—� — 1 1 � 2 = r 2 2�' 2 2 l� b l� ��i 1 t�'? �tiT1 S�G�? tt+3 �V Z�,,- Stepped roofs 6<_3° h<_60'&ait d1dSi�FV49a�, Inc.84 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 1/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0870 Version 2.0.4896.11 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: 1.Project information Customer company: Project description: Customer contact name: Location: Customer e-mail: Fastening description: Comment: 2.Input Data&Anchor Parameters General Base Material Design method:ACl 318-08 Concrete: Normal-weight Units: Imperial units Concrete thickness,h(inch): 12.00 State: Non-cracked Anchor Information: Compressive strength,f'�(psi):3000 Anchor type:Concrete screw 4��,v: 1.4 Material:Carbon Steel Reinforcement condition: B tension, B shear Diameter(inch):0.500 Supplemental reinforcement:No Nominal Embedment depth(inch):3.500 Do not evaluate concrete breakout in tension:No Effective Embedment depth, her(inch):2.560 Do not evaluate concrete breakout in shear:No Code report: ICC-ES ESR-2713 Ignore 6do requirement: Not applicable Anchor category: 1 Build-up grout pad: No Anchor ductility: No Flmin(inch):5.42 Base Plate ca�(inch):3.88 Cmin(inch): 1.75 Smin(inch):3.00 Load and Geometry Load factor source:ACI 318 Section 9.2 Load combination: not set 1560 Ib Seismic design: No Anchors subjected to sustained tension: Not applicable Apply entire shear load at front row: No Anchors only resisting wind and/or seismic loads: No <Figure 1> � � � 1560 Ib � y/ o in , Y �'. °o �; ti Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.85 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 2/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0870 Version 2.0.4896.11 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: <Figure 2> 'i � i � ■ � N � ,� � � N Recommended Anchor Anchor Name:Titen HDO-1/2"fd Titen HD, hnom:3.5"(89mm) Approval No: ICC-ES ESR-2713 �� +' ;� - _ Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. : _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.86 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 3/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0870 Version 2.0.4896.11 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: 3.Resulting Anchor Forces Anchor Tension load, Shear load x, Shear Ioad y, Shear load combined, Nua��J� Vuax��b� Vuay��b� l��Vuax�2+�Vuay�2��b� 1 1560.0 0.0 1560.0 1560.0 Sum 1560.0 0.0 1560.0 1560.0 Maximum concrete compression strain(%o):0.00 Maximum concrete compression stress(psi):0 Resultant tension force(Ib): 1560 Resultant compression force(Ib):0 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in x-axis,e'Nx(inch):0.00 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in y-axis,e'rvY(inch):0.00 Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in x-axis,e'vx(inch):0.00 Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in y-axis,e'vY(inch):0.00 4.Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.1� Nsa(Ib) � �Nsa(Ib) 20130 0.65 13085 5.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.2� Nd=kcaJf'chet�'S(Eq. D-7) k� � f'�(psi) har(in) Na(Ib) 24.0 1.00 3000 2.560 5384 �N�b=�(AN�/An�co)Y'ed,n�Yo,ni`YcP.n�Nb(S2c. D.4.1 &Eq. D-4) ANc�II12� ANCO�IIl2� �ed,N �c,N �cp,N Nb(Ib) � �N�b(Ib) 42.24 58.98 0.915 1.00 0.991 5384 0.65 2272 8.Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.1� Vsa��b� �grout � �grout�Vsa��fJ� 7455 1.0 0.60 4473 9.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.2� Shear parallel to edge in y-direction: Vbx=7(le/da)°Z�da��Y�cat'S(Eq. D-24) /e(in) da(in) � f'�(psi) cai(in) Vbx(Ib) 2.56 0.50 1.00 3000 2.75 1714 �Vcby=��Z��AVc/Avoo)Y%d.vY%,vY�n,vVbx(SeC. D.4.1, D.6.2.1(C)&EC{. D-21) Av�(in2) Av�o(inZ) �Yea,v ��,v Y'n.v Vbx(Ib) � (bVcby�II�� 34.03 34.03 1.000 1.400 1.000 1714 0.70 3359 10.Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.3� �Vcp=�kcpNcb=�kcp�ANC�ANCO��ed,N�c,N�cp,NNb(Eq. D-30) �(cp .4Nc�IIl2� {�Nco�Illz� �ed,N �c.N �cp,N Nb��fJ� (6 ��/cp��.1� 2.0 42.24 58.98 0.915 1.000 0.991 5384 0.70 4894 11.Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces�Sec.D.7) Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.87 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 4/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0870 Version 2.0.4896.11 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: Tension Factored Load, N�a(Ib) Design Strength,roN�(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 1560 13085 0.12 Pass Concrete breakout 1560 2272 0.69 Pass(Governs) Shear Factored Load,V�a(Ib) Design Strength,mV�(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 1560 4473 0.35 Pass II Concrete breakout x- 1560 3359 0.46 Pass(Governs) Pryout 1560 4894 0.32 Pass Interaction check N„a/¢N„ V„a/�V� Combined Ratio Permissible Status Sec. D.7.3 0.69 0.46 115.1 % 1.2 Pass 1/2"f7�Titen HD, hnom:3.5"(89mm)meets the selected design criteria. 12.Warninas -Minimum spacing and edge distance requirement of 6da per ACI 318 Sections D.8.1 and D.8.2 for torqued cast-in-place anchor is waived per designer option. -Designer must exercise own judgement to determine if this design is suitable. -Refer to manufacturer's product literature for hole cleaning and installation instructions. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.88 of 137 Martin/Mal'tin, InC. �oe TiT�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) CALCULATED BY SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE Xx/7oc/xX Wind Loads - Other Structures: Ultimate Wind Pressures Importance Factor= 1.00 Gust Effect Factor (G)= 0.85 Wind Speed= 115 mph Kzt= 1.00 Exposure= C A. Solid Freestandinq Walls &Solid Siqns (&open siqns with less than 30%open) s/h= 1.00 Case A&B Dist to sign top(h) 5.0 ft B/s= 2.40 Cf = 1.39 Height (s) 5.0 ft Lr/s= 0.00 F=qz G Cf As = 22.7 As Width (B) 12.0 ft Kz = 0.849 As= 10.0 sf Wall Return(Lr)= qz= 19.2 psf F = 227 Ibs Directionality (Kd) 0.85 Percent of open area Open reduction CaseC to gross area 0.0% factor= 1.00 Horiz dist from windward edqe Cf F=qzGCfAs(psfl Case C reduction factors 0 to s 1.91 31.2 As Factor if s/h>0.8= 0.80 s to 2s 1.26 20.7 As Wall return factor 2s to 3s 0.92 16.0 As forCfatOtos= 1.00 B.Open Siqns&Lattice Frameworks(openinqs 30%or more of qross area) Height to centroid of Af(z) 15.0 ft Kz = 0.849 Base pressure(qz)= 19.2 psf Width(zero if round) 0.0 ft Diameter(zero if rect) 2.0 ft D(qz)^.5= 8.77 F=qZ G C�Af = 18.0 Af Percent of open area I = 0.65 5olid Area:Af = 10.0 sf to gross area 35.0% Cf = 1.1 F = 180 Ibs Directionality (Kd) 0.85 C. Chimnevs,Tanks,Rooftop Equipment(h>60')&Similar Structures Height to centroid of Af(z) 15.0 ft Kz = 0.849 Cross-Section Square Base pressure(qz)= 20.4 psf Directionality (Kd) 0.90 h/D = 15.00 Height (h) 15.0 ft Width (D) 1.0 ft Type of Surface N/A Sauare(wind alonq diaqonal) Square(wind normal to face) Cf = 1.28 Cf = 1.67 F=qz G Cf Af = 22.1 Af F=qZ G Cf Af = 28.8 Af Af = sf Af = 10.0 sf F= 0 Ibs F = 288 Ibs D.Trussed Towers Height to centroid of Af(z) 15.0 ft Kz = 0.849 e = 0.27 Base pressure(qz)= 22.6 psf Tower Cross Section square Member Shape flat Diagonal wind factor= 1.2 Directionality (Kd) 1.00 Round member factor= 1.000 S�c uare(wind alonq tower diagonal) Square(wind normal to facel Cf = 3.24 Cf = 2.70 F=qzGCfAf = 62.3 Af F=qZGC�Af = 51.9 Af Solid Area:Af = 10.0 sf Solid Area:Af = 10.0 sf F= Martin��r��Inc.89 of 137 F = 519 Ibs Martin/Martin, (nC. �os rrr�e Timber Ridge 12499 W Colfax Ave. Lakewood,CO 80215 �os No. 13.0870.S.01 SHEET NO. (303)431-6100(phone) ca�cu�aren ev SJM DATE 12/31/13 (303)431-6866(fax) CHECKED BY XXX DATE)O(/XX/XX Wind Loads - Other Structures: Ultimate Wind Pressures Importance Factor= 1.00 Gust Effect Factor (G)= 0.85 Wind Speed= 115 mph Kzt= 1.00 Exposure= C A. Solid Freestandinq Walls &Solid Siqns(&open siqns with less than 30%open) s/h= 0.40 Case A&B Dist to sign top(h) 5.0 ft B/s= 3.50 Cf = 1.75 Height (s) 2.0 ft Lr/s= 0.00 F=qz G Cf As = 28.6 As Width (B) 7.0 ft Kz = 0.849 As= 10.0 sf Wall Return(Lr)= qz= 19.2 psf F = 286 Ibs Directionality (Kd) 0.85 Percent of open area Open reduction CaseC to gross area 0.0% factor= 1.00 Horiz dist from windward edqe Cf F=qzGCfAs(psf) Case C reduction factors 0 to s 2.75 44.9 As Factor if s/h>0.8= 1.00 s to 2s 1.80 29.4 As Wall return factor 2s to 3s 1.23 20.0 As for Cf at 0 to s= 1.00 3s to 10s 1.10 1 S.0 As B.Open Siqns&Lattice Frameworks(openinqs 30%or more of qross area) Height to centroid of Af(z) 15.0 ft Kz = 0.849 Base pressure(qz)= 19.2 psf Width(zero if round) 0.0 ft Diameter(zero if rect) 2.0 ft D(qz)^.5= 8.77 F=qZ G Cf Af = 18.0 Af Percent of open area I = 0.65 Solid Area:Af = 10.0 sf to gross area 35.0% Cf = 1.1 F = 180 Ibs Directionality (Kd) 0.85 C. Chimnevs,Tanks, Rooftop Equipment(h>60'1&Similar Structures Height to centroid of Af(z) 15.0 ft Kz = 0.849 Cross-Section Square Base pressure(qz)= 20.4 psf Directionality (Kd) 0.90 h/D = 15.00 Height (h) 15.0 ft W idth (D) 1.0 ft Type of Surface N/A Sauare(wind alonq diaqonal) Square(wind normal to face) Cf = 1.28 Cf = 1.67 F=qz G Cf Af = 22.1 Af F=qZ G Cf Af = 28.8 Af Af = sf Af = 10.0 sf F= 0 Ibs F = 288 Ibs D.Trussed Towers Height to centroid of Af(z) 15.0 ft Kz = 0.849 e = 0.27 Base pressure(qz)= 22.6 psf Tower Cross Section square Member Shape flat Diagonal wind factor= 1.2 Directionality (Kd) 1.00 Round member factor= 1.000 S�c uare(wind along tower diagonal) Spuare(wind normal to facel Cf = 3.24 Cf = 2.70 F=qzGCfAf = 62.3 Af F=qZGCfA� = 51.9 Af Solid Area:Af = 10.0 sf Solid Area:Af = 10.0 sf F= Martin�l�rr�Inc.90 of 137 F = 519 Ibs �, �MARTIN / MARTIN �'—*'�� .�,."� �' CO N S lJ LTI N C3 EN61 NEERS . . „:�� ..x _„_ � m�. t Title B 6 r�,'��d ��!1��„ Date ��,��`��('� Job no. � '��`�`�-« v ' ' � Subject �t��t�(�p��i,��,�,,�� j@�� By �,.� Sheet of � ��:____.______�_;__� ____ _i.� _ w_ _ .__ _ _ _. ___ � � � i � _ �� _ _ ,._ _ _._ � � � �I i � � /��r� ; I - =- = �— -- �- �� - � - � � - �e !� ; _ ` , ; ; ; ' ' ( i tl� ��,�. _-__ . ___ ___-- ----_._ __ I - -- -- ___ ._ � (9 '�iavt C V �i-3� I � !I - ! # �, -- �—I � � i_ I , Ij ; li j , � I � ' -�- __ � _ � , �-_._ _ I � � — - i � , �� t _St�n��,.' � �� 's..�-i.��_�'� � ' � _ �.,. ,_ . _..�_ . �._ .. _ . __. _ _. , _ _._ _ _ m _ w__._ _.. ._ �� ,� � �'- � ; t --�, , � � � �_ � � l ; i �� ; � � I ' � r � � � � � i� i _l_ � _� � � � ` � ` � - -- ;_ _ __ � , , , , ; € � , ; , ; , � I ; � � � ; , � i ; � � � --. II i i -- __ _- - , ; -, -- -- --- � � I � _ � � ' � �i ' _ , ; � � � Z : _._ . _ - - �5 - �/ } - - t7 . � 1 ( � � r. .,(' i�'L�.i % 'p �"�.I � I '''1 '�"I/��. �l, �. .,�0 t;+'�l�..°,� i — � _� �i__ _......_, ,__._.__ .., ._. .._��,�` _, ��. __ _. .....� ._..t �,.. _ _ 1 � � I 1 `�=�� ,�%,�'re�^� i � ; . , � -- ___ `��"� � � _. � / ! _—i � � i � j ��'�.7 � � '— ---- — i � - — �--- � x � �j �_.� �� .{� _ � �_ � _- � _ � ; I i � � j i � l I � i ;� ! � ' , ; ` I, , � ; --- --- _- _.- - - - -- -- --- - - .,- €— r I i �� ,� � . ., �— , , � ; � � I � � E I � � , i �f- (�-� � �_____.__..___.I_-�� .__' ��...._i � ___�'I_ _'i. � ��,_ l�-.� ___� _'____� �:�___� _ _��. _ ` � � � � i � I I , � r___�_ __ , - ' � , ; � � , ; �� ; ; � i i � i s ; , ! ! ' '�--- � , __- - - -- -- --- -- -- - —. _._- I �' t , ; ; i E .i � �.i � i : a � : � �{— � . ' ___. — _ ____' ' ___ '_ � ' _"_ __ ' '__ i 1 � � � 9 �''7 ) .r r�f- I . I I � I I . I �#�� k' --� � a! �� ,�rCt '-.,s`rt _:..` � ; SF��f _- — � - I-- --' -._ _ __ , a � � t" r � � I I � �� , � _ .. i � � � i I 4 i � ' . . = i i ' ' , ___ I � _ i ' I � I I � � i - ' _d - i ._�.._..__ . _, _ _ G �__..�...._�___...._.._____.�.�.�....._____.� ___.w ._._ € � - f � ` i �� I--E I— �... .� ^i � � I ,— I i , �I- � I � � F ,, , i--.._.._. ,._.. '�_ .._.�(. --� - � � � I � � ( � I . � � f � I p � I ; � ( ; `: � I i =- � , --- � - - __ __ ____ �---- -- --- , , i I , ;—_ " � � i I _ , -i G� ,-s� - '___ !__ I , ` � ---- - � � � � � � � � � � � � �� ,� -- - � — --,� -- � � I i � � � � , � i � i i � � �-__ _ �___ _._.. _.. ._�_ _ _ #-- '_ i j I[ — I II 1� ,� ' i i '_� _- - - --I�rv __ . _ ; _ .. I I i � � � I , I I � ( I � � � i � , I i � ' i I I I [ i , ; � i ; _._ __:. ___- --- — _ _ -- -. - --- -- - --- _ , ! . . (- j � i . ' ' ` ; � �y, " ' . ' � i '� i � i /1 , � � � � I �7 � , , ;.— -- - --- -... , -- � - __ , _. � � � � � i ( �`- � i I � : � I � � , _. . ��. _ � ._ � ;_ I � - � _ _ _. ---__ �_ � ._ _.E.__ _ _ _�_�---; �.___.___i �;� � � �;�1 �� r` _ _ __.. __ __ E � �7 _J -- '� �. �a ��, .- ;� �5 6- ��,�:� _ �-�6��'� / _ � E I — � � / � . .I �._____ - . � ._�—� __. _... ...; ..... ��.. ' . � � ` V' � � . . i . . : ��./ � i !, �- , , � l - - - � � - --- - - __ � � � � � � i � � � r � ' ' _-- -. ' '' }f' ) � � �-- -- ---- - '--__. _ _ ' '" I � i ; � i � � ; � `T �3r� �.� /� � , � � �_._ ..._ � , . �,� ��h G i , �_ , _v ___�i_ '�_ _ ___ ___ __ _ _._ „ � ___ _,_ ______ __ _ __ - - - , � , �, ; � � , ; � ,_ ` j --I � � ° , ; � � � _ _- __ _ �-- -� - , i - , , � ; � � . i i _, � � � � ._ � -, �. :. � � , _; °- � �`� ' � � I � _ , r,� t� s — , ; ; _ I.— i ._._.._�__ _�..._ i � I 12 I_'____il " II __.__ ........ � ' _._ . I � � + . . ..; ' . � � . i � �0 i — -_ -- - � - I_____�___,�_�_. � � I � � i -t � ° . �I � � � � � � � ' � � �__�__�_._ � ( �� __._�_____� __ � __� __ �_ _ � __ � _ I __ _ ' _ _ � � � � � _ °�. � � � �_ _ � �� _ _ _� � ! � �-�'� ' _� � _ _ {- I ---- ; -- --,_ ; _ _- !- --- --._ �� E i � ---I --- --- i � � � ' ' �, � I � , � ' ; I I I � i , ; ; i � ' ---- ---- ___ _ ;__ _ i - ; -- _ _ -- --- � � � ( � � M�rtin/I�lartirh, Inci 91 of 137 ! i � I __� ' ' ' I i � � I �_ � ._..._..� 1 i _ �._ ____ __._ �__ .! _ _ _ - , i . . � � '�� I, � , ( i i � , � � � �______..__.!.___�.___._,___ � i , �__ ! Concrete Section S-CONCRETE Version 10.00 Job#A123.45 O Copyright 1996-2011 by Softek Services Ltd. �'�lat�$I�s�'�fti� [scella�i'�us�, fc'=500D psi QuanfiGes(Approx} fy(mainj=6Q.0 ksi Concrete=75 Ib/ft fy(stir)=60.�ksi Steel—�.7 Iblft Wc='I50 pcf Ws=500 pcF Top Bars Poisson's Ratio=02 d'=3.0 in 6agg=0_75 in As'=02 sq.in. Es=290D0 ksi Ps'/bh=D.00278 Ec=4287 ksi dz=`"N!A° Gc=1786 ksP Bottom Bars d=°NlA�` As=0.0 sq_in. As/bh=0.00000 �: dz="`NIA�r ' To=�aYs� �-^d Clear Cover Top=2.75in Bottam=1.5 in Side=1.5 in 'g q b�J Shea°��'�a'rs""i"��R�st�Its- Wz=0.0 kips OVnz=6_1 ki s "�:�5"�`i�Ero_ t�6.w. ,, �° I�, Q ; � Zbar=3.0 in AvzlS="N1A'` 'Ybar=o.0 in Stirru s Nof Re uired Ag=72_0 sq.in. �� 9(Y-Y?=216.0 in4 �z� {Fle"�tti�al��'al�e°�Ults"�- ig(z z)=864_0 in4 Plu-"NIA" Ashear(Y)=80.0 sq.in. Mu(-}_*'N/A*" Ashear(Z)=60Asq.in. ;� .t�i[�a=;. �Mn(- ="N/A"` Jg=592.8 in4 Concrete Sec6on t� QOQ Job�A123.45 As'(Req'd)=0_0 sq_in_ Ae=72.0sq.in. ACI318-O8Standard le(y-y)=216.0 in4 Nu=0.0 kips Ie{z-z)=864_0 in4 Microsoft Mu(+)-p.6 k`ft Ase(1�=60.0 sq.in. hAarfin/Marfin inc. f�Mn(+}=2.6 k`ft Ase fZ)=640 sq.in. tl �� Je=5928 in4 " `", ., As Re 'd =0�02 s .in. � �� Microsoft #100- 1234 Anywhere Place Martin/Martin Inc. February 25,2014 Lakewood,CO Ph: 555-1234 Fax: 555-4321 3:13 PM US Martin/Martin, Inc.92 of 137 6.00005in Conc w/#4 @ 12.in o/c • • � 6�� 5�_�„ • 7'-0" • • � • • 2'-0�� 2,_0,� • 3" I � • � �,_o„ • • 3" #5@12.in I @Toe Designer select @ 1'-0" 1'-6" #5 12.in all horiz.reinf. �� @ Heel 2'-6" Martin/Martin, Inc.93 of 137 30.ps • • • Pp= 1350.# 180.# 1512.6psf Martin/Martin, Inc.94 of 137 Title: Job# Dsgnr: Date: 10:17AM, 13 MAR 14 Description : Scope: Code Ref:ACI 318-02, 1997 UBC,2003 IBC,2003 NFPA 5000 Rev: 580014 User:KW-0604057,Ver5.8.0,1-Dec-2003 Cantilevered Retaining Wall Design Page � (c)1983-2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software MONUMENT SIGNAGE.ECW:Calculations � Description Criteria �Soil Data � I Footing Strengths 8� Dimensions �� , Retained Height - 2.00 ft Allow Soil Bearing = 3,000.0 psf fc = 3,000 psi Fy = 60,000 psi Wall height above soil = 5.00 ft Equivalent Fluid Pressure Method Min.As% = 0.0014 Heel Active Pressure - 40.0 psf/ft Toe Width = 1.00 ft Slope Behind Wall = 0.00: 1 Toe Active Pressure = 40.0 psf/ft = Heel Width 1.50 Height of Soil over Toe = 24.00 in Passive Pressure = 300.0 psf/ft Total Footing Width = 2.50 Soil Density = 110.00 pcf Water height over heel = 0.0 ft _ Footing Thickness 12.00 in Footing��Soil Friction = 0.300 Key Width = 0.00 in Wind on Stem = 0.0 psf Soil height to ignore Key Depth = 0.00 in for passive pressure = 0.00 in Key Distance from Toe = 0.00 ft Cover @ Top = 3.00 in @ Btm.= 3.00 in I Latel"al L08d Applled t0 SteYn � Lateral Load = 30.0#/ft ...Height to Top = 7.00 ft - ...Height to Bottom = 2.00 ft Design Summary � � rStem Construction �� Top stem _ Stem OK Total Bearing Load = 1,417 Ibs Design height ft= 0.00 ...resultant ecc. = 7.50 in Wall Material Above"HY' = Concrete Soil Pressure @ Toe = 1,513 psf OK Thickness = 6.00 Rebar Size = # 4 Soil Pressure @ Heel = 0 psf OK Rebar Spacing = 12.00 Allowable = 3,000 psf Rebar Placed at = Edge Soil Pressure Less Than Allowable Design Data ACI Factored @ Toe = 1,976 psf fb/FB+fa/Fa = 0.108 ACI Factored @ Heel = 0 psf Total Force @ Section Ibs= 255.0 Footing Shear @ Toe = 3.7 psi OK Moment....Actual ft-#= 1,147.5 Footing Shear @ Heel = 6.7 psi OK Moment.....Allowable = 10,623.0 Allowable = 93.1 psi Shear.....Actual psi= 1.8 Wall Stability Ratios Overturning = 1.88 OK Shear.....Allowable psi= 93.1 Sliding = 5,38 (Vertical Co Bar Develop ABOVE Ht. in= 17.09 Sliding Calcs (Vertical Component Used) Bar Lap/Hook BELOW Ht. in= 6.00 Lateral Sliding Force = 330.0 Ibs Wall Weight = 72.5 less 100%Passive Forc� - 1,350.0 Ibs Rebar Depth 'd' in= 12.00 less 100%Friction Force= - 425.2 Ibs Masonry Data Added Force Req'd = 0.0 Ibs OK f'm psi= Fs psi= ....for 1.5: 1 Stability = 0.0 Ibs OK Solid Grouting = � Footing Design Results Special Inspection = - � � Modular Ratio'n' _ Toe Heel Short Term Factor = Factored Pressure = 1,976 0 psf Equiv.Solid Thick. _ Mu': Upward = 812 0 ft-# Masonry Block Type= Normal Weight Mu': Downward = 259 420 ft-# Concrete Data Mu: Design = 553 420 ft-# f'c psi= 3,000.0 Actual 1-Way Shear = 3.73 6.66 psi Fy psi= 60,000.0 Allow 1-Way Shear = 93.11 93.11 psi Other Acceptable Sizes 8 Spacings Toe Reinforcing = #5@ 12.00 in Toe: Not req'd,Mu<S'Fr Heel Reinforcing = #5@ 12.00 in Heel: Not req'd,Mu<S�Fr Key Reinforcing = None Spec'd Key: No key defined Martin/Martin, Inc.95 of 137 Title: Job# Dsgnr: Date: 10:17AM, 13 MAR 14 Description : Scope: Code Ref:ACI 318-02, 1997 UBC,2003 IBC,2003 NFPA 5000 Rev: 580014 Pa e 2 User:KW-0604057,Ver5.8.0,1-Dec-2003 Cantilevered Retaining Wall Design g (c)1983-2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software MONUMENT SIGNAGE.ECW:Calculations � Description Summary of Overturning & Resisting Forces & Moments .....OVERTURNING..... .....RESISTING..... Force Distance Moment Force Distance Moment Item Ibs ft ft-# Ibs ft ft-# Heel Active Pressure = 180.0 1.00 180.0 Soil Over Heel = 220.0 2.00 440.0 Toe Active Pressure = Sloped Soil Over Heel = Surcharge Over Toe = Surcharge Over Heel = Adjacent Footing Load = Adjacent Footing Load = Added Lateral Load = 150.0 5.50 825.0 Axial Dead Load on Stem= 0.00 Load @ Stem Above Soil = Soil Over Toe = 220.0 0.50 110.0 SeismicLoad = Surcharge Over Toe = Stem Weight(s) = 507.5 1.25 634.4 Total = 330.0 O.T.M. = 1,005.0 Earth @ Stem Transitions= Resisting/Overturning Ratio = 1.88 Footing Weight = 375.0 1.25 468.7 Vertical Loads used for Soil Pressure= 1,417.5 Ibs Key Weight = Vert.Component = 95.0 2.50 237.4 Vertical component of active pressure used for soil pressure Total= 1,417.5 Ibs R.M.= 1,890.6 Martin/Martin, Inc.96 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 1/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0349 Version 2.0.4896.10 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: 1.Project information Customer company: Project description: Customer contact name: Location: Customer e-mail: Fastening description: Comment: 2.Input Data&Anchor Parameters General Base Material Design method:ACl 318-08 Concrete: Normal-weight Units: Imperial units Concrete thickness,h(inch):36.00 State: Non-cracked Anchor Information: Compressive strength,f'�(psi):3000 Anchor type:Cast-in-place 4��,v: 1.4 Material: F1554 Grade 36 Reinforcement condition: B tension, B shear Diameter(inch):0.500 Supplemental reinforcement:No Effective Embedment depth, her(inch):24.000 Do not evaluate concrete breakout in tension:No Anchor category:- Do not evaluate concrete breakout in shear:No Anchor ductility:Yes Ignore 6do requirement:Yes hrrii�(inch):25.25 Build-up grout pad: No Cmin(inch):0.75 Smin(inch):2.00 Base Plate Length x Width x Thickness(inch):8.00 x 8.00 x 0.01 Load and Geometry Z Load factor source:ACI 318 Section 9.2 0 Ib Load combination: not set ' Seismic design: No Anchors subjected to sustained tension: Not applicable Apply entire shear load at front row: No Anchors only resisting wind and/or seismic loads: No 0 ft-Ib <Figure 1> `� 0 Ib 400 Ib � � �� \ Y X � 400 ft-Ib 0 ft-Ib Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.97 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 2/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0349 Version 2.0.4896.10 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: <Figure 2> 8.�� 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0o d- 0 4.00 ° N Recommended Anchor Anchor Name:J-or L-Bolt-1/2"fd J-or L-Bolt, F1554 Gr.36 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. : _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.98 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 3/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0349 Version 2.0.4896.10 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: 3.Resulting Anchor Forces Anchor Tension load, Shear load x, Shear Ioad y, Shear load combined, Nua��J� Vuax��b� Vuay��b� l��Vuax�2+�Vuay�2��b� 1 425.8 100.0 0.0 100.0 2 425.8 100.0 0.0 100.0 3 42.4 100.0 0.0 100.0 4 42.4 100.0 0.0 100.0 Sum 936.3 400.0 0.0 400.0 Maximum concrete compression strain(%o):0.03 <Figure 3> Maximum concrete compression stress(psi): 150 Resultant tension force(Ib):936 Resultant compression force(Ib):937 Q'� Q� Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in x-axis,e'n,x(inch): 1.64 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in y-axis,e'NY(inch):0.00 � Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in x-axis,e'vx(inch):0.00 Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in y-axis,e'vY(inch):0.00 �� 4.Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.1� Nsa(Ib) � �Nsa(Ib) 8235 0.75 6176 5.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.2� Nb=16.t�f'�her��3(Eq. D-8) � Y�(psi) her(in) Ne(Ib) 1.00 3000 24.000 174998 �/iNc6g=Q1�ANc/ANCO)Y'ec,NY'ed,NY'c,NYeP,NNb(SeC. D.4.1 &Eq. D-5) .4Nc�IIIZ� ANco�IfIZ� �ec;N �ed,N �c,N �cp,N Nb��b� � (6Ncbg��b� 608.00 5184.00 0.956 0.717 1.25 1.000 174998 0.70 12310 6.Pullout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.3� �Npn=��c,PNp=�Y�c,PO.9f'�enda(S2C. D.4.1, Eq. D-14&D-16) Y%,P Yo(psi) da(in) en=3da(ir�) � �NP�(Ib) 1.4 3000 0.50 1.50 0.70 1985 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc.99 of 137 • Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 2/26/2014 _ Engineer: RS Page: 4/4 � "'�� '�i��y SOftWaCe Project: 13.0349 Version 2.0.4896.10 Address: 0 Phone: E-mail: 8.Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.1� Vsa�Ib� �grout � �grout�Vsa�IIJ� 4940 1.0 0.65 3211 9.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.2� Shear perpendicular to edge in x-direction: Vbx=7(le/da)°Z�da��Y�Ca�'S(Eq. D-24) /e(in) da(in) ,� f'�(psi) ca�(in) Vbx(Ib) 4.00 0.50 1.00 3000 2.00 1162 �Vc6gx=��AVc/Av�a)Y'e�,vY'ea,vY'�,vY'n,vVex(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq. D-22) Av�(inZ) Av�o(inZ) +I%�,v Y�ed,V Y'�,v Y'n,v Vbx Qb) � �V�b9x(Ib) 30.00 18.00 1.000 1.000 1.400 1.000 1162 0.70 1898 10.Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.3� �Ucpg=��(cpNcbg=(6�(cp�ANc�ANco��ec,N�ed,N�qN�cp,NNb(Eq. D-31) �(cp ANC�IIIZ� ANCO�Illz� �ec,N �ed,N �c,N �cp,N Nb(Ib) � (6�/cpg��rj� 2.0 608.00 5184.00 1.000 0.717 1.250 1.000 174998 0.70 25741 11.Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces(Sec.D.7� Tension Factored Load, N�a(Ib) Design Strength,oN�(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 426 6176 0.07 Pass Concrete breakout 936 12310 0.08 Pass Pullout 426 1985 0.21 Pass(Governs) Shear Factored Load,V�a(Ib) Design Strength,oV�(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 100 3211 0.03 Pass T Concrete breakout x+ 200 1898 0.11 Pass(Governs) Pryout 400 25741 0.02 Pass Interaction check N„a/�Nn Vua/�V„ Combined Ratio Permissible Status Sec. D.7.1 0.21 0.00 21.5% 1.0 Pass 1/2"f7�J-or L-Bolt, F1554 Gr.36 meets the selected design criteria. 12.Warninas -Minimum spacing and edge distance requirement of 6da per ACI 318 Sections D.8.1 and D.8.2 for torqued cast-in-place anchor is waived per designer option. -Designer must exercise own judgement to determine if this design is suitable. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. _ 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 wwwstrongtie.com Martin/Martin, Inc. 100 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Design Detail i � � � - � !\ � � � � � � � ti - .. Vertical Bars: #4 @ 48 in r �4 ft� Check Summary Interaction Diagram Ratio Check Provided Reauired Combination ----Strength Checks--- �/0.097 Min Strain 0.0321 0.0031 1.ZD+0.8W+1.65 �/0.030 Deflection 1.01 in 0.03 in 1.2D+0.8W+1.65 60000 Interaction Dia ram �/0.809 Axial+Flexure 13034 in�lb/ft 10550 in�lb/ft 0.9D+1.6W �/0.111 Axial Compression 300 psi 33.44 psi 1.ZD+1.65 �/0.052 Shear 21.51 k 1.13 k 0.9D+1.6W 44000� Criteria Load Combinations 2s000 ASCE 7-05(Strenqth) Building Code MSJC-OS(Strength) 1.4D ) Axial F rce(Ib/ft) Load Combination ASCE 7-OS(Strength) 1.2D+0.55 12000 � Seismic R Value 1.00 1.2D+1.65 =� f'm 1500 psi 1.2D+O.SW+1.65 ,='� fy 60000 psi 1.2D - - � Specify Wall Weight Manually No 1.2D+O.SW -4000 Block Weight Normal weight 1.2D+1.6W+O.SS � Design As Clay Masonry No 1.2D+1.6W Include Wall Self-Weight Yes 1.ZD+0.25 -2000n � Neglect Lateral Load on Parapet No 0.9D+1.6W U 16000 32000 48000 64000 80000 Include Wall Wt In Virtual Eccentricity No 0.9D Moment(in�lb/ft) Always use I-cracked No Loads Summary Load Set Source Auial Unifo...Auial Pt Lo...Pt Ld Eff W...Eccentricitv Lateral Pre...Top Lateral...Parapet Pr... Lateral Uni...Lat Unif Ld...Moment Wind 0 Ib/ft 0 k 1 ft 0 in 29.4 psf 29.4 psf 29.4 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft Dead 620 Ib/ft 0 k 1 ft 0 in 0 psf 0 psf 0 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft Snow 1200 Ib/ft 0 k 1 ft 0 in 0 psf 0 psf 0 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.5...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 1 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 101 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W + 1.6S Internal Force Analysis 2664 Ib/ft Factored Loads 1 Shear 1z Moment Wall Weight 792 Ib/ft 1a.5� 10.5 Effective Eccentricity 0 in I / � Applied Eccentricity -0 in � --141.121b/ft � � 9 � - 7.5I �� 7.5 23.52 psf � �� 6 4.SI 4.5 � -141.121b/ft 3 3 � 1 S 1.5 �� / 34561b/ft - oo -loo o lo0 200 �6�oc�45oc �3ooc�15oc o V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 0 ft 3456 Ib/ft -141.12 Ib/ft 0 in lb/ft Desian Moment Cai Midspan f MS7C-08 3.3.5.41 6 ft 3060 Ib/ft O lb/ft -5080.32 in Ib/ft M❑� = 5080 in lb/ft (first order M„from analysis; 6 ft 3060 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -5080.32 in�lb/ft M _S f_ `350.4 in)(79.67ps�_ 6978 imlb/ft 12 ft 0 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft 0 in'Ib/ft `� Iw r \ i4 ft) ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = 5080in�lb/ft < M�� = 6978irr1b/ft SM„h°2__ 5(5156in1b/ft)(12ft)^2 _ -�- -_.. .. .---�--- �- 0.02 i n _ �� 48 Em�� 48(1350000 ps��3�4 ft;�4�� iconverged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mui+Pu fiu = i5080in�lb/ft)+(30601b/ft)(0.02in) = 5156 in lb/ft (3 iterations required to converge to this�Q and S� Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtainc (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (172 ft�k1/(0.56 k)(7.63 in) = 47915 z 1.0 am;,,=1.5(fy/Eg) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps)] = 0.0031 s = 0.0321 ? emin = 0.0031 � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=1280 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0321 0.00250 `- ` 1200�si ,�5442_ftrf - �' � o I o � c 1280 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 537365 in•Ib/ft� � -0.06672 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 2 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 102 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W + 1.6S (continued� _ Axial/Flexur-e Check.s s000 I�tera�e�or,o�ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=3400 Ib/ft(Pu=3060 Ib/ft) �-- Extreme tension bar strain=0.0138 3000 \ � 0.00250 � � 1200 psi l000 � a� �� 4D5�b7it 0 0 -1000 - C -3000 3400 Ib/ft (► � ► 3000 Ib/ft 22923 in lb/� ^ -5000 Z0000 40000 60000 80000 Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.03018 fs=60000 psi M❑ = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 21928 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 5156 imlb/ft < �pM❑ = 20631 in lb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 19281 in ib/ft ✓ � r � � �v C p M � nj ). I 48 in I Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0.56 kj(7.63 in) = 0.0 h _ (12 ftj = 18.8852 < 30 / t (7.63 in) Vm= 4.0-1751�"- A❑�fm+025 P❑ �V❑d� P� _ (12.24 I� = 33.44 psi < 0.20fm = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � _ �4.0-1J5� �Oft�k) ��(1.15ft) 1500psi+025(13.521� Aq �2.54ft) (0.56 k)(7.63 in) = 29.19 k Deflection fM5]C-OS 3.3.5.51 (0 in) � Mser� = 2��ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) Vs=0.5�s°�fy d„ = 0.5 ��q4 in) �60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k M��=Sn fr = (350.4 in')(79.67 psi) = 2.33 ft k un=um�us = �29.19 k)+(0 k) = 29.19 k Mser1 = 2.12 ft k < Mcr = 2.33 ft k 6A„ fm = 6(1.15ft)^1500psi= 38.6k SMse,h^2= 5(2.14ft�1�(12ft)^2 upper limit on V„from eqn(3-19;:did not control fis 48 Em ly 48(1350000 psi;;1336 in^4j - �03 in V„ = 0.56 k < �V„ _ (0.80)i29.19 k) = 23.35 k � (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mser=Mser1+Pser as _ (2.12 ft�l�+rg.6 k)(0.03 in) = 2.14 ft k ;4 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss? SS = 0.03 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(12 ft) = 1.0080 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.5...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 3 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 103 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W Internal Force Analysis 558 Ib/ft Factored Loads 1 Shear 1z Moment Wall Weight 594 Ib/ft 1a.5� / 10.5 Effective Eccentricity 0 in I � Applied Eccentricity -0 in � --282.241b/ft � � 9 � 7.5I � 7.5 47.04 psf � � 6 i 4.SI / 4.5 � --282.241b/ft 3 � 3 � 1S� 1.5 � 11521b/ft - oo -150 0 150 300 1�00 �9ooc �600c�3ooc o V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 0 ft 1152 Ib/ft -28224 Ib/ft 0 in lb/ft Desian Moment Cai Midspan f MS7C-o8 3.3.5.41 6 ft 855 Ib/ft 0 Ibfft -10160.64 in Ib/ft M❑� = 10161 in lb/ft (first order M�from analysisi 6 ft 855 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -10160.64 in�lb/ft M _S f_ `350.4 in)(79.67ps�_ 6978 imlb/ft 12 ft 0 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft 0 in'Ib/ft `� Iw r i4 ft) ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = 10161 in�lb/ft > fvk� = 6978inib/ft , 5MG�h^2+5(M�-M�)h^2 b�=_ _ 48 Em�Iw� 48 Em��Iw� Si6978in�lb/ft)(12ft)^2 5(t10550in�lb/ft)-(6978in�lb/ft)](12ft)^2 4S(1350000 ps��3�4 ft��4��+ 4S(1350000 ps� i54(4 ft)�4� = 0.46 in (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mui+Pu fiu _ (10161 in Ib/ft)+(8551b/ft)(0.46in) = 10550 in lb/ft i4 iterations required to converge to this AQ and a„) Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtainc (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (3.52 ft�k1/(1.13 k)(7.63 in) = 4.9022 z 1.0 am;,,=1.5(fy/Eg) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps)] = 0.0031 s = 0.0321 ? emin = 0.0031 � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=1280 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0321 0.00250 `- ` 1200�si ,�5442_ftrf - �' � o I o � c 1280 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 537365 in•Ib/ft� � -0.06672 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 4 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 104 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W (continued) Axial/Flexur-e Check.s s000 I�tera�e�or,o�ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=950 Ib/ft(Pu=855 Ib/ft) �-- Extreme tension bar strain=0.0240 3000 �, 0.00250 ` � 1200 psi �f- �r r�l-3947 ib7ft 1000 � o 0 -1000 /- C -3000 9501bfft � � ► 30001b/ft 14482 in lb/ft ^ -5000 Z0000 40000 60000 80000 Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.05052 fs=60000 psi M❑ = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 14096 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 10550im1b/ft < �M❑ = 13034in�lb/ft � Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 11986 in ib/ft ✓ � r Q, � �N C O M � nj ). I 48 in I Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(1.13 kj(7.63 in) = 0.0 h _ (12 ftj = 18.8852 < 30 t (7.63 in) Vm=�4.0-175�d��An�fm+025 P� P _ (3.42 1� _ � � � (0 ft�k) �� Ag (2.54 ft) - 9'34 psi < 0.20 fm = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � 4.0-1J5 �� 13k)(7.63in) ��15ft) 1500psi+025(4.61k, = 26.89 k Deflection fM5]C-OS 3.3.5.51 (0 in) � Mser� = 2��ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) Vs=0.5�s°�fy d„ = 0.5 ��q4 in) �60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k M��=Sn fr = (350.4 in')(79.67 psi) = 2.33 ft k un=um+us = �26.89 k)+(0 k) = 26.89 k Mser1 = 2.12 ft k < Mcr = 2.33 ft k 6A„ fm = 6(1.15ft)^1500psi= 38.6k SMse,h^2= 5(2.13ft�1�(12ft)^2 upper limit on V„from eqn(3-19;:did not control fis 48 Em ly 48(1350000 psi;;1336 in^4j - �03 in V„ = 1.13 k < �V„ _ (0.80)i26.89 k) = 21.51 k � (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mser=Mser1+Pser as _ (2.12 ft�l�+r3.8 k)(0.03 in) = 2.13 ft k (3 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss? SS = 0.03 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(12 ft) = 1.0080 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.5...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 5 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 105 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 1.6S Internal Force Analysis 2664 Ib/ft Factored Loads 1 Shear 1z Moment Wall Weight 792 Ib/ft 1a. 10.5 Effective Eccentricity 0 in --0 Ib/ft � 9 Applied Eccentricity -0 in �.SI �.5 I I 6 4.SI 4.5 -Olb/ft 3� 3 i.s� i.s 34561b/ft �2 oc �looc o loo0 2000 �2�oc�looc o loo0 2000 V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 6 ft 3060 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft 0 in�lb/ft Desian Moment Cai Midspan f MS7C-08 3.3.5.41 12 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in�lb/ft M❑� = 0 in lb/ft (first order M�from analysis) Mcr=S�fr= �350.4 i4'ft(79.67ps�_ 6978 imlb/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32'� M❑� = Oimlb/ft < M�� = 6978im1b/ft SMuh^2__ S;Oinlb/ft)(12ft)^2 - Oin S -._ _._.. ._.___. u-48 Em�� 48(1350000 ps��1334 fti�4�� - iconverged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mu1+Pu fiu = i0imlb/ft)+(30601b/fti(Oin) = Oinlb/ft (3 iterations required to converge to this�Q and S� Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtains (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (Oft�k)/(Ok)i7.63in) = INF < 1.0 There is no limit under these conditions � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=1280 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0321 0.00250 `- ` 1200�si ,�5442_ftrf — �' � o I o � c 1280 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 537365 in•Ib/ft� � -0.06672 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 6 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 106 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 1.6S (continued) Axial/Flexur-e Check.s s000 I�tera�e�or,o�ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=3400 Ib/ft(Pu=3060 Ib/ft) �-- Extreme tension bar strain=0.0138 3000 \ � 0.00250 � � 1200 psi l000 � a� �� 4D5�b7it 0 0 -1000 - C -3000 3400 Ib/ft (► � ► 3000 Ib/ft 22923 in lb/� ^ -5000 Z0000 40000 60000 80000 Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.03018 fs=60000 psi M❑ = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 21928 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 0 in�lb/ft < �M❑ = 20631 in�lb/ft � Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 19281 in ib/ft ✓ � r � � �v C p M � nj ). I 48 in I Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0 kj(7.63 in) = INF h _ (12 ftj = 18.8852 < 30 t (7.63 in) Vm=[4.0-1.75(1.0)J A��fm+025 P P� _ (12.24 I� _ [4.0-1.75(1.0)](1.15 ft) 1500 psi+025(13.82 k) Ag (2.54 ft) - 33.44 psi < 0.20 Pm = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � = 17.93 k AV Deflection fM5]C-083.3.5.51 Vs=0.5� �fy d„ = 0.5� �0 in)��60000 psp(7.63 in) = 0 k s i _;144 in) Mser� = 0 ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) un=um+Vs = �17.93 Icj+(0 k) = 17.93 k Mcr=Sn fr = �350.4 in')(79.67 psi) = 2.33 ft�k 6 A� fm = 6(1.15 ft�) 1500 psi= 38.6 k Mser1 = 0 fCk 5 M�� = 2.33 ft k SMse,h^2= 5(Oft�k)(12ft;^2 4 A„ fm = 4(1.15 ft�; 1500 psi= 2574 k �s 48 Em Ig 48(1350000 psii;1336 in^4) - a in Interpolated limit on y,from eqns(3-19) and ;3-20) did not conhol (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ V� = 0 k < �Vn = (O.SOi i17.93 k) = 14.35 k � Mser=�/1ser1+Pser as _ (Oft�k?+(g.6k)(Oin; = Oftk (3 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss) SS = 0 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(12 ft) = 1.0080 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.5...\Bearing Wall Out of Plane.qms Page 7 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:24 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 107 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Design Detail � , 000 W a � . , ` Vertical Bars: #4 @ 8 in I z.�s ft� Check Summary Interaction Diagram Ratio Check Provided Reauired Combination ----Strength Checks--- �/0.972 Min Strain 0.0032 0.0031 1.ZD+0.8W �/0.135 Deflection 0.67 in 0.09 in 1.2D+0.8W 150000 Interaction Dia ram �/0.567 Axial+Flexure 67518 in�lb/ft 38255 in�lb/ft 0.9D+1.6W �/0.522 Axial Compression 300 psi 156.6 psi 1.4D �/0.112 Shear 36.25 k 4.05 k 0.9D+1.6W 110000 Criteria Load Combinations �� 0000 ASCE 7-05(Strenpth) Building Code MSJC-OS(Strength) 1.4D Axial F rce(Ib/ft) Load Combination ASCE 7-OS(Strength) 1.2D+0.8W 30000 Seismic R Value 1.00 1.2D+1.6W � � f'm 1500 psi 1.2D fy 60000 psi 0.9D+1.6W �� Specify Wall Weight Manually Yes 0.9D -10000 --� Average Unit Weight 84 Ib/ft3 � Design As Clay Masonry No Include Wall Self-Weight No -5000n � Neglect Lateral Load on Parapet No U 30000 60000 90000 120000 150000 Include Wall Wt In Virtual Eccentricity No Moment(in�lb/ft) Always use I-cracked No Loads Summary Load Set Source Auial Unifo...Auial Pt Lo...Pt Ld Eff W...Eccentricitv Lateral Pre...Top Lateral...Parapet Pr... Lateral Uni...Lat Unif Ld...Moment Dead 0 Ib/ft 9.3 k 2.67 h 0 in 0 psf 0 psf 0 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft Dead 0 Ib/ft 18 k 2.67 h 0 in 0 psf 0 psf 0 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft Wind 0 Ib/ft 0 k 1 ft 0 in 230 psf 230 psf 230 psf 0 Ib/h 0 ft 0 in•Ib/ft QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 1 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 108 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W Internal Force��j�j� Factored Loads Shear Moment s Wall Weight O lb/ft � � / Effective Eccentricity 0 in Applied Eccentricity -0 in -7361b/ft 6 � � � j 5 � 184 psf � � 3� � 3 -7361b/ft � Z 1 � 1 12285 Ib/ft - 00 -400 0 400 800 1�00 1350 �900(�450( 0 V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 0 ft 12285 Ib/ft -736 Ib/ft 0 in lb/ft Desian Moment cai Midspan f MS7C-o8 3.3.5.41 4 ft 12285 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -17664 in Ib/ft M❑� = 17664 inib/ft (first order M�from analysisi 4 ft 12285 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -17664 in lb/ft M _S f_ ;319_S in';;163 psi)= 18954 in lb/ft cr- I,�,� �(275 ft) 8 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in ib/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = 17664 in lb/ft < M��= 18954 in lb/ft „_ � /ft7(8ft)^2 _ i -- - - SM h^2 5i18019inib s0 � � �(1219in^4)� 0.03in 48 Em 48(1350000 ps� �2 75� - w iconverged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mu1�Pu su = i17664inIb/ft)+(122851b/ft)(0.03in) = 18019 in lb/ft (3 iterations required to converge to this�Q and S� Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtainc (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (4.13 ft�k1/(2.02 k)(7.63 in) = 3.2105 z 1.0 am;,,=1.5(fy/Eg) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps)] = 0.0031 s = 0.0032 ? emin = 0.0031 � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=10238 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0032 0.00250 � � 1200 si �I M1 �- 1542601b/ft � — ., c,-� 10238 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 484834 in•Ib/ft� � -0.00889 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 2 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 109 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W (continued) Axial/Flexur-e Check.s is000 -I"tera�e�or,o��ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=13650 Ib/ft(Pu=12285 Ib/ft) Extreme tension bar strain=0.0015 ii000 0.00250 1200 psi � 7000 � - � � 271241b/ft � � M � N + 3000 � - �- - � /�- C -1000 -%� 136501b/ft I\ ► / � ► 134681b/ft 77866 in lb/� ^ -5000 37500 75000 11250( L5000( / Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.00560 fs=44892 psi M❑ = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 70079 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 18019 imlb/ft < �M❑ = 70079 in lb/ft � � Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 �� M� = 0.01 imlb/ft < �pM❑ = 70079in�lb/ft � C m � n i= S i n=j Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(2.02 kj(7.63 in) = 0.0 h (8 ftj = 12.5902 < 30 / t (7.63 in) Vm= 4.0-1751�"- A❑�fm+025 P❑ �V❑d� P� _ (3378� = 134.3 psi < 0.20fm = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � _ �4.0-1 J5� �0 ft�k) ��(175 ft) 1500 psi+025(33.78 Iti Aq �1.75 ft) (2.02 k)(7.63 in) = 47.43 k Deflection fM5]C-OS 3.3.5.51 (0 in)� � Mser� = 5.06 ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) Vs=0.5�s°�fy d„ = 0.5 rg6 in)��60000 psi)(7.63 in, = 0 k M�,=S„f, _ (319.8 in')(163 psi) = 4.34 ft�k V„=Vm+VS = (47.43 k)+(0 k) = 47.43 k Mser1 = 5.06 ft k > N�� = 4.34 ft k 6An fm = 6(1.75ft)^1500psi= 58.47k SM��h^2+5(Mser-N1cr)h"2 �s 48 E I 48 E I upper limit on V„from eqn(3-19):did not control m g m cr 5(4.34ft1�(8fU^2 *5_;527ftki-(4.34ftk)](Sft)^2 V„ = 2.02 k < �V„ _ (0.80)i47.43 I� = 37.94 k � 48(1350000 ps�(1219 in^4; 48;1350000 ps�(131.3 in^4) = 0.09 in (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mser=Mseri+Pser Ss _ (5.06ft�kj+(Zg,151�(0.09in) = 5.27 ft k i7 iterations required to converge to this I�Qe,and ss) SS = 0.09 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(8 ft) = 0.6720 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 3 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 110 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W Internal Forca�,��s Factored Loads Shear $ Moment Wall Weight O lb/ft � � Effective Eccentricity 0 in � Applied Eccentricity -0 in -14721b/ft � / 6 � 51 �' S �� 368 psf I I � 3� 3 �. -14721b/ft � � 1 1 92141b/ft �2 oc �looc o loo0 2000 4800 3000 2000 l000 0 V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 0 ft 9214 Ib/ft -1472 Ib/ft 0 in lb/ft Desian Moment cai Midspan f MS7C-o8 3.3.5.41 4 ft 9214 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -35328 in Ib/ft M❑� = 35328 inib/ft (first order M�from analysisi 4 ft 9214 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -35328 in lb/ft M _S f_ (319_S in';;163 psi)= 18954 in lb/ft —r_ cr- I,�, �(275 ft) 8 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in ib/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = 35328 in lb/ft > Nk� = 18954 in lb/ft , 5.M��h^2+5(M�-M�r)h^2 b�__.._. . __ _ - 48 Em�� 48 Em��Iw� Si18954in�lb/ft)(Sft)^2 5((38255in�lb/ft)-i18954in�lb/ft)](Sft)^2 - + �1219 in^4) ri131.3 in^4) 4S(1350000 ps�� 2 75� � 48(1350000 ps� �275 ft) � = 0.32 in (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mui+Pu fiu _ (35328 in Ib/ft)+(9214 Ib/ft?(0.32 in) = 38256 in lb/ft i5 iterations required to converge to this AQ and a„) Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtainc (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (8.77 ft�k1/(4.05 k)(7.63 in) = 3.4083 z 1.0 am;,,=1.5(fy/Eg) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps)] = 0.0031 s = 0.0032 ? emin = 0.0031 � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=10238 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0032 0.00250 � � 1200 si �I M1 �- 1542601b/ft � — ., c,-� 10238 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 484834 in•Ib/ft� � -0.00889 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 4 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 111 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W (continued) Axial/Flexur-e Check.s is000 -I"tera�e�or,o��ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=10238 Ib/ft(Pu=9214 Ib/ft) Extreme tension bar strain=0.0018 ii000 0.00250 1200 psi ,, 7- 7000 � M � 256871b/ft \ N N 3000 - -� -� � / /�- C -1000 _-�� 10238 Ib/ft I\ ► � ► 15439 Ib/ft 75020 in lb/� ^ -5000 37500 75000 11250( L5000( Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.00605 fs=51464 psi M❑ = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 67518 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 38255 imlb/ft < �M❑ = 67518 in lb/ft � � �T Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 �1 � M� = 0.01 imlb/ft < �GM❑ = 67518in�lb/ft � C m � n i= S i n=j Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(4.05 kj(7.63 in) = 0.0 h (8 ftj = 12.5902 < 30 / t (7.63 in) Vm= 4.0-1751�"- A❑�fm+025 P❑ �V❑d� P� _ (25.34 I� = 1007 psi < 0.20fm = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � _ �4.0-1 J5� �0 ft�k) ��75 ft) 1500 psi+025(25.34 k) Aq �1.75 ft) (4.05 k)(7.63 in) = 45.32 k Deflection fM5]C-OS 3.3.5.51 (0 in)� Mser� = 5.06 ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) Vs=0.5�s°�fy d„ = 0.5 �g6 in)��60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k M�,=S„f, _ (319.8 in')(163 psi) = 4.34 ft�k V„=Vm+VS = (45.32 k)+(0 k) = 45.32 k Mser1 = 5.06 ft k > N�� = 4.34 ft k 6An fm = 6(1.75ft)^1500psi= 58.47k SM��h^2+5(Mser-N1cr)h"2 �s 48 E I 48 E I upper limit on V„from eqn(3-19):did not control m g m cr 5(4.34ft1�(8fU^2 *5_;527ftki-(4.34ftk)](Sft)^2 V„ = 4.05 k < �V„ _ (0.80)i45.32 I� = 3625 k � 48(1350000 ps�(1219 in^4; 48;1350000 ps�(131.3 in^4) = 0.09 in (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mser=Mseri+Pser Ss _ (5.06ft�kj+(Zg,151�(0.09in) = 5.27 ft k i7 iterations required to converge to this I�Qe,and ss) SS = 0.09 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(8 ft) = 0.6720 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 5 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 112 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D Internal Force��j�}�j� Factored Loads Shear $ Moment Wall Weight O lb/ft � Effective Eccentricity 0 in 0 It�f#F � 6 Applied Eccentricity -0 in 5� 5 � i 31 3 -Olb/ft � Z 1I 1 14333 Ib/ft 2 oc looc o loo0 2000 2�oc looc o loo0 2000 V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 4 ft 14333 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft 0 in�lb/ft Desian Moment Cai Midspan f MS7C-08 3.3.5.41 8 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in�lb/ft M❑� = 0 in lb/ft (first order M�from analysis) Mcr=5�fr= �319�275�ft163�si)= 18954 in�lb/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = Oimlb/ft < M�� = 18954im1b/ft SM„h^2__ 5�Oinlb/ft)(Sft)^2 _ -��- -�— -_ _ _--- 0 in su 48 Em r�1 48(1350000 ps�r�1219 in^4)1 l J L (2 75 f� J iconverged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mu1+Pu fiu = i0imlb/ft)+(143331b/ft)(Oin) = Oinlb/ft (3 iterations required to converge to this�Q and S� Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtains (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (Oft�k)/(Ok)i7.63in) = INF < 1.0 There is no limit under these conditions � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=10238 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0032 0.00250 � � 1200 si �I M1 �- 1542601b/ft � — ., c,-� 10238 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 484834 in•Ib/ft� � -0.00889 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 6 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 113 of 137 Martin Martin Bearing Wall 1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D (continued_ _ _ Axial/Flexur-e Check.s is000 —I"tera�e�or,o��ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=15925 Ib/ft(Pu=14333 Ib/ft) Extreme tension bar strain=0.0014 ii000 0.00250 1200 psi � 1 � 7000 - � 28131Ib/ft � \ v o, i � N 1 3000 � .. I. _ — � i� C -100o i"� 159251bfft � � ► 122081b/ft 79772 in lb/ft ^ -5000 37500 75000 11250( L5000( Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.00531 fs=40692 psi M❑ = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 71795 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 0in�lb/ft < �M❑ = 71795in�lb/ft � � Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 0,� M� = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 71795 in ib/ft ✓ C m � n i= S i n=j Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0 kj(7.63 in) = INF h (8 ftj = 12.5902 < 30 t (7.63 in) Vm=[4.0-1.75(1.0)JA��fm+025P P� _ (39.41� = 156.6 psi < 0.20 Pm = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � _ [4.0-1.75(1.0)](175 ft) 1500 psi+025(39.41 k) Ag (1.75 ft) = 31.78 k Deflection fM5]C-083.3.5.51 Vs=0.5�AO�fy d„ = 0.5��0 in)��60000 psp(7.63 in; = 0 k s i �96 in) Mser� = 0 ft�k (first order Mse,from analysis) V„=Vm+Vs = (3178 I�+(0 k) = 31.78 k M�,=S„f, _ (319.8 in')(163 psi) = 4.34 ft�k 6 A� fm = 6(175 ft�) 1500 psi= 58.47 k Mser1 = 0 fCk 5 M�� = 4.34 ft k SMse,h^2= 5(Oft�k)(8ft)^2 4 A„ fm = 4(175 ft�; 1500 psi= 35.98 k �s 48 Em Ig 48(1350000 psi;1219 in^4) - a in Interpolated limit on y,from eqns(3-19) and ;3-20) did not conhol (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ V� = 0 k < �Vn = (0.80)(31 J8 k) = 25.42 k � Mser=�/1ser1+Pser as _ (Oft�k?+(Zg,151�(Oin) = Oftk (3 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss) SS = 0 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(8 ft) = 0.6720 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb 2'-9 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 7 of 7 Tuesday 02/25/14 11:09 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 114 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Design Detail � , — J • w � � � � Vertical Bars: #4 @ 48 in r 1.33 ft Check Summary Interaction Diagram Ratio Check Provided Reauired Combination ----Strength Checks--- �/0.097 Min Strain 0.0320 0.0031 1.ZD+0.8W �/0.019 Deflection 0.67 in 0.01 in 1.2D+0.8W 60000 Interaction Dia ram �/0.755 Axial+Flexure 14763 in�lb/ft 11146 in�lb/ft 0.9D+1.6W �/0.077 Axial Compression 300 psi 22.95 psi 1.4D �/0.055 Shear 11.03 k 0.61 k 0.9D+1.6W 44000� Criteria Load Combinations 2s000 ASCE 7-05(Strenqth) Building Code MSJC-OS(Strength) 1.4D ) Axial F rce(Ib/ft) Load Combination ASCE 7-OS(Strength) 1.2D+0.8W 12000 � Seismic R Value 1.00 1.2D+1.6W ! f'm 1500 psi 1.2D ,�� fy 60000 psi 0.9D+1.6W --�- ---� - � Specify Wall Weight Manually Yes 0.9D -4000 Average Unit Weight 84 Ib/ft3 � Design As Clay Masonry No Include Wall Self-Weight No -2000n � Neglect Lateral Load on Parapet No U 16000 32000 48000 64000 80000 Include Wall Wt In Virtual Eccentricity No Moment(in�lb/ft) Always use I-cracked No Loads Summary Load Set Source Auial Unifo...Auial Pt Lo...Pt Ld Eff W...Eccentricitv Lateral Pre...Top Lateral...Parapet Pr... Lateral Uni...Lat Unif Ld...Moment Dead 0 Ib/ft 1 k 1 ft 0 in 0 psf 0 psf 0 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft Dead 0 Ib/ft 0.5 k 1 ft 0 in 0 psf 0 psf 0 psf 0 Ib/ft 1 ft 0 in•Ib/ft Wind 0 Ib/ft 0 k 1 ft 0 in 71 psf 71 psf 71 psf 0 Ib/ft 0 ft 0 in•Ib/h QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJ1 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 1 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 115 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W Internal Force��s Factored Loads Shear $ Moment Wall Weight O lb/ft � � Effective Eccentricity 0 in �-227.21b/ft �� 6 � Applied Eccentricity -0 in � � � 56.8 psf � � 5 � 3� 3 � -227.21b/ft � � 1 1 18001b/ft - oo -iso o iso 30o s�oc 4soc sooc isoc o V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 0 ft 1800 Ib/ft -2272 Ib/ft 0 in�lb/ft Desian Moment cai Midspan f MS7C-o8 3.3.5.41 4 ft 1800 Ib/ft O lb/ft -5452.8 in Ibfft M❑� = 5453 in lb/ft (first order M„from analysis; 4 ft 1800 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -5452.8 in lb/ft M _S f= ,134.4 in')(79.67 psi)_ go33 imlb/ft cr-�wr _. . �1.33� 8 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in ib/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32; M❑� = 5453in�lb/ft < M�� = 8033irr1b/ft SM„h°2__ 5(5471in1b/ft;(8ft;^2 _ _._ _ ..___ ._ 0.01in _ �� 48 Em�� 48(1350000 ps��511 33 ft)4�� iconverged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mui+Pu fiu = i5453in�lb/ft)+(18001b/ftit0.01 in) = 5471 in lb/ft (3 iterations required to converge to this�Q and S� Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtains (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (0.61 ft�k1/(0.3 ki i7.63 in) = 3.1581 >_ 1.0 em;�=1.5(fy/Eg) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps)] = 0.0031 s = 0.0320 ? emin = 0.0031 � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=1500 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0320 0.00250 `- ` 1200�s��ttr — �' � o I o � c 1500 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 538289 in•Ib/ft� � -0.06660 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJl at Maint Bldg.qms Page 2 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 116 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W (continued) Axial/Flexur-e Check.s s000 I�tera�e�or,o�ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=2000 Ib/ft(Pu=1800 Ib/ft) �-- Extreme tension bar strain=0.0184 3000 \ � 0.00250 � � 1200 si l000 / �� -�� 50D5��Ib-7ff -l000 � � � � ' - C -3000 2000 1b/ft �► � ► 3000 1b/ft 18168 in lb/� ^ -5000 Z0000 40000 60000 80000 Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.03932 fs=60000 psi M❑ = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 16351 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 5471 imlb/ft < �pM❑ = 16351 in lb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 0 in lb/ft < �M❑ = 16351 in ib/ft ✓ r � r � M C O M � nj ). I 48 in I Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0.3 k)(7.63 in) = OA h (8 ftj = 12.5902 < 30 / t (7.63 in) Vm= 4.0-1751�- A❑�+0.25P� �V❑d� P� - �2.4 k� = 19.67 psi < 0.20 Ym = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � _ �4.0-1J5� (Oft�k) ��(0.6ft) 1500psi+025(2.4k) Aq �O.SSft) (0.3 k)(7.63 in) = 13.94 k Deflection fM5]C-OS 3.3.5.51 (0 in)� Mser� = 076 ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) Vs=0.5�s°�fy d„ = 0.5 rg6 in)��60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k Mcr=Sn fr = �134.4 in')(79.67 psi) = 0.89 ft k V„=Vm+Vs = (13.94k)+(Ok) = 13.94k Mser1 = 076 ft k < M�� = 0.89 ft k 6A„ fm = 6(0.6ft�) 1500psi= 20.01 k SMse,h^2= 5(0J6ft�k)(8ft)^2 upper limit on V„from eqn(3-19):did not control �s 48 Em ly 48(1350000 psi;;512.6 in^4) - 0.01 in V„ = 0.3 k .<_ �V„ _ (0.80?(13.94 k) = 11.15 k � (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mser=Mser1+Pser as _ (0.76 ft�l�+r2 k)(0.01 in? = 0.76 ft k (3 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss) SS = 0.01 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(8 ft) = 0.6720 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJ1 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 3 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 117 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W Internal Force��s Factored Loads Shear $ Moment Wall Weight O lb/ft / � � Effective Eccentricity 0 in �-454.4 Ib/ft � � 6 � Applied Eccentricity -0 in sl 5 � I I/ � 113.6 psf �! X� 3� 3 � -454.41b/ft � � 1 1 13501b/ft - oo -zso o zso soo i�oo 9ooc sooc sooc o V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 0 ft 1350 Ib/ft -454.4 Ib/ft 0 in�lb/ft Desian Moment cai Midspan f MS7C-o8 3.3.5.41 4 ft 1350 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -10905.6 in Ib/ft M❑� = 10906 in lb/ft (first order M�from analysisi 4 ft 1350 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft -10905.6 in lb/ft M _S f= ,134.4 in')(79.67 psi)_ go33 imlb/ft cr-�wr _... �1.33� 8 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in ib/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = 10906 in lb/ft > Nk� = 8033 inib/ft , 5M��h^2+5(M�-M�)h^2 b�=_._. . _ . . 48 Em�� 48 Em��Iw� _ 5(S033in�lb/ft);8ft)^2 +51(11146in�lb/ft)-;8033in�lb/ft)](Sft)^2 4S(1350000 ps��512.6 in^4)� 4S(1350000 ps� i18.04 in^4)� (1.33 ft? � (1.33 ft) = 0.18 in (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mui+Pu fiu _ (10906inIb/ft)+(13501b/ft?(0.18in) = 11147 in lb/ft i4 iterations required to converge to this I�Q and a„) Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtainc (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (1.24ft�k1/(0.61k)(7.63in) = 3.2171 z 1.0 am;,,=1.5(fy/Eg) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps)] = 0.0031 s = 0.0320 ? emin = 0.0031 � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=1500 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0320 0.00250 `- ` 1200�s��ttr — �' � o I o � c 1500 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 538289 in•Ib/ft� � -0.06660 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJl at Maint Bldg.qms Page 4 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 118 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W (continued) Axial/Flexur-e Check.s s000 I�tera�e�or,o�ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=1500 Ib/ft(Pu=1350 Ib/ft) �-- Extreme tension bar strain=0.0208 3000 \ 0.00250 ` � 1200 psi -- - ��I -4496I67f[ 1000 � � �"_ � o 0 -1000 - C -3000 1500 Ib/ft (► � ► 3000 Ib/ft 16403 in�lb/� � -5000 Z0000 40000 60000 80000 Moment(in•Ib/ft) Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.04406 fs=60000 psi M❑ = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 14763 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = 11146im1b/ft < �M❑ = 14763in�lb/ft � Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 14763 in ib/ft ✓ � � m � � M C O M � nj ). I 48 in I Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0.61 kj(7.63 in) = 0.0 h (8 ftj = 12.5902 < 30 / t (7.63 in) Vm= 4.0-1751�"- A❑�fm+025 P❑ �V❑d� P� _ (1.8 k) = 14.75 psi < 0.20 Ym = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � _ �4.0-1J5� �Oft�k) ��(0.6ft) 1500psi+025(1.8k) Aq �O.SSft) (0.61 k)(7.63 in) = 13.79 k Deflection fM5]C-OS 3.3.5.51 (0 in)� Mser� = 076 ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) Vs=0.5�s°�fy d„ = 0.5 �g6 in)��60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k Mcr=Sn fr = �134.4 in')(79.67 psi) = 0.89 ft k V„=Vm+Vs = (13J9 k)+(O k) = 13.79 k Mser1 = 076 ft k < M�� = 0.89 ft k 6A„ fm = 6(0.6ft�) 1500psi= 20.01 k SMse,h^2= 5(0J6ft�k)(8ft)^2 upper limit on V„from eqn(3-19):did not control �s 48 Em ly 48(1350000 psi;;512.6 in^4) - 0.01 in V„ = 0.61 k < �V„ _ (0.80)(1379 k) = 11.03 k � (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mser=Mser1+Pser as _ (0.76 ft�l�+r2 k)(0.01 in? = 0.76 ft k (3 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss) SS = 0.01 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(8 ft) = 0.6720 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJ1 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 5 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 119 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D Internal Force��l��s Factored Loads Shear $ Moment Wall Weight O lb/ft � Effective Eccentricity 0 in 0 It�f#F � 6 Applied Eccentricity -0 in 5� 5 � i 31 3 -Olb/ft � Z 1I 1 21001b/ft �2 oc �looc o loo0 2000 �2�oc�looc o loo0 2000 V(Ib/ft) M(in•Ib/ft) Design Forces Heipht Auial Force Shear Force Moment 4 ft 2100 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft 0 in�lb/ft Desian Moment Cai Midspan f MS7C-08 3.3.5.41 8 ft 0 Ib/ft O lb/ft 0 in�lb/ft M❑� = 0 in lb/ft (first order M�from analysis) Mcr=SWf�= i1344133\f��67psi)_ g033im1b/ft ;average Mcr per unit length of wall,modified eqn 3 32) M❑� = Oimlb/ft < M��= 8033im1b/ft SM„h^2__ 5(Oinlb/ft�;8ft;^2 _ -�— - � -�— -- Oin _ �� 48 Em�� 48(1350000 ps��511.33 ft 4�� ) iconverged to this value after multiple iteration$ Mu=Mu1+Pu fiu = i0imlb/ft)+(21001b/fti(Oin) = Oinlb/ft (3 iterations required to converge to this�Q and S� Reinforcement Limits � Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strainl fM5]C-08 3.3.3.51 The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. It is used to obtains (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. M„/V„d„ _ (Oft�k)/(Ok)i7.63in) = INF < 1.0 There is no limit under these conditions � Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check for P=1500 Ib/ft Extreme tension bar strain=0.0320 0.00250 `- ` 1200�s��ttr — �' � o I o � c 1500 1b/ft-(\► � ► 144000 1b/ft 538289 in•Ib/ft� � -0.06660 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJl at Maint Bldg.qms Page 6 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 120 of 137 Martin Martin Jamb MJ1 Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D �continued _ Axial/Flexur-e Check.s s000 I�tera�e�or,o�ram _ _ Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=2333 Ib/ft(Pu=2100 Ib/ft) �-- Extreme tension bar strain=0.0171 3000 \ � 0.00250 C C 1200 si C�f�J pry.,-�y l000 � r'L � JJJU...IU/Il / O O -1�� - C -3000 23331b/ft � � ► 30001b/ft 19311 in lb/ft ^ -5000 Z0000 40000 60000 80000 Moment(in•Ib/ft) ' Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal base) fMSJC-OS 3.3.5.47 -0.03671 fs=60000 psi M❑ = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 17380 indb/ft ✓ Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal max M) fMSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 17380 in lb/ft � Combined Axial_Flexure(Cal top) f MSJC-08 3.3.5.41 M� = O in lb/ft < �M❑ = 17380 in ib/ft ✓ r � rn � M C O M � nj ). I 48 in I Other Checks Shear fMSJC-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.3.5.4.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Axial St�ess fMS7C-08 3.3.5.41 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0 kj(7.63 in) = INF h (8 ftj = 12.5902 < 30 t (7.63 in) Vm=[4.0-1.75(1.0)J A��fm+025 P p� _ (2.S k) _ [4.0-1.75(1.0)](0.6 ft')^1500 psi+025(2.8 kj Ag (0.85 ft) - 22'95 psi < 0.20 Ym = 0.20(1500 psi) = 300 psi � = 8.21 k Deflection fM5]C-083.3.5.51 Vs=0.5�AO�fy d„ = 0.5��0 in)��60000 psp(7.63 in; = 0 k s i 96 in) Mser� = 0 ft�k (first order Mge,from analysis) un=um+Vs = �521 k1+�O k) = 821 k Mcr=5n fr = �134.4 in')(79.67 psi) = 0.89 ft�k 6 A� fm = 6(0.6 ft�) 1500 psi= 20.01 k Mser1 = 0 fCk s M�, = 0.89 ft k SMse,h^2= 5(Oft�k)(Sft)^2 4 A„ fm = 4(0.6 ft�i 1500 psi= 13.34 k �s 48 Em Ig 48(1350000 psii;512.6 in^4) - 0 in Interpolated limit on y,from eqns(3-19) and �3-20) did not conhol (converged to this value after multiple iteration$ V� = 0 k < �Vn = (0.80)(8.21 kj = 6.56 k �I Mser=�/1ser1+Pser as _ (Oft�k)+(Zk)(Oin) = Oftk (3 iterations required to converge to this f�Qe,and ss) SS = 0 in < 0.007 h = 0.007(8 ft) = 0.6720 � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Jamb MJ1 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 7 of 7 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:31 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 121 of 137 Martin Martin Maintenance 8'-0" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Design Detail T • • � N Flexural Bars: 2 - #5 N I I � �- io ft - 1 • � 7.63 in� Check Surramary Criteria Ratio Check Provided Reauired Combination -----Details---- Building Code MSJC-08(Stren... ,/0.263 Bar Clear Spacing 2.38 in 0.63 in N/A Load Combina[ion ASCE 7-OS(Stre... �/OJSO Bar Cover 2 in 1.5 in N/A Seismic R Value 1.00 �/0.333 Minimum Depth 24 in 8 in N/A f'm 1500 psi -----Strength----- fy 60000 psi �/0.000 Shear(out-of-plane) 11.53 k 0 k 1.4D Average Unit Weight 84 Ib/ft3 �/0.611 Flexure 54.33 ft�k 33.22 ft�k 1.2D+1.65 Design As Clay Masonry No ,/0.000 Flexure(out-of-pla... 13.45 ft�k 0 ft�k 1.4D Exposed To Earth Or Weather No �/0.000 Deflection 9999999 in 0.1 in 1.2D+1.65 Take Shear at'd/2'From Support Yes �/0.000 Cracking 60.36 ft�k 0 ft�k 1.4D Enforce Deflection Check Yes �/0.000 Cracking(out-of-pl... 14.94 ft�k 0 ft�k 1.4D Include Beam Self-Weight No �/0.710 Shear 11.53 k 8.19 k 1.2D+1.65 Include Weight From Wall Above No -----Max Reinforcement----- Allow Arching Action No �/0.375 Max Reinforcement 0 in� 0.01 in� 1.4D Point Load Dispersion Angle 30° Uniform Load Dispersion Angle 45° Load Comhinations Internal State At Max Moment Capacity Internal State at Max Moment CapaCitv Extreme tension bar strain=0.0083 ASCE 7-OS(Strenqth) 1.4D 0.00250 1200 psi 1.2D+1.65 �� -- ��" -� �- - 1.2D+o.ss o o � 36.82 k 1.20 �; a- 1.2D+0.25 0.9D Ok� a 0.36 ft k ' N � 18.41 k -0.00943 fs=60000 psi Notes Notes �Lateral support requirements of MSJC-02 2.3.3.4.4 are not checked. �Bearing length should be at least 4 inches in the direction of span(MSJC-02 2.3.3.4.3). �Assumes bars are not epoxy coated. Loads Summary Load Set Source Uniform Load Point Load Pt Load Offset From Center Dead 615 Ib/ft 0 k 0 ft Snow 1200 Ib/ft 0 k 0 ft QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Lintel 8'-0 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 1 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 122 of 137 Martin Martin Maintenance 8'-0" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Flexural Capacity Analysis Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv Internal State at Max Moment Capacity(out-of-plane) Extreme tension bar strain=0.0083 Extreme tension bar strain=0.0043 0.00250 � = 1200 si 0.00250 1200 psi 0 0 �— 36.82 k � �1 44.98 k � � -u; v � .— .. � .; " � � 4.1 k 0k� � 0k� "' � 60.36 ft k� � 14.94 ft k�'- ^ � 18.41 k — � � 18.41 k � 1 -0.00943 fs=60000 psi -0.00726 fs=60000 psi � 24 in � � C � • • � W N � • • � � 7.I631in Detail Checks � Bar Clear Spacing f MS7C-08 1.15.3.11 db = 0.63 in < 1.0 Sclear = Z,38 in ? Sclear min = 0.63 in � Bar Cover fMS]C-OS 1.15.4.11 cover = 2 in ? coverm;n = 1.5 in (Not exposed to earth or weathea � Minimum Deuth fMSJC-OS 3.3.4.2.5b7 depth = 24 in ? deptFF,,;,, = 8 in � Stirrup Details f MS7C-08 3.3.4.2.31 0.0007 b d,� _ 0.0007(7.63 in)(24 in) A� = 0 in'/in < � - d� (24 in) � - a�01 in'/in X stirrup_offset= 0 in < d�/4 = (24 in;/4 = 6 in � d�/2 = (24 inj/2 = 12 in < 48 Sreqd = 12 in S = 8 in <_ Sreqd = 12 in � Development/Splice Lengths Bar Develooment/Solice Lenaths f MSJC-08 3.3.3.31 ��_0.13 de^2 f�y= 0.13(0.63 in)^2,60000 psi)(1.0)= 39.33 in K fm (2 in1 1500 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Lintel 8'-0 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 2 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 123 of 137 Martin Martin Maintenance 8'-0" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D Design Forces 861 Ib/ft (Uniform Load) � � � � � � � � � 1 I 4.3 k 4.3 k snear Factored Loads z Uniform Load 861 Ib/ft Self Weight 0 Ib/ft �__ Wall Above Peak Weight 0 Ib/ft -2' �- Out-of-Plane Uniform Pressure 0 psf -55 -3.75 -2.5 -1.25 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 (ft) Moment -3 -125 -3.75 -2.5 -1.25 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 (ft) QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Lintel 8'-0 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 3 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 124 of 137 Martin Martin Maintenance 8'-0" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D (continued) Check.s Flexure fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.1,3.1.3,3.1.4.11 Shear fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3,3.1.4.31 M„ = 1076 ft�k s �M„ _ (0.90)(60.36 ft�kl = 54.33 ft�k ✓ M„/V„d� _ �1076 ft�kl/(265 k)(24 in? = 2A285 Flexural Crackina f MS]C-OS 3.3.4.2.2.2.3.3.4.2.2.31 Vm=[4.0-1 JS(1.0)]A❑ fm+0.25 P M� n-Mu _ (0.90)(60.36 ft�kl-(10J6 ft�I� = q 0484 > 0.3333 = �4.0-1 JS(1.0)](1.15 ft 1�1500 psi+0.25(0 k) M„ (1076 ft W = 14.41 k Hence the 1.3fv�,check is not required � Vs=0.5�s°�fy d� = 0.5��$in��(60000 psi)(24 in) = 0 k Out-of-Plane Flexure f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.1.3.1.3,3.1.4.11 V�=Vm+Vs = (14.41 f�+(0 kj = 14.41 k M�= Oft�k < q,M❑ _ (0.90)(14.94ft�4� = 13.45ft�k ✓ - 4A❑�fm = 4(1.15ft)�1500psi= 25.62k Out-of-Plane Flexural Cracking �MS7C-08 3.3.4.2.2.2,3.3.4.2.2.31 upper limit on�/„from eqn(3-20):did not control M„ = Oftk V❑= 2.65 k < ,p V❑_ (0.80)(14.41 kl = 11.53 k � Hence the 1.3N�,check is not required. ✓ Out-of-Plane Shear f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Defl_ection (MSJC-OS 1.13.3.1,1.13.3.2.1.13.3.31 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft k)/(0 k)(7.63 inj = INF M��=S❑f� _ (5977 in�(200 psi; = 9.96 ft�k n=ES/Em = (29000000 ps�/(1350000 ps� = 21.4815 Vm=�4.0-175(1.0)]A„�+025 P b(kd)^3�nAs(d-kd)^2 = C4.0-175(1_0)](1.15ft') 1500psi+025(Ok) �cr= 3 = 14.41 k _ (7.63 in)[(0.2096i(21.69 in)]^3+(21.4815)(0.61 in)[(21.69 in)-(0.2096)(21.69 in)]^2 VS=0.5 I A0 f d� = 0.5 �0 in) (60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k 3 �s� Y �(Sinj� = 4112in^4 un=Um�Vs = �14.41 1�+(O k1 = 14.41 k �err=�n�M��3+1Bf�� Ma��3� 6A� fm = 6(1.15ft� �1500 si= 38.43k � )V P _ (8784in^4)��9.96ft�1��n3+14112in^4)�1-��9.96ft�ki��3� (1076 ft l� 1076 ft k 4 A„ fm = 4;1.15 ft� 1500 psi= 25.62 k = 7819in^4 Interpolated limit on�(,from eqns(3-19) and (3-20) did not control � =b dr^3 = (7.63 in)(24 inj^3 = 8784 in^4 ust for com arisonl V g �2 �2 � P u = 0 k < �V„ _ (0.80)(14.41 k) = 11.53 k � 5MserL^2 5(1076ft�1�(10ft)^2 nacma�= 48 Em leff 48(1350000 psii i7819 in^4) - 0.02 in L = 10ft s 8d = 8(21.69in) = 14.46ft Not required to meet limit � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Lintel 8'-0 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 4 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 125 of 137 Martin Martin Maintenance 8'-0" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 1.6S Design Forces 2658 Ib/ft (Uniform Load) � � � � � � � � � 1 1 13.29 k 13.29 k Z snear Factored Loads 1 Uniform Load 26581b/ft Self Weight 0 Ib/ft 1 -___ Wall Above Peak Weight 0 Ib/ft Out-of-Plane Uniform Pressure 0 psf -Z-S -3.75 -2.5 -1.25 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 (ft) Moment / -1 -2 �i _g �_ —� -4-5 -3.75 -2.5 -1.25 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 (ft) QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Lintel 8'-0 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 5 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 126 of 137 Martin Martin Maintenance 8'-0" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 1.6S (continued) _ Check.s Flexure fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.1,3.1.3,3.1.4.11 Shear fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3,3.1.4.31 M„ = 3322 ft�k s �M„ _ (0.90)(60.36 ft�kl = 54.33 ft�k ✓ M„/V„d� _ �3322 ft�kl/(8.19 k)(24 in? = 2A285 Flexural Crackina f MS]C-OS 3.3.4.2.2.2.3.3.4.2.2.31 Vm=[4.0-1 JS(1.0)]A❑ fm+0.25 P M� n-Mu _ (0.90)(60.36 ft�kl-(33.22 ft�I� = 0.6353 > 0.3333 = �4.0-1 JS(1.0)](1.15 ft 1�1500 psi+0.25(0 k) M„ (3322 ft�l� = 14.41 k Hence the 1.3fv�,check is not required � Vs=0.5�s°�fy d� = 0.5��$in��(60000 psi)(24 in) = 0 k Out-of-Plane Flexure f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.1.3.1.3,3.1.4.11 V�=Vm+Vs = (14.41 f�+(0 kj = 14.41 k M�= Oft�k < q,M❑ _ (0.90)(14.94ft�4� = 13.45ft�k ✓ - 4A❑�fm = 4(1.15ft)�1500psi= 25.62k Out-of-Plane Flexural Cracking �MS7C-08 3.3.4.2.2.2,3.3.4.2.2.31 upper limit on�/„from eqn(3-20):did not control M„ = Oftk V„= 8.19 k < ,p V„_ (0.80)(14.41 kl = 11.53 k ✓ Hence the 1.3N�,check is not required. ✓ Out-of-Plane Shear f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Defl_ection (MSJC-OS 1.13.3.1,1.13.3.2.1.13.3.31 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft k)/(0 k)(7.63 inj = INF M��=S❑f� _ (5977 in�(200 psi; = 9.96 ft�k n=ES/Em = (29000000 ps�/(1350000 ps� = 21.4815 Vm=�4.0-175(1.0)]A„�+025 P b(kd)^3�nAs(d-kd)^2 = C4.0-175(1_0)](1.15ft') 1500psi+025(Ok) �cr= 3 = 14.41 k _ (7.63 in)[(0.2096i(21.69 in)]^3+(21.4815)(0.61 in)[(21.69 in)-(0.2096)(21.69 in)]^2 VS=0.5 I A0 f d� = 0.5 �0 in) (60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k 3 �s� Y �(Sinj� = 4112in^4 un=Um�Vs = �14.41 1�+(O k1 = 14.41 k �err=�n�M��3+1Bf�� Ma��3� 6A� fm = 6(1.15ft� �1500 si= 38.43k � )V P _ (8784in^4)��3322ft��3+14112in^4)�1-��3322ft�k)��3� 4A❑ fm = 4;1.15ft� 1500psi= 25.62k = 4238in^4 Interpolated limit on�(,from eqns(3-19) and (3-20) did not control � =b dr^3 = (7.63 in)(24 inj^3 = 8784 in^4 ust for com arisonl V g �2 �2 � P u = 0 k < �V„ _ (0.80)(14.41 k) = 11.53 k � 5MserL^2 5(33.22ft�1�(10ft)^2 nacmai= 48 Em leff 48(1350000 ps%;4238 in^4) - 0.1 in L = 10ft s 8d = 8(21.69in) = 14.46ft Not required to meet limit � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0870.S.0...\Lintel 8'-0 at Maint Bldg.qms Page 6 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 127 of 137 Martin Martin Dumpster 16'-8" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Design Detail � . . 1 � Flexural Bars: 4 - #5 m 1 I 19.34 ft I i • '• • • �-7.63 in� Check Surramary Criteria Ratio Check Provided Reauired Combination -----Details---- Building Code MSJC-08(Stren... ,/0.625 Bar Clear Spacing 1 in 0.63 in N/A Load Combina[ion ASCE 7-OS(Stre... �/OJSO Bar Cover 2 in 1.5 in N/A Seismic R Value 1.00 �/0.250 Minimum Depth 32 in 8 in N/A f'm 1500 psi -----Strength----- fy 60000 psi �/0.000 Shear(out-of-plane) 15.35 k 0 k 1.4D Average Unit Weight 84 Ib/ft3 �/0.669 Flexure 137.2 ft�k 91.75 ft�k 1.2D+1.65 Design As Clay Masonry No ,/0.000 Flexure(out-of-pla... 19.49 ft�k 0 ft�k 1.4D Exposed To Earth Or Weather No �/0.962 Deflection 0.39 in 0.37 in 1.2D+1.65 Take Shear at'd/2'From Support Yes �/0.000 Cracking 152.5 ft�k 0 ft�k 1.4D Enforce Deflection Check Yes �/0.000 Cracking(out-of-pl... 21.66 ft�k 0 ft�k 1.4D Include Beam Self-Weight No �/0.912 Shear 15.35 k 14 k 1.2D+1.65 Include Weight From Wall Above No -----Max Reinforcement----- Allow Arching Action No �/0.636 Max Reinforcement 0 in� 0 in� 1.4D Point Load Dispersion Angle 30° Uniform Load Dispersion Angle 45° Load Comhinations Internal State At Max Moment Capacity Internal State at Max Moment CapaCitv Extreme tension bar strain=0.0049 ASCE 7-OS(Strenqth) 1.4D 0.00250 1200 psi 1.2D+1.65 �� - C 1.2D+o.ss � o � 73.61 k 1.2D o 1.2D+0.25 ° � 0.9D - - Ok� N 152.5ft�k � M � 18:41 k -0.00546 fs=60000 psi Notes Notes �Lateral support requirements of MSJC-02 2.3.3.4.4 are not checked. �Bearing length should be at least 4 inches in the direction of span(MSJC-02 2.3.3.4.3). �Assumes bars are not epoxy coated. Loads Summary Load Set Source Uniform Load Point Load Pt Load Offset From Center Dead 476 Ib/ft 0 k 0 ft Snow 870 Ib/ft 0 k 0 ft QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0...\Lintel 16'-8 at Trash Enclosure.qms Page 1 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:15 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 128 of 137 Martin Martin Dumpster 16'-8" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Flexural Capacity Analysis Internal State at Max Moment Capacitv Internal State at Max Moment Capacity(out-of-plane) Extreme tension bar strain=0.0049 Extreme tension bar strain=0.0039 0.00250 1200 psi 0.00250 � 1200 psi o � � 73.61 k o � � 63.33 k � — ° °' � — � 2.71 k C `� C Ok�► N Ok I ► M � M � ^ 152.5 ft k� 21.66 ft k�'— � 18.41 k — .l � ��:�� -0.00546 fs=60000 psi -0.00675 fs=60000 psi � 32 in � � � V • • • � N W M � • • • � - � 7�(3I�n I Detail Checks � Bar Clear Spacing f MS7C-08 1.15.3.11 db = 0.63 in < 1.0 Sclear = 1 in ? Sclear min = 0.63 in � Bar Cover fMS]C-OS 1.15.4.11 cover = 2 in ? coverm;n = 1.5 in (Not exposed to earth or weathea � Minimum Deuth fMSJC-OS 3.3.4.2.5b7 depth = 32 in ? deptFF,,;,, = 8 in � Stirrup Details f MS7C-08 3.3.4.2.31 0.0007 b d,� _ 0.0007(7.63 in)(32 in) A� = 0 in'/in < � d� (32 in) � - a�01 in'/in X stirrup_offset= 0 in < d�/4 = (32 in?/4 = 8 in � d�/2 = (32inj/2 = 16in < 48 Sreqd = 16 in S = 8 in <_ Sreqd = 16 in � Development/Splice Lengths Bar Develooment/Solice Lenaths f MSJC-08 3.3.3.31 ��_0.13 de^2 f�y= 0.13(0.63 in)^2,60000 psi)(1.0)_ �$67 in K fm (1 in1 1500 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0...\Lintel 16'-8 at Trash Enclosure.qms Page 2 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:15 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 129 of 137 Martin Martin Dumpster 16'-8" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D Design Forces 666.4 Ib/ft (Uniform Load) � � � � � � � � � 1 1 6.44 k 6.44 k snear Factored Loads Uniform Load 666.4 Ib/ft Self Weight O lb/ft Wall Above Peak Weight 0 Ib/ft R � Out-of-Plane Uniform Pressure 0 psf -Y.67 -7.25 -4.83 -�.42 0 2.42 4.83 7.25 9.67 (ft) Moment -1 �� —� � -2 -3 � — -Y.67 -7.25 -4.83 -2.42 0 2.42 4.83 7.25 9.67 (ft) QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0...\Lintel 16'-8 at Trash Enclosure.qms Page 3 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:15 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 130 of 137 Martin Martin Dumpster 16'-8" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D (continued) Check.s Flexure fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.1,3.1.3,3.1.4.11 Shear fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.2,3.1.3,3.1.4.31 M„ = 31.14 ft�k s �M„ _ (0.90)(152.5 ft�kl = 137.2 ft�k ✓ M„/V„d� _ (31.14 ft�kl/(4.75 k)(32 in? = 2.4582 Flexural Crackina f MS]C-OS 3.3.4.2.2.2.3.3.4.2.2.31 Vm=[4.0-1 JS(1.0)]A❑ fm+0.25 P M� n-Mu _ (0.90)(152.5 ft�kl-(31.14 ft�I� = 3.4063 > 0.3333 = t4.0-1 JS(1.0)](1.53 ft 1�1500 psi+0.25(0 k) M„ (31.14 ft l� = 19.19 k Hence the 1.3fv�,check is not required � Vs=0.5�s°�fy d� = 0.5��$in��(60000 psi)(32 in) = 0 k Out-of-Plane Flexure f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.1.3.1.3,3.1.4.11 V�=Vm+Vs = (19.19 f�+(0 kj = 19.19 k M�= Oft�k < q,M❑ _ (0.90)(21.66ft�4� = 19.49ft�k � - 4A❑�fm = 4(1.53ft)�1500psi= 34.11 k Out-of-Plane Flexural Cracking �MS7C-08 3.3.4.2.2.2,3.3.4.2.2.31 upper limit on�/„from eqn(3-20):did not control M„ = Oftk V❑= 475 k < ,p V❑_ (0.80)(19.19 kl = 15.35 k ✓ Hence the 1.3N�,check is not required. ✓ Out-of-Plane Shear f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Deflection (MS7C-08 1.13.3.1.1.13.3.2,1.13.3.31 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0 k)(7.63 inj = INF M��=S„f� _ (1060 in')(200 psi; = 17.66 ft�k n=Es/Em = (29000000 ps�/(1350000 ps� = 21.4815 Vm=�4.0-175(1.0)]A❑�+025 P I��=b�k 3��3+n As(d-k d)^2 ° �g�0�k75(1.0)](1.53 ft') 1500 psi+025(0 k) _ (7.63 in)[(0.3142j;28.88 in)]^3 A„ (0 in) , - � 3 -- - +(21.4815)(L23 in)[(28.88 in)-(0.3142)(28.88 in)]^2 VS=0.5�s�fy d� = 0.5��$in��i60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k = 12235 in^4 un=Um�Vs = �19.19 1�+(O k) = 19.19 k Mcr Mcr �eff=�n Ma ^3+I�� 1- Ma �3 6 A� fm = 6(1.53 ft�) 1500 psi= 51.16 k _ (20821 in^41��31.14ft�W��3��12235in^4)�1-�131.1�4ft�k;��3� 4A„ fm = 4;1.53ft�) 1500psi= 34.11 k = 13SOOin^4 Interpolated limit on�(,from eqns(3-19) and (3-20) did not control � =b dT^3 = (7,63 in)(32 in?^3 = 20821 in^4 ust for com arisor� V 9 12 12 � p u = 0 k < �V„ _ (0.80)(19.19 k) = 15.35 k � 5MserL^2 _ 5(31.14ft�f�;19.34ft?^2 . - ----- ---...------ _ sactuai- 4S Em laff 48(1350000 ps�(13800 in^4) ' �n L = 19.34 ft > 8d = 8(28.88 in) = 19.25 ft L/600 = (19.34 f�/600 = 0.39 in nacmal = 0.11 in < ga = 0.39 in � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0...\Lintel 16'-8 at Trash Enclosure.qms Page 4 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:15 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 131 of 137 Martin Martin Dumpster 16'-8" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 1.6S Design Forces 1963 Ib/ft (Uniform Load) � � � � � � � � � 1 I 18.98 k 18.98 k Z snear Factored Loads 1 Uniform Load 19631b/ft Self Weight 0 Ib/ft 1 Wall Above Peak Weight 0 Ib/ft Out-of-Plane Uniform Pressure 0 psf - .67 -7.25 -4.83 -�.42 0 2.42 4.83 7.25 9.67 (ft) Moment -25 / -5 / '�� ----------- —_ -1�67 -7.25 -4.83 -2.42 0 2.42 4.83 7.25 9.67 (ft) QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0...\Lintel 16'-8 at Trash Enclosure.qms Page 5 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:15 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 132 of 137 Martin Martin Dumpster 16'-8" Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 1.6S (continued) _ Check.s Flexure fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.1,3.1.3,3.1.4.11 Shear fM5]C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3,3.1.4.31 M„ = 91.75 ft�k s �M„ _ (0.90)(152.5 ft�kl = 137.2 ft�k ✓ M„/V„d� _ (9175 ft�kl/(14 k)(32 in1 = 2.4582 Flexural Crackina f MS]C-OS 3.3.4.2.2.2.3.3.4.2.2.31 Vm=[4.0-1 JS(1.0)]A❑ fm+0.25 P M� n-Mu _ (0.90)(152.5ft�kl-(91JSft�l� = 04957 > 0.3333 = t4.0-1J5(1.0)](1.53ft1�1500psi+0.25(Ok) M„ (9175 ft�l� = 19.19 k Hence the 1.3fv�,check is not required � Vs=0.5�s°�fy d� = 0.5��$in��(60000 psi)(32 in) = 0 k Out-of-Plane Flexure f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.1.3.1.3,3.1.4.11 V�=Vm+Vs = (19.19 f�+(0 kj = 19.19 k M�= Oft�k < q,M❑ _ (0.90)(21.66ft�4� = 19.49ft�k � - 4A❑�fm = 4(1.53ft)�1500psi= 34.11 k Out-of-Plane Flexural Cracking �MS7C-08 3.3.4.2.2.2,3.3.4.2.2.31 upper limit on�/„from eqn(3-20):did not control M„ = Oftk V„= 14 k < �V„_ (0.80)(19.19 kl = 15.35 k ✓ Hence the 1.3N�,check is not required. ✓ Out-of-Plane Shear f MS7C-08 3.3.4.1.2.3.1.3.3.1.4.31 Deflection (MS7C-08 1.13.3.1.1.13.3.2,1.13.3.31 M❑/V❑d� _ (0 ft�k)/(0 k)(7.63 inj = INF M��=S„f� _ (1060 in')(200 psi; = 17.66 ft�k n=Es/Em = (29000000 ps�/(1350000 ps� = 21.4815 Vm=�4.0-175(1.0)]A❑�+025 P I��=b�k 3��3+n As(d-k d)^2 ° �g�0�k75(1.0)](1.53 ft') 1500 psi+025(0 k) _ (7.63 in)[(0.3142j;28.88 in)]^3 A„ (0 in) , - � 3 -- - +(21.4815)(L23 in)[(28.88 in)-(0.3142)(28.88 in)]^2 VS=0.5�s�fy d� = 0.5��$in��i60000 psi)(7.63 in) = 0 k = 12235 in^4 un=Um�Vs = �19.19 1�+(O k) = 19.19 k Mcr Mcr �eff=�n Ma ^3+I�� 1- Ma �3 6 A� fm = 6(1.53 ft�) 1500 psi= 51.16 k _ (20821in^41��17.66ft�W�„3+(12235in^4)�1-��17.66ft�1v�„3� (91 JS ft l� (9175 ft k, 4 A„ fm = 4;1.53 ft� 1500 psi= 34.11 k = 12296in^4 Interpolated limit on�(,from eqns(3-19) and (3-20) did not control � =b dT^3 = (7,63 in)(32 in?^3 = 20821 in^4 ust for com arisor� V 9 12 12 � p u = 0 k < �V„ _ (0.80)(19.19 k) = 15.35 k � 5MserL^2 _ 5(9175ft�k;(19.34ft?^2 _ --��- ------- - sactuai- 4S Em laff 48(1350000 ps�(12296 in^4) ' �n L = 19.34 ft > 8d = 8(28.88 in) = 19.25 ft L/600 = (19.34 f�/600 = 0.39 in nacmal = 0.37 in < ga = 0.39 in � QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\13.0...\Lintel 16'-8 at Trash Enclosure.qms Page 6 of 6 Tuesday 02/25/14 9:15 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 133 of 137 Martin Martin Typ Shear WAII Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Design Detail � � T � � �— i � •, � �' � � � � � � . . �� Distributed Vertical Bars: #4 @ 48 in — Horizontal Bars: #8 Truss Std DUR-O-WALL @ 24 in ' � 8ft� Check Summary � Interaction Diagram Ratio Check Provided Reauired Combination ----Strength Checks--- �/0.027 Axial Compression 275.9 k 7.39 k 1.4D �/0.750 Axial+Flexure 135.7 ft�k 101.8 ft�k 0.9D+1.6W �/0.269 Shear 31.58 k 8.48 k 0.9D+1.6W 50�� Interaction Diaqram ----Reinforcement Limits--- �/0.160 Min Vert Reinf 0 in2 0 inz 1.4D � �/0.049 Max Reinf 0.06 inz 0 inz 1.2D+0.8W I 38 \ Criteria Load Combinations 26 �, ASCE 7-051Strenqthl `I Building Gode MSJC-08(Strength) 1.4D Load Combination ASCE 7-OS(Stren... 1.2D+0.8W 14 i Seismic R Value 1.00 1.2D+1.6W / f'm 1500 psi 1.2D fy 60000 psi 0.9D+1.6W 2 � Specify Wall Weight Manually No 0.9D ,_ �� Block Weight Normal weight � Design As Clay Masonry No Include Wall Self-Weight Yes -10 I 120 240 360 480 600 End Bars Only For Flexural/Axial Analysis No Multiply Seismic Shear By 1.5 No Moment(ft•k) Loads Summary Load Set Source Axial Pt Load Offset from C...End 1 Auial D...End 2 Auial D...Shear Pt Load Shear Distrib...Shear Offset... Moment Wind 0 k 0 ft 0 Ib/ft 0 Ib/ft 5.3 k 0 Ib/ft 0 ft 0 ft•k QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\1...\Shear Wall 8'-0 Long at Maint Bidg.qms Page 1 of 4 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 134 of 137 Martin Martin Typ Shear WAII Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.4D Dzsign Forces Compression Check Factored Loads Wall Weight 7.39 k Axial Comoression fM5]C-OS 3.3.6.3,3.3.4.1.1.3.1.4.17 h/r = ;12 ft)/(2.72 in) = 52.9422 s 99 Pn=0.80[O.SOfm(An-As)+fyAstl(� [140r_I�21 � � = 0.80[0.80(1500 psi)[(2.59 ft)-(0.59 in�i]+(60000 psi)(0 in�)]�1-�140(2.72 in)�� II rt = 306.6 k ��}�. Pu = 7.39 k < q�pn = (0.90)(306.6 I� = 275.9 k � �0 ft�k 7.39 k Other Checks Shear Check � Shear Reinforcement f MS]C-08 3.3.6.21 $hear f MSJC-OS 3.3.6.4,3.3.4.1.2,3.1.4.37 As_�ert = 0 in�/in >_ 3 As_noa = 3(0 in�/ini = 0 in�/in ✓ M❑/V„d„ _ (0 ft�k)/(0 kj(96 in) = INF Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strain) fM57C-08 3.3.3.51 Vm=[4.0-1.75;1.0)]A„ fm+025 P The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. _ [4.0-175(1.Oil(2.59 ft�) 1500 psi+0.25(7.39 Id It is used to obtaine (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. = 34.37 k M„/V„d„ _ (0 ft�k)/(0 k;(96 in) = INF < 1.0 Vs=0.5�s��fY d4 - 0'S��(4�in)��60000 ps�(96 in) = 576 k There is no limit under these conditions � V„=Vm+Vs = (34.37 k)+(576 4� = 40.13 k 6 A❑�fm = 6(2.59 ft'j 1500 psi= 8674 k Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check 4 A❑�fm = 4(2.59 ft') 1500 psi= 57.82 k Extreme tension bar strain=0.0632 Interpolated limit on�{,from eqns(3-19j and (3-20) did not control 0.00250 � � 1200 si V„ = 0 k < q,V„ _ (0.80)(40.13 I� = 32.11 k ✓ - � , . k M N 0 k� � � 11.78 k 131.3ft•k � � 1178 k -0.06607 fs=60000 psi Axial/Flexure Checks � i�tera�e�or,q��ram _ iternal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=8.21 k(Pu=7.39 I 600� - Extreme tension bar strain=0.0505 aa 0.00250 ` ` 1200 ps_ i__3T�7_� 28 -\, . . „-�.• �I ��I l/ Axial Force(k) a M 12 / � 4 - --- � 821 k� ` � 1178 k -Z� 150 300 450 600 � � m Moment(R•k) 161.4 ft�k� Combined Axial_Flexure fMSJC-08 3.3.6.3.3.3.4.1.1.3.1.4. M„ = 0 ft k < �,M„ = 145.3 ft k ✓ � 11.78 k -0.05280 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\1...\Shear Wall 8'-0 Long at Maint Bidg.qms Page 2 of 4 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 135 of 137 Martin Martin Typ Shear WAII Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 0.9D + 1.6W Dzsign Forces Compression Check Factored Loads Wall Weight 475 k Axial Comoression fM5]C-OS 3.3.6.3,3.3.4.1.1.3.1.4.17 h/r = ;12 ft)/(2.72 in) = 52.9422 s 99 Pn=0.80[O.SOfm(An-As)+fyAstl(� [140r_I�21 8.48 k ► � � = 0.80[0.80(1500 psi)[(2.59 ft)-(0.59 in�i]+(60000 psi)(0 in�)]�1-�140(2.72 in)�� = 306.6 k � 8.48 k Pu = 4.75 k < q,p� _ (0.90)(306.6 I� = 275.9 k ✓ 101.8 ft�k 4.75 k Other Checks Shear Check � Shear Reinforcement f MS]C-08 3.3.6.21 $hear f MSJC-OS 3.3.6.4,3.3.4.1.2,3.1.4.37 As_�ert = 0 in�/in >_ 3 As_noa = 3(0 in�/ini = 0 in�/in ✓ M❑/V„d„ _ (101.8 ft k1/(8.45 W(96 in) = 1.50 Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strain) f MS7C-08 3.3.3.51 Vm=[4.0-1.75;1.0)]A„ fm+025 P The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. _ [4.0-175(1.Oil(2.59 ft�) 1500 psi+0.25(475 I� It is used to obtaine (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. = 33.71 k M❑/V„d� _ (101.8 ft�l�/(5.48 k;(96 in) = 1.50 >_ 1.0 A�� 0.05 in') Vs=0.5�s fy d�= a.5 ��24 in) ��60000 ps�(96 in) = 576 k em�„=1.5(fy/ES) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps�] = 0.0031 c = 0.0632 ? cmin = 0.0031 � V❑=Vm+Vs = (3371 kj+(576 4� = 39.47 k 4 A❑�fm = 4(2.59 ft';�1500 psi= 57.52 k Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check upper limit on V„from eqn(3-20):did not control E7ctreme tension bar strain=0.0632 V❑ = 8.48 k < �,V❑ _ (0.80)(39.47 I� = 31.58 k � 0.00250 � � 1200 si � . k M N 0 k� � � 11.78 k 131.3ft•k � � 1178 k -0.06607 fs=60000 psi Axial/Flexure Checks � i�tera�e�or,q��ram _ iternal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=5.28 k(Pu=4.75 I 600� - Extreme tension bar strain=0.0556 aa 0.00250 ` `- 1200 psi m1-Ni� Zg \, �- 0.14 k Axial Force(k) M M / I 12 4 �-= � 528 k�-► ` � 1178 k -Z� 150 300 450 600 � m Moment(R•k) 150.7 ft�� Combined Axial_Flexure fMSJC-08 3.3.6.3.3.3.4.1.1.3.1.4. M„ = 101.5 ft k < �M„ = 1357 ft k ✓ � 11.78 k -0.05808 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\1...\Shear Wall 8'-0 Long at Maint Bidg.qms Page 3 of 4 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 136 of 137 Martin Martin Typ Shear WAII Martin/Martin Inc. (Edit address under Options menu, Preferences command, User tab) (000) 000-0000 Load Combination: 1.2D + 0.8W Dzsign Forces Compression Check Factored Loads Wall Weight 6.34 k Axial Comoression fM5]C-OS 3.3.6.3,3.3.4.1.1.3.1.4.17 h/r = ;12 ft)/(2.72 in) = 52.9422 s 99 Pn=0.80[O.SOfm(An-As)+fyAstl(� [140r_I�21 4.24 k ► � � = 0.80[0.80(1500 psi)[(2.59 ft)-(0.59 in�i]+(60000 psi)(0 in�)]�1-�140(2.72 in)�� = 306.6 k � 4.24 k Pu = 6.34 k < q,p� _ (0.90)(306.6 I� = 275.9 k ✓ 50.88 ft�k 6.34 k Other Checks Shear Check � Shear Reinforcement f MS]C-08 3.3.6.21 $hear f MSJC-OS 3.3.6.4,3.3.4.1.2,3.1.4.37 As_�ert = 0 in�/in >_ 3 As_noa = 3(0 in�/ini = 0 in�/in ✓ M❑/V„d„ _ (50.58 ft k1/(4.24 W(96 in) = 1.50 Max Reinforcement Ratio(minimum strain) f MS7C-08 3.3.3.51 Vm=[4.0-1.75;1.0)]A„ fm+025 P The analysis below is based on special parameters in MSCJ 3.3.3.5. _ [4.0-175(1.Oil(2.59 ft�) 1500 psi+0.25(6.34 I� It is used to obtaine (strain) and is not a calculation of flexural capacity. = 34.11 k M„/V„d„ _ (SO.S8 ft�l�/(424 ki(96 in) = 1.50 >_ 1.0 A�� 0.05 in') Vs=0.5�s fy d�= a.5 ��24 in) ��60000 ps�(96 in) = 576 k em�„=1.5(fy/ES) = 1.5[(60000 psi)/(29000000 ps�] = 0.0031 c = 0.0632 ? cmin = 0.0031 � V❑=Vm+Vs = (34.11 kj+(576 4� = 39.87 k 4 A❑�fm = 4(2.59 ft';�1500 psi= 57.52 k Internal State for Max Reinforcement Check upper limit on V„from eqn(3-20):did not control E7ctreme tension bar strain=0.0632 V❑ = 424 k < �,V❑ _ (0.80)(39.87 I� = 31.9 k � 0.00250 � � 1200 si � . k M N 0 k� � � 11.78 k 131.3ft•k � � 1178 k -0.06607 fs=60000 psi Axial/Flexure Checks � i�tera�e�or,q��ram _ iternal State at Max Moment Capacitv for P=7.04 k(Pu=6.34 I 600� - Extreme tension bar strain=0.0525 aa 0.00250 � ` 1200 ps�.2_.�_ 28 �, . .. . ..,_,.I-' M� i �I Axial Force(k) � m 12 � � � _4 �_ _ � 7.04 k�-► ` � 1178 k -Z� 150 300 450 600 � m Moment(R•k) 157.2 ft�� Combined Axial_Flexure fMSJC-08 3.3.6.3.3.3.4.1.1.3.1.4. M„ = 50.88 ft k < �M„ = 141.5 ft k ✓ � 11.78 k -0.05487 fs=60000 psi QuickMasonry 3.0(iesweb.com) G:\PROJECTS\1...\Shear Wall 8'-0 Long at Maint Bidg.qms Page 4 of 4 Wednesday 02/26/14 9:21 AM Martin/Martin, Inc. 137 of 137 � � � � � PO Box 1073, Frisco, CO 80443 970.409.9082; fax 970.797.1898 LIFE SAFETY REPORT r, . u�3 �cL�,�� , _ �,y'...�±#�' LION S RIDGE APARTMENT HOMES �. �,:.• ,�� '�� VAIL, COLORADO :,°��,�'� ��;��s�'� March 12, 2014 �„� ' �v 3�S23a� n,w � �� M1�.�: �'�� Y'':. Prepared by: Deborah Shaner, P.E � � �'• "` .� ,.��' Fire Protection Engineer, Shaner Life Safety �`��C��lr�k-�� INTRODUCTION This report outlines the fire and life safety strategy for the Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes in Vail, Colorado. The primary objective of this report is to outline the fire protection, fire alarm and life safety systems and features to be provided at the Lion's Ridge site both during construction and after occupancy. The overall goal is to provide a high level of life safety for Lion's Ridge residents, facilitate effective fire fighter operation, meet applicable codes and standards and provide an economical, effective approach to life safety. In preparation of this report, the following documents were reviewed: • Design Development drawings prepared by the design team • Project specifications • RA Nelson Safety & Health Management Program Manual (SHMP) • RA Nelson Site Logistics Narrative • Flow test data for existing site In addition, a site visit was conducted to field verify existing conditions and site features. This report is intended to accompany the Code Study prepared by the Architect of Record, found on Sheet G102 of the project drawings. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT, SITE AND BUILDINGS The project consists of four buildings which will provide a total of 113 apartments and a management office. Buildings A and B are three stories containing 8 apartments per floor for a total of 24 apartments per building. Building C is three stories and contains 10 apartments per floor for a total of 30 apartments. Building D is three stories with 12 apartments per floor for a Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 2 total of 36 apartments. Buildings will be wood framed and carry a construction type of VB. The occupancy classification is Group R-2. Refer to the Code Study for details on construction types and occupancy ratings. Building Square Footages are as follows: Building#1 7120 square feet Building#2 7120 square feet Building#3 8545 square feet Building#4 8535 square feet The following fire protection and life safety features and systems will be provided. Refer to Contract Drawings and Specifications for details on the design of these items. • Fire protection sprinkler system throughout • Fire alarm and detection system throughout • Fire rated separations • Compliant occupant egress • Emergency lighting/egress illumination • Exit signs • Fire extinguishers APPLICABLE CODES &STANDARDS The Lions's Ridge project will be designed and constructed in accordance with the codes and standards adopted in the Town of Vail. These documents include: • 2012 International Building Code • 2012 International Fire Code • 2012 International Mechanical Code • 2012 International Plumbing Code • 2012 International Fuel Gas Code • 2012 International Energy Conservation Code • 2011 National Electrical Code • 2010 NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems • 2010 NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code • Town of Vail Amendments • Vail Fire & Emergency Services (VFES) Standards: o Fire Alarm Installation Standards o Fire Sprinkler Installation Standards Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 3 BUILDING ACCESS The Lion's Ridge site has limited access due to its mountainside location. The project site is accessed from the I-70 Frontage Road North. Refer to the Civil Drawings site plan for the configuration of the fire lane. During construction, fire department access will be provided to the site using the portion of the entry driveway from the Frontage Road. The recommended staging location for VFES is at the existing Fire Hydrant located at the Main Entrance, accessible by parking directly on the Frontage Road or on the entry driveway. The existing hydrant will remain in operation throughout the duration of the project. Complete fire department vehicle access onto the site may not be available at all times during construction. RA Nelson will update VFES weekly on site emergency vehicle access. Note that a second existing hydrant is located at the Bus Stop and is in close proximity to the west side of this site. Upon occupancy, fire department access is provided throughout the site. Refer to Civil Drawing C1.03 for fire staging areas and the access driveway. Three new fire hydrants are being installed within the project site. One will be located on the northwest corner of Building D. The second will be on the northeast corner of Building C and the third is located directly west of Building A. These three new hydrants will provide more than adequate fire flows for this site. These hydrants will be functional prior to their adjacent building undergoing any vertical construction. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION Hazardous materials management during construction will occur in accordance with applicable sections of the International Fire Code. Winter heating will be accomplished using natural gas to the extent possible. Any fuel tanks will be stored in the designated areas as noted on the Logistics plans. Refer to RA Nelson's SHMP for hazardous materials management details during construction. This document was reviewed in preparation of this report. FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION Existing fire hydrants will remain operational during construction. The two existing hydrant locations are at the existing Timber Ridge main entrance and at the Bus Stop to the west of the project site. Refer to the Building Access section above for access details. Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 4 Due to the nature of a construction site, fire department vehicle access directly into the site may not be available at all times. RA Nelson will provide weekly updated to VFES regarding emergency vehicle access. Existing hydrants are most accessible from the I-70 Frontage Road or the two existing site entrances. During construction, prior to the new hydrants being placed into service, firefighting operations would utilize the existing hydrants. Prior to commencement of vertical construction, the new site fire hydrants will be functional, allowing for firefighting operations within the site. The buildings to be demolished will be disconnected from the existing fire alarm system for the Timber Ridge complex. New fire alarm systems will be installed and will be placed into operation prior to occupancy. The existing buildings do not have fire sprinkler systems. Fire extinguishers will be placed on site during construction. Refer to RA Nelson's SHMP for details on safety practices for this site. REQUIRED SITE FIRE FLOW Appendix B of the International Fire Code is used to determine the site fire flow. The required fire flow is based on the construction type and size of a building. Although the Apartment Buildings are divided into separate compartments using fire rated separations, the square footage of an entire Building will be used to determine required site fire flow. The largest building is Building 3 at 8545 square feet. Only the largest building must be considered for determination of site fire flow. Using Appendix B, for a building 8545 square feet in size with a Construction Type of VB, the required fire flow is 2500 gpm for 2 hours. However, the Authority Having Jurisdiction is authorized by Appendix B to allow up to a 75% reduction in the fire flow. The minimum fire flow allowed by Appendix B is 1500 gpm. Because these buildings are fully sprinklered, a minimum site fire flow demand of 1500 gpm is reasonable. To satisfy the site fire flow requirement, the available water supply at the site must be at least 1500 gpm. This can be achieved by flowing multiple hydrants. Based on the available flow test data (to be verified) and water models available, the site fire flow requirement of 1500 gpm is easily achievable. Fire hydrants need a minimum of 20 psi to function. The approximated demand for the sprinkler system is 60 psi. Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 5 Previous flow test data (conducted in 2009) documents approximate static pressures in the range of 150-165 psi. The West Hydrant (located at the existing bus stop) flowed 1600 gpm at a residual pressure of 115 psi. The East Hydrant (located at the existing main entrance and closest to the construction site) produced a flow of 1800 gpm at a residual pressure of 107 psi. Based on the 2009 data, plus current knowledge of common flow rates and pressures within the Town of Vail, there is more than adequate pressure and flow available from the municipal water supply to support this site. No fire pumps will be needed. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM The buildings will be protected throughout with a fire protection system installed in accordance with NFPA 13R. Standard, wet pipe sprinkler systems will be used in all conditioned areas. Each building will have a Water Entry Room housing the fire protection and domestic fire entries. A fire pump is not necessary based on an analysis of the available water supply. The Riser Room will contain the main sprinkler shutoff valve and the main water flow and tamper switch. Each floor will have a sprinkler control station including a zone water flow and tamper switch to be monitored by the fire alarm system. The fire protection system will be annunciated by building number and floor. Fire sprinklers will be provided throughout the building and will likely be standard, recessed type. Freeze protection will be provided in non-conditioned areas. Antifreeze or glycol systems will not be installed in residential areas. Piping will be steel or copper. CPVC is not allowed. The attic space will not be sprinklered. Per Section 6.6.6, NFPA 13R, sprinklers are not required. "6.6.6 Sprinklers shall not be required in attics, penthouse equipment rooms, elevator machine rooms, concealed spaces dedicated exclusively to and containing only dwelling unit ventilation equipment, crawl spaces, floor/ceiling spaces, noncombustible elevator shafts where the elevator cars comply with AN51 A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, and other concealed spaces that are not used or intended for living purposes or storage and do not contain fuel-fired equipment." This section is further clarified by appendix commentary, "A.6.6.6 Concealed spaces are permitted to have small openings such as grilles for return air when the space is being used as a plenum. Such small openings do not Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 6 disqualify the space from being considered as a concealed space, and sprinklers are still permitted to be omitted." Fire department connections will be provided on each building, two way, 2-1/2" hose connections and will be clearly labeled. The Fire Protection Contractor will provide shop drawings and equipment data submittals as part of the application for a Fire Protection permit. The fire protection system will be supplied by city water, which is adequate for this project. A flow test was conducted on November 20, 2009 during a previous review of this project site. The available site fire flow and pressure will be field verified at the start of construction. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A complete fire alarm and detection system will be provided throughout. The system features and functions include: • Addressable fire alarm control panel located in Building 2, Leasing Office • Manual pull stations at all exits in common areas • Addressable smoke and heat detectors throughout common areas • Addressable smoke detectors with sounder bases in residential units, located in sleeping rooms and areas immediately outside of sleeping rooms (hallways or living rooms) • Carbon monoxide detection, at least one per unit, located in the living room (preferably integrated with carbon monoxide detectors) • Supervision of the building fire protection sprinkler system through waterflow and tamper switches • Occupant notification through sounder bases, horns and strobes • Outside horn/strobe above fire department connections The complex will have a single fire alarm system. The main Fire Alarm Control Panel will be located in the Leasing Office located in Building 2 with LCD annunciators at entrances to Buildings 1, 3 and 4. A remote power supply will be installed in each building to provide power to notification circuits for that building. Buildings will be connected to the fire alarm panel through an underground fire alarm raceway. Surge suppression will be installed at the point of exit and entry of fire alarm circuits. Isolator modules will be installed to ensure circuits are protected, readily serviceable and easy to troubleshoot. Each point will be addressable. VFES will be dispatched to the specific building in alarm and will also receive information on the type and location of alarm. Only the building containing the alarmed device will evacuate. Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 7 The Fire Alarm Sequence of Operations is as follows: � W U 7 '� sEau��cE �F � ' ° � � � �� o��a�iar�s: � � � �°a z p � a `�`' � a } a � � Z � �� f9 � � � O J J p o (J �7�O � � � � ioll a � � � �, �. Q � �� v1 0] V7 � �j ¢ r 4 r a � z �� O n w p.a °'- z � a � n z `zw� � z � z � � � � Q � c} z ¢ �7� � � � sr � � � Z � Z � ° rr, Q v v+ ° '^ ° r,' o w — � — ,�t� rr � F � � � a�l110E � � � �� z � z � � � � � ? J �DfSCRiPTIOM ¢ � m ¢�U � � F a � a a o N a zz MAhlUNL PULL STATIONS X X X X s�o�� e�craRS iN urrrrs X X X x sn�o� Q�croas i� co�MO� aR�ns x X X ?C CARBUN Hl0�10%Yi7E DEfECTC1RS IN UNfTS x X 7C X WATERFL9W SWITGH � � � � Y,4LVE TMlPER SWITCH � }{ AC POWER LOSS X X GRDCJND FAllLT x }{ QPEtJ CIRCIDfffStfORT CIRCUIT � �' The existing fire alarm system for the Timber Ridge complex will be maintained in the areas of the complex not undergoing development. Prior to commencement of construction, a qualified fire alarm contractor will be employed to disconnect the buildings to be demolished from the existing fire alarm system. The new Lion's Ridge Apartments will have a new, dedicated fire alarm system installed; separate from the existing Timber Ridge system. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Fire extinguishers will be provided, commercial grade, type 10-BC. The fire extinguishers shall be mounted in cabinets, located so that the travel distance to a cabinet does not exceed 75'. Fire extinguishers shall be readily accessible. During construction, fire extinguishers will be provided in accordance with RA Nelson's document. Lions Ridge March 12, 2014 Life Safety Report Page 8 SUMMARY In conclusion, the Lions' Ridge project will be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and standards enforced by the Town of Vail. The design and construction team are committed to ensuring that adequate life safety is provided on this site and will work with Vail Fire & Emergency Services to develop effective firefighting strategies and a compliant system design. GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 41 00- BID FORM A Gorman &Company, Inc. Development Bids Due: Monday,April 14,2014 at @ 3:OOPM PROPOSAL Stacy Evert Gorman &Company, Inc. 200 N. Main Street Oregon,WI 53575 Phone: (608)835-7099 Fax: (608)835-3344 Email address: severt@gormanusa.com Contact Person regarding this bid: We (A Corporation) (A Partnership) (An Individual)-Cross out inapplicable of Street Address City Zip Code Telephone Number FAX Number Email Address hereby agree to execute proposed contract per plans and specifications in the amount specified and to furnish all labor and material required to complete specified work for Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes, 1280 North Frontage Road,Vail,CO,in strict accordance with Contract Documents prepared by the Architect,as stated above. Job No. 14LION-00-01 BID FORM 00 4100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 THIS BID COMBINES MULTIPLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. YES NO A SEPARATE BID FORM IS REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION OR PACKAGE BID. If a savings is realized by combining multiple Specification Sections,note YES above,designate the Sections covered and provide a single,combine bid sum below. THIS BID INCLUDES: (Select only one designation for the bid submitted.) DIVISION(S): SECTION(S): For lump sum of Dollars($ )* ADDENDUM RECEIPT We acknowledge the receipt of Addenda to inclusive. COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION OF CONTRACT WORK The undersigned agrees, if awarded the contract,to commence the contract work within 10 days of the issuance date of a written Notice to Proceed,expected around May 1, 2014 and to complete all of the work by August 2015. Subcontractor: For Base Bid (Complete with bid package or section number bid covers.) (Firm Name) By: Title: Attested: Dated: , 2014 NOTE THAT IF ANY CONTRACTOR WISHES TO BID MORE THAN ONE SECTION OR BID PACKAGE,A SEPARATE BID FORM IS REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION OR PACKAGE BID. *BIDS MUST REMAIN VALID FOR AT LEAST 60 DAYS FROM THE BID DUE DATE. END OF SECTION 00 4100 Job No. 14LION-00-01 BID FORM 00 4100-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 72 00- GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 The General Conditions applicable to this contract is attached following this page. RELATED REQUIREMENTS 2.01 Section 00 73 00-Supplementary Conditions. END OF DOCUMENT Job No. 14LION-00-01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00-2 '��'��°=AlA Document A201T" - 2007 .. ._ General Conditions of the Contracf for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and locn(ion or nddressJ Lion's Ridge Apartment Homes 200 N Maln S[reet ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of ihis document has Oregon, Wl 53575 added information needed for its THE OWNER: completion.ihe author may a�so have revised ihe text of the original (Name, lega!status and addressJ AIA standard form.An Additions and Lion's Ridge Apartrnent Homes, LLC. Deletions Report that notes added 200 N Main Sheet information as well as revisions to the Oregon,WI 53575 slandard form text is available from the aulhor and should be reviewed.A THE ARCHITECT: vertical line in the left margin of ihis I (IVame, legal status and address) document indicates where the author Gorman&Company, Inc. has added necessary iniormation 200 N Main Street and where the author has added to or Oregon,WI 53575 deleted i�om the original AIA text. TABLE OF ARTICLES This document has important Iegai consequences.Consullation with an 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS attomey is encouraged wim respect to its completion or modification. 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTR4CT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright O 1911,1915,1918,1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Illit. Inslitute of Architects.All righls reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protecteA by U.S.Copyright Law anA International Treaties.Unauthorizetl .� reproduction or distribution ot Ihis AIA'` Document,or any portion of il,may resWt in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be proseculed to Ihe � mazimumextentpossibleunderlhelaw.ThisdocumenlwasproducetlbyAlASOflwareatll'.32:01on03A7/2014untlerOrderNO.5175570675_twhichexpires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252096) INDEX ArchitecYs Administration of the Contract (Topics and numbers in bold are sec[ion headings.) 3.1.3,42,3.7.4, 152,9.4.1,9.5 Archi[ec['s Approvals 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,4.2.7 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Archi[ect's Authority to Reject Work 9.6.6,9.93, 12.3 3.5,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 123 1.1.7, I.5 Access to Work Architect's Decisions 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 3J.4, 4.2.6,4.2.7,42.1 I,4.2.12,42.13,4.2.14,63, Accident Prevention 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4, 99.1, l0 13.5.2, 15.2, L5.3 Acts and Omissions ArchitecYs Inspections 3.2,33.2,3.12.8,318,4.23,8.3.1,9.5.1, 10.2.5, 3.7.4, 4.22,42.9,9.4.2,9.83, 9,9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Architect's Instructions Addenda 3.2.4, 33.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 13.52 l.l.l,3.11 Architec['s Interpretations Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.1 I,4.2.12 3.7.4,39.5,6.1.1,73.7.5, ]03, 15.1.4 Architect's Project Representative Additional InspecNons and Testing 4.2.10 9.4.2,9.83, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architec['s Relationship with Contractor Additional Insured I J.2, L5,3.13,3.2.2,3.23,3.2.4,33.1, 3.4.2,3.5, ll.1.4 39.4, 39.5,3.9.2,3.93,3.10,3.1 l,3.12, 3.16,3.I8, Additional Time,Claims for 4J.2,4.I3,4.2,5.2,6.2.2,7,83.1,9.2,93, 9.4, 9.5, 3.2.4,39.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,8.3.2, 15.1.5 99,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, I03, I 139, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, 15.2 Administration of the Contract Architect's Relationship wi[h Subcontrac[ors 3.13,4.2,9.4,9.5 I.I.2,4.2.3,42.4,42.6,9.6.3, 9.6.4, I 1.3.7 Advertisemen[or Invitation to Bid Arohitect's Representations 1.L1 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Aesthetic Effect Architect's Si[e Visits 4.2.13 39.4,42.2,42.9,9.42,9.5.1, 9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Allowances Asbestos 3.8,73.8 10.3.1 All-risk Insurance Attorneys' Fees 113.1, I 13.1.1 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.33 Applications for Payment Award of Separate Contracts 4.2.5,73.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.63,9.7,9.10, I I J 3 6.1.I,6.12 Approvals Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 2.1.1,2.2.2,2.4, 3.1.3,3.10.2,3.12.8, 3.129,3J2.10, Portions of the Work 4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.5.1 5.2 Arbitrafion Basic Definitions � 83.1, I1.3JQ 13.1, 153.2, 15.4 1.1 : ARC}IITECT Bidding Requirements 4 l.l.l, 52.1, I1.4.1 Architect,Definition of Binding Dispu�e Resolution q,�,7 9.7, 113.9, 1 L3.IQ 13.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 153.1, Architect, Extent of Au[hority 15.32, 15.4.I 2.4,3.12.7,4.1,4.2, 52,63,7.1.2, 73.7, 7.4,92, Boiler and Machinery Insurance 93.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 11.3.2 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 142.4, 15.13, 152.1 Bands, Lien Architec[,Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 7.3.7.4,9.10.2,9.10.3 2.1.1,3.12.4,3.12.8, 3.12.10,4.12,4.2.1,4.2.2,4.23, Ronds, Performance,and Payment 4.2.6,42.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,42.13,5.2.I,7.4,9.4.2, 73.7.4,9.6.7,9.103, 11.3.9, 1 Ld 9.53,9.6.4, IS.I3, I5.2 Building Permit ArchitecPs Additional Services and Expenses 39.1 2.4, I 13.1.1, 122.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 AIA Document A20'I*"-2007.Copyri9hl�1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963,1966, 1970.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Inslitute oFArchitecls.All rights reservetl.WARNING:This AIA` Docvment is protectetl by U.S.Copyright Law antl Internalional Trealies.Unauthorized 2 reproAuclion or tlistribution of tliis AIA`' Document,or any portion of it,may resuit in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the � maximumexlentpossibleunderthelaw.ThisdocumentwasproducedbyAlAsoftwareat173201on03/17/2014underOrderNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on 08/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) Capitalization Compliance with Laws 1.3 1.6, 3.23,3.6,3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13,4J.1, 9.6.4, 1022, Certificate of Substantial Completion I I.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14J.1, 9.83,9.8.4,9.8.5 14.2.1.3, 152.8, 15.42, 15.43 Certificates for Payment Concealed or Unknown Condi[ions 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.29,933,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6, 97, 3.7.4,4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 9.L0.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.13, 14.2.4, 15.13 Conditions ofthe Contract Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval l.L I,6.1.1,6.1.4 13.5.4 Consent, Written Certificates of Insurance 3.4.2,3.7.4, 3.12.8,3J 4.2,4.1.2,932,9.8.5, 9.9.I, 9.L0.2, I IJ3 9.10.2,9.10.3, I13.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Change Orders Consolidation or Joinder 11.1,2.4,3.4.2,39.4,3.8.23,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8, I5.4.4 5.2.3,7.1.2,713,7.2,7.3.2,7.3.6,7.3.9,73JQ83.1, CONSTRUCTIONBYOWNERORBY 93.1.1,9.103, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, I I.3.9, 12.L2, SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 15.13 1.1.4, 6 Change Orders,Definition of Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.2.1 7.3.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK Construction Change Directives 2.2.1,3.11, 4.2.8,7,7.2.1,73.1, 7.4, 83.1,93.1.1, 1.1.1, 3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2, 7J.3, 7.3, 11.3.9 9.3.1.1 Claims,Definition of Construction Schedules,Contractor's ]51.1 3.1Q3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.13, 15.1.5.2 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Contingent Assignment of Subconh�acts 32.4,6.1.1,63,73.9,933,9.10.4, 1033, I5, 15.4 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract PerTm�mance 15.4.1 15.1.3 Claims for Additlonal Cost Contract,Definition of 3.2.4,3.7.4,6.1.1,7.3.9, 1032, 15.1.4 LL2 Claims tor Addifional Time CONTRAC'I','1'ERMINA7'ION OR 3.2.4,3J.4,6.1.1,83.2, 103.2, 15.1.5 SUSPENSION OF THE Concealed or Unkuowu Conditions,Claims for 5.4.1.1, I 1.3.9, 14 3.7.4 Contract Administra[ion Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4, 9.4, 9.5 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1,833,9.5.1,9.6.7, 1033, I I.l.l, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 113.5, I 13.7, 14.13, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 39.1, 3.IQ 5.2,6.1, I1.13, 113.6, I 1.4J 153.1, 15.4.1 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Cleaning Up 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 3.15, 63 Conh•act Documents, Definition of Commencement of[he Work,Conditions Relating to L1.1 2.2.1,3.22,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.23, Contract Sum : 62.2,8.I.2, 8.2.2, 83.1, I I.I, I13.I, I I3.6, I I.4.I, 39.4,3.8,5.2.3,7.2, 73,7.4,9.1,9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7, _ 15.1.4 9.7, 10.3.2, I1.3.1, 142.4, 1432, 15.1.4, 15.2.5 Commencement of the Work, Definilion of Contract Sum, Defini[ion of 8.1.2 9.1 Commnnications Facilitating Contract Contract Time Adminish•ation 39.4, 3J.5,3.102,52.3,7.2.I3,73.1, 73.5,7.4, 3.9.1,4.2.4 8.1.1, 82.1,83.1,9.5.1,9.7, 103.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, Completion,Conditions Relating to I5.L5.1, 15.2.5 3.4.1,311,3.15,4.22, 4.2.9,8.2, 9.4.2,9.8, 9,9.1, Contract Time, Detini[ion of 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 8.1.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTSAND CONTRACTOR 9 3 Completion, Subs[antial ConMactor, Defini[ion of 4.2.9, 8.1.1, SJ.3,8.23,9.4.2,9.8,9A.1,9.103, 12.2, 3.1,6.1.2 I3.7 AIA Document A20P"—2007.Copyright O 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966, 19�0,1976.1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute ofArchitecls.All rights reservetl.WARNING:This AIA� Document is prote<letl by LL5.Copyright Law antl Inlernalional Treaties.Unaulho�izeA 3 reprotluclion or dislribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to lhe � maximumextentpossibleunderthelaw.Thisdocumen�wasproducetlbyAlASOftwareaH13201on03/17/2014underOrderNo.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OS/12/2014,and is nolfor resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) Contractor's Construction Schedules Cutting and Patching 3.10,3.12.1,3J2.2, 6.13, 15.1.5.2 3.14, 62.5 Contractor's Employees Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate 33.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3J8.2,4.23,4.2.6, 10.2, 103, Contractors 11.1.1, 113.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 3.14.2,6.2.4, 10.2.12, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, Contractor's Liability Insurance 12.2.4 ll.l Damage[o the Work Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.142,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 102.5, 10.4, I 13.1, I22.4 and Owner's Forces Damages,Claims for 3.12.5,3.14.2,42.4,6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.2.4, 3J 8, 6.1.1,833,9.5.1,9.6.7, 1033, I I.l.l, ConVZC[or's Rela[ionship wi[h Subcontracrors I 13.5, 11.3.7, 14.13, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 1.2.2,3.32,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, Damages for Delay 113.I 2, I 13.7, I 13.8 6.L 1, 83.3, 9.5.1.6,9.7, 103.2 Contracror's Relationship with[he Architect Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 1.1.2, 1.5,3.13,3.2.2,3.23,3.2.4, 33.I, 3.4.2,3.5, 5.1.2 3.7.4,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.L8,4.13,4.2,5.2,6.2.2, Date oP Substantial Completion, Definition of 7,8.3.1,92,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, I 0.2.6, 103, 8.1.3 I1.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Day, Definition of Contractor's Representations 8.1.4 3.2.1,3.22,3.5,3.12.6,6.2.2, 82.1,9.3.3,9.82 Decisions of the Architect Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the 3J.4,42.6,4.2.7,4.2.I I,4.2.12,4.2.13, 15.2,6.3, Work 73.7, 73.9, 8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4, 9.9.1, 33.2,3.18,53,6.13,6.2, 9.5.1, I0.2.8 I3.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, I5.1, 15.2 Contractor's Review oPContract Documen[s Decisions to Withhold Certificafion 3.2 9.4.1, 9.5,9.7, 14.1.13 Contracror's Righ[to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, 9.7 Rejection and Correetion of Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 23,2.4,3.5,4.2.6,6.2,5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.82, 14.1, 15.1.6 9.93, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Contractor's Submittals Definitions 3.10, 3.11,3.12.4,4.2.7,5.2.1, 5.23, 9.2,93,9.8.2, 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12.1,3.122,3.12.3,4.1.1, 9.83,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.103, 11.1.3, 11.4.2 15.1.1,5.1, 6.1.2,7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1,9.1,9.8.I Conhactor's Superintendrnt Delays and Extensions of Time 3.9, 10.2.6 32, 3.7.4,52.3, 7.2.I, 73.I,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,97, Contractor's Supervision and Construction 103.2, 10.4, 14.32, I5.L5, 15.2.5 Procedures Disputes 1.2.2,33,3.4, 3.12.1 Q 4.2.2,4.29,6.1.3,6.2.4,7.13, 63, 73.9, I5.1, 15.2 73.5,73.7, 8.2, I Q 12, 14, 15.13 Uocuments and Samples at the Site Contractual Liability[nsurance 3.11 II.l.L8, ll2 Urawings, Definition of Coordination and Correlation 1.L5 1.2,32.1,33.1, 3.10,3.12.6,6.13,62.1 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of : Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 3.1 I : � I.S, 2.2.5,3.11 Effective Date of Insurance Copyrigh[s 8.2.2, I1.12 L5,3.17 Emergencies Correction of Work 10.4, 14.1.1.2, ISJ.4 2.3,2.4,3J3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2 Employees, Contractor's Correlation aod Intent of the Cm�h'act Documents 33.2, 3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.182,423,4.2.6, 10.2, 1.2 10.3.3, I I.LI, I13.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Cost,Definition of Equipmen[, Labor,Materials or 7.3.7 1.1.3, I J.6,3.4, 3.5, 3.82,3.83,3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, Costs 4.2.6,429,5.2.I,6.2.1, 739,9.3.2, 9.33,9.5.1.3, 2.4,3.2.4,3J.3,3.8.2,3J5.2, 5.4.2,6.1.1,6.23, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 142.1.1, 14.2.L2 7333,73.7, 73.8,73.9,9.10.2, 103.2, 103.6, I 13, 12.I2, 12.2.1, 132.4, 13.5, 14 AIA Document A201'"-20W.Copyright�1911,1915,7918,1925,1937,1951, 1956,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976.1987,1997 and 2007 by The American IOIt. InstiWte of Architects.All rights reservetl.WAftNING This AIA'` Documenl is protected by U.S.Copyriyht law antl Inlernalional Treaties.Unauthorized 4 reproduclion or tlislribution o!this AIA` Oocument,or any portion of it,may resWt in severe civil anA criminal penalties,antl will be prosecutetl to the � mazimwn extent possible underthe law.Thisdocumeniwas pmduced byAlAsoftware at N'.32:01 on 03/17/2014 under Order No.5175570675_i which expires on 08/12/2014,and is not for resale. llserNotes: (2054252098) Execution and Pro+oress of the Work Insurance,Boiler and Machinery L 13, 12.1, 1.2.2,2.23,22.5,3.1,33.1, 3.4.1,3.5, 11.3.2 3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12,3.14,42,6.2.2,7.13,73.5, 8.2, Insurance,Contractor's Liability 9.5.1,9.9.1, 10.2, 103, 12.2, 142, 143.1, 15.13 ll.l Eatensions of Time Insurance, Effective Date of 3.2.4,39.4,52.3,7.2.1,73,7.4,9.5.1,9.7, 103.2, 822, 11.1.2 10.4, 143, ISJ.S, 15.2.5 Insurance,LossoPUse Failure of Payment 11.3.3 9.5.1.3,9J,9.102, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Ownei's Liability Faulty Work 11.2 (See Defec[ive or Nonwnforming Work) Insm•ance,Property �7nal Completion and Final Payment 10.2.5, 11.3 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,910, 11.12, 11.13, I I3.1, I 13.5, Insurance, Srored Materials 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.43 93.2 Financial Arrangements,Owner's INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 11 Fire and Extended Coverage[nsurance Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy I13.1.1 99.1 G ENERAL PROVISIONS Intent of the Contraet Docwnents � 1.2.1,4.2.7,42.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Governing Law Interest 13.1 13.6 Guarantees(See Warzanry) Interpretation Hazardous Materials L23, 1.4,4.LI,5.1,6.12, I5.1 J ]02.4, 10.3 Interpretations, Writ[en ldentification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 4.2.1 l,4.2.12, 15.1.4 52.1 Judgment on Final Award Indemnification �5.4.2 3.17,3.IS,9.10.2, ]0.33, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, I 1.3.1.2, Labor and Ma[erials, Equipment ��3,� l.l 3, I.I.6,3.4, 3.5, 3.82,3.8.3,3.12, 3.13,3.I5.I, Information and Services Required of the Owner 42.6,42.7, 5.2.1,62.1,7.3.7,9.3.2, 9.33,9.SJ 3, 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.2,3.12.4,3.l2.I Q 6.I3,6.1.4,62.5, 9.I 02, 10.2.1, I 0.2.4, 14.2.L I, I4.2.I.2 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.103, 10.33, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, Labor Disputes L3.5.2, 14.I.I.4, I4.1.4, I5.I3 8.3J Initial Decision Laws and Regulations 15.2 L5,3.23,3.6,3.7, 3.12.10,3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4,9.9.1, Initial Decision Maker, Definifion of 10.2.2, I I.I.I, I 13, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.52, 13.6, 1.1.8 14, 152.8, 15.4 Ini[ial Decision Maker, Decisions Liens 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 152.1, 15.2.2, 1523, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 2.1.2, 933, 9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 Initial Decision Maker,Exten[of Authority Limitations,Statutes of 14.2.2, 142.4, 15.13, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.23, 15.2.4, 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 : 15.2.5 Limitatiuns of I.iability -. - Injm•y or Damage to Person or Property 23, 322,3.5,3.12.I Q 3.17,3J 8.1,4.2.6,4.29, 10.2.8, 10.4 42.12,62.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7, 10.2.5, 1033, I I.I.2, Inspections I1.2, I13.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 3.13,3.33,39.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9, 9.42,9.83, Limitations ofTime 99.2,9.10.I, 12.2.I, I 3 S 2.L2, 22,2.4,322, 3.I Q 3.I I,3.I2.5,3 J 5.1,429, Instructions to Bidders 52, 5.3, 5.4.1,62.4, 73,7.4, 82, 9.2,93.1,93.3, I.L L 9.4.I, 9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, 9.10, 1 I.I 3, I I 3.L 5, Instructions ro[he Contractor I 13.6, I 1.3.IQ 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, IS 3.2.4,33.1,3.8.1,5.2.1, 7, 8.22, 12, 13.52 Loss of Use Insm•ance Instruments of Service, Definition of 11.3.3 �,�,� Matuial Suppliers Insurance 1.5, 3.12.1,4,2.4,42.6,52.1,9,3,9.4.2,9.6,9J0.5 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.21, 9.10.2, I1 MNtcrials,H�zardous 10.2.4, 10.3 AIA Document A201'"—20%.Copyright O 1917,1915,1918,1925,7937,1951.1958,1961,1963.1966, 1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Inif. InstiWte of Architecis.All rights reserved.WNRNING:This AIA�"� �ocument is protecletl by U.S.Copyriyht Law and Intemational Treaties.Wiauthorized 5 reprotluction or distribution of this AIA' Documenl,or any portion of it,may resWt in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecutetl to the � manimumextentpossibleuntlerGielaw.ThistlocumentwaspmducedbyAlAsoftwareat1132-Oton03/17/2014underOrderNO.5175570675_lwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,andis nol/orresale. UserNOles: (2054252098) Materials, Labor, Equipmen[and O�mer's Authority 1.13, 1.I.6, L5.1,3.4.1,3.5, 3.82,3.83, 3.12,3.13, 1.5,2.1.1,23,2.4, 3.4.2,3.8.I,3.12.10,3.14.2,4.L2, 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.29, 5.2.1,62.1, 739,93.2, 933, 4.13, 4.2.4,42.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, 6.1, 63, 7.2.1, 9.5.1.3,9.102, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 142.1.1, 14.2.I.2 73.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1,93.I,9.3.2,9.5.1, 9.6.4,9.9.1, Means,Methods,Techniques, Sequences and 9J 0.2, 103.2, I 1.1.3, I 133, 113.10, 12.2.2, 123, Procedures of Construction 13.2.2, 143, 14.4, 15.2.7 33.1,3.12.IQ 4.2.2,4.2.7, 9.4.2 Owner's Financial Capability Mechanids Lien 2.2.1, I3.2.2, �4.1.1.4 2.1.2, 15.2.8 Owner's Liability Insurance Mediation 11.2 8.3.1, 103.5, 103.6, L5.2.1, 152.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 15.4.I I.l.2, 5.2,5.3,5.4, 9.6.4,9.10.2, I 4.2.2 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Right to Carry Out fhe Work 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1,7.4 2.4, 14.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owne�'s Right to Clean Up 13 6.3 Modifica6ons, Defini[ion of OwnePs Right to Perform Construction and to 1,1,I Awa rd Separate Contracts Modifications to the Contrac[ 6.1 1.1.1, L12,3.11,4.L2,4.2.1, 5.23,7, 83.1,9.7, Owner's Right to Stop the Work ]0.3.2, 113.1 2.3 Mutu�l Responsibility Owner's Right ro Suspend the Work 6.2 143 Nonconforming Work,Acceptancc of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.6.6,9.93, 12.3 14.2 Nonconforming Work,Rejec[ion and Correction of Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications 23,2.4,3.5,42.6, 6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, and Other InsMuments of 5ervice 12.2.1 I.I.I, I J.6, 1.1.7,1.5,2.2.5,3.2.2,3.I I,3.I7,42J 2, Notice 53 2.2.1,23,2.4,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.129, 5.2.1,99, Partial Occupancy or Use 9.1Q L0.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 133, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 9.6.6,9.9, 113.1.5 14.1, 142, 152.8, 15.4.1 Patching,Cutting and Notice,Writteo 3.14, 6.2.5 23,2.4,33.1,3.9.2,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2.I,9J,9.IQ Patents 10.2.2, 103, 1 L 13, 113.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, I 4, I 5.2.8, 3.17 15.4.1 Payment, Applications for Notice of Claims 42.5, 73.9,9.2, 9.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.7,9.8.5,9.10.1, 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 14.23, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Notice ofTesting and Inspections Payment,Certificates for 13.S.1, 13.52 4.2.5,4.2.9,933,9.4,9.5,9.6.I,9.6.6,99,9.10.1, Observations,ConVactor's 9.103, 13.7, 14.L1.3, 14.2.4 3.2,3.7.4 Payment, Failure of : Occupancy 9.5.13,9.7,9.102, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 142.12 �, 22.2,9.6.6,9.8, I 13J.5 Payment, Final Orders,Written 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.IQ 11.1.2, 11.13, I 1.4.1, 123, I.1.1,23,3.9.2,7,8.22, I 1.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.52, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.43 143.1 Payment Bond, PerPormance Bond and O W NER 73.7.4,9.69,9.I 03, I 1.4 z Payments, Progress Owuer,Definition of 93, 9.6, 9.8.5,9.103, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.13 2.1.1 PAYMEN7'S AND COi�1PLET10N Owner,Information nnd Services Required of the 9 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.2,3.12.1 Q 6.I.3,6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2, Payments to Subwntractors 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.33, 11.2, I 1.3, 13.5.1, 5.4.2,9.SJ 3,9.62, 9.6.3, 9.6.4,9.6.7, 142.1.3 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.13 PCB 103.1 AIA Documenl A201'"-20 W.Copyright OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architecls.All rights reservetl.WARNING:This AIA' Docmnent is pro[ected by U.S.Copyriyht Law anA International Treaties.Unauthorired 6 reprotluction or distrihution of lhis FIA° Document,or any portion ot il,may residt in severe civil anA criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the � manimum extent possibie under lhe law.Thisdocumenlwas produced byAlASOflware a111:32:01 on 03/17/2014 untlerOrder No.5175570675_t which expires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) Performance Bond and Payment Bond Rules and No[ices for Arbitration 73.7.4,9.6.7,9.103, 11.4 15.4.1 Permits, Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws Safety of Persons and Property 2.2.2,39,3.I3, 73.7.4, 10.2.2 10.2, 10.4 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF Safety Precautions and Programs 10 33.1, 4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Samples, Detinition of 103.1 3.12.3 Product Data, Definition of Samples,Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.12.2 3.1 l,3.12,4.2J Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Samples at thc Site, Documents anci 3.11,3.12,42.7 3.11 Progress and Completion Schedule of Values 4.22,8.2,9.8,99.1, 14.1.4, 15J.3 9.2,93.1 Progress Payments Schedules,Construction 93, 9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, I 5.13 3.I Q 3.I 2.1, 3.12.2, 6.13, I5.L5.2 Project,Definition of Separate Contracts and Contrac[ors 1.1.4 l.l.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,42.4, 42.7,6, 83.1, 12.L2 Pruject Representatives Shop Drawings, Defini[ion of 4.2.10 3��z•� Property Insurance Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 10.2.5, 11.3 3.1 I,3.12,4.2.7 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Sitc,Use of 10 3.13,6.1.1,62.1 Regulations and Laws Si[e Inspec[ions 1.5,3.23,3.6, 3.7,3.12.10, 3.I3,4.1.1, 9.6.4, 99.1, 3.2.2,3.33,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 10.2.2, 11.1, I1.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, Site Visits, Architect's 15.2.8, 15.4 3.7.4,4.2.2, 42.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2, 9.10.I, 13.5 Rejection of Work Special Inspections and Testing 3.5,4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Releases and Waivers of Liens Specifications,Definition of 9.10.2 1.1.6 Represen[ations Specifications 3.2.1,3.5,3.12.6,622,8.2.I,933,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.8.2, I.I.I, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, I.5, 3.1 I,3.12.10, 3.17,4.2.14 q.�p.� Statute of Limitations Representatives 13.7, 15.4.1.1 2.L I,3.1.1,39,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.2,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, Stopping the Work �3.2,� 23,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Responsibility for Those Performingthe Work Stored Materials 33.2,3.18, 4.23, 53,6.13,62,63,9.5.1, 10 6.2.1, 93.2, 10.2.L2, 10.2.4 Retainage Subcontractor, Definition of 93.I,26.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9J 03 5.L 1 � Review of Contract Documents and Field SURCONTRACTORS : Conditions by Contractor 5 3.2,3.12.7,6.13 Subcontractors, Work by Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 122,33.2, 3.12.1,423,52.3,5.3,5.4,93.L2,9.6J Archi[ect Subconh�actaal Relations 3.10.1,3.102,3.11, 3.12,4.2, 5.2,6.13,9.2,9.8.2 5.3,5.4, 9.3.1.2,9.6,9.1Q 10.2.1, 14.1, 142.1 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Submittals by Contractor 3.1 Q 3.I I,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1, 52.3,739,9.2,93,9.8, 3.12 99.1, 9.10.2,9.103, I 1.13 Rights aud Remedies Submittal Schedule 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5, 3.7.4,3.I 52,4.2.6,5.3, 5.4,6.I, 3J 0.2,3.12.5,4.29 63,73.1,83,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 103, 12.2.2, 122.4, Subrogation,Waivcrs of 13.4, 14, 15.4 6.1.1, 11.39 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.17 AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright OO 1911.1915,1918.1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,199�and 2007 by The American Init. InstiWte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING This AIA" Document is protectetl by U.S.Copyri�ht Law and Intemational Treaties.Unauthorizetl 7 reproAuction or Aistribution of Hiis AIA' DocumenQ or any portion of it,may res�dt in severe civil antl cnminal penalties,and will be prosecuted lo Ihe � maniinumextenlpossibleunAerthelaw.ThisdocumeMwasproducedbyAlASOfhvareatN32-.01on03/17I2014underOrderNO5175570675_lwhichexpires on OB112/2014,antl is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) Substantial Completion Time Limits 4.2.9, 8.L I, 8.13,8.23,9.4.2,9.8,99.1,9.I03, 12.2, 2.1.2, 22,2.4,3.2.2,3.10, 3.1 I,3.12.5,3.15.L,4.2, 13J 52,53,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9,3.1,933,9.4.1, Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.1 Q I 1.13, 12.2, 13.5, I3.7, I4, 9.81 15.1.2, 15.4 Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims 5.23, 5.2.4 3.7.4, 102.8, 13.7, 15.12 Substimtion of Architect Title[o Wark 4.13 9.32, 933 Substitutions of Matcrials Transmission of Data in Digital Form 3.4.2,3.5, 73.8 1.6 Sub-subcontractor,Definition of UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 5.1.2 12 Subsurface Condi[ions Uncovering af Work 3.7.4 12.1 Successors and Assigns Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown 13.2 3.7.4, 83.1, 103 Superintendent Unit Prices 3.9, 10.2.6 7.33.2,73.4 Supervision and Construction Procedures Use of Documents 12.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.1Q4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,62.4,7.13, IJ.1, 1.5,2.2.5,3.12.6, 53 73.7,8.2,83.1,9.4.2, 10, l2, l4, 15.13 Use of Site Surety 3.13, 6.1.1,6.2.1 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5,9.10.2,9.L03, 14.22, 15.29 Values,Sched�Je of Surety, Consent of 9.2, 93.I 9.10.2,9.103 Waiver of Claiins by the Architect Surveys 13.42 223 Waiver ofClaims by[he Contractor Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 9.10.5, 13.4.2, I5.1.6 14.3 Waiver of Claims by Ihe Owner Suspension ofthe Work 99.3, 9J03,9.10.4, 1222.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver ofConsequential Damages Suspension or Termination uf[he Contract 142.4, 15.1.6 5.4.1.1, 14 Waiver of Liens Tazes 9.10.2,9.10.4 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.7.4 Waivers of Subrogation Termination by the Contractor 6.L I, I 1.3J 14.1, 15.1.6 Warranty Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5,429,9.33,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13J 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 Weather Delays Termination by the Owner i'm�Convenience I5.L5.2 �q,q Work, Definition of _ TerminationoftheArohitect L1.3 ; 4J 3 Written Consent Tennination of the Contractor 1.52, 3.4.2,37.4,3.12.8,3.142,4.I.2,9.3.2, 9.8.5, 14.2.2 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, I 1.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 TERMINATIONORSUSPF.NSIONOFTHE Writlenlnterpretations CONTRACI' 42.1 I,4.2.12 14 Written No[ice � Tests aud [uspections 23, 2.4, 33.I,3.9,3.12.9, 3.12.I Q 5.2.1, 8.2.2,9.7, 3.13,33.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2, 9.8.3,99.2, 9.10, 10.2.2, 103, I 1.1.3, I 2.2.2, I2.2.4, 13.3, 14, 9.10.I, I03.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 15.4.1 TIME Written Orders g I.L I, 2.3,3.9,7, 822, 12.1, 122, 13.52, 14.3.1, Time, Delays anJ Extensions of 15.12 3.2.4,3J.4,5.23, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4,8.3,9.5.1, 99, 1032, 10.4, 14.3.2, ISJ.S, 15.2.5 AIA Document A20P"-2007.Copyright�7911,1915.1918.1925.1937.1951, 1958,19fi1, 1963,7966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init Institute of Architec�s.All righis reserved.WARNING This AIA' Document is AwtecleA by U.S.Copyright Law and In[ernational Treaties.Unauthorized $ reproduclion or Aistribution o(lhis AIA'" Docwnenq or any portion ot it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,anA will be prosecuted to lhe � maximmn extent possible imtler lhe law.Thisdocumen(was producetl byAlAsoftware at N32'.01 on 03/17/2014 underOrder No.5175570675_1 which expires on 08/12/2014,antl is nolfor resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 7.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerz[ed in lhe Agreement be[ween [he Ovmu and Con[ractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist oF[he Agreement,Condi[ions ofthe Contrac[(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,Specifica[ions, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreemen[ and Modifica[ions issued after execution of the ContracL A Modification is(I)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construc[ion Chznge Direclive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Amhitect Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instmctions to Bidders,sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,Ihe Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. § 7.1.2 THE CONTRACT 'Ihe Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents Ihe entire and integated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oraL'Ihe Conhact may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contracl Documents shall not be eonstrued to create a contractual relationship of any kind Q)between Ihe Conlractor and[he Architect or the Architect's consultants,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontrac[or, (3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Arehitect's consultants or(4)be[ween any persons or en�i[ies other than tlie Owner and the Contractor.'I1ie Architee[shall,however,be entiUed to perfonnance and enforoement of obligations under the Contrac[intended to facilitate performance of the ArohitecYs duties. § 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work"means the constructioo and services required by the Contract Documen[s, whether completed or partially completed,and includes all o[her labor,materials,equipment and serviees provided or ro be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a par[of the Project. § 1.1.4THE PROJECT The Projeet is the total construction ofwhich the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by[he Owner and by separa[e contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of lhe Contract Documents showing the design,loeation and dimensions ofthe Work,generally including plans,elevations, sections,details, schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requiremen[s for materials, equipment,systems, standazds and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. § 1.1.71NSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instmments ofService are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,ofthe tangible : and intzngible creative work performed by the Architect and the ArchitecPs consultants under Iheir resputive : professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation,studies,surveys, models, ske[ches,drawings,specificalions,and other similar materials. § 1.1.81NITIAL DECISION MAKER The Ini[ial Decision Maker is Ihe person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 znd cer[ify termination of the Agreement imder Section 14.2.2. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;perfonnance by the Contractor shall be required only to the exten[consistent wilh the ConVac[ Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary lo produce the indicated results. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966,1970.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American IOIt. InstiNte of Architecis.All righls teserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protecletl by U.S.Copyrighl Law antl International Treaties.Unauthorizetl 9 reprotluclion or distribution o/this AIA'� Documm�t,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,antl will be proseculeA to the � maximumextenlpossibleunAerthelaw.ThisdocumeniwasproducedbyAlASOfRVareat113201on03/�7I2014underOrderNa5175570675_iwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) § 1.2.2 Organization ofthe Specifica[ions into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work lo be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words tha[have well-known technical or cons[ruction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance wi[h such recognized meanings. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Condi[ions include those that are(1)specifically defined,(2)the[iUes of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1,41NTERPRETATION In the interest ofbrevity theConreact Documents frequentty omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and uticles such as"the"and"an,"but[he fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one s[atemen[and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpreta[ion of either statement. § 1.50WNERSHIP AND USE Of DR4WINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1.5.1 'Ihe Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Ins[ruments ofService,including[he Drawings and Specifications,and will retain all common law,statu[ory and other reserved rights,including copyrigh[s.The Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyrigh[in the Instruments of Service. Submit[al or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Arehitect's or Architect's consul[ants' reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Conhactor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment supplius are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided ro them solely and exclusively for execution of[he Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyrigh[notice, if any,shown on[he Instruments of Service.The Contractor,Subconhac[ors, Sub-subcontracrors,and material or equipmen[suppliers may not use Ihe Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of Ihe Work without the specific writ[en wnsent ofthe Owner,Arehi[ect and the Architect's consultants. § 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM Ifthe parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form,they shall endeavor to establish necessary prorocols governing such transmissions,unless otlierwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contrac[ Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is[he person or entity identified as such in[he Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Docwnents as if singtdar iit number.The Owner shall designa[e in writing a represen[ative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect ro al I matters requiring Ihe Owner's approval or autliorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The tenn "Owner"means[he Owner � or the Owner's au[horized representative. � § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receip[of a writ[en reques[, information oecessary and relevant for Ihe Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforee mechanids lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statemwt of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as[he site,and the Owne�'s interest therein. § 2.21NFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 2.2.1 Prior to commencemen[of the Work,the Contractor may request in wri[ing that[he O�v��er provide reasonable evidence that the O�v�ier has made financial arrangemen[s to fulfill the Ownei's obligations imder the Contract. Thereafter,the Contractor may only request such evidence if(I)the OHmer fails to make payments to the Contracmr as the Contract Documents rcquire;(2)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum;or(3)the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding[he Owner's ability to make payment when due.The Owner shall fiirnish such evidence as a condition precedent ro commencement or continuation of the Work or the AIA Document A201`"—2007.Copyright OO 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,t966,1970,1976,198].1997 antl 2007 by The American IniL InstiWte of Archilecis.All rights reserved.WARNING This AIA' Document is protectetl by U.S.Copyright Law antl International Treaties.Unauthorized .�O reprotluc[ion or distribution of lhis AIA' �ocument,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil anA criminal penalties,antl will be pmsecutetl to the � maximumexlentpossibleuntlerlhelaw.ThisdocumentwasproducedbyAlASOflwareal113201on03/17/2014underOrderNo.5P5570675_lwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,antl is not for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) portion of the Work aftected by a materizl change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence,the Owner shall no[ materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to Ihe Conhactor. § 2,2,2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documen[s, ineluding those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easemen[s, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent striw[ures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.2.3 The Ow�rer shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Projec[,and a legal description of the site. The ConVactor shall be entitled to rely on tl�e accuracy of information fumished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe perfonnznce of the Work. § 2.2A The Owner shall furnish infonnation or services required of[he Owner by[he Contract Documents with reasonable promp[ness.The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under[he Owner's conhol and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work wi[h reasonable prompmess after receiving[he Contractor's written request for such informa[ion or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to lhe Contrac[or one copy of Ihe Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant ro Section 1.5.2. § 2.30WNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK [fthe Contractor fails to correet Work Iha[ is not in accordznce with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedty fails to carry out Work in accordance with Ihe Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contrac[or to stop the Work,or any portion Ihereof, until tlie cause for such order has been eliminated;liowever,the right of[he Owner lo stop Ihe Work shall no[give rise[o a duty on the part uf lhe Ovmer to exeroise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extenl required by Section 6.13. § 2.40WNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK Ifthe Contractor defaults or neglects to carry ou[the Work in zccordanee with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receip[of written notice from the Owner to cominence and wntinue correction of such defaul[or neglect with diligence and promptness,[he Owner may,without prejudice ro other remedies Ihe Owner may have,correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deduc[ing from payments then or thereafter due[he Contractor the reasonable cosl of correeting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and eompensation for the Arehitect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and zmounts charged to the Contractor are botli subjec[to prior approval of the ArchitecL If paymen[s then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficien[to cover such amoimts,the Contractor shall pay[he difference[o the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL : § 3.7.1 The Contractor is the puson or entiry identified as such in the Agreement end is referred lo throughout�he �, Contract Docume�its as if singular in nwnber.The Contractor shall be lawfidly licensed, ifrequired in lhejurisdic[ion where Ihe Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express au[hority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this ContracL The term "Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Conhaclor shall not be relieved of obliga[ions to perform[he Work in aceordance witli the Contract Docmnents either by ac[ivities or dulies of the Architect in the ArchitecYs administration of the Conh�act,or by[ests, inspections or approvals required or perfonned by persons or entities other than the Contractor. AIA Document A20'I'"—20W.Copyright�1911.1915,1916,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966, 1970.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute o(Amhitects.All rights reserved.WARNING This AIAs �ocument is pwtected by LLS.Copyri�ht Law and International Trealies.Unauthorized 11 reproduction or tlistribution of this AIA� Document,or any portion of it,inay result in severe civil antl criminal penalties,anA will be pmsecuted to the � mazimwne#entpossibleuntlerthelaw.ThisdocumeniwasproducetlbyAlAsoftwareal11:32:01on03/17/2014underOrderNo.5175570fi75_lwhichexpires on OBA 2I2014,and is not for resale. UserNolas: (2054252098) § 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTR4CTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of[he Contract by Ihe Contractor is a representation[ha[Ihe ConVacror has visi[ed[he site,become generally familiar with local condi[ions under which[he Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contrac[Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complemen[ary, Ihe Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work,carefully smdy and compare the various Contract Documents relztive[o that portion of the Work,as well as the informa[ion furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.23, shall[ake field measurements of any existing wndi[ions related to that portion of the Work,and shzll observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations aze for the purpose of facili[a[ing coordina[ion and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of diseovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contraet Documen[s;however,the Contractor shal I prompdy report to the Arehitect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions diseovered by or made w�own to the Contractor as arequest for information in such form as the Architect may require. I[is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contraetor and not as a licensed design professional,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required[o ascer[ain that[he Contract Documents are in accordanee with applicable laws, statutes,ordinances, codes, rules and regula[ions,or lawful orders of'public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Arehitect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contraetor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 Ifthe Contractor believes that additional wst or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Archilect issues in response to the Contracror's no[ices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 32.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article I5. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 32.2 or 3.23,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Con[ractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architec[ for damages resulting ftom errors,inconsis[encies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Conhact Documents to applicable lews, s[atutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 3.3.1 The Contrector shall supervise and dirut Ihe Work, using the Contrac�or's best skill and atten[ion.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for,and have conVOl over,construc[ion means,metliods,techniques,sequences and proeedures and for coordinating all portions of[he Work under the Contract,unless[he Contract Documents give other specific iostructions concerning Ihese mattera Ifthe Contract Documents give specifie instmetions coneerning construc[ion means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate thejobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fidly and solely responsible for[hejobsite safety ofsuch means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures.Ifthe Contractor determines that such means,methods,techniques,sequences or � proeedures may no[be safe, the Contractor shall give[imely written notice to the Owner and Arohitect and shzll no[ proceed wilh that por[ion ofthe Work without fiv[her wri[ten instructions from the Archi[ect Ifthe Contrac[or is tlien instructed to proceed with the required means,methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of - changes proposed by the Contractor,[he Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from �. Ihose Owneo-required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Con[ractor shall be responsible ro[he Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and o[her persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,[he Contractor or any of i[s Subeontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspec[ion of portions of Work already performed to deterniine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in [he Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, ma[erials,equipmenl,tools,construction equipment and m�chinery, water,heat, utilities,transpor[a[ion,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execu[ion and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanen[ and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright OO 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937.1951, 1958,1961.1963,1966, 1970,1976,1967,1997 antl 2007 by The American I�It. Institute of Amhitects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'�Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law anA International Trealies.Unauthorized .12 reproduction or Aishibution o(lhis AIA' Document,or any portion of iQ may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be proseculetl to the � maximumextentpossibleuntlerthelaw.ThisdocumentwasprotlucedbyAlAsoftwareat1132�.01on03A]I2014underOrderNa5175570675_iwhichexpires on OBA2/2014,antl is nol(or resale. UserNOtas: (2054252098) § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work au[horized by the Architect in zccordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4,the Contractor may make subs[itutions only with[he consen[ofthe Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying ou[[he Work.The Contractor shall no[ permit employment of unfit persons or persons not property skilled in tasks assi�ied to[hem. § 3.5 WARRANTY Tk�e Con[ractor warrants to the Owner and Architect Ihat materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or pennit otherwise.The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free&om defects,except for those inherent in the quality oFthe Work the Contrzc[Docwnents require or permiL Work,materials,or equipment not conforming to these requiremen[s may be considered defective. The Contractor's wzrranty excludes remedy for damage or defec[caused by abuse, alterations to Ihe Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenanee,improper operaGOn, or nonnal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall fwnish sa[isfacrory evidence as ro the kind and qualiry of materials and equipment. § 3.6 TAXES 'Ihe Contractor shall pay sales, consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or nego[iations concluded,whether or no[yet efteetive or merely scheduled[o go into effect. § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in Ihe Contrac[Documents,the Con[ractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as Por other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper exeeution and completion ofthe Work that are customarily secured after exeeution ofthe Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 37.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances, codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.31fthe Contracror performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,ndes and regulations,or lawCul orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. Ifthe Contraclor encounters conditions at the site that are(I)subsurface or otherwise concealed physieal conditions tha[differ materially from those indicated in tlie Contract Documents or (2)unknown physical condilions of an unusual nature, lha[differ materially from Ihose ordinarily found to exis[and generally recognized as inheren[in construc[ion activities of Ihe characler provided for in the Contract Documents,[he Contractor shall promptly provide notice ro the Owner and the Architec[ before conditions are disturbed and in no : event later[han 2I days after first observance of the conditions.The Arohitect will promptly imestigate such : � conditions and, if the Arohitect determines lha[they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cos[of,or time required for, perfurmance of any par[of the Work, wiil recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both. If tlie Architect determines tl�at the conditions at the site are not materially different ftom tliose indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms ofthe Contract isjustified,lhe Architecl shall promplly no[ify Ihe Owner and Contractor in writing,slaling Ihe reasons. If either party disputes the ArchitecPs determination or recommendation,that party may piroeeed as provided in Article I5. § 3.7.5 If, in[he course of Ihe Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes[he existence of burial markers,archaeological siles or wetlands not indicated in the Contrac[Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them znd shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, Ihe Owner shall promptly[ake any zc[ion necessary to obtain governmental authoriration required to resume the operalions.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such opera[ions unlil otl�erwise instmeted by the Owner bu[shall con[inue with al I other operations that do no[affect those remains or features.Requests for adjustmenls in[he Contrac[ Sum and Contract Time arising front the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Articla 15. AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyriqht OO 1911.1915,1918.1925, 7937,1951,1958.1967,1963,1966,1970.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Itlit. InstiNte of Architects.All rights reservetl.WARNWG This AIAT� Document is pwtecteA by LLS.Copyright Law and hrterna[ional Treaties.UnauthorizeA 13 reprotluction or Aistribution o(lhis AIA' Documenq or any portion of it,may resWt in severe civil antl criminal penalties,antl will be prosecuteel to lhe � maximumextentpossibleunAerthelaw.ThisdocumeniwasproducedbyAlASO(twareat1132'.01on03/1]/2014untlerOrderNO.5175570675_lwhichexpires on 08/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in[he Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amoimts and by such persons or entities as theOwner may direc[,bul [he Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom Ihe Contractor has reasonablc objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in Ihe Contract Doeuments, .1 Allowances shall cover the cos[to[he Conhaclor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required[zxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 ContractoPs eosts for imloading and handling at the site, labor,installation costs, overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for s[ated allowance amounts shell be ineluded in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and .3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,�he Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reFlect(1)the difference between zctual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selec[ed by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in a[tendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represen[the Contractor,and communica[ions given to the superintendent shall be as bindiog as if given to the Contracror. § 3.9.2"Phe Contractor,as soon as practieable after award of the Con[ract, shall furnish in writing to the O�mer through the Architec[the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating(I)whether the Owner or the Archi[ect has reasonable objec[ion ro the proposed superintendent or(2)that the Archi[ect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall eonstitute�io[ice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contraetor shzll not change Ihe superintendent without tlie Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delzyed. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded Ihe Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and ArchitecPs information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The sehedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shzll be revised at appropria[e intervals as required by the condilions of the Work and Project, shall be related[o the entire Projec[to the extent required by the Contract Documen[s,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to main[ain a current submittal schedule,and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect's approval. : The Architect's approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall (I)be �, coordinated with the Contraetor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.Ifthe Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,the Contractor shall not be entitled to any inerease in Contract Sum or ex[ension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3'The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with lhe mos[recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Archilec[. § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall main[ain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings,Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked cwrently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Ardiitect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of[he Work as a record of the Work as constructed. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright�1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,186�,�963,1966,1970,i W6,1987,t997 and 2007 by The American Init. InstiNte of Architecls.All rights reservetl.WARNING,This AIA'` Document is protecletl by U.S.Copyriqht Law antl Intemational Treaties,Unauthorized 74 reprotluction or distribulion of this AIA" Documenl,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil antl criminal penaities.and will be pmsecuted to the � maximumextenlpossiblew�Aerlhelaw.Thisdocumen[waspmducedbyAlASOftwareat1132�.01on03/17/2014underO�derNo.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OS/12I2014,and is not fo�resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrains,schedules and other data specially prepared for Ihe Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustra[e some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illus[rations,standard schedules,performance charts, instructions, brochures,diagrams and other information fumished by Ihe Contractor[o illustrate materials or equipmenl for some portion of[he Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment or workmznship and es[ablish s[andards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose is to demonstrate[he way by which the Contracror proposes to conform to the inforn�ation given and[he desigi concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submi[[als.Review by the Architec[is subject to the limitations of Section 42.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to[ake responsive action may be so identified in[he Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be retumed by the Architect wi�hout action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to[he Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Docwnents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness znd in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in Ihe activities ofthe Owner or of separa[e contractors. § 3.12.6 F3y submitting Shop Drawings, Product Dala,Samples and similar submittals,[he Contrac[or represents[o the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(I)reviewed and approved them, (2)detemiined and verified materials, field measurements and field constmction criteria rela[ed thereto, or will do so and(3)checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion ofthe Work for which Ihe Contract Documen[s require submittel and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except[hat the Contracror shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations fl�om requirements of the Contract Documents by the ArchitecPs approval of Shop Drawings, Product Da[a,Samples or similar submi[tals unless the Contractor has specifically infonned the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(I)the Architect has given written approval to the specitie deviation as a minor change in the Work, or(2)a Change O�der or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing[he deviation.The Contractor shall not be relicved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, - Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by tl�e Architect on previous submittals. In the �, absence of such writ[en notice, the ArchitecYs approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contrac[or shall not be required to provide professional services[hat constitute the practice of archirec[ure or engineering unless such services are specifically required by tlie Contract Documents for a por[ion of [he Work or unless lhe Conlractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construcGOn means,methods,techniques, sequences and procedures.The Contracror shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifica[ions by a design professional rela[ed to systems,materials or equipment are speeifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,[he Owner and[he Architect will specify all performance and design criteria lhat such services must satisfy. The Contracror shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed dcsign professional,whose signatureand seal shall appear on all drawings,celculations,specifications,eertifications, Shop Drawings and other submit[als prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by o[hers, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The O��ier and the Architect shall be entitled ro rely upon [he adequacy,accuracy and AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright O 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970, 1976,1987.1997 antl 2007 by The American Ini[. InstiWte of Architecls.All rights reservetl.WARNING�.This AIA` Document is protectetl by U.S.Copyri9ht Law antl International Trealies.Unaulliorized .�5 reproduction m disVibution of this AIA°' �ocumenl,or any portion oF it,may result in severe civil and criminal penal[ies,antl will be prosecuted ro the � maximumeatenlpossibleunAerlhelaw.ThisdocumentwasproducedbyAlASOflwareal1132�.Oton03/17/2014underOrderNa51 7 5 57 067 5_lwhichexpires on 08/12/2014,antl is nol for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architec[have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria lhat such services must sa[isfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.1Q the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submil[als only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance wi[h infonnation given and the design wncept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of Ihe performance and design criteria specified in lhe Contract Documents. § 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contraetor shall confine opera[ions a[the si[e to areas perinitted by applicable laws, stalutes, ordinances,codes, rules and regula[ions,and lawful orders of public authorities and the ConVact Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, titting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.AI I areas requiring cut[ing,fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition exis[ing prior to[he cutting,fitting and pa[ching, unless otherwise required by die Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a por[ion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction ofthe Owner or separa[e contractors by wtting,patching or otherwise al[ering sudi coostruction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall no[cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor, such consen[shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's wnsent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.75.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free froin accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by opera[ions under the Contract. At completion of the Work,[he Contracror shall remove waste materials,rubbish,the Contrac[or's tools,construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials Crom and about the Roject. § 3.75.2 If the Contractor fails[o clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and Owner shall be enti[led to reimbursemen[tiom the Contrac[or. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contrac[or shall provide Ihe Owner and Architecl access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringemenl of copyrights and pate�ll rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be respousible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of z particular manufactw'er or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, - Specifications or o[her documents prepared by die Owner or Architect. However, if the Contrac[or has reason to : believe that[he required design, process or produc[ is an infringement of a copyright or a pa[ent,the Con[ractor shall be responsible For sueh loss imless such infonnation is prompdy furnished m ihe Architect. § 3.181NDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shal I indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect, . ArohitecYs eonsul[ants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited ro attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from perfonnance of the Work, provided that such claim,dzmage,loss or expense is attributable ro bodily injin�y,sickness,disease or death,or ro injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itselt), but only to Ihe extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of tlie Contractor,a Subcontractor,enyone directly or indirecNy employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnifiecl hereundec Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemniry that would othenvise exist as to a party or person described in tliis Section 3.18. AIA Document A201'"—Y007.Copyrigh�OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1969,1966,1970,1976,1987.1997 and 2007 by The American ��• InstiWte of Archilecis.All ri9hts raserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is pmtec[etl by U.S.Copyri9ht Law and International Treaties.llnauthorized 16 reproduction or dishibulion of Hiis AIA' Document.or any portion of it,may resitll in severe civil antl criminal penalties,anA will be prosecuted lo the � maximum exlent possible unAerthe law.Thisdocumeniwas produced byAlASOftware a�1132�.01 on03/17I2014 underOrtler No.5175570675_i which expires on OBA 2/2014,and is not(o�resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contracror, a Subcontractor,anyone direetly or indirec[ly employed by them or anyone for whose acts Ihey may be liable,the indemnification obligation mider Sec[ion 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amoimt or type of damages, compensation or benetits payable by or for the Contractor or a SubconVactor under workers' compensation acts, disability beneft acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architecl lawfully licensed[o practice archi[ecture or an en[ity lawfully practicing azchitecture in thejurisdiction where the Project is loca[ed.That person or enlity is identified as Ihe Arohitect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singulaz in nwnber. § 4.1.2 Du[ies,responsibilities and limilations of authoriTy ofthe Architec[as set forth in the Contract Documen[s shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent ofthe Owner,Contracror and Architect.Consent shzll not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.1.31fthe employment ofthe Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a suceessor archi[ect as[o whom the Contraetor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Con[ract Documents shall be tha[of the Architect. § 4.2ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in Ihe Contract Documen[s and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the fmal Certificate for Paymwt.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate ro the stage of construclion,or as o[herwise agreed with the Owner, [o become generally familiar with the progress and quality of Ihe portion of the Work completed,and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that tlie Work,when fully completed, will be in aceordance with the Contrac� Doeuments. However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.The Architect will not have eontrol over,charge of,or responsibiliTy for,[he construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection wilh tlie Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 On[he basis of[he site visits,the Architect wil I keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion ofthe Work completed,and report to the Owner(I)known deviations from[he Contract Documents and from the most ruent construction schedule submit[ed by the Contractor,and(2)defects and deficiencies observed in tl�e Work.The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure[o perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of lhe Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for ac[s or omissions of the Contractor,Subcontracrors,or thcir agenls or employees, or any odier persons or entities perfonning portions of the Work. § 4.2.4COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION - Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially - authorized,the Owoer and Contracror shall endeavor to communicate wi[h each other[hrough the Archilect abou[ matters arising out of or relating to the Contract Communications by and with the Architect's consul[ants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and ma[erial suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owncr. § 4.2.5 Based on the Archi[ecYs evalua[ions of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due[he Contractor and-will issue Certiticates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to rejec[ Work that does not conform [o lhe Contract Documents. Whenever[he Arehitect considers it necessary or advisable, [he Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 135.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a duision made in good faith eitlier to exercise or not[o exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility ofthe Architec[to the Contractor,Subcontracrors,material and equipmen[suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Wa-k. AIA Documenl AY07'"—20%.Copyright�O 1911,1915,1916.1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 7987,1997 antl 2007 by The American Init InsliWte o(Architecis.All ri9hts reserved.WAftNING This AIA` Documenl is protecteA by U.S.Copyright Law and International Trealies.Unaulhorizetl �� reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,antl will De prosecuteA to Ihe � maximumextentpossibleuntlerthelaw.ThisdowmentwasprotlucedbyAlAsofM1Vareatll'.32:01on03/17/2014underOrtlerNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on 08/12/2014,and is nol for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Dz[a and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in Ihe Contract Documents.The ArchitecPs ac[ion will be[aken in accordance with the submit[al schedule approved by the Architec[or, in the absence of an approved submit[al schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficien[[ime in[he Archi[ecPs professional judgment[o permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is no[conducted for the purpose of de[ennining tlie accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quan[ities, or for substan[iating instruc[ions fur installation or performance of equipment or systems, al I of which remain the responsibiliTy of the Contrac[or as required by tlie Contract Documents.The Archi[ec['s review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve[he Contrac[or of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall no[constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless otherwise speeifically sta[ed by[he Architect,ofany eonstruetion means,me[hods,[echniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the i[em is a componen[. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect wil I investigate and make detenuinations and recommendations regarding wncealed and unknown condi[ions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Arehitect will conduc[iospections to determine the date or dates of Substan[ial Completion and Ihe date of final comple[ion; issue Certificates of Substan[ial Comple[ion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records,wri[ten warranties and related documents required by lhe Contract and assembled by[he Contractor pursuant[o Sec[ion 9.10;and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.101f the Owner and Architect agree,the Archi[ect will provide one or more project representa[ives[o assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limita[ions of au[hority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit[o be incorporated in the Contract Documen[s. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either[he Owner or Contractor.The ArchiteePs response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limi[s zgreed upon or otherwise with reasonable prompmess. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions ofthe Arehitect will be consis[ent with the intent of, and reasonably inCerable from,the Contract Documents and wil l be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions,the Arehitect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and ConVactor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on malters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.14'1'he Architect will review and respond to reques[s for information about the Contrac[ Documen[s.The : Architect's response[o such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with ; reasonable promptness. If appropriate,the Archi[ec[will prepare and issue supplemen[al Drawings and Specitications in response to[he requests for infonnation. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a porlion of the Work at the site.The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized represen[ative of the Subcontrac�or.The term "Subconvaetor"does not include a separate contractor or subcon[ractors of a separate contrac[or. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontrac[or is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion ofthe Work a[Ihe si[e.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontrac[or or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. AIA Document A207'"—2007.Copyright OO 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966, 1970,1976,1987.1997 and 2007 by The American I�it. �nslitute of Amhitecis.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA" Document is protecteA by U.S.Copyright Law anA International Trealies.Unauthorizetl .�$ reproAuction or tlisUibitlion of Ihis AIA� Docwnenl,or any portion of it,inay result in severe civil and criminal penalties,anA will be prosecuted to lhe � maximum extent possible untlerthe law.Thisdocumenlwas pmduced byAlASOfRVareat 11:32'.01 on 03/17I2014 underOrder No.5175570675_i which expires on 08A2/2014,and is no�fo�resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 5.2AWARD OF SUBCONTR4CTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise staled in the Contrac[Documents or the bidding requirements,[he Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shal I fiimish in writing to the Owner Ihrough[he Archi[ect the names of persons or entities(including[hose who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal portion ofthe Work.The Archi[ec[mzy reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating(I) whether the Owner or[he Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)that the Architect mquires additional time for review. Failure ofthe Owner or Architect to reply within the 14-day period shall cons[itute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contrac[with a proposed person or enti[y to whom Ihe Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objeetion.The Con[ractor shall not be required ro con[ract with anyone[o whom[he Contracror has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable ofperforming[he Work,the Contrac[Sum and Con[rzc[Time shall be inereased or decreased by[he difference, ifany, occzsioned by such ehange,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontraetor's Work. However,no inerease in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shail not substitu[e a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Archi[ect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement,written where legally reyuired for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontracror, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,[o be bomid to lhe Contractor by tenns of the Contrac[ Documents,and to zssume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including Ihe responsibility for safety ofthe Subcontractor's Work,which the Contracror, by these Documents, assumes toward Ihe Owner and Arohiteet.Each subcontraet agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of[he Owner and Architect under the Contraet Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the SubconVactor so[hat subcontrac[ing thereofwill not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otlienvise in the subcon[raet agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against lhe Contractor lhat[he Contrac[or, by the Contraet Documen[s,has against the Owner. Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor m enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontracrors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,copies ofihe Contract Documents to which[he Subcontrac[or will be bound,and,upon wri[[e�i request of Ihe Subcontraetor,identify to the Subcontractor tenns and conditions ofthe proposed subcontract agreement lhat may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subconhactors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available ro[heir respec[ive proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS - § 5.4.1 Each subcontract ageem�t for a portion ofthe Work is assigned by Ihe Contractor to the Owner,provided[hat : .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the ConVact by Ihe Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for Ihose subcontract agreements that[he Owner accepts by notifying[he Subcontractor and Contracror in wri[ing;and .2 assignment is subject to Ihe prior rights of[he sureTy, if any,obligated under bond relating ro Ihe Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, lhe Owner assumes tlie Contrac[or's rights and obligations under the subconVact. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if tlie Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjus[ed for increases in cost resulting from tlie suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4,the Owner may furlher assign the subcontract[o a successor contractor or o[her entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract ro a successor contractor or o[her en[ity,the AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyrighl OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,196t 1963.1966,1970.1976, 1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. InstiWte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'� Document is pmtectetl by U.S.Copyriyht Law antl International Treaties.Unauthorired ,19 reprotluction or tlistribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may resWt in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuteA to the � maximumextentpossibleunderthelaw.Thisdoc�mentwasproducedbyAlASOflwareat1132�.Oton03/17/2014underOrderNo.5175570675_lwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) O�mer shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection witli o[her por[ions of the Project or other construction or opera[ions on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or subs[antially similar to Ihese including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subroga[ion. If Ihe Contractor claims that delay or additional cos[ is involved because of such action by lhe Owner,the Con[ractor shall make such Clzim as provided in Article I5. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of[he Project or other construction or operations on the site,the[erm"Contraetor"in lhe Contrac[ Documents in each case shall mean the Contraeror who executes each separate OwnervConhactor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate eontractor with the Work ofthe Contractor,who shall cooperate wi[h them.The Conh�actor shall participate with other separate contractors and[he Owner in reviewing their construction schedules.The Contrac[or shal I make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a juint review and mutual agreemenL The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules ro be used by the Contracror,separa[e coniractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1A Onless otherwise provided in[he Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of Ihe ConVact, including,wi[hou[ excluding others,[hose stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles IQ I I and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afl�ord[he Owner and separa[e contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage o£their materials anA equipment and performance of tlieir activities,nnd shall connect and coordinam the Contractor's cons[mction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documenls. § 6.2.2 If part ofthe Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon cunstruction or operations by the Owner or a separatecontractor,[he Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion ofthe Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction Ihat would render i[imsuitable for such proper exeeution and results. Failure of[he Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment Ihat[he Owner's or separate contrac[or's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive Ihe Contrae[or's Work,escept as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs tlte Owner incurs that are payable to a separate con�ractor because of[he Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction.The Owner shal I be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incin�s because of a separa[e contrac[or's delays, improperly -. timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construclion. �. § 6.2.4 The Conlractor shall protnptly remedy d2mage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially comple[ed eonstruction or to property of tlie Owner or separate contractors as provided in Sec[ion 10.2.5. § 6.2.5'1'he O�v�ier and each separate contracror shall have the same responsibilities for cut[ing and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contracror,separate contractors and tlie Owner as to the responsibility under their respeetive con[racts for maintaining the premises and surrowiding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clezn up and the Architect will allocale the cost among those responsible. AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright�O 1911, 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,19fi6,1970,1976, 1967,1997 antl 2007 by The American Ini[. InstiWte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Oocumenl is prolec[ed by LLS.Copyri�jht Law anA Intemational Treaties.Unauthorized ZQ reprotluction or disGihution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may residt in severe civil and criminal penalties,anA will be proseaitetl to the � manimum extent possible untlerthe law.This tlocumenlwas pmduced byAlASOflware at 11'.32'.Ot on 03/P/2014 underOrder Na5P5570675_i which expires on OB112/2014,and is nol for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.7 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of d�e Contract, and without invzlida[ing the Contract,by Change Ordcr,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor chaiige in the Work,subject to the limitations s[ated in this Article 7 znd elsewhere in die Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreemen[among the Owner,Contractor and Ardiitect;a Construction Change Direc[ive requires agreement by the Owner and Architec[and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor chauge io[he Work may be issued by[he Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in Ihe Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Con[ract Documents, and the Contractor shall proeeed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in[he Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contracror and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 'Ilie change in the Work; .2 'Ihe amount of the adjushnent, if any, in the Contrac[Sum;and .3 'Iheextentoftheadjushnent, ifany, intheConlractTime. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a wri[[en order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architec[, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustme�it, if any, in Ihe Contract Sum or Con(ract Time,or both.The Owner may by Constmction Change Directive,withou[invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work witliin the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi[ions, deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construc[ion Change Directive shall be used in tlie absence of total agreement on[he terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 Ifthe Construetion Change Directive provides for an adjushnent[o the Contract Sum,the adjusunent shall be based on one of the Following methods: .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemizeA and supported by sufficient substantiating data ro permit evaluation; .2 Onit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost ro be de[ermined in a manner agreed upon by lhe parties and a nwtually acceptable fixed a- percentage fee; or .4 As provided in Section 73.7. § 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Docutnents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities original ly wntemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Consh�uction Change Directive so that : application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or ; Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.3.5 Upon reeeipt ofa Constmction Change Directive,tlie Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in[he Work invoh�ed and advise the Architect of the Contracror's agreement or disagreeinent with the method, if any, provided in lhe Construetion Change Directive for determining lhe proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum a� Contract Time. § 7.3,6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates Ihe ConG'actor's agreement therewith, ineluding adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or Ihe method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond prompdy or disagrees with the method for adjus[ment in Ihe Conh�act Sum, the Archilect shall determine Ihe method and tlie adjustmenl on [he basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to[he change,including,in ease of an inerease in[he Contract Sum,an amoun[ AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright�O 1911,1915.1918.1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966,1970.1976,1981.1997 and 2007 by The Ameriwn Init �nstiWte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING�.This AIA" Document is protected by LLS.Gopyri9ht Law antl Internalional Trealies.Unauthorizetl 21 reproduction or tlistribution of Ihis AIA" Documenl,or any portion of it,may residt in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be pmsecuted lo Ihe � maximumextentpossibleunAerlhelaw.ThisdocumentwasprotlucedbyAlAsoftwareal11:37Aton03A712014underOrderNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNoles: (2054252098) for overhead and profi[as set fortli in the Agreement,or ifno such amount is set forth in the Agreement,a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 733.3,[he Contractor shall keep and present, in such fonn as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting toge[her wilh appropriate supporting da[a.Unless o[herwise provided in the Contracl Documen[s, costs for the purposes of[his Section 73J shall be limited to Ihe following: .1 Costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreemwt or custom,and workers' compensation insurance; .2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment,inciuding cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Con[ractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .5 Addi[ional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly a[tributable to the ehange. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor[o the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net deerease in[he Contract Sum shall be actual ne[cos[as confinned by the Arohitect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on[he basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of[he rotal cost of a Constriwtion Change Directive to the Owner,the Contractor may request payment fnr Work completed under lhe Construction Change Directive in Applications for PaymenL The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly cerlification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Arohitec[determines, in Ihe Architect's professional judgment,to be reasonably justified. The ArchitecPs in[erim determina[ion of cos[shall adjust the Contract Sum on Ihe same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either pzrty to disagree and assert z Claim in accordance witli Artiele I5. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Con[ractor agree with a determination made by[he Archilec[coneerning the adjustments in the Contraet Sum and Contract Time,or othenvise reach agreemen[ upon lhe adjustments,such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order.Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority lo order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with Ihe intent of the Contract Documen[s. Sueh changes will be ef'fected by wri[ten order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Onless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Subs[antial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The da[e of commencement of lhe Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term"day"as used in[he Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specitically defined. § 8.2 PRO�RESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documenu are of the essence of the Contract F3y executing Ihe Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract"Cime is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shzll not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, premeturely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article I I [o be fiu�nished by[he Contraclor and Owner.The date of commencement ofthe Work shall no[be changed by[he effective date of such insurance. AIA Document A201`"—2007.Copyright OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,19fi3,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Ameriwn ��t� InstiWle of Archilects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'� �ocument is protected by U.S.Gopyriyht Law anA Intemalional Trealies.Unauthorizetl ZZ reprotluction or distrihution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be pmsecutetl to lhe � maximum exlent possible unAerthe law.This documentwas produced byAlAsoftware at 1732'.01 on03117/2014 untler Order No.51 75 57 067 5_i which expires on OB/12/2014.antl is not for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) § 8.2.3"i'he Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Subslantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If[he Contrzctor is delayed at any[ime in the commencement or progress of Ihe Work by an act or neglect of lhe Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separa[e contractor employed by the Owner;or by changes ordered in Ihe Work; or by labor disputes,fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable czsualties or other causes beyond the Contrac[or's control;or by delay autliorized by Ihe Owner pending mediation and arbitration;or by other causes tha[the Archi[ect detennines mayjus[ify delay,lhen the Contract Time shall be ex[ended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims rela[ing to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 83 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of[he Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTR4CT SUM The Contracl Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustme��ts,is the to[al amoimt payable by the Owner to the Contractor for perfonnance of tlie Work under[he Contract Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Con[ract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before[he first Applica[ion for Payment,a sehedule of values al loeating[he entire Contract Swn to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such fonn and supported by such data to substantiate i[s accuracy as the Architeet may require.This sehedule, unless objuted to by[he Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contracror's Applications for Payment. § 9.3APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least[en days before tlie date established for each progress paymenl, tlie Contractor shall submi[to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such dala subs[antiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Archilect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retzinage if provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.7.1 As provided in Section 73.9,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work[hat have been properly authorized by Construc[ion Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Arohitect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applica[ions for Payment shall not include requests for paNnent for portions of the Work for which the Contractor dces not intend[o pay a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by uthers � whom the Contractor intends[o pay. � § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on accounl of materials and equipinent delivered and suitabty srored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the si[e at a loca[ion agreed upon in writing. Payment for ma[erials and equipment slored on or off[he site shall be conditioned upon � compliance by the Conhactor wi[h procedures sztistactory to the Owner to eslablish the Owner's title ro such ma[erials and equipment or otherwise proteet the Ownei's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to[he sile for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that[ide to all Work covered by an Application for Pnyment will pass[o the Owner no la[er than the titne of paymenL The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received ftom the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be fi�ee and clear of liens, claims, security interests or AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyrigh[O 1911,1915,1918,1925,�937.1951, 1958,1961,196J.1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Ins�iWte o(Amhitecls.All rights�eserved.WARNING:This AIA'" Document is protecteA by U.S.Copyright Law antl Intemational Trealies.Unauthorized Z3 reprotluction o�distrihution oF this AIA` Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil anA criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to the � maximum extent possible under lhe law.This document was protluced by AIA soFlware at 11:3201 on�3/17/2014 under Order N¢51 75 57 067 5_i which expires on OB/12/2014,antl is nol(or resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subconhactors,material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reaso�of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to Ihe Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Archi[ect will,within seven dzys after receipt of the Con[ractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy[o the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is propedy due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of Ihe Architect's reasons for wi[hholding certitication in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuanee of a Certifica[e for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Applicetion for Payment,that,to the best of the Architect's lmowledge, information and belief,[he Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subjec[to an evaluation of the Work for wnformance with Ihe Contract Documents upon Substan[ial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to wrrection of minor deviations from the Contrac[Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifieations expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Conhactor is entitled to payment in theamount certified. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation thatthe Architect has(I)made exhaustiveor continuous on-site inspections to eheck the quality or quantiry of the Work,(2)reviewed construc[ion means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received fi�om Subcontrzctors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right ro payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for wha[purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on aceoimt of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Architec[may withhold z Certificate for Payment in whole or in par[,ro[he extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Arehitut's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.42 cannot be made.Ifthe Architect is unable to cer[ify payment in the amoimt ofthe Application,Ihe Architec[will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. Ifthe Contractor znd Architec[cannot agree on a revised amount, Ihe Architeet will promptly issue a Cer[ificate for Payment for the amoimt for which the Arohitec[is able to make such representations to the Ownec The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Paymenl or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Paymen[previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the ArehitecPs opinion to protect lhe Owner from loss Por which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Sec[ion 3.32, because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security accep[able to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be eompleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage ro the Owner or a separate contractor; .8 reasonable evidence[hat the Work will not be wmpleted within the Contract"fime,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquida[ed damages for the anticipa[ed delay; or � .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance wi[h the Contract Documents. �. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certitication are removed, cer[ifica[ion will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.3 If tl�e Architect withholds eertifica[ion for payment under Sec[ion 9.5.13,the Owner may, at its sole option, issuejoint checks to the Con�ractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contracror failed to make payment for Work properly performed or mate�ial or equipment suitably delivered. Ifthe Owner makes payments byjoint check,[he Owner shall notify the Architect and Ihe Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certiticate for Payment. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architec[ has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in tlie manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify Ihe Architec[. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyrighl O 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966, 19�0.1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. InstiWte of Architecis.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA" Documenl is protecled by LLS.Copyri9ht Law and Intemational Treaties.Unauthorized 24 reproduction or Aistribution of tliis AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,anA will be proseculetl to the � maximum exlent possible untlerthe law.Thisdocumentwas protlucetl byAlAsoftware at 1132'.01 on 03/17/2014 underOrtler No.5175570675_1 which expires on 08/12/2014,andis notforresale. Use�NOtes: (2054252098) § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of paymen[from the Owner the amount[o which[he Subcontrzcror is entitled,reFlecting percentages actually retained ftoin payments to the Contractor on accoun[of[he Subcon[ractor's por[ion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish[o a Subcontrac[or, ifprac[icable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contracror and ac[ion taken thereon by the Architect and Owner ai account ofportions ofthe Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipmen[suppliers amoun[s paid by[he O�mer ro the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If tlie Contractor fails ro fi�rnish such evidence within seven days,the Owner shall have the righ[[o contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the O�mer nor Architec[shall have an obligatio�to pay or to see to the paNnent of money to a Subcontractor,except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 Contractor payments to mz[erial znd equipment suppliers shzll be treated in a manner similar to that provided ui Sections 9.62,9.63 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy ofthe Projec[ by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.67 Unless Ihe Contrac[or provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contracror for Work properly performed by Subconlractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who perfonned Work or furnished materials, or both,under contraet with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be plaeed in a separate accoun[and not commingled with money ofthe Contractor,shall create any fiduciary Iiability or tort liability on the par[ofthe Contractor for breach oftrust or shall entitleany person or en[ity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Ifthe Architect does not issue a Certificate for PaNnent, lhrough no faul[of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if[he Owner does not pay Ihe Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contrac[Docuinents the ainount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution,then the Contraetor may, upon seven additional days' writlen notice to Ihe Owner and Amhitec[, s[op the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be ex[ended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work whe�i the Work or designa[ed portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contrac[Documents so that the O�vner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees lo accept separa[ely, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Archi[ect a comprehe�isive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contracror to complete all Work in accordance with[he Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt ofthe Contractoi's list,Ihe Arohitect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated pordon thereof is substantially complete. If�he ArchitecPs inspection discloses any item,whether or not ineluded on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance wi[h Ihe Contraet Documents so [hat the Owner can oecupy or utilire lhe Work or designated portion Ihereof for its intended use, Ihe Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon no[ification by the Arohitect In such case, Ihe ConVactor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Archi[ect to determine Substantial Comple�ion. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright�O 1917, 1915,7918,7925,1937,1951, 1958,1961.1963,1966, 1970,1976, 1987,1997 and 2007 by The American IniL InStiWte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA" Documenl is protecteA by U.S.Copyriyh[Law and Internalional Treaties.Unauthorized zs reprotluction or tlistribution ot lhis AIA' Docwnent or any portion of iQ may result in severe civil antl criminal penalties,anA wiil be prosecuteA to the � maximumeztentpossibleunderthelaw.ThisdocumentwasproducedbyAlAso(twareat1132�.07on03Ii7/2014untlerOrderNO.51755]0675_iwhichexpires on 08/12/2014,and is not for resale. USerNOtes: (2054252098) § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated por[ion Ihereof is substantially complete,[he Architect will prepare a Certificate ofSubstantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substan[ial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of Ihe Owner and Contractor for security, mzintenznce,hea[,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying[he Certificate. Warranties required by the Conhact Dowments shall commence on the date of Substantial Comple[ion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple[ion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Comple[ion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptanceand consent ofsurety,ifany, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated por[ion tliereu£ Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or no[in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Doeuments. § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 'I'he Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portiun of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Sec[ion I 13.1.5 and authorized by public au�horities havingjurisdiction over the Project.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payinents, retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat, utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in wri[ing coneerning the period for correction of the Work and eommencement of wzrranties required by tlie Contract Dwuments. When[he Contracto�considers a portion substantially eomplete,the Contractor shal I prepare and submit a list to the Architec[as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shal I not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shal I be determined by written agreemen[behveen the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreemen[is rezched, by decision of Ihe Architec[. § 9.9.2[mmediately prior ro such par[ial occupaney or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architecl shall joindy inspect the azea to be occupied or portion of Ihe Work ro be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use ofa portion or por�ions ofthe Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work no[eomplying with Ihe requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt oFthe ConhactoPs written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receiptofa final Application for Payment, Ihe Arehi[ect will promptly make such inspection and, when lhe Architect finds[he Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Conlract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certifieate for Paymen[s[a[ing that to the best of the ArchitecPs knowledge, infonnation and belief, and on the basis ofthe Architect's on-site visi[s and inspec[ions,tlie Work has been completed in accordance with terms and eondi[ions ofthe Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contraetor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's fmal Certificate for Payment will eonstitute a Curtlier represen[ation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contracror's being entitled to final payment have been fidtilled. - § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percen[age shall become due until tlie Contractor submits to �� the Architeet(1)an a(Tidavit thzt payrolls, bills for malerials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or e�icumbered (less amoun[s withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2)a cer[ificate evidencing that insm�ance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statentent that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of sure[y, if any, to final payment and(5), if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction ofobligations, such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contrac[,[o[he ex[ent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor mzy furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner ro indemnify the O�mer against such lien.Ifsuch lien remains unsatisfied aHer payments are made,the Contractor shall reftmd ro the Owner all money tha[the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright 01911, 7915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966, 1970,1976,1987,7997 and 2007 by The American Ini[. InStiNte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING'.This AIA' Document is protecteA by U.S.Copyri�ht Law antl International Treaties.Unauthonzed 26 reprotluction or tlisVibution of this AIA" Docmnent,or any portimi of il,may msitlt in severe civil anA criminal penalties,antl will be prosecuteA to Hie � maximum extent possible imtlerthe law.This tlocumenlwas protlucetl byAlAsottware at 1132:01 on 03/17/2014 unde�Order No.5P5570675_7 which expires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 9.10.3 If, after Subs[antial Comple[ion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confinns,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and cerlification by the Architec[, and wi[hout tenninating the Contract,make payment ofthe balance due for[ha[portion of[he Work fully completed and accepted. Ifthe remaining balance for Work not fully comple[ed or corrected is less than re[ainage stipulated in the Contrac[ Documents,and if bonds have been fiimished,[he written consen[of surety to paymen[of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contrac[or ro the Arohi[ect prior to certification of such payment Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,except tha[it shall not cons[itute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4'Phe making of final pzyment shall consti[ute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out ofthe Contract and unsettled; .2 failure ofthe Work to comply wi[h the requirements of[he Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shal I consti[u[e a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in�vriting znd identified by Ihat payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in wnnection wi[h the perfonnance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable preczutions for saFety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to .1 employees on the Work and o[her persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whelher in s[orage on or offthe site, under care,custody or control of[he Contractor or Ihe Contractor's Subcontracrors or Sub-subcontractors;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent Ihereto, such as trees,shmbs, lawns, walks,paveinents,roadways, structures and utili6es not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Con[ractor shall comply with and give nolices required by applicable laws, stamtes, ordinances, codes, rules v�d regulations,and lawful orders of public autliorities bearing on safeTy of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contracror shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditiais and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protectiun, including pusting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgaling safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent siles and utilities. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materizls or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exereise utmost care and carry on such activilies under supervision ofproperly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall prompdy remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property . insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 102J.2 and 10.2.13 caused in whole or in part by the Contrac[or,a Subcontracror,a Sub-subcontraclor,or anyone directly or indirecdy employed by any ofthem,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contraetor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.13, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of[hem,or by anyone for whose acts ei[her of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligwce of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition lo the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. AIA Documenl A207`"—2007.Copyright OO 1911.1915,1918.1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,196J,1966,1970,1976.1987.1997 and 2007 by The American IOif. InstiWte oF Architects.All rights reservetl.WARNING:This AIA" Document is pwtecteA by U.S.Copyright Law antl Inlernational Treaties.Unauthorizetl 27 reproduclion or disVibulion of this AIA` Document,or zny portion o(it,inzy resWt in severe civil antl criminal penalties,anA will be prosecutetl to the � manimwnextentpossibleunderthelaw.ThisdocumeniwasproducetlbyAlASOfRVareatil'.32-.01on03/1�/2014underOrderNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,and is not for resale. User Noter. (2054252098) § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's a�ganization at the site whose duty shall be tlie prevention of accidents.7'his person shall be[he Con[ractor's superinlendent unless otherwise designated by[he Contractor in writing ro[he Owner and Archi[ec[. § 10.2.7 The Contracror shall not permit any part ofthe construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or crea[e an unsafe condition. § 10.2.B INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either perty suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an ac[or omission of[he o[her party, or of others for whose acts such paiYy is legal ly responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party widiin a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable[he other party[o inves[igate the matter. § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements induded in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous ma[erial or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precaulions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbes[os or polychlorinzted biphenyl (PCB),encoun[ered on the site by the Contracror,the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condi[ion, immediately s[op Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Amhitect in writing. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt ofthe Con[ractor's wri[ten notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed labora[ory to verify the presence or absenee ofthe mzterial or substance reported by the Conh�acta�and,in Ihe event such material or substance is found to be present,ro cause it ro be rendered hannless. Unless o[herwise required by the Contrac[ Documents,the Owner shall fiarnish in writing to the Contractor and Archilect[henames and qualifica[ions of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such ma[erial or substance or who are ro perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.7he Contractor and the Architect wil I promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or no[ei[her has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. [f either Ihe Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by Ihe Owner,the Ownu shall propose anotlier to whom lhe Contractor and the Ardiitect have no reasonable objection. When the material or subs[ance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement ofthe Owner and Contractor.By Change Order,[he Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the ConL�act Sum shall be inereased in the amount of the Contrac[or's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shal I indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect,ArehitecCs consul[ants and agents and employees of any of them from and agains[claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' tees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in[he affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as deseribed in Sec[ion 103.1 and has no[been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itsel�,exeept to tlie ex[ent that such damage,loss or expense is due to tlie faul[or negligence of � the party seeking indemnity. - § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for ma[erials or substances Ihe Contracror brings to the site unless such materials or subslances are required by the Contrac[Documents.The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,except ro the exlent of Ihe Contracror's fzult a� negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs Q)for remediation of a material or substance[he Contractor brings to the si[e and negligently hzndles,or(2)where Ihe Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section I 03.1,except to the extent[ha[tlie cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If,withou[negligence on the part of tlie Contractor,the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for tlre wst of rcmediation of a hazardous material or substance sulely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Conhactor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyrighl�1911,1915,1918,1925, 1937,1951.1958,1961.1963,1966, 1970,1976, 1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. InstiWte of Amhi�ecis.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA" �ocument is protected by U.S.Copyri�ht Law anA International Treaties.Unauthorizetl 28 reprotluction or Aistribution of this AIA" Document,o�any portion of it,may residt in severe civil anA criininal penalties,anA will be prosecuteA to the � maximumextenlpossibleuntlerlhelaw.ThisdocumenlwaspmducedbyAlASOflwareal11:32'.01on03/17/2014untlerOrtlerNO.5175570675_lwhichexpires on OB112/2014,antl is nol(or resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) § 10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss. Additional compensation or ex[ension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article I S and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSUR4NCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized[o do business in thejurisdiction in which the Project is loca[ed such insuranee as will proteet the Contractor from claims se[ forth below which may arise out of or resul[from[he Contractor's operations and completed operations under the Con[ract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contrac[or or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of lhem,or by anyone for whose ac[s any of them may be liable: .1 Claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benetit acts that are applicable to the Work to be perfonned; .2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupa[ional sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person otlier tlian[he Contractor's employees; .4 Claims for dainages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 Claims for damages,other than[o[he Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, ineluding loss of use resul[ing[herefrom; .6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, dea[h of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a mo[or vehicle; .7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 Claims involving contrac[ual liability insurance applicable to the Contracror's obligations under Section 3.18. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Sec[ion I 1.1.1 shall be written for iwt less than limits of liability specitied in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether writ[en on an oceurrenee or claims-made basis,shall be main[ained wi[hout in[erruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and[ermination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment,and,with respect tothe Con[raetor's completed operations coverage,until the expiration of[he period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specitied in the Contract Documenls. § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to mmmencement of the Work and[hereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance.These cer[ificates and the insurance polieies required by this Section 1 I.l shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additionel certifica[e evidencing continuation of liability coverage,including coverage for comple[ed operations,shall be submitted with the final Applica[ion for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or - replacement of such coverage until [he expirztion of tlie time required by Section I I.I:Z. Information concerning - reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under Ihe General Aggrega[e, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. § 11.1.4 The Conhactor shall cause the coinmercial IiabiGty coverage required by the Contrze[Doeuments to inelude (I)the Owner,the Archilect and the Archi[ect's consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Cont�acta�'s negligent acts ur omissions during the Contracroi's operations;and(2)the O�mer as an additional insured for elaims causeA in whole or in part by the Contrac[or's negligent acis or omissioiis during the Contracto�'s completed operations. § 11.20WNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for pw�chasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. INt. AIA Documenl A201'"—2007.Copyright�O 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958, 1961,1963,1966,1970,1976.1987,1997 and 2007 by The American InstiWte of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'" �ocwnent is pmtecteA by U.S.Gopyright Law antl International Treaties.Unauthorired 29 repmAuclion or dislribulion of this AIA" Docwnent,or any portion ot it,may residl in severe civil antl criminal penalties,and wiil be prosecuted[o the � manimumextenlpossibleuntlerlhelaw.ThisdocumeniwaspmducedbyAlASOflwareatll'.32'.01on03/17I2014underOrderNO.5V5570675_lwhichexpires on OB112/2014,antl is not(or resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 1L3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfulty authorized to do business in [he jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivzlent policy form in[he amount of Ihe initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequen[ Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising rotal value for Ihe entire Project at[he site on a replacement cost basis wi[hout optional deduc[ibles. Such property insurance shall be main[ained,unless otherwise provided in [he Contrac[ Documents or otherwise zgreed in writing by aIl persons and en[ities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final paymen[has been made as provided in Section 9J0 or until no person or en[ity other than lhe Owner has an insurable interest in Ihe property required by this Section I 13 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall inelude interests of the Owner,tlie Contractor, Subeontractors and Sub-subcontrac[ors in the Project. § 11.3.1.1 Roperty insurance shall be on an "all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include,without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including, without duplication ofwverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief, collapse,earthquake, flood, winds[orm, falsework, testing and starriip,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement ofany applicable legal requiremen[s,and shall cover reasonzble compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.3.1.2[ftheOwner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contrac[and witli all of[he coverages in the amount described above,Ihe Ovmer shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Conhactor may lhen effect insurance Ihat will protect Ihe in[eres[s of[he Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontraetors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shal I be charged to Ihe Owner. Ifthe Contractor is damaged by[he failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly at[ributable thereto. § 71.3.7.3 If the property insurance requires deduc[ibles, the Owner shall pay cos[s not covered because ofsuch deductibles. § 11.3.1A This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored offihe site,and also portions of[he Work in hansit. § 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance wi[h Sec[ion 9.9 shall not cummence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupeney or use by endorseineari or otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insw�ance company or wmpanies and shall, without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use lhat would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by lhe Contract Documents or by law, wl�ich shall speeifieally cover such insured objeets during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; -� this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, - and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. § 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE '[he Owner,at the Owner's option,mzy purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure lhe Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due[o tire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives al I rights of action against the Contractor for luss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due[o fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3A Ifthe Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or otlier special causes of loss be included in [he property insurance policy,the O�roer shall, if possible, indude such insurance,and [he cost thereof shall be charged ro the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 Ifduring the Project construction period the Ownea�insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent [o lhe site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring Ihe Project,or ifafter final payment AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright�1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966, 1970,1976, 1987,1997 and 2007 by The Ameriwn Init. InstiWle of Architects.All righls reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protectetl by U.S.Copyriyht Law and Intemationai Treaties.UnaulhorizeA 30 reprotluclion or tlistribution of lhis AIA° Document.or any portion of it,may resitlt in severe civil antl criminal penallies,and will be pmsecuted to ihe � manimumexlentpossibleunderlhelaw.ThisdocumentwasproducedbyAlAsoftwareatii'.32�.01on03/�7I2014untlerOrderNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OB112/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOter. (2054252098) properly insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring Ihe Project during[he construc[ion period,the Owner shall waive al I rights in accordance wi[h[he terms of Section I I.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other czuses uf loss covered by this sepzrate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide lhis waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file wi[h the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section I 13. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this ProjecL Each policy shall contain a provision that the poliey will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced, imtil at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Ihe Contractor. § 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all righ[s agains[(I)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subeontractors, agents and employces,each ofthe other,and(2)[he Amhi[ect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,ifany,and any oftheir subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agen[s and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance ob[ained pursuant[o[his Section 113 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such righ[s as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate, shall require of the Arohitect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Artiele 6, if any,and the subcontrac[ors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees ofany ofthem,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other par[ies enumerated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or en[ity would otherwise have a duTy of indemnification,contraclual or otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium direcdy or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under Ihe Owner's property insurance shall be adjus[ed by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as ftduciary for[he insureds,as[heir interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applieable mortgagee clause and of Section I 1.3J0. The ConVactor shall pay Subcontractors lheirjust shares of insurance proceeds received by[he Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, wri[[en where legally required tor validity, shall require Subcontracturs to mzke payments[o their Sub-subcontracrors in similar manner. § 11.3.9[f required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon owurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper perFormance ofthe Owner's duties.'I'he cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate acwunt proceeds so received,which the Owner shal I distribute in accordance with sueh agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selec[ed in the Agreement between [he Owner and Contraeroc If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner tenninates[he Contract for convenience,replacemenl of damaged propeity shall be performed by the Contrac[or after notifica[ion ofa Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. § 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adust and setde a loss with insurers unless one ofthe parties in interest shall objeet in writing wi[hin five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's erereise of this power; if such � objection is made,[he dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the0wner and Contractor as the method of � binding dispute resolulion in Ihe Agreement If tlie Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Owner as fiduciary shal I make se[tlement with insurers or,in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of Ihe arbitrators. § 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithlul perfonnance ofthe Contraet and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of exewtion of the Contract. § 11.4.2 Upon[he request of any person or entity appearing to bc a potenlial beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,Ihe Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright O 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958, 1961,1963,1966, 1970.1976,1987.1997 and 2007 by The American Inif. Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WAF2NING:This AIA Oocument is protected by U.S.Copyright Law antl Internationai Treaties.Unaulhorized 31 reprotluction or tlislribution ol this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may resWt in severe civil anA criminal penalties,antl will be prosecuted to lhe � manimum extent possible unAerthe law.Thisdocumentwas producetl byAlASOftware at 11'.32:01 on 03/17I2074 under Order No.5175570675_t which expires on OB/12/2074,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098J ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.7 If a por[ion of the Work is covered contrary to the ArchitecPs request or[o requiremen[s specifically expressed in Ihe Contract Documents,it must,ifrequested in writing by the Archi[ect,be uncovered for the Archi[ecPs examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in tlie Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically reques[ed[o examine prior to its being covered,the Archi[ect may request to see such Work and it shal l be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with Ihe Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,such costs and the cost of correction shall be a[[he Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by[he Owner or a separa[e contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for paymen[of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFfER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Arohitect or failing to conform to the requirements of[he Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabrica[ed, installed or completed.Costs ofcorrecting such rejected Work,including additional testingand inspections,[he cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for[he ArehitecPs services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 12.2.2AFfER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contracror's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the da[e of Subslan[ial Completion ofthe Work or designated por[ion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by[erms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to be not io accordance wi[h Ihe requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Ihe Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Ovmer shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correctiai of Work, ifthe Owner fails to notify[he ConVactor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,lhe Owner waives tlie rights to require eorrection by the Contrector and to make a elaim for breach ofwarranTy. Ifthe Contracror fails ro eorrect nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that puiod after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correcl it in accordance with Sec[ion 2.4. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions uf Work first performed after Substantial Completion by[he period of time between Substan[ial Completion and the actuel completion ofthat portion ofthe Work. § 12.2.2.3 The on�year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by correc[ive Work perfonned by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from [he site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the - requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Con[ractor nor accepted by the O�mer. : § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correeting destroyed or dzmageA construction, whether completed or partially eompleted,ofthe Owner or separa[e contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with [he requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 122 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations tlie Contractor has under the Contract Docuinen�s. Establishment of the one-year period for wrrection of Work as described in Section 1222 relates only to the specific obligation ofthe Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which[he obligation ro comply with the Contract Documents may be sought W be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Ihe Contracror's liability with respect to Ihe Contracror's obligations o[her than specifically to correct the Work. AIA Document A20'I'"—2007.Copyright�1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,19fi3,1966,1970,1976.1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. InstiWte otArohitecls.All rights�eservetl.WARNING:This AIA'" Document is prolected by U.S.Copyriyht Law antl Inlemational Treaties.W�aulhorizetl 32 reproAuction or tlistribution of this AIA' �ocument.or any portion ot it,may result in severe civil anA criminal penalties,anA will be proseculed to Ihe � maximum extent possible under the law.Thisdocumentwas produced byAlASOftwareat 1132'.01 on 03/172014 under Order No.5175570675_7 which expires on OB/1?J2014,and is not for resale. UserNoles: (2054252098) § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with[he requirements of the Contract Documents,[he Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case tlie Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not fmal payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The ConVact shall be governed by Ihe law ofthe place where the Project is located except that,if[he parties have selecled arbitration as[he method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal Arbitration Act shall govem Section 15.4. § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind[hemselves, [heir partners, successors, assigns and legal represen[atives to covenants,agreements and obligations con[ained in the Conlract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to lhe Contract shall assign[he Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. [f either party attempts to make such an assigimen[without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under Ihe Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign Ihe Contract ro a lender providing construction financing for[he Project,ifthe lender assumes the Owner's rights and obliga[ions under the Contract Documen[s.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual,to a member of the firm or entity,or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at,or sent by registered or certified mail or by wurier service providing proof of delivery to, the las[business address known to[he party giving no[ice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation ofduties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.4.2 No action or failure ro act by the Owner, Archi[ect or Contrzc[or shall constitute a waiver of a righ[or duty afforded them wider the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to ac[constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under,except as may be specitically agreed in writing. § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of por[ions of lhe Work shall be made as required by the Contract Doeuments and by applicable laws, statutes,ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawfid orders of poblic authorities. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangemen[s for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing labora[ory or entity acceptable[o the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architec[ � timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architec[may be present for such �. procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of(I)tests, inspections or approvals fhat do not become requirements until after bids are reeeived or negotiations concluded,and(2)tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit[he Owner from delegating their cost m the Contractor. § 13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities havingjurisdiclion determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspec[ion or approval not induded under Section I3.5.1,tlie N�chi[ec[will, upon written authorization from[he Owner, instruct the Contractor[o make arrangements Por such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and Ihe Contractor shall give timely notice to lhe Architect of when and where tests and inspections are[o be inade so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such cos[s,except as provided in Section 13.53, shall be al[he O�mer's expense. § 13.5.3 Ifsuch procedures for testing inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure ofthe pa�tions ofthe Work[o comply with mquirements estzblished by the Con[ract Documents,all costs madenecessary by AIA Document A201'"-2007.Copyright O 1911, 1915,1918.1925,1937.7951, 1958.1961.1963,1966.1970,1976,1987,1997 antl 2007 by The American Init. InstiWle otArchitects.All righls reserved.WARNING This AIA" Docwnent is pmtectetl by U.S.Copyright Law and International Trealies.Unauthorizetl 33 re�roduction or tlistribution of lhis NIA� Documenq or any portim�of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuteA to the � maximum e#ent possible unAer lhe law.Thisdocumentwas pwtluced byAlASOftwareat 113201 on 03/17/2074 untlerOrtler Na51 7 5 57 067 5_i which expires on 08I72I2014,and is not for resale. UserNoles: (2054252098) such failure including those of repea[ed procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 13.5.4 Required certifica[es of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contrac[ Documents,be secured by[he Contractor and prompdy delivered to the Architect. § 13.5.51fthe Arohitec[is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Archi[ect will do so promptly and, where practicable,at the normal place of[esting. § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made prompdy to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.61NTEREST Payments due and unpaid under Ihe Contract Documents shall bear in[erest fi�om[he date payment is due at such rate as the par[ies may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof,at[he legal rate prevailing ftom time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS T7�e Owner and Contractor shall conunence all daims and eauses of action, whether in contrac[,rort,breach of warranry or otherwise,against the other arising out ofor related to the Contrac[in acwrdance wiU�Ihe requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement wilhin die time period specified by applicable law,but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Canpletion of the Work.The O�mer and Contracror waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contrac[or may terminate the Contract ifthe Work is stopped for a period of30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions ofthe Work under direct or indirect contract wi[h the Contractor,for any ofthe fol lowing reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public autliority havingjurisdiction tha[requires all Work[o be stopped; .2 An act ofgovernment,such as a declaration ofna[ional emergency that requires zll Work to be stopped; .3 6ecausetheArchiteethasnotissuedaCerlifcateforPaymentandhasnotnotifiedtheConhac[orofthe reason for withholding certitication as provided in Seclion 9.4.1, or because Ihe Owncr has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time s[ated in the Contract Doeuments;or .4 The Owner has failed to fumish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Section 22.1. § 14.1.2 The Contrac[or may[erminale the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subconvactor, Sub-subcontractor or their agea�ts or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contraet with[he Contractor,repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the enlire Work by the � Owner as described in Section 143 constitule in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days �� scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whiehever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.L I or 14.12 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' writ[en notice to the Owmer and Architect,tenninate the Contract and recover from the Owner paymen[for Work execu[ed, including reasonable overhead and profit,costs incurred by reason of such termination,and damages. § 14.7A Ifthe Work is stopped for a period of60 consecutive days Ihrough no act or fault ofthe Conlractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of Ihe Work under contraet with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fiilfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important ro the progress of the Work,Ihe Contractor may, upon seven additional days' writ[en notice to the Owner and Ihe Archi[ect,terminate the Contract and recover from the O�mer as provided in Section 14.13. AIA Document A201'"—200Z Copyri9ht OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966,1970, 1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Ini[. InstiWte oF Architects.All rights reservetl.WAF2NING:This AIA" Document is protec[eA by U.S.Copyright Law antl Intemalional Treaties.Unauthorized 34 repmAUClion or Aislribu[ion of this AIAT Dwument,or any poAion oF it,may residt in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuteA to[he � maximum extent possible unAerthe law.Thisdocumentwas produced byAlA sofN+are at 11'.32�.01 on03A712014 under Order No.5175570675_i which expires on 08I12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 "Che Owner may terminate the Contrect if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enuugh properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails[o make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substa�itial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficien[cause exists to jus[ify such aetion,may wi[hout prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after givingthe Con[rac[or and theContractor's surety, ifany,seven days' written notice,terminate employment oftl�e Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the si[e and take possession of al I materials,equipment,tools, and construction equipment and maehinery thereon owned by the Contractor, .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuan[to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon written request of the Contractor,the Owner shal I fi�rnish to[he Con[raeror a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing[he Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owna'terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Conreactor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until Ihe Work is finished. § 14.2.4 Ifthe unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the ArchitecPs services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid ro the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balanee, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid ro the Contractor or Owner,as Ihe case may be,shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligatiai for pzyment shall swvive termination of the Contrac[. § 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 'Ilie Owner may,without cause,order tl�e Con[ractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrup[[he Work in whole or in part for such period of time as[he Owner may detennine. § 14.3.2 The Con[raet Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Swn shall include protit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which[he Con[ractor is responsible;or .2 tha[an equitable adjus[ment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. _ § 14.4 TERMINATION 8Y THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE � § 14.4.1 The Owner may,at any[ime,temiinate[he Contract for the Owner's convenience and withou[cause. . § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of writ[en notice from tlie Owner of such lermina[ion for the Ownei's convenience,the Conn'actor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that ihe Owner may direct, for lhe pro[ection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to Ihe effective date of termination stated in the notice, te�ninete all existing subeontracts and purchase orders and en�er into no fi�rther subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contr�etor shall be entided to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such[ennination,along with reasonable overhead and prof t on the Work not executed. AIA�ocumenl A20P"—2007.Copyright OO 1911,1915,1918,1925, 1937,1951.1958,1961,1963, 1966,1970,19]6, 1967,1997 and 2007 by The American Ini[. InstiWte of Architecis.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA° Oocument is pmlecled by U.S.Copyriyht Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 35 reproAuction or Aislribution of this AIA' Document.or any portion o(it,may resWt in severe civil antl criminal pena�lies,anA will be pmsecutetl to lhe � maxiinumextentpossibleunderthelaw.ThisdocumeniwasproducetlbyAlASoftwarealll'.37.01on03IP12014underOrderNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OB/12/2014,and is not fo�resale. (2054252096) User Notes: ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 75.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right, paymenl of money,or other relief with respec[to the[erms of the Contract The[erm "Claim"also includes other disputes and ma[ters in question between the Owner and Contracror arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility ro substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making[he Claim. § 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,ifthe Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days a4er the claimant first recognizes Ihe condi[ion giving rise ro[he Claim,whichever is later. § 75.1.3CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim,excep[as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Secdon 99 and Ar[icle 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligenlly with performance of Ihe Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Coniract Documents.The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If[he Contractor wishes to make a Claim for ao increase in the Contrac[ Sum,writ[en notice as provided herein shall be given before proeeeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property azising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.5CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in Ihe Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given.�Che Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effec[of delay on progress of[he Work. In the case of a con[inuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are[he basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weadier conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably antieipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES '[he Contraetor and Ovmer waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out ofor relatingto this Contract.This mutual waiver ineludes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, incoine,profit, tinancing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or ofthe services of such persons;and .2 damages incurreci by[he Contractor for prineipal oftiee expenses including the compensa[ion of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing, business end reputa[ion,and for loss of profit except � anticipated profit arising directly from U�e Work. - This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's terminalion in aceordance with Article 14. Nothing containeA in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages,when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.21NITIAL DECISION § 15.2.1 Claims,excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, I 13.9,and I 1.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the hii[ial Decision Maker,unless otherwise indicated in the AgreemenL 8xcept for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred tu the Initial Decision �taker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between Ihe Contractor and persons or entities other than[he Owner. AIA Document A20�'"-2007.Copyright OO 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963, 1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Ins�iNte of Archi�ects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'" Document is pmtectetl by U.S.Copyright Law antl International Treaties.Unauthorized 36 repmduction or Aistribution o(lhis AIA' Document.or any portion of iq may result in severe civil antl criininal penalties,antl will be p�oseculetl to lhe � maximumextentpossible�mAerthelaw.ThisdowmentwaspmducetlbyAlASOftwareat113201on03/17/2014underOrderNO.5175570675_iwhichexpires on OB/12I2014,and is not for resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within[en days ofthe receipt of a Claim take one or more of[he following actions (1)reques[additional supporting data from[he claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve[he Claiin,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) advise the parties tliat the Initial Decision �taker is unable to resolve Ihe Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if[he Ini[ial Decision Maker concludes Ihat, in the Initial Decision Maker's sole discre[ion, it woidd be inappropriate for Ihe Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,[he Ini[ial Decision Maker may, bu[shall not be obligated to,considt wi[h or seek information from either party or from persons wi[h special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Ini[ial Decision Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker mzy request the Ovmer ro authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or ro furnish additional supporting data,sueh party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either(I)provide a response on the requested supporting data,(2)advise Ihe Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting datz will be furnished or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be fivnished. Upon receipt ofthe response or supporting data,if any,the Initial Decision Maker wil I either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Clzim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall (I)be in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor;and(3)notify the parties and Ihe Architect,if the Amhitect is no[serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contrac[Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,ifthe parties fail lo resolvetheir dispute through mediation,to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision a[any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. § 15.2.6.1 Ei[her party may,within 30 days from the date of an initial decision,demand in writing Ihat Ihe other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand Fails to file for mediation wi[hin the time required, Ihen both parlies waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to lhe initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event ofa Claim againstthe Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated tq notify the surety, ifany, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates[o a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may, but is not obligated to,notiTy the surety and request the sureTy's assistance in resolving the eontroversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,Ihe party asserling such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with Uie lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 MEDIATION § 15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related[o[he Contract except those waived -� as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9J 0.5,aod ISJ.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding : dispute resolution. § 15.32 The parties shall endeavor to resolve tl�eir Claims by mediation which, unless Ihe parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreeinent A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party ro[he Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering lhe mediation.The requesl may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proccedings but,in such even[,mediation shal I proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing unless stayed for a longer period by agreemen�of[he parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant lo this Sec[ion 15.3.2,Ihe parties may none[heless proeeed to tlie selec[ion of the arbitrator(s)and ag��ee upon a schedule for la[er proceedings. AIA Oocument A207'"—2007.Copyrighl�1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966, 1970,1976.1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Init. InstiWle of Architecls.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA" Document is pmtected by US.Copyriyht Law and Intemational Trealies.Unauthorized 37 reprotluclion or tlistribution of this AIA` Document,or any poAion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penaities.and will he pmsecuted[o the � maximumextentpossibleunderthelaw.ThistlocumentwasprotlucedbyAlASOflwareat1132:01on03/17/2014underOrtlerNa5175570675_lwhichexpires on 08/12/2014,and is not for resale. UserNotes: (2054252098) § 15.3.3 The par[ies shall share[he mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as se[dement agreements in any court havingjurisdic[ion thereof. § 15.4ARBITRATION § 15.4.1 Ifthe parties have selected arbitra[ion as the method for binding dispute resolu[ion in the Agreement,any Claim subject to,but no[resolved by,mediation shall be subjec[[o arbitra[ion which,unless[he parties mutually agree othenvise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construc[ion Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,delivered to the o[her party ro the Contraet,and filed wi[h the person or en[iry administering the arbitration.The party filing a notice ofdemand for arbitration must asser[in the demand all Claims then known to Ihz[party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.7 A demand for arbitrztion shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the flling of a request for mediation,but in no event shall it be mzdeafter Ihe date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable s[a[ute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a wri[ten demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable prceeedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,andjudgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction [hereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbiha[e and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to[he Agreement shall be specificalty enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdietion thereof. § 15.4.4CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4.4.1 Either party,at its sole discre[ion,may consolidate an arbitra[ion conducted under this Agreement with any o[her arbitration to which it is a party provided thal(I)Ihe arbitration agreement governing�he o[her arbi[ration permits consolidation,(2)U�e arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fac[, and(3)[he arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and metliods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Either party,at its sole discretion,may include byjoinder persons or entities substantially involved in a wmmon question of law or fact whose presence is required if comple[e relief is to be accorded in arbitration,provided [hat the party sought to be joined consents in writing lo such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entiry shall not constitute consent ro arbitration of any claim,dispute or other mat[er in ques[ion not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or enlity made a party[o an arbitration conducted onder this Section 15.4,whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights ofjoinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. AIA Document A201'"—2007.Copyright 01911, 1915,1918.1925,1937,1951, 7958,1961,1963,1966, 1970,1976,198�.1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Ins�itWe of Architecls.All rights reserved.WARNING This AIA'" Document is protecteA by U.S.Copyright Law antl International Trealies.Unauthorized 38 reproAuction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may res�tlt in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be Prosecutetl to the � maximumexlentpossibleuntlerthelaw.ThistlocumeniwaspmducedbyAlASOfRVareatll'.32'.01on03/17I2014underOrderNO.5115 57 067 5_iwhichexpires on OS/12/2014.and is not(or resale. UserNOtes: (2054252098) GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 00 73 00-SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1:GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The scope of this Section is to provide the labor, materials, and equipment noted herein and as required to provide the basic administration requirements of this Project. 1.02 CONTRACT A. This project will be performed under the conditions of the following document as applicable: 1. AIA A201, current edition,Articles 1 through 15 inclusive, is bound in this manual and included by reference; is a part of the bidding documents,and is incorporated herein as fully as if here set forth. 2. Copies of the AIA Document A201 may be purchased from: Wisconsin Society of Architects 301 South Hamilton Street Madison,Wisconsin 53703 Ph.608-257-8477 1.03 PERMITS AND FEES A. Owner shall file plans for the building permit. B. Owner shall pay for Building Permit for General Construction. C. Subcontractors shall pay for permits required for their individual trades. Permit fees to be directly paid to the Town of Vail or to Owner in which a combined fee payment can then be made by the Owner to the Town of Vail for all permits required. D. Owner shall pay all utility tap fees and service charges for utility hook ups. 1.04 MSDS AND SAFETY MANUALS A. Prior to the start of work on the project each subcontractor shall submit a copy of their safety manual and procedures and copies of material safety data sheets(MSDS)for all materials they will use during the course of the project. 1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Refer to Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Prodedures. 1.06 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. No extra work shall proceed until a Directive or Change Order has been issued by the Owner/GC and signed by the Owner/GC and Sub-contractor. B. Work based on Unit Prices may proceed if the unit price has been approved by the Owner/GC and work approved by the Project Manager. Daily worksheets identifying all Unit Price based work shall be submitted to the field superintendent on a weekly basis. C. For Changes in the Scope of Work,the Owner/General Contractor shall issue a Field Construction Directive/Request for Proposal for that change to the Sub-contractor for pricing. D. For all changes in the Scope of Work,the Sub-contractor shall submit to the GC and Owner a detailed Cost Proposal in strict accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for review: 1. Cost Proposals shall include the following: a. Date of Proposal b. The RFP number. c. Project title,address, and project number. d. A copy of the request by the Owner/General Contractor for this change. e. Cost Proposals shall also include the following: 1) Material quantities, unit costs and subtotal costs. 2) Labor quantities and costs. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3) Back-up documentation on all labor, material,and subcontractor costs. 4) Documentation of credit for work replaced and not performed due to this change. 5) Impact on Critical Path Construction Schedule as documented on the Schedule showing time required for proposed change. Claims for additional general conditions fees will not be considered if Critical Path Schedule is not impacted by proposed change. 2. All Cost Proposals must be complete or they will not be reviewed. It is the Sub-contractor's responsibility to provide this information in a timely manner so as not to impact the Critical Path Construction Schedule. Any delays caused by improper or late submissions will be born by the Subcontractor. 3. Any costs incurred due to delays caused by improper or late submissions shall be borne by the Subcontractor. 4. Change Orders will be prepared by the Owner/GC based on Cost Proposals prepared by the Subcontractor. 5. Change Orders will be based on a fixed price basis when scope of work is quantifiable. All work shall be supported by Cost Proposals. 6. Change orders will be used to document work done on a Unit Price Basis. All work shall be supported by Cost Proposals documenting actual units used. 7. Request for extension of Date of Completion due to increased scope of work by Change Orders shall be reviewed and approved or denied, based on the Work's impact on the Critical Path Schedule. 8. When a Change Order has been approved,the Sub-contractor shall update the Application for Payment Form G-703 with a separate line for each Change Order. 1.07 WORK OR ITEMS SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER OR OTHERS A. Items to be supplied by the Owner/GC and installed by the Subcontractor will be so noted in each specification section, on the Drawings or in the Bid Package description. B. For items supplied by Owner/GC and installed by the Subcontractor the Subcontractor shall be responsible for the following and shall include the cost of these services in the base bid: 1. Accepting deliveries of material at the job and storing and protecting the material once on site. 2. Inspecting delivered goods for damage prior to accepting them. 3. Installing all Owner-supplied items unless item is supplied and installed under separate contract. C. For items supplied and installed by the Owner/GC,the Sub-contractor shall coordinate his or her work with the work supplied and installed by the other subcontractors. 1.08 PRECONSTRUCTION and PREINSTALLTION MEETINGS A. The Architect and Owner/GC will schedule a Pre-construction Meeting at the Site within 20 days after awarding the contract prior to start of construction. Attendance is required by: 1. Owner 2. A/E and his professional consultants 3. All contractor and their superintendants 4. All major subcontractors 5. All Major material suppliers 6. Others as appropriate B. The Owner/General Contractor shall schedule pre-installation meetings prior to the start of the following activities: 1. Masonry work 2. Roofing 3. Interior finishing 4. Prior to field installation of door hardware 5. Other activities as requested by Owner or A/E 1.09 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Owner/General Contractor shall schedule progress meetings as required. Time and day of the meetings shall be decided after award of Contract. It shall be a weekday mutually agreeable to all parties. B. Location of the Meetings: Project field office of the General Contractor. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Attendance is required by: 1. A/E and his professional consultants as needed 2. All Contractors and their superintendents 3. Owner 4. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 5. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda D. The Owner/General Contractor shall notify Sub-contractors five(5)working days in advance of such meetings. 1.10 SUB-CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Extent of work area is noted on the Drawings. B. Areas for storing materials,vehicular access and parking will be designated at pre-construction meeting. On-Site stored materials will be at Subcontractors risk of loss, damage or other liability. C. Subcontractor must comply with Building Rules and Regulations. Work hours and noise ordinances must be obeyed. These rules will be reviewed at the pre-construction meeting. D. Subcontractor must coordinate any work required outside the designated work area with the Construction Superintendent: 1. Any work that might interrupt utility service to other parts of the building must be coordinated with the Construction Superintendent in advance ofthe proposed interruption. 2. Any core drilling in floor or access to electrical or plumbing in space below is the responsibility of the Sub-contractor to coordinate with the Construction Superintendent. Any repairs or replacement of material in these spaces is the responsibility of the Sub-contractor. 1.11 SITE ACCESS AND PROTECTION A. The Site Work Contractor, Division 31,shall build and maintain temporary facilities for site access during construction. B. The location of such facilities will be as noted on the Drawings and/or as agreed upon at the pre-construction meeting. C. Access to town or city streets shall be coordinated by the Owner/GC with the local highway or traffic department. D. Owner/GC shall comply with all town ordinances in regards to maintaining and keeping the public streets clean and free of construction debris, mud and dust. 1.12 SITE SAFETY A. Construction is to be limited only to those areas agreed upon at the pre-construction meeting. Owner/GC shall be responsible for insuring that all subcontractors are aware of these rules and adhere to them. B. Site protection shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Fencing and/or guardrails at openings at floors and roofs shall be installed as work progresses. 2. Rails or protective fencing shall be adequate to support lateral point loads of 200 pounds or as required by local codes. 3. These rails or fencing shall be maintained on a daily basis to ensure that they provide the required protection at all openings. C. Temporary Power: 1. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install (1)400A 1-phase Temporary Service for construction. Coordinate installation with Utility Company. Include utility costs for the temporary service. Provide and install temporary power and lighting for all floors in all buildings. 2. Also provide and install (1)200A 1-phase 3-wire Temporary Service to be located where directed by the Owner/GC.This service is to provide power and heat for construction trailers. Provide connections as required. Include utility costs for the temporary service. 3. Temporary lighting of site shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor and is required as follows: Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 a. Provide lighting of interior spaces to ensure adequate lighting of the site/buildings for all trades to pursue their work and to ensure safe passage through site at dark. b. Maintain this lighting during the course of the job to ensure its proper function. D. The Owner/GC will provide site signage as follows: 1. At perimeter of site, post NO TRESPASSING signs to adequately notify the public not to enter the site. a. "Construction area: KEEP OUT" b. "HARD HAT AREA" c. "Emergency phone numbers." 1.13 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. The construction shall be reviewed in detail with the construction team and revised based on their input. B. This schedule shall be discussed at each weekly project meeting and updated based as needed. Changes in project duration due to delays caused by weather,Change Orders,or other factors will also be incorporated. C. Time for Extended General Conditions will not be approved unless adequately documented on this schedule. 1.14 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The Owner/GC will pay an independent testing agency to perform tests required under this contract. B. The Owner/GC shall be responsible for contacting and coordinating with the testing agency and scheduling tests, as they are required. C. The tests that are required are as follows: 1. Soils testing. 2. Concrete samples and testing. D. Repair of work not conforming to the Specifications of this Project shall be done by the responsible Sub-contractor,and re-testing of this work shall be performed by the Owner/GC. 1.15 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Owner/GC is responsible for coordinating all of the Work and all of the Subcontracts of this project. B. All pipes,wiring,and ducts shall be concealed in finished spaces unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Owner/GC shall coordinate and verify space requirements and installation of inechanical, plumbing and electrical work,which are shown on the Plans diagrammatically. Follow routing of ducts and pipes as shown on plans as closely as possible. D. Coordinate layout of outlets,switches, lights, HVAC registers,thermostats, plumbing fixtures,and like items with framing plans and interior finishes to achieve indicated or implied alignments. 1.16 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING A. Refer to section 00 31 00. 1.17 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION A. Clean all surfaces prior to applying next material. B. Prepare all surfaces including priming, cleaning, and application of sealer or bonding agent as per manufacturer's written specifications. C. Verify that existing site and substrate conditions are acceptable prior to starting subsequent Work. Beginning new Work is an implied acceptance of the existing conditions. D. All substrates shall be prepared for the finish work as required of each Section. Owner/GC shall be responsible for coordinating the work of all trades to ensure that all work is properly prepared. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor requiring the opening, including all temporary and permanent structural support for the opening. B. Subcontractors shall provide cutting and patching as part of base contract as required to: Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Correct defective work. 2. Uncover and install ill-timed Work. 3. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 4. Provide openings in completed work for penetrations of inechanical and electrical work. C. Cutting and patching as required to accommodate finish surfaces as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications is included in the Subcontractor's Scope of Work,whether or not it is specifically called out on the Drawings or Specifications. D. To the greatest extent possible,the Subcontractor shall keep cutting and patching to a minimum and shall provide sleeves and other penetrations through assemblies for piping, ducts,wiring and other elements as may be required. E. Prior to cutting and patching the Subcontractor shall follow this procedure for review of the work to be done: 1. Notify the Architect in writing of the work to be done. Give at least 48 hours notice. 2. Send a copy of this notification to all subcontractors with related or affected work. 3. When deemed necessary by the Architect, a meeting shall be held at the site with all affected parties in attendance to review the proposed cutting and patching procedure. 4. When deemed necessary by the Architect,the Subcontractor shall prepare a sample of the proposed cutting and patching process and details to assure that the completed work will match the adjacent surfaces. 5. Contact all other parties as required herein. 6. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of Work. 7. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. 8. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. F. Subcontractors shall obtain written directions or drawings from the Architect or Engineer prior to cutting any of the following structural elements. 1. Cold formed metal framing 2. Structural concrete 3. Precast Concrete 4. Engineered wood products such as TJI Joists S. Bearing walls 6. Piping 7. Ductwork 8. Equipment 9. Fire rated walls and floors and other fire rated assemblies G. Subcontractors shall obtain written directions or drawings from Architect or Engineer prior to cutting any of the following operational or safety items: 1. Shoring and bracing 2. Vapor barriers 3. Flashing 4. Waterproofing membranes 5. Noise and/or vibration control elements or systems 6. Electrical,communications,or control wiring H. Cutting and patching of exposed finished material shall be done by the installer of that material including but not limited to the following materials: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces 3. Finish carpentry items. 4. Millwork and casework. 5. Stone and unit masonry veneer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 6. Ornamental metals and grilles. 7. Roofing material and assemblies. I. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit J. If patches do not match adjacent surfaces, in the opinion of the Architect or Owner/GC,the Subcontractor shall refinish that surface in its entirety at no extra cost to the Owner/GC. K. All holes cut in concrete or masonry walls or floors shall be core drilled. L. All patches shall be finished to match adjacent surfaces. M. Cutting and patching as required to accommodate finish surfaces as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications is included in the Subcontractor's Scope of Work,whether or not it is specifically called out on the Drawings or Specifications. N. Fit work tightly to pipes,sleeves, ducts,conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. Firestop wall or floor fire separation penetrations with products specified in Section 07 84 00. 0. Seal penetration perimeters in "sound insulated" partitions with acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 21 16. 1.19 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Refer to Section 01 77 00. 1.20 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standards by"latest date of issue"shall be as of date of this Project Manual. B. If reference standard is in conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding. In general,the more restrictive requirements will apply. C. Work and equipment shall conform to the standards noted in each specification Section. 1.21 DEFINITIONS A. "Provide" means to supply, install, and finish a product or material in its entirety. B. "Submit" means to submit item for review and approval prior to ordering, manufacturing,or installing that item. C. Refer to the "Glossary of Construction Industry Terms" by the American Institute of Architects for all other definitions not given in the contract documents. 1.22 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Certificate of Liability Insurance for insurance requirements. B. Subcontractor shall secure and maintain Workers Compensation, Employers Liability, Public Liability, and Property Damage Insurance for the Subcontractor and its employees with a company or companies satisfactory to the Contractor and furnish certificates warranting not less than thirty days notice of cancellation or material change in any policy to the Contractor. The certificates must be provided before work begins and naming Contractor and Owner of the Project as additional insured and coverages required must provide the minimum liability limits outlined below,which may be increased at Contractor's option. If the Subcontractor fails to furnish a certificate of insurance evidencing appropriate coverage,the Contractor will have the option to withhold payment from Subcontractor until such time as appropriate coverages are purchased and evidenced by certificates of insurance. C. Insurance. BE SURE CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS:GORMAN GENERAL CONTRACTORS,LLC,WITH GORMAN & COMPANY,INC.&LION'S RIDGE APARTMENT HOMES, LLC AS ADDITIONAL INSUREDS WITH THE FOLLOWING OTHER REQUIREMENTS LISTED BELOW: 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance(occurrence form only)shall be secured and maintained by Subcontractor with the following minimum limits: $2,000,000 General Aggregate, $2,000,000 Products and Completed Operations Aggregate,$1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury, $1,000,000 Each Occurrence,$50,000 Fire Damage(any one fire),$5,000 Medical Expense(any one person),attach Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 CG-2503, $1,000,000 Aggregate Limit per project. Coverage to include contractual liability and when applicable Explosion, Collapse and Underground Hazards. 2. Business Automobile Liability covering"any auto" including all Owned, Non-Owned and Hired Auto liability shall be secured and maintained by Subcontractor in the following combined single limit of$1,000,000. 3. Workers Compensation insurance of at least statutory limits and all state endorsement shall be secured and maintained as required by the laws of the state where the work is located. This insurance shall cover all employees who will be performing any of the obligations assumed by the Subcontractor under the contract documents. Employers Liability limits of$500,000 Each Accident/$500,000 Disease Policy Limit/$500,000 Disease Each Employee shall be required. 4. Umbrella Liability with a minimum limit of$5,000,000 Each Occurrence and $5,000,000 Aggregate shall be secured and maintained by the Subcontractor. 5. In the event Owner has not provided builders risk coverage the Subcontractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance to protect his interests on all job related materials and equipment. This includes, but is not limited to Installation Floater/Buildings Risk,Tool and Equipment Floaters,etc. Contractor will not be responsible for damage to, or loss of,Subcontractor's material and/or equipment while located on the job site,while in transit,or elsewhere. 6. The Comprehensive General Liability insurance policy required hereunder shall name the Owner and Contractor as additional insureds per endorsements equivalent of I50 version CG2010 edition 11/85 or CG2010 and CG2037 versions 10/01 or prior. Said liability coverage shall include Subcontractor's Protective Liability with products and completed operations coverage extended for two(2)years after completion of this Contract. Contractor shall require all insurance companies issuing any policies of insurance to Subcontractor which Subcontractor is required to procure hereunder,to certify to Contractor in writing that such policies have been issued and are in force and will not be materially changed, cancelled or annulled, except upon thirty(30)days prior notice in writing to Contractor. Prior to the expiration of any such certificate,a new certificate must be furnished to the Contractor showing the continuing required coverage. Subcontractor shall not cancel any policies of insurance required hereunder,either before or after completion of the Work,without the consent in writing of Contractor.All General Liability certificates of insurance must reference the policy's additional insured endorsement-ISO version CG2010 edition 11/85 or CG2010 and CG2037 versions 10/01 or prior. Copies of such endorsements shall be provided to the Contractor by the Subcontractor upon request of the Contractor. The Contractor shall have the right at any time to demand that the Subcontractor furnish its actual policies of insurance, in which event Subcontractor shall furnish Contractor with same within fifteen (15)days of such demand. Before commencing any Work on the Project,the Subcontractor shall furnish to the Contractor written proof of the insurance coverages and certificates herein provided for in a form satisfactory to the Contractor and Owner. 7. Subcontractor shall pay all premiums and costs in connection with all insurance which Subcontractor shall be required to furnish or provide hereunder. In the event any Work to be performed under this Contract is further assigned or transferred pursuant to the written consent of the Owner,the Subcontractor shall be required in advance of such assignment or transfer to arrange for and furnish proof of insurance coverage of said Sub-subcontractor according to the terms of this Contract. 8. Subcontractor assumes full risk of loss for any damage or loss to its own materials,facilities,tools, equipment, plant,scaffolds, bracing and other property,whether located on or off the Project. Owner shall bear the risk of loss for materials once they are wrought in place. 9. To the extent the Subcontractor has insurance for any loss or damage incurred by it in conjunction with the performance of its Work under this Contract,the Subcontractor hereby waives any claim or cause of action that it and/or its insurance carrier may have against the Owner and/or the Contractor with respect to such loss or damage. 10. Nothing contained in this section shall relieve the Subcontractor of its indemnity obligations set forth elsewhere in this Contract. 1.23 SITE OFFICE,TEMPORARY SERVICES AND STAFFING A. Owner/GC shall provide a construction office on site to conduct construction operations. B. The office shall be equipped with the following: Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. At least one phone line and phone with answering machine. 2. One fax line and fax machine. 3. Heat and lights. 4. Layout table for drawings. 5. File cabinets and desks. 6. Plan racks or flat files for plan storage. 7. One portable phone for site phone. C. The Owner/GC shall provide temporary toilets with a weekly cleaning service contract. The toilets may be used by other Subcontractor's workers. D. Owner/GC shall provide and maintain first-aid equipment for construction personnel, readily available for emergency use. Post in a conspicuous place the telephone numbers and addresses of local police and fire departments and nearest hospital. E. Owner/GC shall provide and maintain in working order during the entire construction period,suitable fire extinguishers and such other fire protective equipment and devices in sufficient quantity for the Project size, necessary for any class or type of fire. Provide non-freeze type such as A-B-C rated dry chemical extinguishers of not less than 10 Ib.capacity each. In addition, any Contractor or Subcontractor who maintains an enclosed shed on the premises shall provide and maintain in an accessible location,one or more similar non-freezing type fire extinguishers in each shed. F. Owner/GC shall, using existing or temporary utility connections, provide the job with power, lights,water, ventilation,and heating as required to construct the project. 1. Owner/GC shall pay electrical bills during construction. 2. Owner/GC shall pay water bills during construction. 3. Owner/GC shall pay for heating equipment and fuel during construction. G. Owner/GC shall provide the following staff to manage the project throughout it's duration: 1. Full time construction superintendent who will be on site at least 40 hours per week. 2. Full time project manager. H. Project sign shall be provided by Owner/GC and shall include the following information: 1. Project name and address. 2. Owner/GC's name,address, and phone number. 3. Emergency telephone number. 4. Other information as required on Drawings or by local authorities. 5. Sign shall be sized as required to include the above information. 6. Lettering shall be sized to be readable at 100 feet with normal vision. 7. Sign shall be located as directed by the Architect. 1.24 MOISTURE MANAGEMENT AND MOLD PREVENTION POLICIES AND PROCEDURES A. All sub-contractors shall comply with the Gorman&Company moisture management and mold prevention policies and procedures. Copies of this document are available from the Owner and copies will be available at the job site throughout construction for reference by all project contractors and workmen. 1.25 PROTECTION OF SITE AND OF STORED AND INSTALLED WORK A. All existing items to remain on site shall be protected at all times. B. Owner/GC is responsible for adequate protection of all installed work. C. Protection requirements for each finish are noted in the Sections herein. Subcontractor shall provide materials and installation for the protection of finish surfaces and shall maintain that protection throughout course of the job. D. Installed Work shall be protected from extreme heat and cold. E. Traffic shall be prohibited on unprotected waterproofed or roofed surfaces. F. Material shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner and adequately protected from damage. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. Each type of material shall be stored in accordance with the requirements of each specification Section and the manufacturer's requirements. H. Materials used for protection shall be new and clean. I. Owner/GC shall provide dumpsters for waste removal except for the following: 1. The drywall (section 092116)contractor shall provide and pay for all means of staging and removal of materials and waste generated by his work. 1.26 PROGRE55 CLEANING A. General 1. Retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding drainage,or traffic and providing the required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris,waste materials,and other items not required for construction of Work. 3. At least weekly, and more often if necessary,completely remove all scraps,debris,and waste material from the designated holding area on the job site. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, and observe all requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. B. Project Site 1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up scrap,debris,and waste material. Remove all such items to the designated holding area. 2. Weekly,and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site; restack,tidy, or otherwise service all arrangements to meet requirements noted above(Progress Cleaning-General). 3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times. C. Building Work Areas 1. Weekly,and more often if necessary, inspect work areas and pick up scrap,debris, and waste material; remove to designated holding area. 2. Weekly,and more often if necessary,sweep all work areas clean. "Clean",for the purpose of this subparagraph,shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and handheld broom. 3. As required, preparatory to installation of succeeding material,clean the structures or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using all equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness. 4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean finish floors daily(and more often if necessary)at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials have been installed. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph,shall be interpreted as meaning free from all foreign material which, in the opinion of the A/E, may be injurious to the finish floor material. 1.27 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES AND WARRANTIES A. Refer to Section 01 78 00. B. When called for by an individual specification section,submit certification by the manufacturer or supplier that the installed Product is installed (and operating) in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Distribute two copies of this to the Architect and keep one copy for inclusion in the Project Manual. C. The Subcontractor warrants to the Owner/GC that all workmanship by all trades involved and all materials provided shall be of the best quality. D. The Subcontractor shall correct any defective or rejected work prior to acceptance and warrants to the Owner/GC that any defects in workmanship and materials occurring within one year from final acceptance will be corrected expeditiously at the Subcontractor's expense. 1.28 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Refer to Section 01 77 00. END OF SECTION 00 73 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-9 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-10 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 20 00- PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. General Summary of monthly draw procedure: 1. Billing to include a. AIA—G702&G703 with materials split out on the G703; and b. Invoice for current period. 2. Timing-Billing: a. Invoice/AIA to be received "in hand" by the 25th of the month;fax/scan/mail are okay as long as it is received by 25th. b. Should be sent to construction accounting. 3. Timing-Payment: a. Vendor"to be paid"when GC is paid;generally by the end of the following month. 4. Lien Waivers: a. Unconditional waivers are due prior to or in conjunction to receiving check. b. Unconditional material supplier waivers will also be due in the amount of the"materials drawn" reflected on the G703. B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. END OF SECTION 01 20 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 31 13 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1:GENERAL 1.01 THIS SECTION specifies requirements for project coordination including: A. Coordination B. Administrative and supervisory personnel C. General installation provisions D. Cleaning and protection 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate activities included in various Sections to assure efficient and orderly installation of each component. Coordinate operations included under different Sections that are dependent on each other for proper installation and operation. B. Where installation of one component depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation,schedule activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. C. Where space is limited,coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance,service,and repair. D. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. E. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining required coordination procedures. Include required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. F. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress. Such activities include: 1. Preparation of schedules 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities 3. Delivery and processing of submittals 4. Progress meetings 5. Project closeout activities 1.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare Coordination Drawings where close coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities,and where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. B. Show relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. C. Indicate required installation sequence. 1.05 STAFF NAMES A. Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed,submit a list of Contractor's staff assignments, including Superintendent and personnel at the site; identify individuals,their duties and responsibilities, addresses and telephone numbers. B. Post Copies in the Project meeting room,the field office, and at each temporary telephone. 1.06 INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS A. The Installer of each component shall inspect the substrate and conditions under which Work is performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT COORDINATION 01 31 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Before the work any trade or construction on the project,the Owner/General Contractor will conduct a pre-installation conference for that portion, contract or phase of the Work. The conference will include review of a quality control checklist specific to the work that is to be installed. The supervisor and on site workman of the installer/subcontractor shall be present to review the work and its related requirements with the Owner/General Contractor. Any sub subcontractors shall also be present for any pre-installation meetings which involve work that will be performed by them. 1.08 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that they are more stringent than requirements in Contract Documents. B. INSPECT material immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. C. PROVIDE ATfACHMENT and connection devices and methods necessary for securing each construction element. Secure each construction element true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. D. VISUAL EFFECTS Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints to obtain the best effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for decision. E. RECHECK MEASUREMENTS and dimensions, before starting installation. F. INSTALL EACH COMPONENT during weather conditions and project status that will ensure the best results. Isolate each part from incompatible materials as necessary to prevent deterioration. G. COORDINATE TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES with inspections and tests,to minimize uncovering completed construction for that purpose. H. MOUNTING HEIGHTS Where mounting heights are not indicated, install components at standard heights for the application indicated. Refer questionable decisions to the General Contractor/Owner. 1.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation,clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and maintain completed construction as often as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. C. Supervise operations to ensure that no part of construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful or deleterious exposure. Such exposures include: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading 2. Excessiveinternalor externalpressure 3. Excessive weathering 4. Excessively high or low temperatures or humidity 5. Air contamination or pollution 6. Water or ice 7. Chemicals or solvents 8. Heavy traffic,soiling,staining, and corrosion 9. Rodent and insect infestation 10. Unusual wear or other misuse 11. Contact between incompatible materials 12. Theft or vandalism END OF SECTION 01 31 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT COORDINATION 01 31 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 0140 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Mock-ups. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection services. G. Manufacturers'field services. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 42 16-Definitions. B. Section 0142 19-Reference Standards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1021-Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008. B. ASTM C1077-Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2013a. C. ASTM C1093-Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012. D. ASTM D3740-Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a. E. ASTM E329-Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2011. F. ASTM E543-Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009. G. IAS AC89-Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work,submit agency name,address,and telephone number,and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection,with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 3. Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing testing laboratory is accredited under IAS AC89. B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections,submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data,affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections,submit printed instructions for delivery,storage, assembly, installation,start-up, adjusting, and finishing,for the Owner's information. Indicate Job No. 14LION-00-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. F. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS-See Section 0142 19 A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual,also referred to as reference standards,comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties,or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency: PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products,services, site conditions,and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,flashings,seals, and finishes. Job No. 14LION-00-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location,adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing,along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples,tests,and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples,tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS'FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment,test,adjust and balance of equipment as applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. END OF SECTION 0140 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 014100- REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following: B. 28 CFR 35-Department of Justice accessibility regulations relating to State and local governments;current edition. C. 28 CFR 36-Department of Justice accessibility regulations relating to public accommodations;current edition. D. 36 CFR 1191-Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). E. FED-STD-795-Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards; 1988. F. 29 CFR 1910-Occupational Safety and Health Standards;current edition; as a work place. G. State of Colorado amendments to some or all of the following. H. Town of Vail amendments to some or all of the following. I. Zoning Code: Town of Vail Zoning Code. J. ICC(IFC)-ICC International Fire Code, 2012 K. ANSI-ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003. L. ICC(IBC)-ICC International Building Code, 2012. M. ICC(IPC)-ICC International Plumbing Code,2012. N. ICC(IMC)-ICC International Mechanical Code, 2012. 0. ICC(IFGC)-ICC International Fuel Gas Code,2012. P. ICC(IEC)-ICC International Electrical Code, 2012. Q. ICC(IECC)-ICC International Energy Conservation Code, 2012. R. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Regulations: City of Vail. END OF SECTION 014100 Job No. 14LION-00-01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014100-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 0142 16- DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: To supply,deliver, unload,and inspect for damage. B. Install: To unpack,assemble, erect, apply, place,finish, cure, protect,clean,start up, and make ready for use. C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment,fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation,fabrication, conveying,or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment. D. Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements(if any),the contracting requirements,and the specifications. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Supply: Same as Furnish. END OF SECTION 0142 16 Job No. 14LION-00-01 DEFINITIONS 0142 16-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 DEFINITIONS 0142 16-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 0142 19 - REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements relating to referenced standards. B. Reference standards full title and edition date. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual,also referred to as reference standards,comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in the individual specification sections, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. PART 2 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATION DOCUMENTS 2.01 AA--ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION,INC. 2.02 AABC--ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL 2.03 AAMA--AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION A. AAMA 611-Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012. B. AAMA 2603-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. C. AAMA 2604-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. D. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. 2.04 ABMA--AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION,INC. A. ABMA STD 9-Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 1990(Reapproved 2008). B. ABMA STD 11- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings; 1990(Reapproved 2008). 2.05 ACI--AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL A. ACI 117-Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 117-Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. C. ACI 211.1-Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). D. ACI 211.2-Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete; 1998(Reapproved 2004). E. ACI 211.2-Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete; 1998(Reapproved 2004) Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 F. ACI 301-Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; 2010. G. ACI 302.1R-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004(Errata 2007). H. ACI 302.1R-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004(Errata 2007). I. ACI 303R-Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete Practice; 2012. J. ACI 304R-Guide for Measuring, Mixing,Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. K. ACI 305R-Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. L. ACI 306R-Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. M. ACI 308R-Guide to Curing Concrete;2001 (Reapproved 2008). N. ACI 308R-Guide to Curing Concrete;2001(Reapproved 2008). 0. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. P. ACI 347-Guide to Formwork for Concrete;2004. Q. ACI 347-Guide to Formwork for Concrete;2004. R. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA-Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; 2011. 2.06 AHRI--AIR-CONDITIONING,HEATING,AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE A. AHRI 210/240-Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2008. B. AHRI 520-Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; 2004. C. AHRI 550/590-Performance Rating of Water-Chilling and Heat Pump Water-Heating Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle; 2011. D. AHRI 560-Absorption Water Chilling and Water Heating Packages;2000. E. AHRI 575-Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space; 2008. F. AHRI 710-Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; 2009. G. AHRI 1060 I-P-Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment; 2011. 2.07 AISC--AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. A. AISC(MAN)-Steel Construction Manual; 2011. B. AISC 360-Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010. C. AISC S303-Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2005. D. AISC S348-Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. 2.08 AISI--AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE A. AI51 SG02-1-North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members;American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. 2.09 AMCA--AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL,INC. A. AMCA 99-Standards Handbook; 2010. B. AMCA 204-Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2005. C. AMCA 210-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210,same as AN51/ASHRAE 51). D. AMCA(DIR)- [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx. (Formerly AMCA 261) E. AMCA 300-Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2008. F. AMCA 301-Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2007. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. AMCA S00-L-Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012. H. AMCA S00-D-Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2012. I. AMCA 511-Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010. 2.10 ANSI--AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE A. ANSI A14.3-American National Standard for Ladders--Fixed --Safety Requirements; 2008. B. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1-American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile(Compendium); 2013.1. C. ANSI A118.3-American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant,Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013.1. D. ANSI A118.4-American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1. E. ANSI A118.7-American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation;2013.1. F. ANSI A136.1-American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 2013.1. G. ANSI A208.1-American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. H. ANSI A208.2-American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. I. ANSI A250.4-American National Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors Hardware Reinforcings; 2007(R2011). J. ANSI A250.4-American National Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings; 2011. K. ANSI A250.8-SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. L. ANSI A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998(R2011). M. ANSI Z535.2-American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011. N. ANSI Z535.4-American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels;2011. 2.11 APA--APA-THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION A. APA PRP-108-Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels(Form E445); 2001. 2.12 API--AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE A. API RP 1604-Closure of Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks; 1996(R 2001). B. API PUBL 1628-Guide to the Assessment and Remediation of Underground Petroleum Releases; 1996. 2.13 ASCE--AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS A. ASCE 7-Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures;2011. 2.14 ASHRAE--AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING,REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS,INC. A. ASHRAE Guideline 1.1-The HVAC Commissioning Process; 2012 B. ASHRAE Std 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2010(ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15). C. ASHRAE Std 23.1-Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units; 2010. D. ASHRAE Std 52.2-Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size;2012. E. ASHRAE Std 84-Method of Testing Air to Air Heat/Energy Exchangers; 2008. F. ASHRAE Std 90.1- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; 2010, Including All Addenda (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Std 90). Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.15 ASME--THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS A. ASME A13.1-Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007(ANSI/ASME A13.1). B. ASME B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012(ANSI B16.18). C. ASME B16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013. D. ASME 616.26-Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; 2011. E. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping; 2011 (ANSI/ASME 631.9). F. ASME (BPV)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; 2010. G. ASME (BPV VIII, 1)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII, Division 1-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2013. H. ASME (BPV IX)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications; 2013. 2.16 ASTM A Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM A1-Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails; 2000(Reapproved 2010) . B. ASTM A6/A6M-Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates,Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2012. C. ASTM A36/A36M-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012. D. ASTM A47/A47M -Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999(Reapproved 2009). E. ASTM A53/A53M-Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless;2012. F. ASTM A74-Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2013a. G. ASTM A82/A82M-Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement;2007. H. ASTM A108-Standard Specification for Steel Bar,Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. I. ASTM A123/A123M-Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. J. ASTM A153/A153M-Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. K. ASTM A167-Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip; 1999(Reapproved 2009). L. ASTM A185/A185M-Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,for Concrete; 2007. M. ASTM A234/A234M-Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2011a. N. ASTM A240/A240M-Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2012. 0. ASTM A242/A242M-Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004(Reapproved 2009). P. ASTM A252-Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles; 2010. Q. ASTM A269-Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2013. R. ASTM A270/A270M-Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic and Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Sanitary Tubing; 2010. S. ASTM A276-Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes;2013. T. ASTM A283/A283M-Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2012. U. ASTM A307-Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts,Studs,and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2012. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 V. ASTM A325-Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010. W. ASTM A325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013. X. ASTM A328/A328M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling; 2007(Reapproved 2012). Y. ASTM A416/A416M -Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete; 2012a. Z. ASTM A449-Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,General Use; 2010. AA. ASTM A480/A480M-Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,Sheet, and Strip;2013. AB. ASTM A490-Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2012. AC. ASTM A490M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3,for Structural Steel Joints(Metric); 2012. AD. ASTM A497/A497M-Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,for Concrete; 2007. AE. ASTM A500/A500M -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. AF. ASTM A501-Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2007. AG. ASTM A514/A514M-Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding;2005 (Reapproved 2009). AH. ASTM A514/A514M-Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding;2005 (Reapproved 2009). AI. ASTM A529/A529M-Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2005 (Reapproved 2009). AJ. ASTM A554-Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2011. AK. ASTM A555/A555M-Standard Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods; 2005 (Reapproved 2009). AL. ASTM A563-Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a. AM. ASTM A563M-Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007. AN. ASTM A572/A572M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel; 2012. A0. ASTM A580/A580M-Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 2012a. AP. ASTM A588/A588M-Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance; 2010. AQ. ASTM A615/A615M-Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. AR. ASTM A653/A653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process;2011. AS. ASTM A666-Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. AT. ASTM A690/A690M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel,Copper, Phosphorus Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance for Use in Marine Environments; 2007 (Reapproved 2012) Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 AU. ASTM A722/A722M-Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for Prestressing Concrete; 2012. AV. ASTM A759-Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Crane Rails; 2010. AW. ASTM A767/A767M-Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. AX. ASTM A775/A775M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b. AY. ASTM A767/A767M-Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. AZ. ASTM A775/A775M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b. BA. ASTM A780-Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2009. BB. ASTM A786/A786M-Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005 (Reapproved 2009). BC. ASTM A792/A792M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010. BD. ASTM A884/A884M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2012. BE. ASTM A884/A884M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2012. BF. ASTM A992/A992M-Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011. BG. ASTM A996/A996M-Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. BH. ASTM A1008/A1008M-Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet,Cold-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy,and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2013. BI. ASTM A1011/A1011M-Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,and Ultra-High Strength;2013. 2.17 ASTM B Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM B1-Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire; 2012. B. ASTM B3-Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2012. C. ASTM B8-Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011. D. ASTM B26/B26M -Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings; 2012. E. ASTM B32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. F. ASTM B33-Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010. G. ASTM B42-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe,Standard Sizes; 2010. H. ASTM B85/85M-Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings; 2010. I. ASTM B88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. J. ASTM B88M-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005(Reapproved 2011). K. ASTM B117-Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus; 2011. L. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. M. ASTM B209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. N. ASTM B210-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes; 2012. 0. ASTM B210M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes(Metric); 2012. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 P. ASTM B211-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod,and Wire; 2012e1. Q. ASTM B211M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire(Metric); 2012e1. R. ASTM B221-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013. S. ASTM B221M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric];2013. T. ASTM B370-Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2012. U. ASTM B370-Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2012. V. ASTM B633-Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013. W. ASTM B749-Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip,Sheet,and Plate Products; 2003 (Reapproved 2009). X. ASTM B787/6787M -Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004(Reapproved 2009). 2.18 ASTM C Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM C27-Standard Classification of Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractory Brick; 1998(Reapproved 2013). B. ASTM C31/C31M-Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 2012. C. ASTM C33/C33M-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013. D. ASTM C34-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile; 2012. E. ASTM C39/C39M-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2012a. F. ASTM C55-Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2011. G. ASTM C56-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Nonloadbearing Tile; 2012. H. ASTM C62-Standard Specification for Building Brick(Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2013. I. ASTM C67-Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile; 2013. J. ASTM C90-Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units;2013. K. ASTM C91/C91M-Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012. L. ASTM C94/C94M-Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete;2013. M. ASTM C109/C109M-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars(Using 2-in. or(50-mm)Cube Specimens); 2012. N. ASTM C126-Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick,and Solid Masonry Units; 2013. 0. ASTM C129-Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011. P. ASTM C140/C140M-Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2013. Q. ASTM C143/C143M-Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012. R. ASTM C144-Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011. S. ASTM C150/C150M-Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. T. ASTM C171-Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. U. ASTM C173/C173M-Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2012. V. ASTM C177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 W. ASTM C203-Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation; 2005a (Reapproved 2012). X. ASTM C207-Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006(Reapproved 2011). Y. ASTM C208-Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012. Z. ASTM C212-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile; 2010. AA. ASTM C216-Standard Specification for Facing Brick(Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2013. AB. ASTM C260-Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete;2010a. AC. ASTM C270-Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012. AD. ASTM C297/C297M-Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions; 2004 (Reapproved 2010). AE. ASTM C309-Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. AF. ASTM C330-Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2009. AG. ASTM C348-Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2008. AH. ASTM C406-Standard Specification for Roofing Slate; 2010. AI. ASTM C423-Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 2009a. AJ. ASTM C472-Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009). AK. ASTM C475/C475M-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2012. AL. ASTM C476-Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. AM. ASTM C494/C494M-Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013. AN. ASTM C503-Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone; 2010. A0. ASTM C530-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Nonloadbearing Screen Tile;2012. AP. ASTM C568-Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2010. AQ. ASTM C579-Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes; 2001(Reapproved 2012). AR. ASTM C587-Standard Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster; 2004(Reapproved 2009). AS. ASTM C612-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2010. AT. ASTM C615-Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone; 2011. AU. ASTM C618-Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete;2012. AV. ASTM C642-Standard Test Method for Density,Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete; 2006. AW. ASTM C645-Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2011a. AX. ASTM C652-Standard Specification for Hollow Brick(Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2013. AY. ASTM C685/C685M-Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2011. AZ. ASTM C739-Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber(Wood-Base) Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2011. BA. ASTM C744-Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units; 2011. BB. ASTM C754-Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011. BC. ASTM C764-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2011. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 BD. ASTM C780-Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2012. BE. ASTM C827/C827M-Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2010. Bf. ASTM C834-Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. BG. ASTM C840-Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;2011. BH. ASTM C841-Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring; 2003(Reapproved 2008)e1. BI. ASTM C847-Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2012. BJ. ASTM C881/C881M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2010. BK. ASTM C882-Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear; 2012. BL. ASTM C920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. BM. ASTM C928/C928M-Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening Cementitious Material for Concrete Repairs; 2009. BN. ASTM C955-Standard Specification for Load-Bearing(Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs, Runners(Tracks),and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c. BO. ASTM C1015-Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2006(Reapproved 2011)e1. BP. ASTM C1021-Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008. BQ. ASTM C1036-Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. BR. ASTM C1048-Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. BS. ASTM C1059/C1059M-Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008). BT. ASTM C1063-Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster;2012a. BU. ASTM C1077-Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2013a. BV. ASTM C1088-Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made From Clay or Shale; 2013. BW. ASTM C1093-Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012. BX. ASTM C1107/C1107M-Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Nonshrink); 2013. BY. ASTM C1148-Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar; 1992a (Reapproved 2008). BZ. ASTM C1167-Standard Specification for Clay Roof Tiles; 2011. CA. ASTM C1172-Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1. CB. ASTM C1177/C1177M-Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. CC. ASTM C1184-Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2013. CD. ASTM C1240-Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2012. CE. ASTM C1289-Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2013. CF. ASTM C1314-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2012. CG. ASTM C1315-Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete; 2011. CH. ASTM C1325-Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units; 2008b. CI. ASTM C1357-Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-9 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 CJ. ASTM C1364-Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2010b. CK. ASTM C1372-Standard Specification for Dry-Cast Segmental Retaining Wall Units; 2011. CL. ASTM C1492-Standard Specification for Concrete Roof Tile;2003(Reapproved 2009). CM. ASTM C1397-Standard Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems(EIFS)and EIFS with Drainage;2009. CN. ASTM C1634-Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick;2011. 2.19 ASTM D Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM D16-Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials,and Applications; 2012. B. ASTM D198-Standard Test Methods of Static Tests of Lumber in Structural Sizes; 2009. C. ASTM D225-Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles(Organic Felt)Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2007. D. ASTM D226/D226M -Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. E. ASTM D412-Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013). F. ASTM D422-Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils; 1963 (Reapproved 2007). G. ASTM D448-Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction; 2012. H. ASTM D635-Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2010. I. ASTM D638-Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010. J. ASTM D648-Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position; 2007. K. ASTM D695-Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 2010. L. ASTM D698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. M. ASTM D790-Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 2010. N. ASTM D968-Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive;2005 (Reapproved 2010). 0. ASTM D975-Standard Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils; 2013. P. ASTM D994/D994M -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete(Bituminous Type); 2011. Q. ASTM D1056-Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007. R. ASTM D1227-Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing; 2013. S. ASTM D1241-Standard Specification for Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base,and Surface Courses; 2007. T. ASTM D1557-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. U. ASTM D1621-Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2010. V. ASTM D1622-Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2008. W. ASTM D1751-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004(Reapproved 2008). X. ASTM D1752-Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction;2004a (Reapproved 2008). Y. ASTM D1761-Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 2012. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-10 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Z. ASTM D1781-Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives; 1998(Reapproved 2012). AA. ASTM D1929-Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics; 2012. AB. ASTM D1970/D1970M-Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013. AC. ASTM D2103-Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2010. AD. ASTM D2126-Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging; 2009. AE. ASTM D2247-Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%Relative Humidity; 2011. AF. ASTM D2487-Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes(Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. AG. ASTM D2559-Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for Use Under Exterior Exposure Conditions; 2012a. AH. ASTM D2665-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2012. AI. ASTM D2842-Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics;2012. AJ. ASTM D2843-Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics; 2010. AK. ASTM D2863-Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics(Oxygen Index); 2012. AL. ASTM D2898-Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010. AM. ASTM D3034-Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008. AN. ASTM D3161-Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced Method); 2013. A0. ASTM D3273-Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012. AP. ASTM D3462-Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2010a. AQ. ASTM D3740-Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a. AR. ASTM D3909/D3909M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing(Glass Felt)Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 1997b(Reapproved 2012)e1. AS. ASTM D3963/D3963M-Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001(Reapproved 2007). AT. ASTM D4145-Standard Test Method for Coating Flexibility of Prepainted Sheet; 2010. AU. ASTM D4214-Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films; 2007. AV. ASTM D4318-Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit,and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2010. AW. ASTM D4355-Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2007. AX. ASTM D4397-Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial,and Agricultural Applications; 2010. AY. ASTM D4479/D4479M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings-Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e1. AZ. ASTM D4491-Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2009). BA. ASTM D4637/D4637M-Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane; 2013. BB. ASTM D4751-Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2012. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-11 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 BC. ASTM D4869/D4869M-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing; 2005(Reapproved 2011)e1. BD. ASTM D4972-Standard Test Method for pH of Soils; 2001(Reapproved 2007). BE. ASTM D6380-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing(Organic Felt); 2003 (Reapproved 2009). BF. ASTM D6662-Standard Specification for Polyolefin-Based Plastic Lumber Decking Boards;2013. 2.20 ASTM E Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM E72-Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction; 2010. B. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2013a. C. ASTM E90-Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. D. ASTM E94-Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004(Reapproved 2010). E. ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012. F. ASTM E108-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011. G. ASTM E119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2012. H. ASTM E136-Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012. I. ASTM E154-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a (Reapproved 2013). J. ASTM E164-Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2013. K. ASTM E165/E165M -Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry; 2012. L. ASTM E283-Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004(Reapproved 2012). M. ASTM E329-Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing;2011. N. ASTM E330-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002(Reapproved 2010). 0. ASTM E331-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000(Reapproved 2009). P. ASTM E384-Standard Test Method for Knoop and Vickers Hardness of Materials; 2011e1. Q. ASTM E413-Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. R. ASTM E488/E488M -Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements;2010. 5. ASTM E514/E514M -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry; 2011. T. ASTM E543-Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009. U. ASTM E709-Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2008. V. ASTM E935-Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2013. W. ASTM E985-Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). X. ASTM E1155-Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and f(L) floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). Y. ASTM E1264-Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1. Z. ASTM E1477-Standard Test Method for Luminance Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers; 1998a (Reapproved 2008). AA. ASTM E1643-Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-12 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 AB. ASTM E1646-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995(Reapproved 2011). AC. ASTM E1677-Standard Specification for an Air Barrier(AB) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls; 2011. AD. ASTM E1680-Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems; 2011. AE. ASTM E1745-Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. AF. ASTM E1993-Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1998(Reapproved 2013). AG. ASTM E2178-Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials;2013. AH. ASTM E2273-Standard Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems(EIFS)Clad Wall Assemblies;2003 (reapproved 2011). AI. ASTM E2357-Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2011. AJ. ASTM E2485-Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems(EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings; 2006. AK. ASTM E2486-Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems(EIFS); 2006. AL. ASTM E2573-Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Site-Fabricated Stretch Systems to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics; 2012. 2.21 ASTM F Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM F386-Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces;2011. B. ASTM F405-Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene(PE) Pipe and Fittings; 2005. C. ASTM F436-Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2011. D. ASTM F593-Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,and Studs; 2002(Reapproved 2008). E. ASTM F594-Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts; 2009e1. F. ASTM F959-Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners;2013. G. ASTM F1292-Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment; 2009. H. ASTM F1476-Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications; 2007. I. ASTM F1487-Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use; 2011. J. ASTM F1554-Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts,Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a. K. ASTM F1941-Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners; 2010. L. ASTM F2055-Standard Test Method for Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by Dial Gage Method; 2010. M. ASTM F2408-Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets; 2011. 2.22 ASTM G Series--ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM G153-Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2013. B. ASTM G155-Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2013. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-13 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.23 AWI/AWMAC/WI--JOINT PUBLICATION OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE/ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION OF CANADA/WOODWORK INSTITUTE A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. 2.24 AWPA--AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS'ASSOCIATION A. AWPA U1-Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood;2012. 2.25 AWS--AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY A. AWS A2.4-Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing,and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. B. AWS A5.8/A5.8M-Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011 and errata. C. AWS 62.1-Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2009. D. AWS C 3.4/C3.4M-Specification for Torch Brazing; 2007. E. AWS C 3.5/C 3.5M-Specification for Induction Brazing;2007. F. AWS C 3.9/C 3.9M -Specification for Resistance Brazing; 2009. G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M-Structural Welding Code-Steel; 2010. H. AWS D1.2/D1.2M-Structural Welding Code-Aluminum; 2008. I. AWS D1.3-Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel; 2008. J. AWS D1.4/D1.4M-Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel; 2011. K. AWS D1.6/D1.6M-Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel; 2007. 2.26 AWWA--AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION A. AWWA A100-Water Wells; 2006. B. AWWA C205-Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe,4 in. (100 mm)and Larger- Shop Applied; 2012 (AN51/AWWA C205). C. AWWA C602-Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place,4 In. (100 mm)and Larger; 2011. D. AWWA C606-Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA C606). E. AWWA C652-Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities; 2011. 2.27 BHMA--BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION A. BHMA A156.13-American National Standard for Mortise Locks& Latches Series 1000; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13). B. BHMA A156.26-American National Standard for Continuous Hinges; 2012(ANSI/BHMA A156.26). C. BHMA A156.115-Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. 2.28 CEA--CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION A. CEA-310-Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics Association; Revision E, 2005. 2.29 CRSI--CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE A. CRSI (DA1)-CRSI Design Handbook; 2008. 2.30 FM--FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION A. FM DS 1-28-Wind Design; 2007. B. FM DS 1-29-Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components; Factory Mutual System; 2006. C. FM P7825-Approval Guide;current edition. 2.31 GA--GYPSUM ASSOCIATION A. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;2013. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-14 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.32 IAS--INTERNATIONAL ACCREDITATION SERVICE A. IAS AC89-Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories; 2010. B. IAS AC157-Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Reinforced and Precast/Prestressed Concrete; 2010. C. IAS AC172-Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011. 2.33 ICC-INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL,INC. A. ANSI/ICC A117.1-American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2012. B. ICC(IBC)-International Building Code; 2012. C. ICC(IBC)-International Building Code Administrative Provisions; 2012. D. ICC(IECC)-International Energy Conservation Code; 2012. E. ICC(IFC)-International Fire Code; 2012. F. ICC(IFGC)-International Fuel Gas Code; 2012. G. ICC(IMC)-International Mechanical Code; 2012. H. ICC(IPC)-International Plumbing Code; 2012. I. ICC(IPMC)-International Property Maintenance Code; 2012. J. ICC(IPSDC)- International Private Sewage Disposal Code; 2012. 2.34 ICGES-ICC EVALUATION SERVICE,INC. A. ICC-ES AC43-Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2010 (R2013). B. ICC-ES AC70-Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power Driven into Concrete,Steel and Masonry Elements; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2013. C. ICGES AC188-Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.;2012. D. ICC-ES AC207-Acceptance Criteria for Polypropylene Roof Underlayments; 2012. E. ICC-ES AC212-Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2011. F. ICC-ES AC219-Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems; 2009. G. ICC-ES AC235-Acceptance Criteria for EIFS Clad Drainage Wall Assemblies; 2004(Editorially revised 2009). 2.35 IEC-INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION A. IEC 61215-Crystalline Silicon Terrestrial Photovoltaic(PV) Modules-Design Qualification and Type Approval; 2005. B. IEC 61646-Thin-Film Terrestrial Photovoltaic(PV) Modules-Design Qualification and Type Approval; 2008. 2.36 IEEE--INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS A. IEEE 242-IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems;2001. B. IEEE 399-IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis; 1997. C. IEEE 519-IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems; 1992 (R 2004). D. IEEE C37.04-IEEE Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis; 2005 (R2007). E. IEEE C37.20.1-IEEE Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear;2002 (R2007). F. IEEE C37.20.3-IEEE Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear; 2001. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-15 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. IEEE C57.12.28-IEEE Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment--Enclosure Integrity; 2011. H. IEEE C57.96-Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 1999(R2004). I. IEEE C62.41.2-Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage(1000 V and less)AC Power c�r�U�ts;zooz�cor i, zoiz�. 2.37 ILI--INDIANA LIMESTONE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA,INC. 2.38 ISFA-INTERNATIONAL SURFACE FABRICATORS ASSOCIATION A. ISFA-2-Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material;2001 (2007). 2.39 ITS--INTERTEK TESTING SERVICES NA, INC. A. ITS(DIR)-Directory of Listed Products;current edition. 2.40 MFMA--METAL FRAMING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION A. MFMA-4-Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004 2.41 MPI-MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE(MASTER PAINTERS AND DECORATORS ASSOCIATION) A. MPI (APL)-Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition,www.paintinfo.com. 2.42 MSS--MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY,INC. A. MSS SP-58-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture; 2009. 2.43 NAAMM--THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS A. NAAMM AMP 500-06-Metal Finishes Manual; 2006. B. NAAMM AMP 510-Metal Stairs Manual; 1992, Fifth Edition. 2.44 NADCA--NATIONAL AIR DUCT CLEANING ASSOCIATION A. NADCA ACR-Assessment,Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems; 2013. 2.45 NECA--NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION A. NECA 1-Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. B. NECA 412-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Photovoltaic(PV) Power Systems; 2012. 2.46 NEMA--NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION A. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. B. NEMA FB 1-Fittings,Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,and Cable; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). C. NEMA FU 1- Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2002 (R2007). D. NEMA ICS 2-Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors,and Overload Relays, Rated 600 Volts; 2000(R2008). E. NEMA ICS 7-Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives; 2006. F. NEMA MG 1-Motors and Generators; 2011. G. NEMA OS 1-Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports;2008(Revised 2010) (AN51/NEMA OS 1). H. NEMA PB 1-Panelboards; 2011. I. NEMA PB 2-Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; 2011. J. NEMA PE 1-Uninterruptible Power Systems; 2003. K. NEMA ST 20-Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; 1992 (R1997). L. NEMA WC 70-Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2009 (AN51/NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658). Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-16 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 M. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Specifications; 2002(R2008). 2.47 NFPA--NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION A. NFPA 13-Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2013. B. NFPA 25-Standard for the Inspection,Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems; 2011. C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 72-National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; 2013. E. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. F. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2012. G. NFPA 96-Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2011. H. NFPA 99-Health Care Facilities Code; 2012. I. NFPA 101-Life Safety Code;2012. J. NFPA 110-Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013. K. NFPA 111-Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013. L. NFPA 241-Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration,and Demolition Operations; 2013. M. NFPA 255-Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2006. N. NFPA 259-Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials; 2013. 0. NFPA 268-Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2012. P. NFPA 285-Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012. Q. NFPA 701-Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2010. R. NFPA 780-Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems;2011. 2.48 NSF--NSF INTERNATIONAL(National Sanitation Foundation) A. NSF 2-Food Equipment; NSF International; 2012. B. NSF 61-Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; 2012. 2.49 PCI--PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE A. PCI (CERT)-PCI Plant Certification; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute;online at www.pci.org B. PCI MNL-116-Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products; 1999, Fourth Edition. C. PCI MNL-117-Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products; 2007. D. PCI MNL-120-PCI Design Handbook- Precast and Prestressed Concrete;Seventh Edition, 2010. E. PCI MNL-122-Architectural Precast Concrete; 2007,Third Edition. F. PCI MNL-123-Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete; 1988,Second Edition. G. PCI MNL-124-Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete; 1989,Second Edition. H. PCI MNL-126-Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs; 1998. I. PCI MNL-135-Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction; 2000. 2.50 PTI--POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE A. PTI (MAN)-Post-Tensioning Manual; 2006,Sixth Edition. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-17 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. PTI (TENDON)-Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons; 2000. 2.51 RIS--REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE A. RIS(GR)-Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; 2000. 2.52 SDI--STEEL DECK INSTITUTE,INC. A. SDI (DM)-Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks,and Roof Decks; 2007. 2.53 SJI--STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE A. SJI Technical Digest No. 9-Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; 2008. B. SJI (SPEC)-Catalog of Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; 2011. 2.54 SMACNA--SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION,INC. A. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards;2005. B. SMACNA(KVS)-Kitchen Ventilation Systems&Food Service Equipment Fabrication & Installation Guidelines; 2001. 2.55 SSPC--THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. SSPC-Paint 15-Steel Joist Shop Paint; 1999(Ed. 2004). B. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers(Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). C. SSPC-Paint 25-Zinc Oxide,Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel; 1997(Ed. 2004). D. SSPC-Paint 33-Coal Tar Mastic, Cold Applied; 1994(Ed. 2006). E. SSPC-SP 1-Solvent Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). F. SSPC-SP 2-Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982(Ed. 2004). G. SSPC-SP 3-Power Tool Cleaning; 1982(Ed. 2004). H. SSPC-SP 5-White Metal Blast Cleaning;2007. I. SSPC-SP 6-Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007. 2.56 TCNA--TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA,INC. A. TCNA(HB)-Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; 2012. 2.57 TIA--TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION A. TIA/EIA-606-Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev B,2012. B. ANSI/J-STD-607-Commercial Building Grounding(Earthing)and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev A,2002. 2.58 TPI--TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE A. TPI 1- National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction;2007 and errata (ANSI/TPI 1). B. TPI DSB-89-Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; 1989. 2.59 UL--UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. A. UL(BMD)-Building Materials Directory;current edition. B. UL(FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory;current edition. C. UL 44-Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 50-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-18 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 E. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 67-Panelboards;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 83-Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 94-Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 96-Lightning Protection Components; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 142-Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 181-Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; current edition, including all revisions. L. UL 181A-Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 207-Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 248-1-Low-Voltage Fuses-Part 1: General Requirements;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 0. UL 273-Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 467-Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 486A-486B-Wire Connectors;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 486C-Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 5. UL 489-Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. T. UL 508A-Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. U. UL 514A-Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. V. UL 580-Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. W. UL 778-Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. X. UL 790-Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Y. UL 857-Busways;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Z. UL 969-Marking and Labeling Systems;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AA. UL 984-Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AB. UL 1449-Standard for Surge Protective Devices;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AC. UL 1598-Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AD. UL 1703-Flat Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AE. UL 1863-Standard for Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AF. UL 1897-Uplift Tests for Roof-Covering Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AG. UL 1995-Heating and Cooling Equipment;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AH. UL 2200-Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 2.60 WCMA--WINDOW COVERING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION A. WCMA A100.1-Safety of Corded Window Covering Products;Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1) Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-19 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.61 WWPA--WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION A. WWPA G-5-Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011. END OF SECTION 0142 19 Job No. 14LION-00-01 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19-20 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 57 13 -TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways,open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 10 00-Site Clearing: Limits on clearing; disposition of vegetative clearing debris. B. Section 32 11 23-Aggregate Base Courses: Temporary and permanent roadways. C. Section 32 92 19-Seeding: Permanent turf for erosion control. D. Section 32 92 23-Sodding: Permanent turf for erosion control. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4355-Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2007. B. ASTM D4491-Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2009). C. ASTM D4533-Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles;2011. D. ASTM D4632-Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 2008. E. ASTM D4751-Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2012. F. ASTM D4873-Standard Guide for ldentification,Storage,and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mulch: Use one of the following: 1. Straw or hay. 2. Wood waste, chips,or bark. 3. Erosion control matting or netting. 4. Cutback asphalt. 5. Polyethylene film,where specifically indicated only. B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string,around long dimension. D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U-or T-section,with minimum mass of 1.33 Ib per linear foot. 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible;fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751. Job No. 14LION-00-01 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength,when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 Ib-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 Ib-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent,when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 Ib-f, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard,with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. G. Gravel: See Section 32 11 23 for aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane,with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. 2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging;orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. 1. Wood Waste: Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter; no anchoring required. 2. Asphalt: Use only where no traffic, either vehicular or pedestrian, is anticipated. G. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. Job No. 14LION-00-01 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.04 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install erosion control measures indicated on erosion control plan and as required to comply with codesand ordinances of the municipality having jurisdiction. B. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length,with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone. C. and ordinances of the municipality having jurisdiction. D. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum,with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum,with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum,with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length;splice at post only,overlapping at least 18 inches,with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following: a. Four 3/4 inch diameter, 1 inch long, 14 gage nails. b. Five 17-gage staples with 3/4 inch wide crown and 1/2 inch legs. 8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection;at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. E. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly,with one bale at each end of row turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale,driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row,compacted. F. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used,seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes,and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed,apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility,apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination,without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. Job No. 14LION-00-01 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly,within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site,and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged,whether by runoff or other causes. D. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged,whether by runoff or other causes. E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Arch itect. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION 01 57 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 60 00- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Transportation, handling,storage and protection. B. Product option requirements. 1.02 SUBMI7TALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models,options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product,with integral parts and attachment devices.Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes,submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors,textures,and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data,and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements,quantities are correct,and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement,or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials,such as wood pallets,where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight,climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement, or damage. I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION 01 60 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 61 16-VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under"DEFINITIONS." B. All products of each category that are installed in the project must comply;Owner's project goals do not allow for partial compliance. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or applied on-site in the building interior: 1. Adhesives,sealants,and sealer coatings. 2. Carpet. 3. Carpetcushion. 4. Resilient floor coverings. 5. Paints and coatings. 6. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications. B. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier. C. Adhesives: All gunnable,trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives,whether specified or not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives,and pipe jointing adhesives. D. Sealants: All gunnable,trowelable,and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category. C. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project,submit product data showing compliance, except when another type of evidence of compliance is required. D. Installer Certifications for Accessory Materials: Require each installer of any type of product(not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified)to certify that either 1) no adhesives,joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have been used in the installation of his products,or 2)that such products used comply with these requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC)content not greater than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. B. Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC)content not greater than required by GreenSeal GS-36. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current GreenSeal Certification. b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with GreenSeal GS-36 requirements. c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. C. Paints and Coatings: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59,Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. Job No. 14LION-00-01VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 61 16-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24),exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. D. Carpet and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required for CRI Green Label Plus certification. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current Green Label Plus Certification. b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. E. Carpet Cushion: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required for CRI Green Label certification. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current Green Label Certification. b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. F. Other Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products,whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner. B. All additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION 01 61 16 Job No. 14LION-00-01VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 61 16-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Recycle and/or salvage at least 50%of non-hazardous construction and demolition debris. C. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination,or other factors. D. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse,salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. E. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, incineration, recycling,salvage,and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of ineasure on all reports. F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal,state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils,solvents,caulk,or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging,trash,debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,corrosivity,toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity,or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting,cleansing,treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating,or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. 0. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSA� 01 74 19-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals,with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse,and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment;failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills,total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill,and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests,weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c. State the identity of incinerators,total amount of fees paid to incinerator,and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests,weight tickets, receipts,and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site,and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material,and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests,weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above,as appropriate to disposal method. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports,submittal procedures,and project documentation. B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery,storage,and handling. D. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection,and cleaning. 2.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner,and Architect. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre-construction meeting. 3. Regularjob-site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal,for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate,store,and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate,store, protect,and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside,sort,and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I. Salvage: Set aside,sort,and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION 01 74 19 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSA� 01 74 19-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSA� 01 74 19-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 77 00- PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1:GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: Before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion,complete the following: A. In the Application for Payment that coincides with the date Substantial Completion is claimed,show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed substantially complete. B. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements,final certifications and similar documents. C. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals,final project photographs, damage or settlement survey,and similar record information. D. Change-over permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. E. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's personnel. Remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. F. Complete final clean up. Touch-up and repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 1.02 INSPECTION PROCEDURES: When the Sub-contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Sub-contractor shall prepare and submit to the General Contractor/Owner a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Sub-contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Sub-contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. A. Upon receipt of the Sub-contractor's list,the General Contractor/Owner will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the General Contractor/Owner's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Sub-contractor's list,which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Sub-contractor shall, before issuance of the certificate of substantial completion complete or correct such items upon notification by the General Contractor/Owner. B. The Sub-contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the General Contractor/Owner to determine Substantial Completion. C. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Sub-contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Sub-contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. D. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. E. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Sub-contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment,complete the following: A. Store all spare parts, overstock,and maintenance materials as required by individual specification sections in areas as designated by Owner. B. Ensure that all systems and appliances are functioning properly. C. Demonstrate to Owner and maintenance staff the operation and maintenance of equipment. D. Submit final payment request with releases. E. Submit a final statement, accounting for changes to the Contract Sum. F. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. Submit final meter readings for utilities,a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of Substantial Completion. H. Submit consent of surety to final payment. I. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 1.04 RECORD DRAWINGS: Maintain a clean,undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark-up these drawings to show the actual installation. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions accurately. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. A. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil and,where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variation in separate categories of work. B. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover. 1.05 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual,including addenda. Mark to show variations in actual work performed in comparison with the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions,selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. A. Upon completion of the Work,submit record Specifications to the General Contractor/Owner for his records. 1.06 RECORD PRODUCTS DATA: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in the actual Work performed in comparison with the submitted information. Include both variations in the products as delivered to the site,and variations from the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. 1.07 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL: Immediately prior to date or dates of substantial completion,the Sub-contractor will meet at the site with the General Contractor/Owner's personnel,if desired,to determine which,if any,of the submitted samples that have been maintained by the Sub-contractor during progress of the Work,are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with delivery to the Owner's sample storage space. 1.08 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with the actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of substantial completion,complete miscellaneous records and place in good order,properly identified and bound or filed,ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the General Contractor/Owner/Architect for the Owner's records. In addition to requirements in individual specification sections,submit the following: A. Copy of all Product Literature and Operation Manuals B. Provide lists of all Subcontractors and their emergency service phone numbers C. Copies of warrantees from all Subcontractors and Suppliers D. Copy of one year warranty from subcontractor on letterhead. 1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Arrange for the installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Can be 1 hard copy, CD or emailed. Include a detailed review of the following: A. Emergency Instructions. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data C. As-builts. D. Maintenance manuals. E. Record documents. F. Spare parts and materials. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. Tools. H. Lubricants. Fuels. I. Identification systems. J. Control sequences. K. Hazards. L. Cleaning. M. Warranties, including 1 year subcontractor warranty. N. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. 0. As part of this instruction for operating equipment demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Start-up 2. Shut-down 3. Emergency operations 4. Noise and vibration adjustments 5. Safety procedures 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments 7. Effective and energy utilization P. Paint and or stain colors. Q. Floor coverings including grout colors if hard tile. R. Ceiling tiles. 1.10 AUDIO-VISUAL DOCUMENTATION: All contractors installing work that requires ongoing maintenance by others after the work is completed are required to participate in preparation of audio visual(Video or Digital recording) documentation of the locations where maintenance is or may be required in the project as well as the locations of items such as water shutoffs,electrical disconnects and other similar items that are essential to the proper maintenance and repair of systems during the life of the project. 1.11 FINAL CLEANING: Employ experienced workers for final cleaning. Clean each surface to the condition expected in a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. In addition to completing close out and cleaning procedures as specified in each specification section,complete the following before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion: A. Visually inspect all exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil,waste material,smudges,and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water,the A/E may require other cleaning methods to be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. C. Clean all faces of transparent materials. Remove glazing compound. Replace chipped or broken glass. D. Apply polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished to all surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed polish. E. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition,free of stains,films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. Mop and dry hard or resilient surfaced floors. F. Wipe surfaces of fixtures and equipment of every description, concealed or exposed to view, interior and exterior. Remove excess lubrication. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps(including the removal of labels from all plumbing fixtures). G. Use whatever means necessary to thoroughly clean all piping, ductwork,tanks, pumps,fans, motors,and all equipment of every description provided as part of your Contract. H. Clean,drain,and flush all piping systems, connected accessories and equipment. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 I. Clean and polish or otherwise leave visible all identification plates, devices,etc. J. Clean the site of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas; remove stains,spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth even textured surface. 1.12 REMOVAL: A. Remove site offices and storage sheds. B. Remove all temporary utilities and site protection and restore site and building to a finished condition. C. Remove all construction debris and dumpsters from site. 1.13 COMPLIANCE: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. 1.14 OWNER'S SYSTEMS IMPROVEMENT PLAN: In an effort to improve project delivery all contractors involved in the project will be interviewed by the Owner's Project Manager at the end of the project. The interviews will address successful aspects of the project and why those aspects of the Project were successful and aspects of the project that could have been improved and methods for making improvements in future projects. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 01 78 00-WARRANTY PROCEDURES PART 1:GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS: A. Overall Project Warranty,this warranty supersedes all other warranties: 1. All contractors shall warranty their portions of the work for a period of one year from the time of substantial completion of that portion of(building)the work. During that warranty period all faulty products, materials,equipment and installation shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. The procedures for accomplishing warranty work shall be as follows: a. For warranty work that affects life safety systems the Owner's representative or property manage will contact the responsible contractor to report the problem the contractor will have 12 hours to examine and repair the problem. If the contractor does not respond to repair the problem within the 12 hour period the Owner will arrange to have the problem repaired by another party and the contractor will be billed for the work. The contractor will not be contacted more than once to perform this warranty work. b. For warranty work that affects necessary building operational systems such as plumbing and heating the Owner's representative or property manage will contact the responsible contractor to report the problem the contractor will have 24 hours to examine and repair the problem. If the contractor does not respond to repair the problem within the 24 hour, period the Owner will arrange to have the problem repaired by another party and the contractor will be billed for the work. The contractor will not be contacted more than once to perform this warranty work. c. For warranty work that does not affect life safety systems or necessary building operational systems, the Owner's representative or property manage will contact the responsible contractor to report the problem the contractor will have 48 hours or the next working day after the 48 hour period to examine and repair the problem. If the contractor does not respond to repair the problem within the 48 hour period or the next working day after the 48 hour period,the Owner will arrange to have the problem repaired by another party and the contractor will be billed for the work. The contractor will not be contacted more than twice to perform this warranty work. B. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the Manufacturer to the Owner. C. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in Contract Documents,to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for the terms of the General Contractor/Owner's special warranty for workmanship and materials. D. Requirements for warranties for products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Division 2-33. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WARRANTY PROCEDURES 01 78 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.02 Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Subcontractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products,nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and Subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the General Contractor/Owner. PART 2: REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES 2.01 Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed,remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. 2.02 Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected,reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 2.03 Replacement Cost: On determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Subcontractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through part of its useful service life. 2.04 Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties,and shall not limit duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise available under the law,nor shall warranty periods be interrupted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties,obligations,rights and remedies. A. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents. B. The Owner reserves the right to refuse or accept Work where a special warranty,or similar commitment is required, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign commitments are willing to do so. 2.05 Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other that the date of Substantial Completion,submit written warranties on the General Contractor/Owner's request. A. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used, by separate agreement with the General Contractor/Owner during the construction period,submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen (15)days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is to be executed by the Subcontractor,or the General Contractor/Owner and a subcontractor,supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the General Contractor/Owner for approval prior to final execution. C. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Subcontractor,or the General Contractor/Owner and subcontractor,supplier or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the General Contractor/Owner for approval prior to final execution. D. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 02-33 for specific content and particular requirements of submittal of special warranties. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 Warranties A. Can be provided as 1 hard copy, CD or emailed. B. Identify the Project title or name,and the name of the General Contractor/Owner. 3.02 When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction,provide additional copies of each warranty,as necessary,for inclusion in each required manual. END OF SECTION 01 78 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WARRANTY PROCEDURES 01 78 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 02 4100 - DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building demolition excluding removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances. B. Selective demolition of built site elements. C. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. D. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00 3100-Available Project Information: Existing building survey conducted by Owner; information about known hazardous materials. B. Section 01 10 00-Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. C. Section 01 10 00-Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements. D. Section 01 10 00-Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by Contractor. E. Section 01 50 00-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences,security, protective barriers,and waste removal. F. Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. G. Section 01 70 00-Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks,survey control points,and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products;temporary bracing and shoring. H. Section 01 74 19-Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. I. Section 02 65 00-Underground Storage Tank Removal. J. Section 07 01 50.19-Preparation for Re-Roofing: Removal of existing roofing, roof insulation,flashing,trim, and accessories. K. Section 31 10 00-Site Clearing: Vegetation and existing debris removal. L. Section 31 22 00-Grading: Topsoil removal. M. Section 31 22 00-Grading: Fill material for filling holes, pits,and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. N. Section 31 23 23-Fill: Filling holes, pits,and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 0. Section 32 93 00-Plants: Relocation of existing trees,shrubs,and other plants. P. Section 32 93 00-Plants: Pruning of existing trees to remain. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926-U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards;current edition. B. NFPA 241-Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration,and Demolition Operations; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring,and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. Job No. 14LION-00-01 DEMOLITION 02 4100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill Material: As specified in Section 31 23 23-Fill. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work. B. Remove all other paving and curbs within site boundaries. C. Remove concrete slabs on grade within site boundaries. D. Remove fences and gates. E. Remove creosote-treated wood utility poles. F. Remove other items indicated,for salvage, relocation, and recycling. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Use of explosives is not permitted. 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed;do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits;do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 9. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. E. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations. F. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19-Waste Management. 2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3. Set aside reusable, recyclable,and salvageable materials;store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. G. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. H. Underground Storage Tanks: Remove and dispose of as specified in Section 02 65 00. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements;obtain required permits. Job No. 14LION-00-01 DEMOLITION 02 4100-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close,shut off,or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close,shut off,or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags,with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping,valves, meters,equipment,supports,and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. H. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain. 3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris,junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site;comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19-Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION 02 41 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 DEMOLITION 02 4100-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 DEMOLITION 02 4100-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 02 41 13 - SITE DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Removal and satisfactory disposal of buildings,foundations,fences,signs, structures, pavements,traffic control devices, utilities,and other obstructions not designated or permitted to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 31 10 00 2. Earthwork: Section 31 00 00 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 31 25 00 1.02 PERMITS A. Road Cut(TOV) B. Stormwater Discharge Permit(CDPHE) C. Construction Dewatering(CDPHE) 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect all vegetation, utilities,structures,and other facilities to remain,from damage in manner acceptable to Engineer. Maintain designated temporary roadways,walkways, and detours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 None PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PAVEMENTS,CURBS,GUTTER,FLATWORK A. Remove all pavements, curbs,gutter,and flatwork not designated to remain. Where existing construction is to be partially removed,saw edges to remain in place on straight line with vertical face. 3.02 BRIDGES,SEWERS,CULVERTS,DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Do not remove structures in use until arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. B. For structures removed down to natural stream bottom, remove those parts outside stream to 1' below ground. Remove all portions within limits of new construction as necessary to accommodate new work. C. Maintain satisfactory traffic bypass at all times. 3.03 STRUCTURES A. Remove structures within project limits or as shown on drawings. Protect portions to remain from damage. Damage to be repaired at Contractor's expense. 3.04 UTILITIES A. Remove designated utility lines within project limits, properly capping or plugging existing lines to remain. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. 3.06 RESTORATION A. After removal of obstruction,fill and compact to finish grade in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION 02 41 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SITE DEMOLITION 02 41 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SITE DEMOLITION 02 41 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures,and finishes,for the following: 1. Revise list below to suit Project. 2. Footings. 3. Foundation walls. 4. Slabs-on-grade. 5. Concrete toppings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other pozzolans,ground granulated blast-furnace slag,and silica fume;subject to compliance with requirements. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,weather,test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Submit substantiating data for each concrete mix design contemplated for use to the Architect no less than four weeks prior to first concrete placement. Data for each mix shall include the following: a. Mix identification number(unique for each mix submitted). b. Statement of intended mix use. c. Mixture proportions. d. Water/cementitious materials ratio. e. Wet and dry unit weight. f. Total air content. g. Design slump and allowable range after additions of all admixtures. h. Compressive strength tests. 3. Shrinkage testing per ASTM C 157. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material,grade, bar schedules,stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement,splices and laps, mechanical connections,tie spacing, hoop spacing,and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1. Show all reinforcing,top and bottom profile of concrete element,supports below, including beams, columns and walls,grade beams,concrete walls,joists, etc.framing into element. 2. Provide one continuous elevation at 1/4" (1:48)scale for all walls in a continuous line.Show pockets and openings in walls, elevations of top of beams,walls, columns,sections through pilasters, columns,and placing sequence of reinforcing for items with more than one reinforcing layer. 3. Show locations of approved construction joints, locations of pour strips,splices of reinforcing,type of splice used and splice location. Identify all ASTM A706 and epoxy coated reinforcing locations. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of Architect. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following,signed by manufacturers: Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Vapor retarders. 4. Repair materials. B. Minutes of preinstallation conference. C. Placement Notification: Submit notification to Architect at least 24 hours in advance of placement. D. Proposed location of saw cut joints not indicated on Drawings. E. Curing compound data demonstrating specified moisture loss performance. F. Evaporative retarder product and application data. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Retain first paragraph below if required. See Section 014000"Quality Requirements"for general installer qualifications. Verify availability of qualified personnel with a local ACI chapter or concrete contractors. These desirable programs may have limited grass-roots penetration. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. D. Retain first paragraph below if Contractor or manufacturer retains testing agency for concrete mixture design, material test reports,or field quality control. Retain option if field quality-control testing agency employed by Contractor must be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Retain first subparagraph below, required by ACI 301 and ASTM C 31/C 31M if emphasis is needed. ASTM C 1077 notes relevant field or laboratory technician certification by ACI, NRMCA, and PCA, or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies may demonstrate evidence of competence. 2. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 3. Personnel inspecting concrete reinforcing steel have current certification as an ACI Concrete Construction Inspector or have experience in concrete construction acceptable to the Architect. F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source,and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. G. Formwork: Contractor shall be responsible for design and engineering of formwork. H. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete,"Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." I. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade panels to demonstrate typical joints,surface finish,texture,tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. Panel for slab-on-grade may need to be enlarged if powered riding trowels will be used and if it could be a portion of the floor slab. 2. Build panel approximately 200 sq.ft. (18.6 sq. m)for slab-on-grade in the location indicated or, if not indicated,as directed by Architect. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. J. Preinstallation conference,which is desirable for major concrete installations, helps minimize misunderstandings and reviews Project conditions that might lead to significant problems. Retain paragraph below if Work of this Section is extensive or complex enough to justify a preinstallation conference. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. c. Concrete subcontractor. d. Owner's Testing/Inspection Agency. 2. Review as applicable to Project special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold-and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers,forms and form removal limitations,shoring and reshoring procedures,vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances,steel reinforcement installation,floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement,concrete repair procedures,and concrete protection. 3. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded by Contractor and distributed to all parties within five days. Provide one copy to Owner's representative and Architect. L. Record of Work: Maintain a record listing time and date of all structural concrete placement. Such record shall be kept until completion of Project and shall be available to Architect for examination at any time. M. Pre-Placement Inspection: Formwork installation, reinforcing steel placement and installation of all items to be embedded or cast into concrete shall be verified by Contractor prior to placement. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Retain option in first paragraph below if zinc-or epoxy-coated steel reinforcement is required. B. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement if present. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal,or other approved panel materials. 2. Retain subparagraph below if plywood selection is required. If Finnish overlaid birch plywood is required, insert below and delete DOC PS 1 and other four choices of plywood. 3. Exterior-grade plywood panels,suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,and as follows: a. Retain one of four subparagraphs below or revise to suit Project. First subparagraph imparts glossy finish,second imparts matte finish, and third and fourth impart coarser-textured finish depending on face-ply characteristics. b. Medium-density overlay,Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms in first paragraph below leave joint impressions in spiral or straight lines. Limit types of forms if a particular pattern of joint is required. Different release treatments of forms also affect appearance of as-cast surfaces. D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals,and Supports: Metal,glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper,or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC,or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,stain,or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off inetal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420),deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed,where welding of reinforcement or field bending is noted on Drawings. C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420)ASTM A 706/A 706M for bars that may be field bent, deformed bars,ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M for bars that are prefabricated, epoxy coated,with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length. D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. E. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated,Type 1, plain steel. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420), plain-steel bars,ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated. C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid,two-part,epoxy repair coating;compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters,chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice,"of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II,gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33,Class 3S coarse aggregate or better,graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.All course and fine aggregate shall be tested per ASTM C 295 or ASTM C 1293 in accordance with section 5.1 of"Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions" (2007 Portland Cement Association). 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated on Drawings. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.05 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D. 4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F. 5. High-Range,Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M,Type II. 7. Mid-Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. C. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating,anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor;capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. 1. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers and products. See Section 016000"Product Requirements." 2. Products www.specagent.com: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals- Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+ b. Cortec Corporation, MCI-2000 or 2005NS. c. Grace Construction Products,W. R.Grace&Co.; DCI-5. d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 2.06 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating liquid floor treatment in first paragraph below is commonly applied to harden and densify floors of warehouses and distribution facilities, imparting a clear satin sheen to finished floor. Pigmented products may also be available. Although formulations vary, manufacturers claim these nonfluosilicate liquids improve abrasion and chemical resistance and dustproof concrete surface. When approved by manufacturers,these products may be installed over mineral dry-shake floor hardeners or integrally colored concrete. B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear,chemically reactive,waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components;odorless;that penetrates, hardens,and densifies concrete surfaces. Shall not be less than 40%silane or 9%polysiloxane or shall be 20%siloxane. Provide certification of 90%chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with the procedure in NCHRP Report Number 244 "Southern Climate Exposure". C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear,waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components;odorless;that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. Shall not be less than 40%silane or 9%polysiloxane or shall be 20%siloxane. Provide certification of 90%chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with the procedure in NCHRP Report Number 244"Southern Climate Exposure". D. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment for Vehicular Surfaces: Material suitable for application on horizontal surfaces subject to vehicle traffic shall contain not less than 40%silane. Provide certification of 95%chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with procedure of NCHRP Report Number 244"Southern Climate Exposure"at manufacturer's recommended rate of application. Also provide certification that product meets Alberta Transportation and Utilities BT-003 at 45%relative moisture results greater than 85%both initial and post abrasion performance. 2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation retarder in first paragraph below temporarily reduces moisture loss from concrete surfaces awaiting finishing in hot,dry, and windy conditions. Evaporation retarders are not curing compounds. B. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers and products. See Section 016000"Product Requirements." 2. Products<http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1180&mf=04&src=wd>: Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Confilm c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm d. Conspec by Dayton Superior;Aquafilm e. Dayton Superior Corporation;Sure Film (J-74) f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm g. Euclid Chemical Company(The),an RPM company; Eucobar h. Kaufman Products, Inc.;Vapor-Aid i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON k. Meadows,W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE I. Metalcrete Industries;Waterhold m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM n. Sika Corporation;SikaFilm o. SpecChem, LLC;Spec Film p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation;TK-2120 TRI-FILM r. Unitex; PRO-FILM s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set C. Retain curing aids and materials from remaining paragraphs. D. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182,Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq. m)when dry. E. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. F. Water: Potable. G. Retain first paragraph below if a dissipating-type,waterborne, membrane-forming curing compound is required. Although the EPA mandates maximum VOC emissions of 350 g/L for curing compounds,verify VOC emission limits of authorities having jurisdiction. If slow breakdown of curing membrane could interfere with bonding of floor coverings, retain "Removal"Subparagraph in "Concrete Protecting and Curing"Article in Part 3. H. Clear,Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Film must chemically break down in a four to six week period. Provide data from independent laboratory indicating maximum moisture less than 0.30 kg/m2 at 72 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. 2.08 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M,Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Coordinate product requirements with Section 076200"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"or Section 077100"Roof Specialties"or in other Sections where reglets are supplied as auxiliary products with waterproofing or roofing membrane flashings. D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch-(0.55-mm-)thick,galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm)thick,with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.09 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Retain paragraph below as a repair material for floor or slab areas remaining exposed and not receiving floor coverings. Typical self-leveling floor toppings or overlayment products include"Level Topping" by Dayton Superior, "Levelex HS" by L&M Construction, "Concrete Top" by Symons, and "Certi-Vex SLU TC" by Vexcon. Similar products that exceed 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) include"Ardex K500" by Ardex Engineered Cements and "Mastertop Topping 112" by BASF Construction Chemicals. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified,self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate,conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded,washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm)or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa)at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES,GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble,chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 for reinforced concrete exposed to chlorides in service and 0.30 for other reinforced concrete, percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing,or plasticizing admixture in concrete,as required,for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete,concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Proportion structural normal-weight concrete mixture as noted on Drawings, unless aggregates are"potentially reactive"with alkalis based on the ASTM C 295 or ASTM C 1260 or ASTM C 1293 testing limits of Section 5.1 of "Guide Specification of Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions° (2007 Portland Cement Association). When aggregates are"potentially reactive",compliance with Section 5.2 of"Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions" (2007 Portland Cement Association) must be established through ASTM C 1567 testing for proposed alternate concrete mixture. Submit test reports in accordance with Part I of this Specification. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M,and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F(30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. Design,erect,shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301,to support vertical, lateral,static,and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size,shape, alignment,elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Concrete adjacent to elevator hoistway shall be installed to tolerances required by elevator manufacturer. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual,as follows: Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm)Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm)Class D, 1 inch (25 mm)for rough-formed finished surfaces. 3. The permissible irregularity is a cumulative value due to all sources including layout, plumbness, member size,formwork offsets,joints,and member levelness. The permissible irregularity shall also apply between adjacent concrete surfaces on opposite sides of construction joint, expansion joint or shrinkage pour strip if present. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses,and the like,for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads,and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases,offsets,sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking,screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood,sawdust, dirt,and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete,as required,to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent,according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. M. All formwork surfaces that support concrete exposed to view must be accepted by Architect prior to concrete placement. 3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Specify embedded items and anchorage devices for other work attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Insert specific requirements for installing embedded items, if any,that are part of the Work. B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,templates,diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located,to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." a. Tolerance of Embedded Items: Comply with ACI 117. 1) Anchor Rods: (a) Plumbness: Within+/- 1/16 inch (2 mm) over anchor rod projection. 2) Embedded Plates and Weldments: (a) Location: +/- 1 inch (25 mm)vertical,+/-1 inch (25 mm) horizontal. (b) Plumb and Alignment: 1/4 inch in 12 inches(1:48). 2. Retain applicable subparagraphs below and insert others if required. Revise to suit Project. 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls,where flashing is shown at lintels,shelf angles,and other conditions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. Revise removal time in first paragraph below if required. Period of 24 hours is halved to 12 hours in ACI 347. Commentary in ACI 318(ACI 318M) recognizes 12 hours for concrete using regular portland cement but advises that this period may be insufficient for concrete using Type II and Type V portland cements or ASTM C 595 blended hydraulic cements, concrete with retarding admixtures, and concrete using ice during mixing. B. General: Formwork for sides of walls,columns,and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split,frayed,delaminated,or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused,clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position,support,and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,where indicated. D. Size, length, number and placement of supports shall be sufficient as to maintain reinforcing position within specified tolerances during construction traffic and concrete placement. E. On vertical formwork, use approved bar chairs or spacers as required to maintain concrete cover and bar position. Do not staple or use any other metallic fastener to secure bolsters, chairs, etc.to formwork for concrete surfaces exposed to exterior. F. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. G. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. H. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement. 3.05 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams,slabs,joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors,slabs, beams,and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge ofjoint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-(3.2-mm-)wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade,or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. 3. Interior Slabs-on-Grade to Receive Carpet or Wood Floor Covering: Construct slabs as large a placement area as practical. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, locate construction joints on column centerlines. Provide control joints at column centerlines and at intervals not more than 12 feet(3.6 m)each way. 4. All Other Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, locate construction joints on column centerlines. Locate control joints where shown on Drawings. If not shown, provide control joints at column centerlines and at intervals not more than 10 feet(3 m)each way. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces,such as column pedestals,foundation walls,grade beams,and other locations,as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint,terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm)or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants,specified in Section 079200"Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete,verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete,water may be added at Project site,subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches(150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. S. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F(4.4 deg C)for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-10 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride,salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F(32 deg C)at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms,steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water,soft spots, or dry areas. 3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces[not exposed to public view]<Insert locations>. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Revise locations in subparagraph below to suit Project. Retain rubbed finish option if additional finishing is required. 2. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view,to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete at building entry stair slab. 3.08 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Retain types of slab finishes required from remaining paragraphs. Coordinate finishes retained with finish schedule or indicate location of each finish on Drawings. C. Scratch Finish: While still plastic,texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction. 1. Revise locations of scratch finish in subparagraph below to suit Project. 2. Apply scratch finish to surfaces [indicated] [and] [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>. D. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten,cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,smooth,granular texture. 1. Revise locations of float finish in subparagraph below to suit Project. 2. Apply float finish to surfaces [indicated] [to receive trowel finish] [and] [to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo]<Insert locations>. E. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Revise locations of trowel finish in first subparagraph below to suit Project. 2. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet,ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint,or another thin-film-finish coating system] <Insert locations>. 3. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M),for a randomly trafficked floor surface: Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-11 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 a. Revise surface plane tolerances to suit Project. See Evaluations for description of F-number system. ACI 301 suggests that all residential floors and nonresidential floors less than 10,000 sq.ft. (929 sq. m) be measured by straightedge method and that other nonresidential floors be measured by F-number system. F. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35;and of levelness, F(L) 25;with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17;for slabs-on-grade. G. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30;and of levelness, F(L) 20;with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15;for suspended slabs except for slabs supported by metal deck. H. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30;and no limit for levelness, F(L);with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24;and of no limit for levelness, F(L);for suspended slabs supported by metal deck. 1. Retain straightedge method in subparagraph below if deleting F-number system above. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,freestanding, 10-ft.-(3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)]. I. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces �indicated] [where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method]. While concrete is still plastic,slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. J. Retain first paragraph below if applicable. Broom finish is generally used on exterior concrete steps and platforms, ramps,and other surfaces subject to light foot traffic. K. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing,slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.09 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete,as specified,to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. If evaporation rate in first paragraph below is exceeded,ACI 305R states that plastic shrinkage cracking is probable. See manufacturers' literature or ACI 305R for estimated moisture-loss chart relating relative humidity, air and concrete temperature,and wind velocity to rate of evaporation. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq.ft.x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,supported slabs,and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. E. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs,concrete floor toppings,and other surfaces. F. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Retain one or more curing methods from four subparagraphs below. Delete methods or restrict use of curing methods to specific locations or types of surfaces if required. 2. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Retain first three subparagraphs below as Contractor's options unless not suited for Project. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-12 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 b. Water. c. Continuous water-fog spray. d. Absorptive cover,water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width,with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches(300 mm),and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Moisture-retaining-cover shall be inspected each day by Contractor. Any areas which do not show condensation on underside of cover or any slab areas which are not wet shall be immediately rewetted and cover replaced to prevent moisture loss. a. Retain first three subparagraphs below or revise to suit Project. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. c. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. d. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Retain first subparagraph below if requiring removal of curing compounds that may interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. b. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. 5. Curing and sealing compound in subparagraph below is usually for floors and slabs and may act as a permanent surface finish. 6. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. This article provides basic applications for repairing concrete surfaces. Revise or delete to suit Project. B. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. C. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar,consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16(1.18-mm)sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. D. Insert provision for testing repair technique on a mockup or surface to be concealed later, before repairing surfaces. E. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets,fins and other projections on the surface,and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning and that are unacceptable to Architect. Allow Architect and Structural Engineer to observe concrete surfaces upon removal of forms and prior to repair of surface defects. Defects in structural concrete shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Structural Engineer. 1. Immediately after form removal,cut out honeycombs, rock pockets,and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that,when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-13 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. F. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces,such as floors and slabs,for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. Submit proposed repair to Architect for review prior to commencement of work. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects that are unacceptable to Architect. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm)wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width,and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Retain one or both of first two subparagraphs below if applicable. First subparagraph uses an underlayment; second, a topping. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm)to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix,and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm)or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact,and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm)or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. G. Perform structural repairs of concrete,subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. H. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings. 3.13 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-14 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 03 35 11 - CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance;floating,troweling, and similar operations;curing. B. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Curing compounds that also function as sealers. C. Section 03 35 23-Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finishing. D. Section 09 66 23-Resinous Matrix Terrazzo. E. Section 09 67 00-Fluid-Applied Flooring. F. Section 09 96 00-High-Performance Coatings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes. 1.04 MOCK-UP A. For coatings,construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during application,with coatings applied. B. Mock-Up Size: 10 feet square. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet above the floor surface over each 20 foot square area of floor being finished. B. Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational. C. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener. B. Dry Shake Hardener: C. Concrete Stain: D. Penetrating Clear Sealer: E. High Gloss Clear Sealer: F. Slip Resistant Coating: High gloss clear sealer with plastic aggregate. G. Polished Finish: Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 35 11-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS A. Dry Shake Hardener: Premixed dry powder for spreading on and working into concrete surface prior to set. 1. Composition: Non-metallic igneous rock aggregate. 2. Color(s):As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2.03 COATINGS A. Concrete Stain or Dye: Translucent, penetrating compound for interior or exterior use; must be finished with a topical sealer. 1. Composition: Acid-based,chemically reactive. 2. Number of Coats: Minimum of two. 3. VOC: Zero g/L. 4. Primary Color: Brown, in a formulation to match approved mock-up. 5. Secondary Color: Tan, applied after primary color has completely dried, in a formulation to match approved mock-up. 6. Application: a. Primary Color: Spray applied. b. Secondary Color: By method(s)to match approved mock-up. 7. Products: a. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. B. High Gloss Clear Sealer: Transparent, non-yellowing,water-based coating. 1. Composition: Acrylic polymer-based. 2. Nonvolatile Content: 5 percent, minimum,when measured by volume. 3. Products: a. BRICKFORM; BRICKFORM Gem-Seal 100 VOC: www.brickform.com. b. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.lmcc.com. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Grip W/B(slip-resistant): www.wrmeadows.com. e. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Decra-Seal W/B: www.wrmeadows.com. f. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. C. Colored Coating: Pigmented coating recommended by manufacturer for finishing concrete floors and slabs. 1. Type: Polyaspartic aliphatic polyurea;two-component,fast-curing. 2. Gloss: High gloss. 3. Color(s):As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Manufacturers: a. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. b. HP Spartacote, Inc: www.hpspartacote.com. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Perk!: www.lmcc.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. D. Plastic Aggregate: Finely ground polymer for addition to coatings for slip resistance. 1. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc;Sure-Step: www.wrmeadows.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. 2.04 POLISHED CONCRETE SYSTEM A. Polished Concrete System: Materials, equipment,and procedures designed and furnished by a single manufacturer to produce dense polished concrete of the specified sheen. 1. Acceptable Systems: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ULTRAFLOR Polished Concrete System with ARDEX PC Finish sealer: www.ardexamericas.com. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Permashine Concrete Polishing System: www.lmcc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Induroshine with Bellatrix sealer: www.wrmeadows.com. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 35 11-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials suitable for further finishes. 3.02 GENERAL A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 COATING APPLICATION A. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings,sealers,curing compounds,water repellents, laitance, efflorescence,fats,oils,grease,wax,soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents,and other impediments to adhesion. B. Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within limits established by coating manufacturer. C. Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips,overflow,and overspray; immediately remove excess material. D. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, matching approved mock-ups for color,special effects,sealing and workmanship. 3.04 CONCRETE POLISHING A. Execute using materials,equipment,and procedures specified by manufacturer, using manufacturer approved installer. 1. Final Polished Sheen: High-gloss finish; other sheens are included as comparison to illustrate required sheen;final sheen is before addition of any sealer or coating, regardless of whether that is also specified or not. 2. Satin Finish: Reflecting images from side lighting. B. Protect finished surface as required and recommended by manufacturer of polishing system. END OF SECTION 03 35 11 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 35 11-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 35 11-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 03 54 00- CAST UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Liquid-applied self-leveling gypsum-based floor underlayment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 70 00-Execution and Closeout Requirements: Alteration project procedures;selective demolition for remodeling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C109/C109M-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars(Using 2-in. or(50-mm)Cube Specimens); 2012. B. ASTM C348-Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars; 2008. C. ASTM C472-Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009). D. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure,freezing,and ambient temperature greater than 105 degrees F. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before,during and 72 hours after installation of underlayment. C. During the curing process,ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Underlayment: 1. Hacker Industries, Inc: www.hackerindustries.com. 2. Maxxon Corporation: www.maxxon.com. 3. United States Gypsum:www.levelrock.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Cementitious Underlayment: 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum-Based Underlayment: Gypsum based mix,that when mixed with water in accordance with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2500 psi,tested per ASTM C472. 2. Density: Maximum 115 Ib/cu ft. 3. Final Set Time: 1 to 2 hours, maximum. 4. Thickness: 1" inch to maximum 3-1/2 inch. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST UNDERLAYMENT 03 54 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Cementitious Underlayment: Blended cement mix,that when mixed with water in accordance with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi after 28 days,tested per ASTM C109/C109M. 2. Flexural Strength: Minimum 1000 psi after 28 days,tested per ASTM C348. 3. Density: 125 Ib/cu ft, nominal. 4. Final Set Time: 1-1/2 to 2 hours, maximum. S. Thickness:Capable of thicknesses from feather edge to maximum 3-1/2 inch. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Sound Reduction Mat OSG,SRB Sound Reduction Board 1. Quiet Qurl 55/025 mat;www.KeeneBuilding.com D. Aggregate: Dry,well graded,washed silica aggregate,approximately 1/8 inch in size and acceptable to underlayment manufacturer. E. Reinforcement: Galvanized metal lath complying with recommendations of underlayment manufacturer for specific project circumstances. F. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials. G. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type. H. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 MIXING A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Add aggregate for areas where thickness will exceed 1 inch. Mix underlayment and water for at least two minutes before adding aggregate, and continue mixing to assure that aggregate has been thoroughly coated. C. Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen,do not contain petroleum byproducts, or other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete: Mechanically prepare steel troweled concrete to create a textured surface necessary to achieve the best bond;acceptable methods include bead blasting and scarifying. Do not use acid etching. B. Wood: Install metal lath for reinforcement of underlayment. C. Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth. D. Vacuum clean surfaces. E. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry. F. Close floor openings. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Pump or pour material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water. 1. Pump, move,and screed while the material is still highly flowable. 2. Be careful not to create cold joints. 3. Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks. C. Place to indicated thickness,with top surface level to 1/16 inch in 10 ft. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST UNDERLAYMENT 03 54 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. For final thickness over 1-1/2 inches, place underlayment in layers. Allow initial layer to harden to the point where the material has lost its evaporative moisture. Immediately prime and begin application of the subsequent layer within 24 hours. E. Place after partition installation. F. Where additional aggregate has been used in the mix, add a top layer of neat mix(without aggregate), if needed to level and smooth the surface. G. If a fine,feathered edge is desired,steel trowel the edge after initial set, but before it is completely hard. 3.04 CURING A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached. B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and cracking. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces. END OF SECTION 03 54 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST UNDERLAYMENT 03 54 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CAST UNDERLAYMENT 03 54 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 04 20 10- REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Retain Sections in subparagraphs below that contain requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Unit Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide reinforced unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days, as indicated on drawings. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types(unit-strength method)according to Tables 1 and 2 in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. Materials tested shall be the same in every way to the materials used to construct this project and shall be from the same lots or batches used for constructing this project. 1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required,according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required,according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 3. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix required,according to ASTM C 1019. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of reinforced unit masonry reinforcing bars.Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. Drawings shall include: a. 1/4"scale elevations of all walls with all openings and reinforcing shown. b. Top and bottom elevations of walls and bearing elevations of all elements supported. c. Size and location of all openings, pockets, embedments, and anchor bolts. d. Bar sizes, location and quantities of reinforcing steel. e. Location and arrangement of supporting and spacing devices. f. Bending and cutting schedules. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 g. All control joints,expansion joints and horizontal relief joints. h. All other framing and/or special conditions affecting the work. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. Include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand,type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended,dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Grout:Submit grout strength test data. Data shall be in conformance with the requirements for concrete mix designs per Division 3 section "Cast-in-place concrete" a. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019,for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. b. For self consolidating grout, include test reports for slump flow and visual stability index(VSI)as determined by ASTM C1611 C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type,and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of inethods, materials,and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units:Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color,or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials:Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry,from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producerforeach aggregate. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 latest edition unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1.09 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting,securely tied. If units become wet,do not install until they are d ry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover,and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended,dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos.Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover,and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches(600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,secure cover a minimum of 24 inches(600 mm)down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges,and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace reinforced unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F(4 deg C)and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. CMUs:ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength as required to meet the specified prism strength, but in no case shall units be less than 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MASONRY LINTELS A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure prefabricated lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C 207,Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Aggregate for Mortar:ASTM C 144. E. Aggregate for Grout:ASTM C 404. F. Water: Potable. G. Additives: None permitted,except as specified herein.Specifically do not lower freezing point of mortar or grout by use of calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,Grade 60(Grade 420). B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General:ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized,carbon steel. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3. Wire Size for Side Rods:0.148-inch (3.77-mm)diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods:0.148-inch (3.77-mm)diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches(407 mm)o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet(3 m),with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM F1554 grade 36,or ASTM A307,Grade A;with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class C;of dimensions indicated. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Reinforced Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. Mix cementitious materials and aggregates between 3 and 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer with a sufficient amount of water to produce a workable consistency. Unless acceptable,do not hand mix mortar. Maintain workability of mortar by remixing or retempering. Discard mortar which has begun to stiffen or is not used within 2%z hours after initial mixing. D. Grout for Reinforced Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type(fine or coarse)that will comply with Table 7 in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with C 1019. 3. Except for self-consolidating grout, mix and proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476,Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated. 4. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches(203 to 279 mm)for grout heights less than 5 feet 4 inches, or 10 to 11 inches(254 to 279 mm)for grout lift heights greater than 5 feet 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M, unless self-consolidating grout is used. S. Self consolidating grout, if used,shall comply with the material requirements of ASTM C476; have a slump flow of 24 to 30 in (610 to 762 mm)as determined by ASTM C1611/C1611M; and has a Visual Stability Index(VSI) less than or equal to 1 as determined in accordance with ASTM C1611/C1611M,Appendix X.1. 6. Proportioning of self-consolidating grout at the project site is not permitted. Do not add water at the project site except in accordance with the self-consolidating grout manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Do not use admixtures unless acceptable. Field additional of admixtures is not permitted in self-consolidating grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Bond Pattern: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond;do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. B. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of inetal lath,wire mesh,or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches(600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers,columns,and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar each side of grouted cells. 3.03 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm)on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm)elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches(203 mm)o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.04 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in reinforced unit masonry as masonry progresses,as indicated on drawings. 3.05 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches(305 mm)for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm)for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 3.06 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores:Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line,and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement:Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, latest edition. 1. Support reinforcement to prevent displacement caused by construction loads or by placement of grout or mortar, beyond the allowable tolerances. 2. Completely embed reinforcing bars in grout. 3. Maintain clear distance between reinforcing bars and the interior of masonry unit or formed surface of at least 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)for fine grout and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)for coarse grout,except where cross webs of hollow units are used as supports for horizontal reinforcement. 4. Place reinforcing bars maintaining the following minimum cover: a. Masonry face exposed to earth or weather: 2 inches(50.8 mm)for bars larger than No. 5 (M#16); 1%z inches(38.1 mm)for No.5 (M#16) bars or smaller. b. Masonry not exposed to earth or weather: 1%z inches(38.1 mm). 5. Maintain minimum clear distance between parallel bars of the nominal bar size or 1 inch (25.4 mm), whichever is greater. 6. In columns and pilasters, maintain minimum clear distance between vertical bars of one and one-half times the nominal bar size or 1%2 inches(38.1 mm),whichever is greater. 7. Splice only where indicated on the Project Drawings, unless otherwise acceptable. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 8. Unless accepted by the Architect/Engineer,do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in grout or mortar. 9. Noncontact lap splices: Position bars spliced by noncontact lap splice no farther apart transversely than one-fifth the specified length of lap nor more than 8 inches(203 mm) 10. Joint reinforcement a. Place joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are embedded in mortar with a minimum cover of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)when not exposed to weather or earth; or 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)when exposed to weather or earth. b. Provide minimum 6 inch (152-mm) lap splices for joint reinforcement. c. Ensure that all ends of longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement at laps are embedded in mortar or grout. 11. Placement Tolerances a. Place reinforcing bars in walls and flexural elements within a tolerance of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). b. Place vertical bars within: 1) 2 inches(50.8 mm)of the required location along the length of the wall when the wall segment length exceeds 24 inches (610 mm). 2) 1 inch (25.4 mm)of the required location along the length of the wall when the wall segment length does not exceed 24 inches(610 mm) c. If it is necessary to move bars more than one bar diameter or a distance exceeding the tolerance stated above to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits,or embedded items, notify the Architect/Engineer for acceptance of the resulting arrangement of bars. d. Foundation dowels that interfere with unit webs are permitted to be bent to a maximum of 1 inch (25.4 mm) horizontally for every 6 inches(152 mm)of vertical height. C. Cleanouts: Provide cleanouts in the bottom course of masonry for each grout pour when the grout pour height exceeds 5 feet 4 inches(1.63 m). 1. Construct cleanouts so that the space to be grouted can be cleaned and inspected. In solid grouted masonry,space cleanouts horizontally a maximum of 32 inches(813 mm)on center. 2. Construct cleanouts with an opening of sufficient size to permit removal of debris.The minimum opening dimension shall be 3 inches(76.2 mm). 3. After cleaning, close cleanouts with closures braced to resist grout pressure. D. Grout Placement 1. Placing time: Place grout within 1-1/2 hours from introducing water in the mixture and prior to initial set. a. Discard site-mixed grout that does not meet the specified slump without adding water after initial mixing. b. For ready-mixed grout: 1) Addition of water is permitted at the time of discharge to adjust slump. 2) Discard ready-mixed grout that does not meet the specified slump without adding water,other than the water that was added at the time of discharge.The time limitation is waived as long as the ready-mixed grout meets the specified slump. 2. Confinement: Confine grout to the areas indicated on the Project Drawings. Use material to confine grout that permits bond between masonry units and mortar. 3. Grout pour height: a. Definition:The total height of masonry to be grouted prior to erection of additional masonry.A grout pour consists of one or more grout lifts. b. Do not exceed the maximum grout pour height given in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6,Table 7. 4. Grout lift height: a. Definition:An increment of grout height within a total grout pour.A grout pour consists of one or more grout lifts. b. For grout except self-consolidating grout: 1) Where the following conditions are met, place grout in lifts not exceeding 12 feet 8 inches(3.86 m). (a) The masonry has cured for at least 4 hours. Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 (b) The grout slump is maintained between 10 and 11 inches(254 and 279 mm). (c) No intermediate reinforced bond beams are placed between the top and the bottom of the pour height. 2) When there are intermediate bond beams within the grout pour, limit the grout lift height to the bottom of the lowest bond beam that is more than 5 feet 4 inches(1.63 m)above the bottom of the lift, but do not exceed a grout lift height of 12 feet 8 inches(3.86 m). 3) When the conditions above are not met, place grout in lifts not exceeding 5 feet 4 inches(1.63 m). 5. For self-consolidating grout: a. When placed in masonry that has cured for at least 4 hours, place in lifts not exceeding the grout pour height. b. When placed in masonry that has not cured for at least 4 hours, place in lifts not exceeding 5 feet 4 inches (1.63 m) E. Consolidation 1. Consolidate grout at the time of placement. a. Consolidate grout pours 12 inches(305 mm)or less in height by mechanical vibration or by puddling. b. Consolidate pours exceeding 12 inches(305 mm) in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. c. Consolidation or reconsolidation is not required for self-consolidating grout. F. Grout key:When grouting,form grout keys between grout pours. Form grout keys between grout lifts when the first lift is permitted to set prior to placement of the subsequent lift 1. Form a grout key by terminating the grout a minimum of 1%z inches(38.1 mm) below a mortar joint. 2. Do not form grout keys within beams. 3. At beams or lintels laid with closed bottom units,terminate the grout pour at the bottom of the beam or lintel without forming a grout key. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As indicated on drawings END OF SECTION 04 20 10 Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 20 10-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 05 12 00-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014000"Quality Requirements"for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Section 055000"Metal Fabrications"for miscellaneous steel fabrications including steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame,as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricator is responsible for selecting or completing details of structural-steel connections required to withstand specific design loads. AISC 303 requires that connection details be submitted for approval if fabricator selects or completes them. AISC 303 commentary anticipates an experienced steel detailer, not necessarily a qualified professional engineer,will select and complete connections. Retain second option if a qualified professional engineer is required. B. Connections: 1. Revise subparagraphs below if design of complex connections is delegated to fabricator's qualified professional engineer. 2. Provide connections as shown or noted on Drawings. Design of connections not shown or noted shall be provided by Structural Engineer-of-Record upon request. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop and Erection Drawings: Show location,fabrication,and assembly of structural-steel components. 1. Location of each piece or detail within the structure. 2. Include details of cuts,connections, splices,camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols,distinguishing between shop and field welds,and show size, length,and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type,size, and length of bolts,distinguishing between shop and field bolts. . 5. Reproduction of Contract Documents is not permitted. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. C. Coordinate first paragraph below with qualification requirements in Section 014000"Quality Requirements." D. Product Test Reports: For the following if present on project: 1. Bolts, nuts,and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Shear stud connectors. 3. Shop primers. 4. Nonshrink grout. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement [P1] [P2] [P3] or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 1. AISC 360. 2. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets,dunnage,or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,damage,or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers'written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams,sheet metal templates, instructions,and directions for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Channels,Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B,structural tubing. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E or S,Grade B. 1. Weight Class: as indicated on Drawings. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements, 70 Series 1. Conform to Charpy V-Notch test requirements of AISC 360. 2.02 BOLTS,CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts,and Washers: ASTM A 325(ASTM A 325M),Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M,Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436(ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. B. Steel Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A 108,Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel;AWS D1.1/D1.1M,Type B. C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554,Grade 55,weldable straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436(ASTM F 436M),Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. D. Deformed Anchor Studs(DAS): Made from ASTM A 108 low carbon steel, cold worked and deformed per ASTM A 496. Minimum yield stress=60 ksi (415 MPa); minimum tensile strength =80 ksi (550 MPa). E. Rebar: Rebar used for welding shall meet the requirements of ASTM A-706. Minimum bend diameters per ACI 318. F. Expansion Anchors,Screw Anchors,and Adhesive Anchors: Size and Manufacturer as indicated on Drawings. Complete assemblies with required rods, nuts,washers, and adhesive system as applicable. Installed in accordance with Manfacturer's installation instructions. Current ICC approval and published ICC Research Report required. 1. Finish for use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture(interior): Plain or in accordance with Manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish for use in exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials: Galvanized in conformance with ASTM A 153 or stainless steel,Series 300. G. Primer: Where steel is to be field painted, provide fabricator's standard lead-and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20 2.03 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107,factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength =6000 psi (41 MPa). B. Nonmetallic,Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107,factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength =6000 psi (41 MPa). Required where grout is exposed to view or weathering. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"and AISC 360. 1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 2. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations, if applicable. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Retain option in first paragraph below if permitted. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" permits thermally cut bolt holes if approved by engineer of record. Revise standard bolt holes to oversized,short-slotted,or long-slotted bolt holes if permitted,and indicate locations of each type on Drawings. D. Bolt Holes: Cut,drill, mechanically thermal cut,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not enlarge bolt holes by burning. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." G. Steel Headed Stud Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of anchors. Use automatic end welding of anchors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Cut,drill,thermal cut,or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. I. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights indicated on Drawings are not readily available,secure approval of alternate sizes from Structural Engineer-of Record in time to prevent project delay. 2.05 SHOP PRIMING A. AISC has indicated unpainted steel in arid regions,such as the Mountain region,that has not been exposed to whether or moisture experiences negligible deterioration over the course of the building life. For this reason item 6 had been added for typical projects. B. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Retain, revise,or delete five subparagraphs below to suit Project. 2. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches(50 mm). 3. Surfaces to be field welded, including top flange of beams to receive steel headed stud anchors. 4. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 5. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials(applied fireproofing). 6. Galvanized surfaces. 7. Surfaces not otherwise indicated to be painted that are not exposed to view or weather in the final condition. C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag,or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to either of the following specifications and standards: 1. Retain surface-preparation standards in nine subparagraphs below or revise to suit Project. Subparagraphs are listed from least to most comprehensive surface preparation and from lowest to highest cost. Coordinate minimum surface-preparation requirements with selection of primers, paint, and coating systems. See Evaluations. D. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." E. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." F. Cleaning in first subparagraph below permits tight residues of rust, mill scale,and coatings to remain. G. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation,apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage ofjoints,corners,edges,and exposed surfaces. 1. Retain first subparagraph below if paragraph above does not suffice. Stripe painting adds cost but helps ensure that hard-to-reach areas,such as crevices, inside corners, and welds,are thoroughly coated and that sharp edges receive adequate coverage. 2. Stripe paint corners,crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges. 2.06 GALVANIZING A. Retain this article if galvanizing of structural steel is required. B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes in closed sections(HSS or Pipe)that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Revise locations below where galvanizing is required to suit Project. Subparagraph is an example only; delete and indicate items to be galvanized on Drawings if preferred. 3. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles located in exterior walls. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify,with steel Erector present,elevations of concrete-and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces,anchor rods, bearing plates,and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores,guys, braces,and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete-and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges,shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate where indicated on Drawings. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding,cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Clean and moisten surfaces to receive grout. Immediately remove any remaining free water. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly,clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Structural Engineer-of-Record. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. G. Steel Headed Stud Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances,appearances,welding procedure specifications,weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing,alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"Section 099123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 05 12 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 05 72 10- ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Guard rails at balconies. B. Handrails and Guards at exterior stairs and ramps. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, dimension,spacings, and anchorage; include field measured dimensions of spaces where railings are to be installed, if critical to proper fit. 1.03 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Superior Aluminum Products. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS A. Handrails at Exterior Stairs and Ramps: Pipe rails. 1. Material: Steel Pipe, 1-1/2"Schedule 40, 1.9 inched outside diameter. 2. Joints: Coped and fully welded with welds ground smooth. 3. Top Rail to Post Connection at Open Ends: 4 or 6 inch radius elbow connection. 4. Wall Mounting: Extruded aluminum wall bracket;size to provide minimum of 1-1/2 inches clear space between top rail and wall. B. Guard Rail: Custom Fabricated Steel 1. Design Criteria: ICC International Building Code, 2012. 2. Post:See drawing details for size. 3. Top Rail: See drawing details for size. 4. Infill: Wire Mesh Panel a. Square welded. b. Galvanized Galfan c. 3"x 3"Opening d. 0.1920"Wire 5. Post Mounting:See drawing details. 6. Frame Finish:Galvanized Galfan PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05 72 10-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Anchor railings securely, in accordance with conditions of design criteria. END OF SECTION 05 72 10 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05 72 10-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 06 OS 73 -WOOD TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site applied termiticide for wood materials. B. Site applied termiticide for other building materials. C. Site applied mildicide for wood materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 61 16-Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Factory treatment for wood products. D. Section 06 17 33-Wood I-Joists: Factory treatment for wood products. E. Section 06 17 53-Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses: Factory treatment for wood products. F. Section 06 18 00-Glued-Laminated Construction: Factory treatment for wood products. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture.Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildicide: Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Nisus Corporation: www.nisuscorp.com. 2. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood: Borate mineral salt based,spray applied, penetrating termiticide. 1. Products: a. Nisus Corporation; Bora-Care: www.nisuscorp.com. b. ; Product c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. C. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildicide: Borate mineral salt based,spray applied termiticide, mildicide and mold growth preventative. 1. Products: a. Nisus Corporation; Bora-Care with Mold-Care: www.nisuscorp.com. b. ; Product c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. D. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood,Steel and Concrete: Borate mineral salt based,spray applied termiticide formulated for use on wood,steel, concrete and other building materials. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WOOD TREATMENT 06 05 73-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Active Ingredient: 40%minimum disodium octaborate tetrahydrate(DOT). 2. Carrier and Penetrant: Proprietary glycol solution. 3. Products: a. Nisus Corporation; Bora-Care Commercial: www.nisuscorp.com. b. ; Product c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. E. Site Applied Mold Cleaner: Non-bleaching, oxidizer based formula with high-pH tolerant surfactant. Contains no sodium hydroxide or sodium hypochlorite. 1. Products: a. Nisus Corporation; Mold-Clean: www.nisuscorp.com. b. ; Product c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. F. Surface-Applied Wood Preservative: 1. Product: manufactured by G. Surface-Applied Fire-Retardant: 1. Product: manufactured by PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, dirt and other contaminants from treatment surfaces. Remove tarpaulins, dropcloths,strippable protective films,etc.,from areas to be treated Move equipment and stored materials that block or prevent product application. 3.02 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Comply with manufacturers written mixing and installation instructions. B. Termiticide: Apply to foundations,structure and other items as listed. 1. All structural wood and sill plates within 24 inches, minimum, of point of contact with foundation. 2. All wood,wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 24 inches, minimum, of point of contact with foundation. 3. Concrete foundations 2 inches, minimum,from sill plate. 4. Open bath traps and concrete slab within 12 inches, minimum,of bath trap. 5. All pipe and plumbing penetrations up to 24 inches, minimum, above slab and slab surface within 6 inches, minimum, of pipe or penetration. 6. Concrete or masonry crawlspace walls up to 24 inches, minimum,from top of soil. 7. Concrete or masonry basement walls up to 24 inches, minimum,from top of soil. 8. Six inches, minimum, on either side of control joints and construction joints in slabs and joints between slabs and abutting material. C. Mildicide: Apply to wood and wood based building materials as listed. 1. All structural wood and sill plates within 24 inches, minimum, of point of contact with foundation. 2. All wood,wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 24 inches, minimum, of point of contact with foundation. END OF SECTION 06 05 73 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WOOD TREATMENT 06 05 73-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Shear wall panels. 5. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 6. Wood blocking and nailers. 7. Wood furring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600"Sheathing." 2. Section 061753 "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses"for wood trusses made from dimension lumber. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual)or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual)or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITI'ALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following,from ICC-ES: 1. Substitutions from productions show on the drawings, including power driven fasteners, powder-actuated fasteners, post-installed anchors, or metal framing anchors. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material,an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. In DOC PS 20, dressed sizes of green lumber are larger than dry lumber. 4. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 5. Revise subparagraph below if rough lumber is acceptable for all work. 6. Provide dressed lumber,S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses,as published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground and Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising,contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. Retain only first option in subparagraph below if authorities having jurisdiction require quality mark on all materials. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Retain first option and delete list that follows if all rough carpentry must be treated with wood preservative. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: 1. Retain first subparagraph below if Project includes wood adjacent to roofing or waterproofing. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs,equipment support bases, blocking,stripping,and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 3. Wood sills,sleepers, blocking,furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 6. Wood deck framing exposed to weather. 2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article,that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84,and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet(3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of inetal fasteners. 2. Exterior type is suitable for both exterior and interior applications. Interior type is only for interior applications. 3. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 5. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by testing agency] E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through,contain colorants,or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Retain first option and delete list that follows if all rough carpentry must be treated with fire retardant. G. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: 1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Framing for stages. 3. Concealed blocking. 4. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. S. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls. 6. Roof construction. 7. Plywood backing panels. 2.04 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. "Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions," "Load-Bearing Partitions," "Ceiling Joists," and "Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above" paragraphs in this article provide choices for specifying different categories of framing. Retain one paragraph for each category of framing required. In each paragraph where grade designations are used,grades are listed in order of decreasing quality(and cost). B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Species and Grade: As indicated on drawings C. Load-Bearing Partitions: Species and Grade as indicated on drawings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Species and Grade as indicated on drawings. E. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics,on exposed surfaces and edges,that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes,shake,splits,torn grain,and wane. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated on drawings. 2.05 TIMBER FRAMING A. Provide timber framing complying with the following requirements,according to grading rules of grading agency indicated: 1. Species and Grade: As indicated on the drawings. 2.06 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths,evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation b. Weyerhaeuser Company 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa)for 12-inch nominal-(286-mm actual-) depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 700 MPa). C. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Retain "Manufacturers"Subparagraph and list of manufacturers below to require products from manufacturers listed or a comparable product from other manufacturers. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weyerhaeuser Company 3. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa)for 12-inch nominal-(286-mm actual-)depth members. 4. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 700 MPa). D. Insert other properties of parallel-strand lumber here if critical. E. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation b. Weyerhaeuser Company 2. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 3. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. 4. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400,factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth,joist class,span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. F. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: All-veneer product. 3. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches(32 mm). Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade,factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness,grade, and compliance with APA standard. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the following species: 1. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility,Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction,select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling,select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.08 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, [Exterior,AC] [Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1, C-D Plugged], [fire-retardant treated,� in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [1/2-inch (13-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal thickness. 2.09 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. NES NER-272 covers power-driven staples, nails, P-nails, and allied fasteners. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. E. Wood Screws: ASME 618.6.1. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1(ASME B18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307,Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. "Material" subparagraphs below are examples only. First subparagraph protects against corrosion in an indoor atmosphere; revise to suit other service conditions after verifying availability of thicker coatings. 2. Material: Carbon-steel components,zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 3. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594,Alloy Group 1 or 2(ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M,Grade A1 or A4). Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc 2. USP Structural Connectors B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads,as published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip,zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60(Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)thick,selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate,combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line, cut,and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs;coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. F. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,fixtures,specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. I. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces,stud spaces,and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls,at each floor level,at ceiling,and at not more than 96 inches(2438 mm) o.c.with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level,at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm)o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-)thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq.ft. (9.3 sq. m)and to solidly fill space below partitions. J. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of inember or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. K. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. L. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. M. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. N. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch (13-mm)clearance at tops,sides, and ends of inembers built into masonry. 0. For exposed work,arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of inembers,with fasteners evenly spaced,and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable. 2. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. 3.02 WOOD SLEEPER,BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.03 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-(19-by-38-mm actual-)size furring vertically at 16 inches(406 mm) o.c. 3.04 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions[ and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs]. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide studs of size and spacing as indicated on the drawings. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide studs of size and spacing as indicated on the drawings. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches(2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs,except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual)depth for openings 48 inches(1200 mm)and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches(1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual)depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet(3 to 3.6 m) in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide jamb studs and headers as indicated on drawings. 3.05 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floorjoists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches(76 mm)on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist;do not locate closer than 2 inches(50 mm)from top or bottom. C. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness by depth ofjoist at ends ofjoists unless nailed to header or band. D. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams,girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches(102 mm)or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness by depth of joist over supports. E. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch (6.4-by-32-mm) metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches(2438 mm)o.c., extending over and fastening to three joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches(102 mm) into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches(102 mm) beyond bend. F. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. G. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. H. Provide bridging of type indicated below,at intervals of 96 inches(2438 mm)o.c., between joists. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal-(19-by-64-mm actual-)size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.06 RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal-(19-by-184-mm actual-)size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-)size stringers spaced 48 inches(1200 mm)o.c.crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. 1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated,of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches(50 mm)deeper. Bevel ends ofjack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated,of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches(50 mm)deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs,dormers, and similar conditions if any. 3.07 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches(102 mm)of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated;tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch (13-mm)air space at sides and ends of wood members. C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent preservative for 15 minutes. 3.08 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size,space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated,to comply with the following requirements: 1. "Size," "Material," "Notching," and "Spacing"subparagraphs below are examples only. Revise to suit Project and design loads required by building code. Treads and risers are finish carpentry. 2. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal-(38-by-286-mm actual-)size, minimum. 3. Material: Laminated-veneer lumber, parallel-strand lumber, or solid lumber. 4. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers,and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) of effective depth. 5. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch (914-mm)clear width of stair. B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm)variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX)from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-9 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-10 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 06 15 10-WOOD-POLYMER COMPOSITE DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood-polymer composite deck planks. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Joists and structural framing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: CertainTeed Corporation; P.O. Box 860,Valley Forge, PA 19482. ASD. Tel: (800) 233-8990(professional)or(800)782-8777(consumer). www.certainteed.com. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: TimberTech C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Decking: Wood-composite lumber planks as specified below. 1. Size: 5/4 inches by 6 inches nominal; 1 inch by 5-1/2 inches actual. 2. Use the longest lengths available and avoid splicing wherever possible. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Wood-Polymer Composite Planks: CertainTeed Boardwalk;wood-polymer composite with naturally weathering surface, requiring no waterproofing,sealing,or painting for longevity;complying with EPA limits on leachates and with the following characteristics: 1. Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. 2. Shear Strength: 1320 psi, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 143. 3. Compressive Strength: 2400 psi, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 198. 4. Modulus of Elasticity: 230,000 psi, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 198. 5. Nail Pullout Resistance: 318 psi, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1761 using 2 inch 6d galvanized spiral nails. 6. Screw Pullout Resistance: 834 psi, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1761 using 2 inch galvanized self-tapping deck screws with 10 threads per inch. 7. Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 8. Flammability: Self ignition temperature of at least 650 degrees F;flash ignition temperature of at least 680 degrees F;when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1929. 9. Static Coefficient of Friction: 0.52 to 0.54 when dry, and 0.87 to 0.88 when wet;when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2047. 10. Slip Resistance: 0.70 when dry and 0.64 when wet;when tested in accordance with ASTM F 1679. 11. Decay Resistance: No decay,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1413. 12. Termite Resistance: Rating A,when tested in accordance with AWPA E1. 13. Water Absorption: 1.3 percent, maximum,when unabraded;4.6 percent, maximum,when abraded;when tested in accordance with ASTM D 570. 14. Abrasion Resistance: Maximum of 2.98 grams weight loss when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4060 for 5000 cycles. 15. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 0.000024 inch/inch/degree F, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 696. B. Nails and Screws: Length as required to penetrate at least 1-1/2 inch into solid backing, except where otherwise required by manufacturer; high quality, hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel. END OF SECTION 06 15 10 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WOOD-POLYMER COMPOSITE DECKING 06 15 10-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WOOD-POLYMER COMPOSITE DECKING 06 15 10-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 4. Subflooring. 5. Underlayment. 6. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000"Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072500"Weather Barriers"for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: for each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For following products,from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material,an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Indicate design designations of specific assemblies on Drawings. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's"Fire Resistance Directory."GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual.". 2.02 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Retain one of two options in "Plywood" Paragraph below, usually the second. DOC PS 2 is a performance-based standard that does not include requirements for grades of veneers. Second option includes phrase"unless otherwise indicated"to allow for underlayment that is specified to comply with DOC PS 1 because a minimum face veneer grade is required;delete if phrase is not needed. B. Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. D. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. E. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.03 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Retain first option in "Application" Paragraph below and delete others if total treatment is required; otherwise, retain second option with or without third option. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.04 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet(3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of inetal fasteners. 2. Exterior type is suitable for both exterior and interior applications. Interior type is only for interior applications. 3. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 5. Retain option in "Design Value Adjustment Factors"Subparagraph below if applicable. Revise description of locations to suit Project. Verify adjustment factors with Project's structural engineer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 6. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified.[ For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F(76 deg C)shall be not less than span ratings specified.� C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Retain first option in "Application" Paragraph below and delete subparagraphs if all wood is required to be fire-retardant treated; otherwise, retain second option and applicable subparagraphs. F. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Revise list below to suit local code and Project. 2. Roof[and wall] sheathing within 48 inches(1220 mm) of[fire] [party]walls. 3. Roof sheathing. 4. Subflooring and underlayment for raised platforms. 2.05 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,gypsum sheathing;with water-resistant-treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges. 1. Manufacturers a. American Gypsum b. G-P Gypsum Corporation c. LaFarge North America Inc d. National Gypsum Company e. Temple-Inland Inc f. United States Gypsum Co 2. Type and Thickness: Type X,5/8 inch (15.9 mm)thick. 3. Edge and End Configuration: V-shaped. D. Boards 48 inches(1219 mm)or 1200 mm wide can be installed horizontally but are usually installed vertically; horizontal square edges must be protected by a weather-resistant barrier or must be sealed. E. Size:48 by 108 inches(1219 by 2743 mm)for vertical installation. F. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Products a. CertainTeed Corporation;GlasRoc b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP d. Temple-Inland Inc.;GreenGlass e. United States Gypsum Co.;Securock 2. Type and Thickness: Type X,5/8 inch (15.9 mm)thick. 3. SI (metric) module dimensions are not readily obtainable;verify availability by special order with manufacturer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. Boards 48 inches(1219 mm)or 1200 mm wide can be installed horizontally but are usually installed vertically; horizontal square edges must be protected by a weather-resistant barrier or must be sealed. H. Size: 48 by 96 inches(1219 by 2438 mm)for vertical installation. I. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325,Type A. 1. Products a. GCure; GCure Board 990 b. Custom Building Products;Wonderboard c. FinPan, Inc.; UtiI-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). J. Extruded-Polystyrene-Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 578,Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue-and-groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers a. DiversiFoam Products b. Dow Chemical Company(The) c. Owens Corning d. Pactiv, Inc 2. Thickness: As indicatedon drawings. 2.06 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm). B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than [48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm). 2.07 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. For resilient flooring,APA recommends separate subflooring and underlayment rather than single-layer floor. See Evaluations for information about durability classifications of plywood. B. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1 single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16 o.c.or 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). C. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Exposure 1. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16 o.c.or 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). D. Underlayment,General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)over board or uneven subfloors. 2.08 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME 618.6.1. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 2.09 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834,compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Product in "Sheathing Tape"Subparagraph below is an open mesh tape for use with sealant in "Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing" Paragraph above. 2. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches(50 mm)wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m),of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. B. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations,edges,and other obstructions of work;fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated,complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's"International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints;cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.02 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm)apart at edges and ends. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Subflooring: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm)apart at edges and ends. 3. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm)apart at edges and ends. 4. Underlayment: a. Nail or staple to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)apart at edges and ends. c. Retain subparagraph below if wood structural panels are used as underlayment for resilient flooring. d. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring immediately before installing flooring. 3.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Retain applicable subparagraph(s) below or insert requirements to suit Project. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with [nails] [or] [screws]. 3. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 4. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 5. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture,to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Revise"Horizontal Installation" Paragraph below if horizontally installed boards do not have tongue-and-groove edges. D. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs,and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Retain first or second subparagraph below. Retain second subparagraph if applicable or permitted. 2. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches(200 mm)o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from edges and ends of boards. 3. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Retain first or second subparagraph below. Retain second subparagraph if applicable or permitted. 2. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches(200 mm)o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from edges and ends of boards. 3. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. F. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Retain subparagraph above or subparagraph below if sealant is used with gypsum sheathing; coordinate with products retained in Part 2. Above is suitable for paper-surfaced or glass-mat gypsum sheathing. Below is suitable for glass-mat gypsum sheathing. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.04 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEATHING 06 16 00-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 06 17 53 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood floor trusses. 3. Wood girder trusses. 4. Wood truss bracing. 5. Metal truss accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Retain subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections. 2. Section 061000"Rough Carpentry°for lumber framing. 3. Section 061600"Sheathing"for roof sheathing and subflooring. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of inetal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Show location, pitch,span,camber,configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 2. Indicate sizes,stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations,sizes,and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 4. Indicate type,size, material,finish,design values,orientation, and location of inetal connector plates. 5. Show splice details and bearing details. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. qualification Data: For metal connector-plate manufacturer. B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum specific gravity. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and specific gravity. C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses,signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. D. Evaluation Reports: For the following,from ICC-ES: 1. Metal-plate connectors. 2. Metal truss accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. TPI 1 added specific requirements for fabricator quality-assurance programs in the 2002 version, but does not require third-party inspection. Verify that local truss fabricators participate in third-party inspection programs; many do not. Third-party inspection is required by the IBC to be an approved fabricator and to waive requirement for special inspection. If truss fabricator is FSC-certified for chain of custody,cost of trusses is used for calculating LEED credit for certified wood if not only cost of certified wood is used. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material,an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat,off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion,or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Retain "Delegated Design" Paragraph below if Contractor is required to assume responsibility for design. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer,as defined in Section 014000"Quality Requirements,"to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses. C. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 1. Tabulate minimum load requirements here or on Drawings. Revise"Design Loads"Subparagraph below when design loads are included here. Include applicable live, dead,snow, collateral, seismic,wind, and uplift loads,and load combinations. 2. Design Loads: As indicated on drawings. 3. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: As indicated on drawings. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TPI publications listed below are by title without alphanumeric designations in which the number represents year of issue. Designations in effect when this Section was updated appear in "Referenced Standards"Article in the Evaluations. 2. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 3. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 4. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its"Supplement." 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber,S4S. 3. Retain one of two options in subparagraph below. Verify availability of lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content before retaining. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Retain "Minimum Specific Gravity for Top Chords" Paragraph below if required for diaphragm construction. C. Minimum Specific Gravity for Top Chords: 0.50. D. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Section 061000"Rough Carpentry." 2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD A. See the Evaluations for discussion of fire-retardant-treated wood. Verify availability with truss fabricators. B. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article,that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet(3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of inetal fasteners. 2. Exterior type is suitable for both exterior and interior applications. Interior type is only for interior applications. 3. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 5. Delete option in "Design Value Adjustment Factors"Subparagraph below if not applicable. Revise description of locations to suit Project. Verify adjustment factors with Project's structural engineer. 6. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.[ For enclosed roof framing,framing in attic spaces,and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.] D. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Retain only first option in subparagraph below if authorities having jurisdiction require classification marking on all materials. 2. For exposed trusses and bracing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency]. F. Delete or revise first paragraph below if no exposed trusses or if staining will hide colorants. G. For exposed trusses indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through,contain colorants,or otherwise adversely affect finishes. H. Retain first option in "Application" Paragraph below and delete subparagraphs if all trusses are required to be fire-retardant treated; otherwise, retain second option and appropriate subparagraphs. I. Application: Treat [all trusses unless otherwise indicated.] [items indicated on Drawings, and the following:� 1. Revise list below suit local code and Project. 2. Floor trusses for[bowling lanes� [and] [raised platforms]. 3. Roof trusses. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 4. <Insert category of trusses required to be treated>. 2.04 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Retain "Manufacturers" Paragraph and list of manufacturers below to require products from manufacturers listed or a comparable product from other manufacturers. B. Manufacturers<http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1598&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd>: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following]: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.;an ITW company 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company 3. CompuTrus, Inc 4. Eagle Metal Products 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.;a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc 7. Robbins Engineering, Inc 8. Truswal Systems Corporation;an ITW company C. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer. D. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. E. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M;Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A),or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B(HSLAS Type B);G60(Z180)coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)thick. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of inetal framing manufacturer. 2. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure-preservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 2.06 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Retain "Manufacturers" Paragraph and list of manufacturers below to require products from manufacturers listed or a comparable product from other manufacturers. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co 2. KC Metals Products, Inc 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc 5. USP Structural Connectors C. If retaining first option in "Allowable Design Loads" Paragraph below, indicate design loads for metal truss accessories on Drawings. D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Galvanized steel is typical for most manufacturers and is suitable for most applications. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip,zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60(Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20,with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations,thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Retain this article if special inspection is required. Consider deleting if requiring that fabricator participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency and if authorities having jurisdiction approve fabrication work without special inspections. Coordinate with "Fabricator Qualifications" Paragraph in "Quality Assurance"Article. B. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections. 1. Provide special inspector with access to fabricator's documentation of detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved construction documents and referenced standards. 2. Provide special inspector with access to places where wood trusses are being fabricated to perform inspections. C. Correct deficiencies in Work that special inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members orjoints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb,square,and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. H. Retain first paragraph below if built-up girder trusses are required. TPI 1 states it is truss designer's responsibility to design truss-to-girder connection. I. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. J. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Install bracing to comply with Section 061000"Rough Carpentry." 2. Retain subparagraph below if floor trusses are required. 3. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated. K. TPI 1 permits out-of-plumb tolerance of the lesser of D/SO or 2 inches(50 mm) maximum. Out-of-plane tolerances or bow is limited to the lesser of L/200 or 2 inches (50 mm) maximum. Location variances of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and a top-chord bearing gap of 1/2 inch (13 mm)for parallel-chord trusses are also permitted. L. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. M. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut,drill, notch,or remove truss members. N. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design,when approved by Architect. 3.02 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX)from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Retain first paragraph below instead of above if boron-treated wood is not used, but borate treatment of wood that has become wet is used to help prevent mold and mildew. Delete if site-applied boron treatment is specified in Section 313116"Termite Control." C. Protect wood trusses from weather. If,despite protection,wood trusses become wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. D. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. E. Retain "Protective Coating" Paragraph below if an added corrosion-resistant coating of inetal connector plates is required. F. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of inetal connector plates. Brush apply primer,when part of coating system,and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 06 17 53 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 06 20 00- FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 14 16-Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 7100-Door Hardware. D. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. E. Section 10 28 00-Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories. F. Section 12 35 30-Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work. G. Section 12 36 00-Countertops:Window Stools. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC(QSI)-Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated;Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed.,Version 2.0. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom grade. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS-GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork B. Quality Standards Illustrated for Custom grade. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and Backing: Softwood lumber of cedar species. B. Wood Filler: Solvent base,tinted to match surface finish color. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.05 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,Section 1500: 1. Transparent:Nitrocellulose lacquer(formerly TR-1). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components,with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION 06 20 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing. B. Protection boards. C. Drainage panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 33 46 00-Subdrainage. B. Section 07 2100-Thermal Insulation: Rigid insulation board used as protection board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D41-Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing,and Waterproofing; 2011. B. ASTM D1227-Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007). C. ASTM D2822-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Containing; 2005 (Reapproved 2011)e1. D. NRCA ML104-The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Bitumen: Water based emulsified asphalt,ASTM D 1227;with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos(Type II). 1. Product: Mar-flex 5000 WB manufactured by Mar-flex Basement and Waterproofing products. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41,compatible with substrate. C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement,ASTM D2822,Type I. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Drainage Panel: 2-3/8 inch R10 fiberglass drain board. Use below grade application. 1. Product: ARM-N-DRI manufactured by Owens-Corning. B. Protection Board: Rigid insulation specified in Section 07 2100. Use for above grade application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations,small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply bitumen by spray application. C. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. Job No. 14LION-00-01 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Place drainage panel directly over dampproofing, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. E. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations,and interruptions. END OF SECTION 07 11 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 18 00 -TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Waterproofing and vehicular traffic coating for interior and exterior elevated slabs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets. C. Submit list of project references as documented in this section under Quality Assurance article. Include contact name and phone number of person charged with oversight of each project. D. Quality Control Submittals: Provide protection plan of surrounding areas and non-work surfaces. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Company with minimum of 15 years experience in manufacturing of specified products and systems. b. ISO 9001:2000 Certified. 2. Applicator Qualifications: Company with minimum of 5 years experience in application of specified products and systems on projects of similar size and scope, and is acceptable to product manufacturer. a. Successful completion of a minimum of 5 projects of similar size and complexity to specified Work. B. Field Sample: 1. Install at Project site or pre-selected area of building an area for field sample,as directed by Architect. a. Provide mock-up of at least 100 square feet(9.3 m2)to include surface profile,sealant joint,crack, flashing, and juncture details and allow for evaluation of slip resistance and appearance. b. Apply material in accordance with manufacturer's written application instructions. 2. Manufacturer's representative or designated representative shall review technical aspects,surface preparation,application, and workmanship. 3. Field sample shall be standard for judging workmanship on remainder of Project. 4. Maintain field sample during construction for workmanship comparison. 5. Do not alter, move,or destroy field sample until Work is completed and approved by Architect. 6. Obtain Architect's written approval of field sample before start of material application, including approval of aesthetics,color,texture,and appearance. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store materials in unopened packaging in clean,dry area protected from sunlight. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply when substrates are over 110 degrees F (32 degrees C)or under 40 degrees F(4 degrees C). 2. Do not apply in rain or when rain is expected within 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. BASF Corporation;www.buildingsystems.basf.com 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 18 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Customer Service: 800-433-9517 Technical Service: 800-243-6739 Direct Phone: 952-496-6000 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fluid-applied, moisture-curing, polyurethane,waterproofing,traffic-bearing, membrane deck coating system. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Primer: Primer 770. Two-component,waterborne,epoxy primer and sealer. 2. Base Coat: Sonoguard Base Coat. One-component, moisture-curing polyurethane. 3. Top Coat Tint Base: Sonoguard Top Coat Tint Base. One-component, aliphatic, moisture-curing polyurethane consisting of 40 standard colors. 4. Aggregate: Sonoguard Aggregate. 5. Cementitious and Epoxy Patching Materials: BASF Corporation repair mortar and epoxies. 6. Sealant Primer: Sonneborn Primer 733. 7. Sealant: Sonneborn SL-2 or Sonneborn Ultra. 8. Deep Joint Sealant: Sonneborn SL-2 or Sonneborn NP-2. 9. Plywood Joint Sealant: Sonneborn NP-1 or Sonneborn NP-2. 10. Reinforcing Fabric: Sonoshield Reinforcing Fabric. 11. Clean-up: Reducer 990. C. Compliances: 1. UL 790, Class A fire rating. 2. ASTM C 957. 3. ASTM E 108. 4. ASTM E 84. D. Properties: 1. Weight per Gallon,ASTM D 1475: a. Base Coat: 9.9 Ibs(4.5 kg). b. Top Coat: 9.1 Ibs(4.1 kg). 2. Specific Gravity: a. Base Coat: 1.19 kg/L. b. Top Coat: 1.09 kg/L. 3. Solids Content,ASTM D 1259: a. Base Coat, By Weight: 84 percent. b. Base Coat, By Volume: 81 percent. c. Top Coat, By Weight: 77 percent. d. Top Coat, By Volume: 75 percent. 4. Viscosity,ASTM D 2393: a. Base Coat: 4,000 to 9,000 cps. b. Top Coat: 2,000 to 4,000 cps. S. Flash Point,ASTM D 56: a. Base Coat: 104 degrees F(40 degrees C). b. Top Coat: 105 degrees F(40.5 degrees C). 6. VOC Content: a. Base Coat,Self-Leveling Grade: 1.63 Ibs per gal (196 g/L), less water and exempt solvents. b. Base Coat, Flash/Slope Grade: 1.7 Ibs per gal (203.3 g/L), less water and exempt solvents. c. Top Coat: 1.75 Ibs per gal (209 g/L), less water and exempt solvents. E. Properties of Cured Membranes: 1. Hardness,Shore A,ASTM D 2240. a. Base Coat: 60. Job No. 14LION-00-01 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 18 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 b. Top Coat: 89. 2. Tensile Strength,ASTM D 412: a. Base Coat: 752 psi (5.2 MPa). b. Top Coat: 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa). 3. Elongation,ASTM D 412: a. Base Coat: 595 percent. b. Top Coat: 502 percent. 4. Tear Strength,ASTM D 1004: a. Base Coat: 74 PIT. b. Top Coat: 199 PIT. 5. Weight Loss, Maximum 40: a. Base Coat: 16 percent. b. Top Coat: 17 percent. 6. Low Temperature Flexibility and Crack Bridging: a. Base Coat: No cracking. b. Top Coat: No cracking. 7. Adhesion in Peel After Water Immersion: a. Base Coat, Primed Mortar: 43 pli. b. Base Coat, Plywood: 34 pli. 8. Pull-Out Adhesion,ASTM D 4541: a. Base Coat: 275 psi. F. Chemical Resistance Tensile Retention,ASTM C 957: 1. Ethylene Glycol, Minimum 70: a. Base Coat: 88. b. Top Coat: 92. 2. Mineral Spirits, Minimum 45: a. Base Coat: 47. b. Top Coat: 60. 3. Water, Minimum 70: a. Base Coat: 96. b. Top Coat: 83. G. Coating System Weathering Resistance and Elongation Recovery,ASTM C 957: 1. Elongation Recovery, Minimum 90 Percent: 94 percent. 2. Tensile Retention, Minimum 80 Percent: 151 percent. 3. Elongation Retention, Minimum 90 Percent: 94 percent. 4. Abrasion Resistance, (CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 g load, 1,000 cyclesj, Maximum 50 mg lost: 1 mg lost. 5. Crack Bridging(1,000 cycles): System passes. H. Color:Charcoal Gray. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Substrates: Sound and free of dust, dirt, laitance, paints, oils,grease,curing compounds,or other contaminants. 3.02 APPLICATION A. For nonmoving joints and cracks less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)wide,apply 25 wet mils(0.6 mm) prestriping of base coat over cured primer. Apply base coat to fill and overlap joint or crack 3 inches(76 mm)on each side. Feather the edges. B. Dynamic cracks and joints over 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)wide shall be routed to a minimum of 1/4 inch by 1/4 inch (6 mm by 6 mm) and cleaned. Install bond breaker tape to prevent adhesion to bottom of joint. Prime joint faces Job No. 14LION-00-01 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 18 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 only with sealant primer and fill with sealant. Fill joints deeper than 1/4 inch (6 mm)with backer rod and deep joint sealant. For cracks,sealant shall be flush with adjacent surface. For expansion joints,sealant shall be slightly concave. C. Sealed joints 1 inch (25 mm)or less shall be coated over with deck coating system. D. Expansion joints exceeding 1 inch (25 mm)wide, including primary wide expansion-joint system,shall not be coated. E. Where coating system will be terminated and no wall,joint,or other break exists,cut 1/4 inch by 1/4 inch (6 mm by 6 mm) keyway into concrete. Fill and coat keyway as application of base coat progresses. F. Plywood Surfaces: 1. Plywood shall be smooth faced,APA stamped,and exterior grade. Construction shall conform to code, with plywood not less than 15/32 inch (12 mm)thick. Plywood spacing and deck construction shall be in accordance with APA guidelines. 2. Priming is not required if plywood is clean and dry. 3. Caulk seams with plywood joint sealants. Prestripe 4 to 6 inches(102 to 152 mm)wide with 25 wet mils (0.6 mm)of base coat. Reinforce seams between plywood sheets and between flashing and plywood deck by embedding reinforcing fabric into prestriping. G. Priming: 1. After thoroughly vacuuming surface,apply primer to properly prepared deck surfaces at rate of 200 to 250 square feet per gallon (4.9 to 6.1 m2/L). Force primer into pores and voids to eliminate pinholes. Do not apply over prestriping. 2. Allow primer to dry tack free. Apply base coat same working day. H. LIGHT-TO MEDIUM-DUTY TRAFFIC and pedestrian SYSTEM 1. Apply 25 wet mils(0.6 mm)of base coat. Immediately backroll to level base coat. Allow to cure overnight. 2. Apply 25 wet mils(0.6 mm)of top coat. Immediately backroll to level top coat. 3. While coating is still wet, broadcast aggregate at rate of 10 to 15 pounds per 100 square feet(0.5 to 0.7 kg/m2). Backroll into coating to fully encapsulate. I. HEAVY-DUTY TRAFFIC SYSTEM 1. Apply 25 wet mils(0.6 mm)of base coat. Immediately backroll to level base coat. Allow to cure overnight. 2. Apply 20 wet mils(0.5 mm)of intermediate top coat. 3. Immediately backroll to level top coat. While coating is still wet, broadcast aggregate to refusal at approximate rate of 30 to 50 pounds per 100 square feet(1.5 to 2.4 kg/m2). Allow to cure overnight. 4. Remove loose aggregate. Apply 20 wet mils(0.5 mm)of top coat. 5. Immediately backroll to level top coat. Immediately broadcast aggregate at rate of 7 to 10 pounds per 100 square feet(0.34 to 0.49 kg/m2). Backroll to encapsulate. J. EXTRA-HEAVY-dUTY TRAFFIC SYSTEM 1. Apply 25 wet mils(0.6 mm)of base coat. Immediately backroll to level base coat. Allow to cure overnight. 2. Apply 25 wet mils(0.6 mm)of top coat. 3. Immediately backroll to level top coat. While coating is still wet, broadcast aggregate to refusal at rate of 50 to 70 pounds per 100 square feet(2.5 to 3.4 kg/m2). Allow to cure overnight. 4. Remove loose aggregate. Apply 20 wet mils(0.5 mm)of top coat. 5. Immediately backroll to evenly level top coat. 6. Immediately broadcast aggregate at rate of 7 to 10 pounds per 100 square feet(0.34 to 0.49 kg/m2). Backroll to encapsulate. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Pedestrian Traffic: Allow minimum curing time of 48 hours before pedestrian use. B. Vehicular Traffic: Allow minimum curing time of 72 hours before vehicular use. C. Extend curing time in cool-weather conditions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 18 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Protect system from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 07 18 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 18 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07 18 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 21 00 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall behind masonry veneer. B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction. C. Batt insulation for sound attenuation. (Acoustic insulation). 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 11 13-Rigid insulation over dampproofing. B. Section 07 21 19-Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Insulation of rim joist and parapet area; alternate bid exterior wall insulation. C. Section 07 53 00-Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing system. D. Section 09 21 16-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578-Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2012. B. ASTM C665-Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. C. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2013a. D. ASTM E136-Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012. 1.04 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578,Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 4. Board Thickness: a. 2 inches at foundation perimeter(where drain board does not occur). b. 1/2 inch within masonry cavity at foundation. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 7. Board Density: 1.3 Ib/cu ft. 8. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent,volume. 9. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Pactiv Building Products: greenguard.pactiv.com. 10. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;friction fit. 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible,when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. 2. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 3. Thickness:As indicated. Job No. 14LION-00-01 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 4. Facing: Unfaced. 5. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Acoustic Insulation:ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber,friction fit type, unfaced.Thickness: 3 1/2 and S 1/2 inch. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: clear polyethylene film reinforced with glass fiber square mesh, 6 mil thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards vertically on foundation perimeter. 1. Install in running bond pattern. 2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Fasten to foundation with powder actuated fasteners. 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of inechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 21 19 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foamed-in-place insulation in exterior rim joist to acheive thermal,air and vapor barrier. B. Foamed-in-place insulation at exterior wall crevices requiring a thermal seal. C. Alternate bid:Alternate to provide 3"closed cell insulation in exterior walls in lieu of fiberglass batt insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 1621-Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics;2004a. B. ASTM D 1622-Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2008. C. ASTM D2842-Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics;2012. D. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2013a. E. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, insulation properties, and preparation requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section,with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified,with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Insulation: Polyurethane type. 1. Thermal Resistance:Aged R-value of 5.9 per inch minimum. 2. Closed Cell Content:>90%when tested in accordance with ASTM D 6226. 3. Water Vapor Transmission: 7 perms, maximum, @ 1 1/2 inches thick, measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 4. Water Absorption: 3 percent by volume, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842. 5. Compressive Strength: 18-27 psi,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. 6. Density: 1.8-2.2 Ib/cu ft,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1622. 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of Q5/<450,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry,and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat adhesion. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting. B. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Apply insulation by spray method,to a uniform monolithic density without voids. C. Apply to a minimum cured thickness of 3.0 or R-19 (min.) END OF SECTION 07 21 19 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 21 26 - BLOWN INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceiling and Attic: Loose insulation pneumatically placed through access holes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 61 16-Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B. Section 07 2100-Thermal Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C739-Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2011. B. ASTM C764-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2011. C. ASTM C1015-Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 2006(Reapproved 2011)e1. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements, in conjunction with Section 07 2100. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedure for preparation and installation. D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed UL Requriements for 1 Hr.Separation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Blown Insulation: 1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. GreenFiber: www.greenfiber.com 3. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C764, mineral wool fiber type, nodulated for pour and bulk for pneumatic placement. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F). 2. Installed Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 3. Total Thermal Resistance: 11.0(deg F hr sq ft)/Btu. B. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C739,cellulose fiber type, bulk for pneumatic placement. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F). 2. Installed Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 3. Total Thermal Resistance: 11.0(deg F hr sq ft)/Btu. C. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate,adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling spaces. Job No. 14LION-00-01 BLOWN INSULATION 07 21 26-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Drill 2 inch diameter insulation access ports in soffit panels to permit equipment access. C. Place insulation pneumatically to completely fill truss spaces. D. Pour insulation to completely fill truss spaces. E. Place insulation against baffles. Do not impede natural attic ventilation to soffit. F. Place against and behind mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. G. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids. H. Repair and reseal insulation access ports. Refinish to match disturbed work. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove loose insulation residue. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Exterior Walls: Pneumatically placed into wall stud spaces through port holes at exterior fascia board. B. Attic Spaces: Pour insulation between ceiling trusses to achieve an R value of 50. END OF SECTION 07 21 26 Job No. 14LION-00-01 BLOWN INSULATION 07 21 26-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 25 00 -WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding,over sheathing or other substrate; not air tight or vapor retardant. B. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls,joints between exterior walls and roof,and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade. B. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding. C. Section 07 2100-Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt insulation. D. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques. E. Section 09 21 16-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers,or vapor retarders. B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified,with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification,vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders. C. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable,to the degree specified,with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm. D. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant,to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AATCC Test Method 127-Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008. B. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a. C. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012. D. ASTM E2178-Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials;2013. E. ICC-ES AC38-Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2013. F. ICC-ES AC212-Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2012. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-Division 1-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS(WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE) A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened: 1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A(desiccant method). 3. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 6 months weather exposure. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less,smoke developed index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Water Resistance: Comply with applicable water-resistive requirements of ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria AC38. 6. Products: a. DuPont Building Innovations;Tyvek Commercial Wrap with Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing-Brush Formulation,Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, FlexWrap NF,StraightFlash, StraightFlash VF,Tyvek Wrap Caps, and Tyvek Tape: www.dupont.com. b. DuPont Building Innovations;Tyvek Commercial Wrap D with Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing-Brush Formulation,Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, FlexWrap NF,StraightFlash, StraightFlash VF,Tyvek Wrap Caps, and Tyvek Tape: www.dupont.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slip resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof. 1. Composition: Butyl rubber sheet laminated to elasticized polyethylene sheet. 2. Thickness: 40 mil (0.040 inch), nominal. 3. Products: a. DuPont Building Innovations; FlexWrap NF:www.dupont.com. b. Grace Uycor Plas. c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. B. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners,and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated,with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer if temperature is out of this range. D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets-On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water,with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. For applications specified to be air tight,seal seams, laps, penetrations,tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed,gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Where stud framing rests on concrete or masonry,extend lower edge of sheet at least 4 inches below bottom of framing and seal to foundation with sealant. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 6. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings. 7. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 8. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 9. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges,wrap excess sheet into opening;at head,seal sheet over flange and flashing. E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install flashing over sills,covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges,seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide;do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames,seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide,covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs;seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings,seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant overbackerrod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. B. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not leave paper-or felt-based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. END OF SECTION 07 25 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 31 13 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment,and valley protection. C. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 06 15 00-Wood Decking: Roof decking. C. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings. D. Section 07 71 23-Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. E. Section 07 72 00-Roof Accessories:Snow guards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D225-Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles(Organic Felt)Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2007. B. ASTM D226/D226M -Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. C. ASTM D1970/D1970M-Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013. D. ASTM D3161-Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles(Fan-Induced Method); 2013. E. ASTM D3462-Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2010a. F. ASTM D3909/D3909M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing(Glass Felt)Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 1997b(Reapproved 2012)e1. G. ASTM D4586/D4586M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free; 2007(Reapproved 2012)e1. H. ASTM D4869/D4869M-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing; 2005(Reapproved 2011)e1. I. ASTM D6380-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing(Organic Felt); 2003 (Reapproved 2009). J. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012. K. ASTM E108-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011. L. ICC-ES AC188-Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012. M. ICC-ES AC207-Acceptance Criteria for Polypropylene Roof Underlayments; 2012. N. NRCA M5104-The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 0. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual;Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012. P. UL(RMSD)-Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITfALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern;for color selection. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Shingles: 100 sq ft of each type and color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 1. Maintain one copy of document on site. B. Products Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL listed and labeled. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of 100 sq ft, including underlayment. B. Locate where directed. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Pinnacle: www.atlasroofing.com. 2. GAF;Timberline Ultra HD: www.gaf.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Wind Resistance: Class F,when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161. 2. Warranted Wind Speed: Not less than tested wind resistance. 3. Algae Resistant. 4. Weight: 300 Ib/100 sq ft. 5. Self-sealing type. 6. Style: Square. 7. Color: As selected. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS-Per Elevation Drawings A. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated organic felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D6380, Class M,Type II,with 2 inch wide selvage; color as selected. B. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced,complying with ASTM D3909, minimum weight of granule surfaced portion of 63 Ib/100 sq ft;color as selected. C. Smooth Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated organic felt,with smooth asphalt coating both sides, complying with ASTM D6380,Class S,Type IV, 39.8 Ib/100 sq ft. D. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970;40 mil total thickness;with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grace Ice&Water Sheild,www.graceconstruction.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ASPHA�T SHINGLES 07 31 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 E. Eave Protection Membrane: Asphalt-coated organic roll roofing,with smooth asphalt coating both sides, complying with ASTM D224,Type I or IV. F. Eave Protection Membrane: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated, complying with ASTM D226/D226M,Type I ("No.15"). G. Underlayment: Self-adhering rubber-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 22 mil total thickness; with strippable release film and woven polypropylene sheet top surface. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES AC188 for non-self-adhesive sheet. 2. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970. 3. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970. 4. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.067 perm,when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method). 5. Performance: Meet or exceed requirements for ASTM D226,Type II asphalt-saturated organic felt. 6. Liquid Water Transmission: Passes ASTM D4869. 7. Functional Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F to 212 degrees F. 8. Products: a. System Components Corporation, Inc.:www.systemcomponents.net. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. H. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated,complying with ASTM D226/D226M,Type I ("No.15"). I. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic felt underlayment,complying with ASTM D4869, minimum 8 Ib/100 sq ft(Type I). J. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970;40 mil total thickness;with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type,of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage,0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type,of hot dipped zinc coated steel, minimum 3/8 inch head diameter and 0.105 inch shank diameter, 1-1/4 inch long. C. Staples: Standard wire shingle type, of hot dipped zinc coated steel, 16 gage,0.062 inch diameter, 15/16 inch crown width, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586,asphalt roof cement. E. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of underlayment,free of toxic solvents. F. Ridge Vents: Plastic,extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather entry;flanged to receive shingles. 2.04 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge,gable edge, ridge, ridge vents, open valley flashing,and dormer flashing. 1. Form flashings to profiles indicated on Drawings. 2. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths,free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 3. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. 4. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished galvanized steel,0.018 inch/26 gage thick, minimum G90/Z275 hot-dipped galvanized; PVC coated, color as selected. C. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 0.016 inch thick; stucco embossed, PVC coating, color as selected. D. Sheet Metal: Galvanized steel, as specified in Section 07 62 00. E. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry,free of ridges,warps,or voids. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape. B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate,fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection. D. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 16" inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION-EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply 4 inch wide band of plastic cement over deck flange of eave edge flashings, and embed an 18 inch wide strip of eave protection membrane. Place starter strip with eave edge flush with face of flashings. Secure in place. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. D. Apply lap cement at rate of approximately 1 1/4 gal/100 sq ft over starter strip. E. Starting from lower edge of starter strip, lay additional 36 inch wide strips in lap cement,to produce a two ply membrane. Weather lap plies minimum 19 inches and nail in place. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. Stagger end joints of each consecutive ply. 3.04 INSTALLATION-UNDERLAYMENT A. Entire roof on 4/12 and 3/16 sloped roofs. B. At Roof Slopes Up to 4:12 : Install two layers of underlayment over area not protected by eave protection,with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. C. At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12 : Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof,with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection. D. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. 3.05 INSTALLATION-VALLEY PROTECTION A. Install valley protection in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Install one ply of smooth surfaced roll roofing, minimum 18 inches wide,centered over valleys. C. Install flexible flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ASPHA�T SHINGLES 07 31 13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches. E. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. F. At Exposed Valleys: Install one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide,centered over open valley and crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge of first, press roll roofing into cement,and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. 3.06 INSTALLATION-METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Install flashings in accordance with NRCA requirements. B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. C. Secure in place with nails at 16 inches on center. Conceal fastenings. D. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3.07 INSTALLATION-SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle,or as required by code,whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip,or as required by code,whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. E. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope 2 inches from valley center line to achieve closed cut valley,concealing the valley protection. F. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten. Extend shingles a minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley,concealing the valley protection. G. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails. H. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual shingle tab exposed to weather,to prevent lifting. I. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counterflashings. J. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION 07 31 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Metal panel roofing, including all components specified. B. Disposal of demolition debris and construction waste is the responsibility of Contractor. Perform disposal in manner complying with all applicable federal,state, and local regulations. C. Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com. D. Commencement of work by the Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by the Contractor that this specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the project conditions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be installed and manufacturer's standard detail drawings applicable to this project. 1. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's instructions to installer, marked up to show exactly how all components will be installed;where instructions allow installation options, clearly indicate which option will be used. B. Manufacturer's Installation Inspection Reports: Manufacturer may,at its option, inspect the installation at any time to appraise the installing contactor of their compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Typical inspections will include: 1. Prior to the installation of the metal roofing panels to inspect the underlayments. The roofing contractor is responsible for assuring that the substrate is in suitable condition for the installation of the metal roofing components to the substrate. 2. Intermediate inspections to ensure proper installation of the metal roofing panels(if required). 3. At final completion of all metal roofing system work. 4. Submit to Owner,for the project record,a copy of each report of inspection made. C. Executed Warranty, by authorized company official. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have received training from metal panel manufacturer for installation of the specified roof panel system,and: 1. Current Firestone Red Shield licensed installer status. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged,with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Exercise extreme care in unloading,storing,and installing metal panels to prevent bending,warping,twisting, and surface damage. C. Store products above ground on well-supported platforms that provide minimum of 1:48 slope.Store under waterproof covering or indoors and provide proper ventilation of inetal components to prevent condensation build-up between metal components. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications,scheduling,and inspections. Job No. 14LION-00-01 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to,and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have under the contract documents. C. Warranty: Firestone Red Shield Limited Warranty covering roof panels and associated metal components, roof sheathing/insulation manufactured by Firestone,and accessories, covering weathertightness,finish, materials, labor,and workmanship. 1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation. 2. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by: a. Ordinary wear and tear of the elements. b. Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials. c. Defective workmanship used to install these materials. d. Damage due to winds up to 55 mph. 3. Not Covered: a. Materials not made by Firestone b. Damage due to winds in excess of 55 mph. c. Damage due hurricanes or tornadoes. d. Hail. e. Intentional damage. f. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance,or service. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer-Metal Roof Panels and Associated Sheet Metal Components: Firestone Building Products LLC, Carmel, IN: www.firestonebpco.com. 1. Provide all components of system supplied or specified by same manufacturer. 2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roofing System: Standing seam metal roof panels and other components,together forming a watertight assembly having the following characteristics: 1. Warranty: 15 years. 2. Provide all necessary members and connections,whether indicated in the manufacturer's standard detail drawings or not. 3. Accessories and Their Fasteners: Capable of resisting the specified design wind uplift forces and allowing for thermal movement of the roof panel system, not restricting free movement of the roof panel system resulting from thermal forces except at designed points of roof panel fixity. B. Roof System Components: In order from the top down: 1. Metal roofing panels and trim. 2.03 ROOF PANELS AND SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: In strict accordance with metal roof panel manufacturer's requirements; minimize exposed fasteners. 1. Installation Clips: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel clips for concealed securement of panels. 2. Clip Fasteners:Stainless steel. 3. Fasteners Exposed to Weather: Sealed or with sealed washers on exterior side of covering to waterproof fastener penetration;washer material compatible with screw head; minimum 3/8 inch diameter washer for structural connections;gasket portion of fasteners or washers made of EPDM or neoprene. 4. Fasteners Exposed to View: Head of color matching panel or component in which installed. B. Molded Closure Strips: Non-absorptive closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or neoprene or polyvinylchloride,or metal pre-molded to match configuration of the covering;configuration to prevent retention of water. Job No. 14LION-00-01 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install roofing, insulation,flashings,and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations,follow good roofing practices and industry standards. Comply with federal, state,and local regulations. B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation period. C. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations and instructions;start of work constitutes acceptable of project conditions and requirements. D. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty. E. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel. F. Temporary closures,which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the new roofing system,are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight condition. G. Install roofing only when surfaces are clean,dry,smooth and free of snow or ice; do not apply roofing during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. H. Protect adjacent construction, property,vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work. 1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives,sealants and coatings. 2. Particularly protect metal,glass, plastic,and painted surfaces from bitumen,adhesives, and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray. 3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by other trades. I. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer. J. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions,container labels,and Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives,sealants, primers and cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform deck. B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the substrate before commencing with roofing work. C. Verify that the substructure installation is in accordance with the approved shop drawings and roof panel manufacturer's requirements,that the fasteners are correct for the substrate,and the substrate is installed to accommodate and support the appropriate clip spacing and attachment. D. Verify that installed work of other trades that such work is complete to a point where the roofing system installation may commence. E. Verify that roof openings,curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts,vents,and other penetrations through roof substrate are complete and properly located. F. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect in writing; do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. Job No. 14LION-00-01 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.03 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install the metal roof panel system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, installation drawings, and approved shop drawings, so that it is weathertight and allows for thermal movement. B. Locate and space all fasteners in accordance with roof panel manufacturer's recommendations. For required exposed fasteners, use proper torque settings to obtain controlled uniform compression for a positive seal without rupturing the sealing washers. C. Do not place utility penetrations through the panel seams. D. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials(i.e. copper, lead,graphite,treated lumber, mortar, etc). Protect from water run-off from these materials. E. Perform field cutting of panels and related sheet metal components by means of hand or electric shears.At no time shall a hot/friction saw be used. F. Remove protective film immediately after installation. 3.04 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install flashings, including laps,splices,joints, bonding, adhesion,and attachment, as required by roof panel manufacturer's recommendations and details. B. Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing seals directly to the penetration. 1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe flashings wherever practical. 2. Where pre-molded pipe flashings are not practical, provide flashing detail as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for warranty purposes(i.e. not a sales person). B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair panels having minor damage. B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent undamaged panels. C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. D. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including adhesives, sealants,and coatings. E. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the work of this section;comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and surfaces. F. Remove leftover materials,trash,debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof panels, provide durable protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition. END OF SECTION 07 41 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 46 46- FIBER-CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Scope A. Furnish and install Nichiha Illumination Series fiber cement panels where shown on drawings or specified herin. 1.02 Related Sections A. Division 06-Wood and plastics. B. Section 13112-Steel framing and bracing. C. Section 07210-Insulation. D. Section 07915-Sealants, caulking and seals 1.03 References A. ASTM C1185,Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement Flat Sheet, Roofing and Siding,Shingles and Clapboards. B. ASTM E228,Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. C. ASTM G23,Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus(Carbon-Arc Type)with and without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials, Replaced by G152 and G153. D. ASTM330,Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls,and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM331,Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. F. ASTM E119,Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM C518,Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. H. UL-723 Standard Underwriters Laboratories Inc.for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 Compliance A. Nichiha Illumination Series fiber cement panels shall meet or exceed requirement of the following: 1. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) Evaluation Report No. ESR-1694. 2. ICC-ES Legacy Report No. 5915. 3. Canadian Construction Materials Centre(CCMC) Evaluation Report No. CCMC 13083-R. 4. Refer to applicable building code compliance reports for the uniform wind load. 1.05 Submittals A. Drawings:Submit detailed drawings showing installation details. B. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's product description, indicating material types and thicknesses, and installation details. C. Samples:Submit samples of each product type proposed for use. D. Certifications:Submit documents certifying that products meet or exceed requirements herein. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Performance requirements: Nichiha Illumination Series panels are fiber cement panel products with the following typical properties: 1. Linear Variation with Change in Moisture Content: M.D.:-0.006 in./ft., C.D.:0.003 in./ft. 2. Wet Flexural Strength:Avg. 1155.51 psi. 3. Water Tightness: No water droplets were observed on any specimen. 4. Freeze-thaw: No damage or defects were observed. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 5. Warm Water: No evidence of cracking,delamination,swelling, or other defects were observed. 6. Heat-Rain: No crazing,cracking, or other deleterious effects,surface orjoint changes were observed in any specimen. 7. Mean Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion:Avg. 3.18*10^-6 in./in. F. 8. Surface Burning: Flame Spread:0,Smoke Developed: 5. 9. Wind Load: Refer to ESR 1694 for specific design pressures. 10. Water Penetration: No water leakage was observed into wall cavity. 11. Weather Resistant: No cracking, checking,crazing,erosion, or other detrimental effects were observed. 12. Steady-State heat flux and thermal Transmission Properties Test:the test results show that Nichiha Fiber Cement Panels to have a thermal resistance of R Value of 1.23 F. 13. Fire Resistant:The walls successfully endured a 60-minute fire exposure without developing excessive unexposed surface temperature or allowing flaming on the unexposed side of the assembly. 1.07 Warranty A. Provide manufacturer's 50-year warranty against manufactured defects in fiber cement panels B. Provide manufacturer's 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in panel finish C. Warranty provides for the original purchaser.See warranty for detailed information on terms,conditions and limitations. PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer A. Manufacturer: Nichiha Corporation, 18-19 Nishiki 2-chome Naka-ku, Nagoya,Aichi 460-8610,Japan. B. US Sales Office: Nichiha USA, Inc., 6659 Peachtree Industrial Blvd.,Suite AA, Norcross,GA 30092,Toll free: 1.866.424.4421, Office:770.805.9466, Fax:770.805.9467,www.NICHIHA.com 2.02 Materials A. Nichiha fiber cement Illumination Series panels are based on autoclaved,wood fiber reinforced cement panels. Wood fiber bundles are prepared in accordance with Nichiha specifications,are mixed with Portland cement and silica,etc. B. The panels are nominally 1.5 feet in height and 6 feet in length;actually 455mm in height and 1,818mm in length. C. The panel's surface is pre-finished and machine applied. D. The panels are profiled along all four edges,such that both horizontal and vertical joints between the installed panels are shipped lapped. E. A factory-applied sealant is applied to panel edges,such that all joints will contain a factory sealant. 2.03 Product Description A. Illumination Series 1. Profile colors:Custom color. 2. Accessories: Corners for each profile color. 3. Dimensions: Nominal-18" (h)x 6' (I)x 5/8" (t);Actual-455mm (h)x 1,818mm (I)x 16mm (t). 4. Weight:37.9 Ibs. per panel. 5. Coverage:9 sq.ft. per panel. 6. Factory sealed on six[6] sides. 2.04 Accessories and Installation Components A. Always use Nichiha accessories for complete and proper installation,whether or not specifically shown on installation drawings. B. Additional accessories for installation and designer aesthetics are available.Consult catalog or contact Nichiha USA Inc.,for further details. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 EXECUTION 3.01 Handling A. Panels must be stored flat and kept dry before installation.A waterproof cover over panels and accessories should be used at all times prior to installation. B. If panels are exposed to water or water vapor prior to installation,allow to completely dry before installing. Failure to do so may result in shrinkage at ship lap joints, and such action may void warranty. C. Nichiha panels MUST be carried on edge. Do not carry or lift panels flat. Improper handling material cause cracking or panel damage. Nichiha is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling. D. Direct contact between the panels and the ground should be avoided at all times. It is necessary to keep panels clean during installation process. 3.02 Job Conditions A. Fiber cement panels can be installed over braced wood,steel studs and sheathing including; plywood, OSB, plastic foam or fiberboard sheathing. Fiber cement panels can also be installed over Structural Insulated Panels (SIP's),Concrete Masonry Units(CMU's),and Concrete Block Structures(CBS's)with furring strips,and Pre-Engineered Metal Construction. B. Allowable stud spacing:See manufacturer's installation instructions for details. C. A weather resistive barrier is required when installing fiber cement panels. Use an approved weather resistive barrier[WRB] as defined by the 2012 IRC. Refer to local building codes Nichiha is not responsible for water infiltration. D. Appropriate metal flashing should be used to prevent moisture penetration around all doors windows,wall bottoms, material transitions and penetrations. Please refer to local building codes for best practices. 3.03 Surface Conditions A. Examine site to ensure substrate conditions are within specification for proper installation. B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.04 Cutting A. Always cut Nichiha Illumination Series panels outside or in a well ventilated area. Do not cut the products in an enclosed area. B. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator,whenever cutting,drilling, sawing,sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer MSDS for more information. C. Use a dust-reducing circular saw with a diamond-tipped or carbide-tipped blade,for general cuttings. Recommended circular saw: Makita 7-1/4" Circular Saw with Dust Collector(#5057KB). Recommended blade: Tenryu Board-Pro Plus PCD Blade(#BP-18505).Shears(electric or pneumatic)orjig saw can be used for complicated cuttings,such as service openings, curves, radii and scrollwork. D. Nichiha Fiber Cement Products-Illumination Series Panels-Architectural Specification 4 Silica Dust Warning: NICHIHA products may contain some amounts of crystalline silica [a.k.a. sand,silicon dioxide],which is a naturally occurring mineral.The amount will vary from product to product. Inhalation of crystalline silica into the lungs and repeated exposure to silica can cause health disorders,such as silicosis, lung cancer,or death depending upon various factors.To be conservative, Nichiha recommends that whenever cutting, sawing, sanding,sniping or abrading the product, users observe the Safety Instructions above. For further information or questions, please consult the MSDS,your employer,or visit www.osha.gov/SLTC/silicacrystalline/index.html <http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/silicacrystalline/index.html>and www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/silica.The MSDS for Nichiha products are available at www.nichiha.com,at your local Nichiha dealer or through Nichiha directly at 1.866.424.4421. FAILURE TO ADHERE TO OUR WARNINGS, MSDS,AND OTHER INSTRUCTION MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.05 Fastening A. Corrosion resistant fasteners,such as hot-dipped galvanized nails and screws that are appropriate to local building codes and practices must be used.Stainless Steel fasteners are highly recommended in high humidity and high-moisture regions. Nichiha is not liable for corrosion resistance of fasteners. Do not use aluminum fasteners,staples,clipped head nails or fasteners that are not rated or designed for intended use.See manufacturer's detailed instructions for appropriate fasteners for construction method used. 3.06 Installation A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the manufacturer and all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. Review all manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions and other applicable documents before installation. 1. Nichiha panels can be installed on many types of construction methods, review individual installation details for specifics for each type of construction method. Nichiha fiber cement panels can be installed over Wood and Metal Stud Construction,Structural Insulated Panels(SIP's), Concrete Masonry Units(CMU's), Concrete Block Structures(CBS's), and Pre-Engineered Metal Construction. Install Nichiha panels in accordance with the manufacturer's detailed installation instruction for the construction method used. 2. Please consult with your local dealer or Nichiha Technical Department before installing any Nichiha fiber cement product on a building 45 feet or higher or three [3] stories or higher.Special installation conditions may be required. 3.07 Finishing and Maintenance A. Review brick,stone and block Maintenance, Repair and Cleaning Guidelines for detailed care Instructions. END OF SECTION 07 46 46 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 62 00- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 8100: Masonry Assemblies: Through-wall flashings in masonry. B. Section 07 46 46-Fiber Cement Siding. C. Section 07 71 23-Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. D. Section 07 7100-Roof Specialties: Preformed flashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2603-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002. B. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2011. C. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process;2011. D. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. E. ASTM B209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. F. ASTM D226-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. G. ASTM D4586/D4586M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free; 2007(Reapproved 2012)e1. H. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual;Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-Division 1-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Samples:Submit two samples 2x2 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending,and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M,with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. 1. Where in contact with preservative treated lumber use G180 zinc coating. B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M,with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal,shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. PVDF(Polyvinylidene Fluoride)Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish,AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M);0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer coating. 1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System,AAMA 2603; baked enamel finish system; color as selected. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel . B. Underlayment: ASTM D226,organic roofing felt,Type I ("No. 15"). C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. D. Primer: Zinc chromate type. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586,Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape,accurate in size, square,and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in (ongest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams,except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs;seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Through-Wall Flashing in Masonry: Prefinished galvanized steel. B. Coping, Cap, Parapet,Sill and Ledge Flashings: As specified in Section 07 71 00-Roof Specialties. C. Roofing Penetration Flashings,for Pipes,Structural Steel, and Equipment Supports:Galvanized Steel. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 71 00- ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings,fascias,gravel stops,and vents. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-Division 1-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances,and other affected work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Copings and Gravel Stops: 1. Architectural Products Co; Product Snap-tight Coping: www.archprod.com. 2. Viridian Systems; product; PermaSnap Coping: www.wph.com. 3. Metal-Era Inc; Product Perma-tite: www.metalera.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Louvered Vents: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered,welded corners;concealed fasteners. 1. Configuration: Fascia,cant,and edge securement for roof inembrane; 2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code. B. Copings: Formed galvanized steel, 24 gage,shaped as indicated including spring cleats spaced as recomended by manufacturer. Include cover plates to conceal and weather seal joints and attachment flanges. 1. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating(High Performance). 2. Color:As selected. C. Attic Vents: Dome type;aluminum,.03 inch thick, color coated,formed to permit installation with shingle roofing and shed water. Fabricate with 17 sq in per linear foot minimum free area of ventilation. 1. Finish: Mill finish. 2.03 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish,AAMA 2604; multiple coat,thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system;color as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof inembrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 7100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base flashings. END OF SECTION 07 71 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 71 23 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts. B. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. B. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Field painting of inetal surfaces. C. Section 23 83 13-Radiant-Heating Cables: Electric heating cable in gutters. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611-Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum;American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 2604-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. C. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. D. ASTM A653/A653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process;2011. E. ASTM A666-Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. F. ASTM B32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. G. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. H. ASTM B209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. I. ASTM B370-Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2012. J. ASTM D2665-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2012. K. ASTM D4479/D4479M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings-Asbestos-Free; 2007(Reapproved 2012)e1. L. CDA A4050-Copper in Architecture-Handbook;Copper Development Association, Inc.; current edition. M. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual;Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years. B. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations,jointing methods,fastening methods, locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 10 inch long illustrating component design,finish, color, and configuration. Job No. 14LION-00-01 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending,or abrasion,and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration,staining, or damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com. 2. Cheney Flashing Company: www.cheneyflashing.com. 3. SAF: www.saf.com. 4. W.P. Hickman company: www.wph.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC): ASTM D2665,virgin vinyl,SDR 35 pipe and fittings, high impact type,colorfast; color. B. Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209(ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick. 1. Finish: Plain,shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: CDA rectangular style profile. B. Connectors: Furnish required connector pieces for PVC(polyvinyl chloride)components. C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with CDA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel,with soft neoprene washers. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days,with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. B. Splash Pads: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC);size and profiles indicated: C. Downspout Boots: Cast iron. 1. Manufacturer: Jay R.Smith,www.jrsmith.com. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square,true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths,free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of inetal. E. Tin edges of copper sheet to be soldered. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. F. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories;seal watertight. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHING A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42; integrally colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. Job No. 14LION-00-01 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install gutters,downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Sheet Metal:Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Slope gutters, 1 percent minimum. D. Connect downspouts to downspout boots at 6" inches above grade. Grout connection watertight. E. Set splash pads under downspouts. END OF SECTION 07 71 23 Job No. 14LION-00-01 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 72 00- ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 54 00-Thermo Plastic Mebrane Roofing. B. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet metal. C. Section 07 7100-Roof Specialties: Other manufactured roof items. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-Division 1-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports,submit detailed layout developed for this project,with design calculations for loadings and spacings. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCHES,MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION A. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions indicated on the drawings. B. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage,0.0747 inch thick. 2. Finish: Factory prime paint. 3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb. 4. Curb Height: As indicated on drawings. C. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 1. Capable of supporting 60 psf live load. 2. Material: Galvanized steel;outer cover 14 gage,0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage,0.03 inch thick. 3. Finish: Factory prime paint. 4. Insulation: 2 inches rigid fiberboard. 5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter. D. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that automatically opens upon release of latch;capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release. 4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. S. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07 72 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 07 84 00- FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies,whether indicated on drawings or not,and other openings indicated. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 814-Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2006. B. UL(FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITfALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration,fire rating of the penetrated assembly,and firestopping test or design number. C. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with methodsindicated. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping:Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating of 1 and that meets all other specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust,grease, oil, loose material,or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. C. Install labelling required by code. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION 07 84 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors. E. Accessories, including glazing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100-Door Hardware. B. Section 08 80 00-Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1-American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. B. ANSI A250.3-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames;2007(R2011). C. ANSI A250.8-SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. D. ANSI A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998(R2011). E. ASTM A653/A653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process;2011. F. BHMA A156.115-Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. G. DHI A115 Series-Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Nardware Institute; 2000(ANSI/DHI A115 Series).[] H. NAAMM HMMA 840-Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;2007. I. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. J. UL 10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 1784-Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. C. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations,anchorage and fastening methods,and finishes. D. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening,showing elevations,glazing,frame profiles,and identifying location of different finishes, if any. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging;avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries,or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft[�:www.steelcraft.com. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 3. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 4. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side;sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115,with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 6. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 7. Finish: Factory primed,for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement,comply with all the specified requirements for each type;for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors;where two requirements conflict,comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior poors : 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2,seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M,with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. B. Interior poors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2,seamless. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Interior poors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1,full flush. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule,tested in accordance with UL 10C("positive pressure"). a. Rate of Temperature Rise Across Door Thickness Stair Enclosure Doors: 250 F degrees. 3. Core: Mineral fiberboard. D. Interior Smoke and Draft Control Doors : Same construction as fire-rated doors with indicated fire rating, plus: 1. Maximum Air Leakage: 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure,when tested in accordance with UL 1784 at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Gasketing: Provide additional gasketing or edge sealing if necessary to achieve leakage limit. 3. Label: UL"S" label. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door,except: a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in AN51 A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage 2. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,flush with top. B. Exterior poor Frames: [].Thermally broken frame. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M,with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Finish: Factory primed,for field finishing. 3. Weatherstripping: Separate,see Section 08 7100. C. Interior poor Frames: Knock-down type. 1. Finish: Completely factory finished. D. Interior poor Frames, Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 2. Finish: Factory primed,for field finishing. 3. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00,factory installed. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber,fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory-or shop-assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. factory Finish: Complying with ANSI A 250.3, manufacturer's standard coating of color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. G. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 14 16- FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors;flush and flush glazed configuration;fire rated and non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 20 00-Finish Carpentry. B. Section 08 11 13-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Frames for wood doors. C. Section 08 7100- Door Hardware. D. Section 08 80 00-Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC(QSI)-Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated;Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed.,Version 2.0. B. ICC(IBC)-International Building Code; 2012. C. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. D. UL(BMD)-Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. E. UL 106-Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 1784-Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction;veneer species,type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations,sizes,types,swings, undercuts required,special beveling,special blocking for hardware,factory machining criteria. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Warranty,executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior poors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Provide warranty fo the following term: 1. Exterior poors: Five(5)years. 2. Interior poors: Life of installation. D. Include coverage for delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials,and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior poors(unit entry doors): 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction. 1. 20 minute rated tested per UL 10-C without the hose stream test. 2. Assembly shall meet the requirements for a smoke and draft control door assembly tested in accordance with UL 1784. 3. Core: Mineral. 4. Maple veneer facing with factory transparent finish. S. Frames: Knock-down steel frames as specified in Section 08 11 13-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C. Interior poors(within units): 1-3/8 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction. 1. Provide hollow core doors at all locations. 2. Pre-hung doors complete with hinges, matching jambs and stops,factory machined. 3. Bi-Fold doors complete with hinges, mounting hardware and pulls. a. Provide half-jambs and casing at bi-fold doors. 4. Maple veneer facing with factory applied transparent finish. D. Interior poors(common and corridor doors): 1-3/4 inches thick,flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Frames:See section 08 11 13-Steel Doors and Frames. 3. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL labeled without any visible seals when door is closed. 4. Smoke and Draft Control Doors : In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures;with "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edge sealing. 5. Maple veneer facing with factory transparent finish. 2.02 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core(PC), plies and faces as indicated above. B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core,Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above;with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. C. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above. 2.03 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species as specified above,veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair;set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Facing Adhesive: Type I-waterproof. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style screws. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHING-WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard: 1. Transparent Finish: TR-6,transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Premium quality. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). D. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. F. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,corner to corner,over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,top to bottom,over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,edge to edge,over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.05 SCHEDULE-See Drawings END OF SECTION 08 14 16 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 16 13 - FIBERGLASS DOORS PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Door and Frame Assemblies: Factory-fabricated, prepared and machined for hardware. 1. Mechanical Durability: Tested to ANSI A250.4 Level A(1,000,000 cycles), minimum;tested with hardware and fasteners intended for use on project. 2. Screw-Holding Capacity: Tested to 900 psi, minimum. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Flammability: Self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with ASTM D635. 5. Clearance Between Door and Frame: 1/8 inch, maximum. 6. Clearance Between Bottom of Door and Finished Floor: 3/4 inch, maximum; not less than 1/4 inch clearance to threshold. 1.02 COMPONENTS A. Doors: Through-color gel coating on fiberglass reinforced polyester resin construction with reinforced core. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, overall. 2. Subframe and Reinforcements: Fiberglass pultrusions or polymer foam; no metal or wood. 3. Waterproof Integrity: All edges, cut-outs, and hardware preparations factory fabricated of fiberglass reinforced plastic; provide cut-outs with joints sealed independently of glazing or louver inserts or trim. 4. Hardware Preparations: Factory reinforce, machine, and prepare for all hardware including field installed items; provide solid blocking for each hardware item; make field cutting, drilling or tapping unnecessary; obtain manufacturer's templates for hardware preparations. 5. Gel Coating: Ultraviolet stabilized polyester, marine grade NPG-isophthalic,with slightly textured semi-gloss final finish. 6. Gel Coating Thickness: Minimum 15 mils wet, plus/minus 3 mils. B. Frames: Profiles and dimensions as indicated on drawings;same type and construction used in mechanical durability test for doors. 1. Corner Joints: Mitered with concealed corner blocks or angles of same material as frame;fiberglass and aluminum joined with screws;steel and stainless steel spot welded;sealed watertight with silicone sealant. 2. At hardware cut-outs provide continuous backing or mortar guards of same material as frame,sealed watertight. 3. Frame Anchors: Stainless steel,Type 304; provide 3 anchors in each jamb for heights up to 84 inches with one additional anchor for each additional 24 inches in height. C. Hinge and Hardware Fasteners: Stainless steel,Type 304;wood screws. END OF SECTION 08 16 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIBERGLASS DOORS 08 16 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIBERGLASS DOORS 08 16 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 3100-ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access door and frame units,fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall,and ceiling locations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ITS(DIR)-Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. B. UL(FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated access doors. 1. Provide access doors of fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. B. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS(Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANELS A. All Units: Factory fabricated,fully assembled units with cornerjoints welded,filled, and ground flush;square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 2.02 ACCESS DOOR UNITS-WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel. 1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel. 2. Door panels:0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet. 3. Size:As required. 4. Hardware: a. Hinge: Concealed,constant force closure spring type. b. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch. 5. Galvanized, hot dipped finish. 6. Prime coat with baked on primer. B. Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Walls: 1. Barco Model FR. 2. Cesco Model FB. 3. J.L. Industries Model FD. 4. Karp Associates Model KRP-150 FR. 5. Milcor Incorporated Model FR. 6. Nystrom Model FRT. 7. Willaims Brothers Model WB-FR. C. Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings: 1. In Gypsum Board Ceiling: Flush access door and frame painted to match ceiling finish. a. Model KRP-150FR manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc. b. Model FW-5050DW manufactured by Acudor Products, Inc. c. Model FD Series manufactured by JL Industries. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 3100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION 08 3100 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ACCE55 DOORS AND PANELS 08 3100-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 43 13 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront,with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. D. Door hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. B. Section 08 7100-Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. C. Section 08 80 00-Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10-Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site;American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 501.2- Field Check of Metal Storefronts,Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009(part of AAMA 501). C. AAMA 611-Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum;American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. D. ASCE 7-Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures;American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011. E. ASTM 6221-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles,and Tubes; 2013. F. ASTM B221M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes �Metric]; 2013. G. ASTM E283-Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004(Reapproved 2012). H. ASTM E330-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002(Reapproved 2010). I. ASTM E331-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors,and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000(Reapproved 2009). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.05 Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads:Comply with requirements of IBC code. 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,with full recovery of glazing materials. B. Movement:Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Water Leakage: None,when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf/sq ft. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel,and migrating moisture occurring within system. E. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components,anchorages, and other building elements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions,framed opening requirements and tolerances,affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, dimensional limitations. E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at[]Wisconsin. B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer; Product 451T. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. EFCO Corporation; Product 403T 2. Tubelite, Inc.; Product T14000 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated,factory finished aluminum framing members with infill,and related flashings,anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Front-set. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 8 Ibf/sq ft. 4. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf. 5. Finish: Class 1 clear anodized. 6. Finish Color: Clear. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set,when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Movement:Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. 4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints,condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 5. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components,anchorages, and other building elements. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections,thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. 3. Cross-Section: 2x4 inch nominal dimension. B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221(ASTM 6221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Glass:As specified in Section 08 80 00. D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture,and air infiltration requirements. 2.05 FINISHES A. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 2.06 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished chrome. 2. Include for each door weatherstripping,sill sweep strip,threshold, butt hinges, push handle, pull handle, narrow stile handle latch,and closer. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly,yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. H. Finishing:Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions,tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level,free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. K. Install hardware using templates provided. L. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00-Quality Requirements,for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. Job No. 14LION-00-01 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water,applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION 08 43 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 54 00- COMPOSITE WINDOWS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single Hung windows. 2. Picture windows. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITfALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and installation guides. B. Sustainable Building Submittals: 1. Energy Performance: a. Provide NFRC 100 Certified performance values meeting or exceeding values specified in Performance Criteria Article. 2. Recycled Content. a. Provide third party certified values in percent by weight of recycled content per ISO 140215tandard for each product specified. b. Provide statement indicating total cost for each product containing recycled content. 3. Regional Materials. a. Provide window manufacturer's Product Data for regional materials within [500] miles of project location, indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest,or recovery for each raw material. b. Provide statement indicating cost for each product containing regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional material. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate direction of operable parts,typical jamb, head and sill conditions,and special mullion reinforcement details. D. Color Samples: Selection and verification samples, including the following: 1. Hardware: Sample indicating typical finish on hardware. 2. Exterior: Samples of exterior colors. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Performance Data: Manufacturer's published performance data for specified products. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty documents specified herein. B. Owner's Manual: Bound manual clearly identified with project name, location, and completion date. Identify type and size of units installed. Provide recommendations for periodic inspections, care,and maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary repair. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating windows that meet or exceed Performance Criteria indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels,test reports, and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. C. Code and Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: D. Certifications: 1. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). Products shall be certified and labeled for U-Factor,Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SHGC), and Visible Transmittance per NFRC 100 and 200 Procedures. Unique glass types that are special ordered may not apply,check with Manufacturer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 54 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA). Products shall be certified and labeled per WDMA Hallmark Certification Program to the AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 industry standard. 3. Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) indicating compliance with ASTM E2190. 4. Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with certification label of Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance(IGMA) indicating compliance with ASTM E2190 and (IGMAC) indicating compliance with CGSB 12.8. E. Pre-Installation Meetings: Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section-Project Management and Coordination. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. D. Store materials and accessories off ground, under cover,and protected from weather and construction activities. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimension of openings by field measurement before fabrication. Record measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. B. Install units per manufacturer's safety and weather recommendations. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project Warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit,for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard limited warranty document. Manufacturer's limited warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Andersen Corporation a. 100 4th Ave. N. b. Bayport, MN 55003-1096. c. Phone: (800) 299-9029. d. Fax: (800)752-9230. e. E-mail: technicalsupport@andersenwindows.com f. www.andersenwindows.com g. Local Contact: Tom Stapelfeldt,Weather-Tek Design Center, Inc., Brookfield,WI 2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Performance Requirements: Provide products/systems that have been manufactured,fabricated,and installed to the following performance criteria: 1. Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2. U-Factor(NFRC 100):0.29 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SHGC) (NFRC 200): 0.28 4. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class(OITC) (ASTM E90): 22 5. Sound Transmission Class(STC) (ASTM E90): 26 Job No. 14LION-00-01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 54 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Proprietary Product/Systems: 1. Andersen° 100 Series Single Hung Windows. 2. Andersen° 100 Series Picture Windows. 3. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Frame and Sash: Fabricated from Fibrex°composite material, in the following color: 1. Color: White. 2. Color: Terratone�. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Venting Casement/Awning Hardware: 1. Hardened steel operator arm stamped with a gear ring. Set arm gear between nylon bushing and nylon spacer. Encased drive shaft and worm gear assemblies in zinc die cast base and removable polycarbonate cover. 2. Hinges: Stainless steel and heavy gauge steel arms. Stainless steel reinforcing insert in low friction shoe for casement units. 3. Operator Handle and Covers: a. Folding handle with powder coated painted finish and polycarbonate operator cover with integral color in the following finish. 1) White. 4. Lock Handle and Bezel: Polycarbonate following integral color: a. White. 5. Sash Locks: Single actuation lock concealed by trim stops. Galvanized steel and engineered polymer components. 2.06 GLAZING A. General: Insulating glass units certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council as conforming to the requirements of IGCC. Provide dual sealed units consisting of polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Provide metal spacers with bent or soldered corners. B. General: Insulating glass units certified through the Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance of Canada (IGMAC) conforming to the requirements of Canadian General Standards Board CAN/CGSB 12.8. Provide dual sealed units consisting of polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Provide metal spacers with bent or soldered corners. C. Dual-Pane Insulating Glass Units: 1. Glass: Insulating glass units consisting of 2 lites of clear annealed glass conforming to ASTM C1036,Type 1, Class 1,q3. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Insect Screens: Provide venting sash with an insect screen, including attachment hardware. 1. Frames: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) rolled aluminum frame with chromate conversion coating. Provide matching corner locks and latch retainers. a. Insect Screen Cloth: Fiberglass mesh,gunmetal finish. b. Frame Finish: High-bake polyester finish in white. 2. TruScene° Insect Screen: Provide venting sash with an insect screen, including attachment hardware. a. Frames: 0.024(0.61 mm) inch rolled aluminum Frame Finish: b. High-bake polyester finish in the following color: c. White. Job No. 14LION-00-01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 54 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of window manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of units, including the following: 1. Concrete surfaces are dry and free of excess mortar, rocks,sand,and other construction debris. 2. Masonry openings are square and dimensions are correct. 3. Rough openings are square and dimensions are correct. 4. Sill plates are level. 5. Wood frame walls are dry,clean,sound,and well nailed or glued,free of voids and without offsets at joints. 6. Nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in openings and within 3 inches(75 mm)of rough opening. B. Do not proceed with installation of units until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.03 I NSTALLATI ON A. General: 1. Remove unit components, parts, accessories, and installation guides from carton. 2. Inspect unit components and verify that components are not damaged and that parts are included before disposing of carton. 3. Shop-assemble multiple units before installation per manufacturer's installation guides. 4. Field-assemble multiple units before installation per manufacturer's installation guides. B. Interface With Other Work: 1. Perform installation per Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install units plumb, level,square,true to line,without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. Install drip cap at head of single units and joined assemblies. 3. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 4. Install insulation in shim space around unit perimeter to maintain continuity of building insulation. Do not overfill. S. Hold back exterior siding or other finish materials from edge of unit to allow for expansion and contraction and installation of proper joint sealant with backing materials. Seal perimeter of unit after exterior finish is applied per requirements of Section 079200-Joint Sealants. 6. Finish interior units per requirements specified in related sections. Refer to,and comply with, additional requirements in manufacturer's installation guides. 7. Install optional hardware and unit accessories after cleaning. C. Site Tolerances: 1. Adjust operation, insect screens, hardware,and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. 3.04 Field Testing A. General: If applicable,test units per with the following procedures: 1. Inspect units and verify installation per Manufacturer's instructions. 2. For products installed less than 6 months,comply with AAMA 502-08 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors, Procedure B. 3. For products installed longer than 6 months,comply with AAMA 511-08:Voluntary Guideline for Forensic Water Penetration Testing of Fenestration Products. If test indicates that field testing of units is necessary, test product as indicated in paragraph 1 above. 4. Do not proceed with installation of additional units until unacceptable conditions are corrected. Job No. 14LION-00-01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 54 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean units using cleaning material and methods specifically recommended by window manufacturer. B. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials, dirt,and other substances. C. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. D. Protect unit surfaces from masonry cleaning solution that could damage insulation glass panels or hardware. E. Remove debris from work site and properly dispose of debris. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on site. END OF SECTION 08 54 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 54 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS 08 54 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 71 00- DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors. B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. D. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. E. Thresholds. F. Weatherstripping,seals and door gaskets. G. Knox Box at main building entrance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 14 16-Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 12 00 - Aluminum Doors and Frames. D. Section 08 43 13-Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders; installation of cylinders. E. Section 10 14 24-Plastic Signage. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1-American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. B. DHI A115 Series-Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000. C. DHI A115W Series-Specifications for Wood Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000. D. DHI (LOCS)- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute;2004. E. DHI WDHS.3- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996. F. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. G. UL(BMD)-Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture,fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. 1.05 SUBMITI'ALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware,schedules,and catalog cuts. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware. Job No. 14LION-00-01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. Bommer Industries, Inc:www.bommer.com. 2. Hager Companies:www.hagerco.com. 3. Stanley Hardware:www.stanleyworks.com. B. Lock and Latch Sets: 1. Schlage:www.schlage.com. C. Push/Pulls: 1. Hiawatha, Inc:www.hiawathainc.com. 2. Ives. 3. Rockwood. D. Cylindrical Locksets: 1. Schlage:www.schlage.com. E. Flush Bolts: 1. Hager. 2. Rockwood. 3. Ives. F. Electrified Locksets: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin,Sargent,or Yale:www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Precision. 3. Adams Rite. 4. Von Duprin. G. Magnetic Locks: 1. Assa Abloy Securitron:www.assaabloydss.com. H. Electric Strikes: 1. Assa Abloy Folger Adam EDC, HES,or Securitron:www.assaabloydss.com. I. Exit Devices: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin,Sargent,or Yale:www.assaabloydss.com. J. Closers: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Norton, Rixson,Sargent,Yale,or LCN:www.assaabloydss.com. 2. LCN:www.lcnclosers.com. 3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware:www.yalelocks.com. K. Spring Closers: 1. Stanley. Job No. 14LION-00-01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Bommer. L. Automatic Door Bottoms: 1. Reese Enterprises. 2. Hager. 3. Pemko. M. Coordinators: 1. Glynn-Johnson. 2. Ives. 3. Rockwood. N. Wall and Floor Stops/Holders: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney:www.assaabloydss.com. 0. Manual Bolts: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney:www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies:www.hagerco.com. P. Gasketing,Thresholds and Sweeps: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney:www.assaabloydss.com. 2. National Guard Products, Inc:www.ngpinc.com. 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co:www.pemko.com. 4. Zero International, Inc:www.zerointernational.com. 5. Hager. 6. Reese. Q. Stops: 1. Taymor. 2. Hager. 3. Ives. 4. Rockwood. R. Bifolding Door Hardware: 1. Stanley Hardware:www.stanleyworks.com. 2. Lawrence Brothers. S. Protection Plates: 1. Hager Companies:www.hagerco.com. 2. Hiawatha, Inc:www.hiawathainc.com. 3. Ives. 4. Rockwood. T. Viewers: 1. Ives. U. Latch Protectors: 1. Don-Jo. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal,state, and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1,American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 4. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. S. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors(Indicated as"S"on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. Job No. 14LION-00-01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 6. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: All hardware to have Brushed Chrome finish. 2.03 KEYING A. Door Locks: Grand master keyed. Coordinate keying system with Owners requirements. Include construction keying. B. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. 5 master keys. Deliver directly to Owner. 2. 3 grand master keys. Deliver directly to Owner. 3. 6 construction keys. 4. 2 keys for each cylinder. 2.04 KEY CABINET A. Provide MMF key cabinet with capacity to hold all the keys for the project with 50%excess capacity. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 SCHEDULE Note:This hardware schedule is general-some door types listed may be used in project. A. General Requirements-All Rated Doors: 1. Gasketing:Smoke gaskets or intumescent gaskets as required to achieve rating. 2. Listed closer and latch. 3. All hardware as required to achieve required fire label. B. Interior Unit Doors: 1. Hinges(1 1/2 pair):3 1/2 x 3 1/2 2. Latch:Schlage F series. a. Privacy latch on bedroom, bathrooms, dens and studies. b. Passage latch on all other doors. Job No. 14LION-00-01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Unit Entry Door(Corridor): 1. Hinges(1 1/2 pair):4 1/2 x 4 1/2 2. Latch:Schlage AL series. 3. Deadbolt:Schlage B series. 4. Closer: LCN 1000 series. 5. Automatic Door Bottom: Reese 320D-36. (Verify Color) 6. Gasketing:Smoke Gasket. 7. Viewer @ 60"a.f.f. 8. Additional Viewer @ 43" a.f.f. at Type A Accessible Units. D. Unit Exterior Storage/HVAC Closet Door: 1. Hinges: Door suppliers standard. 2. Latch:Schlage F series storeroom latch. F. Toilet Room Door(Leasing Office): 1. Hinges(1 1/2 pair):4 1/2 x 4 1/2 BB 2. Latch:Schlage AL series privacy latch. 3. Closer: LCN 1000 series. 4. Kick Plate: Hager 190s. G. Fire Sprinkler poor: 1. Hinges(1 1/2 pair):4 1/2 x 4 1/2 2. Latch:Schlage AL series storeroom latch. 3. Closer: Spring hinge closer. K. All Other Common Doors: 1. Hinges:4 1/2 x 4 1/2 BB 2. Latch:Schlage AL series. 3. Closer: LCN 1000 series. (See Door Schedule for doors requiring closers.) END OF SECTION 08 71 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 80 00- GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glazing in aluminum framed storefront units, interior doors and borrowed lites. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 43 13-Aluminum-Framed Storefronts. B. Section 08 51 13-Aluminum Windows.Glazed windows. C. Section 08 83 00-Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201-Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C864-Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,Setting Blocks,and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). C. ASTM C920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. D. ASTM C1036-Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. E. ASTM C1048-Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. F. ASTM C1193-Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. G. ASTM E1300-Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2012a. H. ASTM E2190-Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. I. GANA(GM)-GANA Glazing Manual;Glass Association of North America;2009. J. GANA(SM)-GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical,functional,and environmental characteristics, limitations,special application requirements. Identify available colors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five(5)year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GLAZING 08 80 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES A. Type IG-1-Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, low-E. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Total Thickness: 1 inch. B. Type IG-3-Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing: 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in exterior doors. b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors. c. Other locations required by applicable federal,state,and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Same as Type IG-1 except use fully tempered float glass for both outboard and inboard lites. C. Type S-2-Fire-Rated Safety Glazing: 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in fire doors. b. Sidelights, borrow lites,and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire rating. c. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Fire Rating:As indicated on the drawings. 3. Type: Glass-ceramic safety glazing. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. D. Type S-3-Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated. 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in interior doors,except fire doors. b. Sliding glass doors. c. Shower and bathtub enclosures and doors. d. Glazed sidelights to interior doors,except in fire-rated walls and partitions. e. Other locations required by applicable federal,state,and local codes and regulations. f. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2006 IBC code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass,whichever is less,with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. Zeledyne:www.versaluxglass.com. 2. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. 3. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. 5. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 6. Visteon Glass Systems:www.visteon.com/floatglass. 7. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GLAZING 08 80 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036,Type I,transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated;for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Glass-Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL-or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II with or without the use of a surface-applied film. 1. 20-Minute Fire Doors: Hose stream test is not required. D. Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed. E. Safety Glass: Clear;fully tempered with horizontal tempering. 1. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2. Where glazing is to be installed in fire-rated partition, provide glazing that is also fire-protection rated in accordance with applicable code. 3. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code. F. Low E Glass: Float type, heat strengthened,clear. 1. Coating on inner surface. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant(Type 1): Single component;ASTM C 920,Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A;Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. B. Silicone Sealant(Type 2): Single component; neutral curing;capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining;ASTM C 920,Type 5,Grade N5, Class 25, Uses M,A,and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25;clear color. 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene,50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness,ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;ASTM C864 Option I; black color. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean,free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement,weeps are clear,and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GLAZING 08 80 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION-EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD(GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION-EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD(PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. E. Install removable stops,with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/16 inch below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line. F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with butyl type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of silicone type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing,to uniform line,flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.05 INSTALLATION-EXTERIOR WET METHOD(SEALANT AND SEALANT) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with butyl type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. D. Apply sealant to uniform line,flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.06 INSTALLATION-INTERIOR WET METHOD(COMPOUND AND COMPOUND) A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line. B. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers'clips. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to straight line. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GLAZING 08 80 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.08 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 GLAZING 08 80 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 GLAZING 08 80 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 08 83 00- MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.03 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mirrors: 1. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com. 2. PPG Industries. 3. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass-General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass : Clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating,arrised edges, 6 mm thick minimum. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel J-profile channels. B. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level,free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction. END OF SECTION 08 83 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 MIRRORS 08 83 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 MIRRORS 08 83 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal channel framing. C. Gypsum wallboard. D. Joint treatment and accessories. E. Textured finish system. F. Commercial Spaces: Rock exterior and demising walls. Tape and finish all joints and fasteners. No texture or paint. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry:Wood blocking product and execution requirements. B. Section 06 10 54-Wood Blocking and Curbing:Wood blocking for support of wall-mounted equipment. C. Section 07 2100-Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. D. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2012. B. ASTM C840-Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;2011. C. ASTM C1002-Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007 (Reapproved 2013). D. ASTM C1047-Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a. E. ASTM C1278/C1278M-Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2007a (Reapproved 2011). F. ASTM C1396/C1396M-Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2013. G. ASTM C1658/C1658M-Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2012. H. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;Gypsum Association; 2013. I. GA-600-Fire Resistance Design Manual;Gypsum Association; 2012. J. UL(FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;current edition. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840.Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the particular assembly. 2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers-Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Dietrich Metal Framing; Product RCSD:www.dietrichindustries.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass-mat-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M,suitable for paint finish,of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M,suitable for paint finish,of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 4. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is installed before the building is enclosed from the weather. Mold resistant board shall be of one of the types listed below. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced board. b. Glass-Mat Faced board. c. Mold-Resistant Unfaced board. S. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch. c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 7. Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Gypsum Wallboard. d. Lafarge North America Inc; firecheck Type X and Type C. e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard. f. Temple-Inland Inc; Gypsumboard. g. USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. 8. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture& Mold Resistant Gypsum Board. c. Lafarge North America Inc; Mold Defense Drywall. d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Mold Curb Gypsum Wallboard. f. Temple-Inland Inc; ComfortGuard. g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. 9. Glass-Mat-Faced Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus. 10. Unfaced Products: a. USG Corporation; Fiberock Aqua-Tough Interior Panels. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00. B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05. C. Finishing Accessories:ASTM C1047,galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide,creased paper tape for joints and corners. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3. Chemical hardening type compound. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness,to Wood Members,and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002;self-piercing tapping type;cadmium-plated for exterior locations. F. Screws: ASTM C1002;self-piercing tapping type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center or as indicated by Isited system. Locate joints over framing members. B. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions,and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 2. In non-fire-rated construction,seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe,ducts,and rough-in boxes. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216,and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction,with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception:Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board . E. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies,comply with requirements of listing authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment. 2. Double-Layer Application: Install base layer using screws or nails. Install face layer using screws. F. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.06 JOINTTREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840,as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish. 3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings,whether or not accessible in the completed construction. Job No. 14LION-00-01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Tape,fill, and sand exposed joints, edges,and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping,filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. 3.07 TEXTURE FINISH A. Living Unit Walls and Ceilings: 1. Apply one coat of Hallman-Lindsay 353-2 Smooth Flat High-build. a. Apply at a rate of 160 s.f. per gallon. b. Medium orange peel texture. B. Texture Required: Medium Orange Peel. C. Public Corridors, Lounges,Stairwells, and Common Areas: 1. Apply one coat of Hallman-Lindsay 351-2 Premium Orange Peel High Build. a. Apply at a rate of 160 s.f. per gallon. b. Medium orange peel texture. 2. Apply primer coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION 09 21 16 Job No. 14LION-00-01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 09 65 19- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Flooring and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section. B. Related Documents 1. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract(including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections)apply to the work of this section. C. Related Sections: 1. Other Division 9 sections for floor finishes related to this section but not the work of this section 2. Division 3 Concrete; not the work of this section 3. Division 6 Wood and Plastics; not the work of this section 4. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection; not the work of this section 1.02 References A. Armstrong Technical Manuals 1. Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials 3. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring 4. ASTM F 1482,Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring 5. ASTM F 1700 Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile 6. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 7. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 8. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2. NFPA 258 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Smoke Generated by Solid Materials D. Canadian Standards 1. CAN/ULC-5102.2 Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies E. Sustainability Standards 1. ASTM E1347-06(2011)Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement by Tristimulus Colorimetry 2. ASTM D5116- 10 Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products and California Department of Public Health (CDPH)Standard Method V1.1-2010 3. ASTM D6866- 12 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Biobased Content of Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Samples Using Radiocarbon Analysis. 4. ISO 14001 Environmental management systems--Requirements with guidance for use 5. ISO 14021 Environmental labels and declarations-Self-declared environmental claims(Type II environmental labeling) Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 6. ISO 14024 Environmental labels and declarations--Type I environmental labeling-- Principles and procedures 7. ISO 14025 Environmental labels and declarations--Type III environmental declarations--Principles and procedures 8. NSF/ANSI 332:Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Floor Coverings 1.03 System Description A. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide flooring which has been manufactured,fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects,damage,or failure. B. Administrative Requirements 1. Pre-installation Meeting:Conduct an on-site pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings)Section. 2. Pre-installation Testing:Conduct pre-installation testing as follows: [Specify testing(i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test,etc) C. Test Installations/Mock-ups: 1. Install at the project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods, including concrete substrate testing. Obtain Owner's and Consultant's acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standards. a. Mock-Up Size: [Specify mock-up size.] b. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required. c. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into the final construction with Owner's approval. D. Sequencing and Scheduling 1. Install flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. 2. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until they are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended bond, moisture tests and pH test. 1.04 Submittals A. Tech Data 1. Submit shop drawings,seaming plan,coving details,and manufacturer's technical data, installation and maintenance instructions(latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061.for flooring and accessories. B. Samples 1. Submit the manufacturer's standard samples showing the required colors for flooring and applicable accessories. C. MSDS 1. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)available for flooring product,adhesives, patching/leveling compounds,floor finishes and cleaning agents. D. Certifications-1 1. If required,submit the manufacturer's certification that the flooring has been tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests. E. Closeout 1. Closeout Submittals:Submit the following: a. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals(Maintenance Data and Operation Data)Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Responsibility 1. Single-Source Responsibility: provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds,and adhesives. B. Select Installer 1. Select an installer who is competent in the installation of Armstrong resilient solid vinyl tile flooring. a. Engage installers certified as Armstrong Commercial Certified Installers b. Confirm installer's certification by requesting their credentials C. Fire Performance 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient tile flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq.cm.or greater, Class I b. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less 1.06 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Comply-D1 1. Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections B. Comply-Manufacturer 1. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Deliverability 1. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. D. Storage 1. Store materials in a clean, dry,enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. 1.07 Project Conditions A. Temperature 1. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65°F(18°C)and a maximum temperature of[100°F(38°C)][85°F(29°C)]for at least 48 hours before,during,and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55°F(13°C) in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances. Refer to the Armstrong Guaranteed Installations Systems manual, F-5061 for a complete guide on project conditions. 1.08 Warranty A. Resilient 1. Resilient Flooring: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer,agreeing to repair or replace resilient flooring that fails within the warranty period. B. Warranty Period 1. Warranty Period: 10 years C. Rights 1. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Validation 1. For the Warranty to be valid,this product is required to be installed using the appropriate Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System. Product installed not using the specific instructions from the Guaranteed Installation System will void the warranty. 1.09 Maintenance A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials from same production run as products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. B. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to [5%] of amount installed. C. Delivery,Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery,storage and protection of extra material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer A. Company 1. Resilient tile flooring,wall base, adhesives and accessories: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA 17603, http://www.armstrong.com b. Evoke,www.evokeflooring.com/vinyl 2.02 Resilient Tile Flooring Materials A. Products 1. Provide Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile Flooring manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: a. Description: A layered construction consisting of a tough, clear,vinyl wear layer protecting a high-fidelity print layer on a solid vinyl backing. Protected by a UV-cured polyurethane finish,the wear surface is embossed with different textures to enhance each of the printed visuals. Colors are insoluble in water and resistant to cleaning agents and light. b. Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1700, 'Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile", Class III,Type B-Embossed Surface. c. Natural Creations EarthCuts-Coliseum Marble Minerva-24 x 12 x 0.125 2. Provide Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile Flooring manufactured by Evoke. a. Description: A layered construction consisting of a tough, clear,vinyl wear layer protecting a high-fidelity print layer on a solid vinyl backing. Protected by a UV-cured polyurethane finish,the wear surface is embossed with different textures to enhance each of the printed visuals. Colors are insoluble in water and resistant to cleaning agents and light. b. Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1700, 'Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile", Class III,Type B-Embossed Surface. c. Evoke LVT 7"wide x 48" length, 30 mil wear layer, product is 3mm total thickness, Proposed color is "Shirley" 2.03 Product Substitution A. Substitutions 1. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted because of the specific attributes listed in Section 2.02. 2.04 Wall Base Materials A. WBA Top Set 1. For top set wall base: Provide [0.080 in. (2.0 mm)] [1/8 in. (3.2 mm)]thick, [2 1/2 in. (6.35 cm)] [4 in. (10.16 cm)] [6 in. (15.24 cm)] high Armstrong Color-Integrated Wall Base with a matte finish, conforming to ASTM F 1861, �Type TV-Vinyl,Thermoplastic] �Type TP-Rubber,Thermoplastic�, Group 1-Solid, [Style A- Straight] [Style B-Cove. 2.05 Adhesives A. Standard Moisture Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Provide Armstrong[5-288 Premium Vinyl Flooring Adhesive] [5-240 High-Performance Epoxy Adhesive] under the flooring and Armstrong 5-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. B. High Moisture 1. [For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong 5-543 Premium Plus Commercial Sheet Flooring Adhesive for field areas and 5-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer]. 2.06 Accessories A. Patching 1. For patching, smoothing,and leveling monolithic subfloors(concrete,terrazzo, quarry tile,ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide Armstrong[5-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment] [5-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler/S-195 Underlayment Additive]. B. Sealing 1. For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Transition 1. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials. D. Threshold 1. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings. E. Resilient Edge Strips 1. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition,tapered or bullnose edge,with color to match or contrast with the flooring,or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available. F. Metal Edge Strips 1. Provide metal edge strips of width shown on the drawings and of required thickness to protect exposed edges of the flooring. Provide units of maximum available length to minimize the number of joints. Use butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage,or overlap-type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. Unless otherwise shown, provide strips made of extruded aluminum with a mill finish. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 Manufacturer's Instructions A. Compliance 1. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation and maintenance procedures as needed. 3.02 Examination A. Site Verification 1. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions(which have been previously installed under other sections)are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test,etc.). B. Visuallnspection 1. Visually inspect flooring materials, adhesives and accessories prior to installation. Flooring material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim. C. Examine Subfloors 1. Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges,and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material. D. Inspect Subfloors Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing,sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives;adhesive removers;and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold,or mildew. E. Reporting 1. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F. Failure Warning 1. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation. 3.03 Preparation A. Smooth Surfaces 1. Subfloor Preparation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints,and other defects with Armstrong[5-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment][5-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler/5-195 Underlayment Additive] as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Refer to Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation. B. Subfloor Cleaning 1. Subfloor Cleaning: Remove paint,varnish,oils, release agents,sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used,as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents. Refer to the Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation. C. Standard Moisture Test 1. Perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with [ASTM F 2170, 'Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situ Probes'] [ASTM F 1869,'Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride'] and Bond Tests as described in publication F-5061, "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System," to determine if surfaces are dry;free of curing and hardening compounds,old adhesive, and other coatings;and ready to receive flooring. [Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%.][MVER shall not exceed 5 Ibs./1000 sq.ft./24 hrs.] On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable.All test results shall be documented and retained D. High Moisture Test 1. [For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty,when using 5-543 Adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with [ASTM F 2170, 'Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situ Probes'] [ASTM F 1869,'Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride'j and Bond Tests as described in publication F-5061, "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System,"to determine if surfaces are dry;free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive,and other coatings;and ready to receive flooring. [Relative humidity shall not exceed 90%.] [MVER shall not exceed 7 Ibs./1000 sq.ft./24 hrs.] On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable.All test results shall be documented and retained]. E. pH Test Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Concrete pH Testing: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of their age or grade level. All test results shall be documented and retained. F. Wood Subfloor 1. Wood subfloors: Armstrong resilient floors are recommended on suspended wood subfloors with a 1/4" underlayment(see product installation systems for exceptions) and a minimum of 18" of well-ventilated air space below.Armstrong does not recommend installing resilient flooring on wood subfloors applied directly over concrete or on sleeper-construction subfloors. Loading requirements for subfloors are normally set by various building codes on both local and national levels.Trade associations such as APA-The Engineered Wood Association provide structural guidelines for meeting various code requirements. Subfloor panels are commonly marked with span ratings showing the maximum center-to-center spacing in inches of supports over which the panels should be placed. 2. 1. Refer to the Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 1482,Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring for additional information. G. Surface Cleaning 1. Surface Cleaning: Vacuum or broom-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt,grease,and all foreign materials. 3.04 Installation of Flooring A. F5061 1. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061. Failure to comply may result in voiding the manufacturer's warranty listed in Section 1.08 B. WaIltoWall 1. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets,casework,furniture, equipment, movable partitions,etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces,door recesses,closets,and similar openings as shown on the drawings. C. Pan-type 1. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers. D. Scribe 1. Scribe,cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns,walls, partitions, pipes,outlets,and built-in furniture and cabinets. E. Roll 1. Roll with a 100-pound (45.36 kilogram) roller in the field areas Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer. F. Tools 1. Install flooring with adhesives,tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times,and working times. 3.05 Installation of Accessories A. Top Set 1. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework,and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical,with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped.Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. B. Voids 1. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates. C. Resilient Edge Strips-Butted 1. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring,and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Metal Edge Strips 1. Apply[butt-type] [overlap] metal edge strips where shown on the drawings, [before] [after]flooring installation.Secure units to the substrate,complying with the edge strip manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 Cleaning A. Provide the ongoing maintenance instructions listed in Armstrong's F5061 Guaranteed Installation Systems manual. Information can also be obtained by visiting http://www.armstrong.com/commflooringna/. B. Perform initial and on-going maintenance according to the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061. 3.07 Protection A. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. (See Finishing The Job in the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061.) END OF SECTION 09 65 19 Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 09 90 00- PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints,stains,varnishes,and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Elevator pit ladders. 3. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 4. Mechanical and Electrical: a. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipement exposed to weather or to view, including that which is factory-finished. b. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels,equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze,terne,and lead items. 6. Marble,granite,slate,and other natural stones. 7. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 8. Ceramic and other tiles. 9. Brick,architectural concrete,cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco. 10. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS). 11. Glass. 12. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical,and electrical spaces. 13. Concealed pipes,ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 61 16-Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B. Section 32 17 23.13-Painted Pavement Markings: Painted pavement markings. C. Section 05 52 00-Handrails and Railings: Shop-primed handrails. D. Section 07 46 46-Fiber Cement Siding: Pre-finished siding. E. Section 08 11 10-Standard Steel Doors:Shop-primed metal doors. F. Section 08 11 20-Standard Steel Frames:Shop-primed metal frames. G. Section 09 26 0-Gypsum Board Assemblies:Texture Finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59,Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency;current edition. B. ASTM D16-Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials,and Applications; 2012. C. ASTM D4442-Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 2007. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum 3 years experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,coverage, surface preparation,drying time,cleanup requirements,color designation,and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area,and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow,or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. B. Supply 5 gallons of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. B. Paints: 1. Hallman-Lindsay Paints. 2. Sherwin Williams products meeting the requirements of specified Hallman-Lindsay paints may be substituted. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS-GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency,capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating,with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce,thin,or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 0161 16. D. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS-EXTERIOR A. Paint WE-OP-3L-Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Low-sheen:Two coats of acrylic latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsay Dura Kote 170. B. Paint CE-OP-3L-Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel Meta Hallman-Lindsey#165 Masonry Kote 100%Acrylic Flat Masonry Flat. C. Paint ME-OP-3L-Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. Hallman-Lindsey#338 Metalguard Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsey#317 Duratech 100%Acrylic Gloss Enamel. D. Paint ME-OP-2L-Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer. Hallman-Lindsey#338 Metalguard Acrylic Metal primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsey#317 Duratech 100%Acrylic Gloss Enamel. E. Paint MgE-OP-3L-Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat Hallman-Lindsey#338 Metalguard Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsey#317 Duratech 100%Acrylic Gloss Enamel. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS-INTERIOR A. Paint WI-OP-2L-Wood, Opaque, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss:One coat of latex enamel. B. Paint WI-TR-VS-Wood,Transparent,Varnish,Stain: 1. One coat of stain. 2. One coat sealer. 3. Satin:Two coats of varnish. C. Paint MI-OP-3A- Ferrous Metals, Unprimed,3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. Hallman-Lindsey#338 Metalguard Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsey#317 Duratech 100%Acrylic Gloss Enamel. D. Paint MI-OP-2L-Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. Hallman-Lindsey#338 Metalguard Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsey#317 Duratech 100%Acrylic Gloss Enamel. E. Paint MgI-OP-3L-Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. Hallman-Lindsey#338 Metalguard Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Hallman-Lindsey#317 Duratech 100%Acrylic Gloss Enamel. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 F. Paint GI-OP-3LA-Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic,3 Coat: 1. One coat texture: Hallman-Lindsey#369 Wall Prep Spatter Kote. a. Medium orange peel texture. 2. One coat of latex primer sealer: Hallman-Lindsey#227 Wall Prep Pro Primer. a. Primer required under eggshell, low sheen, satin,semi-gloss and gloss finishes. 3. Low-sheen:One coat of latex low sheen latex-acrylic; Hallman-Lindsey#283-Pro Kote Latex Lo-Sheen Enamel. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers,sealers, cleaning agents,cleaning cloths,sanding materials,and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete,and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons,and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar,scale,salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning)followed by SSPC-SP 1(solvent cleaning). Job No. 14LION-00-01 PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 K. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale,weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,ensuring weld joints, bolts,and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface;spot prime after repairs. L. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. M. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks,and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. N. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,seal knots, pitch streaks,and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried;sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. 0. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust,grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks,and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. P. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers,grilles,covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork,apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons,and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 SCHEDULE-SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels,equipment serial number and capacity labels. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, Paint Systems Articles. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all items penetrating the exterior skin of the building to match adjacent finished surface. 2. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 4. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 5. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers,grilles,to match face panels. D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Within Dwelling Units: 1. One color;walls and ceilings, lo-sheen. 2. Accent color;one wall in unit, lo-sheen. B. Common Corridors: 1. One color;walls and ceilings, lo-sheen. 2. One accent color; lower walls, lo-sheen. C. Stair Enclosures: 1. One color;walls and ceilings, lo-sheen. D. Paint access panels same as walls. END OF SECTION 09 90 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 10 14 24- IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Engraved plastic signs. B. Silk screened signs. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1-American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENGRAVED SIGNS A. Engraved Signs: Laminated colored plastic; lettering engraved through face to expose core color: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ICC A117.1, including Braille. 2. Face Color: As selected by owner. 3. Core Color: As selected by owner. 4. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch. 5. Height: 2 inches. 6. Edges: Radiused. 7. Character Font: Helvetica. B. Locations: 1. Service Room Signs: Provide at all rooms designated on plan. 2. Unit Identification Numbers: Residential dwelling unit numbers as indicated on drawings and as coordinated with owner. 3. Stairwells: a. Sign identifying stairway at door into each stairwell. b. Stairway floor number signs: Provide at each floor landing within exit enclosures. 1) Identify floor level, stairway,and terminus of top and bottom of stair. 2) State story of exit discharge and availability of roof access. 3) Locate sign 5 feet above the floor landing in a position that is readily visible when the door is in the open and closed positions. 4. International barrier free symbol at each accessible building entrance door. 2.02 SILK SCREENED SIGNS A. Accessible Parking Sign: 1. 12"x 18"size. 2. Silk screened onto reflective vinyl over.080" aluminum base. 3. Sign design to comply with WECC and ANSI A-117.1. 4. Include support post or wall mount as appropriate for location. 2.03 INDIVIDUAL GRAPHICS A. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ICC A117.1 for signs not required to be tactile. B. Character Style: 1. Character Font: Helvetica. C. Graphic Style: Handicapped type. Job No. 14LION-00-01 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 24-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations as directed. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Engraved Signs: 1. Service Room Signs: "UTILITY ROOM", "ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT", "ELECTRICAL ROOM"; etc.,at each respective room as labeled on drawings. 2. Stair ldentification Signs: At the door entering each stair enclosure. 3. Landing Identification Signs: At each door exiting stair enclosure to corridor. B. Silk Screened Signs: 1. Accessible parking sign: with support post. END OF SECTION 10 14 24 Job No. 14LION-00-01 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 24-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 10 28 00-TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms,showers,and residential bathrooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates. B. Section 08 83 00-Mirrors: Other mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A-117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 2003. B. ASTM 6456-Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011e1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size,finish, details of function,attachment methods. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachment methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories: 1. Taymor Industries, Inc. 2. Basco. 3. Bobrick. 4. General Accessory Manufacturing Company(GAMCO). S. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 6. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 7. Franklin Brass. 8. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No.4 satin brushed finish. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456,SC 2,satin finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.03 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type,chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets. 1. Provide one in each apartment bathroom. 2. Provide one in each common toilet bathroom. B. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, 1. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Provide at residential bathrooms indicated on plans. Job No. 14LION-00-01 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.04 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter,0.04 inch wall thickness,satin-finished,with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges,for installation with exposed fasteners. B. Towel Bar: Chrome, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment,satin finish. 1. Length: 18 inches and 24 inches. 2. One 18 inch and one 24 inch towel bar per apartment bathroom. C. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel,single-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, bright polished finish. 1. Product: Sunrise Collection 01-322 manufactured by Taymor. 2. Provide one at each apartment bathroom. 2.05 RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORIES A. Medicine Cabinet: One-piece construction of heavy-gage steel with factory-applied,gloss white, baked enamel finish, semi-recessed, satin bright polished finish stainless steel mirror frame. 1. Shelves: Adjustable,aluminum or glass; provide not less than 3 shelves. 2. Door: Fitted with continuous piano-type hinge,shock-absorbing spring-and-rod door stop, magnetized catch,swing as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers'instructions in locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install plumb and level,securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION 10 28 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 10 44 00- FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry:Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10-Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013. B. UL(FPED)-Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;current edition. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10. B. Provide extinguishers and cabinets classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. D. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 4. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers-General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes,whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank,with pressure gage. 1. Class: B:C. 2. Size: 10 pound. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet;0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type. Use stud wall construction. 1. Approved for installation in 1-hour fire resistance rated wall construction. 2. Sized to accommodate accessories. 3. Trim: Returned to wall surface,with 2-1/2 inch projection, 1-1/4 inch wide face. C. Cabinet Configuration: Surface type. Use at concrete or c.m.u.walls. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. E. Door Glazing: Glass,clear, 1/8 inch thick wired. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. G. Weld,fill, and grind components smooth. H. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Red baked enamel.. I. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings,at height indicated. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers in cabinets. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Corridors: Dry chemical type,semi-recessed cabinet. Locations selected by owner. END OF SECTION 10 44 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 10 56 10 -STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl-coated ventilated shelving. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ClosetMaid (Clairson International). B. Lee Rowan. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. D. Provide all storage shelving and accessories from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: Basic cold drawn,Grade C-1006;average tensile strength over 100,000 psi;coated. B. Wire Coating: Proprietary heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride(PVC)formula resin, plasticizers,stabilizers, pigments, and other additives. 1. Thickness: 9 to 11 mils. 2. Classification: No ingredients listed as hazardous per OSHA 29CFR1910.0017. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Wire Shelving: Coated steel wire, 1/2 to 1 inch incremental cross-deck spacings. 1. Pantry, Linen and Laundry Shelves: Maximum 1/2"wire spacing. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Clips. B. End Brackets. C. Support Brackets. D. Poles. E. Standards. F. Shelf Brackets. G. Pole Clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Installer's Examination: 1. Examine conditions under which installation is to be performed;submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Installation activities before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 3. Installation indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Provide adjustable shelving at Accessible units. B. Cut shelves 1/2-1 inch shorter than actual wall measurements;cap all exposed ends. C. Install shelving plumb and level at heights indicated in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. D. Place wall clips every 10 to 12 inches on level line. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORAGE SHELVING 10 56 10-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 E. Install end brackets on same level line as wall clips, centered on the front rods of shelves. Support shelves 36 inches maximum with end brackets,support brackets, or poles. F. Drill holes where required using sharp bit; do not punch. G. Drywall: Drill 1/4 inch hole, insert No.970 or 971 wall clip. Use No.8 pin to expand anchor. H. Wood: Drill 1/4 inch hole into wood,secure wall clip with No.8 x 1 inch screw or secure pole clip No. 978 directly to wood with No.8 x 1-1/4 inch screws. I. Standards and Brackets: 1. Install standards vertically every 16 inches on studs. 2. Install horizontal tracks level,secured with screws or mollies in studs or drywall; use hanging adapters to connect wall standards for hanging. 3. Attach shelf brackets with SuperSlide, Heavy Duty, Linen Shelf and Rod and Close Mesh 12-inch or 16-inch decking. J. Shelf Supports: 1. Place shelf support brackets per manufacturers specifications. 2. 36 inches o.c. maximum. K. Attach pole clips at same elevations as wall clips for a given shelf. L. Use corner support brackets on all corner"butt"joints. M. Repair walis and fill in holes not used for shelving that were drilled by this subcontractor. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Coat Closets:Single shelf and rod. B. Bedroom Closets: 1. Double shelf and rod in 50%of closet,single shelf and rod in balance of closet. C. Linen Closets: Install 5 shelves. 1. 20 inch deep "close mesh"shelving. D. Pantry: Install 5 shelves. 1. 12"deep"close mesh"shelving. E. Laundry Rooms: 1. At stacked washer and dryer install 5 shelf stand. 2. At side by side waher and dryer install 2 full width shelves above. END OF SECTION 10 56 10 Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORAGE SHELVING 10 56 10-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 11 3100- RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. B. Laundry appliances. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL(EAUED)- Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five(5)year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. C. Provide ten (10)year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens. D. Provide ten (10)year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Energy Star Rating required on all eligible equipment. B. Refrigerator Type 1: Free-standing,top-mounted freezer,frost-free. Whirpool WRT138TFY6. 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant. 3. Features: Include glass shelves,automatic icemaker,and light in freezer compartment. 4. Finish: Black. C. Refrigerator Type 2;at Type A Accessible units: Free-standing,top-mounted freezer,frost-free. 50%of freezer capacity at 54" above floor, maximum. 1. Capacity:Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant. 3. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker, and light in freezer compartment. 4. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as selected. D. Range Type 1: Electric,free-standing,with standard burners and removable drip pans. Whirlpool WFE510SOAB. 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Oven: Self-cleaning. 3. Elements: 4. 4. Controls: Push-to-turn knobs with analog clock and timer. 5. Features: Include storage drawer, oven door window, broiler pan and grid, and oven light. 6. Finish: Black E. Range Type 2;At Type A Accessible units: Electric,free-standing,with plug-in heating elements and removable drip pans. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Oven:Self-cleaning. 3. Elements:4. 4. Controls: Front Controls. Push-to-turn knobs with electronic clock and timer. 5. Features: Include storage drawer,oven door window, broiler pan and grid,and oven light. 6. Finish: Black F. Cooking Exhaust : Provide range hood at Type A Accessible units. 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Exhaust: Recirculating. 3. Features: Include cooktop light. 4. Finish: Stainless steel . 5. Controls: Wall switch in accessible location. G. Microwave : Over-the-range. Whirlpool WMH31017AB. 1. Capacity: 1.3 cubic ft. 2. Power: 900 watts. 3. Features: Include turntable, cooktop light, night light, and 2-speed exhaust fan. 4. Finish: Black. H. Dishwasher: Undercounter. Whirlpool WDF310PAA6. 1. Controls: Solid state electronic. 2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant. 3. Wash Levels: 3. 4. Cycles: 4, including normal, rinse and hold,and pot and pan. 5. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser,optional no-heat dry, and optional water temperature boost. 6. Finish: Interchangeable panels, black. I. Garbage Disposal: Insinkerator Badger 5. 1. Type of Feed: Continuous 2. On/Off Control:Wall Switch 3. Motor:Single Phase 4. H P: 3/4 5. Volts: 120 6. HZ:60 7. RPM: 1725 8. Amp. (Avg. Load): 6.9 9. Time Rating: Intermittent 10. Lubrication: Permanently Lubricated Upper& Lower Bearings 11. Shipping Weight(Approx.): 14 Ibs. 11 oz. 12. Unit Finish:Waterborne Grey Enamel 13. Overall Height: 12-5/8" 14. Grind Chamber Capacity: 26 oz. 15. Motor Protection: Manual reset Overload 16. Average Water Usage:Approx. 1 Gallon Per Person Per Day 17. Average Electrical Usage: 3-4 KWH Per Year 18. Drain Connection: 1-1/2" Cushioned Slip Joint 19. Dishwasher Drain Connection:Yes 2.02 LAUNDRY APPLIANCES A. Clothes Washer : Front-loading. 1. Size: Full-size. 2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant. 3. Controls: Rotary. 4. Cycles: Include normal, delicate,and automatic soak. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3100-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 5. Motor Speed: Single-speed. 6. Features: Include optional second rinse, bleach dispenser,fabric softener dispenser,self-cleaning lint filter, sound insulation, and end of cycle signal. 7. Finish: Painted steel with porcelain enamel top, color white. 8. Manufacturers: a. Whirlpool Corp; Product WDF70HEBW: www.whirlpool.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00-Product Requirements. B. Washing Machine Hoses. 1. Polyester reinforced EPDM rubber 2. Burst-resistant material 3. 6'-0" length 4. Compression connections and installation hardware included 5. Hoses are marked for hot and cold water 6. Meet ASME#A112.18.6 specifications C. Clothes Dryer Type 2; Electric, Front-loading,to match front-loading washer. 1. Size: Full-size. 2. Controls: Rotary,with electronic moisture-sensing dry control. 3. Temperature Selections:Three. 4. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, knit/delicate, and air only. S. Features: Include reversible door,sound insulation, and end of cycle signal. 6. Finish: Painted steel with porcelain enamel top,color white. 7. Whirlpool Corp; Product WED70HEBW. (At Unit 4109-use long vent Model WED7IHEBW) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment and remove debris to provided dumpster. B. Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION 11 31 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 12 21 13 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. WCMA A100.1-Safety of Corded Window Covering Products;Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color,cord type and color. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. B. Take field measurements to determine sizes required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Hunter pouglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by cord;complying with WCMA A100.1. B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners,with manufacturing burrs removed. 1. Width: 1 inch. 2. Thickness:.10 inch. 3. Color:As selected. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre-finished,formed aluminum box,with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys,and bearings for operation;same depth as width of slats. E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished,formed aluminum with top side shaped to match slat curvature;with end caps. Color: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon;continuous loop. 1. Free end weighted. G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic;square shape. 1. Removable type. 2. Length of window opening height less 3 inches. H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. 3.02 I NSTALLATI ON A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. END OF SECTION 12 21 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 12 35 30- RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen cabinets. B. Vanity cabinets. C. Casework hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 12 36 00-Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. BHMA A156.9-American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010(ANSI/BHMA A156.9). B. ANSI/KCMA A161.1- Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; 2000(R2006). C. KCMA(DIR)-Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; current edition, online. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01-General Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions and construction details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations,clearances required, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances. D. Samples: Submit one base cabinet, 15 inch in size, illustrating color of finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1 and KCMA Certified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Residential Casework: Raised panel cabinetry. 1. Smart Cabinetry; www.smartcabinetry.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Cabinet Construction: Hardwood lumber framing and particle board. B. Countertops: As specified in Section 12 36 00. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Chrome wire pulls, 6 inches wide. (ADD ALTERNATE: EMTECK 4.5"stainless steel bar) C. Drawer Slides: Extension arms, steel construction. D. Hinges: European,6-way adjustable,concealed, 110 degrees self-closing. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could accumulate. C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.05 FINISHES A. Exposed To View Surfaces: Stain,seal,and varnish of color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install casework,components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered. C. Set casework items plumb and square,securely anchored to building structure. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components,with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use filler strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware,fixtures,and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean casework,countertops,shelves, and hardware. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity. END OF SECTION 12 35 30 Job No. 14LION-00-01 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 12 36 00- COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for manufactured casework. B. Window sills. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 12 35 30-Residential Casework. B. Section 22 40 00-Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z124.3-American National Standard for Plastic Lavatories; 2005. B. ISFA-2-Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; 2001(2007). C. NEMA LD 3-High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials,and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Kitchen Countertops: PLAM Countertops, Pionite Cressida AT371 1. Pionite,www.pionite.com B. Kitchen Countertops: Corian Countertops. (ADD ALTERNATE) 1. Granite, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 3cm nominal thickness. 2. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. C. Vanity Countertops: Cultured Marble Countertops. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 2. Cultured Marble: acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler,and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating. a. Sinks and Bowls: Integral castings; minimum 3/4 inch wall thickness; comply with ANSI Z124.3. b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte[] c. Color/Pattern Family: 100%Brite White. d. Manufacturers: 1) Elite. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 3/4 inch thick; square edge . S. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material,square top; minimum 3-1/2 inches high. Backsplash integral to top. 2.02 WINDOW SILLS A. Same material as vanity tops. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. B. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant,clear. Job No. 14LION-00-01 COUNTERTOPS 12 36 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable,with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece;join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required. B. Attach countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of[]. C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. END OF SECTION 12 36 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 COUNTERTOPS 12 36 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 12 93 13- BICYCLE RACKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bicycle racks. 1.02 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bicycle Racks: 1. Madrax"U Rack":www.madrax.com. 2. Columbia Cascade Company: www.timberform.com. 3. Creative Pipe, Inc : www.creativepipe.com. 4. Huntco Supply, LLC: www.huntco.com. 2.02 MATERIALSS A. Bicycle Racks:Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on each bend and each end,securing one wheel and part of the frame. 1. Style: Inverted horseshoe rack formed by one u-shaped bend. 2. Mounting:Surface flange. a. Multiple racks may be rail mounted. 3. Finish: a. Interior racks:Galvanized steel. b. Exterior racks: Powder coated black. 4. Accessories:Surface flange cover. END OF SECTION 12 93 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 BICYCLE RACKS 12 93 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 BICYCLE RACKS 12 93 13-2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 11 13 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service and fire-service mains . B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping. E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products. F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression. G. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 1 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. D. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. E. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Architect's written permission. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K , water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 2 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring seal in each end. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. D. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 2.02 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. B. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 33 05 00 "Common Work Results for Utilities"for commonly used joining materials. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer. 2.04 GATE VALVES A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. NIBCOINC. d. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 3 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. NIBCOINC. d. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. 3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. 2.05 CHECK VALVES A. AWWA Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. NIBCOINC. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping. a. Standard: AWWA C508. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 4 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 c. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Standard: AWWA C511. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Flomatic Corporation. c. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Standard: AWWA C510. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories: Ball valves with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; OS&Y gate valves with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Backflow Preventer Test Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving"for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 5 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. E. Underground water-service piping shall be the following: 1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. F. Underground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 shall be the following: 1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. G. Aboveground Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed copper, or pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. H. Aboveground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K ; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. I. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 shall be the following: 1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. 3.03 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation. B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, metal-seated gate valves with valve box. 2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valves with indicator post. 3. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground: a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, nonrising stem. b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: UL/FMG, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem. c. Check Valves: AWWA C508 , swing type. 4. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to control water pressure. 5. Relief Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 6 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 33 05 00 "Common Work Results for Utilities"for piping-system common requirements. 3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main. B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated. C. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following: 1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards. 2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves. 3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. 5. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box. D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation. 1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 2. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. F. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. G. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23. H. Install fiberglass AWWA pipe according to AWWA M45. I. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 6, with top at least 12 inches below level of maximum frost penetration.lnstall piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed. J. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed. K. Sleeves are specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." L. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." M. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 7 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 N. See Section 21 12 00 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes," Section 21 13 13 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems," and Section 21 13 16 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for fire-suppression-water piping inside the building. O. See Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping"for potable-water piping inside the building. 3.06 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. See Section 33 05 00 "Common Work Results for Utilities"for basic piping joint construction. B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. 2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 3.07 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following: 1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Locking mechanical joints. 3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 4. Bolted flanged joints. 5. Pipe clamps and tie rods. B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Bonded-Joint Fiberglass, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M45. 4. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24. C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.08 VALVE INSTALLATION A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. D. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system. E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass. F. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 8 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.09 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions. B. Water Meters: Install -type water meters, NPS 2 and smaller, in meter boxes with shutoff valves on water meter inlets. Include valves on water meter outlets and valved bypass around meters unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Meters: Install -type water meters, NPS 3 and larger, in meter vaults. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. D. Water Meters: Install detector-type water meters in meter vault according to AWWA M6. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and full-size valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding. C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. D. Support NPS 2-1/2 and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers. 3.11 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position. 3.12 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision. B. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows: 1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post. C. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch. D. Connect alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System." Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 9 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.13 CONNECTIONS A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for piping connections to valves and equipment. B. Connect water-distribution piping to utility water main. Use service clamp and corporation valve. C. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water fire-suppression piping. D. Connect waste piping from concrete vault drains to sanitary sewerage system. See Section 221313 "Facility Sanitary Sewers"for connection to sanitary-sewer piping. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits. C. Prepare reports of testing activities. 3.15 IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for identifying devices. 3.16 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if inethod is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if inethod is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 10 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 221113 Job No. FACILITY WATER 22 11 13 - 11 DISTRIBUTION PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 11 16- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 11 13 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. System purging and disinfecting activities report. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." 2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. D. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 3. Solder-joint or threaded ends. E. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvillnternational. b. Shurjoint Piping Products. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. 3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: a. Ferrous housing sections. b. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. c. Bolts and nuts. d. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 2.03 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing. B. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions. C. Manifold: Multiple-outlet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet. 2.04 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. 2.05 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. F. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.06 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2.07 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following a. Matco-Norca. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving"for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 22 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. E. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 22 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." F. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 G. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. O. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees. P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps." S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. F. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. G. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Steel Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of pipe as specified. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. I. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. J. Joints for PEX Piping: Join according to ASTM F 1807. K. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.04 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings atjoints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings . 3.05 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod. G. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches. H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment, machines and fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic cold- and hot-water-supply piping to fixtures in sizes as indicated in the plumbing fixture connection schedule, but not smaller than the fixture connection sizes or that required by plumbing code. D. Connect domestic cold- and hot-water-supply piping to plumbing equipment as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connection sizes. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.08 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 7 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if inethods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one ofthe following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. 3. PEX tube, NPS 1 and smaller; fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 8 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints. 3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping. END OF SECTION 221116 Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 9 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Balancing valves. 3. Strainers. 4. Hose bibbs. 5. Wall hydrants. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water-hammer arresters. 8. Air vents. 9. Trap-seal primer systems. 10. Water meters. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for pomestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 1 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Flomatic Corporation. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies <Insert drawing designation if any>: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Flomatic Corporation. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories: a. ValvesNPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. ValvesNPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. C. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. d. Insert manufacturer's name. 2. Standard: ASSE 1052. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 2 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water back pressure. 4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4. 5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm flow. 2.04 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES 2.05 BALANCING VALVES A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div. c. NIBCOInc. d. TACOlncorporated. e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. 2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator. 3. Body: bronze. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2. 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. 2.06 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers : 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch. 6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. 2.07 OUTLET BOXES A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Oatey. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. 2. Mounting: Recessed. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 3 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets. 5. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing. 6. Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping. 7. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female, garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers. 8. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked end. 2.08 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs : 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb. 2.09 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products. d. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. 7. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 8. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 9. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 4 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.10 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves : 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded orsolderjoint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.11 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water-Hammer Arresters : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 2O1. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 2O1, Sizes A through F. 2.12 AIR VENTS A. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents <Insert drawing designation if any>: 1. Body: Stainless steel. 2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating. 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet. 6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded. 2.13 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 5 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solderjoint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solderjoint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. 2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection. 3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum. 4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass. 2.14 WATER METERS A. Displacement-Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AALIANT; a Venture Measurement product Iine.ABB.Badger Meter, Inc. b. Carlon Meter. c. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. d. Schlumberger Limited; Water Services. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Install water-control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 6 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. D. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve . E. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." F. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 2O1. G. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain. H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. I. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"for electrical connections. 3.03 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 2. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies. 3. Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Trap-seal primer systems. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check, backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 7 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 221119 Job No. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 - 8 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 13 13 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure and pressure couplings. 3. Backwater valves. 4. Cleanouts. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Expansion joints and deflection fittings. 2. Backwater valves. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Construction Manager's written permission. Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.02 DUCTILE-IRON, GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push-on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron, for push-on joints. D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2.03 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Cellular-Core Sewer Piping: 1. Pipe: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness, PVC cellular-core pipe with plain ends for solvent-cemented joints. 2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC socket-type fittings. B. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping: 1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints. 2.04 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dallas Specialty& Mfg. Co. b. Fernco Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 2. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.05 EXPANSION JOINTS AND DEFLECTION FITTINGS A. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products. 2. Description: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for offset and expansion indicated. 2.06 BACKWATER VALVES A. Cast-Iron Backwater Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Description: ASME A112.14.1, gray-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat. 3. Horizontal type; with swing check valve and hub-and-spigot ends. 4. Combination horizontal and manual gate-valve type; with swing check valve, integral gate valve, and hub-and-spigot ends. 5. Terminal type; with bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. B. PVC Backwater Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Zurn Light Commercial Products Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 3. Description: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check valve. 2.07 CLEANOUTS A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. B. PVC Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 following: a. Canplas LLC. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Zurn Light Commercial Products Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 2.08 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel. C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes. 1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole. 2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. a. Slope: 4 percent. D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling. F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping with 60-inch minimum cover. 4. Install ductile-iron, gravity sewer piping according to ASTM A 746. 5. Install PVC cellular-core sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 6. Install PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. G. Install corrosion-protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105: 1. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings. H. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join ductile-iron, gravity sewer piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints. 2. Join PVC cellular-core sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solvent-cemented joints. 3. Join PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318. 3.05 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal-type backwater valves in piping manholes or pits. B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valves in piping and in manholes. Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Install terminal-type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes. Secure units to sidewalls. 3.06 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts, and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.07 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated. b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. 4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 3.08 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 31200 "Earth Moving" for underground utility identification devices. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes. 1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground manholes. Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. c. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. d. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot head of water, and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes. b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping. Flush with potable water. END OF SECTION 221313 Job No. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 - 7 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 13 16- SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer"for plastic sewer piping. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.02 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es). Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 1 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.04 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Dielectric Fittings: 1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Dielectric Unions: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hart Industries International, Inc. 2) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 3) Wilkins; a Zurn company. b. Description: 1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 2 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." N. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. O. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. P. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 3 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for compression joints. B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 61.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. C. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. D. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.04 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings atjoints of piping with small differences in OD's. B. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Shutoff Valves: 1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. 2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 4 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge. D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 3. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 4. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs ]00 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 5. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS l-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS l-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 5 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor . 4. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. D. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.08 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 6 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. END OF SECTION 221316 Job No. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 - 7 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 5. Flashing materials. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following: 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 1 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Josam Company. 2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 3) Tyler Pipe. 4) Watts Drainage Products. 5) Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Metal Floor Cleanouts : 1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 3) Tyler Pipe. 4) Watts Drainage Products. 5) Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron . 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. 13. Size: Same as connected branch. 14. Housing: Stainless steel. 15. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. 16. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout. C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 2 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover. 2.02 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. b. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. c. Watts Drainage Products. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; . 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Not required. 6. Anchor Flange: Not required. 7. Clamping Device: Required. 8. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 10. Trap Material: Cast iron. 11. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap. 12. Trap Features: Cleanout. 2.03 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies <Insert drawing designation if any>: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings : Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 3 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. B. Air-Gap Fittings: 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. C. Sleeve Flashing Device: 1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend l inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. D. Stack Flashing Fittings : 1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. E. Vent Caps : 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. F. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals : 1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel. 2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing. G. Expansion Joints : 1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping. 2.05 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 4 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct bases to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by code. 3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof inembranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. F. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surFace. Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 5 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 G. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface. H. Assemble plastic channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface. I. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations. J. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor. K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. O. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. P. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. Q. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. R. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. S. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof inembrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 6 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 flange extending at least 8 inchesaround pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterFlashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 3.04 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." END OF SECTION 221319 Job No. SANITARY WASTE PIPING 22 13 19 - 7 SPECIALTIES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 34 00 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Residential, direct-vent, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of residential, gas-fired, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer. B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." Job No. FUEL-FIRED, 22 34 00 - 1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a. Residential, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters: 1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Two years. b. Compression Tanks: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RESIDENTIAL, GAS-Fired, STORAGE, domestic-WATER HEATERS A. Residential, Direct-Vent, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Lochinvar Corporation. c. Rheem Manufacturing Company. d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. e. State Industries. 2. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1. 3. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel. a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings. 4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances: a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet. g. Burner: For use with direct-vent, gas-fired, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas fuel. Job No. FUEL-FIRED, 22 34 00 - 2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 h. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20/CSA C22.2 No. 199, electric, automatic, gas-ignition system. i. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. j. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valve: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 5. Direct-Vent System: Through-wall, coaxial- or double-channel vent assembly with domestic-water heater manufacturers' outside intake/exhaust screen. 2.02 domestic-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. a. AMTROL Inc. b. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. c. State Industries. d. Taco, Inc. 4. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank. 5. Construction: a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed. B. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. C. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig pressure rating as required to match gas supply. D. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve. E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters and storage tanks specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution"for requirements for correcting the Work. Job No. FUEL-FIRED, 22 34 00 - 3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 domestic-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Residential, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install residential domestic-water heaters on floor. 1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate. B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. 1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54. 1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves. 2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner. 3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control. 4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." D. Install oil-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 31. 1. Install shutoff valves on fuel-oil supply piping to oil-fired water-heater burners without shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. F. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. G. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." H. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." Job No. FUEL-FIRED, 22 34 00 - 4 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 I. Fill domestic-water heaters with water. J. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution"for requirements for correcting the Work. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 223400 Job No. FUEL-FIRED, 22 34 00 - 5 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 22 41 00 - RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Faucets. 2. Lavatories. 3. Showers. 4. Kitchen sinks. 5. Dishwasher air-gap fittings. 6. Water closets. 7. Toilet seats. 8. Supply fittings. 9. Waste fittings. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 LAVATORIES A. Lavatories : 1. Vitreous-China Lavatories: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) American Standard America. 2) Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. 3) Kohler Co. 4) TOTO USA, INC. 2. Fixture: a. Standard: ANSI Z124.3 for PMMA lavatories. b. Standard: ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI/ICPA SS-1 for solid-surface lavatories. Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 1 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 c. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for vitreous-china lavatories. 3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings"Article. 4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings"Article. B. Lavatories : Vitreous china, pedestal. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard America. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Kohler Co. d. TOTO USA, INC. 2. Fixture: a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. 3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings"Article. 4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings"Article. 2.02 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects,"for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Lavatory Faucets : Single-control mixing valve. 1. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) American Standard America. 2) Chicago Faucets. 3) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 4) Kohler Co. 5) Speakman Company. 6) T &S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 7) Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2.03 SHOWERS A. Showers : Standard PMMA with base and faucet. 1. PMMA(Acrylic) Showers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Aquatic Industries, Inc. 2) Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. 3) Kohler Co. 4) Aquatic. 2. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2. 3. Surround: One piece or sealed, multiple piece. 4. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462. Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 2 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.04 SHOWER FAUCETS A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects,"for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Shower Faucets: Single handle, pressure balance, mixing valve. 1. Single-Handle, Pressure-Balance Faucets: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) American Standard America. 2) Kohler Co. 3) Leonard Valve Company. 4) Powers. 5) Zurn Industries, LLC; AquaSpec Commercial Faucet Products. 2.05 KITCHEN SINKS A. Kitchen Sinks : One bowl, counter mounted, stainless steel. 1. Stainless-Steel Kitchen Sinks: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 2) Just Manufacturing. 3) Kohler Co. 2.06 SINK FAUCETS A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects,"for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Sink Faucets: Solid brass, kitchen sink. 1. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) American Standard America. 2) Chicago Faucets. 3) Delta Faucet Company. 4) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 5) Just Manufacturing. 6) Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 4. Kitchen Sink Option: Separate hand spray complying with ASSE 1025. 5. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm unless otherwise indicated. Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 3 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.07 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS A. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Watts Brass &Tubular; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Standard: ASSE 1021. 3. Description: Device designed to prevent backflow of contaminated liquid into domestic dishwashers. 4. Material: Plastic body with chrome-plated-brass cover. 5. Hose Connections: 5/8-inch- ID inlet and 7/8-inch- ID outlet. 6. Capacity: At least 5 gpm; at inlet pressure of at least 5 psigand at temperature of at least 140 deg F. 7. Mounting: Deck. 8. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F. a. Inlet Hose: 5/8 inch ID and 48 inches long. b. Outlet Hose: 7/8 inch ID and 48 inches long. 2.08 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets : Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (gravity tank), vitreous china. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard America. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Kohler Co. d. TOTO USA, INC. 2. Bowl: a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.5, and ASSE 1037. 3. Supply Fittings: a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange. c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size. 1) Operation: Wheel handle. d. Riser: 1) Size: NPS 1/2. 2) Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose riser. Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 4 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.09 TOILET SEATS A. Toilet Seats : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard America. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Kohler Co. d. Sperzel of Lexington. 2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 3. Material: Plastic. 2.10 SUPPLY FITTINGS A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects,"for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. C. Lavatory Kitchen Sink and Laundry Supply Fittings: 1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange. 2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size. a. Operation: Wheel handle. 3. Risers: a. Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose riser. 2.11 WASTE FITTINGS A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. 2.12 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 5 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation. B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping. C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall. E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." F. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment. G. Install toilet seats on water closets. H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. I. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms. J. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated. K. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have a disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. L. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer. M. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink. N. Set bathtubs in leveling bed of cement grout. Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 6 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 O. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation." P. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." Q. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation." 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 224100 Job No. RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING 22 41 00 - 7 FIXTURES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 DIVISION 23—MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 23 00 10"MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See "Temporary Heat" Paragraph in Part 1 of this Specfication Section and Division 01. b. Roof Curbs: See "Roof Curbs" Paragraph in Part 3 of this Specification Section. c. Concrete: See "Concrete" Paragraph in Part 3 of this Specification Section. d. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See "Electrical Equipment and Wiring for Mechanical Division" Paragraph in Part 3 of this Specification Section. e. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 01. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner 1. The Owner will award contracts, which will commence concurrently with this contract. Specifically this work will include: a. Equipment Installation: Refer to appropriate drawings for equipment furnished by the Owner. 2. Rough-in service pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes, plug or cap these. Final connections to equipment shall be made by Contractor. 1.03 PROVISIONS A. Work perFormed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, and the mechanical drawings and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being perFormed under this division, examine architectural, structural, food service, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 1 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES/SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA and 24. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. D. In case of difference between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and/or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 1.06 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner. 2. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 2 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 acceptance by the Owner. 1.08 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. B. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. C. Owners of all underground utilities shall be notified at least 2 business days prior to excavation so that they can locate and mark underground facilities. 1.09 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.11 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for additional rough-in requirements. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 3 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Refer to kitchen equipment drawings and equipment cut sheets provided by the Owner for kitchen equipment. 1.12 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish access doors of type suitable to Architect and provide to General Contractor to construct into the building. Access doors should be provided in all locations where access is required. B. Provide painted, steel (unless noted otherwise) access doors with key lock suitabel for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. 1. Plaster finish walls and ceilings: Recessed style. 2. Acoustical tile ceilings: Recessed type. 3. Drywall walls and ceilings: Flush panel. 4. Remodel Applications: Flanged flush panel. 5. Corrosive environments, including but not limited to, restrooms, locker rooms, pool equipment rooms, and natatoriums: Panel and frame shall be aluminum or stainless steel. All associated hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel. 6. Panels in fire and/or smoke rated assemblies shall be listed for the application and carry the appropriate rating for the assembly in which they are installed. 1.13 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of inechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of '/4"=1"-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessary limited)to the following: 1. Ductwork 2. Hydronic Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Fire sprinkler piping 5. Electrical conduit mains 1.14 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of inechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 4 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required clearances as specified in codes and regulations. H. The word "concealed" as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and/or duct is inaccessible when building is complete. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "push up" ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. I. The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. 1.15 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Proposed Product List: Include Products specified in Divisions 22 and 23 specifications. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, Products, and accessories in a single submittal. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Submit miscellaneous items specified on the drawings, but not covered in the specifications. Make no substitutions without prior approval from the Architect. 1.16 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. B. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three-ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide five sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Do not begin work until one (1) copy is returned. C. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 5 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 E. Contractor to provide manufacturers' recommended installation manuals for equipment. F. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. 1.17 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.18 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to blue-line prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, charge orders, alternations, reroutings, etc. As a condition of acceptance of the project, deliver to the Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.19 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. 1.20 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 1. Variable Frequency Drives. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 6 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Motors (open drip-proof squirrel cage) 3. Starters 4. Temperature Controls 5. Plumbing Fixture Trim 6. Thermometers 7. Pressure Gauges 8. Strainers 9. Air Filters 10. Access Doors 2.02 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s)for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.02 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Heavy Equipment 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 7 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand-carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. D. Clearances 1. Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. b. Aligned with other work. c. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7'0" headroom in storage spaces. b. 8'6" headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 4. Give the right-of way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. E. Access 1. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels. Furnish access panels for all mechanical equipment and valves requiring access in concealed locations for installation by contractor. 3.03 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. E. Initial fill of traps 1. Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p-traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 8 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. C. Direct connections to hydronic systems shall only be made through a reduced pressure back flow preventer. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O&M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.06 CONCRETE A. All poured in place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. B. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded with 3" of concrete. 3.07 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electrical Division). SET IN PLACE OR WIRED AND FURNISHED MOUNTED CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal MD MD ED overloads, resistance heaters c . 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and MD ED(a) ED overload rela s. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, ED(a) ED(a) ED thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. 4. Push-button stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control MD MD(b) MD(b) panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 9 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 5. 120 volt power for Building Automation System (BAS) panels, ED ED ED fire protection and boiler controls 6. Fire/smoke dampers, elevator vent MD MD ED(c) dampers Notes: a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If any of these devices carry the full load current to any motor or resistive element(s) they shall be connected by ED. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by MD and wired by ED shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. c. Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. Duct detectors furnished by ED, set in place by MD. General Note: The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. 3.08 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. 1. Piping and connection equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. 2. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. 3. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems shall be furnished with one additional set of filters for owner replacement. 4. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. 5. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. 6. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. 7. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. B. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, blow out all piping with air and then wash out with cleaning compounds. Then flush the system to remove of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc, required for this purpose. Clean the boiler and chiller by the same procedure. C. Clean the boiler by the same procedure. D. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with Section 221116. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 10 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.09 TESTING A. Test all drain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. B. Test all low pressure steam, condensate, heating water, snowmelt, reduced pressure domestic water piping, condenser water, and chilled water piping at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure before connecting to unit. C. Test all high pressure steam and condensate, domestic water service lines to PRV, fire lines, radiant panel (embedded in concrete) and anti-freeze piping at 200 psig hydro static pressure. D. Test all air, oil and gas piping under 60 psig air pressure. E. Test all refrigeration piping under 150 psig pressure using oil pumped, dry nitrogen and tapping of joints if there is any loss of pressure, soap each joint to find leaks. Charge with 10 psig refrigerant and test with halide torch or electronic leak detector. Evacuate using vacuum pump to 500 microns and purge twice with oil pumped, dry nitrogen. F. Test all high velocity ductwork from supply fan to boxes before ducts are concealed and before boxes are connected. All openings shall be capped off and partial sections of the duct to be tested using a fan capable of building 8" S.P. Use U-gauge manometer to test S.P. Repair all audible and visible leaks using smoke in ducts. G. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. H. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure. I. Furnish all instruments required for testing. 3.10 PLACING IN OPERATION A. Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and other foreign debris. B. Before final acceptance, clean or replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filters, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. C. The systems shall be put into operation. 1. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. 2. The contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through 1st year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 11 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Construction phase submittals, including engineer's response and any subsequent revised submittals. 2. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 3. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 4. Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 5. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 6. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and refrigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 7. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 8. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operation for each system. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 9. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 11. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under "Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 12. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. C. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. D. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.12 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. All refrigeration, boilers, and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 230010 Job No. MECHANICAL GENERAL 23 00 10 - 12 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 00 50"BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.02 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART2- PRODUCTS A. MOTORS 1. Furnish ball bearing, squirrel cage, open dripproof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V-belt drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. 2. Motors rated 1 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy (DOE) approved "energy efficienY', meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and shall meet NEMA 12-6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. DESIGNER NOTE: Omit the paragraph on starters if they are to be supplied by Division 16. B. STARTERS 1. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over current protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mark B258B, or A258B, three-phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversal, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be required. 2. Provide integral transformer and 120-volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 1 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 control circuits. 3. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115°/o of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 4. All motors 25 horsepower or greater shall be equipped with reduced voltage starters. C. BELT DRIVES 1. Provide belt drives with cast iron sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves. If fixed pitch sheaves are used, the MECHANICAL ENGINEER reserves the right to direct speed changes be made, if in his opinion, these are warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be bushed type. Provide two groove adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment. Use standard FHP, A, B, C and D Sections. FHP belt drives may be used for motors less than three horsepower. Select belt sections for drives for three horsepower and over from the following chart: MOTOR SPEEDS MOTOR SPEEDS H P 1750 1160 H P 1750 1160 3 A A 30 C C 5 A A 40 C C 7.5 B B 50 B or C C 10 B B 60 C C 15 B C 100 C D 25 C C 125 C D Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor schedule horsepower. When A-B sheaves are used, use B Section belts only. D. ACCESS DOORS 1. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surFace in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel for remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. E. ALTITUDE RATINGS 1. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer's ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. F. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS 1. For steel piping, construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. 2. For copper piping, construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. 3. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450°and 200 psi WOG and 250°F. 4. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Proximity of any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation and/or control devices and/or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 2 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor area of the equipment. 2. Where inertia bases are indicated, pour these bases within structural channel frames having mountings attached to the inside perimeter and furnished with supplementary spring units. Furnish bases with an 18 gauge sheet metal bottom welded in place to retain the concrete. Anchor bolts and reinforcing bars are to be set in the field, #5 reinforcing bars top and bottom, 12" o.c. both ways. Provide one#5 bar at corners, top and bottom, 2'x 2' long. The mounting housing shall have concrete anchors and form enclosures for the spring elements. No damping material shall be used between the inner and outer housing on mountings and mountings shall have a combination lifting and leveling adjustment and 1/4"thick neoprene acoustical friction pads bonded to the steel base. 3. Mount base mounted pumps and compressors (including temperature control compressors)on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1-1/2 times the combined weight of the pump and motor. Each inertia base for horizontally split case pumps shall include supports for base elbows at the suction and discharge connections. Where the concrete is "T" shaped, or other than rectangular, mounting shall be self contained concrete inserts with flush openings on the side of the foundation for spring adjustment or removal. 4. Mount supply and return centrifugal fans, cabinet fans and air handling units (where called for on plans) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1-1/2 times the combined weight of the fan and motor. Where centrifugal fan is used, mount fan and motor on common steel base. 5. Support each air or refrigeration compressor, (including temperature control compressor) base mounted pump, factory assembled air handing unit and fan by Mason Industries or equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows: GROUND SUPPORTED SLAB OR BASEMENT EQUIPMENT MASON Min Static Min Static Engr. Spec Defl. (in.) Engr. Spec. Defl. (in.) a. Refrigeration Machines (Note 2) 1)Absorption Machines AK 0.35 C-K 0.75 2) Centrifugal Chillers or Heat Pumps a) Cooler condenser Mounted Hermetic-Compressor s A-K 0.35 C-K 0.75 b) Cooler condenser alongside Hermetic-compressor s A-K 0.35 C-K 0.75 c) Open Type Compressors (Note 4) A-G-K 0.35 C-G-K 0.75 3) Refrigeration Reciprocating Compressors a) 500 RPM to 750 RPM B 0.75 B 1.5 Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 3 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 b) 751 RMP and over B 0.75 B 0.75 4) Reciprocating Chillers or Heat Pumps a) 500 RPM to 750 RPM C-K 0.75 C-K 1.5 b 751 RMP and over C-K 0.75 C-K 0.75 b. Pumps (Note 2) 1) Close Coupled a) Thru 5 HP A-J-K 0.35 B-J-K 0.75 b) 7'/2 HP and larger B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 2) Base mounted (Note 3) a) Up to 60 HP B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 b 75 HP and lar er B-J-K 0.75 BJK 1.5 c. Factory Assembled H &V Units 1) Curb Mounted Rooftop Units Y 1.0 Y 1.0 2) Suspended Units a) Thru 5 HP D 1.0 D 1.0 b) 7-1/2 HP and larger- 275 RPM TO 400 RPM D 1.5 D 1.5 c) 7-1/2 HP and larger- 401 RPM and over D 1.0 D 1.0 3) Floor Mounted Units a) Thru 5 HP A 0.35 B-H 0.75 b) 7-1/2 HP and larger- 275 to 401 RPM A 0.35 B 1.5. c) 7-1/2 HP to 40 HP- 401 RPM and over A 0.35 B 0.75 d) 50 HP and larger- 401 and over A 0.35 B 0.75 d. Air Compressors (Note2) 1) Tank Type B-J-L 0.75 B-J-L 0.75 2) Horiz, Vert, 1 or 2 Cylinder (Note 5) a) 275 RPM to 499 RPM B-J-L 2.5 B-J-L 2.5 b 500 RPM to 800 RPM B-J-L 1.5 B-J-L 1.5 e. Blowers 1) Utilities Sets a) Floor Mounted (Note 8) A 0.35 B 0.75 b) Roof Mounted B-J C 0.75 c) Suspended Unit (Note 8) -- -- D 2.5 2) Centrifugal Blowers (Note 9) A-J .035 B-J 3) Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans (Note 7) a) Suspended Units D Refer to Guide. b) Floor Mounted w/Motor on/in Fan Casing A 0.35 B-J Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 4 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 c) Floor Mounted Arrangement 1 or any Separately Mounted Motor A-J 0.35 B 0.75 f. Cooling Towers and Condensin Units A 0.35 C Minimum deflection called for in this specification are not"nominal" but certifiable minimums. The 0.75", 1.5", 2.5", 3.5", a 4.5" minimums should be selected from manufacturers nominal 1", 2", 3", 4", and 5" series respectively. Our 1965 callouts of 1" deflection for floor mounts was seldom, if ever, met because of infinite load and limited spring selection. The 0.75" is an attainable minimum form a 1" deflection series and should be insisted upon. If flexible spherical connectors are not to be used omit the letters K or L from the Engineering Spec. If stainless steel hose is required, substitute L or K. If stainless steel hose is not to be used with air compressors omit L. Vacuum, Condensate or Boiler Feed Pumps shall be mounted with their tanks on a common J base with deflections as specified for base mounted pumps. The base described in Spec. G is used under the drive side. Individual mountings as described in Spec C are used under the Cooler and Condenser. 6. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 7. Equipment with operating weight different than the installed weight, such as chillers and cooling towers and equipment exposed to wind, such as roof fans, cooling towers, etc., shall be mounted on spring mountings as directed in Mason Engineering Spec. B, but a housing shall be provided that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Limit stops shall be out of contract during normal operation. B. Piping 1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Piping a. Domestic hot and cold water piping one inch diameter and smaller shall be isolated with the Acousto-Plumb System of orange and blue pipe isolators, holders, and guide, as manufactured by LSP/Specialty Products Company, Tel (800) 854-3215. b. Isolate waste piping and domestic hot and cold water piping larger than one inch in diameter with Trisolator system of pipe isolators as manufactured by Elmdor/Stoneman, Tel. (818) 968-8699. c. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers or valve to directly touch the structure, studs, gypsum board, or other pipes. d. Copper waste piping must be completely wrapped with Lowry's acoustical pipe wrap. The wrap is manufactured by Harry A. Lowry, Tel. (818) 768-4661. C. Flexible Connections 1. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.03 PIPE HANGERS A. General 1. Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 5 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Hanger Rod Pipe Size Han er Spacin Diameter(Minimum a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. 1" 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1-1/4"throu h 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2-1/2"throu h 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4"through 5" 10 ft. 1/2" f. 6"throu h 10" 2 ft 5/8" . 12" and lar er 12 ft. 7/8" h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at'oints B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non-insulated copper piping and insulated copper heating piping and insulated domestic hot water and circulating water piping shall be copper plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip 500, Kin-Line felt lined 440-F or Michigan Hanger Company Series 102 with polyvinyl coating, with insulation over hangers. 2. Individual hangers for insulated cold piping (steel or copper) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 800, Kin Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 103. Hangers shall support pipe with hangers over the insulation. The system shall be complete with Auto Grip or Michigan Zinc plated steel shield, Pipe Shields or Kin-Line 460 zinc plated steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density glass fiber or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 3. Individual hangers for all insulated or non-insulated steel piping (except steam and high temperature hot water) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 400, Kin-Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 100. Hangers shall support pipe with insulation over hangers. 4. Individual hangers for steam and high temperature water piping (250°F and above) shall be adjustable swivel pipe rolls, similar to Grinnel No. 171, 181 or 174 with pipe covering protection saddle, similar to Grinnel No. 185-186 or 360° zinc plated steel shield for insulation thickness specified. C. Trapeze Hangers 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P-1000-3 or Kin Line 211, 371 or 372 equivalent by Elcen or Kindorff. System shall be selected to support five times the weight of thrust applied without failure. 2. All non-insulated steel pipe and insulated steel heating water pipe shall have standard pipe straps at each support. 3. All non-insulated copper pipe, insulated copper domestic hot and re-circulating water piping and insulated copper heating piping shall rest on neoprene sleeves and have standard pipe straps at each support. 4. All cold insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall rest on Fee and Mason Figure 81 or equivalent by unistrut, or Kin-Line, galvanized steel insulation shield or 360° galvanized steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density fiber glass or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Provide pipe strap over insulation at each support. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 5. All steam and high temperature hot water pipe shall have pipe covering protection saddle and shall be supported on Unistrut P-2474-3, pipe rollers or equivalent at each support. 6. See this Section, 3.02, Vibration Isolation for special hangers. Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 6 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. 3.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16"x 16". B. Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.06 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified procedure shall be employed. 3.07 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.08 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full-length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. 3.09 DUCTS A. Construct straight and smooth with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration. Internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow. Changes in duct dimensions and shape shall be gradual and uniform. Curved elbows, unless otherwise noted, to have centerline radius of at least 1-1/2 times the duct width. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall be arranged to permit air to make turns without appreciable turbulence and to remain quiet when the system is in Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 7 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 operation. Construction of ducts shall be per the details and recommendations of the latest edition of the ASHRAE handbook and U.M.C. The most stringent requirement governs in conflicts. "Duct mate" joint method may be utilized provided all portions of seam/joint materials are provided by "duct mate" and installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's standards. 3.10 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Install as required by NFPA pamphlet No. 90A, the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Mechanical Code and as required by local codes. Provide a duct access door to each fire damper and service access when architecture is restrictive. Furnish UL 555S labeled fire and fire/smoke dampers. Refer to architectural drawings for fire resistive ratings of walls, floors, ceilings, etc. 3.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.12 CLEANING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. Refer also to Division 01 specifications. B. Piping and connected equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. C. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. D. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems with disposable filters shall be furnished with one additional set of boxed filters for owner replacement. E. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. F. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. G. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. H. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 8 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.13 EXPANSION COMPENSATION AND SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Examine piping layout and provide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. D. Provide seismic bracing as required by code for all ducts, piping and equipment. 3.14 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1- or 2-part polysulphide caulking compound. D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.15 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, trenching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms uniformly to drain. Trench bottoms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support piping. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm bearing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock-free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2, 22, and 23 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and/or project specifications. Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 9 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. All pipe must be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 1. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten, backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum)with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). 2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T-99-57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. H. Pavement 1. Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms vertically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of pipe, but shall not exceed 36". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. I. Shoring 1. Provide all shoring required to perForm the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public. J. Surveying 1. Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10"), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. K. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic 1. Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals and lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. L. Surface Drainage and Ground Water 1. Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and trenching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditions. M. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of all damaged property. 3.16 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 10 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. 3.17 FIRE STOPPING A. Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. C. Requirements for specific systems: 1. Cold piping: Includes chilled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for "insulated piping" shall be provided. 2. Hot piping to 250°F includes domestic hot water, steam to 15 psig and heating hot water: The Contractor has the option of continuing the insulation through the penetration and providing firestopping for "insulated piping", or stopping the insulation on either side of the penetration and using firestopping for uninsulated piping". 3. High temperature piping, over 250°F or over 15 psig steam: Contractor shall stop insulation and provide firestopping for"high temperature piping". 3.18 HEAT TRACE A. Heat trace cable shall be installed by a licensed electrician. B. Apply the heat trace cable on the pipe after pressure testing. 1. Do not spiral wrap on pipe. 2. Make one wrap at valves. 3. Secure to pipe with methods approved by manufacturer. C. Apply"Electrically Traced" signs on resistance 20 mega ohms. D. Test with a 1000 VDC megger minimum resistance 20 mega ohms. E. Heat trace shall be sized as follows, based on -20°F ambient, to maintain 40°F pipe temperature: PIPE SIZE 1" INSULATION 2" INSULATION Less than 2" 3 w/ft 3 w/ft 2", 2-1/2", 3" 5 w/ft 3 w/ft 4", 5", 6" 8 w/ft 5 w/ft 8", 10", 12 " 8 w/ft ea. (2 cable circuits) 8 w/ft END OF SECTION 23 00 50 Job No. BASIC MATERIALS AND 23 00 50 - 11 METHODS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 17 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated. B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends. C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the followin: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company(The). B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type Job No. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE 23 05 17 - 1 SEALS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Provide NBR sealing elements in lieu of EPBM-rubber for sites wtih hydrocarbons present in the soil. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Presealed Systems. B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.04 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. 1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or outer dimension of pipe insulation for insulated pipe. Coordinate sleeve sizes with requirements of Section 230711 "Insulation". 3. Increase sleeve size as required to provide additional annular space for project specific seismic conditions. Coordinate sleeve sizes with requirements of Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls". 4. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." Job No. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE 23 05 17 - 2 SEALS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building. B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. 3.04 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 4 : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves Sleeve-seal fittings . 2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 4: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system Sleeve-seal fittings . 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3. Interior Partitions: a. Piping Smaller Than : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves PVC-pipe sleeves . b. Piping and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves . END OF SECTION 230517 Job No. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE 23 05 17 - 3 SEALS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 18 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ESCUTCHEONS A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener. B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. C. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew. D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed exposed-rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners. 2.02 FLOOR PLATES A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors. Job No. ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC 23 05 18 - 1 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. Escutcheons for New Piping: a. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge . b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brasstype with rough-brass finish. e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge. C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials. END OF SECTION 23 05 18 Job No. ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC 23 05 18 - 2 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 21 -THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gauges. 4. Test plugs. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gauges to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 METERS AND GAUGES MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Schedules" Article for applications of ineters and gauges for specific services. B. Meters and gauges and their appurtenances applied to potable-water systems shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. 2.02 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. Job No. THERMOMETERS AND 23 05 21 - 1 PRESSURE GAUGES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. e. Trerice, H. O. Co. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. g. Winters Instruments - U.S. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Precision die cast aluminum; 9-inch (229-mm) nominal size. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens front, filled with non-toxic, blue organic liquid. Red color not permitted due to similarity with red reflecting mercury. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with white finish and permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F (deg C), V-shaped backing for optimum readability. 7. Lens: Acrylic to 300 deg F, glass above 300 deg F. 8. Stem: Aluminum, tapered to fit standard industrial thermowells and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connection: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 2.03 THERMOWELLS A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 3/4, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: ASME B1.1 screw threads, 1-1/4i thread to mate with the 1-1/4 male thread for liquid-in-glass and light-activated type thermometers. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.04 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. c. Mifjoco Corporation. d. Trerice, H. O. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Stainless steel, sealed open-front; 4-1/2 inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brass socket. Job No. THERMOMETERS AND 23 05 21 - 2 PRESSURE GAUGES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum white finished with permanently etched black scale markings graduated in psi (kPa). 8. Pointer: Aluminum, black, adjustable 9. Lens: Acrylic. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. 2.05 GAUGE ATTACHMENTS A. Pressure snubbers: For dampening of pressure pulsations to prolong gauge life. ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4(DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device consisting of sintered stainless steel with no moving parts. Include extension for use on insulated piping. B. Syphons: Required on steam and steam condensate systems to form a barrier of water in the coil, preventing steam from attacking the bourdon tube solder joints in the pressure gauge. Loop-shaped section of pipe with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads; welded steel, 600psi/750 deg F inax. C. Valves: Required on all pressure gauge installations. Brass ball or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 2.06 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the following: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid or to center of pipe, Job No. THERMOMETERS AND 23 05 21 - 3 PRESSURE GAUGES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 whichever is smaller, and in vertical position in piping tees. Account for thickness of insulation when determining thermowell and associated thermometer lengths. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws. G. Install direct-mounted pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at the most readable position. H. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids (except steam). I. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for steam. J. Install test plugs in piping tees. K. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. L. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. M. Install pressure gauges in locations indicated on drawings. N. In addition to locations shown on drawings, install pressure gauges at the following locations: 1. Discharge of each pressure reducing valve. O. Install thermometers at locations indicated on drawings. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gauges, machines, and equipment. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust faces of ineters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility. 3.04 THERMOMETER TYPE AND SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Provide liquid-in-glass thermometer of scale range based on system type as follows. Contractor option to provide light-activated thermometer for all systems except steam and condensate: 1. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 120 deg F. 2. Domestic Hot and Recirculation Water: 0 to 160 deg F. Job No. THERMOMETERS AND 23 05 21 - 4 PRESSURE GAUGES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.05 PRESSURE-GAUGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water, upstream of service water pressure reducing valve station: 0 to 200 psi. B. Domestic Hot, Cold and Recirculation, downstream of pressure reducing valve station: 0 to 160 psi. C. Natural Gas inside building (less than 15 psig): 0 to 15 psi. END OF SECTION 23 05 21 Job No. THERMOMETERS AND 23 05 21 - 5 PRESSURE GAUGES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 3. High-performance butterfly valves. 4. Bronze lift check valves. 5. Bronze swing check valves. 6. Iron gate valves. 7. Chainwheels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"for valve tags and schedules. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 1 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head. 5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"Article. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 2 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. NIBCOINC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. 2.03 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCOINC. e. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One-or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel. Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 3 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.04 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Class 150, Single-Flange, High-Performance ButterFly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal. b. Hammond Valve. c. NIBCOINC. d. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 285 psig at 100 deg F. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel. e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane. g. Disc: Carbon steel. h. Service: Bidirectional. 2.05 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCOINC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE. 2.06 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCOINC. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 4 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. NIBCOINC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 2.07 IRON GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCOINC. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 5 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install chainwheels on operators for ball valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service except Steam: ball, or globe valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with nonmetallic disc. Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 6 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 3.05 DOMESTIC-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS, bronze. 6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc. 3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125. 5. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS. 6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125. 7. Eccentric Plug Valves: 175 CWP, resilient seating. 3.06 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. BronzeValves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 , bronze nonmetallic disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 2. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150 , single flange. 3. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125 , NRS . END OF SECTION 23 05 23 Job No. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 23 05 23 - 7 HVAC PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Equipment supports. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Metal framing systems. 2. Equipment supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surFace of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel . 2.02 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 1 FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel . 2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. D. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. G. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 2 FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. J. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 3. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.03 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 3 FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. I. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. END OF SECTION 230529 Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 4 FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. C. Valve numbering scheme. D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Blue. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC 23 05 53 - 1 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.02 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Red. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.03 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC 23 05 53 - 2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh. 2.04 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook . B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-1l-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.05 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of inechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC 23 05 53 - 3 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 3.04 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Chilled Water: 2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round. c. Gas: 2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Hot Water: Green. b. Gas: Yellow. 3. Letter Color: a. Hot Water: White. b. Gas: Black. 3.05 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC 23 05 53 - 4 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 05 93 -TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Variable-air-volume systems. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Certified TAB reports. D. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 1 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified byAABC or NEBB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB or . 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC orNEBB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner . D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 2 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 3 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. PerForm testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111 and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation," Section 23 07 16 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built"duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airFlow blockages. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 4 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts." 3.05 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airFlow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan-perFormance data. C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 5 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airFlow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set system at maximum indicated airFlow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 3.06 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Measure water flow through all circuits. B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures. D. Measure inlet steam pressure. E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.08 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 6 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.09 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 7 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airFlows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Terminal units. 4. Balancing stations. 5. Position of balancing devices. E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfln. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inChes wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. I. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. F. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 8 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. I. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. I. Operating set point in Btu/h. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h. G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfin. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 9 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual air flow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final air flow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. J. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.10 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. 2. Check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at 100percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. B. Finallnspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 10 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Construction Manager. 2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager. 3. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of ineasurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 230593 Job No. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 23 05 93 - 11 BALANCING FOR HVAC GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 07 11 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. 2. Fire-rated insulation systems. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 32 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 2. Division 32 Section "Steam Distribution"for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 3. Division 323 Section "Metal Ducts"for duct liners. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ASJ: All-service jacket. B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. E. SSL: Self-sealing lap. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.05 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CelI-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type I I for sheet materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. 2.03 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 2.04 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. s. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.05 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. 2.06 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.02 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.03 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surFace and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surFaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 3.05 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible with service temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 7 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.06 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 8 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Install removable insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.07 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 9 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.08 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surFace being insulated. 3.09 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 10 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. 3.10 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.11 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.12 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Supply, return and outdoor air. Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork. 2. Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 11 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 do not require an additional duct wrap. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.13 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork B. Plenum insulation for supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor-air ducts shall be any of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork 3.14 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. D. Domestic hot-water storage tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. 3.15 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire-suppression piping. 2. Below-grade piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.16 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 12 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1-1/2 inches thick. B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 3/4 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral Fiber: 1-1/2 inches thick. R c. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. 3.17 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material. END OF SECTION 23 07 11 Job No. MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 11 - 13 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 11 23 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Concrete bases. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig. B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less . C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 1 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight. D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's written permission. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 2 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 08 31 13 "Access Doors and Frames." PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. 5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. OmegaFlex, Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division. c. Titeflex. d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp. 2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Coating: PE with flame retardant. a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of inetal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 3 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets. 7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig. C. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type L. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern. 2. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150. a. Gasket Material: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. b. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel or stainless steel. 3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory-applied, extruded PE a minimum of 0.022 inch thick. 2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches B. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 4 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. 2.05 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 5 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. C. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 3.03 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774. C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. D. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.04 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 6 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. 2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. 3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers. 5. Prohibited Locations: a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 7 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector. B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. C. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping. 3.06 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 8 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned. G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. 3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. C. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. D. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.08 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 9 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.09 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.10 PAINTING A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping. B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1 D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat). d. Color: Gray. C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Latex OverAlkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). d. Color: Gray. 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). d. Color: Gray. D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish. 3.11 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 10 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground natural-gas pipingshall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping. 2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following: 1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping. 2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 3.15 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following: 1. Bronze plug valve. B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 231123 Job No. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS 23 11 23 - 11 PIPING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall roundducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular DucULongitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.02 SINGLE-WALL ROUNDDUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. SEMCOIncorporated. c. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct(minor dimension). C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible." D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.04 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Owens Corning. d. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. Rubatex International, LLC 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. 4. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. C. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 2.05 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install roundducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories"for fire and smoke dampers. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surFace free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.03 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. b. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. c. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of inetal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum TesY' in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.07 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories"for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of inetal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 3.08 START U P A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.09 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. B. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. C. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2)Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. D. Outdoor-Air(Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. E. Liner: 1. Supply Air Ducts: Type I Flexible elastomeric 1/2"thick. 2. Return Air Ducts: Type I Flexible elastomeric 1/2"thick. 3. Supply Fan Plenums: Type II Flexible elastomeric 1/2"thick. F. Elbow Configuration: Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to ]500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, ]2 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, l4 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. G. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 Job No. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 33 00 -AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Duct-mounted access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Duct accessory hardware. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Manual volume damper installations. b. Control-damper installations. c. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. C. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.03 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm. D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg. E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached. Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch- thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball. M. Accessories: 1. Screen Type: Bird . 2.04 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Ruskin Company. 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze . b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. C. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.05 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. C. Frames: 1. Hat shaped. 2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Interlocking, gusseted corners. D. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel . 4. 0.064 inch thick single skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F. Bearings: 1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company. B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 3 hours. E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.05 thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links. 2.07 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-l-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.08 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart&Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.09 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart& Cooley, Inc. B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wgnegative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. C. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards,"for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install firedampers according to UL listing. Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 H. Connect ducts to duct silencers with flexible duct connectors . I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 2. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 3. At drain pans and seals. 4. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 5. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 6. Control devices requiring inspection. 7. Elsewhere as indicated. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 2. Head and Hand Access: 18 by l0 inches. 3. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. K. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with . 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. END OF SECTION 233300 Job No. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 7 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators. 2. In-line centrifugal fans. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base fan-perFormance ratings on actual Project site elevations . 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. 2. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Job No. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panasonic. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. PennBarry. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. D. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. F. Accessories: 1. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. 2.02 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panasonic. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. PennBarry. B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. C. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing. D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. E. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Vibration Isolators: a. Type: Elastomeric hangers . Job No. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers having a static deflection of . Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Job No. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 8. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust belt tension. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. D. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 233423 Job No. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Louver face diffusers. 2. Fixed face grilles . PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Louver Face Diffuser : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. a. METALAIRE, Inc. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Price Industries. d. Titus. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect . 5. Mounting: Surface. 6. Pattern: Foure-way core style. 2.02 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Fixed Face Grille : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. a. Krueger. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Price Industries. d. Titus. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 5. Accessory: Filter. Job No. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND 23 37 13 - 1 GRILLES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the PerFormance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 Job No. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND 23 37 13 - 2 GRILLES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 54 00 - FURNACES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filters. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each of the following: 1. Furnace. 2. Thermostat. 3. Humidistat. 4. Air filter. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals for each of the following: 1. Furnace and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filter. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Job No. FURNACES 23 54 00 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: 1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion: a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years. b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bryant Heating & Cooling Systems; Div. of United Technologies Corp. 2. Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp. 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. Trane. 5. York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group. C. General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Condensing Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces,"and with NFPA 54. D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel. 1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. E. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive. 1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. F. Type of Gas: Natural. G. Heat Exchanger: 1. Primary: Aluminized steel. Job No. FURNACES 23 54 00 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Secondary: Stainless steel. H. Burner: 1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety two-stage main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board. 2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition. I. Gas-Burner Safety Controls: 1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset. J. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked. K. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories; diagnostic light with viewport. L. Accessories: 1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent through roof. 2. PVC Plastic Vent Materials: a. PVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 1785. b. PVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 2466, socket type. c. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1) PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2) Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3) Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.02 THERMOSTATS A. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Controls." B. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounting, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with manual switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings. C. Single -Stage, Heating-Only Thermostat: Wall-mounting unit with fan on-automatic selector. D. Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling. 1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair. 2. Cable Jacket Color: Blue. Job No. FURNACES 23 54 00 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 AIR FILTERS A. Disposable Filters: Insert dimension thick fiberglass mediain sheet metal frame. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for gas piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54. B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions. C. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor. D. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Job No. FURNACES 23 54 00 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 b. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal. D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." E. Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping" for installation and joint construction of refrigerant piping. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. 3.05 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casings. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational. B. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's operational checklist. C. Measure and record airflows. D. Verify proper operation of capacity control device. E. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating perFormance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating perFormance and system efficiency. Job No. FURNACES 23 54 00 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.07 CLEANING A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 235400 Job No. FURNACES 23 54 00 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 23 82 39 - UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils. 2. Propeller unit heaters with coils. 3. Wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CWP: Cold working pressure. C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Location and size of each field connection. 3. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 5. Location and arrangement of integral controls. 6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Job No. UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s)for each filter installed. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Carrier Corporation. 3. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 4. International Environmental Corporation. 5. McQuay International. 6. Trane. C. Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440. 1. Comply with UL 2021. D. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect. 1. Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet. 2. Control Access Door: Key operated. 3. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 4 inches high with leveling bolts. 4. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch-wide piping end pocket. E. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. F. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware. G. Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor. Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. 2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Job No. UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. H. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control voltage transformer. 2. Unit-mounted thermostat with the following features. a. Heat-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Manual fan speed switch. d. Adjustable deadband. e. Exposed set point. f. Exposed indication. g. Deg F indication. 3. Unit-mounted temperature sensor. 4. Unoccupied period override push button. 5. Data entry and access port. a. Input data includes room temperature, and occupied and unoccupied periods. b. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air temperature, entering-water temperature, operating mode, and status. I. Terminal Controller: 1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day. 2. Unoccupied Period Override: Two hours. 3. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operations: a. Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain setback room temperature. 4. Heating Coil Operations: a. Occupied Periods: Energize electric-resistance coil to provide heating if room temperature falls below thermostat set point. b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and energize electric-resistance coil if room temperature falls below setback temperature. 5. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. J. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection. 2.02 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Engineered Air Ltd. 3. McQuay International. 4. Trane. B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. C. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls. D. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping. Job No. UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 E. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. F. Electric-Resistance Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation. 1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection of heaters. 2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material. G. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. H. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated, explosion proof. I. Control Devices: 1. Unit-mounted thermostat. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. D. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. G. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion. Job No. UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 238239 Job No. UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 00 10--ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.03 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, , civil,and mechanical, drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 1 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 minimum requirements: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 72— National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 101 —Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 110—Emergency Power Systems 5. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 8. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. International Building Code. 13. International Mechanical Code. 14. International Fire Code. 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install". "Furnish" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. "Install" means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words "accept" or "acceptable" denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Architect is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Architect. 1.06 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 2 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.07 PERMITS, FEES & NOTICES A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and certificates that may be necessary for the full completion of the work. Furnish the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval from the AHJ over the electrical installation. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.08 TESTS A. Upon completion of all work and adjustment of all equipment, provide complete operational tests of all electrical equipment provided under this division. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Guarantee that all work governed by this division shall be free of defects in workmanship, materials and parts for a period of one (1) year after written acceptance. Promptly repair, revise, and replace defects as directed with no additional cost to the Owner(lamps and fuses are exempt). 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Architect at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCad electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings)of record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads `RECORD DRAWINGS' or similar. Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 3 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Architect of proposed changes before proceeding with work. 1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.13 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2- GENERAL 2.01 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. 2.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, per Division 1 requirements.. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Do not begin work until (1) copy is returned. Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 4 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Submit shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Architect for his review. The review by the Architect will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. E. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's copies of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. 2.03 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s)for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. 2.04 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified generically (no manufacturer's name listed), no prior review by the Consulting Electrical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 5 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Such substitutions shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by a full description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions will not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perForm the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Architect/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surFaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. 3.02 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. PerForm all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300-5 of the National Electrical Code. B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specially treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have the width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8") on each side of the open trench. Unless otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 6 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 equal to the original construction, to the original grade with the same type of material, and to the same depths and limits as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Architect, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. 3.04 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Architect. B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. C. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect before proceeding with drilling. D. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 7 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. 1. Electrical distribution equipment under 600V 2 2. Fire alarm system 2 3. Data system 1 4. Cable TV system 1 D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four(24) hours after requested. E. Clean up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. F. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Architect, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. G. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified. Submit three (3) copies of a typewritten test report for the Architect for his approval. 1. Record the full load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and for each feeder leaving the main distribution panelboard. Readings shall be taken with the maximum installed load connected and in operation. 2. PerForm a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus structure and cable connections to verify that all connections are mechanically and electrically tight. 3. Measure the resistance to ground for the service ground, which shall not exceed ten (10) ohms under normal soil moisture conditions. If required, install additional ground provisions in a manner accepted by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR ROOFS A. Raceways penetrating roofs shall be installed in a manner to preserve the integrity of the roof. Provide flashing and counter flashing for all roof penetrations required for the work. Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 8 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Provide weatherproof duplex receptacles on roof so that no equipment installed on the roof is more than twenty-five feet (25'-0") from a receptacle. Connect to nearest receptacle circuit unless indicated on plans. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. B. Provide covered walkway lights and obstruction lights which shall be kept burning continuously between sunset and sunrise where required. C. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary facilities from the site. D. The General Contractor shall pay for all power and light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is taken from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. E. The cutoff date for power cost allocation where permanent meters are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project, whichever shall be the earlier date. 3.10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the Mechanical Equipment Wiring and Connections Schedule. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifications and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final electrical connections to all equipment. C. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. END OF SECTION 26 00 10 Job No. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 10 - 9 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire &Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company. B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Job No. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 - 1 POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway . C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Metal-clad cable, Type MC. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. Job No. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 - 2 POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least [6 inches (150 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] of slack. 3.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 26 05 19 Job No. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 - 3 POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 05 26- GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Grounding systems and equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)thick. C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. Job No. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) . PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.02 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with utility grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. Job No. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 2 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for taps to equipment grounding terminals. 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units. 10. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service locatoin, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm) grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. G. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. Job No. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 3 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least [three] <Insert number> rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet(6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. Job No. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 4 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 Job No. GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 5 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 05 29- HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 "Roof Accessories." Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 1 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 2 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by [scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in] NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib (90 kg). C. Mounting and Anchorage of SurFace-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm)thick. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 3 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.04 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 [Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 Job No. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 4 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures and cabinets for eleectrical wiring. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Eletrical metal tubing. B. ENT: Eletrical nonmetallic tubing. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. RNC: Rlgid nonmetallic conduit. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT and Cable: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT: Die-cast, set-screw or compression Gland type. 2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. C. RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 2.03 METAL WIREWAYS A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. C. SurFace Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloyType FD, with gasketed cover. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 E. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 Ib (32 kg). 1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1. G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J. Gangable boxes are allowed. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. L. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.06 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray for concrete Green for fiberglass 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC". B. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with [open] [closed] [integral closed] bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of fiberglass. 1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 2.07 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm)thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC.. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC or Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried, unless noted to be concrete-encased on drawings. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring: a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locatoins, Subject to Occassional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. b. Handoles and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-Ibf vertical loading. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm)trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. 3. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete or earth. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to [RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC][rigid steel conduit] before rising above the floor. J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-Ib (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. Q. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70 at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. T. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 fittings that accomodate temperature change listed for location: 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C)temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C)temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for [recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures,] equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. V. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walis: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. X. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Y. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Z. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Install conduits a minimum of 24 inches below finished grade. 2. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter. 3. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork." 4. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork ." Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade, placing them 24 inches (600mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES 1. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 3. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 4. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. 5. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 1. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 4. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. 5. Cust sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surFaces of walls. 6. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 7. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed [or unless seismic criteria require different clearance]. 8. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. 9. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Selants"for materials and installation. 10. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceiings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 11. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordinatoin with roofing work. 12. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mehcanical sleeve seals. 13. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes"for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway andsleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.08 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 Job No. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 26 05 33 - 9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 05 53- IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section Includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage if applicable.. C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR 26 05 53 - 1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.03 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. a. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, <Insert inscription>. b. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, <Insert inscription>. 2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2. Fault Current Values: Indicate maximum available fault current and date of fault current calculation in accordance with NEC 110.24. 2.05 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. 2.07 CABLE TIES A. General-Purpose: 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 Ib, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR 26 05 53 - 2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench [or concrete envelope]exceeds 16 inches overall. I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A:Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label within 12 inches of junction boxes and/or cabinets. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems:: Identify the following systems with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands: Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR 26 05 53 - 3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 3. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 4. Control Wiring: Green and red. C. Power-Circuit Conductor ldentification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use marker tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. D. Branch-Circuit Conductor ldentification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and circuit number. F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. 1. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Aplly to exterior of door, cover or other access. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. G. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Disconnect switches. d. Enclosed circuit breakers. e. Motor starters. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR 26 05 53 - 4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 f. Push-button stations. g. Contactors. h. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. i. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. j. Television/audio components, racks and controls. k. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. I. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. G. Color-Coding for Phase nad Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 20 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 2 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR 26 05 53 - 5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. I. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 Job No. IDENTIFICATION FOR 26 05 53 - 6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 24 16- PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. Job No. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.[ Submit final versions after load balancing.] 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surFaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard)to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Job No. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Flush-and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surFace-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 7. Directory Card: Typewritten inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. B. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 4. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 5. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. D. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. Job No. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: Circuit breaker . E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.04 LOAD CENTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67. C. Mains: Lugs only. Job No. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses. 2.05 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected ratingto meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 4. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. C. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. D. Install filler plates in unused spaces. E. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. F. Comply with NECA 1. Job No. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. PerForm each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 262416 Job No. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 27 13- ELECTRICITY METERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by utility company . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. KY Pulse: Term used by the metering industry to describe a method of ineasuring consumption of electricity that is based on a relay opening and closing in response to the rotation of the disk in the meter. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, store, and handle modular meter center according to NECA 400. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and components they furnish as follows: 1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power services. 2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY A. Meters will be furnished by utility company. B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company. C. Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit ratings. Job No. ELECTRICITY METERING 26 27 13 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Modular Meter Center: Factory-coordinated assembly of a main service disconnect device, wireways, tenant meter socket modules, and tenant feeder circuit breakers arranged in adjacent vertical sections. Assembly shall be complete with interconnecting buses and other features as specified below. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Comply with requirements of utility company for meter center. 3. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure. 4. Main Disconnect Device: Circuit breaker, series-combination rated for use with downstream feeder and branch circuit breakers. 5. Tenant Feeder Circuit Breakers: Series-combination-rated molded-case units, rated to protect circuit breakers in downstream tenant and to house loadcenters and panelboards that have 10,000-A interrupting capacity. a. Identification: Complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems"with legend identifying tenanYs address. b. Physical Protection: Tamper resistant, with hasp for padlock. 6. Meter Socket: Rating coordinated with indicated tenant feeder circuit rating. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1. B. Install meters furnished by utility company. Install raceways and equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend grounding connections as required by utility company. C. Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation requirements. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required by NFPA 70. 2. Provide egraved nameplate at each meter indicating unit number. END OF SECTION 262713 Job No. ELECTRICITY METERING 26 27 13 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 27 26 -WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Communications outlets. 5. Cord and plug sets. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Job No. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.03 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 2.04 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed -through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 2.05 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES A. Description: 1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. Job No. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.06 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: 1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. 3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.07 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 2.08 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES A. Residential-Grade, Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)"Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. B. Weather-Resistant and Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section, when installed in wet and damp locations. 2.09 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic . 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum "in-use"type with lockable cover. 2.10 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. Job No. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down,. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. Job No. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3A2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative]: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of ineasurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 262726 Job No. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices"for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color-rendering index. D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. Job No. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.)for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. Job No. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. 2.04 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 2.05 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. Job No. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.07 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start[, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts] unless otherwise indicated. 1. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walis unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire. D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101. Job No. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265100 Job No. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Poles and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 51 00 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color-rendering index. C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. E. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. F. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.04 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. B. Live Load: Single load of SOO lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map. D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit Job No. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 1 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. Job No. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 2 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. K. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. L. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. M. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Job No. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 3 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.)for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M. 1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection"Article. 2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of[1.1] <Insert number> to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws. E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2.04 STEEL POLES A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall. 1. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support. B. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace. 1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted adapter, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts. 2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 3. Match pole material and finish. C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. Job No. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.02 POLE INSTALLATION A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. 3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk. C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 3.03 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Job No. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 5 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. C. Illumination Tests: 1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s): a. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265600 Job No. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 6 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 26 80 10- ELECTRIC SNOWMELT AND GUTTER MELT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes snow and ice melting on roofs and in gutters and downspouts with the following electric heating cables: 1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's model numbers, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for each electric heating cable required. 3. Include dimensions of all cabinets. 4. Include fabrication materials. B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. 1. Include plans showing heat trace locations, ambient thermostat locations, circuit load, and zoning. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Include dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Include furnishing all equipment, material and labor ncessary to test, troubleshoot, adjust, repair or replace any component or part of the system which, in the opinoin of the Owner's Representative, malfunctions or is found defective during this Job No. ELECTRIC SNOWMELT AND 26 80 10 - 1 GUTTER MELT SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years or two full heating seasons, whichever is greater, from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bylin Engineering 2. Easy Heat; a division of EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3. Nelson Heat Trace; a division of EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. Raychem; a brand of Tyco Thermal Controls LLC. B. Comply with IEEE 515.1. C. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16 AWG, tinned, stranded copper bus wires embedded in crosslinked conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled, nonheating leads with connectors at one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once without overheating. D. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin. E. Cable Cover: Tinned-copper braid and polyolefin outerjacket with ultraviolet inhibitor. F. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F. G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. H. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Maximum Heat Output: 12 W/ft.. 2.02 CONTROLS A. Precipitation and Temperature Sensor for Snow Melting on Roofs and in Gutters: 1. Automatic control with manual on, automatic, and standby/reset switch. 2. Precipitation and temperature sensors shall sense the surface conditions of roof and gutters and shall be programmed to energize the cable as follows: a. Temperature Span: 34 to 44 deg F. b. Adjustable Delay-Off Span: 30 to 90 minutes. c. Energize Cables: Following two -minute delay if ambient temperature is below set point and precipitation is detected. d. De-Energize Cables: On detection of a dry surface plus time delay. 3. Corrosion-proof and waterproof enclosure suitable for outdoor mounting, for controls and precipitation and temperature sensors. 4. Minimum 30-A contactor to energize cable or close other contactors. Job No. ELECTRIC SNOWMELT AND 26 80 10 - 2 GUTTER MELT SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described: 1. Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance heating cable. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Electric Heating-Cable Installation for Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Install on roof and in gutters and downspouts with clips furnished by manufacturer that are compatible with roof, gutters, and downspouts. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. PerForm the following tests and inspections: 1. Perform megger test for each heat trace circuit. 2. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing. 3. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultaneously. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Job No. ELECTRIC SNOWMELT AND 26 80 10 - 3 GUTTER MELT SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage during construction. B. Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables. END OF SECTION 26 80 10 Job No. ELECTRIC SNOWMELT AND 26 80 10 - 4 GUTTER MELT SYSTEMS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 27 00 10- COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete communications (Voice/Data/Television) systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all communications systems. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Service Providers or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.03 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the technology systems drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being perFormed under this division, examine the following drawings and specifications: a. Architectural b. Structural c. Civil d. Mechanical e. Electrical 2. If any discrepancies occur between other drawings and specifications and the technology systems drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 3. Technology Systems drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 4. Coordinate the communications work with the General Contractor and/or the Electrical Contractor, and be responsible to them for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate communications work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 5. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 1 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 6. In acceptance or rejection of installed communications systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 72— National Fire Alarm Code 3. NFPA 101 —Life Safety Code 4. All applicable State and Local Codes 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 7. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117 8. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 9. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 10. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 11. International Building Code 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 13. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) publications 14. Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA) standards and publications B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the telecommunications, cable television, and satellite television service providers furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install". "Furnish" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. "Install" means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words "accept" or "acceptable" denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement and location of outlets, devices, main/intermediate distribution frames, major pathways, and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 2 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 Architect is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Architect. 1.06 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.07 PERMITS, FEES 8� NOTICES A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and certificates that may be necessary for the full completion of the work. Furnish the Architect with a certificate of final inspection and approval from the AHJ over the electrical installation. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.08 TESTS A. Upon completion of all work and adjustment of all equipment, provide complete operational tests of all communications systems provided under this division. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must be trained in the installation of structured cabling systems by the applicable manufacturer. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Guarantee that all work governed by this division shall be free of defects in workmanship, materials and parts for a minimum period of one (1) year after written acceptance. Promptly repair, revise, and replace defects as directed with no additional cost to the Owner. B. Where specific lists of communications infrastructure manufacturers are listed, Contractor shall provide manufacturers such that extended warranties, at a minimum period of fifteen (15) years after installation, available for complete systems are provided, as follows: 1. Amp NETConnect solution. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 3 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Leviton Voice & Data/ Berk-Tek solution. 3. CommScope/Uniprise solution. 4. Ortronics/Superior Essex solution. C. Where extended warranties are to be provided, Contractor shall be fully certified by applicable manufacturer for install as to provide such extended warranty. 1.11 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. a. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. b. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. c. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Shop Drawings: For communications systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. a. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. b. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. c. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For installer, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three-ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner, or in same format in an Adobe PDF file. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Do not begin work until (1)copy is returned. E. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Architect for his review. The review by the Architect will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. F. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. G. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 4 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's copies (two of each) of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. H. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, minimum 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms containing cross-connects, distribution frames, or other communications equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with mechanical and electrical equipment. Equipment shall be drawn to scale. 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of communications drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Architect and Engineer at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCAD electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings)of record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads `RECORD DRAWINGS' or similar. 1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Architect of proposed changes before proceeding with work. D. All outages of pre-established telecommunications service shall be scheduled with the Owner and Service Provider five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. 1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.15 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 5 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the system operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, Engineer or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. C. All materials shall be acceptable for installation only if in compliance with requirements set forth in this specification. 2.02 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s)for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. 2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified generically (no manufacturer's name listed), no prior review by the Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 6 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such substitutions shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by a full description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions will not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perForm the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring specific positioning. D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Architect/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. 3.02 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of communications work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. PerForm all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300-5 of the National Electrical Code. B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specially treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have the width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8") on each side of the open trench. Unless otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 7 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 equal to the original construction, to the original grade with the same type of material, and to the same depths and limits as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Architect, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. 3.04 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Architect. B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. C. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect before proceeding with drilling. D. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for installation. B. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 8 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received, all necessary tests have been demonstrated as "PASS", and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four(24) hours after requested. E. Clean up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the communications installation and leave the premises and all equipment, outlets, patchpanels, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. 3.08 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR ROOFS A. Raceways penetrating roofs shall be installed in a manner to preserve the integrity of the roof. Provide flashing and counter flashing for all roof penetrations required for the work. B. Conduits routed above roofs shall be installed a minimum of twelve inches (12") above the finished roof surface, supported on metal stands installed with flashing and counter flashing, with maximum spacing of ten feet(10'-0"). 3.09 REMODELING PROVISIONS A. Existing systems and conditions shown on the drawings are provided for guidance only. The Communications Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall include in his bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing conduits, cables, devices, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new and existing communications systems to all other work required for this project. B. Where the reuse of existing conduits, outlets, junction boxes, etc., is permissible, make certain that the cabling is continuous from distribution point to outlet. Provide modifications to assure that system shall not pass through outlets or junction boxes which may be rendered inaccessible by changes to be made to the building. Existing conduits, cable, devices, etc., which shall be removed shall become the property of this Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. Connect new work to existing in a manner that will assure proper grounding and bonding techniques throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code, BICSI standards, and ANSI J-STD-607. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 9 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Remodel Work Cutting and Patching: The Contractor shall perform cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc., as required to install or remove communications equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be performed so as to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plastering, or the structure which are to be reused, resurfaced, plastered or painted under another division of these specifications. E. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling work, cutting and patching etc., performed by the other trades. Remove or relocate existing communications conduits, cables, devices, and other equipment as necessary. F. All outages on portions of existing communications systems shall be minimized and shall be at a time and of duration as accepted by the Owner. 3.10 OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide required communications connections to Owner-furnished equipment. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. END OF SECTION 27 00 10 Job No. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 10 - 10 PROVISIONS GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Coaxial cable. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patchpanels, and cross-connects. 4. Structured Media Cabinets and components 5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. E. LAN: Local area network. F. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 1 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Reference Section 271000 -Communications General Provisions. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outleUconnector. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling. B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment. C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 2 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A. 2.03 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Superior Essex Inc. 4. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products. C. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. 2.04 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 2. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products. 3. Ortronics. 4. CommScope/ Uniprise. C. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. 2.05 COAXIAL CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Belden Inc. 2. Coleman Cable, Inc. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Superior Essex, Inc. C. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 3 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz. D. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM. 1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations. E. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television EquipmenY' and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution"Articles. Types are as follows: 1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2.06 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 2. Ortronics. 3. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect. 4. CommScope/ Uniprise. C. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms. 2.07 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. B. Workstation Outlets: One-or Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single-gang faceplate. 1. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP and coaxial work area cords. 2. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label. 2.08 STRUCTURED MEDIA CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Leviton. 2. On-Q/Legrand. 3. Channelmaster. B. Enclosure: White powder-coated steel, flush mounted in standard 16-inch center wall stud construction, with multiple conduit knockouts and opening for power module. 1. Listing: UL 1863. 2. Compliance: a. ANSI/TIA-568-C. b. ANSI/TIA-570-B. c. ANSI/TIA-607. 3. Cover: White powder-coated steel, for flush-mounting of enclosure, affixed with screws. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 4 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Connectivity: Compact voice and television distribution module for mounting within structured media enclosure. 1. Configuration: a. 1x9 voice distribution module, 110-style IDC connectors. b. 1x4 passive 1GHz video splitter. 2. Listing: UL listed. 3. Compliance: a. ANSI/TIA-568-A. b. FCC Part 68. 2.09 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1. B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. C. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results. D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service providers. 3.02 WIRING METHODS A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces. Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 5 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. E. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 6 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURED MEDIA CABINETS A. Configure and install Structured Media Cabinet assembly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install structured media enclosure flush with wall, plumb to floor. C. Enclosure cover shall adequately hide any enclosure overcut in wall finish. D. Terminate all cabling on distribution modules unless coiled for spare. Terminate cables in accordance with industry standards. E. Provide labeling on all cabling to to identify served locations. 3.05 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 5e, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 7 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 a. Test for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 271500 Job No. COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 - 8 HORIZONTAL CABLING GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 280513-CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Optical fiber cabling. 3. Fire alarm wire and cable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. B. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical loss test set. C. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. D. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. B. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials. C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 1 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. C. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.02 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP NetConnect. 3. Berk-Tek. 4. CommScope/Uniprise. 5. CommScope/SYSTIMAX. 6. Superior Essex Inc. B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a yellow thermoplastic jacket. C. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. D. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. E. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e. F. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. 2.03 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP NetConnect. 3. Leviton Network Solutions. 4. CommScope/Uniprise. 5. CommScope/SYSTIMAX. 6. Ortronics. Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 2 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher. 2.04 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP NetConnect. 3. Berk-Tek. 4. CommScope/Uniprise. 5. CommScope/SYSTIMAX. 6. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems. 7. Superior Essex Inc. B. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 12 -fiber, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. C. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. D. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. E. Comply with TIA-492AAAC for detailed specifications. F. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. 2. Conductive cable shall be aluminum armored type. G. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. H. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. I. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm). 2.05 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP NetConnect. 3. Leviton Network Solutions. 4. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems. 5. CommScope/Uniprise. 6. CommScope/SYSTIMAX. 7. Ortronics. B. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 3 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 C. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC, Type ST, OR Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB. 2.06 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. West Penn Wire. 2. Belden. 3. General Cable. 4. Liberty Cable. B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 16 AWG, FPL cable. D. Notification Appliance Circuits: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL, not less than No. 16 AWG. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating. E. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables. 3.02 WIRING METHOD A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways. B. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (21 mm). Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. C. Pathways shall comply with requirements in Section 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System. D. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 4 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent withCategory 5e rating of components and that ensure Category 5e performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm)from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. 3. Provide bonding and transition cabinet where interbuilding backbones are installed. 3.04 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 5 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 Alarm Systems". C. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable. D. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. 2. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits. E. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. F. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. G. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. H. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones. I. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. 3.05 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated. B. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 18 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG. 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 6 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping"Annex A. C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems"Article. 3.08 GROUNDING A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection. 4. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. C. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: 1. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 2. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 3. Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 4. Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 7 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 28 05 13 Job No. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28 05 13 - 8 FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 SECTION 28 31 11 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Nonsystem smoke detectors. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. 6. Heat detectors. 7. Notification appliances. 8. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 10. System printer. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. HLI: High Level Interface. D. NICET: National institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. E. PC: Personal computer. F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 1 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 5. Include battery-size calculations. 6. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 7. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points. d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 2 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals. g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit. 3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Two of each type installed. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 3 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors. C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.02 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 5. Fire-extinguishing system operation. B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 6. Activate emergency lighting control. 7. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 8. Record events in the system memory. C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Residential unit smoke detector. 3. Residential unit carbon monoxide detector.. D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels,. 3. Record the event on system printer. 2.03 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Notifier. 2. SimplexGrinnell LP. 3. EST. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 4 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864. a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays. d. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event history log. 2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone. C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits: 1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B. E. Notification-Appliance Circuit: 1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow. 3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer. G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating. I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. J. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 5 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.04 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key-or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. 2.05 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type in common areas. 3. Detectors shall be four-wire typ 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated[ and power-on status]. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition[ and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit]. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 6 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.06 lonization Smoke Detector: 2.07 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition. 2.08 NONSYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. General Requirements for Nonsystem Smoke Detectors: 1. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall be listed as compatible with the fire-alarm equipment installed or shall have a contact closure interface listed for the connected load. 2. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall meet the monitoring for integrity requirements in NFPA 72. B. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 217; suitable for NFPA 101, residential occupancies; operating at 120-V ac with 9-V dc battery as the secondary power source. Provide with "low" or "missing" battery chirping-sound device. 2. Auxiliary Relays: One Form C, rated at 0.5 A. 3. Audible Notification Appliance: Piezoelectric sounder rated at 90 dBA at 10 feet according to UL 464. 4. Heat sensor, 135 deg F combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature. 5. Test Switch: Push to test; simulates smoke at rated obscuration. 6. Tandem Connection: Allow tandem connection of number of indicated detectors; alarm on one detector shall actuate notification on all connected detectors. 7. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 8. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 9. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 2.09 HEAT DETECTORS A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of [135 deg F] <Insert temperature> or a rate of rise that exceeds [15 deg F] <Insert temperature> per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 7 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 2.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white. 2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture [one] [two] telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit. D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 8 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions. B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated. D. Smoke-or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 3. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72. 4. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting. E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 9 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 F. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound. G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. H. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. I. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 3.03 PATHWAYS A. Pathways shall be installed in EMT. B. EMT shall be painted red enamel. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections. B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 3. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 6. Data communication circuits for connection to mass notification system. 7. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 10 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 3.06 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. D. PerForm the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. PerForm the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.08 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 11 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.3.14 B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION 283111 Job No. DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE 28 31 11 - 12 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 3100 00- EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation and borrow pits, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within work limits,dust control, including excavation for ditches and channels, inlet and outlet ditches for culverts and structures,all necessary shaping and sloping for the construction, preparation, processing soil to proper moisture content, and completion of all backfill,embankments,subgrade, shoulders,slopes and intersections,to required alignment,grade,and typical cross section shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 31 10 00 2. Site Demolition: Section 02 41 13 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 31 25 00 4. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 C. Definitions: 1. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on-site or similar non-organic sands,gravels,clays,silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6". Bedrock that breaks down to specified soil types and sizes during excavation, hauling, and placement may be considered as suitable material. Rock fill material which consists predominantly of cobbles or boulder-sized pieces of blasted or broken rock with maximum size of 12". 2. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat,excessive expansive materials,organic silt,topsoil,frozen materials,trees,stumps, certain manmade deposits, or industrial waste,sludge or landfill,or other undesirable materials. 3. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders,encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping with D-9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered as unclassified excavation. 4. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. 5. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed, dikes within or outside right-of-way. Placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitable materials in construction of embankments and backfills. 6. Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be agreed to by Engineer. 7. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy pneumatic-tired roller of specified design,to locate weak areas in subgrade. 1.02 PERMITS A. Road Cut(TOV) B. Stormwater Discharge Permit(CDPHE) C. Construction Dewatering(CDPHE) D. Access Permit(CDOT) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL A. Any suitable material or borrow as defined above. Free-running water shall be drained from materials before placement. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EARTHWORK 31 00 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.02 CONSTRUCTION WATER A. Acceptable water shall be provided at Contractor's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: All excess or unsuitable excavated materials, including rock and boulders,that cannot be used in backfill and embankments,shall be placed in designated disposal areas or disposed of off site. Where shown on drawings or considered necessary,construct intercepting ditches above top of cut slopes and carry to outlets near ends of cuts. To blend intersection of cut slopes with slope of adjacent natural ground surfaces in uniform manner,shape tops of all cut slopes, except those in solid rock,for flattening and rounding in accordance with details shown on drawings. Treat earth overburden above solid rock cuts in same manner as earth cut. Engineer reserves the right to change cut slopes during progress of excavation. Scale all exposed rippable rock cuts of loose, potentially falling rock at Contractor's expense. 3.02 PROOF ROLLING A. Proof rolling will be required to determine whether certain areas of subgrade meet compaction and/or stable requirements. Proof roll designated areas with heavy rubber-tired roller approved by Engineer.Areas found to be weak or fail the test shall be repaired in accordance with recommendations by the Engineer. 3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Adjust completed subgrade from slope or grade stakes to assure surface width conforms to typical section, dimensions, lines, and grades on drawings. Compact subgrade in accordance with compaction requirements. 3.04 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION A. Place earth fill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers near optimum moisture content and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer progresses, continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform density. Add or remove water as necessary to obtain maximum density. Place embankment in layers not greater than 12"which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. Occasional cobble and boulder-sized pieces of excavated rocks with sizes from 6"to 12", may be placed in earth fill if agreed to by Engineer. Space large rocks so compaction of earth fill will meet compaction requirements. B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides,or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments,or when embankment is built one-half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 measured longitudinally or at right angles to roadway shall be continuously benched over as work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed into existing slopes a minimum of 8'wide. Begin each horizontal bench at intersection of original ground and sides of previous benches. Material benched shall be excavated and recompacted along with new embankment material at Contractor's expense. C. Rock fill embankment material consists predominantly of rock 6"to 12" in diameter placed in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer provided material is carefully placed, large stones well distributed,and voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth,sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer with suitable equipment, distributing soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Embankments consisting predominantly of rock larger than 6" in greatest dimension, shall not be constructed above an elevation 2' below finished subgrade. Balance of embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 8" in loose thickness and compacted as specified. D. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing,scarifying,or stepping a minimum of 8"to insure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications. E. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments. F. During construction maintain area in such condition that it will be well-drained at all times. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EARTHWORK 31 00 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 G. At the end of every construction day all fill areas must be flat rolled to provide proper drainage. 3.05 BORROW A. Provide test pit if required by Engineer to evaluate acceptability and limits of source at Contractor's expense. B. If more borrow is placed than required, amount of overrun will be deducted from borrow volume. Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 10 working days in advance of need before opening borrow area. C. Strip all borrow pits of sod,topsoil,and unsuitable materials. Restore borrow area,grade and shape to provide proper drainage before placement of topsoil,to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.07 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Thoroughly scarify surface upon which embankment is to be placed to depth of 8". B. Compact scarified materials and embankments to following%AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. 1. Landscaped area 90% 2. Roadway 95% 3. Driveways,sidewalks, hardscape 95% 4. Parking lots 95% 5. Public roadways 95% 6. Beneath structures 100% C. Where Engineer agrees to rock fill material embankments constructed without moisture and density control, place in loose lifts up to maximum rock dimension not exceeding 12". Apply water as necessary to facilitate compaction. Route construction equipment, compactors, or both, uniformly over each lift prior to placing additional lifts. Apply sufficient compactive effort to each lift to achieve uniform,well-compacted rock fill. Distribute rocks throughout layer,spaced far enough apart to allow compaction equipment to pass between and permit cross rolling. Place, move and compact embankment materials,and apply water to facilitate compaction and prevent voids in embankment. Number of passes required will depend on available compaction equipment to achieve compactive effort agreed to by Engineer. 3.08 DUST CONTROL A. Contractor shall take appropriate measures to minimize adverse impacts caused by dust by watering exposed surfaces and haul roads and by implementing other measures. END OF SECTION 3100 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 EARTHWORK 31 00 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 EARTHWORK 31 00 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 31 10 00- SITE CLEARING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Clearing,grubbing, removing and disposing of all vegetation and debris within work limits and from borrow pits,and such other areas as required, except objects designated to remain or to be removed. Also includes preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Site Demolition: Section 02 41 13 2. Earthwork: Section 31 00 00 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 31 25 00 4. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 1.02 PERMITS A. Stormwater Discharge Permit(CDPHE) B. Construction Dewatering(CDPHE) C. Access Permit(CDOT) 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect trees,shrubs and planted areas to remain from damage or from unnecessary vehicular traffic, in manner acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Protect bench marks,staking, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving,and curbs from damage. Maintain designated temporary roadways,walkways,and detours. Burning is not permitted. PART 2 NONE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. Clear and/or grub all surface objects and all trees,stumps, roots, bushes and other protruding obstructions, not designated to remain. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site to satisfaction of Engineer. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 31 10 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 31 14 13.23 -TOPSOIL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTIONS A. Work Included: Stripping of existing topsoil,storage in stockpiles, replacement of topsoil after other work is completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Material stripped from site consisting of loose,friable loam. Contractor shall process topsoil to be free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse,stumps, rocks, brush,weeds,or other material detrimental to proper development of vegetative growth. Contractor shall dispose of topsoil reject materials off-site. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Remove all sod,topsoil, organic earth. Stockpile topsoil as designated on drawings,or directed by Engineer. 3.02 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT A. General: When job has been shaped and ready for placement of topsoil,cover all cut-fill areas and construction scars with topsoil to depth of 6". Contour all surfaces in accordance with drawings to blend with existing adjacent terrain. Deposit all excess topsoil in areas designated by Engineer. Grade,shape,fertilize,seed,and mulch designated topsoil waste area. If no topsoil waste areas are designated then Contractor shall haul excess material and dispose it off-site at no expense to Owner. B. Slope Rounding: Round top and bottom of slopes and feather into undisturbed natural terrain. Avoid abrupt grade changes by making smooth transitions from slopes to more level areas. C. Slope Molding: Avoid long,continuous slope faces by molding face of slope to accent existing adjacent terrain. Steepen slope faces near ridges and bluffs, laid back to link to natural draws,creating an undulating face. END OF SECTION 31 14 13.23 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TOPSOIL 31 14 13.23-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 TOPSOIL 31 14 13.23-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 31 25 00- EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation,grading,and installation and maintenance of riprap,stabilized construction entrances,sediment ponds,filter material, erosion control blanket,straw bale sediment barriers,and all necessary appurte-nances. Includes removal of temporary erosion and sediment control devices after site is stabilized. B. Related Work: 1. 1. Site clearing: Section 31 10 00 2. 2. Earthwork: Section 3100 00 3. 3. Storm Drainage: Section 33 40 00 4. 4. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested,furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. 1.03 PERMITS A. Construction Dewatering(CDPHE) B. Stormwater Discharge Permit(CDPHE) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIPRAP A. Hard, dense,sound,angular rough fractured stone meeting AASHTO T 85. Excavated shot rock may be used if agreed to by the Owner's representative and the Engineer. Neither breadth nor thickness of single stone to be less than one-third its length. Nominal Size Min.Volume Min.Wei�ht 9" 0.25 CF 30 Ibs. 12" 0.5 CF 75 Ibs. 18" 1.8 CF 250 Ibs. 24" 4 CF 600 Ibs. B. Size of stone and total thickness of riprap as shown on drawings. Stone well graded so voids can be filled, and at least 50%of mass equal to or larger than size called for on drawings. 2.02 FILTER MATERIAL Aggregate Filter: Conform to following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3" 100 3/4" 20-90 N o.4 0-20 N o. 200 0-3 Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.03 FILTER FABRIC Manufactured especially for stability of erosion control con-struction. Made from polyethylene and polypropylene yarns, in accordance with following: Weight 4.0 oz/yd ASTM D1910 Thickness 15 mils ASTM D1777 Grab Strength 130 Ibs. ASTM D1682 Elongation Break 62% ASTM D1682 Burst Strength 125 psi ASTM D7742 Trapezoid Tear Strength 70 Ib. ASTM 2263 Water Permeability 0.02 cm/se CFMC Water Flow Rate 4.80 gal/min/ft CFMC Equivalent Opening Size 70-100 U.S.Sieve ASTM D422 2.04 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS A. Install Landlok 450 TRM, C2 Fabric or as shown on plans 2.05 EROSION LOGS Erosion logs shall be curled aspen wood excelsior with a consistent width of fibers evenly distributed throughout the log. The casing shall be seamless, photodegradable tube netting and shall have minimum dimensions as shown below, based on the diameter of the log called for in the plans. The curled aspen wood excelsior shall be fungus free, resin free and shall be free of growth or germination inhibiting substances. . Nominal Dimensions of Erosion Logs Diameter Len�th Weight(min.) Stake Dimensions 8 inch 7-10 feet 1.6 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 20 inches 12 inch 7-10 feet 2.5 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 24 inches 18 inch 7-10 feet 4 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 30 inches Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.06 DANDY SACK A. The Dandy Sack�^" inlet protection unit shall be a sewn in the U.S.A.geotextile fabric unit. B. The Dandy SackTM shall have lifting straps to allow removal of the unit and manual inspection of the storm water system. C. The Dandy SackT"" unit shall utilize an orange monofilament fabric that is manufactured in the U.S.A.with the following characteristics: PROPERTY TEST METHOD UNITS MARV Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 kN (Ibs) 1.62(365)x 0.89(200) Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D 4632 % 24 x 10 Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 kN(Ibs) 0.44(100) Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 kPa(psi) 3097(450) Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 kN (Ibs) 0.51(115)x 033(75) %Open Area COE-22125-86 % 10 Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 mm(US Std Sieve) 0.425(40) Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec' 2.14 Permeability ASTM 4491 cm/sec 0.142 Water Flow Rate ASTM 4491 I/min/m2(gal/min/ft2) 5607(145) Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D 4355 % 70 Color Orange' 'The color orange is a trademark of Dandy Products,Inc. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.07 DANDY CURB SACK A. The Dandy Curb SackT"" curb and gutter inlet protection unit shall be a sewn geotextile fabric unit made in the U.S.A. enclosing a porous structure in the form of a cylindrical tub placed in front and extending beyond the inlet opening on both sides and have a geotextile fabric sack attached designed to fit the opening of the catch basin or drop inlet and to hang underneath the grate and into the catch basin. B. The Dandy Curb SackT"" shall have lifting straps to allow removal of the unit and manual inspection of the storm water system. C. The Dandy Curb SackT^" unit shall utilize an orange monofilament fabric that is manufactured in the U.S.A with the following characteristics: PROPERTY TEST METHOD UNITS MARV Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 kN (Ibs) 1.62(365)x 0.89(200) Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D 4632 % 24 x 10 Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 kN (Ibs) 0.44(100) Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 kPa(psi) 3097(450) Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 kN (Ibs) 0.51(115)x 0.33(75) %Open Area COE-22125-86 % 10 Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 mm(US Std Sieve) 0.425(40) Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec' 2.14 Permeability ASTM 4491 cm/sec 0.142 Water Flow Rate ASTM 4491 I/min/m2(gal/min/ft2) 5607(145) Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D 4355 % 70 Color Orange' 'The color orange is a trademark of Dandy Products,Inc. 2.08 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (Ibs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure(%) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (Ibs) 40 ASTM D751(modified) Slurry Flow Rate(gal/min/sf) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 US Std Sieve CW-02215 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability % 90 ASTM-G-26 B. Fence Posts(for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 pound per linear foot. C. Wire Fence(for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening,or as approved. D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above wire fence providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FILTER FABRIC A. Place fabric over shaped surface loosely where,when large stones are placed,they will not cause stretching of fabric beyond elastic limits. Overlap joining sections 2'at edges. Secure overlapped edges to subgrade with cinch pins. If riprap is dropped, place aggregate bedding 2"thick over fabric. Place riprap in a manner that fabric will not be damaged by stretch-ing, punching,or ripping. 3.02 RIPRAP A. Angular reasonably well-graded from smallest to maxi-mum size specified. Stones smaller than 10%of smallest size not permitted. Control gradation of riprap by visual inspection to assure thickness of riprap conforms with drawings. B. Hand Placed: Rectangular to facilitate butt placement. Fill openings with loose,well-graded road aggregate base material. 3.03 FILTER MATERIAL A. Wet subgrade, reasonably shape, and compact prior to placing filter material. Filter material may be backdragged with loader bucket to a reasonably smooth surface for placement to lines and grades of draw-ings. 3.04 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES A. Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%. Discharge on existing vegetated slopes alternate-ly to avoid erosion. 3.05 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER A. Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches,and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or baling wire, not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. 3.06 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS A. Site Preparation 1. Grade and compact area of installation and remove all rocks,clods,vegetation or other obstructions so that the installed blanket/mat will have direct contact with soil surface. 2. Prepare seedbed by loosening 2-3 in (50-75mm)of topsoil above final grade. 3. Incorporate fertilizer into soil. 4. Do not mulch areas where mat is to be placed B. Seeding 1. Apply seed to the soil surface before installing blanket/mat,or after installation (TRM only)for enhanced performance(preferable) 2. When seeding prior to installation, all check slots and other areas disturbed must also be reseeded. 3. When using a TRM and soil filling,seed TRM and entire disturbed area after installation, prior to filling mat with soil. C. Installation on Banks and Slopes 1. Extended blanket/mat 2-3 ft(600-900mm)over crest of slope and excavate a 12x6 in (300x150mm) terminal anchor trench. 2. Anchor blanket/mat in trench on 1 ft(300mm)spacings, backfill and compact soil. 3. Unroll blanket/mat down slope with small netting on bottom, large netting on top. 4. Overlap adjacent rolls at least 3 in (75mm),and anchor every 18 in (450mm) minimum across the overlap. The higher elevation blanket/mat should be placed over the lower blanket/mat. 5. Overlap blanket/mat edges approximately 2 in (50mm)and staple according to anchor pattern guide. Make sure that edge overlaps are shingled away from prevailing winds. 6. Lay blanket/mat loose to maintain direct contact with soil. (Do not pull blanket/mat taut. This may allow bridging of soil surface.) 7. Secure blanket/mat to ground surface using U-shaped wire staples(preferred)or geotextile pins. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 8. Refer to manufacturer's recommendation for appropriate number and pattern of anchors. 9. Place outer edge of blanket/mat in previously excavated longitudinal slots, anchor using prescribed staple pattern, backfill and compact soil. 10. Anchor, backfill and compact upstream end of blanket/mat in a 12x6 in (300x150mm)terminal trench. 11. Secure blanket/mat to ground surface using U-shaped wire staples(preferred)or geotextile pins. 12. When using a TRM,seed and fill with soil for enhanced performance. 13. When using a TRM with a geotextile attached.Always seed after installing mat,then fill with soil. D. Installation in Storm Water Channels 1. Excavate an initial anchor trench 12 in (300mm) deep and 6 in (150mm)wide across the channel at the lower end of the project area. 2. Construct check slots along the channel in the following manner: Excavate intermittent check slots 6 in (150mm) deep and 6 in (150mm)wide across the channel at 30 ft(9.1m) intervals. 3. Cut longitudinal channel anchor slots 4 in (100mm) deep and 4 in (100mm)wide along both sides of the installation to bury edges of blanket/mat. Whenever possible extend mat 2-3 ft(600-900 mm)above crest of channel side slopes. 4. Beginning at the center if downstream end of the channel, place the end of the first roll in the anchor trench and secure with fastening devices at 1 ft(300mm) intervals. Note: blanket/mat will initially be upside down in anchor trench;smaller netting on top. 5. In same manner, position adjacent rolls in anchor trench. Overlapping the preceding roll minimum of 3 in (75mm). 6. Again, staple at 1 ft(300mm) intervals, backfill and compact soil. 7. Unroll blanket/mat over the compacted trench with smaller netting on bottom, large netting on top. Stop at next check slot or terminal anchor trench. 8. Unroll adjacent rolls upstream in order to maintain a minimum 3 in (75mm)overlap. Anchor every 18 in (450mm) minimum across the overlap. 9. Fold and secure blanket/mat rolls snugly into intermittent check slots. Lay blanket/mat in the bottom and fold back against itself. Anchor through both layers of blanket or mat at 1 ft(300mm) intervals then backfill and compact soil. Continue rolling upstream over the compacted slot to the next check slot of terminal anchortrench. 10. Overlap roll ends a minimum of 1ft(300mm)with upstream blanket/mat on top. Begin all new rolls in a check slot. Anchor overlapped area by placing two rows of anchors, 1 ft(300mm)apart on 1ft(300mm) intervals. E. Soil Filling 1. If specified,soil filling is recommended for optimum performance. 2. After seeding,spread and lightly rake%z-3/in (12-19mm)of fine topsoil into the TRM and completely fill the voids. Use backside of rake or other flat tool. 3. If equipment must operate on the TRM, make sure it is of the rubber-tired type. No tracked equipment or sharp turns are allowed on the mat. 4. Avoid any traffic over TRM if loose or wet soil conditions exist. 5. Use shovels, rakes or brooms for fine grading and finishing. 6. Smooth soils fill in order to just expose the top netting of matrix. Do not place excessive soil above the mat. 7. Broadcast additional seed and mulch above the soil-filled TRM. 8. Water as necessary to enhance growth. 9. Consult manufacturer's technical representative or local distributor for installation assistance. Particularly if unique conditions apply(i.e.fine sandy soils, infertile environment) 3.07 EROSION LOGS A. The Contractor shall maintain the erosion logs during construction to prevent sediment from passing over or under the logs or from sediment accumulation greater than two thirds of the original exposed height of each erosion log. B. Erosion logs shall be embedded 2-inches into the soil. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Stakes shall be embedded to a minimum depth of 12 inches. At the discretion of the Engineer, a shallower depth may be permitted if rock in encountered. 3.08 DANDY SACK A. Remove the grate from the catch basin. B. For Oil and Sediment Model;to install or replace absorbent,place absorbent pillow in unit, on the bottom (below-grade sideJ of the unit. C. Stand the grate on end. Move the top lifting straps out of the way and place the grate into the Dandy SackTM unit so that the grate is below the top straps and above the lower straps.The grate should be cradled between the upper and lower straps. D. Holding the lifting devices, insert the grate into the inlet, being careful that the grate remains in place and being careful not to damage the Dandy SackTM unit. E. Remove all accumulated sediment and debris from vicinity of unit after each storm event. F. After each storm event and at regular intervals, look into the Dandy SackTM unit. If the unit is more than 1/3 full of accumulated sediment,the unit must be emptied. G. To empty the unit, using the lifting straps lift the unit out of the inlet and remove the grate.Transport the unit to an appropriate location for removal of the contents. Holding the dumping straps on the outside at the bottom of the unit,turn the unit upside down,emptying the contents. Reinstall unit as above. H. For Oil and Sediment Model,•remove and replace absorbent when near saturation. I. Dispose of unit and/or absorbent in accord with applicable Federal,state and local environmental laws and regulations. 3.09 DANDY CURB SACK A. Remove the grate from the catch basin. B. For Oil and Sediment Model;to install or replace absorbent,place absorbent pillow in unit, on the bottom (below-grade side)of the unit. C. Stand the grate on end. Move the top lifting straps out of the way and place the grate into the Dandy Curb Sack�"^ unit so that the grate is below the top straps and above the lower straps.The grate should be cradled between the upper and lower straps. D. Holding the lifting devices, insert the grate into the inlet,then lower back edge with cylindrical tube into place, being careful that the grate remains in place and being careful not to damage the Dandy Curb Sack'"^ unit.The cylindrical tube should partially block the curb hood opening when installed properly. E. Remove all accumulated sediment and debris from vicinity of unit after each storm event. F. After each storm event and at regular intervals, look into the Dandy Curb SackT"" unit. If the unit is more than 1/3 full of accumulated sediment,the unit must be emptied. G. To empty the unit, using the lifting straps lift the unit out of the inlet and remove the grate.Transport the unit to an appropriate location for removal of the contents. Holding the dumping straps on the outside at the bottom of the unit,turn the unit upside down,emptying the contents. Reinstall unit as above. H. For Oil and Sediment Model,•remove and replace absorbent when near saturation. I. Dispose of unit and/or absorbent in accord with applicable Federal,state and local environmental laws and regulations. 3.10 CHECK DAMS A. Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below maximum depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.11 SEDIMENT POND/TRAP A. Construct pond per plans and as directed by Engineer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. The area under embankment shall be cleared,grubbed and stripped of any vegetation and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. C. The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots or other woody vegetation as well as over-sized stones, rocks, organic material or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Maximum height of embankment shall be 4' measured at centerline of embankment. D. All cut and fill slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. E. Geotextile Class C shall be placed over riser. Fabric shall be embedded at least 6" into existing ground at bottom of pond. F. Outlet-An outlet shall include a means of conveying the discharge in a erosion free manner to an existing stable channel. Protection against scour at the discharge point shall be provided as necessary. G. Outlet channel must have positive drainage from the trap. H. Sediment shall be removed and trap restored to its original dimensions when the sediment has accumulated to %z of the wet storage depth of the trap(900 cf/ac). Removed sediment shall be deposited in a suitable area and in such a manner that it will not erode. I. The structure shall be inspected periodically after each rain and repaired as needed. J. Construction of traps shall be carried out in such a manner that sediment pollution is abated. Points of concentrated inflow shall be protected. K. The structure shall be dewatered by approved methods, removed and the area stabilized when the drainage area has been properly stabilized. 3.12 SILT FENCE A. Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. END OF SECTION 31 25 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 0130- LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: The Contractor and/or appointed subcontractors shall furnish all labor,materials,and equipment necessary to provide quality professional landscape management services on a year-round basis. Through the use of qualified, trained personnel and by using practices and methods recognized and accepted as standards in the industry, contractor will provide turf care,plant care,fertilization,chemical pest control,irrigation control and maintenance,and any other items outlined in this agreement. 1.02 DEFINITIONS:The terms"Landscape Maintenance Contractor"and the terms"Landscape Management Contractor"shall be used in the agreement interchangeably. 1.03 INSURANCE:Contractor will carry complete and adequate workman's compensation,automobile,and public liability insurance in the amount of not less than$500,000 dollars. Contractor shall supply contracting officer with a certificate of insurance for such coverage prior to commencement date. 1.04 DAMAGES: Contractor will be responsible for any damages to the property caused by his work force,while engaged in the performance of the duties outlined by this agreement. The cost of all repairs will be borne by the contractor. 1.05 ACTS OF GOD:The contractor assumes no responsibility for and shall not be held responsible by the contracting officer for damages due to conditions beyond contractor's control. Such conditions include,but are not limited to: harsh weather;abnormally cold,winter temperatures;snow damage;ice;melting snow;wind;fire;vandalism; theft;and previous contractor's neglect or improper practices. 1.06 EMERGENCIES: The contractor is expected to be available,via phone,and respond when necessary to emergencies which may arise. Emergencies are defined as items which,by their nature,cannot be postponed and may cause damage to health or property. Snow removal calls will not be accepted as emergencies. Response to emergencies will be by whatever means are most practical to remedy a particular situation. Contractor is entitled to compensation for emergencies. 1.07 PERSONNEL: Contractor's employees shall conduct themselves in a workmanlike manner at all times. Contractor is expected to provide adequate supervision at all times. In addition to the general labor force,experienced, qualified personnel will be used to perform such specialized tasks as pruning,irrigation programming and repair, and pesticide application. 1.08 LICENSES AND PERMITS:contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all licenses and permits required by federal,state,and local laws that are necessary for the legal operation of the contractor's business. such licenses and permits shall include,but not be limited to:business,nursery,commercial pesticide applicator, tree contractor,and arborist. however,special permits(such as special watering permits)will be obtained at the expense of the contracting officer. 1.09 WEATHER PERMITTING:all items in this agreement are stated assuming that weather conditions are favorable. contractor is not to be held responsible,in any way,for delays in the completion of specified tasks due to weather conditions. . 1.10 MODIFICATION: In all cases,the attached "technical specifications"shall supersede or modify items stipulated in the"general requirements". PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 TURF CARE A. MOWING 1. All turf areas shall be mowed weekly, or as needed, during the growing season, mowing height will be at 3 inches or at a height determined by the contractor.frequency of mowing will vary in the spring and fall, due to seasonal weather conditions and growth rate of turf.Approximately 26 cuts per season will be Job No. 14LION-00-01 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 01 30-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 performed on turf. In the event the season is longer,there will be no charge for extra mowings; nor will there be any refund if the season is shorter of if inclement weather prohibits safe operation of equipment on the regular scheduled mowing day. 2. Grass catchers will be used only if there is a specific need and will be used at the discretion of the landscape care company inc. excessive clippings will always be removed from turf grass catchers will be used around swimming pools. 3. Contractor reserves the right to leave unmown any areas that he feels would be unsafe to mow due to, but not limited to,"the following reasons. a. Areas in use at the time of mowing by large groups of residents, children, etc. b. Areas excessively wet due to improper drainage not caused by the contractor. c. Areas with large concentration of pet droppings. d. Areas under construction. B. TRIMMING 1. All turf areas inaccessible to mowing equipment will be trimmed as needed, on a weekly basis,to maintain a neat,well groomed appearance. 2. Where practical, contractor will use approved growth regulators around fences,trees,and other obstacles that may be damaged by repeated use of string line trimmers. C. EDGING 1. Edging of walks,curbs,swimming pool decks, etc.will be done on a basis through the use of a steel bladed edger. 2. Edging is limited to concrete areas, in order to avoid damage to irregular asphalt,as well as flagstone,. brick,wood walks and decks. 3. Drainage ditches will not be edged, unless otherwise specified. 4. Excessive debris, resulting from edging,shall be collected and removed. D. AREA POLICE 1. All landscape areas will be policed, in conjunction with mowing operations,for loose trash and debris. Policing includes the removal of grass clippings from all walks after mowing. 2. Policing does not include the clean up of drives and parking lots,or the clean up of areas due to vandalism, dumping, improperly contained dumpsters,acts of god,etc. 3. Pet droppings are not the responsibility of the landscape care company inc. 4. Items not covered under normal policing will be billed as an "extra". E. WEED CONTROL 1. All turf areas will be sprayed for the control of broadleaf weeds, as needed.The cost of all broadleaf sprays is the responsibility of the contractor. Broadleaf weed control in turf is handled on a curative basis, rather than a preventative basis. 2. Where needed,contractor will recommend pre-emergent weed control. Pre-emergent weed control will be done at the expense of the contracting officer,and only after approval is obtained. F. FERTILIZATION 1. All turf areas will be fertilized a minimum of 3 times per season using a quality.well-balanced fertilizer. 2. On the average 4 to 5 Ibs. of actual nitrogen per 1000 square feet should be applied per season. If contractor deems a soil test necessary to determine further the nutritional deficiency of the turf, contracting officer will be notified and billed accordingly. 3. In the event iron is needed and used in granular form in the fertilizer formulation.care will be taken to clean fertilizer off all sidewalks. Patios, pool decks. etc.to minimize the possibility of iron stains. However, even with the utmost of care taken.some staining may still occur and be expected. 3.02 TREE,SHRUB AND BED CARE A. BED CARE 1. All bed areas will be checked on a regular basis for mulch coverage. If additional mulch or rock is needed in bed areas,this will be brought to the attention of the contracting officer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 01 30-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. All bed areas will be kept free of weeds by means of chemical control, mechanical cultivation and hand weeding as necessary. Every effort will be made to control grasses and bindweed growing directly in shrubs and ground cover; however,control of these items is not always guaranteed. B. TREE AND SHRUB CARE 1. Contractor will monitor,on a regular basis,the health of all plant material and make necessary recommendations to the contracting officer,with respect to such items as:fertilization, insect and disease control, etc. 2. Landscape management contractor shall be responsible for pruning of all trees and shrubs on the property, with the exception of plant material over 15 feet in height, providing contract is a year-round contract. Contracts for growing season only will be pruned and charged time and materials. 3. Plants shall be pruned in accordance with regularly accepted industry standards for pruning. Pruning is done to promote healthy growth; prevent weak or abnormal limb structure;control unwanted leggy growth;and maintain the natural growth habit of the plants. Proper pruning practices do not include sheering of plants into boxes,squares, balls, etc. 4. In order to prevent damage to trees and shrubs planted in turf areas, by mowers and trimmers, a grass-free area or guard around all trees and shrubs will be provided and maintained by the maintenance contractor, at the expense of the contracting officer.Contractor assumes no liability for damage to trees and shrubs not properly protected. S. Due to the variable and unpredictable nature of insect and disease problems,trees and shrubs will be sprayed on a time and material basis, as needed. Most sprays will be done on a curative basis; however, contractor may elect form time to time to treat potential problems on a preventative basis. 3.03 IRRIGATION CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE A. ACTIVATION 1. Contractor shall be responsible for determining when to activate, and for activating the irrigation system. Activation occurs usually between March and May, depending on weather conditions. 2. At time of activation,all necessary repairs will be made to bring the system up to operating condition. These repairs will be done on a time and material basis. Contracting officer will be kept informed of repair work being performed. B. REGULAR MAINTENANCE 1. After system is activated and operating. Contractor will be responsible for checking the system on a weekly basis,or as deemed necessary by contractor,to insure continuance of proper operation. 2. Regular checking of irrigation system shall include: a. Turning on all clocks to check for proper function. b. Turning on all valves to insure proper operation. c. Visually inspecting all heads for proper coverage and also for damage caused by mowing operations. Minor adjustments as well as repair of contractor-cause damage,will be repaired at this time at no expense to contracting officer. Frequency and duration, based on current weather conditions 3. In the event malfunctions are found during the regular check of the irrigation system, repairs will be made on a time and material basis. 4. Contractor shall keep the need for water conservation in mind. During extended cold or rainy periods, irrigation controllers will be turned off. However, occasional rainstorms will not constitute adequate reason for turning off controllers. C. WINTERIZATION 1. Contractor shall be responsible for determining when to winterize and for winterizing the irrigation system. Winterization usually occurs between October 1 and November 15. 2. Proper winterization will include the use of a compressor unless otherwise specified. 3. Winterization will be done on a time and material base plus a charge for compressor time if applicable. D. MISCELLANEOUS 1. The landscape contractor will be informed if other parties have access to irrigation controllers. If the controllers are adjusted or turned off by parties other than contractor's employees,contractor must by notified to avoid possible damage to the landscape. Job No. 14LION-00-01 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 01 30-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Contractor shall not be held liable for any damages caused by malfunctions of the irrigation system, including, but not limited to:stuck valves,flooded basements, missing heads, etc. 3. Contractor shall not be held liable for damages to sprinkler heads that are improperly installed above grade and constitute a mowing hazard. If this situation is applicable,contracting officer will be notified immediately. 3.04 WINTER SERVICE A. STANDARD SERVICES 1. All landscaped areas will be policed on a weekly basis for loose trash and debris. (refer to item A.4). 2. Will visit the site on a regular basis to inspect all landscape and plant material.Any problems will be brought to the attention of the contracting officer.At this time, contractor will also determine the need for:winter watering,tree wrapping to prevent sunscald,special pruning due to storm damage, etc. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for gathering and removing leaves resulting from fall leaf drop.Only those areas having heavy concentrations of leaves that may cause damage to turf or other landscape materials will be subject to leaf removal. 4. Contractor will be available to the contracting officer to aid and assist in the preparation and formulation of: plans, schedules, budgets, projections, etc.,for the coming season. END OF SECTION 32 01 30 Job No. 14LION-00-01 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 32 01 30-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 11 23 - UNBOUND BASE COURSE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade immediately prior to paving including proofrolling, repair of areas showing excess deflection during proofrolling and furnish-ing and placing one or more courses of aggregate in confor-mance with lines,grades,and typical sections shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 31 00 00 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested,furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis-ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion-ASTM C131 3. Liquid Limit-AASHTO T89,T90 4. Moisture Density Curves-AASHTO T99 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size . Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4" 100 - - - 3" 95-100 - - - 2" - 100 - - 1-1/2" - 90-100 - - 1" - - 100 - 3/4" - 50-90 - 100 No.4 - 30-50 30-70 30-65 No.8 - - - 25-55 No. 200 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12 B. Liquid limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5,or 6. C. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. D. Requirements for this Project: 1. Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Staking: Contractor shall provide slope stakes every 50 foot station. Contractor will provide at his expense all additional staking necessary to ensure work conforms with drawings. B. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line,grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95%AASHTO T99. Job No. 14LION-00-01 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 32 11 23-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.02 MIXING A. The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogeneous mixture. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6",construct in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8" upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION A. Compact each layer to 95%AASHTO T180. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggre-gates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture content is within 2%of optimum. END OF SECTION 32 11 23 Job No. 14LION-00-01 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 32 11 23-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 12 16.13 - FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying,and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines,grades,and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Unbound Base Course: Section 32 11 23 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement,temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Owner will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested,furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate-AASHTO T96, CP-45,AASHTO T304,AASHTO T176,AASHTO T89,AASHTO T90 2. PG Graded Binders, use PG 58-28-AASHTO T48,TP48,TP5 AND T51 3. Liquid Asphalt-AASHTO M81, M82;ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt-AASHTO M140 or M208 S. Compaction-Colorado Procedure 51,CP44 or CP81 C. Job Mix Formula: The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer. 1. A proposed job-mix gradation as required by the contract,which shall be wholly within the Master Range Table of Table 703-4 of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (CDOT Specifications) before the tolerances shown in Table 401- 1,of the CDOT Specifications, are applied. 2. The job-mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size. A single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight,clean,smooth metal beds thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution,or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or fuel oil will not be permitted. Each truck shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material to protect the mixture from the weather. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Bituminous plant mix shall be placed only on properly constructed surfaces that are free from water,snow,or ice. The bituminous mixtures shall be placed in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 401-3 "of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction" and only when weather conditions permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished,as determined by the Engineer. B. Protection: After final rolling,do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades,flagmen, and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 32 12 16.13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Clean, hard,durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel,or crushed slag with not more than 45%of wear,AASHTO T96. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves . Grading SX 1-1/2" - 1" - 3/4" 100 1/2" 90-100 3/8" - #4 - #8 28-58 #30 - #200 2-10 B. Sizes#8 and larger,tolerances+8%;#30+6%;#200+3%;where 100%passing, no tolerance. C. Use Grading SX for this project. 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT A. Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M226,Table 2. B. Superpave Performance Graded Binders shall conform to AASHTO Provisional Standard MP1 for PG 58-28 Performance Graded Binders 2.03 TACK COAT A. One of the following,grade and type as recommended by supplier: 1. Emulsified asphalt,AASHTO M140 2. Cationic emulsified asphalt,AASHTO M208 2.04 MIX DESIGN A. Use Grading SX, 75 Design Gyrations, PG 58-28 Binder. 1. Job-Mix Formula as defined in the Submittal Section (02740-3, Part 1.03 C). B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.05 MIXING A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage,control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%. Deliver dry aggregate to mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration,grade,and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement,ambient temperature,and workability of mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature-viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 32 12 16.13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with job-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 95%minimum coated particles for base mixtures in accordance with AASHTO T195 and 85-90%coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape,and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section in accordance with the technical specification for Unbound Base Course Section 02720. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. Hot mixed asphalt shall be placed only on property prepared unfrozen surfaces which are free of water,snow,and ice. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with levelling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surfacing at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000' ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS A. Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on emergency basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.03 SPREADING AND FINISHING A. Place at temperatures of not less than 275 degrees F,or more than 305 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling,asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F,while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical,self-powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances,true to line,grade,and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for levelling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screed shall be adjustable for height and crown,equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix without tearing,shaving or gouging surface,to depth and cross-section specified,without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Paver shall be capable of placing courses in thicknesses from 1/2"to 4" and from widths of 8'to 15'. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6". B. Strike finish surface smooth;true to cross section; uniform in density and texture;free from hollows,transverse corrugations,and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins,and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be 1/4" above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving,flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility,or unavoidable obstacles,do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavement,or between successive day's work,to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture, density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. 1. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. In every pavement layer the longitudinal joints shall not be constructed in the wheel paths. Prepare longitudinal joints by overlapping screed 1"on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2"on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately 1" high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8"for width of 6",after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place levelling courses within 1/2"of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane.Straight edge will be advanced 5' Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 32 12 16.13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 and space under straight edge shall not exceed 1/4". Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. G. Segregated areas in the top lift shall be removed and replaced,full lane width, at the Contractor's expense. 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide rollers to obtain required density,surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers,etc.to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers 1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled,developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first,starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperature must not be below 185 degrees F. 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by a combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density,surface texture, and surface tolerances required. D. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92%to 96%of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado Procedure 51. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. 3.05 PATCHING A. Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel,and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. After completing operations,clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. END OF SECTION 32 12 16.13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 32 12 16.13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 13 13.33 - RIGID PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing,forming,jointing, placing and curing of concrete pavement,curbs and gutters, sidewalks, pans, in conformance with lines,grades,and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 3100 00 B. Unbound Base Course: Section 32 11 23 C. Concrete Paving Joints:Section 32 13 13.34 D. Concrete Paving Curing:Section 32 13 13.35 E. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 32 13 13.37 F. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 32 13 13.36 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement,temperature,and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Installers: 1. All work in this section to be accomplished under direct on-site supervision of thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and the recommendations contained in the reference standards. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only when performed under the direct supervision of a Craftsman holding the following certificate: ACI Concrete Flatwork Finisher and Technician (ACICFFT) or other Flatwork Finisher certification program approved by CDOT.A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required at each finishing operation. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required for each three or fewer finishers (non-certified ACICFFTs)at each operation 2. In acceptance of the finished work,allowance will not be made for lack of skill on the part of the workers. D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly adhered to concerning both methods and materials. Where surrounding conditions or base materials are not compatible with manufacturer's recommendations, notify Engineer in writing prior to bidding. E. Design Criteria:See Part 2 Products F. Testing Agency:All testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory and paid by the Owner with the exception of Contractor submittal requirements,qualifications of proposed materials and establishment of mixture proportions and other tests required by the Contractor to assure Contractor is furnishing materials and construction in compliance with the contract documents. G. Source Quality Control:The Engineer or his representative shall be offered uninterrupted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. H. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Engineer for examination at any time. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcement, precast sections. B. Manufacturers Data: Additives,joint materials, curing compounds, concrete sealant with 10-year manufacturer warranty,fly ash, reinforcement, concrete bonding agent, precast concrete reinforcing supports. C. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate,water,cement,air content,admixtures,fly ash.A laboratory trial mix shall be prepared and test results submitted. The Concrete Mix Design will not be approved when the laboratory trial mix data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past or Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 aggregate data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past. Provide all of the information outlined below for the concrete mix proposed for the project: Identification: 1. Project. 2. Name and address of Contractor and concrete producer. 3. Mixture designation. 4. Class of concrete and intended use. Materials and Proportions: 1. Name and location of material sources for aggregate,cement,admixtures and water. 2. Type of cement and additives(if used). 3. Cement content in kilograms per cubic meter(pounds per cubic yard)of concrete. 4. The water/cement ratio of modified concrete is the ratio of the mass of water to the combined masses of Portland cement and supplementary cementitious material. 5. The saturated surface dry batch mass for the coarse and fine aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard)of concrete. 6. Water content(including free moisture in the aggregate plus water in the drum, exclusive of absorbed moisture in the aggregate) in kilograms per cubic meter(pounds per cubic yard)of concrete. 7. Target water/cementitious ratio. 8. Dosage of admixture(s). Entrained air may be obtained either by the use of an air-entraining Portland cement or by the use of an air-entraining admixture. 9. Sieve analysis of aggregates. 10. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate. 11. Bulk specific gravity(dry and saturated surface dry)of fine and coarse aggregate. 12. Dry rodded unit mass of coarse aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter(pounds per cubic yard). 13. Fineness modulus(FM)of fine aggregate. 14. Concrete unit mass. 15. Material certifications for Portland cement,admixtures, and aggregate. The laboratory trial mix shall include results of the following: 1. AASHTO T119 slump of hydraulic cement concrete. 2. AASHTO T121 weight per cubic foot,yield, and air content(gravimetric)of concrete. Air content from AASHTO T152 air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method may be used in lieu of the air content by the gravimetric method in AASHTO T121. 3. AASHTO T22 compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens shall be performed with at least two specimens at 7 days,two at 14 days and three specimens at 28 days. 4. Report compressive strength at other times as necessary for expected opening to traffic requirements. D. Placement: Method proposed. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: 1. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. When air temperature is above 85°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Excessive slump or delivery time will be considered as a basis for rejection of the concrete placement. B. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Should extra water be required before depositing concrete,the General Contractors Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed,whichever is greater. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: a. When placing concrete in cold weather, as defined in Section 32 13 13.36,follow specifications for Cold Weather Concreting,Section 32 13 13.36. b. When placing concrete in cold weather that does not meet the definition of"cold weather" in Section 32 13 13.36,the following requirements shall be observed: 1) Maintain concrete temperature at minimum of 50°F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. 2) Maintain forms in place for minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete. 3) Do not place concrete without acceptance of Engineer on days when temperature 9:00 A.M. is below 40°F until,the General Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all necessary equipment to prevent concrete from freezing. 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather,follow specifications for Hot Weather Concreting,Section 32 13 13.37. B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Cover masonry walls,glazing and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to pouring slabs,sidewalks,or other concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 READY-MIXED CONCRETE A. AASHTO M157 2.02 CEMENT A. Portland Cement ASTM C 150,TYPE I/II. 2.03 CONCRETE A. Use CDOT Concrete Class P or indicated on plans. 2.04 AGGREGATES A. Fine Aggregate-AASHTO M 6. 1. Fineness Modulus(FM)-AASHTO T 176, 2.50<FM<3.50 B. Coarse Aggregate-AASHTO M80. Coarse Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of CDOT Class P concrete. For curb and gutter,curbs,sidewalks, pads and pans use AASHTO M43 coarse aggregate gradation#67. 2.05 WATER-AASHTO T26 A. The maximum slump of the delivered concrete shall be the slump of the approved concrete mix design plus 1-1/2". B. Water cement ratio-0.44 maximum Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Agent-AASHTO M154.See table for percent air requirements. Nominal Maximum Size Target Entrained Air Content ag�re�ate, in. at the point of deliverv, percent* 3/8 7-1/2 1/2 7 3/4 6 1 6 1-1/2 5-1/2 2 5 *tolerance,-1%to+2% B. Chemical-Admixtures AASHTO M194 2.07 QUALITY A. Provide approved mix design B. Conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301 C. For CDOT Class P concrete,field cylinders shall produce 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4200 psi. Cement content 660 Ib/cy minimum. 2.08 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed and plain billet-steel bars AASHTO M31 B. Fabricated steel bar rod mats,steel wire fabric AASHTO M54 2.09 JOINT MATERIAL A. AASHTO M173 2.10 CURING MATERIALS A. Burlap cloth from jute or kenaf-AASHTO M182 B. Liquid membrane-AASHTO M148, 1 gal/150 SF C. Sheet Materials-AASHTO M171,4 mil 2.11 SEALANTS A. Euclid Baracade Silane 100 High Performance Water Repellent or Symons Silane 40% 2.12 WATER:CLEAN AND POTABLE 2.13 FLY ASH: A. ASTM C 618. Use Class F fly ash only.The amount of fly ash shall conform to the percentages allowed in CDOT Class P concrete. Fly ash shall be from a source listed on CDOT's Approved Products List(APL).Verification from the supplier shall be submitted,confirming the fly ash is currently on CDOT's APL. 2.14 DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS: A. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615,Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40,epoxy coated,deformed steel bars.Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter,the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE/BASE COURSE A. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove soft yielding material and replace. Compact to specification. Wet to optimum moisture to 6"deep, not more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will not absorb moisture from concrete. B. Test for crown and/or elevation to assure specified thickness. If additional material used to bring subgrade to correct elevation,compact to specification. Before placing concrete,clean subgrade of all loose materials. No disturbance inside forms after fine grading subgrade. 3.02 INLETS,MANHOLES AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES CAST IN PAVEMENT: A. Thicken pavement and install joints and bond breaker at inlets, manholes and similar structures according to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.Smaller structures such as valve and monument boxes do not require a bond breaker. 3.03 FORMS A. Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment,with maximum deflection of 1/4". Straight and free from warp,with maximum surface deviation of 1/8". In good condition, clean,and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed. Joined neatly and accurately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to assure firm placement. Oil prior to concrete placement. B. Set dowels if required and expansion joints, preformed construction joints,and header boards in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement. Lightly grease dowels full length. C. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT A. When indicated, place wire mesh as shown on drawings. If required for this project, place dowels and tie bars in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Hold all tie and marginal bars in proper position by sufficient supports or pins. If center longitudinal joint sawed in lieu of placing metal or plastic strip, bars may be mechanically installed or placed on supports. Where rebar, rod mats or steel wire mesh is required,support with bar chairs.Where two layers of inesh are required,support bottom layer by bar chairs with separators for top mesh. 3.05 READY-MIXED CONCRETE The use of ready-mixed concrete shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proportion, mix, delivery,or placement of concrete.All ready-mixed concrete shall comply with ASTM C94. Concrete shall be continuously mixed or agitated from the time the water is added until the time of use. The concrete shall be deposited in place within 90 minutes after batching when concrete is delivered in truck mixers or agitating trucks. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating truck may be extended to 120 minutes if: (1) no water is added after 90 minutes(2)the concrete temperature prior to placements is less than 90° F. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating trucks may be extended to 180 minutes if(1) no water is added after 90 minutes(2)the concrete temperature prior to placement is less than 90°F(3)the approved concrete mix contains a water reducing and retarding admixture which conforms to AASHTO M194,Type D. In accordance with ASTM C94,water may be added to ready-mix concrete one time in order to get slump within range,as long as the specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Engineer shall have free access to the ready mix plant at all times.The organization supplying the concrete shall have sufficient plant and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery of the concrete at the required rate. The contractor shall collect delivery or batch tickets from the driver for all concrete used on the project and shall deliver them to the Engineer. Batch tickets shall provide the following information in accordance with ASTM C94: Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 A. Name of ready-mix batch plant B. Serial number of ticket C. Date D. Truck number E. Name of purchaser F. Specific designation ofjob(name and location) G. Mix#or specific class or designation of the concrete H. Amount of concrete in cubic yards I. Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates J. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials K. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates L. Type, brand and amount of cement M. Type, brand and amount of admixtures N. Weight(in gallons)of water, including surface water on aggregates 3.06 PLACEMENT A. Deposit near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without damage to subgrade. Operate transit mixer outside forms at all times, except in locations agreed to by Engineer. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in manner requiring as little rehandling as possible. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials. Additional spreading may be by hand shovels. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike off screed for full length of screed. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms,so final surfaces will not have holes or honeycombs. 3.07 FINISHING A. Use equipment designed to spread,consolidate,screed and float freshly placed concrete in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogenous mixture, requiring minimum of hand finishing to meet surface tolerances. Strike hand finished surfaces to tolerances by methods agreed to by Engineer. B. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10'straight edge parallel to centerline immediately following first floating of surface. Straight edge will be advanced 5'and space under straight edge shall not exceed 3/16". C. Final finish pavements after floating and straight edging. Curbs,gutters, pans,and sidewalks shall be broom finished unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish: Broom finish unless otherwise indicated. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. E. ACI certificated finisher(s) must be on-site during finishing. F. The contractor shall not add water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations. 3.08 CURING (see Section 32 13 13.35 Concrete Paving Curing for detailed specifications) A. Apply curing compounds or sheets immediately after finishing. Do not mark or mar finished surface. Coat sides within one hour after form removal. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Have plastic sheeting or other suitable materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from rain. B. Provide full protection from freezing. Admixtures(calcium chloride)are not acceptable for freeze protection. C. For hot weather, use fog spray or water retarding additives. Do not throw water directly on surface. D. When indicated, apply two(2)coats deep penetrating sealant. E. Conform to ACI 102.2R-09 "Guide to Durable Concrete" Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.10 JOINTS(see Section 32 13 13.34 Concrete Paving Joints for detailed specifications) A. Contraction joints. For concrete pavement and concrete pans, depth 1/3 the thickness of concrete. For sidewalks,depth 1/4 the thickness of concrete. For curb and gutter, depth 1/4 the thickness of the gutter concrete. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement,transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 1. Hand formed with tool, header board,or trowel pushed into surface to move all aggregate from joint. 2. Saw joints as soon as concrete can support equipment without marring and cutting can proceed without chipping,spalling or tearing, no later than 12 hours after placement.Saw as soon as possible to prevent erratic or uncontrolled cracking and prior to the development of shrinkage cracking.Transverse joints to be perpendicular to centerline. First joints sawed approximately 60 feet apart, intermediate joints sawed after initial joints.Suitable guidelines shall be provided to ensure joint is straight and true to line. 3. Curb and gutter,sidewalk and pan joints shall have tooled radii per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.. 4. Longitudinal joints, including tie bars if required,shall conform with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 5. Fabricated steel or plastic strip held rigidly in place. B. Construction joints shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and, if required, tie bars shall be installed.Transverse construction joints shall be planned to coincide with a contraction joint location. 1. Joints constructed by forms with tie bars. C. Expansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical position, deviating not more than 1/4"from a straight line. Install at all existing and proposed structures projecting through, into, or against pavement, in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. D. Install joint sealant in all joints,at temperatures above 50 degrees F., in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. 3.11 THICKNESS A. Remove and replace work less than 95%of thickness according to drawings at Contractor's expense. 3.12 CLEANUP A. After completing concrete operations,clean surfaces, pick up excess materials,and clean work area. 3.13 OPENING TO TRAFFIC A. Pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed and the concrete has achieved a flexural strength of 650 psi. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: All testing,with the exception of slump tests,shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory. The following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at the discretion of the Engineers. B. Testing Laboratory: The selection of a testing laboratory for any of the following tests shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. C. Testing Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine the concrete quality throughout the project, however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. D. Slump Tests: Provide all necessary equipment and make tests in conformity with ASTM C143 at a minimum frequency as indicted by CDOT specifications,with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer. Provide for tests to be made by a person thoroughly familiar with the requirements specified. Reject batch if slump excess the limits specified. Keep accurate record of time, location in the work, and the results of all slump tests. Make available for inspection by the Engineer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 RIGID PAVEMENT 32 13 13.33-7 E. Control Tests: Control tests of concrete work,as a minimum,shall be made at such times and in such manner as indicated by CDOT specifications,with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. For this project, each test shall consist of 5 standard 6"test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. Compressive strength samples shall be obtained at a minimum frequency of one sampling per day and more if deemed necessary by materials testing organization.Two cylinders shall be broken at the end of 7 days after placing and three cylinders shall be broken 28 days after placing.The Engineer reserves the right to stop all future concrete work when the 7 or 28-day tests indicate unsatisfactory results; until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures have been taken to assure quality concrete in future work. Tests shall be made at the time test cylinders are taken, and recorded on the reports to determine the slump,air content, unit weight,and temperature of the concrete. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C39,ASTM C138 or ASTM C231. F. Maturity metering: When maturity metering is required,each pour shall include the necessary wires and connectors for maturity meter monitoring. 3.15 PROTECTION A. General: Protect all exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete against rain damage. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining,cracking,chipping and other damage during progress of work,and leave in good condition upon completion. END OF SECTION 32 13 13.33 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 13 13.34- CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work of this section generally includes provisions for joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter;and saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 3100 00 B. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 32 13 13.35 C. Flexible Pavement: Section 32 12 16.13 D. Rigid Pavement: Section 32 13 13.33 1.03 MEASUREMENT A. No measurement will be made for street pavement load transfer expansion joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. B. No measurement will be made for saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavement or concrete curbs for new joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. C. No measurement will be made for formed,tooled or sawed street pavement contraction joints;construction joints and non-load transfer expansion joints regardless of material. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. D. No measurement will be made forjointing in concrete paving;concrete sidewalks;curbs, pans,stairs and curb and gutter. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving;concrete sidewalks;curbs, pans,stairs and curb and gutter. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM D994-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete(Bituminous Type). C. ASTM D1751-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). D. ASTM D6690- Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied,for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements E. ASTM D5893-Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. F. AASHTO M 254-Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant Coated Dowel Bars G. AASHTO M 284-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. B. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. C. If tie bars are required, submit method of tie bar placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Foam Expansion Joint Material: Polyethylene foam conforming to ASTM D4819. Provide with a pre-scored removal strip or removable cap for creating the joint sealant reservoir. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 32 13 13.34-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous composition material conforming to ASTM D994 and ASTM D1751. Provide with a pre-scored removal strip or removable cap for creating the joint sealant reservoir. C. Joint Sealing: Silicon based mastic, color to match paving, conforming to ASTM D5893 or Hot Applied conforming to ASTM D6690. All joint sealing to conform to manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. D. Dowel Bars and Tie Bars(if required) 1. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615,Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated,smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 2. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40,epoxy coated,deformed steel bars.Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter,the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. E. Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal or concrete supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as needed to adequately maintain reinforcing location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Concrete jointing shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on plans and details. If the contractor proposes variations or the project has unusual or irregular conditions not covered,the contractor shall prepare a pavement jointing plan for approval by the Engineer. B. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement,or as shown on jointing plan if jointing plan has been prepared for the project. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes, but in no case shall a transverse construction joint be constructed within 2 feet of another transverse joint. If 2' long slab cannot be provided, remove concrete back to preceding joint and place standard transverse construction joint bulkhead.Transverse construction joints,and tie bars if required,shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes. Place longitudinal construction joints at the exterior edge of pavement lanes where pavement is placed adjacent to concrete pans or curb and gutter. Longitudinal construction joints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Place%-inch preformed joint filler expansion joints at locations indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and at all existing or proposed structures and features projecting through, into or against the pavement, or as located in adjacent pavement. For concrete pavement, use boards no shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use no more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler accurately to cross-section of concrete slab.Thicken pavement and provide jointing around inlets, manholes and other fixed structures per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.Seal joint in conformance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.04 CONTRACTION (WEAKENED PLANE)JOINTS A. Place transverse contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.Joints for concrete pavement and pans shall be tooled or sawed to a depth of 1/3 the concrete thickness.Additional joint depths are as specified below. If dowel bars are required,they shall Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 32 13 13.34-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 be installed within the tolerances and of the size,spacing and locations as indicated in the CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Dowel bars shall be furnished in a rigid welded assembly securely fastened to the sub-base and constructed to firmly hold all the dowel bars at the specified depth and parallel to each other and pavement grade and alignment B. Place longitudinal contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.Joints shall be tooled or sawed to the depth specified. If tie bars are required, they shall be installed to the size,spacing and location as indicated in the CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.05 SAWED JOINTS A. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to tooled joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line joint a minimum of 1/8 inch wide. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping,spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Saw joints at required spacing in sequence with concrete placement.The time of sawing shall be determined by the Contractor to prevent random cracking and raveling from the sawing. If uncontrolled cracking begins during or prior to joint sawing,the Contractor shall move sawing operations ahead,and if necessary, provide additional sawing units to prevent uncontrolled cracking. If concrete is snowmelted,care shall be taken to not damage any snowmelt tubing or heat trace. B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.06 JOINTS FOR CURB,CURB AND GUTTER,AND PANS A. Place%z-inch preformed joint filler expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of adjacent expansion joints in pavement; at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and between concrete curb or pan and any fixed structure or bridge. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints on 10-foot centers,or, if curb or curb and gutter is poured adjacent to a concrete sidewalk, provide joints at every other sidewalk joint(maximum spacing of 12-feet). Joint depth shall be 1/4 of the gutter thickness and 1/3 of the pan thickness. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement,transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 3.07 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Provide%-inch preformed joint filler expansion joints at intervals of not more than 500 feet and between sidewalk and any fixed structure, including utility penetrations. Extend the expansion joint material full depth of the sidewalk. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints, extending%the depth of the sidewalk, at intervals approximately equal to the width of the sidewalk. 3.08 JOINT SEALING(all joints shall be sealed) A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry,ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F and less than 85 degrees F,and weather is not foggy or rainy. B. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C. Thoroughly clean joints of loose scale, dirt,dust, residue,curing compound and other foreign material that will prevent bonding of the joint sealant. Compressed air, if used,shall be free of oil. The term joint includes wide joint spaces,contraction joints,construction joints, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks,either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Install backer rod and fill joints neatly with joint sealer per the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Provide sufficient joint sealer so that, upon completion,surface of sealer within joint will be%inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of work. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 32 13 13.34-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Replace damaged joint material with new materials as required by this Section. END OF SECTION 32 13 13.34 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 32 13 13.34-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 13 13.35 - CONCRETE PAVING CURING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes curing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork-Section 3100 00 B. Rigid Pavement-Section 32 13 13.33 C. Concrete Paving Joints-Section 32 13 13.34 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 171-Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. B. AASHTO M 148-Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. C. AASHTO M 182-Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for cover materials and liquid membrane-forming compounds. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. If concreting occurs during cold weather as defined in Section 32 13 13.36, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of Section 32 13 13.36. 2. If concreting occurs during hot weather as defined in Section 32 13 13.37,concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of Section 32 13 13.37. PART 2 PRODUCTS, CURING MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: 2.01 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 B. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 C. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 2.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to AASHTO M 148. Membrane shall be Type 2 for non-colored concrete and Type 1 for colored concrete and shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 Kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. When the ambient temperature is below 35° F the Contractor shall maintain the concrete temperature above 50°during the curing period. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine for himself the necessity for undertaking protective measures. B. The minimum curing period shall be determined by one of the following methods. The Engineer shall review for adequacy,the Contractor's determination of the curing period. 1. The minimum curing period shall be 120 hours 2. The minimum curing period shall be from the time the concrete has been placed until the concrete has met a compressive strength of 80 percent of the required field compressive strength. The Contractor shall cast information cylinders on the final portion of a placement and store as close to the structure as possible. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 32 13 13.35-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 The information cylinders shall receive similar thermal protection as the structure. The Contractor shall protect the information cylinders from damage. In-place strength shall be determined by at least two cylinders. If the information cylinders are destroyed in the field,the minimum curing period shall be 120 hours. C. Immediately after placing fresh concrete, all concrete shall be cured by one of the following methods. The Engineer shall review for adequacy,the curing method proposed by the Contractor. 3.02 WATER METHOD A. All surfaces other than slabs shall be protected from the sun and the whole structure shall be kept wet throughout the curing period. All concrete slabs shall be covered as soon as possible with suitable material so that concrete is kept thoroughly wet for at least five(5)days. The concrete surface shall be kept moist at all times by fogging with an atomizing nozzle until the covering is places. 3.03 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND METHOD A. A volatile organic content(VOC)compliant curing compound conforming to AASHTO M148,Type 2 shall be used on surfaces where curing compound is allowed,except that Type 1 curing compound shall be used on exposed aggregate or colored concrete,or when directed by the Engineer. Curing compound shall not be used on construction joints. The rate of application of curing compound will be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, but shall not be more than 300 square feet per gallon. All concrete cured by this method shall receive two applications of the curing compound. The first coat shall be applied immediately after stripping of forms and acceptance of the concrete finish. If the surface is dry,the concrete shall be thoroughly wet with water and the curing compound applied just as the surface film of water disappears. The second application shall be applied after the first application has set. During curing operations, all unsprayed surfaces shall be kept wet with water. The coating shall be protected against marring for a period of at least ten days after application. Coating marred,or otherwise disturbed,shall be given an additional coating. When using a curing compound, the compound shall be thoroughly mixed within an hour before use. If the use of a curing compound results in a streaked or blotchy appearance, its use shall be discontinued. Water curing shall then be applied until the cause of the defective appearance is corrected. 3.04 BLANKET METHOD A. Electrically heated curing blanket or insulation blankets may be used in cold weather to maintain specified curing temperature and to retain moisture in concrete. Blankets shall be lapped at least 8-inches and shall be free of holes. Blankets shall be secured at laps and edges to prevent moisture from escaping. END OF SECTION 32 13 13.35 Job No. 14LION-00-01 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 32 13 13.35-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 13 13.36- COLD WEATHER CONCRETING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Scope A. This Standard Specification covers requirements for cold weather concreting and protection of concrete from freezing during the specified protection period. B. The provision of this Standard Specification shall govern unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 Definitions A. These definitions are to assist in interpreting the provisions of this specification. 1. Accepted-Accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Engineer-The engineer or engineering firm issuing Project Drawings and Specifications, or administering the Work under the Contract Documents. 3. Cold weather-A period when for more than three successive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 F.The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight.When temperatures above 50 F occur during more than half of any 24 hr duration,the period shall no longer be regarded as cold weather. 4. Cold weather concreting-Operations concerning the placing,finishing, curing, and protection of concrete during cold weather. S. Contractor-The person,firm,or corporation with whom the Owner enters into an agreement for construction of the Work. 6. Contract documents-Documents including the Project Drawings and Project Specifications covering the required Work. 7. Day-A time period of 24 consecutive hours. 8. Owner-The corporation,association, partnership, individual,or public body or authority with whom the Contractor enters into an agreement and for whom the Work is provided. 9. Project drawings-The drawings,which along with the Project Specifications,complete the descriptive information for constructing the Work required or referred to in the Contract Documents. 10. Project specifications-The written documents which specify requirements for a project in accordance with the service parameters and other specific criteria established by the Owner. 11. Protection period-The required time during which the concrete is maintained at or above a specific temperature in order to prevent freezing of the concrete or to ensure the necessary strength development for structural safety. 12. Reference standards-Standards of a technical society,organization,or association, including the codes of local or state authorities,which are referenced in the Contract Documents. 13. Required-Required by this Specification or the Contract Documents. 14. Submitted-Submitted to the Engineer for review. 15. Work-The entire construction or separately identifiable parts thereof which are required to be furnished under the Contract Documents.Work is the result of performing services,furnishing labor,and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. Job No. 14LION-00-01 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.36-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1.03 Reference organizations ACI:American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 ASTM:American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 1.04 Reference standards ACI Standards 301-89 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ASTM Standards C 31-88 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 150-86 Standard Specification for Portland Cement C 494-86 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C 803-82 Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete C 873-85 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast in Place in Cylindrical Molds C 900-87 Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete 1.05 Submittal of procedures Detailed procedures-If required,submit detailed procedures for the production,transportation, placement, protection,curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. In the submittal, include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have been reviewed and accepted. Minimum procedures for placement,curing and protection of the concrete shall follow the recommendations in ACI 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting."The details should include, but not be limited to,the following: A. Procedures for protecting the subgrade from frost and the accumulation of ice or snow on reinforcement or forms prior to placement. B. Methods for temperature protection during placement. C. Types of covering, insulation, housing,or heating to be provided. D. Curing methods to be used during and following the protection period. E. Use of strength accelerating admixtures. F. Methods for verification of in-place strength. G. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. H. Procedures for preventing drying during dry,windy conditions. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 Scheduling protection materials A. All materials and equipment required for protection shall be available at the project site before cold weather concreting. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CO�D WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.36-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.02 Concrete A. Concrete for slabs and other flatwork exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing in a wet condition during the construction period shall be air entrained. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation before concreting A. Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which the concrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, completely thaw the subgrade. Do not place concrete around massive embedments identified in the Contract Documents unless such embedments are at a temperature above freezing. 3.02 Concrete temperature Placement temperature-The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be as specified in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1.The temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1 by more than 20F. Table 3.2.1-Concrete temperature (11 (2) (3) Least dimension of Minimum temperature Maximum gradual section,in. of concrete as placed decrease in surface and maintained during temperature durning protection period,°F any 24h after end of protection, °F Less than 12 55 50 12 to less than 36 50 40 36 to 72 45 30 Greaterthan 72 40 20 A. Protection temperature- Unless otherwise specified,the minimum temperature of concrete during the protection period shall be as shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1.Temperatures specified to be maintained during the protection period shall be those measured at the concrete surface,whether the surface is in contact with formwork, insulation,or air. Measure the temperature with a surface temperature measuring device having an accuracy of+/-2 F. Measure and record the temperature of concrete in each placement at regular time intervals at a frequency not less than twice per 24-hr period. B. Termination of protection-The maximum decrease in temperature measured at the surface of the concrete in a 24-hour period shall not exceed the values shown in Column 3 of Table 3.2.1. Do not exceed these limits until the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperatures.When the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperature,all protection may be removed. 3.03 Curing of concrete Prevent concrete from drying during the required curing period. If water curing is used,terminate use at least 24 hr before any anticipated exposure of the concrete to freezing temperatures. 3.04 Protection of concrete A. Combustion heaters-Vent flue gases from combustion heating units to the outside of the enclosure. B. Overheating and drying-Place and direct heaters and ducts to avoid areas of overheating or drying of the concrete surface. Job No. 14LION-00-01 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.36-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Maximum air temperature-During the protection period,do not expose the concrete surface to air having a temperature more than 20 F above the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1, unless higher values are required by an accepted curing method. D. Protection against freezing-Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 3 days, unless otherwise specified. Maintain the surface temperature of the concrete during that period in accordance with Column 2 of Table 3.2.1, unless otherwise specified.The protection period may be reduced to 2 days if use of one or more of the following to alter the concrete mixture is accepted: -Type III portland cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150 -A strength accelerating admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C 494 - 100 Ib/yd3 of additional cement During periods not defined as cold weather, but when freezing temperatures may occur, protect concrete surfaces against freezing for the first 24 hr after placing.Any changes in the concrete mix proportions for reducing the duration of the protection period to prevent early freezing should be submitted for review or acceptance. E. Protection deficiency- If the temperature requirements during the specified protection period are not met but the concrete was prevented from freezing, continue protection until twice the deficiency of protection in degree-hours is made up. Deficient degreehours may be determined by multiplying the average deficiency in temperature by the number of hours the temperature was below the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. Job No. 14LION-00-01 CO�D WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.36-4 GORMAN & COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 APPENDIX-METRIC CONVERSIONS Inch-�ound unit Factor S1 unit In. x25.4 =mm Lb/yd3 x0.5933 =kg/m' Psi x0.006895 =Mpa Temperature, °F (°F-32)/1.8 =°C Temperature interval °F °F/1.8 =°C END OF SECTION 32 13 13.36 Job No. 14LION-00-01 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.36-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.36-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 13 13.37 - HOT WEATHER CONCRETING SECTION 1 GENERAL 1.01 Scope This Specification covers requirements for hot weather concrete construction. Provisions of this Specification shall govern,except where other provisions are specified in Contract Documents.This Specification shall not be used in conjunction with ACI 301 or ACI 530.1. 1.02 Referenced standards A. Standards of ACI and ASTM referred to in this Specification are listed with serial designation, including year of adoption or revision, and are part of this Specification. B. ACI Standards 308.1-98 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete C. ASTM Standards C 31/C31 M-03a Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 39/C 39M-05 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C 78-02 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete(Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading) C 94/C 94M-05 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete C 138/C 138M-01a Test Method for Density(Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric)of Concrete C 143/C 143M-05a Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete C 171-03 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete C 173/C 173M-01e1 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method C 192/C 192M-05 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory C 231-04 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method C 293-02 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete(Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading) C 1064/C 1064M-05 Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete D. Abbreviations for and complete names and addresses of organizations issuing documents referred to in this Specification are listed: American Concrete Institute(ACI) PO Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 Phone: (248)848-3700 Fax: (248)848-3701 website:www.concrete.org Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 ASTM International (ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Dr West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 Phone: (610)832-9500 Fax: (610)832-9555 website:www.astm.org 1.03 Definitions day-a period of 24 consecutive hours. evaporation retardant-a material that generates a continuous thin film when spread over water on the surface of fresh concrete and thus retards the evaporation of bleed water. hot weather-job-site conditions that accelerate the rate of moisture loss or rate of cement hydration of freshly mixed concrete, including an ambient temperature of 27°C(80°F)or higher,and an evaporation rate that exceeds 1 kg/m2/h, or as revised by the Engineer. hot weather concreting-operations concerning the preparation, production, delivery, placement,finishing, protection,and curing of concrete during hot weather. moist-slightly damp but not quite dry to the touch; "wet" implies visible free water, "damp" implies less wetness than "wet," and "moist" implies not quite dry. protection period-the required time during which the concrete is protected against thermal cracking due to rapid temperature drops. temperature of fresh concrete-the temperature measured during the discharge and placement in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. temperature of hardened concrete-the temperature measured at the concrete surface. units-values stated in either U.S. Customary or SI units shall be regarded separately as standard.Values stated in each system might not be exact equivalents;therefore, each system must be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way. 1.04 Submittal of procedures A. Before hot weather concreting and the preplacement conference,submit to Engineer for review and comment detailed procedures, including production, placement,finishing, curing and protection of concrete during hot weather concreting. 1.05 Preplacement conference A. At least 15 days before the start of the concrete construction schedule, hold a preplacement conference for the purpose of reviewing hot weather concreting requirements and mix designs. B. Send a preplacement conference agenda on hot weather operations and procedures to representatives of concerned parties not less than 10 days before the scheduled date of the conference. C. Preplacement conference shall include, but is not limited to, representation of Contractor, Concrete Subcontractor,Testing Agency, Pumping Contractor, and Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer. D. Distribute the minutes of the preplacement conference to representatives of concerned parties within 5 days after the preplacement conference. 1.06 Documents required on site A. Copies of ACI 305R,ACI 305.1,and ACI 308.1 must be available at the project site during concrete construction. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Store all materials and equipment required for curing and protection at or near the project site before hot weather concreting commences. B. Initial site curing of strength test specimens for acceptance-Provide facilities that ensure compliance with the initial curing requirements of ASTM C 31/C 31M. 2.02 Concrete mixture proportions A. Submit concrete mixture proportions to Engineer for review. Include specific materials, manufacturer, and type for hot weather concreting.The submittal shall include concrete mixture adjustment parameters and methods to be implemented during changes in weather conditions. SECTION 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. Do not place concrete against surfaces of absorbent materials that are dry. Do not place concrete against surfaces that have free water. B. Prepare all materials required for accepted evaporation control measures and have them available on site so that specified measures can be executed as necessary. C. Initiate accepted evaporation control measures when concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity of the air, and the wind velocity have the capacity to evaporate water from a free water surface at a rate that is equal to or greater than 1.0 kg/m2/h (0.2 Ib/ft2/h), unless otherwise specified. Determine the evaporation rate of surface moisture by use of the Menzel Formula: W=0.315(eo-ea)(0.253+0.060V) [SI units] W=0.44(eo-ea)(0.253+0.096V) [U.S. Customary units] where W=mass of water evaporated in kg(Ib) per m2 (ft2)of water-covered surface per hour; eo=saturation water vapor pressure in kPa (psi) in the air immediately over the evaporating surface,at the temperature of the evaporating surface. Obtain this value from Table 3.1(a)or(b).The temperature of the evaporating surface shall be taken as the concrete temperature; ea=water vapor pressure in kPa (psi) in the air surrounding the concrete. Multiply the saturation vapor pressure at the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete by the relative humidity of the air.Air temperature and relative humidity are to be measured at a level approximately 1.2 to 1.8 m (4 to 6 ft)above the evaporating surface on the windward side and shielded from the sun's rays;and V=average wind speed in km/h (mph), measured at 0.5 m (20 in.)above the evaporating surface. D. Monitor site conditions(air temperature, humidity,wind speed)to assess the need for evaporation control measures beginning no later than 1 hour before the start of concrete placing operations. Continue to monitor site conditions at intervals of 30 minutes or less until specified curing procedures have been applied. E. For measuring the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, use equipment or instruments that are certified by the manufacturer as accurate to within 1°C(2°F), 5%relative humidity, and 1.6 km/h (1 mph)wind speed. Use equipment in accordance with the product manufacturer recommendations. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Table 3.1(a)-Saturation water vapor pressure(kPa)over water(SI units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature,°C pressure, kPa temperature,°C pressure,kPa 4 0813 28 3.78 5 0.872 29 4.01 6 0.934 30 4.24 7 1.00 31 4.49 Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature,°C pressure,kPa temperature,°C pressure,kPa 8 1.07 32 4.75 9 1.15 33 5.03 10 1.23 34 5.32 11 1.31 35 5.62 12 1.40 36 5.94 13 1.50 37 6.28 14 1.60 38 6.63 15 1.70 39 6.99 16 1.82 40 7.38 17 1.94 41 7.78 18 2.06 42 8.20 19 2.20 43 8.64 20 2.34 44 9.10 21 2.49 45 9.58 22 2.64 46 10.1 23 2.81 47 10.6 24 2.98 48 11.2 25 3.17 49 11.7 26 3.36 50 12.3 27 3.56 Data source:CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,68th Edition, 1987,mathematically converted into kPa. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Table 3.1(b)-Saturation water vapor pressure(psi)over water(U.S.Customary units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature,°F pressure, psi temperature,°F pressure,psi 40 .121 81 0.523 41 0.127 82 0.542 42 0.132 83 0.559 43 0.137 84 0.577 44 0.143 85 0.595 45 0.147 86 0.615 46 0.153 87 0.637 47 0.159 88 0.658 48 0.166 89 0.679 49 0.171 90 0.698 50 0.178 91 0.722 51 0.185 92 0.746 52 0.192 93 0.769 53 0.199 94 0.789 54 0.206 95 0.816 55 0.214 96 0.843 56 0.222 97 0.870 57 0.231 98 0.896 58 0.238 99 0.920 59 0.247 100 0.951 60 0.257 101 0.981 61 0.267 102 1.01 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature,°F pressure,psi temperature,°F pressure,psi 62 0.277 103 1.04 63 0.285 104 1.07 64 0.296 105 1.10 65 0.308 106 1.13 66 0.319 107 1.17 67 0.327 108 1.20 68 0.339 109 1.24 69 0.352 110 1.27 70 0.366 111 1.31 71 0.378 112 1.35 72 0.388 113 1.39 73 0.403 114 1.43 74 0.418 115 1.47 75 0.433 116 1.52 76 0.443 117 1.56 77 0.459 118 1.60 78 0.476 119 1.65 79 0.494 120 1.70 80 0.510 Data source:CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,68th Edition, 1987,mathematically converted into°F and psi. 3.02 Maximum allowable concrete temperature A. Limit the maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature to 35°C(95°F), unless otherwise specified, or unless a higher allowable temperature is accepted by Engineer, based upon past field experience or preconstruction testing using a concrete mixture similar to one known to have been successfully used at a higher concrete temperature. B. Measure the fresh concrete temperature at the point and time of discharge in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Frequency of temperature determination shall be in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M and at the option of the inspector. 3.03 Qualification of concrete mixture proportions A. Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature,supported by past field experience of Section 3.2.1,shall be based, on similar climate and production conditions, materials, mixture proportions and temperatures, placing and finishing methods,and concrete delivery time. B. Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature,supported by preconstruction testing of Section 3.2.1,shall require materials similar to those proposed for use in the project. C. Laboratory trial batch-Batch the laboratory concrete trial mixture within 2°C(3°F)of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature and mix in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M, except as modified herein. If necessary, move the laboratory mixer into an enclosed, heated and ventilated space, or use heated mixing water,or both,to achieve and maintain the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature. For drum-type mixers,the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 47 minutes after completion of the 3-minute initial Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 mixing period unless specified otherwise. During the 50-minute period,cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material,such as plastic,to prevent moisture loss, and rotate the mixer continuously at an agitation speed of 6 to 8 rpm. For laboratory mixers without speed adjustments,simulate agitation by rotating the mixer continuously at a drum angle between 45 and 75 degrees from horizontal.At the end of 50 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer(8 to 20 rpm)for 2 minutes. For pan-type mixers,the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 41 minutes after completion of the initial 3-minute mixing period. During the 44-minute period,the mixer shall cycle through periods of rest for 5 minutes,and then mixing for 1 minute. During the rest period,cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material,such as plastic,to prevent moisture loss.At the end of 44 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer(8 to 20 rpm)for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods for both drum-type and pan-type mixers,the addition of water, chemical admixture,or both,to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded.As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 50-or 44-minute laboratory trial mixing period. D. The proposed concrete mixture shall meet the specified slump range at the end of the laboratory mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. E. Field trial batch-Batch the field concrete trial mixture within 2°C(3 °F)of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature in a truck-mixer with a minimum batch size of 3 m3 (4 yd3). If necessary, move the truck mixer into an enclosed, heated,and ventilated space to achieve a concrete temperature within the specified tolerance of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature.The concrete mixture shall be held in the mixer for 90 minutes, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. During the entire 90-minute period,agitate the mixer at 1 to 6 rpm.At the end of 90 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer(6 to 18 rpm)for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods,the addition of water, chemical admixture,or both,to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded.As needed,check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 90-minute mixing period. F. The proposed concrete mixture shall be within the specified slump range at the end of the 90-minute field mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. G. Test values obtained in accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard shall include compressive strength (C 192/C 192M or C 31/C 31M, and C 39/C 39M),flexural strength (C 192/C 192M and either C 78 or C 293;C 31/C 31M and either C 78 or C 293),or both;slump (C 143/C 143M); air content(C 231,C 173/C 173M,or C 138/C 138M); concrete density(unit weight) (C 138/C 138M); and concrete temperature(C 1064/C 1064M).Slump,air content, and concrete and air temperature measurements shall be performed after initial mixing, intermediately as needed or as desired, and at the conclusion of the mixing period along with the other specified tests. H. Acceptance of concrete mixture proportions-Submit to the Engineer for acceptance a request for a specific higher maximum allowable concrete temperature. Include the constituent materials and proportions of the proposed concrete mixture and all values obtained from past field experience or preconstruction testing.Test results shall be within the Project Specification ranges and tolerances. 3.04 Concrete production and delivery A. Concrete shall be produced at a temperature such that its maximum temperature at discharge will not exceed the specified maximum allowable concrete temperature.Acceptable production methods to reduce the temperature of the concrete include:shading aggregate stockpiles,sprinkling water on coarse aggregate stockpiles; using chilled water for concrete production;substituting chipped or shaved iced for portions of the mixing water; and cooling concrete materials using liquid nitrogen.The submittals for hot weather concreting shall indicate which methods will be used and in what order they will be initiated when multiple methods are to be used.The substitution of other cooling methods will be considered by the Engineer when requested in the submittal and accompanied by satisfactory supporting data. B. Unless otherwise specified, deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M,which requires the concrete to be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the truck-mixer drum has revolved 300 revolutions,whichever comes first. Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.05 Concrete placement and finishing A. Concrete placement and finishing operations shall proceed as quickly as conditions will permit. 3.06 Concrete bleed-water evaporation A. Control concrete surface bleed-water evaporation with application of evaporation reducers, plastic sheeting,fog spray, or wind breaks. Use these materials and methods in accordance with ACI 308.1 Submit for approval the desired method to be used when concreting during periods with evaporation rates higher than permitted 3.07 Concrete curing A. Concrete curing-Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. 3.08 Concrete protection A. Protection period-Protect the concrete against thermal shrinkage cracking due to rapid drops in concrete temperature greater than 22°C(40°F)during the first 24 hours unless otherwise specified. B. Protection materials-Acceptable protection materials to prevent excessive temperature drops are insulating blankets, batt insulation with moisture-proof covering, layers of dry porous material such as straw, hay,or multiple layers of impervious paper meeting ASTM C 171.These protection materials shall not be applied until the concrete surface temperature has become steady or is beginning to decline. END OF SECTION 32 13 13.37 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 32 13 13.37-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 84 23 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL STATEMENT The specifications set forth herein pertain to the installation of an underground irrigation system. Consultant refers to Owner's Representative. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 32 90 00-Planting B. Section 32 92 00-Seeding C. Section 32 01 30-Landscape Maintenance 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. The applicable provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of these specifications shall govern the work of this section as if it were written here in full. B. This work shall consist of installing a complete underground irrigation system as shown on the drawings. The contractor shall include all labor, materials, permits, licenses, inspection tools,facilities,transportation and equipment necessary for the installation of a complete system according to the plans and specifications. No substitutions of materials or the procedure shall be made concerning these documents without the written consent of an approved equal by the consultant. The work shall comply with the requirements of all legally constituted authorities having jurisdictions. C. All work in this section shall be coordinated with all utilities and trades responsible for their installation. D. Work called for on the drawings and details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Irrigation Drawings: 1. The irrigation drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Due to the scale of the drawings,all characteristics of the system (i.e.,sleeving,fittings, etc.) may not be represented. The contractor shall carefully inspect the site and plan his work accordingly,supplying any materials and equipment necessary to install said characteristics. 2. The contractor shall notify consultant of any discrepancies between site dimensions,grade differences, obstructions,etc.,and those on the drawings that might not have been known during preparation of irrigation drawings. If such written notifications is not made, contractor shall assume all expenses and responsibility for any revisions necessary. 3. Work called for on the drawings by notes or on details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. 4. Design locations of heads,valves and lines are approximate. Contractor shall make minor adjustments of locations to avoid conflicts with planting, buildings and other obstacles. All finish grades shall be approved prior to installation of the irrigation system. B. Experience and Observations: 1. Work shall be performed in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to the various trades. The contractor shall be highly skilled and proficient in the installation of irrigation systems of this magnitude. If requested by owner or consultant,contractor shall submit a list of three(3) projects of equal complexity with references. Contractor must have a minimum of five(5)years experience with projects of comparable size. The contractor shall coordinate installation of irrigation system with other trades on the project. Superintendent approved by the consultant shall oversee the irrigation system installation and shall be available on a daily basis. The superintendent shall not be changed unless approved by the consultant. 2. No materials of any of any kind shall be installed on the project until they have been approved by the consultant. The consultant reserves the right to observe installation of the irrigation system at any time Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 and to reject any and all materials or workmanship that does not meet project specifications and standards. Materials used without prior consent of the consultant may be rejected and removed at contractor's expense. Approval of material is for design purposes only and shall indicate that materials visually meet specifications, but this acceptance shall not relieve contractor of any guarantees. Contractor shall be responsible for the total performance of such substitution or equal or surpass the original design in every respect. Consultant reserves the right to reject installed substitution if, in his opinion, it proves unsatisfactory. Contractor shall replace substitution at his own expense. 3. Before final acceptance of the project, the contractor shall show evidence to the consultant that all submittals, etc., have been received by the owner. 4. Contractor shall give consultant forty-eight(48) hours notice with request for staking or for field observation. Head and staking must be approved prior to commencement of installation. Contractor to certify site conditions before commencing work. Contractor to notify consultant in written form of any site irregularities prior to commencing work. Initiation of irrigation installation implies contractor acceptance of existing conditions. C. Ordinances and Regulations: 1. Contractor shall observe all state and local laws, ordinances, regulations and applicable codes concerning the materials and installation of the irrigation system. Should a conflict arise between ordinances, laws, codes, regulations and specifications,the most stringent requirements will prevail in any case. 1.05 SUBMITfALS A. Materials List: 1. A materials list of all products and materials to be used in the project shall be submitted to the consultant prior to installation of irrigation system. 2. Consultant reserves the right to reject any and all materials that have been installed but have not been approved. 3. Contractor may request an approved equal to a product specified on the plans. Contractor must submit cut sheets of the product seven (7)says prior to bid opening to the consultant. Consultant shall respond to the request within three(3)days of receiving product information. 4. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the contractor of his liability for project guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the project guarantee. B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Contractor is to deliver to owner's representatives the following before final acceptance of the irrigation system. a. Index sheet of contractor's address and phone number. b. List of materials and manufacturer's representatives with addresses and phone numbers. c. Operating and maintenance instructions of all equipment with shutdown and start-up procedures for the irrigations system. C. Additional Equipment: 1. Equipment to be furnished as part of this contract to the owner at the completion of the project before final acceptance of irrigation system: a. Two(2) manual drain valve keys of appropriate length; b. Two(2)gate valve or stop and waste valve keys of appropriate length; c. Three(3)quick coupler keys and two (2) matching hose swivels; d. Two(2)sets of special tools used for maintaining and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied; e. Two(2) keys for each automatic controller; f. Two(2)sprinkler heads and nozzles for each type used. D. As-Built Drawing: 1. Before final acceptance of the irrigation system contractor shall supply owner with a reproducible Mylar As-built drawing. Drawing shall include dimensioned locations of all equipment and piping as listed in the irrigation schedule on the plans. Drawing to include dimensioned changes in location of sprinkler heads, zoning changes, connection to existing water lines,and any other items as requested. As-built drawings Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 are to be updated weekly throughout the length of the project and to be made available to the consultant. The owner shall not approve any pay requests if the As-built drawings are not current. 2. If requested by owner,consultant shall review submitted As-built drawings and reject the drawings if they are not legible, etc., of do not contain the proper equipment. 1.06 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND SAFETY MEASURES A. Property and Utilities: 1. All trees,shrubs,flowers,fences, buildings,walks, roadways, and other property shall be protected from damage. Any damage to said property shall be repaired or replaced to the owner's satisfaction at the contractor's expense. Open trenches left exposed shall be flared and barricaded as per O.S.H.A. regulations by the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible to contact utility companies and the owner's representative for staked locations of all utilities on the property. If staked utilities are damaged by the contractor,the utilities shall be repaired at contractor's expense. 2. All trenching and other work within three feet of existing trees shall be done by hand so as not to damage tree roots of limbs. All trenches shall be no less than one foot from the trunk of any tree. 3. Promptly notify consultant of unexpected subsurface conditions. B. Replacement of Paving and Curbs: 1. Damage caused by trenching, crossing existing and/or proposed roadways, paths, curbing,etc.,shall be kept to a minimum and all damaged areas shall be restored to their original condition at the contractor's expense. This will include compaction of subgrade to ninety-five percent(95%) relative compaction. 2. Restoration shall take the following course: a. Match existing paving sections for asphalt pacing. Thoroughly compact sub-base, base course, matching grade of existing paving. No rough or rolled grades will be allowed. b. Blacktop curbs-hot mix bituminous curb mix tamped and shaped to match adjoining curbs. c. Concrete paving-concrete to match adjoining concrete work,with expansion joints. d. Sidewalks-concrete to match adjoining concrete work. 1.07 MATERIAL HANDLING,STORAGE AND CLEAN UP A. Material Handling and Storage: 1. Contractor shall be cautious in handling and installing pipe and materials. Consultant reserves the right to reject any and all materials that are damaged. Damaged and defective pipe and equipment is to be removed from the site. Contractor shall make arrangements with the owner to store materials on site. Do not expose plastic piping to prolonged sunlight. B. Clean Up: 1. Contractor shall endeavor to keep the site clean at all times. At the completion of the project the contractor shall remove all construction equipment and surplus materials from the premises leaving the area in a clean and acceptable condition. Surplus materials shall include unsuitable excavated materials, rock,trash, and debris. Any equipment or debris which is not removed shall be removed at the expense of the contractor. 1.08 FLUSHING,TESTING AND COVERAGE A. Flushing: 1. All lines shall be thoroughly flushed to eliminate any foreign matter before sprinkler heads are installed. B. Testing: 1. In the presence of the consultant,the contractor shall conduct a pressure test on the mainline pipe at a pressure of 100 PSI for a period of two(2) hours. Any leaks or breaks during the test shall be repaired and the mainline will be tested until accepted, All test equipment and pumps shall be supplied by the contractor as part of the contract. 2. The contractor is responsible for providing the proper amount of water on sod and plant material to establish and sustain optimum plant growth. The watering program is to be included on As-built drawings. C. Coverage: Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. After the sprinkler heads have been installed,and before installation of sod,the contractor shall conduct a coverage test in the presence of the consultant to determine if irrigated areas are receiving the proper amount of water. As directed by the consultant,the contractor shall make adjustments for proper coverage at no additional expense. This Shall include changing of nozzle patterns and degrees of arc. Contractor shall perform,at no additional expense,the required work to correct any coverage problems due to deviations from irrigation plans or to problems caused by installing according to plans when it is obvious that the plans are inadequate,without bringing it first to the attention of the consultant. No over spray is permitted on any structure. 2. Any areas which do not conform to the designed characteristics of the drawings and unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at his expense. 1.09 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION A. Preliminary inspection will occur after completion of entire irrigation system. Provide 48 hours notice to the consultant for inspection. B. Preliminary inspection will evaluate the performance,coverage,appearance and performance of the system to that of the drawings. Contractor shall rework or replace items that do not meet consultant's approval. C. Consultant will provide a punch list of items to be corrected. D. Contractor will correct all punch list items at this expense. 1.10 FINAL INSPECTION A. Upon completion of punch list items,contractor will give consultant 48 hours notice to set up final inspection. Final inspection will take place after all as-built drawings,controller charts and submittals have been provided and accepted by the owner. B. If,after inspection,the consultant determines that all work conforms to the drawings, he will issue a written notice of acceptance. C. Final acceptance will not be given until all punch list items and subsequent new items are corrected. Funds shall be withheld from the contractor to pay for any subsequent inspection as deemed necessary by the owner to ensure compliance with contract drawings,specifications and details. D. If the consultant determines that the irrigation system is obviously not completed to warrant a final inspection, the contractor shall pay the consultant to cover costs for final inspection. 1.11 WINTERIZATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for draining of the irrigation system at the close of the sprinkling season and for start up of the system in the spring without being requested by owner. Contractor shall use compressed air or an acceptable equivalent to drain system. Use procedures that are industry standards. Contractor shall adjust system (sprinkler heads,coverage, etc.)as part of the start up procedures. 1.12 WARRANTY A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to insure the satisfactory operation of the entire irrigation system and the workmanship and restoration of the project area. The entire system, including materials,shall be guaranteed in writing to be complete and remain operable in every detail by the contractor for a period of one (1)year from date of final acceptance, and the contractor agrees to make any adjustments or repair any defects occurring within the one-year guarantee period within seven (7) calendar days from receipt of notice of malfunction by the owner. If contractor neglects to perform these duties within the specified time,the owner may make such repairs at the contractor's expense; provided however,that in the case of an emergency, wherein the judgment of the owner,delay would cause serious loss or damage, repairs or replacement may be made by verbal communication and without notice being sent to the contractor, and the contractor shall pay the cost thereof. Any settling of irrigation trenches/backfill material during the guarantee period shall be repaired at contractor's expense. Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. P.V.C. Pipe: 1. This specification describes the properties and performance required for poly vinyl chloride pipe. Pipe shall be suitable for use at maximum hydrostatic working pressure of 200 PSI or 160 PSI as noted on plans. Pipe shall be made from clean,virgin, NSF approved,type 1,grade 1 P.V.C., conforming to ASTI Resin specification D1784-60 and project standard D2241 for P.V.C. 1120 SDR 26 or SDR 21. P.V.C. Pipe is to belled end and solvent weld. Solvent cement and primer shall be of the type prescribed by manufacturer. 2. Markin�and Declaration of Compliance Marking shall show the size,series, identification, manufacturer's trade name at intervals of not more than 20 feet. Pipe shall include the seal of approval of the National Sanitation Foundation spaced at intervals required by NSF regulations. B. P.V.C. Fittings: 1. All pipe fittings to be schedule 40 P.V.C. (ASTM D2466 and D1784) unless specifically noted otherwise. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM D2564. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass pipe shall be 85%red brass, (ANSI)Schedule 40. 2. Fittings shall be medium brass, 125 pound class,screwed type. 3. Use a dielectric union wherever a copper based metal (copper, brass, bronze) is connected to an iron based metal (iron,galvanized and stainless steel). D. Flexible Plastic Pipe: 1. All flexible plastic pipe shall conform to all requirements of the United States Department of Commerce Commercial Standard CS-256-63,ASTM D2239, PE 2306-80 NSF polyethylene pipe. E. Flexible Pipe Fittings: 1. Insert plastic pipe fittings(ASTM D2609)Shall be used with stainless steel worm gear clamps. F. Copper Pipe: 1. Copper pipe shall have the requirements of Type K,ASTM B88. Fittings shall be copper or cast bronze. Silver solder shall be used for joints. G. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Sprinkler heads shall be of the type and model as indicated on drawings. H. Backflow Preventer: 1. Backflow preventer shall be of the type, model and size as indicated on drawings. I. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Automatic control valves shall be of the make specified, designed to operate with the specified controller with size and model as listed on drawings. Control valve shall be normally closed type and shall have manual bleed nut and manual flow control. J. Drip Valve Assemblies: 1. Drip valve assembly shall be of the type,size and style as indicated on the drawings. Strainer shall have 120 mesh nylon screen with 1/2" blow-out. Pressure reducing valve shall have manual adjusting nut. K. Drip Emitters and Tubing: 1. Drip emitters shall be of the type,style and size as indicated on the drawings. Drip tubing shall conform to ASTM D1248 and ASTM D3350. Capillary tubing shall have 1/8" i.d. L. Drip Line Blow Out Stubs: 1. Install drip line blow out stubs at all ends of drip tubing. M. Quick Couplers: 1. Quick coupler valves shall be of the type, size and style as indicated on the drawings. Quick coupler valves shall be two piece with rubber locking cover. Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 N. Gate Valves: 1. Gate valves up to 2-1/2" shall be brass with non-rising stem and I.P.S.threads. Gate valves shall be as shown on drawings. 0. Automatic Controller: 1. The automatic controller shall be furnished and located as shown on the plans. The controller shall be of the type,size and model number as shown. Controller shall be equipped with primary line surge protector. Install valve output surge protection arrestors for control wiring and common. P. Control Valve Wiring: 1. Irrigation control wiring shall be#14 gauge solid A.W.G. and be U.F., U.L.approved. Control wires to be red,common wires to be white,and master valve wires to be black. Q. Valve Boxes: 1. Valve boxes shall be of the type,size and style as indicated on the details. A Carson#910-12 box shall be used for control wire splices. Use one(1)valve box for each valve installed. Where multiple valve boxes occur,arrange in symmetrical order and appearance. No valve box extensions will be accepted. On the underside of all control valve boxes shall be markings clearly indication controller number and valve number. PART 3 EXECUTION -INSTALLATION 3.01 Trenching: A. Trenching and installation of irrigation system shall not commence until final grading has been completed and approved by the owner. B. Trenches shall be cut to true line and grade, and shall be excavated so that the pipe shall drain uniformly toward the drain valves deemed necessary to properly drain the system. Minimum grade of piping to drain shall be 3"/100'. All debris and rocks shall be removed from trenches, For piping 3"and larger,trench width shall be sufficient for installation of pipe with a clearance of at least 4 inches horizontally on both sides of pipe within trench. C. Pipe pulling may be used if soil conditions are acceptable to consultant. D. Installation Depth of Piping: Depth of mainline from top of pipe is 18" Depth of lateral (rotor)from top of pipe is 18" Depth of lateral (pop-up shrub)from top of pipe is 18" Depth of lateral (pop-up)from top of pipe is 12" Depth of wiring-at side of mainline 3.02 Plastic pipe and Fittings: A. All pipe and fittings shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. No pipe shall be installed in temperatures of 40 degrees F or less. No pipe shall be installed on non-compacted fill dirt. Plastic pipe shall be snaked horizontally in trench and square cut with burrs removed from inside of pipe. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. For threaded connections, use sealants that are recommended by the manufacturer for use with plastic. Do not use oil based pipe joint compounds. Assemble threaded connections by tightening 1 to 1-1/2 turns beyond finger tight. Keep piping clear of dirt and pipe scale. Keep open ends of assembled piping capped. Teflon tape is to be used on all plastic threaded joints. B. Solvent wild joints shall be made according to manufacturer's recommendations. Allowjoints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the piping. C. Install two(2)clamps on all polyethylene fittings 1-1/2 or greater. 3.03 Backfilling: A. All backfilling shall be done with approved soil,free of any debris including rock and debris 1" in diameter or larger, and shall be puddled and/or mechanically tamped to prevent settling. Backfilling shall not be done with frozen or caked soil. Excess debris encountered during backfill process shall be removed at the contractor's Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 expense. Backfill shall be compacted to 95%standard proctor density(ASTM D698-78). Any backfill soil removed due to unsuitability shall be replaced with new,approved soil at the contractor's expense. Any settling during the warranty period of the backfill material shall be repaired at contractor's expense, including any damage to other items affected by the settling. B. All lateral lines shall be installed in trenches with a minimum of 6" clearance. C. Do not install lateral lines within 2'of lines of other trades. 3.04 Installation of Piping Under Paving: A. Contractor to coordinate installation of sleeving with other applicable trades. All piping that is to be located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving is to be installed shall be at an 18" depth below top of road base. Piping is to be encased in sand 4"on all sides. Add backfill in 6" lifts and use mechanical tamping to reach 95% standard proctor density. B. Contractor is to match and install new paving and base with existing paving and base where cutting of paving is necessary for installation of piping. Contractor must obtain written approval from the consultant for the process. C. Installation of piping under existing walks is to be done with jacking or boring. Any cracking or breaking of the walk is to be repaired at contractor's expense. Contractor shall repair or replace to its original condition any damage caused by settling of sleeving during the warranty period. 3.05 Sprinkler Heads: A. All sprinkler heads located in turf areas shall be adjusted vertically to be flush with final finish grades. Install heads as per details with spacing according to plans. Install heads on double swing joint assemblies. Angle of nipples relative to lateral lines shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 15 degrees. Locate rotary sprinklers 18" (spray heads 18")away from walls,fences and paved areas. Under no circumstances shall the spacing exceed the maximum spacing recommended by the manufacturers. All sprinkler heads to be adjusted so as no water is spraying any building walls. 3.06 Gate Valves: A. Installation of gate valves shall be as indicated on the details. 3.07 Backflow Preventer: A. Installation of backflow preventer shall be as indicated on the details. Install as per local and state codes. The most stringent requirement for backflow prevention shall prevail in case of a conflict. 3.08 Automatic Control Valves: A. Installation of automatic control valves shall be as indicated on the details. All control valves shall be installed as close as possible to the locations as shown on plans. 3.09 Drip Valve Assemblies: A. Installation of drip valve assemblies shall be as indicated on the details. 3.10 Drip Emitters and Tubing: A. Installation of drip emitters and tubing shall be as indicated on the details. Drip tubing is to be installed at a depth of 4" below top of grade. In this case,top of grade does not include mulch or rock layer. Drip line blow out stubs are to be installed at all ends of drip tubings. Install drip tubing in turf areas as lateral piping. 3.11 Quick Coupling Valves: A. All quick coupling valves shall be installed as double swing joint assemblies of schedule 45 PVC. Angle of nipple relative to mainline shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 15 degrees. Install as per detail. 3.12 Automatic Controller: A. Automatic controller shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations and/or irrigation details. Each controller shall have its own separate ground wire and reduced, laminated as-built drawing installed in the door. Controller charts shall be legible and color coded to show valve numbers and their respective zones. Charts are Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 to be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20 mil.thick plastic sheets and approved prior to final acceptance. B. All work performed as electrical installation shall conform to applicable codes. All High voltage electrical work shall be performed by a licensed electrician. The irrigatin contractor shall be responsible for the electrical connection of the controller with the metered electrical line at the base of the controller as provided by the owner. C. Install one valve output surge protection arrestor on each control and common wire. D. Install a circuit breaker and electrical on/off switch for each controller. 3.13 Control Wiring: A. Installation of control wires shall be strung as close as possible to the mainline with such wires to be located on one side of pipe. Wiring to be installed in separate trench of not along mainline. All underground electrical connections shall be made with Rainbird Pentite connectors. Any splices not within control valve boxes shall be installed in a Carson#910-12 valve box. The contractor shall leave a minimum loop of 24" at each control valve, each splice and every 100 feet of wiring. Wiring is to be bundled every 20 feet with one(1)control wire used for every control valve. Install two(2)spare#14-1 wires along complete entirety of mainline from controllers to farthest control valve on each and every branch of mainline. Color to be blue. 3.14 Drain Valves A. Manual drain valves shall be installed as per details. Contractor shall supply, locate and install drain valves so as to drain entire mainline. Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Supplemental Unit Price Sheet The following prices are intended to be the basis for additions or deletions to the irrigation system. Irri�ation Equipment Unit Price Rainbird 1804 Pop-Up with 15 Series Nozzle&Assembly ea Rainbird 1812 Pop-Up with 15 Series Nozzle&Assembly ea Hunter PGP-ADJ-Series Gear Driven Rotor and Swing Joint ea Hardie 700 Series-1" Control Valve Riser Assembly and Valve Box ea Febco 825Y-1-1/2" Backflow Preventer with Assembly ea Rainbird 44LRC Quick Coupling Valve and Swing Joint ea Drip Valve Assembly ea Irrigation Controller Dial- 14AB- Pedestal Mount ea 1-1/2" Class 200 B.E. Mainline(PVC) ft 1-1/2" Polyethylene 80 PSI-NSF Lateral ft 1"Class 200 B.E. PVC Lateral ft 14 Gauge UF UL Wire ft Pepco 3/4 Drip Tubing ft 2"Class 160 PVC Sleeving ft 4"Class 160 PVC Sleeving ft Agrifim Emitter IF-5, IF-10 ea Buckner 20933-1-1/2"Valve,Valve Box and Assembly ea Wilkin's 600 Series-1" PRV Valve Box and Assembly ea END OF SECTION 32 84 23 Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-9 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 23-10 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 90 00- PLANTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Furnish all labor,equipment,transportation and materials to complete the landscape planting as shown on the drawings and herein specified: A. Soil preparation,fine grading and top soil. B. Planting, mulching, and fertilizing of trees and shrubs. C. Staking of trees and shrubs. D. Preparation and planting of ground cover,sod lawn and wildflower carpet. 1.02 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Irrigation 1.03 GRADING The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining finished grades in all planting areas,and for executing and fine grading necessary for surface drainage and uniformity,or incidental to all planting operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Commercial Fertilizer shall be Best-Crop Maker,or equal in pelleted form, and shall be complete,of which part of the elements are derived from organic sources containing in available form by weight: Nitrogen, Phosphoric Acid,and Potash. If commercial fertilizer having this analysis is not obtainable, other commercial fertilizer may be used providing it meets with the approval of the Landscape Architect. B. Soil Amendment: Redwood,fir bark or cedar particles graded from 0 to 1/4 inch, 15%maximum proportion of 1/4/inch particle shall be acceptable. Materials shall be Nitrogen stabilized (1-0-0). Supply sample to the Landscape Architect within two(2)weeks of award of Contract with laboratory organic amendment analysis. This report shall include iron content and other information considered essential. The salinity level shall not exceed 3.5. C. Plant Backfill shall be a thorough mixture of two(2) parts soil from the hole,and one(1) part soil amendment. Mixture shall be free from rocks and clods. D. Iron Sulfate in dry form. E. Topsoil shall be 50%sandy loam and 50%fir bark incorporated at a depth of 8" in areas defined by Landscape Architect. F. Mulch: Shredded Cedar bark mulch, 1/4"to 3/4"applied 3" deep. Submit sample to the Landscape Architect for approval within two(2)weeks of award of Contract. G. Weed Killer shall be used as needed for specific weeds,and shall be harmless to the grass,vines,shrubs and trees. Arsenic, mercury and chlorinated hydrocarbons shall not be used under any circumstances. H. Turf Sod: Kentucky Bluegrass Fescue Mixture. I. All trees shall be staked with 3 green metal stakes per tree.Stakes for Aspen trees are green, 6' metal t-stake posts. Stakes for Spruce trees are green,3' metal t-stake posts extending approximately 8" out of the ground. Trees are to be guyed with wire and fastened to the tree with green fiber fabric straps. Aspen clumps to have main stems guyed. J. Plants shall be the variety, quantity and size indicated. When total quantities are tabulated,they shall be considered approximate, and are furnished for convenience only. 1. Quality and size shall conform to standards set forth in American Standard for Nursery Stock(ANSI 260.1)and or standards set forth in ALCC Specifications Handbook. Nursery-grown stock only shall be used, and which are free from insect pests and diseases. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PLANTING 32 90 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants,and certificates shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner,as required by law, before planting plants delivered from the outside the County in which they are to be planted. 3. All plants shall be true to type or name indicated, and shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the American Association of Nurserymen; however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the Landscape Architect,and his decision shall be final. 4. Plants shall be healthy,shapely, and well rooted;and roots shall show no evidence of having been rootbound, restricted or deformed. Root condition of plants in containers will be determined by removal of soil from the roots of not less than two(2) plants, nor more than 2%of the total number of plants of each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from a several sources,the roots of not less than two(2) plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective,the Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject the entire lot(s)of plants represented by the defective samples. All plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection shall be immediately disposed of off the site. 5. Each plant shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn. 6. Substitutions will not be permitted, except as follows: a. If proof is submitted to the Landscape Architect that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of nearest equivalent size or variety with an equitable adjustment of Contract Price. b. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing by the Contractor within thirty-five(35) days after the effective date of Notice to Proceed. 7. Trees shall have straight trunks with the leader intact, undamaged and uncut. All old abrasions and cuts shall be completely calloused over. 8. All trees and shrubs shall be measured when their branches are in normal position. Height and spread dimensions indicated refer to the main body of the plant, and not from branch or root tip to tip. Indicated sizes shall be before pruning. 9. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery,except upon approval of the Landscape Architect. 10. Cuts over 3/4 inch diameter shall be painted with an approved tree paint,covering all exposed, living tissue. Paint shall be waterproof, adhesive,and elastic, antiseptic,free from kerosene,coal tar, creosote or any other material injurious to the tree. No plant shall be bound with wire or rope which might damage the bark or break branches. 11. Contractor is to provide the name and location of the tree supplier for the Landscape Architects/Owners review and approval of trees prior to delivery. Plant materials shall also be subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect upon delivery to the site. 12. Aspen trees called out as clump form means that at least one of the individual tree stems in the clump needs to be the size called out for on the plans. The other stems in the clump shall be close in size and proportion to the dominant stem. 13. Spruce trees are to be Specimen Grade-A quality trees full in appearance with layered branches(not sheared to a solid Christmas Tree form), cone shape,with leader intact with-out bare spots. 14. Aspen and Cottonwood trees are to receive a Deer/Elk repellent consisting of Irish Spring soap shavings wrapped in a nylon stocking ball approximately 2" in diameter. Hang ball on string,one in each tree approximately 6 feet from the ground. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION A. Prior to any planting bed preparation or planting,finish grade all planting areas,fill as needed to remove surplus soil,and float areas to a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on the Plans. Slope all planting areas to drain. Scarify surfaces. Finished grades shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before any planting is done. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PLANTING 32 90 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. All planting areas shall be thoroughly wet down and sprinkler coverage and operation confirmed. Allow soil to dry so as to be workable, after which thoroughly cultivate to a depth of 6 inches and allow to dry out. C. Spread 10 Ibs. of iron sulfate evenly per 1,000 square feet of planting areas. Incorporate iron sulfate into top 6 inches of soil in shrub areas immediately after approval of the Landscape Architect. Iron sulfate may be incorporated into soil with soil amendment. Do not allow iron sulfate to stain pavement,wood or other surfaces on structures. D. Soil Amendment and Fertilizers: Spread evenly over all planting areas, including turf,ground cover,and shrub areas at the following rates: 1. Soil amendment: Sphagnum Peat Moss,6 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet. 2. Fertilizer: 25 Ibs. per 1,000 square feet. Incorporate into top 8 inches of soil. E. Scarify all planting areas that become compacted prior to planting. F. Rake all areas to remove rocks 1 inch or larger in size,sticks and debris. Drag to a smooth, even surface. Grade to form all swales, pitch to catch basins,street curbs,etc.,to insure proper surface drainage. G. For turf areas, lightly roll surface and reshape to level humps and hollows. Secure Landscape Architect's approval before placing sod. 3.02 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Mark tree and any B&B shrub locations using 12"wood stakes with colored flagging and size of plant material indicated with black waterproof marker. Locations shall be approved and/or adjusted by the Landscape Architect before plant holes are dug. Container shrub, perennials and groundcovers to be placed according to the plan. The landscape Architect will review and or adjust placement prior to planting. B. Dig pits circular in outline with vertical sides as follows: 1. One gallon containers: 18-inch diameter and 3"deeper than depth of container. 2. Five-gallon containers: 24-inch diameter and 6" deeper than depth of container. 3. Larger size materials: (B&B material,36"-box, 15-gal. etc.) 18"wider than the diameter of the container. C. After pits are dug, break sides to open wall of pit for root penetration. D. Backfill plant holes with backfill mix as specified,free from rocks,clods, or lumpy material. Backfill about 1/3 of the hole with mix; place plant and water before adding remainder of backfill. E. Set plants in backfill to such depth that the top of the plant ball will be 3 inches above finished grade. Remove wire basket and any twine from top 1/3 of rootball. Backfill rest of hole and soak thoroughly. F. Water backfill until saturated to the full depth of the hole. Hole shall drain completely within 1/2 hour. G. Build 3-foot diameter watering basins around trees and 2-foot diameter around shrubs and water to drain through root ball. Basins shall be formed with 6-inch high walls. H. Fertilize each tree and shrub immediately after planting, as follows: 1. One-gallon-can plant: 1/4 pint. 2. Five-gallon-can plant: 1/2 pint. 3. Fifteen-gallon-can and larger: 1/2 pint. I. Spread fertilizer evenly over surface of plant basin, and till into ground surface. In turf areas, spread around plant and work into the soil. Water immediately. 1. Fine grade planting areas to smooth, even surface with positive drainage and no rocks, clods,vegetative particles or other debris. 2. Spread 2"to 3"of bark mulch around tree and shrub basins and in shrub beds. 3.03 PLANTING SODDED LAWN A. Sod shall be defined as living,growing grass,consisting of blades,crowns, rhizomes, roots,and attached soil. Density of sod shall be such that the sod slabs may be handled, lifted,and moved without substantial breaking or tearing. Sod shall be essentially free of weeds and injurious insects when delivered. Sod shall be cut from mature, healthy turf fields with a sod cutter in even sized slabs which may be rolled or folded for transport; and Job No. 14LION-00-01 PLANTING 32 90 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 the slabs shall be reasonably uniform in thickness;and the turf evenly mowed prior to harvest. Average thickness of sod shall be 3/4 to 1 inch. B. Weeds and debris shall be removed. All areas shall be rough and finished graded, leaving finished grade approximately 1 inch lower than curbs,sidewalk,concrete paving blocks to accommodate sod thickness. Install irrigation system before finished grading. Shape and finish grading. C. Broadcast on all sod areas commercial fertilizer 6-20-20 at 10 Ibs. per 1,00 square feet(or as sod manufacture directs) prior to sod installation. D. Lightly roll sod area,tamp down area between concrete paving blocks to firm sod bed. E. Sod slabs shall be laid promptly after delivery to job site. In hot, dry or windy weather,the staked sod at job site shall be lightly sprinkled with water to prevent slab edges from excessive drying. Sod slab ends and sides must be butted together for a close fit without overlapping;stagger the ends. Sodded areas will be lightly rolled after a light initial watering,then irrigate heavily to assure water penetration in the soil to a depth of 8 inches. F. Cut sod into six(6) inch wide strips. Place between concrete paving blocks. Pay special attention to keep these strips moist after stripping. Strip as needed for installation. Install small square areas(10 feet each way)at a time,then water and treat as above. G. Sod should stop short at an appropriate distance from any existing trees. The area immediately around the crown should not be disturbed except for clean-up work. The exact line around trees shall be set by the Landscape Architect. H. Newly sodded areas will be kept moist at all times for ten (10)days following installation. Particular care is to be taken to assure even irrigation distribution on all areas of the sodded surfaces during hot,dry or windy weather. Excessive drying of the sod slab before it has rooted into the soil may result in turf damage. The turf should not be allowed to wilt. After(7)to(10)days,the sodded area will be mowed at normally recommended heights. If finish grade has settled during this period,or if the surface is uneven, an additional light rolling shall be carried out. I. Protect sod areas by erecting such fences, barriers,signs, etc. as necessary to prevent trespass. J. Selection of variety shall be determined on the basis of turf use,soil area,shade, maintenance and similar specific choices. The specific variety shall be selected by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Arch itect. 3.04 WATERING A. All plant materials shall be watered immediately after planting. After the first watering,water shall be applied to all plants as often and in sufficient amount as conditions may require to keep the plants in a healthy and vigorous growing condition until completion of the Contract. 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING A. From the time plants are planted until final acceptance of landscape installation, plants and lawns shall be watered,fertilized,and trash and debris shall be kept removed;weeds shall be controlled, and replacements shall be made;all as specified and full compensation for such work will be considered as included in the Contract Price. 3.06 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all trash, rubbish,construction and planting materials,scraps,etc.,from the site. Leave area in a neat, sightly condition. 3.07 PRE-MAINTENANCE PERIOD INSPECTION AND APPROVAL OF PLANTING A. Prior to commencement of the Planting Maintenance Period,the Contractor shall receive approval of the installed planting. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect a minimum of seven (7)days prior to the requested inspection. Before the inspection,the following conditions shall exist: 1. All construction work shall be completed. 2. All planted areas shall be neat and clean. Weeds shall be removed. 3. All plants shall be installed and must be healthy. Job No. 14LION-00-01 PLANTING 32 90 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 4. Tree stakes shall be straight. 3.08 FINAL PLANTING INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Final inspection for acceptance shall be made provided that all project improvements and corrective work have been completed. If all project improvements and corrective work are not completed,the Planting Maintenance shall continue, at no additional cost to the Owner, until all work has been completed. This condition will be waived by the Owner where an extension of the time has been granted in order to complete work beyond the time set forth in the Agreement. Before the inspection,the following conditions shall exist: 1. All construction work shall be completed. 2. All planted areas shall be neat and clean. Weeds shall be removed. 3. All plants shall be installed and must be healthy. 4. Trees and tree stakes shall be straight. 5. Plant basins shall be repaired and the job cleaned of all debris and construction materials. B. Written notice requesting inspection shall be submitted at least seven (7) days before the anticipated date. 3.09 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee all plant materials for one(1)year from date of final acceptance letter. B. Replace all dead plants not in a vigorous condition immediately as directed by the Landscape Architect. Plants used for replacement must be of the same kind and size as indicated on the drawings,and planted as outlined above. All replacement of plants shall be at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION 32 90 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PLANTING 32 90 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 PLANTING 32 90 00-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 32 92 00 - HYDROSEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Furnish all labor equipment,transportation and materials to complete the hydroseeding as shown on the drawings and herein specified: A. Hydroseed seed mixes as described in Tables 1 and 2. Hydroseed mixtures to areas as shown on the plans. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. SEED MIX: Native Dry Mountain Mix Available from Pawnee Butte Seed Company, 1-800-782-5947, Glen PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 METHODS A. In addition to seed mixes,add the following: Application rates per acre: 1188 Ibs. Biosol Organic Fertilizer 200 Ibs. Tackifier 200 Ibs. Wood Fiber Mulch 80 Bales Straw Mulch B. Seeding schedule may occur as site is ready or as directed by the owner C. Provide Erosion Control Blanket on all slopes greater than 2:1. Fabric to be used is Double Net Excelsior Blankets, installed as per manufactures instructions. Verify locations with Landscape Architect or Owners representative prior to installation. D. Hydroseeding Contractor responsible to include all seed mixture and biosol labels with monthly invoices. 3.02 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all trash, rubbish,scraps, etc.,from the site. Leave area in a neat,sightly condition. END OF SECTION 32 92 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HYDROSEEDING 32 92 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 HYDROSEEDING 32 92 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 33 00 00 - ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal, dewatering, backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits,vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television,electric and gas companies. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 31 10 00 2. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 Ibs each,and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company, the cable television company,the electric company and the gas company. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the systems they install by each of the respective utility companies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe,fittings, and vaults;or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials,concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat,falls below 35 degrees F,and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC): 2"-8",Schedule 40 PVC. Electric rated for electric application. B. Electric primary conduit supplied by Holy Cross Energy. C. Gas pipe to be supplied and placed by gas company. 2.02 VAULTS A. All switchgear,transformer,splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy. 2.03 BEDDING A. Granular material-3/4"screened rock. B. On-site 1-1/2" minus well graded screened material,free from organic materials,chunks of soil,frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. C. Use sand or 3/8" minus well graded screened material for gas line bedding. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the Utility Companies. Job No. 14LION-00-01ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS,AND GAS SYSTEMS 33 00 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil,acids,salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate-43% Water-5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate-3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete 1. Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates,cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete 1. Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled,stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local,state and federal governments, as applicable. 1. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench,which may be detrimental to human safety,to the pipe and appurtenances being installed,to existing utilities,to existing structures,or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes,cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material,or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure,then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed,the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING A. Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. Job No. 14LION-00-01ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS,AND GAS SYSTEMS 33 00 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. 3.06 PADS AND VAULTS A. Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.07 PULL STRING A. Pull string shall be labeled to identify which utility company or spare conduit the use of the conduit is intended fo r. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb,or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement,aggregate,or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain,and flowing water,for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4"screened rock or on-site screened material (if approved by Engineer)for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil,free from organic materials,chunks of soil,frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90%AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12"of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved,then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95%AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be o to 2%of optimum. Job No. 14LION-00-01ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS,AND GAS SYSTEMS 33 00 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to maximum rock dimension of 12". Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones,earth,sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements,or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95%AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. Prepare a shear step and replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559;consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved by the appropriate utility company or as directed by engineer. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards, lawns,and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began,and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.14 ASBUILTS A. Contractor shall provide field surveyed As-constructed drawings of the telephone,the cable television,the electric, irrigation and spare conduits, and gas, in electronic format. B. The Contractor shall field survey these systems and appurtenances after installation but prior to burying the facilities. C. Contractor shall certify in writing to Engineer that the installation has been accomplished in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by the Owner and that the As-constructed drawings represent an accurate representation of such work. END OF SECTION 33 00 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION,CONDUITS,AND GAS SYSTEMS 33 00 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 33 11 16-WATER DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding,and installation of pipe,valves,fittings,fire hydrants,vaults, service lines, curb stops,valve boxes, pressure reducing valves, meters,and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 31 1000 2. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation;All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 Ibs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for water lines as adopted by Eagle River Water and Sanitation District.The Contractor shall coordinate and obtain District approval of the installed system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Service Lines 6. Meters B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials,concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. D. Certificates: Submit copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS-ALL MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO THE LOCAL WATER DISTRICT'S SPECIFICATIONS. 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS All ductile iron pipe and fittings used shall meet the latest AWWA Specifications. A. Pipe 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151,working pressure 350 psi, minimum thickness class 52,with cement-mortar lining,AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Pipe joints, push-on type utilizing rubber ring gasket,AWWA C111. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900,working pressure 200 psi,with push-on joints ASTM D1869. six inch (6"), eight inch (8") and twelve inch (12") PVC water lines shall be Class 200 dimension ratio 14(DR 14). PVC pipe may be used only in corrosive areas and in the Edwards Metropolitan District provided the static water pressure does not exceed 170 psi. Installation of PVC pipe in corrosive areas must have prior written authorizations from the District. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3. Steel Pipe: All steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200 Standard for Steel Water Pipe-eight inches(8")and larger-and AWWA M-11 Steel Pipe Manual. Working pressure shall be 350 psi. All material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates of Structural Quality or ASTM A36 Standard Specifications for Structural Steel. For mill-type pipe,all material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. All fittings shall be fabricated from tested pipe and dye checked in accordance with AWWA C208. All steel pipe and fittings shall be prepared, primed, lined, coated, painted or wrapped as hereinafter specified: a. Exterior Surfaces-Tape coating system conforming to AWWA C209 and C214. b. Interior Surfaces-Cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C205. 4. HDPE Pipe:With authorization from the engineer and approval by the District,this pipe may be used as an alternative in those applications where "hot soils" are determined to be found. 5. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined,AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating shall be a minimum of one-mil (1)thick. 6. loint Restraint Devices: loint restraint devices shall be made of ductile iron. Twist-off nuts,sized the same as the tee-head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of restraining devices. Joint restraint devices shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Series 1100 or 1700 or Uni-Flange Corp.Series 1400 for new pipe restraint and EBAA Iron Sales, Megalug Series 1100SD or 1100HD or Uni-Flange UFR1300-C or UFR1390-C for existing pipe restraint or accepted equal. 7. Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall be made of ductile iron, mechanical joint, long body. Sleeves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Where a solid sleeve is used to join two pieces of pipe of the same diameter, a "wedding band" is to be inserted between the two pipes inside of the solid sleeve. B. Fittings 1. Fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings cement-mortar lined,AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. 2.02 VALVES The valves shall be the same size as the main. A. Gate Valves Gate valves shall be Mueller A-2360,Waterous AFC-2500 or AVK Series 25 with an epoxy-coated interior and exterior cast iron or ductile iron body, pressure rating 250 psi, bronze-mounted,AWWA C509. Resilient seat (wedge) rubber encapsulated gate,flanged or mechanical joint as required. Valves with ring stem seal,two-inch (2")square operating nut,open left must be used. Resilient wedge gate valves on all pipe sizes up to and including 12 inches are required. Direction of Opening: All valves are to open left. Specifications: Gate valves in sizes through twenty-four inches(24")shall be of the iron body, non-rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type manufactured to equal or exceed ANSI/AWWA Standard C509-80 and the specific requirements outlined in these Special Provisions. Valves shall have a bottle-tight working water pressure of 250 psi with zero leakage and be capable of flow in either direction. End connections shall be mechanical joint and shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Valve openings shall be furnished and installed with valve stacks and covers in accordance with locate water district specifications. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Valve body, bonnet,stuffing box and disc cast shall be manufactured of either gray or ductile iron. The exterior of the valve shall have epoxy coating per AWWA standards,applied to the ferrous parts of the valve, except for finished or seating surfaces. All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with a two-part thermosetting epoxy coating. The coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to water, protect all seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent build-up of scale or tuberculation. The valve shall be structurally designed so that if excessive torque is applied to the stem in the closing direction, with the disc seated,failure of the pressure retaining parts does not occur. Stem failure under such conditions shall occur externally at such a point as to enable the stem to be safely turned in the opening direct by use of a pipe wrench. B. Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be Tyler 668-5, D&L M-9042 (with a M-9073 extension), or East Jordan 8550(with a 8560 extension). All buried valves shall be provided with a six-inch (6")cast iron,valve box,screw type. The valve box shall be of a design which will not transmit shock or stress to the valve and which shall have enough extension capability to be raised to final street grade. The valve box shall be cast iron,adjustable screw type,with minimum five-inch (5")diameter shaft provided with cover, marked "Water". C. Pressure Reducing Valves All pressure reducing valves shall be CLA-VAL 92G-01ABXCKDS as appropriate and determined by the Engineer. In addition,the PRV is to have the following features: 1. Pressure reducing pilotry with pressure control ranges for correct valve operation where installed. Pilot material shall be bronze body only, brass and stainless-steel trim. Tubing shall be copper. 2. Epoxy coated interior and exterior suitable for potable water contact. 3. Dura-clean stem design shall be installed. 4. Valve opening shall be regulated by means of a "speed control valve"for flow control. S. Ductile iron,globe body, minimum 150-pound ANSI flanges or as may be required by system pressures, bronze trim. 6. Pilotry flow-clean strainer and minimum of three(3) pilot cocks. D. Pressure Reducing Valves-Bypass Line The PRV shall be CLA-VAL 90-01 valve,sized appropriately to allow low flow to bypass around the main PRV. The valve shall have a ductile iron globe body with screwed ends. Pilotry is to be equipped with a flow wye strainer and isolation cocks. E. Air Release/Vacuum Valves Shall be an APCO air vacuum combination valve sized by the engineer as manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or an equivalent valve that has been approved by the local water district. The valve shall have a cast iron body,cover and baffle with a stainless-steel float. The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover,without distortion and shall be easily removed, if necessary. Air release/vacuum valves shall be installed at all high points in the system on any main line extensions. F. Check Valves Golden-Anderson Silent Check Valve(Figure 280). Bronze mounted,AWWA C508. High strength cast iron gate with bronze gate ring. Bronze, back-faced seat ring. Solid bronze Y-shaped hinge. 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion A423 Mountain Hydrant,which conform to AWWA Standard C502 with a working pressure of 250 psi. They also shall be six-inch (6") mechanical joint inlet, minimum 5%inches, compression-type main valve that closes with pressure,two 2%z hose nozzles, one 4%-inch pump nozzle, nozzle threads ANSI B26. Nozzles must be easily replaceable in the field with standard tools. Operating and cap nuts must be 1%z-inch, Number 17 National Standard hex main valve which open to the LEFT. An arrow cast on top of hydrant shall indicate direction opening. These shall be a breakable section that permits clean break at or near ground level, preventing water loss in case of breakage. Working parts must be removable for maintenance or Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 repair without excavation. Also required are operating mechanism non-wetting,oil reservoir lubricated,with O-ring seals and barrel drain bronze mounted with at least two (2)outlets,which operate automatically with main valve. Fire hydrants must be installed at the end of all main lines. Finish grade of the fire hydrant shall be twelve inches(12") below the flange for final grade and paving inspection. B. Fire Hydrant Extensions New Installations: All new installations shall be installed at the standard 7-foot to 9-1/2 foot of cover measured from the top of the pipe to finish grade. All fire hydrants shall consist of a single solid shaft. No fire hydrant extensions will be allowed. Any special circumstance will require written approval from the local water district prior to installation. Existing Fire Hydrants: No more than one(1),two-foot(2') long,fire hydrant grade extension (extension section) shall be used or installed on fire hydrant assemblies. All hydrants shall be installed with a guard valve to isolate the hydrant for repair while maintaining service to main. No service line taps will be allowed between the guard valve and hydrant. Guard valves shall be installed on the tee off of the water main. The maximum distance from the guard valve to the fire hydrant shall not exceed fifty feet(50') Fire hydrants shall be installed at the end of all dead-end mains. C. Fire Hydrant Marker Flags Install fire hydrant marker flags for all newly constructed fire hydrants. The required flag is a Nordic Flex Flag, FF2-72 inches. D. Fire Hydrant Depth of Bury Fire hydrant dept of bury will conform to Manufacturer's requirements. 2.04 SERVICE LINES A. Copper Tubing 1. Type"K",ASTM B88. Connections to be compression or silver soldered. B. Corporation Stops 1. Mueller 300 Ball Valve No. B-25008 or B25028,AWWA C800. All brass construction with compression connection. 2. McDonald No.4701 BT or 4704 BT,AWWA C800. 3. Ford cc/comp FB-1000-G 4. Ford IPS/comp FB-1100-G C. Curb Stops 1. Mueller 300 Ball Curve Valve No. 25209, Ford 644 with compression connections,AWWA C-800. 2. McDonald Ball Curb Valve-6100 T,AWWA C800. D. Curb Boxes 1. For curb stops up to 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid or McDonald 5601 with 5601L lid. For curb stops larger than 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid and Tyler 6500 Series Enlarged Base#144809 or McDonald 5603 with 5601L lid. Shaft diameter shall be 1"and the top of the shaft shall be a minimum of 18"from final grade and lid. E. Saddles 1. Ductile Iron Saddle: Mueller DE2A,JCM-402,Smith & Blair 313, Ford F202, McDonald 3825,3826 or equal and approved by the District. The saddle must have a double flat strap design with ductile iron body. Said saddle must conform to AWWA C800. 2.05 METERS Rockwell SR Compound Meter A. All services are required to have a positive displacement Rockwell meter with ECR touch-read pad. Conformance per AWWA C702 Standard for Cold Water Meters-Compound Type. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. SR 2. SR2 3. Compound 4. Meter type will be determined by the District. B. Installation must be in freeze-proof, accessible area. C. A telephone jack must be installed within five feet(5')of the meter to provide for future automated meter reading. D. Installation will be near floor level in a horizontal position. Isolation valves shall be located before the PRV and after the meter(i.e.valve, PRV, meter,valve). E. Customer shall install wire from meter location to touch-read pad prior to meter installation. F. Touch-read pad will be located on street side of building,five feet(5')above the ground in an accessible location free from snow. G. Master Meter Vaults: All master meter vaults will be required to have a six inch (6") Rockwell turbine meter with a two inch (2") positive displacement low flow meter. The Contractor will be required to submit a piping schematic to the District and Engineer prior to any installation. Refer to Details for additional information. 2.06 BEDDING A. Two types of bedding material are allowed:Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1%z inch maximum, and 100 100 maximum of 10%of pipe diameter to% inch No.4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to fill voids 90%of Standard Proctor placed Requirement below pipe haunches at+/-3%of Optimum Moisture B. The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1% inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter,whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil,organic material,frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. C. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321,Class IA bedding material.The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No.4(4.75 millimeter)screen,and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200(75 micrometer)screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line.Where future excavation is anticipated,the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration.The District may require soil or select import.Where groundwater may be present,the use of screened rock for bedding is prohibited. D. Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB,Class II,or Class III bedding material.The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No.4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen.Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria.The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at+/-3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor(ASTM D698,AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No.4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. E. Flow-fill,a%z sack(50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability,and unconfined stability is desired. F. Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials,frozen matter, debris,or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications,Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. G. In specific areas,such as where access is extremely limited,the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1%z inches minus well-graded screened material,free from organic materials, chunks of soil,frozen material,debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.07 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over six inches(6") in diameter in top twelve inches(12")of trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than twelve inches(12") in diameter shall be backfilled in the trench. 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE A. The installation of"blue" marking tape is required on all water mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately twenty-four inches(2')above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 1. Four(4) mil thick PVC material. 2. Solid "blue"color with black lettering 3. Six inches(6") in width 2.09 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials shall be furnished from sources agreed to by the Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil,acids,salt,alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.10 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate-43% Water-5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate-3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 1. Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates,cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete 1. Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.11 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A. Install polyethylene encasement on all Ductile Iron Pipe unless noted otherwise on plans.A polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105,with the following additional requirements. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type 1,Class A,Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D-1248. 2.12 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS A. Concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be sized for the internal pipe pressure and soil bearing capacity. Standard sizes and shapes of thrust blocks and anchors are shown on the details. No thrust block shall be smaller than that size required for an eight inch (8") main. B. Thrust reaction blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand and 5 parts stone, and having a compressive strength of not less than 3000 P.S.I.after 28 days. C. Megalug joint restraint devices shall be used in conjunction with thrust blocks. D. All thrust blocks shall be formed in accordance with the local water district's specifications. See detail. E. The Water District shall inspect all thrust blocks. 2.13 PRESSURE REDUCER VAULTS A. All proposed installations shall be"factory-built"vault including the appropriately sized main line inlet and outlet. B. PRV installations shall include an appropriately sized manual bypass with an approved gate valve;two (2) appropriately sized CLA-VAL Model 90G-01ABK pressure reducing valves with approved isolating gate valves. C. All vault installations shall include a 120/240-volt power panel; all assembled,tested and painted. Minimum dimensions of the vault shall be 7' (H)x 8' (L)x 6' (W),skid-mounted capsule with Bilco Model MNB-50 access hatch, ladder,fluorescent light,gravity drain in sump, dehumidifier,240 volt heater,exhaust fan and two(2) magnesium anode packs. All proposed vault installations must be pre-approved by the local water district. 2.14 CASING SPACERS A. Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Trench Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled,stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments,as applicable. 1. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench,which may be detrimental to human safety,to the pipe and appurtenances being installed,to existing utilities,to existing structures,or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes,cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed,the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING A. Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Deliver, handle,store,and install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600,AWWA C603,and ASTM D2321. 1. Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefully lower all pipe,fittings,valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying, place no debris,tools,clothing or other materials in pipe. 2. Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction an all costs included in contract prices. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug,or other means approved by Engineer. B. Deflection of Pipe: Pipe deflections are discouraged. Do not exceed 50%of the deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer. C. Pipe Jointing 1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves,fittings,or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. 2. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8"of spigot and inside bell to remove oil,grit,tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid,with thick edge toward gland. a. Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland along pipe into position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all parts of gland. Pipe Size Bolt Size Range of Torque Inches Inches ft.-Lb. 3" 5/8 45-60 4"-24" 3/4 75-90 3. Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4" of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit,tar,and other matter. Place gasket in bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to manufacturer's jointing mark. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 4. Flanged Joints:Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil,grease,and other material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten blots so pressure on gasket is uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. Ifjoints leak when hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts. D. Thrust Restraint: Concrete thrust blocks are required. 3.05 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.06 TAPPING PIPE A. Use experienced workmen with tools in good repair and proper adapters for size of pipe being tapped. Drilling and tapping machines proposed for tapping directly into pipe agreed to by Engineer. If tap is improperly installed with leakage around threads or, in opinion of Engineer, connection is substandard, provide tap saddle at Contractors'expense. If damage to pipe cannot be repaired by saddle, install approved repair sleeve over injured portion and retap at Contractor's expense. B. Install corporation stop and couplings,flanged coupling adapters, and service saddles to provide clean seat. Wipe gaskets clean before installation. Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated for installation on pipe ends. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressively from opposite sides until all bolts have uniform tightness. Use torque wrenches or other approved equipment. 3.07 SERVICE LINE A. Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings,from main line to curb stop or meter, in shortest direct route by continuous section of pipe with no splices. Locate 10' horizontally from all sewer lines. Terminate near center of each lot or as shown on drawings. 3.08 VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Carefully inspect valve and hydrant before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve and hydrant to determine parts in proper working order,with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and securely braced into place. B. Set hydrant with bury line at finish grade,with hose nozzles parallel to and pumper nozzle facing pavement, at least 6" behind curb or sidewalk and 18"from property line or as shown on drawings. Provide drainage pit having 9 square feet of surface area and 2'of depth below seep hole. Backfill pits with 1-1/2"washed rock to 6" above barrel drain hole. Provide thrust blocking at bowl of each hydrant as shown on drawings. Do not obstruct barrel drain hole. Hydrants and valves backfilled by installing 1-1/2"aggregate road base to subgrade. Valve boxes centered and plumb over the operating nut. Valve boxes supported by bricks or other means to prevent any shock or stress transmitted to pipe or valve. Set valve box covers to just below subgrade level to prevent damage during construction of surfacing if applicable. Adjust to grade of surfacing. 3.09 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS A. Install standard plugs or caps at dead ends of all fittings and pipe in accordance with drawings. If dead end is not to be extended, place water service line as near dead end as practical. 3.10 VAULTS A. Construct vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-9 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.11 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement,aggregate,or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change,from rain,and flowing water for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.12 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil,free from organic materials, chunks of soil,frozen material,debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1'above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 85 to 90%,AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over 6" in diameter in top 12"trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower boulders larger than 12" in diameter into trench until backfill is 4'over top of pipe. 3.13 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs,or compaction is not being achieved,then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95%,AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock,to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth,sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with a cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95%AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these Specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559;consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Hydrostatic Testing 1. General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test two or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests. Furnish the following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer: 2 Graduated containers Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-10 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is partially backfilled and joints are left exposed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled,slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1/2 times working pressure,calculated for low point of test section,or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for two hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end of test,operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage. 3. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than: ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000'OF PIPE IN GPH Avg.Test Nominal Pipe Diameter-in. Pressure psi 6 8 10 12 18 200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35 *For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20' nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters,allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 ft. 3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING A. General: In accordance with AWWA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules and sodium hypochlorite solutions. B. Chlorine-water solution method: Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe-by Diameter Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal. 4 .013 .16 6 .030 .36 8 .054 .65 10 .085 1.02 12 .120 1.44 16 .217 2.60 Induce chlorine solution into pipeline at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine. Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-11 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipeline for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period,chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours,flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure,at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer. 3.17 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards, lawns,and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began,and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.18 ASBUILTS A. Contractor shall provide field surveyed As-constructed drawings of the water distribution system to the standards and format of the District. B. The Contractor shall field survey the water system and appurtenances after installation but prior to burying the facilities. C. Contractor shall certify in writing to Engineer that the installation has been accomplished in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by the District and that the As-constructed drawings represent an accurate representation of such work. END OF SECTION 33 11 16 Job No. 14LION-00-01 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16-12 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 33 31 13 - SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding,and installation of pipe, manholes, service wyes, service lines, force mains and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 33 10 00 2. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a CAT 375 backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket,and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District.The Contractor shall coordinate and obtain District approval of the installed system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe,fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials,concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat,falls below 35 degrees F,and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC): 4"-15",ASTM D3034,Type PSM,SDR 35; 18"-27",ASTM F679. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 20'. B. Ductile Iron: AWWA C151,Class 52. Push-on joints. Poly-lined or Griffin "Sewper Coat"ASTM A746. C. Yelomine: Restrained joint PVC pressure pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2241"Standard Specifications for PVC, pressure rated pipe(SDR Series)". D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900,working pressure 200 psi with push-on joints ASTM D1869. Transition coupling from SDR35 to C-900, pressure pipe shall be Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150 and ASTM3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturer's specifications. 2.02 MANHOLES A. Manhole bases: Precast concrete ASTM C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete(wetcast)with the lip outside with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Rings and Covers: Cast iron,ASTM A48 with a flat lid with the lettering"Sewer"cast on the cover. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 255 Ibs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. H520 traffic loading. D&L A-1043 or accepted equal. D. Manhole Grade Rings: Precision Cover Systems, Inc. (PC51)fully adjustable manhole covers with variable grade rings that adjust to meet different roadway heights and grades will be installed where required by District. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 E. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of a vertical load of 800 pounds and a pullout load of 1500 pounds(ASTM-C478),six inches(6")from face of manhole. The steps shall meet industry standards or equal and be plastic coated. F. Manhole Joint Sealant: Double Rub-R-Nek with primer. One inch (1")on 48"-inch diameter manholes; 1%-inch on all larger numbers. 2.03 BEDDING A. Two types of bedding material are allowed:Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1%:inch maximum,and 100 100 maximum of 10%of pipe diameter to%z inch No.4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No.200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to fill voids 90%of Standard Proctor Requirement below pipe haunches placed at+/-3%of Optimum Moisture B. The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1%Z inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter,whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material,frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. C. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed,angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321,Class IA bedding material.The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No.4(4.75 millimeter)screen,and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200(75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line.Where future excavation is anticipated,the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration and the use of screened rock is prohibited in these applications. See sewer pipe bedding detail (S-10). D. Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB,Class II,or Class III bedding material.The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No.4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen.Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria.The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at+/-3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor(ASTM D698,AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No.4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. E. Flow-fill, a%z sack(50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials,frozen matter, debris,or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications,Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. In specific areas,such as where access is extremely limited,the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1% inches minus well-graded screened material,free from organic materials, chunks of soil,frozen material,debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil,acids,salt,alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate-43% Water-5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate-3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete 1. Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates,cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete 1. Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.06 TRACER WIRE A. Tracer wire shall be ten (10)gauge insulated copper wire and be required on all curve-linear applications. 2.07 MARKETING/LOCATING DISK A. The District will provide 3M "Green" marking disks to the contractor. The contractor shall ensure their correct installation. 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE A. The installation of"green" marking tape is required on all sewer mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately two feet(2')above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 1. 4-mil thick PVC material 2. Solid green color with black lettering 3. Six inches(6") in width Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 2.09 CASING SPACERS A. Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. B. Restrained casing spacers shall be provided at all pipe joints. In addition, casing spacers shall be installed every ten feet(10')of the pipeline to support the pipe barrel and the weight of its contents. Restrained casing spacers shall be Uni-Flange Series UFRC51300 or URFCS1390, or an approved equal restrained joint device and Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company, Model CCM casing spacers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled,stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local,state and federal governments, as applicable. 1. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench,which may be detrimental to human safety,to the pipe and appurtenances being installed,to existing utilities,to existing structures,or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes,cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material,or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure,then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed,the subgrade shall be accepted by the District. 3.03 BEDDING A. Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Pipe installation may be lamped daily by Engineer. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations,continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 C. Wyes and Risers for Service Connections: Angle upward so 1/8 bend connected to fitting will make service line invert equal to inside crown of sewer main. Where elevation of top of service is more than 12' below finished grade, install riser pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.06 WATER LINE CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition covelings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.07 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction,set top of cone so maximum of six,two-inch reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE A. Make connections to existing manholes,where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.09 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES A. Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings,from main line to house service, in shortest direct route. Locate 10'from all water lines. Terminate 5'from lowest corner of lot or as shown on drawings. Where wyes have not been installed in main sewer,tap by machine drilling hole in main, B. sized to fit saddle for service line. Each wye or drilled tap and saddle shall be inspected prior to backfilling. Service line minimum grade of 1/4" per foot. If service line is to be stopped at property line, place 6-foot steel fence post at end,extending 2'above finished ground. Place watertight plug in end of service line. 3.10 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb,or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement,aggregate or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water,for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing,cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.11 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil,free from organic materials, chunks of soil,frozen material,debris,or other Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1'above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90%AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12"of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.12 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved,then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95%AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones,earth,sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3. Trenches outside road right-of-way: Compact to 95%AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. 3.13 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements,or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95%AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559;consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct infiltration or exfiltration test for each section between manholes. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Testing may be required during course of work where infiltration appears to be grater than maximum allowable, or quality of work is questionable. No sewer line will be accepted where water tightness tests show leakage exceeding 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day. Flush and clean sewer line prior to testing,wetting pipe,and cleaning out debris. Plug all pipe outlets to resist test pressure. 2. Infiltration Test: In high ground water table installation only. Plug upper manhole to determine leakage in section of line between consecutive manholes. Record quantity of water collected in time period to calculate infiltration rate. 3. Exfiltration Test by Air: Test each section of pipe between consecutive manholes to determine test duration for section by computation from Air Test Tables. Pressure-holding time is based on an average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge or a drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi gauge. Add air until internal air pressure of sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gauge. After internal pressure of approximately 4.0 psi is obtained,allow time for air pressure to stabilize. Pressure will normally show some drop until temperature of air in test section stabilizes. When pressure has stabilized and is at or above starting test pressure of 3.5 psi gauge, commence test. Before starting test, pressure may be allowed to drop to 3.5 psi. Record drop in pressure for test period. If pressure has dropped more than 1.0 psi gauge during test line has failed. Test Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-6 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 may be discontinued when prescribed test time has been completed even though 1.0 psi drop has not occurred. ASTM C828"Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers". Pipe Size Time Inches Minutes 4 2-1/2 6 4 8 5 10 6-1/2 12 7-1/2 15 9-1/2 18 12 21 14 24 15-1/2 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards, lawns,and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began,and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.16 ASBUILTS A. Contractor shall provide field surveyed As-constructed drawings of the sanitary sewer collection system to the standards and format of the District. B. The Contractor shall field survey the sanitary sewer system and appurtenances after installation but prior to burying the facilities. C. Contractor shall certify in writing to Engineer that the installation has been accomplished in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by the District and that the As-constructed drawings represent an accurate representation of such work. END OF SECTION 33 31 13 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-7 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 Job No. 14LION-00-01 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 33 31 13-8 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 SECTION 33 40 00- STORM DRAINAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of culverts, pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, underdrains, irrigation ditches, channelization,detention storage,siphons and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 31 10 00 2. Topsoil: Section 31 14 13.23 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 Ibs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Precast Manholes 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames,Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials,concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F.at time of placing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14 B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76,circular;ASTM 506,arch;ASTM 507,vertical or horizontal elliptical. Class pipe as shown on drawings. C. Concrete End Section: Same ASTM specification as pipe. Equivalent in area as circular pipe. D. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Arches: AASHTO M36,gauge as shown on drawings. Bands shall conform to following: Pipe Size Corrugations Number . Bolts Inches 2-2/3"x 1/2" 3"x 1" 6-30 7" - 2 ea 36-60 12" 14" 3 ea 66-120 24" 20" 5 ea Thickness of band one gauge less than pipe but not less than 16 gauge. E. Corrugated Steel Pipe End Section: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as corrugated steel pipe. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00-1 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 F. Bituminous Coating: Where required on corrugated steel pipe and fittings,AASHTO M190,Type A,with minimum thickness of 0.03". Coupling bands fully coated. G. HDPE Pipe: ADS N-12 WT. Pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular corrugations. AASHTO M274,Type S or ASTM F2306. 2.02 UNDERDRAIN PIPE A. Corrugated Steel: AASHTO M36 Type III. Holes 3/8" double row each side of pipe for 6"-10"size pipe. Triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. Spaced in center of each depressed corrugation nearest to center pipe. Install hole row each side of pipe for 6"-10" pipe;triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. B. Rigid PVC Schedule 40. C. Flexible Polypropelene or Polyethylene/Hancor. 2.03 PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Corrugated Steel Units: Conform to drawing dimensions,AASHTO M36. Bituminous coating when specified, AASHTO M190,Type A. Steps fabricated into units. B. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings,ASTM C478 and C789,wall "B",wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. 2.04 MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM -C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron,ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 Ibs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. D. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in the surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 Ibs.6"from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. 2.05 SLOTTED DRAIN A. AASHTO M36 with grate assembly,ASTM A123. Joint and couplers of ring compression type. Where required, expanded wire mesh attached across top of drain opening. Fittings provided with annular ends for hugger-type bands. 2.06 FRAMES,GRATES,COVERS,AND STEP A. Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. 1. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. 2. Carbon-Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. 3. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536. 4. Structural Steel: AASHTO M183 and ASTM A283,Grade B. Galvanizing,where specified,AASHTO M111. 2.07 BEDDING A. Pipe and culvert-roadbase, percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 3/4", 100; No.4, 30-65; No.8,25-55; No. 200,3-12. B. Underdrain-washed gravel: percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1", 100%;3/4",95-100%; No.4, 0-5%. 2.08 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sources approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement,Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps, caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00-2 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil,acids,salt,alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.09 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates,cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned, mixed,and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled,stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local,state and federal governments, as applicable. 1. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Engineer. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM,EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL A. If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes,cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material,or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure,then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed,the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING OTHER THAN UNDERDRAINS A. Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for full width of trench. B. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five(5)times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Remove all loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00-3 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 avoid any voids. Repair bituminous coating damage using similar coating material. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill operation shall not exceed 3%of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 90%AASHTO T99 and continue to 1'over top of pipe. C. Concrete Pipe: Extend bedding around bell where bell and spigot pipe is used. Place pipe on bedding as shown on drawings. Place remaining bedding along pipe sides with no voids. Compact backfill to 95%AASHTO T99 and continue to 1'over pipe. D. HDPE Pipe: Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS recommended installation guidelines, with the exceptions that minimum cover in traffic areas for 24-inch through 48-inch shall be one foot and for 60-inch diameters,the minimum cover shall be 2-feet in single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of ADS Class 1 or Class 2 (minimum 98%SPD) material. E. Underdrain Pipe: 1. General: Install to lines and grades shown on drawings. Extend underdrain material a minimum of 6"over top of pipe. Cover underdrain material for entire width of trench with filter fabric. If shown on drawings, line trench with fabric before installing pipe and underdrain material. 2. Concrete Pipe: Install with bell resting on trench bottom facing up grade,with underdrain material supporting pipe. 3. Corrugated Steel or PVC Pipe: Holes or perforations placed down with maximum 1" underdrain material under pipe. Joint according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SLOTfED DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with drawings. Trench as narrow as possible and backfill to create uniform foundation side support. Install true to line and grade. 3.06 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity,so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction,set top of cone so maximum of six-two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.07 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE A. Make connections to existing manholes,where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb,or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement,aggregate,or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, or flowing water,for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing,cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00-4 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean,free from organic materials, chunks of soil,frozen material,debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1'above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 95%AASHTO T99,at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12"of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs,or required compaction is not being achieved,then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95%AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominantly of rock,to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones,earth,sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast-in-place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1/4". Install forms so all finished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast-in-place or precast units, in accordance with drawings. When required,set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe,with bench to stand on. C. Frames,Grates,Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. D. Trash Guards: Install in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95%AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559;consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. 3.14 TESTING A. The Contractor shall video camera (TV)all installed storm sewer pipe prior to final paving and/or other final surface treatments being completed.A copy of the videotaping with a listing of the type and location of all irregularities shall be provided for review and approval. Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00-5 GORMAN &COMPANY, INC. Lions Ridge 2014.03.14 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs,gutters, utilities,fences, irrigation ditches,yards, lawns,and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began,and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. 3.16 ASBUILTS A. Contractor shall provide field surveyed As-constructed drawings of the drainage system to the standards and format of the Owner. B. The Contractor shall field survey the storm sewer and drainage facilities and appurtenances after installation but prior to burying the facilities. C. Contractor shall certify in writing to Engineer that the installation has been accomplished in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by the Owner and that the As-constructed drawings represent an accurate representation of such work. END OF SECTION 33 40 00 Job No. 14LION-00-01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00-6